Na 01-1a-503 Antifriction Bearings

NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24
T.O. 44B-1-122
TECHNICAL MANUAL
MAINTENANCE OF AERONAUTICAL
ANTIFRICTION BEARINGS
FOR
ORGANIZATIONAL, INTERMEDIATE AND DEPOT

MAINTENANCE LEVELS
THIS REVISION INCLUDES IRAC 2.
N00421-98-D-1339
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C. Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and

their contractors to protect publications required for official use or for administrative or
operational purposes only, determined on 31 December 1988. Other requests for this
document shall be referred to Commanding Officer, Naval Air Technical Data and Engineering
Service Command, Naval Air Station North Island, P.O. Box 357031, Building 90 Distribution,
San Diego, CA 92135-7031.
DESTRUCTION NOTICE – For unclassified, limited documents, destroy by any method that
will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.
Published by Direction of Commander, Naval Air Systems Command
0801LP1015703
15 February 2002
NATEC ELECTRONIC MANUAL

NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Insert latest changed pages; dispose of superseded pages in accordance with applicable regulations.
NOTE: On a changed page, the portion of the test affected by the latest change is indicated by a vertical line, or other change
symbol in the outer margin of the page. Changes in illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands. Changes to wiring diagrams
are indicated by shaded areas.
Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . 15 February 2002

(IRAC 1 Prev inc, IRAC 2 inc.)
Total number of pages in this manual is 580, consisting of the following:
Page # Change Page # Change Page # Change

No. No. No. No. No. No.
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 8-1 – 8-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 17-1 – 17-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

A ......................... 0 9-1 – 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 17-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
i – xxxiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 9-8 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 18-1 – 18-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
xxxiv Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 10-1 – 10-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 A-1 – A-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-1 – 1-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 11-1 – 11-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 A-42 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
1-10 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 12-1 – 12-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 B-1 – B-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-1 – 2-27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 13-1 – 13-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 B-114 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
2-28 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 14-1 – 14-47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 C-1 – C-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
3-1 – 3-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 14-48 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 D-1 – D-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
4-1 – 4-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 15-1 – 15-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 D-8 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
5-1 – 5-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 15-14 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Index 1 – Index 27 . . . . . . . . . 0
6-1 – 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 16-1 – 16-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Index 28 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
7-1 – 7-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 16-4 Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
# Zero in this column indicates an original page.
A
NAVAIR 01–1A–503
16 February 2002
NAVAIR 01–1A–503; CONTAINS A PRINTING ERROR. REMOVE AND REPLACE TITLE AND “A“ PAGE
WITH ATTACHED NEW TITLE AND “A” PAGE.
Place this notice behind the title page after incorporation.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page Section Page
I INTRODUCTION 1-57. Qualifying Bearings to a Stock

Number or Drawing . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-58. Processing of Bearings By
Depot Level Activities . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-4. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-59. Processing of Bearings
1-6. Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 by Intermediate Level
1-8. Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-9. Depot Level Maintenance 1-60. Returning Used Bearings
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 to Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-10. Intermediate and Organizational 1-61. Disposition of Surveyed
Level Maintenance Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Level Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-62. Return of Bearings to a
1-11. Use of Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Service Bearing Technical
1-34. Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Repair Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-36. Proposed Manual Changes . . . . 1-2 1-64. Receiving Inspection of
1-39. Policies Affecting Rolling and New Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Plain Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-67. Special Bearing Inspection
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1-40. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-68. Bearing Removal Policies . . . . . . 1-7
1-41. Engineering Responsibility . . . . . 1-3
1-69. Major Overhaul (Complete
1-43. Bearing Processing Overhaul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Responsibility (Level 1) . . . . . . 1-3
1-72. Limited Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-44. Training Requirements . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-73. Standard Depot Level
1-45. Certification of Personnel . . . . . . 1-3 Maintenance (SDLM) . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-46. Engineering Responsibility for 1-74. Inspect-Repair as Necessary
Refurbishment/Honing (IRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-75. Overage Ready-For-Issue
1-47. Bearing Refurbishment (RFI) Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 1-76. Low Time Components . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-48. Bearing Procurement
Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 II GENERAL INFORMATION
1 49. Prime Contractor Controlled 2-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 2-3. Bearing Terminology . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1-50. Complete Bearing 2-6. Classification of Bearings . . . . . . 2-1
Manufacturer’s Part Number 2-8. Radial Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
(No Prime Contractor
2-9. Single Row, Deep-Groove
Assigned Part Number) . . . . . . 1-4
Ball Bearing (Figure 2-2) . . . . . 2-1
1-51. Rules for Substitution 2-13. Single Row, Deep-Groove
of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Filling Slot Ball Bearing
1-52. Substitution of High Precision for (Figure 2-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Lower Precision Bearings . . . . 1-5 2-14. Fractured Ring, Deep-Groove
1-53. Substitution of Sealed Bearings Ball Bearing (Figure 2-5) . . . . . 2-3
for Shielded Bearings . . . . . . . . 1-5 2-15. External Self-Aligning,
1-54. Substitution of Angular-Contact Single-Row, Ball
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Bearing (Figure 2-6) . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1-55. Substitution of Bearings with 2-16. Counterbored Outer Ring,
Loading Grooves . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Ball Bearing (Figure 2-8) . . . . . 2-3
1-56. Substitution of Sealed/ 2-17. Magneto Bearing
Shielded Bearings for (Figure 2-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Nonsealed/Shielded 2-18. Double Row, Deep-Groove,
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Ball Bearing (Figure 2-10) . . . . 2-4
i
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
2-20. Angular-Contact Ball 2-68. Retainers (Figure 2-63) . . . . . . . 2-20

Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-73. Shields and Seals (Figures
2-21. Single-Row, Angular-Contact 2-68 and 2-69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Ball Bearings (Figure 2-11) . . . 2-4 2-74. Snap Rings (Figure 2-71) . . . . . 2-24
2-24. Duplex and Multi-Stacked Ball 2-75. Identification and Coding
Bearings (Figure 2-13) . . . . . . . 2-5 of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-26. Double-Row, Angular-Contact 2-76. National Stock Numbers . . . . . . 2-24
Ball Bearings (Figure 2-16) . . . 2-6 2-79. Bearing Manufacturer’s
2-28. Self-Aligning, Double-Row Ball Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Bearing (Figure 2-18) . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-82. Aircraft/Engine/Component
2-29. Split-Ring, Angular-Contact Ball Manufacturer’s Part
Bearing (Figure 2-19) . . . . . . . . 2-7 Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-31. Thrust Ball Bearings 2-83. Dimensions and Tolerances . . . 2-26
(Figure 2-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2-84. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2-33. Radial Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . 2-8 2-86. Standard Bearing Series . . . . . . 2-26
2-34. Cylindrical Roller Bearings . . . . . 2-8 2-88. ABEC/RBEC Tolerances . . . . . . 2-26
2-36. Needle Roller Bearings . . . . . . . 2-10 2-93. Grouping of Bearings
2-38. Journal Roller Bearings by Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
(Figure 2-32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
III REMOVAL AND HANDLING OF BEARINGS
2-39. Elliptical Ring Roller
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 3-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2-42. Tapered Roller Bearings 3-3. Bearing Removal Areas . . . . . . . . 3-1
(Figure 2-36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3-5. Accumulation Containers . . . . . . 3-1
2-46. Spherical Roller Bearings 3-6. Special Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
(Figures 2-41 and 2-42) . . . . . 2-13 3-7. Bearing Removal Tools . . . . . . . . 3-1
2-49. Thrust Roller Bearings 3-8. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
(Figures 2-47 to 2-50) . . . . . . 2-13 3-9. Tooling Requirements . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2-50. Aircraft Control and Pulley 3-10. Arbor Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Bearings (Figures 2-51 3-12. Outside Pullers (Figure 3-4) . . . . 3-2
to 2-55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
3-13. Push-Pullers (Figures
2-52. Sliding/Plain Bearings 3-6 and 3-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
(Figure 2-56) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 3-14. Puller Adapters (Figure 3-8) . . . . 3-2
2-53. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 3-16. Special Removal Tools . . . . . . . . 3-2
2-55. Slotted-Entry Bearing 3-17. Preparation for Bearing
(Figure 2-57) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2-58. Threaded Retainer Ring 3-18. Cleaning Bearings Prior
(Figure 2-58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 to Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2-59. Oil-Impregnated Bearings . . . . . 2-17 3-19. Selection of Proper
2-60. Fabric-Lined, Self-Lubricated Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Bearings (Figures 2-60 3-21. Selection of Proper Tooling . . . . . 3-6
and 2-61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 3-22. Bearing Removal
2-63. Composite, Plastic-Based Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Self-Lubricating Bearings 3-23. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
(Figure 2-62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 3-24. Removal of Tight Shaft-Mounted
2-64. Wick-Oiled Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Bearings (Figure 3-18) . . . . . . . 3-7
2-65. Pressure-Fed Bearings . . . . . . . 2-19 3-26. Removal of Tight Housing
2-66. Externally Pressurized Mounted Bearings
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 (Figures 3-22 and 3-23) . . . . . . 3-8
2-67. Component Parts of Rolling 3-28. Removal of Tight Shaft,
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Housing-Mounted Bearings . . 3-8
ii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
3-29. Removal of Bonded Bearings . . . 3-8 4-24. Non-RFI New Bearings . . . . . . . . 4-3
3-30. Removal of Aircraft Wheel 4-26. New RFI Bearings in Kits . . . . . . 4-4
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 4-27. Quality Assurance Program
3-31. Removal of Staked-In (QAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 4-29. Questionable New Non-RFI
3-32. Minor Rework in Shop Area . . . . 3-9 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
3-34. Disposition of Removed 4-30. Handling of Used Bearings . . . . . 4-4
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 4-32. Inspection of New Bearings . . . . 4-5
3-35. Route to Bearing Shop . . . . . . . 3-10 4-33. Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
3-36. Disposal of Rejected 4-34. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 4-35. Inspection Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
3-37. Segregation and Identification 4-36. Methods for Determining
of Removed Bearings . . . . . . . 3-10 Non-Acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
3-38. Bearings Routed for Immediate 4-37. Bearings Requiring 100
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Percent Inspection . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
3-39. Special Handling Procedure . . . 3-10 4-38. Inspection Requirements for
3-40. Cleaning and Protection of Ball Bearings Under QAP
Removed Bearings . . . . . . . . . 3-12 and Special Inspection . . . . . . . 4-6
3-41. Water-Crash/Fire-Damaged 4-39. Inspection Requirements for
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Roller Bearings Under QAP
3-42. Bearings Scheduled for and Special Inspection . . . . . . . 4-6
Immediate Processing . . . . . . 3-12 4-40. Bearings Requiring Sample
3-43. Bearings Scheduled for Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Storage Awaiting 4-41. Sampling Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 4-42. Handling of Rejected New
3-44. Bearings Being Held for Non-RFI Supply Custody
Shipment to a Technical Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Repair Center (TRC) 4-44. Handling of Kitted Bearings . . . . 4-8
for Refurbishment . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 4-46. Handling of RFI Bearings with
3-45. Routing and Handling of Expired or Suspect
Removed Bearings . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Preservation/Lubrication . . . . . 4-8
3-46. Do’s and Don’ts of
Bearing Removal . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 V CLEANING OF BEARINGS
3-48. Do’s and Bearing Removal . . . . 3-13
3-49. Don’ts of Bearing Removal . . . . 3-14 5-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-3. Deviations from Specified
Cleaning Process . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
IV INDUCTION AND PRESCREENING OF BEARINGS
5-4. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-6. Safety and Good
4-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Housekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
4-3. Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . 4-1 5-8. Hazardous Waste Reduction
4-6. Equipment Requirements . . . . . . 4-1 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
4-8. Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 5-11. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
4-10. Computerized Records . . . . . . . . 4-2 5-12. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
4-12. Forms and Records . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 5-13. Minimum Intermediate
4-15. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Maintenance Level Activity
4-19. Sources of Bearings to be (IMA) Cleaning Equipment . . . 5-2
Processed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 5-14. Cleaning Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
4-20. Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 5-15. Seal and Shield Removal . . . . . . 5-7
4-21. Refurbished Bearings . . . . . . . . . 4-3 5-16. Removable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
iii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
5-18. Nonremovable Types . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5-58. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5-19. Demagnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5-59. Handling Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-20. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5-60. Environmental Controls . . . . . . . 5-20
5-22. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-23. Checking for Magnetism . . . . . . . 5-8 VI REWORK OF BEARINGS
5-24. General Cleaning
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 6-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
5-25. Soak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 6-3. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
5-27. Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 6-5. Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . 6-1
5-28. Vapor Degreasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 6-7. Buffing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-8. Handling Reworked
5-29. Vibro-Tumbling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
5-30. Vibro-Tumbling Media . . . . . . . . 5-10
6-9. Use of Gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
5-31. Media Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
6-10. Demagnetization and
5-32. Vibro-Tumbling Procedure . . . . 5-10 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
5-33. Typical Cleaning 6-11. Temporary Protection . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
6-12. Definition of Work Levels . . . . . . 6-1
5-34. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 6-14. Level I: Processing Bearings . . . 6-1
5-36. Special Processing 6-15. Level II: Refurbishment of
Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5-37. Light Grease and Oil Removal 6-16. Level III: Regrind
(New or Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5-38. Heavy Grease and 6-17. Level IV: Remanufacturing
Preservative Removal . . . . . . 5-16 of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5-39. Carbon Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 6-18. Technical Control Over
5-40. Oxygen System Bearings Rework Procedures . . . . . . . . . 6-2
(New and Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 6-19. Level I Rework Procedures . . . . . 6-2
5-41. Oil-Impregnated Bearings . . . . . 5-17 6-20. Buffing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
5-42. Barrier Film Coated 6-26. Grouping of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 6-27. Group A Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
5-43 DU Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 6-28. Inner and Outer Bearing
5-44. Ceramic Coated, Carbon Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Graphite Lined Bearings . . . . 5-17 6-29. Rolling Elements (Balls
5-45. Fabric-Lined Bearings . . . . . . . . 5-18 and Rollers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
5-46. Buffing Compound 6-30. Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 6-31. Nonseparable Bearings . . . . . . . . 6-4
5-47. Control of Bearing Cleaning 6-33. Group B Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 6-34. Rework of Cadmium
5-48. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Plated Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
5-49. Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 6-35. Reworking Unplated
5-50. Distilled Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 External Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
5-51. Storage Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 6-36. Rework of Internal
5-52. Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Bearing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
5-53. Carbon Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 6-37. Reworking Tapered Roller
5-54. Hot Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
5-55. Control of Bearing Cleaning 6-38. Reworking Control Pulleys . . . . . 6-8
Workload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 6-39. Group C Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
5-56. Protecting Cleaned 6-40. Group D Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 6-41. Group E Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
5-57. Handling Cleaned Bearings . . . 5-19 6-43. Matched Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
iv
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
6-44. Nonseparable Bearings . . . . . . . . 6-9 7-22. Cylindrical Roller Bearings . . . . . 7-3

6-45. Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 7-23. Elliptical Roller Bearings . . . . . . . 7-3
6-49. Separable Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 7-24. Misaligned Ball/Roller Paths . . . . 7-4
6-50. Reworking Rolling 7-25. Descriptions and Definitions
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 of Surface Defects . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
6-51. Reworking Bearing Seals . . . . . 6-10 7-26. Inspection of Active
6-52. Reworking Bearing Shields . . . . 6-10 (Functional) Surfaces . . . . . . . 7-10
6-53. Special Rework 7-27. Inspection of Bearing
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
6-54. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 7-28. Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
6-55. Authorized Bearing Rework 7-29. Inspection of Nonactive
Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
6-56. Grinding Outer Diameters 7-30. Inspection of Bearing Seals
for Adhesive Bonding . . . . . . . 6-10 and Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-31. Special Inspection
6-57. Rematching Duplex and
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Stack Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
7-33. Group A (Powerplant
6-58. Marking and Coding
Bearings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
7-34. Group B (Airframe and
6-59. Process Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Aircraft Control Bearings) . . . 7-22
6-62. Level II Rework Code . . . . . . . . . 6-11 7-35. Group C (Instrument
6-64. Operating Time Code . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Bearings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
6-65. Time Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 7-36. Group D (Rotating Electrical
6-66. Adding Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Bearings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
6-67. Type of Bearings to be 7-37. Group E (Helicopter
Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Bearings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
6-68. Unknown Time History . . . . . . . . 6-12 7-38. Oscillating Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7-39. Helicopter Main and Tail
VII VISUAL INSPECTION OF BEARINGS Rotor Stack Bearings . . . . . . . 7-25
7-40. Drive Shaft Bearings . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-41. Gearbox Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-3. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-42. Airframe and Control
7-6. Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-7. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 VIII DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION OF BEARINGS
7-8. Certification Requirements . . . . . 7-2
7-9. Gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 8-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
7-10. Temporary Protection of 8-4. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 8-6. Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
7-13. Visual Inspection 8-7. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 8-9. Certification Requirements . . . . . 8-1
7-14. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 8-10. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
7-15. Use of Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 8-11. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
7-16. Use of Radius Scribe 8-12. Minimum Gaging Equipment . . . 8-1
(Figure 7-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 8-13. Calibration Requirements . . . . . . 8-1
7-19. Definitions of Bearing 8-14. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Surface Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 8-15. Gage Blocks (Figure 8-1) . . . . . . 8-2
7-20. Appearance of Ball 8-17. Gage Block Build-up
or Roller Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
7-21. Location of Ball or 8-18. Wringing Gage Blocks
Roller Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Together as a Set . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
v
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-20. Handling and Care of 8-63. ABMA Simplified Method for

Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Internal Radial Clearance
8-22. Master Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-23. Measurement Error . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8-65. Typical Equipment Used for
8-24. Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Measuring Internal Radial
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-25. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-66. Split-Inner Ring Internal
8-26. Air and Oil Films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Radial Clearance Gage
8-28. Limitations of Gaging (Figure 8-16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 8-67. Internal Axial Clearance (Play)
8-29. Gaging Requirements . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Measuring Procedures
8-30. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 (Figure 8-17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8-32. Minimum Dimensional 8-68. Internal Axial Clearance
Inspection Requirements Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-16
for Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8-69. Flushness, Stick-Out/Stick-In
8-33. Gaging Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Measuring Procedures . . . . . . 8-16
8-34. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8-72. Flushness, Stick-Out/Stick-In
Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-17
8-35. Gaging Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-73. Contact Angle Measuring
8-36. Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-38. Measuring Bearing 8-74. Concentricity and Roundness
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Measuring Procedures . . . . . . 8-20
8-39. Symbols Used in Bearing 8-76. Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 8-77. Types of Roundness
8-40. Inner Diameter (Bore) Measuring Spindles . . . . . . . . 8-20
Measuring Procedures . . . . . . . 8-8 8-78. Circular (Polar) Traces
8-43. Typical Equipment Used for (Figure 8-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Bore Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8-80. Concentricity and Roundness
8-44. Inner Diameter (Bore) Gage . . . . 8-9 Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-20
8-45. Air Gages (Figure 8-12) . . . . . . . 8-11 8-82. Linear Profile Measuring
8-48. Outside Diameter Measuring Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Procedures (Figure 8-13a) . . . 8-12 8-84. Typical Linear Profile
8-50. Typical Equipment Used Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-22
for Measuring Outer 8-85. Surface Texture Measuring
Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8-51. Width Measuring Procedures 8-87. Definitions and Terminology . . . 8-23
(Figures 8-11b and 8-13b) . . . 8-12 8-88. Surface Roughness
8-52. Width Measuring Equipment . . . 8-12 Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-53. Internal Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 8-89. Methods of Surface-Texture
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-54. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-90. Surface Texture Measuring
8-55. Radial Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-56. Axial Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 8-91. Velocity Transducer . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-57. Relationship Between Radial 8-92. Displacement Transducer . . . . . 8-25
and Axial Clearance . . . . . . . . 8-13 8-93. Specialized Form of
8-58. Significance of Internal Displacement Transducer . . . 8-25
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 8-95. Laser Interferometric
8-61. Internal Radial Clearance Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Measuring Procedures . . . . . . 8-13 8-97. Ball and Roller Classifying
8-62. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
vi
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-99. Ball and Roller Classifying IX NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING/INSPECTION

(Sizing) Equipment
(Figure 8-33 and 8-34) . . . . . . 8-27 9-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
8-100. Width Variation Measuring 9-3. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Procedures (Figure 8-35) . . . 8-28 9-5. Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
8-101. Width Variation Measuring 9-6. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 9-7. Certification Requirements . . . . . 9-1
8-102. Double Probe Setup 9-8. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
(Figure 8-36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 9-9. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
8-104. Radial Runout (Assembled 9-11. Inspection by Nondestructive
Bearings) Measuring Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 9-12. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
8-107. Radial Runout Measuring 9-14. Magnetic Particle Inspection . . . 9-2
Equipment (Figure 8-38) . . . . 8-28 9-15. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
8-108. Ball Groove Runout 9-17. Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
(Assembled Bearing) 9-18. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Measuring Procedures 9-19. Circular Magnetization with
(Figure 8-39) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Offset Central Conductor
8-109. Inner Ring Groove Runout (Figure 9-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
(Figure 8-11d) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 9-20. Induced Current Magnetization
8-110. Outer Ring Ball Groove Procedure (Figure 9-4) . . . . . . . 9-3
Runout (Figure 8-13d) . . . . . . 8-30 9-23. Fluorescent Penetrant
8-112. Ball Groove Runout Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
(Assembled Bearing) 9-24. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-30 9-25. Bearings Requiring Fluorescent
8-113. Ball Groove Runout Penetrant Inspection . . . . . . . . 9-4
Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-30 9-26. Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
8-114. Bore and Outer Diameter 9-27. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Runout/Squareness with 9-28. Electromagnetic Testing
Reference Side Measuring (Eddy Current) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 9-29. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
8-118. Bore and Outer Diameter 9-30. Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Runout with Reference Side 9-32. Indentation Hardness Testing . . . 9-6
Measuring Equipment . . . . . . 8-30 9-33. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
8-119. Roller Corner Radius Runout 9-36. Bearings Requiring Hardness
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
8-120. Flatness Measuring 9-37. Hardness Testing Procedure . . . 9-6
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 9-38. Hardness Versus
8-121. Flatness Measuring Tensile Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8-122. Mechanical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 X LUBRICATION AND PRESERVATION OF BEARINGS
8-123. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 10-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8-124. Hand Feel Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 10-5. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8-125. Torque Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 10-6. Uninstalled Bearings . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8-127. Measuring Torque of 10-7. Permanently Installed
Assembled Bearings . . . . . . . . 8-33 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8-128. Measuring Torque of 10-8. Handling Bearings Prior to
Jig-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . 8-34 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
8-130. Vibration and Noise Tests . . . . . 8-34 10-9. Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
vii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
10-10. Final Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10-51. Control Rod, Link and

10-11. Fingerprint Neutralizing . . . . . . . 10-1 Bellcrank Bearings . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-12. Handling Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10-52. Gearbox and Transmission
10-13. Lubrication Equipment . . . . . . . . 10-2 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-15. Grease Dispensing 10-53. Relubrication of
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Oil-Impregnated Bearings . . . 10-7
10-16. Methods of Lubrication . . . . . . . 10-2 10-54. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-17. Controlled Methods . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 10-56. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-19. Approximate Method . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-57. Relubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-20. Hand Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-58. Testing Oil-Impregnated
10-21. Lubricating Bearings Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
with Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-59. Lubricating Oil-Impregnated
10-25. Lubricating Bearing Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
with Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-60. Machining Oil-Impregnated
10-26. Correct Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10-28. Underlubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 10-61. Grinding, Lapping, Honing and
10-29. Overlubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Reaming Oil-Impregnated
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10-31. Contaminated Grease . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-62. Application of Dry Film
10-32. Handling Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10-33. Lubricating Group A (Power
10-63. Reinstallation of Seals
Plant) Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
and Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10-34. Main Shaft and Accessory
10-64. Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Bearings (Navy/Army) . . . . . . 10-5
10-35. Main Shaft and Accessory 10-65. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Bearings (Air Force) . . . . . . . . 10-5 10-66. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-36. Linkage/Control Box 10-67. Storage Life Limitations . . . . . 10-10
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 10-68. Preservative Materials . . . . . . 10-10
10-37. Fuel-Lubricated Power 10-69. Hot Dip Preservative . . . . . . . 10-10
Plant Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 10-70. Cold Preservative . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-38. Lubricating Group B (Airframe 10-71. Application of Preservative
Aircraft Control) Bearings . . . 10-5 Coatings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-39. Rod Ends, Cylinder Ends, 10-72. Long-Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Airframe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 10-73. Hot Dip, Soft Film
10-40. Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Preservative Tank . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-42. Lubricating Group C 10-75. Short-Term Storage . . . . . . . . . 10-11
(Instrument) Bearings . . . . . . . 10-6 10-76. Preservation Steps for
10-43. Lubricating Group D (Rotating Short Term Storage . . . . . . . . 10-11
Electrical) Bearings . . . . . . . . . 10-6 10-77. Short Term Preservation
10-44. Aircraft Generator Bearings . . . 10-6 Up to 90 Days . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-45. Motor Fan, Blower Bearings . . . 10-6 10-78. Immediate Use . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-46. Nonremovable Shielded or 10-80. Preservation of Rejected
Sealed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 New Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-47. Hydraulic Accessory 10-81. Preserving New Rejected
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-48. Lubricating Group E 10-82. Controls on Lubricants and
(Helicopter) Bearings . . . . . . . 10-6 Preservative Materials . . . . 10-13
10-49. Oscillating Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 10-85. Lists of Military Specification
10-50. Drive and Rotor Lubricants and
Shaft Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Their Properties . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
viii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
XI PACKAGING, STORING AND DISTRIBUTION 11-52. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

OF BEARINGS 11-53. Bearing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11-54. Depot Level Storage . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11-55. Bearing Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-4. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11-56. Shelf Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-5. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11-58. MIL-C-11796 Class 3 . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-6. Air Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11-59. Grease Lubricated . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11-7. Clean Room Classification . . . . 11-1 11-61. Oil Lubricated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11-10. Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11-65. Procurement, Handling
11-14. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11-15. General Packaging Material . . . 11-1 11-66. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11-16. Intimate Wrapping . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11-67. Central Bearing Storeroom . . . 11-10
11-17. Plastic Film Bags 11-69. Determining Usage Data . . . . . 11-10
(Method IA-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11-70. Production Shop Bearing
11-18. Plastic Forming Material Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
(Skin Pack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11-19. Flexible Bags (Method IA-8) . . . 11-2 XII INSTALLATION OF BEARINGS
11-20. Clean Packaging Material . . . . . 11-2
12-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
11-23. LOX Compatible Material . . . . . 11-2
12-6. Personnel Requirements . . . . . . 12-1
11-24. Methods of Preservation . . . . . . 11-2
12-10. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
11-25. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 12-12. Requisitioning and Handling
11-27. Method IA-8 (Flexible Bags) . . . 11-2 Replacement Bearings . . . . . . 12-1
11-28. Prefabricated Bags for 12-13. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Method IA-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 12-14. Depreserving Bearings Prior
11-29. Manufacturing Bags to Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
for Method IA-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 12-16. Lubrication Prior to
11-31. Heat Sealing Specification Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
MIL-B-131 Barrier 12-18. Lubrication During
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
11-32. Local/In-House Packaging 12-20. Preparation of Bearing
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . 12-2
11-35. Unit Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 12-22. Shaft Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . 12-2
11-36. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 12-23. Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
11-37. Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 12-24. Burrs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
11-38. Supply Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 12-25. Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
11-40. Closure of Unit Package . . . . . . 11-6 12-26. Taper, Waviness and
11-41. Marking and Identification . . . . . 11-6 Out-of-Roundness . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
11-42. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 12-27. Shaft Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
11-43. Minimum Required 12-30. Shaft Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 12-31. Radial Runout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
11-44. Special Marking Instructions . . 11-7 12-32. Shaft Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
11-45. Local/In-House Packaging 12-33. Shaft Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 12-34. Housing Mountings . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
11-47. Identification of Barrier Film 12-36. Installation Procedures . . . . . . . 12-5
Coated Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 12-37. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
11-48. Marking Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 12-39. Installing Sealed or
11-49. Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Shielded Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
11-50. Direct Imprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 12-40. Installing Tapered Roller
11-51. Supply Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
ix
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-41. Stack, Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . 12-5 12-81. Types of Impression

12-42. Balanced Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12-43. Installing Shaft-Mounted 12-82. Impression Staking Tools . . . 12-17
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 12-83. Unapproved Impression
12-44. Secure the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Staking Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12-45. Lubricate the Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 12-84. Impression Staking
12-46. Pressure Mounting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 12-85. Roller-Swaged Housing
12-47. Hand Mounting Tools . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Staking (Figure 12-32) . . . . 12-20
12-48. Aligning and Guiding the 12-86. Roller Swaging Tools . . . . . . . 12-20
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 12-88. Roller Swaging Staking
12-49. Post Installation Inspection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 12-89. Roller-Swaged Sleeve
12-50. Installing Housing-Mounted Staking (Figure 12-33) . . . . 12-20
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 12-90. Roller-Swaged Sleeve
12-51. Blind Recesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Staking Procedure . . . . . . . 12-20
12-52. Installing Self-Aligning 12-91. Outer Ring Groove Staking
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 (Figure 12-34) . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12-53. Installing Airframe Bearings . . . 12-7 12-93. Outer Ring Groove Staking
12-54. Installing Needle Bearings . . . . 12-7 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12-55. Installing Wheel Bearings . . . . . 12-8 12-94. Bearing Retention by
12-56. Installing Rod End Adhesive Bonding . . . . . . . . 12-23
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 12-97. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12-57. Installing Ball Thrust 12-98. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 12-99. Installation of Adhesively
12-58. Special Mounting Instructions Bonded Bearings . . . . . . . . . 12-23
for Duplex Bearings . . . . . . 12-10 12-101. Inspection of Installed
12-59. Special Mounting Instructions Adhesively Bonded
for Elliptical Bearings . . . . . . 12-11 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12-61. Temperature Mounting 12-102. Proof Testing for Retention . . 12-25
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12-103. Checking Bearings After
12-62. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12-64. Heating the Bearing . . . . . . . . 12-12 12-109. Disposition of Questionable
12-66. Heating the Housing . . . . . . . . 12-13 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-67. Methods of Heating 12-111. Protection of Bearings
Bearings/Housings . . . . . . . 12-13 Installed in Uncompleted
12-68. Hot Air Method of Bearing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12-113. Do’s and Don’ts of Bearing
12-70. Hot Oil Method of Bearing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 12-115. Do’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
12-72. Heat Induction Method of 12-116. Don’ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
Bearing Installation . . . . . . . 12-15
12-74. Bearing Retention by
Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 XIII MAINTENANCE OF INSTALLED BEARINGS
12-75. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12-77. Proof Testing Installed 13-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 13-4. Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
12-79. Bolted Plate (Figure 12-28) . . 12-16 13-6. Protection of Bearings in
12-80. Impression Staking Assemblies Awaiting
(Figure 12-29) . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
x
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
13-7. Enclosed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13-51. Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

13-8. Exposed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13-52. Cleaning Processes . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-11. Fabric-Lined Bearing . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13-53. Organizational Level
13-13. Protection of Bearings in Maintenance Activities . . . . 13-10
Assemblies going 13-55. Relubrication of Installed
into Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13-17. Maintenance and Protection 13-56. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
of Bearings Installed in 13-58. Grease Guns and Adapters . 13-10
Aircraft and Aircraft 13-61. Type of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13-62. Lubrication of Airframe and
13-18. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Aircraft Control Bearings . . . 13-11
13-19. Contamination through the 13-63. Lubrication of Helicopter
Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-20. Contamination During 13-64. Lubrication of Wheel
Cleaning and Painting . . . . . . 13-2 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-22. Cleaning of Aircraft and 13-65. Lubrication Procedures . . . . . . 13-11
Aircraft Assemblies . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13-66. Lubrication of Control
13-24. General Maintenance . . . . . . . . 13-3 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-25. Preservation of the Aircraft . . . . 13-4 13-67. Shielded MS Ball Bearings . . 13-12
13-26. Inspection of Installed 13-68. Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-69. Rod End Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-27. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-70. Concave Roller Bearings . . . 13-12
13-29. Depot Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-72. Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-30. Intermediate and
Organizational Level . . . . . . . . 13-4 13-73. Removal and Disposition
of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-31. Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-74. Bearings Removed for
13-32. Inspection of Mechanisms . . . . 13-4
Shipment to Depots . . . . . . 13-14
13-33. Inspection of Control Cable
13-75. Bearings Returned to
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Service Designated
13-34. Inspection of Engine Control Technical Repair Centers
Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 (TRC) for Bearing
13-35. Detection of Defective Refurbishment . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13-36. Defective Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
XIV INSTRUMENT BEARINGS
13-37. Rod End Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13-38. Pulley Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
14-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
13-39. Plain Spherical Bearings
(Metal-to-Metal) . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 14-7. Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
13-41. Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 14-9. Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
13-42. Fabric-Lined or Composite 14-11. Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Bearings 14-14. Classification of Instrument
(TFE-Tetrafluoroethylene) . . . 13-7 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
13-45. Cleaning of Installed 14-16. Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 14-17. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
13-46. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 14-18. Instrument Precision
13-47. Depot Level Maintenance Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 14-19. Performance Requirements . . . 14-2
13-49. Intermediate Level 14-20. Dimensional Requirements . . . 14-2
Maintenance Activities . . . . . . 13-9 14-21. Instrument Semi-Precision
13-50. Equipment 13-9 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
xi
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-22. Types of Instrument 14-74. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14-75. Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14-24. Radial Retainer Bearings 14-77. Approved Materials . . . . . . . . 14-13
(Figure 14-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14-78. Prefiltration of Solvents . . . . . 14-13
14-26. Gimbal Bearings 14-79. Cleaning Equipment . . . . . . . . 14-13
(Figure 14-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14-80. Spray Rinsing of Bearings . . 14-13
14-27. Angular-Contact Bearings . . . . . 14-3 14-81. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14-30. Gyro Spin Axis Bearings 14-82. Self-Contained Pressure
(Figure 14-5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Spray Equipment . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14-34. Pivot Bearings (Figure 14-3) . . . 14-5 14-83. Ultrasonic Cleaners . . . . . . . . 14-16
14-35. Magneto Bearings 14-86. Vapor Rinse Equipment . . . . . 14-16
(Figure 2-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 14-87. Cleaning Methods . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
14-36. Miniature Bearings 14-89. General Instrument Bearing
(Figure 14-7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Cleaning Procedure
14-37. Selecting Instrument (Figure 14-20) . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 14-89. Preliminary Cleaning . . . . . . . 14-18
14-39. Inspection of New Bearings . . . 14-5 14-90. Spray Cleaning Procedures . 14-16
14-42. Instrument Induction . . . . . . . . . 14-5 14-91. Special Cleaning Methods . . 14-18
14-44. Instrument Disassembly . . . . . . 14-6 14-92. Aqueous Cleaning . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14-47. Bearing Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 14-93. Permanently Sealed and
14-48. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Shielded Bearings . . . . . . . . 14-18
14-49. Removal Precautions . . . . . . . . . 14-6 14-94. Gyro Erection System
14-50. Methods of Removal . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14-95. Gyro Rotor Bearings . . . . . . . 14-20
14-51. Deep-Groove Rotor
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14-97. Silicone Lubricated
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
14-52. Angular-Contact Rotor
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14-99. Separable Pivot Bearings . . . 14-20
14-100. Rework of Instrument
14-54. Small Bore Radial Bearings . . . 14-8
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-55. Housing-Mounted Bearings . . . 14-8
14-101. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-56. Single-Row, Deep-Groove 14-102. Visual Inspection
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-57. Rotor Shaft Cones 14-103. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
(Inner Ring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
14-104. Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-58. Pivot Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 14-105. Types of Defects . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-59. Arbor Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 14-106. Bearing Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-60. Bearing Screening and 14-107. Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 14-108. Shields and Seals . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-61. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 14-109. Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-62. Preliminary Examination 14-110. Normal Operating
of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-65. Determining Amount of 14-111. Radially Loaded Bearings . . . 14-21
Bearing Processing . . . . . . . . . 14-9 14-112. Angular-Contact Loaded
14-67. Removing Bearings from Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 14-113. Abnormal Operating
14-69. Demagnetize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
14-70. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 14-114. Radially Loaded Bearings . . . 14-22
14-71. Gaussmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 14-115. Angular-Contact Loaded
14-72. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14-73. Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . 14-11 14-116. Dimensional Inspection . . . . . 14-22
xii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-117. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-173. Cleaning of Porous

14-120. Tolerances for Instrument Nonmetallic Retainers . . . . 14-33
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-174. Reimpregnation of Porous
14-121. Special Requirements for Nonmetallic Retainers . . . . 14-34
Instrument Precision 14-175. Grease Lubrication . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-176. Clean Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
14-122. Surface Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-177. Grease Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
14-123. Ball Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-179. Clean Grease, Specification
14-124. Internal Radial Clearance . . . 14-22 MIL-G-81937 . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
14-125. Gaging Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-180. Controlled Grease
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35
14-126. Running Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14-184. Selection of Lubricants . . . . . 14-35
14-127. Starting Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14-185. Certification of Lubricants . . . 14-36
14-128. Minimum Gaging
14-186. Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14-188. Long Term Preservation
14-130. Gaging Requirements . . . . . . 14-23 (over 180 days) . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14-131. Gaging Methods . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 14-190. Short-Term Preservation
14-132. Ball Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 (under 180 days) . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14-134. Size Coding of Bore and 14-191. Preservation for Supply
Outer Diameter . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14-137. Internal Radial Clearance 14-192. Packaging Procedures . . . . . 14-36
Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 14-193. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14-138. Torque Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 14-194. Flexible Bag (Method IA-8) . . 14-36
14-139. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 14-195. Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
14-140. Background Theory . . . . . . . . 14-25 14-196. In-House Storage with
14-143. Types of Bearing Torque . . . . 14-25 Controlled Environment . . . 14-36
14-144. Starting Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 14-197. In-House Storage without
14-145. Running Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 Environmental Control . . . . 14-36
14-146. Torque Measurements 14-198. Supply Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25 14-199. Barrier Film Coating . . . . . . . . 14-37
14-147. General Torque Testing 14-205. Installation Procedures . . . . . 14-37
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 14-206. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
14-148. Minimum Torque Testing 14-208. Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 14-209. Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . 14-38
14-149. Torque Testing Equipment . . 14-28 14-210. Corner Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
14-150. Military Standard 206 14-211. Spacers and Clamping
Running Torque Tester . . . . 14-28 Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
14-154. Automatic Starting Torque 14-212. Geometry and Surface
Tester (Figure 14-24) . . . . . 14-28 Finish Requirements . . . . . 14-38
14-213. Alignment and
14-156. Smoothrater (Figure 14-25) . . 14-30
Misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
14-158. Lubrication of Instrument 14-214. Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31
14-216. Shaft Mounting Fits
14-159. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31 (Figure 14-31) . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14-163. Oil Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . 14-31 14-217. Housing Mounting Fits
14-166. Controlled Oil Lubrication . . . 14-33 (Figure 14-32) 14-41
14-169. Method of Oil Application . . . 14-33 14-218. Bearing Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14-170. Filtration of Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 14-219. Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
14-172. Vacuum Impregnation of 14-221. Recommended Mounting
Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
xiii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-222. Special Rework of 15-45. Control of Solvents, Lubricants

Instrument Bearings . . . . . . 14-44 and Preservatives Used in
14-223. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44 the Bearing Clean Room . . . 15-11
14-224. Separable Gyro Rotor 15-46. Solvents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44 15-47. Lubricants and
14-225. Separable Pivot Bearings . . . 14-44 Preservatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
14-226. Special Methods of 15-49. Control of Clean Room
Reworking Bearing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45 15-50. Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
14-227. Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45 15-51. Gaging, Tooling and
14-228. Rework of Outer Ring . . . . . . 14-46 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
15-52. Maintenance Personnel . . . . . . 15-11
14-229. Rework of Inner Ring . . . . . . . 14-46
15-53. Control of Clean Room
Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
XV PROCESSING FACILITIES FOR BEARINGS 15-54. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
15-56. Rental of Clean Room
Garments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15-57. Garment Inspection
15-5. Clean Room Facilities . . . . . . . . 15-1 for Particulate
15-8. Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15-11. Group Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15-58. Method I (Microscopic) . . . . . 15-12
15-12. Personal Hygiene . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 15-59. Method II (Light
15-16. Clean Room Personnel Scattering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4 15-60. Janitorial Service . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
15-17. Materials Approved for Use 15-62. Authorized Materials . . . . . . . 15-12
in Clean Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 15-63. Approved Cleaning
15-21. Clean Room Clothing . . . . . . . . . 15-5 Compounds for
15-23. Class 10,000 and 100,000 General Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Clean Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 15-65. Materials Used for Floor
15-24. Class 100 Clean Rooms . . . . . . 15-7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15-25. Donning and Wearing Type 15-66. Cleaning Schedules . . . . . . . . 15-13
II Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 15-68. Cleaning Walls and
15-26. Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15-27. Suit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 15-69. Cleaning Work Areas . . . . . . . 15-13
15-28. Boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 15-70. Cleaning Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15-71. Inspection and Monitoring
15-29. Gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15-30. Environmental Controls . . . . . . . 15-9
15-31. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 XVI PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
15-32. Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15-33. Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 16-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
15-34. Air Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 16-5. Application and Policy . . . . . . . . 16-1
15-35. Contaminant Control . . . . . . . . . 15-9 16-7. Health Requirements . . . . . . . . . 16-1
15-37. Contamination Control 16-8. Vision Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9 16-9. Vision Requirements . . . . . . . . . 16-1
15-38. Filtration of Incoming Air . . . . . . 15-9 16-10. Dexterity Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
15-40. Automatic Airborne Particle 16-11. Acidity Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Counting Method . . . . . . . . . 15-10 16-12. General Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
15-43. Manual Microscopic Particle 16-13. Requirements for
Count Method . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10 Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
xiv
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
16-14. Equipment and Materials . . . . . 16-2 B-35. Manufacturing Methods . . . . . . . B-9

16-15. Inspection Procedures . . . . . . . . 16-2 B-36. Bearing Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
16-16. Technical Requirements . . . . . . 16-2 B-37. Bearing Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
16-17. Qualification Examinations . . . . 16-3 B-38. Load Carrying Capacity and
16-20. Qualification Tests . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 Life of Rolling Bearings . . . . B-11
16-21. Operational Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 B-39. Bearing Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
16-22. Special Certification B-40. Explanation of Material
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B-42. Rating Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
XVII CONSUMABLE MATERIALS B-43. Average Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B-44. Median Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
17-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 B-45. Bearing Life Formulas . . . . . . . B-12
B-48. Bearing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
XVIII TOOLING AND EQUIPMENT B-49. Sources of Bearing Loads . . . . B-13
B-50. Static Load Capacity . . . . . . . . B-13
18-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 B-52. Dynamic Load Capacity . . . . . . B-15
B-53. Factors Affecting Dynamic
APPENDIX A GLOSSARY OF BEARING Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
TERMINOLOGY B-54. Forces and Motions in
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
A-1. Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B-55. Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
A-2. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B-56. Rolling Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
A-4. Words and Phrases Used in B-57. Sliding Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Bearing Processing and B-58. Lubricant Friction . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 B-59. Coefficient of Friction . . . . . . . . B-17
B-60. Stresses and Deformations . . B-17
APPENDIX B ENGINEERING DATA B-61. Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B-62. Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-63. Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
B-4. Materials Used in Making B-64. Load Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-68. Single-Row Radial Bearings . . B-18
B-5. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-69. Single-Row, Angular-Contact
B-6. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
B-7. Hardness Requirements . . . . . . B-1 B-71. Double-Row Bearings . . . . . . . B-19
B-9. Standard Bearing Steel . . . . . . . B-2 B-73. Thrust Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B-11. Corrosion Resistant Steel . . . . . B-4 B-75. Formulas for General Use . . . . B-20
B-12. Vacuum Melted Steels . . . . . . . . B-4 B-76. Application Design . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B-15. Induction Melt Process . . . . . . . B-4 B-77. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
B-16. Consumable Electrode B-78. Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 B-81. Axial Adjustment During
B-18. High Temperature Steels . . . . . . B-5 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
B-23. Case-Hardened Steels . . . . . . . B-5 B-82. Spring Method of
B-25. Special Materials for Rolling Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 B-83. Preadjusted Bearings . . . . . . . B-23
B-26. Retainer Materials . . . . . . . . . . . B-6 B-84. Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
B-27. Heat Treatment of Bearing B-85. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 B-86. Function of a Lubricant . . . . . . B-24
B-33. Thermal Expansion of Bearing B-88. Principles of Lubrication . . . . . B-25
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 B-89. Hydrodynamic Lubrication . . . B-25
xv
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-90. Squeeze-Film Lubrication . . . . B-26 B-134. Effect of Interference Fit

B-91. Boundary Lubrication . . . . . . . . B-26 on Internal Clearance . . . . . . B-42
B-93. Hydrostatic Lubrication . . . . . . B-26 B-136. Dimensional Changes Due
B-94. Solid Film Lubrication . . . . . . . B-27 to Interference Fits . . . . . . . . B-43
B-95. Gas Lubrication B-138. Repair of Undersize and
(Figure B-31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27 Oversize Bearing
B-96. Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . B-27 Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . B-43
B-97. Advantages of Using Greases B-139. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
as a Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27 B-140. Repair of Undersize Shafts . . . B-43
B-98. Advantages of Oils . . . . . . . . . . B-27 B-141. Metal Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
B-99. Changing Lubricant B-142. Precision Brush Plating . . . . . . B-44
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28 B-145. Tank Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B-100. Military Specification B-146. Repair of Oversize Housing
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28 Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B-101. Grease Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . B-29 B-147. Metal Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B-102. Formulation of Greases . . . . . . B-29 B-148. Precision Brush Plating . . . . . . B-45
B-103. Mechanism of Lubrication . . . . B-29 B-149. Tank Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B-104. Properties of Bearing B-150. Established Bearings and
Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29 Bearing Component
B-105. Oil Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30 Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B-106. Petroleum Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30 B-151. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
B-107. Synthetic Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30 B-155. Tables of Tolerance for Ball
B-109. Silicone Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30 and Roller Bearings . . . . . . . B-46
B-111. Properties of Lubricating B-156. Gaging Practices for Ball
Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31 and Roller Bearings . . . . . . . B-70
B-112. Lubricant Additives . . . . . . . . . . B-31 B-157. Explanation of Symbols Used
B-113. Dry Film Lubrication . . . . . . . . . B-39 in the Arithmetic Formulas . . B-70
B-117. High Temperature Oxides . . . . B-41 B-158. Needle Roller Bearing
B-118. Special Environments Gaging Practices . . . . . . . . . . B-70
Requiring Dry Film B-159. Type NAA (Single Row,
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 Rollers Retained by Outer
B-119. Factors Affecting the Ring, No Inner Ring)
Selection of Dry Film (Figure B-41) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-70
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 B-160. Type NAB (Single Row,
B-120. Lists of Military Specification Rollers Retained by
Lubricants and their Outer Ring, Separable
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 Inner Ring) (Figure B-42) . . . B-77
B-122. Shaft and Housing Fits . . . . . . B-41 B-161. Type NBC, NBE, NBF, NBK,
B-123. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 NBL (Single Row,
B-125. Standard Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 Nonseparable Parts; Single
Row, Nonseparable Parts
B-126. Mounting Fits on Rotating
with Self-Aligning Outer
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
Ring and Adapter; Single
B-128. Mounting Fits on Stationary Row, Nonseparable Parts
Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41 with Heavy Section Outer
B-129. Special Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42 Ring and Adapter; Double
B-130. Bearing Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42 Row, Nonseparable Parts,
B-131. Machining Practices that Affect Heavy Section Outer Ring)
Bearing Mounting Fits . . . . . B-42 (Figure B-43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78
xvi
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-162. Type NCA (Single Row, B-201. Rolling or Spinning of Housing

Rollers Retained by Outer Material (Figure B-50) . . . . . B-83
Ring, No Inner Ring) B-203. Staking (Figures B-53
(Figure B-44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78 and B-54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
B-163. Type NCD (Single Row, Roller B-204. Cementing (Figure B-55) . . . . . B-83
Retained by Outer Ring, B-205. Imbalance and Critical
Separate Inner Ring) . . . . . . B-78 Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
B-164. Type NCE, NCF, and NCC B-206. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
(Single Row, Nonseparable B-208. Clean Room Design
Inner Ring Single Row, and Construction
Nonseparable Inner Ring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
with Washers) . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78 B-209. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
B-165. Loose Needle Rollers . . . . . . . . B-80 B-210. Conventional Flow . . . . . . . . . . B-84
B-166. Selection of Shaft and B-211. Horizontal Laminar-Flow . . . . . B-84
Housing Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-80 B-212. Vertical Laminar-Flow . . . . . . . B-84
B-167. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-80 B-213. Federal Standard,
B-169. Direction of the Load . . . . . . . . B-80 FED-STD-209 . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
B-170. Rotating Inner Ring Load . . . . B-80 B-214. Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
B-171. Stationary Inner Ring Load . . . B-80 B-215. Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
B-172. Rotating Outer Ring Load . . . . B-80 B-218. Vacuum Cleaning System . . . . B-85
B-173. Stationary Outer Ring Load . . B-80 B-219. Work Benches and Chairs . . . B-85
B-174. Indeterminate Load B-222. Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-80 B-223. Layout and Equipment . . . . . . . B-85
B-226. Cleaning Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
B-175. Normal Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . B-80
B-230. Intermediate Inspection
B-179. Effects of Interference Fit Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
on Bearing Dimensions . . . . B-80
B-233. Final Cleaning Room . . . . . . . . B-89
B-180. Normal and Theoretical Fits . . B-81 B-235. Inspection and Gaging
B-182. American National Standard Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89
Institute Specifications for B-238. Preservation, Lubrication
Mounting Ball and Roller and Packaging Room . . . . . . B-90
Bearings (B3.17-1973) . . . . . B-81
B-239. Miscellaneous Tables
B-183. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 and Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
B-185. Recommended Housing and B-241. Selecting Bearings for
Shaft Fits for Group B Instrument Applications . . . . B-90
Airframe Ball Bearing
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 APPENDIX C BEARING FAILURE ANALYSIS
B-188. Recommended Housing and
Shaft Fits for Thrust C-1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 C-3. Procedure for Damage
B-190. Recommended Shaft and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Housing Fits for Standard C-5. Ball and Roller Path
Inch Dimension Tapered Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 C-6. Ball Path Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
B-191. Mounting Methods for C-7. Oscillating Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Instrument and Miniature C-8. Localized Widening of the
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
B-193. Interference Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 C-9. Displaced Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . C-2
B-197. Side Clamping (Figure B-46) . B-82 C-10. Unevenly Wide Ball Path . . . . . . C-2
B-199. Snap Rings (Figure B-48) . . . . B-82 C-11. Wide Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
xvii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
C-12. Roller Path Analysis . . . . . . . . . . C-2 C-67. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12

C-13. Nonuniform Roller Path . . . . . . . C-2 C-68. False Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C-14. Circumferential Variations C-70. Vibration Causes
in the Roller Path . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 False Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-15. Retainer Wear Pattern C-71. Fretting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C-72. Fretting Between Bearing
C-17. Bearing Failures Caused Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
by Installation Problems . . . . . C-4 C-73. Fretting on Mounting
C-18. Damage During Installation . . . C-4 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-22. Tight Shaft and Housing C-74. Effect of Lubricant on False
Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C-24. Loose Shaft and Housing C-75. Bearing Failures Due
Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 to Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-26. Misalignment of Shaft or C-76. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Housing Assemblies . . . . . . . . C-6 C-77. Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-27. Out-of-Line Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 C-78. Identification of Fatigue . . . . . . C-14
C-28. Off-Square Ball Bearing C-79. Normal Fatigue Failure . . . . . . C-14
Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 C-80. Classification of Fatigue . . . . . C-15
C-31. Off-Square Roller Bearing C-81. Plastic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 C-82. Plastic Flow Due to Loading . . C-17
C-32. Shaft Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 C-83. Plastic Flow Due to
C-33. Defective Mounting Surfaces . . C-7 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-36. Out-of-Round Shaft Housing C-84. Radial Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 C-86. Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-37. Tapered Mounting Surfaces . . . C-8 C-87. Radial Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . C-18
C-38. Improperly Designed Housing C-88. Angular Contact Bearings . . . . C-18
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 C-89. Maximum Capacity
C-39. Defects on Mounting Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 C-90. Self-Aligning Bearings . . . . . . . C-18
C-40. Bearing Damage Due to C-91. Flanged Roller Bearings . . . . . C-20
Improper Removal C-92. Combined Radial and
Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-45. Bearing Failures Due C-94. Bearing Failures Caused by
to Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 Electrical Arcing . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-46. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 C-95. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-47. Metal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 C-97. Fluting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-49. Metal Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 C-98. Granulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
C-50. Bearing Failures Caused by C-99. Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 C-100. Bearing Failures Caused by
C-51. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 Manufacturing Defects . . . . . C-21
C-52. Solid Particle C-101. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10 C-103. Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21
C-59. Fluid Contamination . . . . . . . . . C-11 C-104. Inclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
C-60. Bearing Failures Caused C-105. Grinding Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
by Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11 C-106. Improper Heat Treatment . . . . C-22
C-61. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11 C-107. Lubricant Analysis . . . . . . . . . . C-22
C-63. Water in the Lubricant . . . . . . . C-11 C-108. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22
C-64. Corrosion Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12 C-109. Lubricant Identification . . . . . . C-22
C-66. Bearing Failures Due C-110. Infrared Analysis of
to Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
xviii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
C-114. Flame Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 C-131. Rolling Bearing Noise

C-115. Lubricant Condition and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 C-132. Noises Caused by Bearing
C-116. Oil Lubricated Bearings . . . . . . C-24 Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C-117. Grease Lubricated Bearings . . C-24 C-133. Frequency of Bearing
C-119. Bearing Condition Due to Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
the Effects of Lubrication . . . C-25 C-134. Noises Caused by
C-120. Insufficient Lubricant . . . . . . . . C-25 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
C-123. Deterioration of Lubricant . . . . C-25 C-135. Identification of Noises . . . . . . C-32
C-124. Improper Lubricant C-137. Sequential Steps in
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 Noise Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
C-125. Excessive Lubricant . . . . . . . . . C-26
C-126. Unauthorized Mixing of APPENDIX D BEARING REFURBISHMENT
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 CANDIDATES
C-127. Noise and Vibration
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 D-1. Refurbishment History . . . . . . . . D-1
C-128. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 D-3. NADEP NORIS
C-129. Sources of Noise and Refurbishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 D-4. Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
C-130. Rotary Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . C-30 D-6. POC’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Number Title Page Number Title Page
2-1. Common Bearing Features 2-13. Duplexed, Angular-Contact

and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-2. Single-Row, Deep Groove 2-14. Different Arrangements of Duplexed,
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Angular-Contact Ball Bearings . . . . . . . 2-7
2-3. Conrad Assembly of Deep-Groove 2-15. Stack Mounting of Angular-
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Contact Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-4. Single-Row, Deep-Groove, 2-16. Double-Row, Angular-Contact
Filling Slot Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-5. Fractured Ring, Deep-Groove
2-17. Contact Angles in Double-Row,
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-6. External Self-Aligning, Angular-Contact Ball Bearings . . . . . . . 2-8
Single-Row Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2-18. Self-Aligning, Double-Row
2-7. External Self-Aligning, Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Single-Row Ball Bearing 2-19. Split Ring, Angular-Contact
with Aligning Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-8. Counterbored Outer Ring 2-20. Thrust Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-21. Typical Thrust Ball Bearing
2-9. Magneto Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-10. Double-Row, Deep-Groove
2-22. Crown Roller Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-11. Single-Row, Angular-Contact 2-23. Inner Ring Separable Roller Bearing . 2-10
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2-24. Outer Ring Separable Roller Bearing . . 2-10
2-12. Different Contact Angles in 2-25. Separable, One-Direction
Angular-Contact Ball Bearings . . . . . . . 2-6 Locating, Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
xix
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Continued)
2-26. Snap Ring Retainment, Nonseparable 2-58. Threaded Retainer Ring Bearing . . . . . 2-21
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-59. Microscopic View of a Sintered
2-27. Loose Needle Roller Assembly . . . . . . . 2-11 Bronze Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-28. Drawn Cup, Needle Roller Bearing . . . . 2-11 2-60. Fiber-Lined, Self-Lubricating
2-29. Heavy Duty Needle Roller Bearing . . . 2-12 Spherical Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2-30. Cam Roller, Needle Roller Bearing . . . 2-12 2-61. Fiber-Lined, Self-Lubricating Spherical
2-31. Aircraft-Type, Needle Rod End Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2-62. “DU” Bearing Material
2-32. Journal Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Microstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2-63. Common Types of Retainer Designs . . 2-22
2-33. Roller Speed vs Inner Ring Speed . . . . 2-13
2-64. Rubbing Speeds of Retainer and
2-34. Internal Configuration of a
Retainerless-Type Bearings . . . . . . . 2-23
Conventional Roller Bearing . . . . . . 2-13
2-65. Inner and Outer Land Riding
2-35. Elliptical Ring Design Bearing Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-66. Retainer and Bearing Ring
2-36. Tapered Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Land Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-37. Typical Mounting Arrangement of 2-67. Forces Acting on Retainer Pockets
Tapered Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 by Rolling Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-38. Double-Row, Tapered 2-68. Bearing Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 2-69. Bearing Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2-39. Load Capacity of Tapered Roller 2-70. Typical Seal and Shield Installations . . 2-24
Bearings as a Function of Angle . . . 2-16
2-71. Snap Ring for Bearing Retention . . . . . 2-25
2-40. Rigidity of Tapered Roller Bearings as 2-72. Standard Bearing Series with Respect
a Function of Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 to OD and ID Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2-41. Convex-Roller, Spherical 3-1. Use of Backup Bars and Arbor Press . . . 3-2
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3-2. Use of Split Ring and Arbor Press . . . . . . 3-2
2-42. Concave-Roller, Spherical 3-3. Use of Drift Pipe and Arbor Press . . . . . . 3-3
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3-4. Two-Jawed, Outside Bearing Puller . . . . 3-3
2-43. Spherical Design of Spherical
3-5. Remove Bearing Ahead of
Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Gear Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2-44. Shapes of Rollers Used in 3-6. Basic Push-Puller Bearing Puller . . . . . . . 3-3
Spherical Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3-7. Push-Puller Tool with Extended Legs . . . 3-3
2-45. Inner Ring Designs for
3-8. Puller Attachment for Bearing Cups . . . . 3-3
3-9. Split-Collar Puller Plate for Removing
2-46. Design Parameters for
Shaft-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-10. Turret Press for Removing Bearings . . . . 3-4
2-47. Cylindrical Roller Thrust Bearing . . . . . 2-18
3-11. Screw Type Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2-48. Spherical Roller Thrust Bearing . . . . . . 2-18
3-12. Expansion Collet-Knocker
2-49. Tapered Roller Thrust Bearing . . . . . . . 2-18 Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2-50. Needle-Roller Thrust Bearing . . . . . . . . 2-18 3-13. Heavy Duty Expansion Collet
2-51. Self-Aligning, Airframe Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 3-14. Clamp Type Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2-52. Torque Tube Type Airframe 3-15. Screw Type Airframe Bearing Puller . . . . 3-7
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 3-16. Armature Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
2-53. Self-Aligning, Airframe 3-17. Armature Bearing Chuck with
Control Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Centering Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
2-54. Pulley Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 3-18. Removing a Shaft-Mounted Bearing . . . . 3-8
2-55. Rod End Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 3-19. Bearing Mounted Close to Gear . . . . . . . . 3-9
2-56. Types of Sliding/Plain Bearings . . . . . . 2-20 3-20. Outer Ring Removal at
2-57. Slotted-Entry Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Shaft-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
xx
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
3-21. Removing Bearings Having 7-1. Fingerprint on Bearing Surface from

Shallow Shoulders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Handling Without Gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
3-22. Removing Housing-Mounted Bearing . . . 3-11 7-2. Oven Storage for Temporary
3-23. Removing Wheel Bearing Puller Cup . . 3-12 Protection of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
3-24. Applying Removal Pressure to 7-3. Low Power Magnifying
Housing-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . 3-12 Inspection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
3-25. Removal of Outer Rings 7-4. Large Lens, Low Power
with Shaft Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Inspection Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
4-1. New Material - Missing Ball 7-5. Dual Microscope for Personnel
and Damaged Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-6. Radius Scriber for Evaluating
5-1. Cleaning Baskets for Bearing
Surface Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Handling Throughout Process . . . . . . . 5-3
7-7. Location of Functional Surfaces
5-2. Vibro-Tumbling Mill Schematic . . . . . . . . . 5-4
on Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
5-3. Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) 7-8. Normal Ball Paths Under Different
Vapor Degreaser/Dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Load Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
5-4. HFE Co-Solvent Vapor Rinse System . . . 5-6 7-9. Misaligned Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
5-5. Special Holding Device for Seal/Shield 7-10. Banding on a Ball from
Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 a Constant Thrust Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
5-6. Solvent Based Cleaning Process 7-11. Blistering of Plating on Retainer . . . . . . . . 7-7
for Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 7-12. False Brinelling of Tapered
5-7. Aqueous Based Cleaning Process for Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 7-13. True Brinelling of Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . 7-8
5-8. Solvent Based Cleaning 7-14. Finishing Marks on a Race
Process for New Bearings . . . . . . . . 5-14 Groove Surface and Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
5-9. Aqueous Based Cleaning 7-15. Fluting - a Specialized Form of
Process for New Bearings . . . . . . . . 5-15 Electrical Arcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
5-10. Galvanic Corrosion Resulting from 7-16. Severe Fretting on Outer
Inadequate Controls on Diameter of a Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Carbon Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 7-17. Frosting on Roller Bearing Raceway . . . . 7-8
5-11. Deplating During Fingerprint 7-18. Close-Up of Galling on
Neutralizing Due to Improper Bearing Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Selection of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 7-19. Healing or Flattening of
6-1. Polishing of Thrust Bearing Rollers . . . . . 6-6 Surface Finish Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
6-2. Special Fixture for Removing 7-20. Nonmetallic Inclusions in
Thrust Bearing Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Bearing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
6-3. Removal of Thrust Rollers 7-21. Indentation in a Roller Bearing
Using Special Fixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
6-4. Acceptable Staining of 7-22. Lap Defect in Roller Bearing Surface . . 7-10
Cadmium Plated Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 7-23. Electric Arc Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
6-5. Unacceptable Removal of Cadmium 7-24. Scratches Across the
Plating on External Surfaces . . . . . . . . 6-8 Raceway (SEM 800X) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
6-6. Cleaning Airframe Bearing Bore 7-25. Seam/Lap in Roller (SEM 40X) . . . . . . . 7-16
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 7-26. Seizure of Tapered Roller Bearing . . . . 7-16
6-7. Special Holding Tools for Cleaning 7-27. Skidding Indication on
Bearing Bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 a Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
6-8. Identification of Processed 7-28. Smearing of Metal on a Ball Bearing . . 7-16
(Used) Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 7-29. Spiral Smearing on Ends of Rollers . . . 7-17
6-9. Marking Operating Time on 7-30. Incipient Fatigue Spalling
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 on Ball Bearing Raceway . . . . . . . . . 7-17
xxi
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
7-31. Early Stage of Fatigue Spalling on 8-9 Effect of Stylus Pressure on

Ball Bearing Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Ultra-Accurate Measurement . . . . . . . . 8-7
7-32. Network Type of Fatigue Cracking 8-10. Surface Deformation Increases Due to
on Ball Bearing Raceway . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Shape of Parts and
7-33. Close-up of a Fatigue Spall Increased Unit Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
(SEM 120X MAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 8-11. Gaging Practices for Inner
7-34. Wear on Ends of Cylindrical Rollers . . 7-22 Ring Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8-12. Airflow Gaging Equipment for
7-35. Wear of Retainer Pocket of
Bore Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Tapered Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
8-13. Gaging Practices for Outer
7-36. Cracks and Delaminations in Ring Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Nonmetallic Type Retainers . . . . . . . 7-22
8-14. Relationship Between Radial
7-37. Crack in Corner of Machined and Axial Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Metal Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
8-15. ABMA Method of Measuring
7-38. Cracks in Roller Retaining Tabs . . . . . . 7-23 Radial Internal Clearance . . . . . . . . . 8-16
7-39. Inspection Criteria for 8-16. Radial Play Gage for Split
Two-Piece Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Inner Ring Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
7-40. Poor Rivet Heads in Gear 8-17. Measuring Axial Play of Single-Row
Box Bearing Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
7-41. Typical Plating and Wear 8-18. Measuring Flushness and
Indications of Main Engine Stick-in/Stick-out of
Bearing Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Single-Row Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
7-42. Light Fretting Corrosion on Outer 8-19. Flushness and Stick-out/Stick-in
Diameter Surface of Ball Bearing . . 7-24 Measuring Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
7-43. Damaged Seal by 8-20. Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Improper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 8-21. Roundness Versus
7-44. Checking Needle Bearings Out-of-Roundness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
for Rotation of Needles . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 8-22. Eccentricity of Two Circles . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7-45. Unacceptable End Clearance on 8-23. Angular Position of
Airframe Needle Bearing . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Measurement Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7–46 Preload Band on Outer Diameter of Ball 8-24. Distorted Polar Profile of a Miscentered
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Essentially Round Part . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-47. Typical Wear Indications on 8-25. Roundness Measuring Equipment . . . . 8-23
Helicopter Main and Tail 8-26. Bearing Surfaces that can be Evaluated
Rotor Stack Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 by Linear Tracing Techniques . . . . . 8-24
8-1. Precision Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-27. Terminology Used in Surface
Texture Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8-2. Wringing Gage Blocks Together . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-28. Contour Equipment for Profiling
8-3. Effects of Temperature on Bearing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Measuring Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-29. Direction of Stylus Movement for
8-4. Gaging Error Due to Angular Surface Finish Measurement . . . . . . 8-27
Positioning of Gage Stylus . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-30. Chart Traces Showing Components
8-5. Types of Gaging Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 of Surface Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-6. Effect of Lobing on 8-31. Surface Texture Measuring
Measuring Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8-7. Effect of Improper Stylus on 8-32. Checking the Lead-in Chamfer
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 on an Inner Ring Raceway Using
8-8. Effect of Excessive Stylus Pressure a Contour Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
on Thin-Walled Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8-33. Roller Diameter Measuring Gage . . . . 8-28
xxii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-34. Calibration and Operation 10-9. Excessive Oil Separation in a 35-lb.

Instructions for Electronic Pail of Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Comparator Type Ball 10-10. Pressure Lubrication of
Sizing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
8-35. Width Variation of an Inner Ring . . . . . . 8-31 10-11. Oil-Impregnation of Porous Metal
8-36. Differential Measurement of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Width Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 10-12. Application of Preservative Material
8-37. Radial Runout of Ball Groove with to Bearing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Respect to the Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 10-13. Layout of Equipment for Preserving
8-38. Radial Runout Measuring Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 11-1. Approved Methods of Preservation . . . . 11-4
8-39. Ball Groove Runout Measuring 11-2. Band-Type, Continuous Heat Sealer . . . 11-5
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 11-3. Thermal Impulse Heat Sealer for
8-40. Bore Runout with Reference Side . . . . 8-31 Sealing All Types of Unsupported
Plastic Film Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
8-41. Checking the Corner Radius Runout
of a Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 11-4. Plastic Film Marking Machine . . . . . . . . . 11-9
12-1. Effect of a Dirty Bearing
8-42. Explanation of Fringe Counting in
Mounting Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Optical Flat Measurement . . . . . . . . . 8-33
12-2. Effect of a Poorly Finished Bearing
8-43. Optical Flat for Checking Mounting Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Lapped Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
12-3. Effect of Excessive Interference Fit on
8-44. Measuring Rotational Torque of Bearing Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
a Duplex Set of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 12-4. Effect of an Off-Square
8-45. Measuring Rotation Torque of a Set Shaft Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
of Stack Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 12-5. Bearing Misalignment from an
9-1. Cracked Inner Ring Detected Off-Square Shaft Shoulder . . . . . . . . 12-4
by Dye Penetrant Process . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 12-6. Checking for Off-Square Shaft
9-2. Cracked Outer Ring of Helicopter Shoulders with a Small Square . . . . 12-5
Support Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 12-7. Check Shaft Shoulder Squareness
9-3. Circular Magnetization Process . . . . . . . . 9-3 with a Dial Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
9-4. Induced Current Magnetization 12-8. Acceptable and Unacceptable
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Shaft Shoulder and
9-5. Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection Fillet Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 12-9. Acceptable Shaft Shoulder/Fillet
9-6. Eddy Current Inspection Procedure . . . . 9-5 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
9-7. Principle of Hardness Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 12-10. Check Radial Runout of Shaft Bearing
Seat with a Dial Indicator . . . . . . . . . 12-8
10-1. Removal of Perspiration Residues
with Fingerprint Neutralizer . . . . . . . 10-2 12-11. Breaking of Shaft Corners . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12-12. Special Thrust Markings on an
10-2. Contamination of Lubricants by
Angular-Contact Bearing . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Improper Handling Procedures . . . . 10-3
12-13. Acceptable and Unacceptable
10-3. Pressured Lubrication System for Installation Methods for
Dispensing Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Shaft-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
10-4. Grease Dispensing Table for 12-14. Directional and Sequential Markings
Lubricating Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 on Stack Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
10-5. Grease Table in Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 12-15. Installing Shaft-Mounted Bearings with
10-6. Adjustable Greasing Head for an Arbor Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Lubricating Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 12-16. Modified Pipe Tool for
10-7. Removing Excess Grease with a Mounting Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Stainless Steel Spatula . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 12-17. Mandrel for Installing Housing-
10-8. Hand Lubrication of Bearings . . . . . . . . 10-8 Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
xxiii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-18. Mounting a Self-Aligning Bearing 13-2. Aluminum Overwrap and Plastic

Using a Stabilizing Ring . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Coating of Installed Bearing . . . . . . . 13-3
12-19. Mandrel Designs for Installing Needle 13-3. Grease-Lubricated Bearing that has
Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 been Vapor Degreased . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
12-20. Mandrel for Installing Wheel 13-4. Typical Grease Gun Used for In-Place
Bearing Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Lubrication of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
12-21. Mounting Thrust Bearings in a 13-5. Flush-Type Grease Fitting with
Housing and on a Shaft . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Greasing Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
12-22. Effect of Misalignment on 13-6. Zerk-Type Grease Fitting with
Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Grease Nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
12-23. Duplex Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . 12-16 13-7. Adapters for In-Place Greasing of
12-24. Thermostatically Controlled Oven for Shielded Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Thermal Expansion of Bearings . . 12-17 13-8. Pressure Lubrication Equipment
12-25. Recommended Temperature for Greasing Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Differentials for 14-1. Common Terminology and Dimensional
Mounting Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18 Controls for Instrument Bearings . . 14-3
12-26. Hot Oil Tank for Thermal Expansion 14-2. Different Outer Ring Designs Used in
of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19 Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
12-27. Compression Gage for Measuring
14-3. Special Types of Instrument
Retention/Pushout Forces . . . . . . . 12-19
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
12-28. Bearing Retention by a
14-4. Types of Gimbal Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Bolted Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12-29. Staking Methods for Retaining 14-5. Types of Rotor Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Housing-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . 12-20 14-6. Types of Gyro Rotors, Shafts
12-30. Self-Centering Circumferential Line and Separable Outer Rings . . . . . . . 14-7
Staking Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21 14-7. Types of Miniature Bearings . . . . . . . . . 14-8
12-31. Poor Staking Impressions from 14-8. Code Marks on Instrument Bearings
Wrong Staking Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 to Designate Type of Steel
12-32. Roller Swaging Tool for Housing and Identify Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . 14-9
Staking Retention Method . . . . . . . . 12-24 14-9. Defective New Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
12-33. Sleeve Type Housing 14-10. Deep-Groove Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . 14-10
Retention Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 14-11. Angular-Contact Bearing Puller . . . . . 14-10
12-34. Outer Ring Groove (V-Groove) 14-12. Improved Angular-Contact
Retention Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25 Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
12-35. Outer Ring V-Groove Type Spherical 14-13. Small Bore Radial Bearing Puller . . . . 14-10
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 14-14. R-2 Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
12-36. Housing Dimensions for V-Groove
14-15. Single-Row, Deep-Groove
Type Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Bearing Puller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
12-37. Installing V-Groove Type Bearings . . 12-26
14-16. Cone (Inner Ring) Bearing Puller . . . . 14-11
12-38. Staking Tool for V-Groove
Type Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26 14-17. Removing Small
Pivot-Type Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
12-39. Roller Swaging Tool for
V-Groove Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 14-18. Solvent Soak Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
12-40. Correct Method of Applying Adhesive 14-19. Self-Contained Pressure
to a Grease Groove Spray Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Type Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 14-20. Instrument Bearing Cleaning
12-41. Checking Installed Bearing for Process (Solvent Based) . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Internal Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28 14-21. Instrument Bearing Cleaning
13-1. Application of Plastic Coating to Process (Aqueous Based) . . . . . . . 14-19
Rod End Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 14-22. Torque Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
xxiv
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-24. Starting Torque Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30 A-10. Ball Bearing, Double-Row with
14-23. Running Torque Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29 Vertex of Contact Angle
14-25. Model II Barden Smoothrator . . . . . . . 14-31 Outside of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
14-26. Calibration Setup for Model II A-11. Ball Bearing, Double-Row, Internal
Smoothrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33 Self-Aligning Raceway of Outer
Ring Spherical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
14-27. Oil Filtration Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
A-12. Tapered Bore, Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
14-28. Hypodermic Syringe with Filter
Holder Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35 A-13. Cam Follower Needle Roller Bearing
Outer Ring and Roller Assembly . . . A-31
14-29. Location of Barrier Film Coating on
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38 A-14. Tapered Roller Bearing Single-Row . . A-31
14-30. Barrier Film Coated Surfaces of A-15. Tapered Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
Shielded Flange Bearing . . . . . . . . . 14-38 Double Raceway Cup, Separate
Cones, Adjustable by Cone Spacer,
14-31. Shaft-to-Bearing Bore Cageless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Fit-up Nomograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-43
A-16. Ball Bearing, Single Row, Seal
14-32. Housing-to-Bearing OD Contact Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Fit-up Nomograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
A-17. Rolling Bearing Corner Details . . . . . . . A-32
14-33. Rotor Bearing Retainer
A-18. Tapered Roller Bearing, Single-Row,
Clearance Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Locating Flange on Outer Ring
14-34. Ring Holding Arbor for Outside Diameter, with Cage . . . . . . A-32
Polishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47
A-19. Tapered Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
15-1. Approximate Sizes of Double Raceway Cup Separate
Common Particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Cones, Adjustable with Cage . . . . . . A-32
15-2. Relative Sizes of Particulate A-20. Cylindrical Roller Bearing Unit
Contamination and Filter Assembly with Outer Ring
Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Locating Snap Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
15-3. Clean Room Clothing (Type I) . . . . . . . . 15-6 A-21. Ball Bearing, Single-Row,
15-4. Clean Room Clothing (Type II) . . . . . . . 15-8 Raceway Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
15-5. Apparatus for Filtering Solvents . . . . . 15-12 A-22. Cylindrical Roller Bearing Unit
A-1. Rolling Bearing with Tapered Assembly with Outer Ring
Adapter Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 Locating Snap Ring Groove . . . . . . . A-33
A-2. Rolling Bearing, External Self-Aligning A-23. Tapered Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
with Aligning Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 Double Raceway Cone, Separate
A-3. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction, Cups, Adjustable, with Cage . . . . . . A-33
with Self-Aligning Seat and A-24. Needle Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
Self-Aligning Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 External Self-Aligning Outer Ring
A-4. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Outside Diameter Spherical,
Angular-Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28 with Aligning Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A-5. Self-Aligning Roller Bearing, A-25. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Double
Single-Row, Internal Self-Aligning, Shield, Split Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Inner Ring Raceway Spherical, A-26. Ball Bearing, Duplex, Face-to-Face . . A-34
Angular-Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 A-27. Ball Bearing, Duplex, Tandem . . . . . . . A-34
A-6. Ball Bearing, Duplex, Back-to-Back . . A-29 A-28. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single
A-7. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Direction, Washers with
Filling Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 Groove of Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-8. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, A-29. Shaft and Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Nonfilling Slot (Conrad) . . . . . . . . . . . A-29 A-30. Rolling Bearing with Flange of
A-9. Ball Bearing, Double-Row with Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Vertex of Contact Angle A-31. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction,
Inside of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30 Washers with Flat Raceways . . . . . . A-35
xxv
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
A-32. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, with A-49. Ball Bearing, Single-Row,

Locating Snap Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 Separable (Magneto Type) . . . . . . . . A-39
A-33. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, A-50. Needle Roller Bearing, Single-Row,
Shield Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 Outer Ring and Roller Assembly . . . A-39
A-34. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical A-51. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, External
Rollers, Single Direction, Self-Aligning Outer Ring,
Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35 Outside Diameter Spherical . . . . . . . A-39
A-35. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Outer A-52. Ball Bearing, Single-Row,
Ring with Internal Roller Split Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Retaining Snap Ring Grooves . . . . . A-36 A-53. Tapered Roller Bearing, Single-Row,
A-36. Clutch Release Bearing, Cageless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Angular Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36 A-54. Self-Aligning Roller Bearing,
A-37. Self-Aligning Roller Bearing, Double-Row, Internal Self-Aligning,
Double-Row, Internal Self-Aligning, Outer Ring Raceway Spherical . . . . A-39
Inner Ring Raceway Spherical, A-55. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Single-Row,
Separate Outer Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36 Outer Ring and Roller Assembly . . . A-40
A-38. Self-Aligning, Roller Bearing, A-56. Ball Bearing, Rod End, Female . . . . . . A-40
Double-Row, Internal Self-Aligning, A-57. Ball Bearing, Rod End, Male . . . . . . . . . A-40
Inner Ring Raceway Spherical . . . . . A-36 A-58. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Inner
A-39. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical Ring and Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . A-40
Rollers, Double Direction, Two A-59. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Separable
Self-Aligning Seats and Washers, Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
One Piece Center Plate Flat Seat,
One Inside Locating Collar, Two A-60. Tapered Roller Thrust Bearing
Roller Cage Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . A-37 with Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-40. Thrust Ball Bearing, Double Direction A-61. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Seal,
Large Outside Diameter Labyrinth Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Center Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37 A-62. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical
A-41. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Single-Row, Rollers, Single Direction,
Separable Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37 One Flat, One Self-Aligning
Seat with Aligning Washer . . . . . . . . A-41
A-42. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical
Rollers, Double Direction, Flat A-63. Thrust Ball Bearing, Double Direction,
Seats, One Roller Cage Assembly, with Small Bore Center Washer . . . . A-41
Inner and Outer Locating Sleeves . . A-37 A-64. Cylindrical Roller Bearing Unit
A-43. Needle Roller Bearing, Single-Row, Assembly with Roller Retaining
with Roller Retaining and Snap Ring in Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Locating Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 B-1. Microstructures of Common
A-44. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Separable Bearing Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Outer Ring with Loose B-2. Consumable Electrode Vacuum
Outer Ring Rib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Melt Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
A-45. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Separable B-3. Operating Temperature Ranges
Inner Ring with Loose of Common Bearing Materials . . . . . . B-6
Inner Ring Rib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 B-4. Hardness of Bearing Steels at
A-46. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Inner Different Temperature Levels . . . . . . . B-8
Ring with Loose Rib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 B-5. Manufacturing Steps for
A-47. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction, Bearing Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Washers with Groove of B-6. Distribution of Subsurface Shear
Raceway and Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38 Stresses in Rolling Bearings . . . . . . B-12
A-48. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical B-7. Typical Life Dispersion Curve for
Rollers, Single Direction Flat Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Seats, Outside Weather Shed . . . . . A-38 B-8. Calculation of Bearing Life . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
xxvi
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-9. Types of Loads Encountered B-35. Exaggerated Illustration of

in Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Bearing Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
B-10. Load Capacity as a Function B-36. Diagram Showing Overlap of Mounting
of Ball Complement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16 Seat and Bearing Tolerances . . . . . . B-43
B-11. Load Capacity as a Function of B-37. Radial Clearance in
Rows of Rolling Elements . . . . . . . . . B-17 Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
B-12. Load Capacity as a Function B-38. Axial Clearance in Rolling Bearings . . B-44
of Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17 B-39. Checking for Eccentricity in
B-13. Actual Shape of Active Surfaces Pulley Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
of Ball Bearing Under Load . . . . . . . . B-17 B-40. Checking for Wobble Clearance
B-14. Load Distribution in a Ball in Pulley Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
Bearing Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 B-41. Gaging Practices for Type NAA
Needle Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . B-77
B-15. Contact Area for Ball Bearings
Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 B-42. Gaging Practices for Type NAB
Needle Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . B-79
B-16. Contact Area for Roller Bearings
Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20 B-43. Gaging Practices for Type NBC,
NBE, NBF, NBK, NBL Needle
B-17. Modified Line Contact for Roller Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-79
Bearings Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
B-44. Gaging Practices for Type NCA
B-18. Effects of Raceway Curvature Needle Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . B-79
on Load Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22 B-45. Tolerance Ranges for Shaft and
B-19. Effects of Ring Rotation Housing Bearing Seats . . . . . . . . . . . B-82
on Bearing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22 B-46. Side Clamp Mounting the Outer
B-20. Effects of Internal Clearance Ring of an Instrument Bearing . . . . . B-83
on Load Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22 B-47. Side Clamp Mounting the Inner
B-21. Applied Loads Setting on Ring of an Instrument Bearing . . . . . B-83
Angular-Contact Bearings . . . . . . . . . B-23 B-48. Double Snap Ring Retention of
B-22. Effect of Applied Forces on Load Bearing in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
Distribution in Angular-Contact B-49. Single Snap Ring Retention of
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24 Bearing in a Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84
B-23. Contact Angles in Thrust Bearings . . . B-25 B-50. Spun-in Housing Retention
B-24. Load-Deflection Curve for of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85
Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25 B-51. Spun-in Housing Retention
B-25. Methods of Preloading of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-85
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26 B-52. Spun-in Shaft Retention of Bearing . . . B-85
B-26. Method of Manufacturing B-53. Staked-in Housing Retention
Preload Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27 of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
B-27. Resistance to Overturning Moments B-54. Staked-on Shaft Retention
of Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27 of Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
B-28. Fundamentals of Lubrication . . . . . . . . . B-28 B-55. Cemented-in Retention of Bearing . . . B-86
B-56. Standard Clean Room Designs with
B-29. Properties of Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
Associated Airflow Patterns
B-30. Properties of Solid Film Lubricants . . . B-29 Removed through Exhaust Grilles
B-31. Gas Lubricated Hydrodynamic and Located in the Opposite Wall . . . . . . B-87
Hydrostatic Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30 B-57. General Layout of a Depot Level
B-32. Properties of Gas as a Lubricant . . . . . B-31 Bearing Processing Facility . . . . . . . B-88
B-33. Temperature Selection Chart for B-58. Inspection and Gaging Room . . . . . . . . B-89
Military Specification Greases . . . . . B-40 B-59. Temperature Controlled Ovens for
B-34. Effects of Tolerances on Temporary Bearing Storage . . . . . . . B-90
Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42 B-60. Conversion of Inches to Millimeters . . B-90
xxvii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-61. Conversion of Pounds to Grams C-24. Metal Transfer from Retainer to

and Ounces to Grams . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91 Ball Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C-1. Oscillating Ball Paths Indicating C-25. Metal Contamination in
Misaligned Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 New Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-2. Fatigue Spalled Raceway Caused C-26. Metal Contamination in Helicopter
by Misaligned Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Transmission Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
C-3. Dynamic Imbalance Indications on C-27. Abrasive Contamination Crushed
Ball Bearing Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 between Raceways and
C-4. Ball Path Indicating Out-of-Round Rolling Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Shaft Bearing Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 C-28. Eccentric Wear of Retainer
C-5. Ball Path Indicating Out-of-Round from Abrasive Contamination . . . . . . C-13
Housing Bearing Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 C-29. Retainer and Balls Worn from
C-6. Ball Path Indicating Excessive Shaft Abrasive Contamination . . . . . . . . . . C-13
Mounting Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-30. Fatigue Spalling at an Indentation
C-7. Ball Path Indicating Excessive on a Roller Bearing Raceway . . . . . . C-14
Housing Mounting Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
C-31. Abrasive Particles Imbedded in the
C-8. Fatigue Spalled Rollers Caused
Silver Plating of a
by Misaligned Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Bearing Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-9. Fatigue Spalled Roller Bearing Raceway
Caused by Misaligned Rings . . . . . . . C-3 C-32. Abrasive Contamination Washed Out
of Gearbox Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C-10. “Dog Bone” Wear from Roller
Skewing (10X MAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C-33. Corrosion on New Bearings
C-11. Cracks in Retainer Roller Pocket After 6-Month Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
from Roller Skewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C-34. Roller Bearing Inner Ring That
C-12. Axial Scoring and Galling of Roller Operated After Corrosion
Bearing from Improper Had Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Assembly Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C-35. Etched Outer Ring Raceway from
C-13. Improperly Installed Elliptical Roller Moisture in the Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . C-15
Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 C-36. Corrosion of Wheel Bearing Cup from
C-14. Cracked Inner Ring of Ball Bearing Gross Water Contamination . . . . . . . C-15
Installed with Excessive C-37. Fatigue Spalling from
Interference Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Static Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
C-15. Axially Scored Bore of Ball Bearing Ring C-38. Corrosion Initiated Fatigue
Installed with Excessive Spalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Interference Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 C-39. Corrosion Pitting of M50 Tool Steel . . . C-16
C-16. Worn Shaft from Loose Shaft-to- C-40. Corrosion Pit in M50 Tool Steel . . . . . . C-16
Bearing Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
C-41. False Brinelling of a Tapered
C-17. Types of Bearing Misalignment . . . . . . . C-7
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-18. Bearing Failure Caused by
Misaligned Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 C-42. Types of Vibration that Cause
False Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-19. Bearing Damaged by Applying
Removal Force through C-43. Fretting Corrosion on Bearing Split
the Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Ring Face Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17
C-20. Brinelled Ball Bearing from Improper C-44. Fretting Corrosion on Bore of Ball
Removal Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Bearing and the Shaft Mounting . . . C-18
C-21. Bearing Damaged When Puller Tool C-45. Severe False Brinelling and Cracking
Slipped During Removal . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 of Roller Bearing Outer Ring . . . . . . C-19
C-22. Smear Marks Over Lay of C-46. Fatigue Spalling and Cracking of
Roller Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Active Load Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
C-23. Assembly Smear Marks Flattened C-47. Fatigue Spalling Showing Characteristics
by Rollers During Rotation . . . . . . . . C-10 of Texture and Geometry . . . . . . . . . . C-19
xxviii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
C-48. Metalloraphic Section of a Fatigue C-66. Smearing on Ends of Rollers and Sides
Spall (100X Mag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19 of Retainer Roller Pockets from
C-49. Fatigue Spall Originating at a Excessive Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . C-27
Subsurface Inclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 C-67. Fatigue Spalled and Fractured Ring of
C-50. Scanning Electron Microphotograph of an Angular-Contact Bearing Due
a Fatigue Spall on a Roller End . . . . C-20 to Excessive Radial
C-51. Fatigue Fracture Originating at a and Axial Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27
Corrosion Pit on the Bore of C-68. Cracked Retainer from Cyclic
a Roller Bearing Inner Ring . . . . . . . C-21 Loads Developed by Unbalanced
C-52. Fatigue Cracking at an Electrical Arc Rotating Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
Damaged Area on a Ball C-69. Microphotograph of Electrical Arc
Bearing Raceway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21 Damaged Ball Bearing Raceway . . . C-28
C-53. Peeling Fatigue Around C-70. Loose Retainer Rivet in a
Circumferential Scratch Gearbox Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-28
(SEM Photograph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-21 C-71. Loose Retainer Rivet Lodged
C-54. Fatigue Fracture at an Inner Ring of in Scavenge Pump Assembly . . . . . . C-28
a Ball Bearing Due to Plastic C-72. Nonmetallic Inclusion Found in
Deformation of the Raceway . . . . . . C-22 Bearing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
C-55. Plastic Deformation and Fatigue C-73. Slag Inclusion in Inner Ring of a
Cracking of Inner Ring Tapered Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
Raceway of Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . C-21 C-74. Lap Defect with Slag Inclusions
in a Roller of a Tapered
C-56. Plastic Deformation and Fatigue
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29
Spalling of Ball Bearing Raceway
from Excessive Temperature C-75. Cracks in Rollers Caused by
Encountered During Thermal Grinding Stresses Introduced
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23 During Manufacture
(Surfaces Were Etched) . . . . . . . . . . C-29
C-57. Fatigue Spalling of Ball Bearing Inner
Ring Raceway Caused by C-76. Grinding Cracks in Inner Ring Bore
Excessive Radial Loads . . . . . . . . . . C-22 Chamfer Surface of
a Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
C-58. Fractured Inner Ring Caused by
Shock Type Radial Load . . . . . . . . . . C-22 C-77. Typical Infrared Spectrophotometer for
Identification of Lubricants and
C-59. Severe Skidding and Fatigue Spall Preservatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31
Damage Caused by Insufficient
Loads to Maintain Roller-to- C-78. Infrared Spectrogram Showing Traces
Raceway Rolling Contact . . . . . . . . . C-24 of Two Different
Specification Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32
C-60. Metallographic Section of Roller
C-79. Silicone Lubricant Deteriorated to
Bearing Raceway with
Dryness by Operation
Skid Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25
in High Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
C-61. Fatigue Spalling of Ball Bearing C-80. Fatigue Spalling and Fracture of Ball
Raceway from Excessive Bearing Ring from Loss
Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-25 of Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
C-62. Incorrect Application of Thrust Load C-81. Cracks in Side of Ball Bearing
to Angular-Contact Bearing . . . . . . . C-26 Retainer from Operation
C-63. Fatigue Spalling of Angular-Contact with Inadequate Lubrication . . . . . . . C-33
Bearing from Excessive C-82. Cracks Between Ball Pockets of Ball
Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26 Retainer from Operation with
C-64. Incorrect Application of Thrust Load Inadequate Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . C-33
to Filling Slot-Type Ball Bearing . . . . C-27 C-83. Progressive Failure of Silicone Grease
C-65. Incorrect Application of Thrust Load Due to Improper Selection
to Self-Aligning Ball Bearing . . . . . . . C-27 as a Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-34
xxix
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
LIST OF TABLES
2-1. Listing of ABMA and 12-5. Proof Test of Adhesive Bonded

ANSI Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Bearing with Interference Fits . . . . 12-26
4-1. Sampling Plan for New Bearing 14-1. Cleaning Solution Requirements . . . . 14-12
Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 14-2. Radial Internal Clearance for
5-1. List of Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Radial Instrument
6-1. Recommended Wheel Speeds Precision Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
in Surface Feet per Minute . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 14-3. Radial Internal Clearance for Torque
6-2. Speed Chart for Determining Tube Instrument Ball Bearings . . . . 14-23
Surface Speed of 14-4. Radial Internal Clearance for Extra
Buffing/Polishing Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Thin Instrument Ball Bearings . . . . 14-23
7-1. Coloration of AISI 52100 Bearing 14-5. Size Classification of Bore and Outer
Steel vs Temperature Environment . . . 7-7 Diameter Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
7-2. Visual Inspection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 14-6. Torque Test Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . 14-27
7-3. Visual Inspection Criteria for 14-7. Average Starting Torque Values
Bearing Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 (ABEC-7P Bearings) Bendix
8-1. Terminology and Usage of Models 13716-6-A
Graded Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 and 13717-2-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
8-2. Tolerances for Gage Blocks (per 14-8. Smoothrator Vibration Limits
Federal Specification of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
GGG-G-15B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 14-9. Amount of Oil to Use for
8-3. Cosine Error vs Angle of Gage Specific Bearing Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Stylus (Figure 8-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 14-10. Typical Shaft and Housing Fits
8-4. Minimum Dimensional Inspection for Miniature and
Requirements for Used Bearings . . . . 8-9 Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39
8-5. Stylus Pressures for Gaging 14-11. Typical Shaft and Housing Fits for
Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Spindle and Turbine Bearings . . . . 14-40
8-6. Tolerance for Setting Rings . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 14-12. Recommended Mounting Fits for
9-1. Current Settings for Magnetizing Random Assembly of
Bearing Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Non-Classified Bearings
(Dimensions in 0.0001 inch) . . . . . . 14-41
9-2. Approximate Tensile Strength for
Rockwell C Hardness 15-1. Contamination Resulting from
Numbers for Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Personnel Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15-2. Maximum Contamination Levels for
11-1. Types of Barrier Materials for
Clean Rooms per Federal
Packaging Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Standard FED-STD-209 . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
11-2. Surface Cleanliness Requirements
17-1. Specification Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
for Precision Clean
Packaging Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 17-2. Superseded Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
11-3. Surface Cleanliness Requirements 17-3. List of Consumable Material . . . . . . . . . 17-5
for Ultraprecision Clean Nylon 17-4. New Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14
Packaging Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 18-1. Bearing Installation, Removal,
12-1. Proof Test of Impression Stake and Maintenance Equipment . . . . . . 18-2
Bearing Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 18-2. Bearing Processing Equipment . . . . . . 18-3
12-2. V-Groove Type Bearing 18-3. Bearing Inspection and
Installation Requirements Gaging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
(See Figure 12-36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 18-4. Clean Room Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
12-3. Staking Tool Requirements for B-1. Through-Hardened Rolling Bearing
V-Groove Type Bearings Steels (Normal Percent by Weight) . . B-3
(See Figure 12-38) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23 B-2. Conversion of AMS to AISI
12-4. Proof Test of V-Groove Designations for Common
Bearing Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24 Bearing Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
xxx
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
B-3. Stainless Steel and Their Uses . . . . . . . B-6 B-24. Tolerances for Instrument Precision
B-4. Consumable Electrode Vacuum Ball Bearings, Except Torque
Melted Bearing Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 Tube Type and Extra Thin
B-5. Hardness of Bearing Steels at Series, ABEC-7P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58
Different Temperature Levels . . . . . . . B-7 B-25. Tolerances for Instrument Precision
Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube
B-6. Coefficients of Thermal Expansion . . . B-10
Type and Extra Thin Series,
B-7. Coefficient of Friction of ABEC-9P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60
Rolling Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18 B-26. Tolerances for Torque Tube Type
B-8. Military Specifications for and Extra Thin Series Instrument
Lubrication Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32 Precision Ball Bearings,
B-9. Military Specifications for Solid ABEC-5T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
Film Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32 B-27. Tolerances for Torque Tube Type
B-10. Military Specifications for and Extra Thin Series Instrument
Lubricating Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32 Precision Ball Bearings,
B-11. Physical and Chemical Properties ABEC-7T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-63
of Specification B-28. Tolerances for Instrument
Lubricating Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34 Semi-Precision Ball Bearings,
Except Torque Tube Type and
B-12. Physical and Chemical Properties
Extra Thin Series, ABEC-3 . . . . . . . . B-65
of Specification Lubricating Oils . . . B-37
B-29. Tolerances for Airframe Bearings . . . . B-66
B-13. Inspection Methods for Testing Dry
Film Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37 B-30. Tolerances For Airframe
Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-67
B-14. Inspection Methods for Testing
B-31. Axial Play for New Airframe
Grease Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
Bearings (MIL-C-7949) . . . . . . . . . . . B-68
B-15. Inspection Methods for Testing B-32. Axial Play for New Airframe Rod
Oil Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38 End Ball Bearings (MIL-B-6039) . . . B-69
B-16. Comparison of NLGI Grades to B-33. Eccentricity and Wobble Clearances
Worked Penetration Values . . . . . . . B-39 for New Aircraft Control
B-17. Standard Shaft Mounting Fit Pulleys (MIL-P-7034) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
(ABEC-1 Tolerance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45 B-34. Tolerances for Balls and Rollers in
B-18. ABEC-1, RBEC-1 Tolerances for Assembled ABEC-1
Radial Ball, Cylindrical and Class Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-70
Spherical Roller Bearings, B-35. Tolerances for Loose Chrome
Except Magneto Bearings . . . . . . . . . B-46 Alloy Steel Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-71
B-19. ABEC-3 Tolerances for Radial Ball B-36. Tolerances for Loose Corrosion
Bearings, Magneto Bearings . . . . . . B-48 Resistant Steel Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-72
B-20. ABEC-5, RBEC-5 Tolerances for B-37. Hardness Ranges for Loose Balls . . . . B-73
Radial Ball and Cylindrical B-38. Hardness Corrections for
Roller Bearings, Except Ball Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-73
Magneto Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50 B-39. Tolerance Values for Radial Internal
B-21. ABEC-7 Tolerances for Radial Clearance of Single-Row
Ball Bearings, Except Radial Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-74
Magneto Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52 B-40. Tolerance Values for Radial Internal
B-22. ABEC-9 Tolerances for Radial Clearance of Cylindrical
Ball Bearings, Except Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-75
Magneto Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54 B-41. Conversion of Fractions
B-23. Tolerances for Instrument Precision to Decimals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-92
Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube B-42. Millimeters to Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93
Type and Extra Thin Series, B-43. Temperature Conversion Table -
ABEC-5P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56 Centigrade to Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . B-94
xxxi
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
LIST OF TABLES (Continued)
B-44. Selecting Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . B-95 B-54. Shaft and Housing Fits for KP-B and
B-45. Common Instrument Bearing KP-BS Series Airframe Bearings . . B-110
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96 B-55. Shaft and Housing Fits for B500
B-46. Shaft Tolerance Designations for Series Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111
Radial Ball and Roller Bearings . . . . B-98 B-56. Shaft Tolerance Designations for
B-47. Housing Tolerance Designations for Thrust Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111
Radial Ball and Roller Bearings . . . . B-99 B-57. Housing Tolerance Designations
B-48. Effect of Operating Loads on Shaft for Thrust Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-112
and/or Housing Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-99 B-58. Tapered Roller Bearing
Fitting Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-112
B-49. Shaft Bearing Seat Diameters for
Metric Radial Ball B-59. Shaft Tolerances for Tapered
and Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-100 Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
B-50. Housing Bearing Seat Diameters B-60. Housing Tolerances for Tapered
for Metric Radial Ball and Roller Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113
Bearings of ABEC-1 or C-1. Flame Testing Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . C-24
RBEC-1 Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105 D-1. F404 Propulsion Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
B-51. Shaft Bearing Seat Diameters for Inch D-2. J52 Propulsion Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Dimension Radial Ball Bearings D-3. T56 Propulsion Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
of ABEC-1 Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . B-107 D-4. T58 Propulsion Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
B-52. Housing Bearing Seat Diameters for D-5. T64 Propulsion Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Inch Dimension Radial Ball D-6. H-46 Rotorhead and
Bearings of ABEC-1 Tolerances . . B-108 Driveline Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
B-53. Housing Fits for General Airframe D-7. H-53 Rotorhead and
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109 Driveline Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
xxxii
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
TECHNICAL PUBLICATION DEFICIENCY REPORT

INCORPORATION LIST
The following TPDRs are incorporated as part of this change. This page shall remain
with this change; next change will provide new listing page with latest TPDR
incorporation.
Identification No./
QA Sequence No. Location
None
xxxiii/(xxxiv blank)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION I
INTRODUCTION
1-1. GENERAL. useful life expectancies far exceeding the design

life of the equipment in which they are installed.
1-2. Antifriction or rolling bearings have, in the 1-6. SCOPE.
short span of 80 years, become an important part
of almost every mechanical device developed by 1-7. The instructions and information contained in
man. Their essential nature is particularly evident this manual cover the handling and maintenance
in modern aircraft where thousands of different sizes of a bearing from the time it is received from the
and types of bearings are utilized. Bearings make bearing manufacturer or prime contractor, through
it possible for modern aircraft to meet ever-in- its entire operational life, until it is finally rejected
creasing demands for greater maneuverability, more as unfit for aeronautical or industrial use. These
responsive performance under conditions of extreme instructions include removal, cleaning, limited re-
temperature changes, supersonic speeds and very work, inspection, gaging, lubrication and installation
high loads. With the advent of the space age, procedures; storage requirements for uninstalled
bearings operating in rockets, missiles and space new and processed bearings; maintenance require-
vehicles are required to function under even more ments while the bearing is in a subassembly in
difficult circumstances. A few of the many problems Supply stock and during operational life in the
confronting the modern design engineer are: extreme aircraft; and bearing protection measures necessary
temperature differentials, extremely high gyroscopic during repair of the aircraft.
forces, nuclear and cosmic radiation and long life
lubrication requirements for interplanetary space 1-8. APPLICATION.
travel. All of these technological problems, and many
more not mentioned, push the state-of-the-art of 1-9. DEPOT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES.
bearing technology to the limit. These instructions consolidate existing information,
policies, procedures and requirements on the han-
1-3. The precision and quality that is designed and dling, processing, maintenance, rework and usage
manufactured into a bearing cannot be easily dupli- of aeronautical bearings, and shall be complied with
cated, as evidenced by the importance placed on by all depot level activities having physical custody
bearing manufacturing plants during times of war. of aeronautical equipment.
Destruction of an enemy’s bearing production capac-
1-10. INTERMEDIATE AND ORGANIZATIONAL
ity and capability can have a disastrous effect on
LEVEL MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES. The instruc-
their war machine and will greatly reduce their
tions contained in Section XIII are applicable to
capability to wage war. Conversely, a bearing short-
intermediate and organizational level maintenance
age in this country, developed through misuse of
activities.
existing and/or future bearing stocks, could deal a
crippling blow to our own national defense program. 1-11. USE OF MANUAL.
The recurrent problem of extended lead times for
the procurement of new bearings makes it necessary 1-12. Section I contains an introduction and all
to establish a realistic, coordinated tri-service bear- policies that affect the bearing program.
ing program to maximize the utilization of the
Services’ bearing supplies. 1-13. Section II contains descriptive information
concerning bearing types, configurations and de-
1-4. PURPOSE. signs.
1-14. Section III prescribes procedures for removal

1-5. This manual has been prepared with two of bearings from their respective assemblies and
primary objectives in mind: (1) to provide sufficient installations, and how they should be handled and
bearing removal, handling, installation and mainte- protected until they are reused.
nance instructions to protect and preserve precision
and performance capabilities originally built into the 1-15. Section IV prescribes handling and routing
bearing, and (2) to prescribe procedures and pro- procedures for new and used bearings through an
cesses for the reuse of the many bearings that have approved bearing processing facility prior to use.
1-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
1-16. Section V prescribes recommended cleaning 1-26. Section XV contains information concerning
procedures and the equipment required to accom- bearing processing facilities. Includes personnel
plish the cleaning process. requirements and specific facility and environmental
control requirements.
1-17. Section VI prescribes allowable rework proce-
dures that can be performed by depots on bearings 1-27. Section XVI contains information concerning
used in aeronautical components. This chapter does personnel requirements for bearing processing. Ex-
not include specialized rework procedures authorized perience, training and certification requirements are
for use only by the Services’ Technical Repair provided.
Centers for bearings. See Air Force T.O. 44B-1-102
1-28. Section XVII provides a list of materials that
Chapter 6 for tri-service coordinated rework proce-
are used in bearing processing. Stock numbers, units
dures.
of issue and intended uses are provided.
1-18. Section VII prescribes visual inspection stan- 1-29. Section XIII provides a list of tooling and
dards and requirements used to accept or reject equipment that are used to remove, clean, inspect,
new and used bearings. lubricate and install bearings.
1-19. Section VIII prescribes dimensional inspection 1-30. Appendix A provides definitions of terms and
procedures and equipment used to check bearings phrases that are peculiar to bearings.
for conformance to manufacturer’s drawing and
engineering requirements. 1-31. Appendix B contains specialized engineering
data pertaining to bearing design, materials, bearing
tolerances, gaging practices, lubrication theory,
1-20. Section IX provides nondestructive proce- mounting fits and general conversion tables.
dures and equipment used to inspect bearings for
acceptability for use in aeronautical applications. 1-32. Appendix C provides detailed procedures for
conducting an in-depth failure analyses of aeronauti-
1-21. Section X prescribes lubrication and preserva- cal bearings.
tion procedures for bearings that are intended for
immediate use, for bearings placed in local storage, 1-33. Appendix D provides a listing of bearings
and for bearings being returned to Supply. Proper currently qualified for rework and candidates
techniques of lubrication are also provided. scheduled for such qualification by Naval Aviation
Depot North Island.
1-22. Section XI prescribes different methods to 1-34. DEVIATIONS.
package bearings for local and Supply storage, and
provides shelf life limits for specific methods of 1-35. Submit requests for permission to deviate from
preservation and different types of preservative specific requirements and/or policies of this technical
materials. manual to the appropriate responsible code in the
Naval Air Systems Command, the Army Aviation
1-23. Section XII prescribes the procedures and Systems Command or the Air Force Warner Robins
tooling used to install and retain bearings. Shaft Air Logistics Center.
and housing mountings are discussed with respect
to their effect on bearing operation. 1-36. PROPOSED MANUAL CHANGES.
1-37. Activities using this manual are encouraged

1-24. Section XIII prescribes depot, intermediate to submit, through appropriate channels, proposed
and organizational level maintenance requirements changes, corrections, deletions and additions to the
for bearings installed in aircraft and/or aircraft instructions, procedures and processes. Navy
assemblies. personnel will forward recommended changes to the
Naval Air Depot North Island, Code 434, San Diego,
1-25. Section XIV contains specialized information, California 92135-7058. Air Force personnel will
inspection and processing requirements for miniature request changes in accordance with Air Force T.
and instrument bearings, and processing and O. 00-5-1. Army personnel will request changes by
handling procedures for applying barrier film coating submitting DA Form 2028 through AMSAV-MR,
to selected bearing surfaces for improved lubricant Corpus Christi Army Depot, Corpus Christi, Texas
retention. 78419-6195.
1-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
1-38. Procedures, processes and/or policies con- established and maintained at each depot in accor-
tained in other applicable manuals and handbooks, dance with instructions contained in this manual.
such as Handbook of Service Instructions, Handbook All new and used bearings requiring inspection
of Overhaul Instruction and Handbook of Mainte- and/or processing shall be routed to, and processed
nance Instructions, that conflict with this manual shall in, the bearing facility. Bearings may be processed
be reported through the appropriate Service chan- in shops outside of the established bearing facility
nels for resolution. only when authorized by the local cognizant bearing
engineer and when the conditions, facilities, equip-
1-39. POLICIES AFFECTING ROLLING AND ment and personnel in the auxiliary bearing shops
PLAIN BEARINGS. comply with all applicable instructions contained in
this manual.
1-40. GENERAL. The bearing program at each
depot level aircraft repair facility must be well 1-44. Training Requirements. Bearing processing
organized and fully coordinated in order to properly facilities shall be staffed with well trained, competent
function. There should be adequate local engineering personnel. It shall be the responsibility of each depot
and administrative directives that clearly define and to develop and maintain an in-house training pro-
assign the responsibilities of all personnel in the gram to provide personnel with the specialized skills
bearing program, and that coordinate the program required for the bearing program. Refer to Section
with the total operation of the activity. Many difficul- XVI for detailed personnel training and certification
ties can arise when primary responsibilities for the requirements. Navy personnel should contact Naval
bearing program are divided between several admin- Aviation Depot, North Island if assistance is needed
istrative and/or technical codes. in establishing a certification program. The proper
use of personnel with backgrounds and experience
1-41. ENGINEERING RESPONSIBILITY. The local in the various fields of aircraft such as instruments,
control of all bearing processing Instructions, bearing powerplants, airframes, accessories and helicopter
substitutions, and the establishment and coordination dynamic components, can greatly improve the quality
of bearing inspection requirements shall be the and effectiveness of the judgment decisions required
responsibility of the engineering group at each for this critical job.
activity. Each depot level activity should, whenever
possible, assign a full time cognizant bearing engi- 1-45. Certification of Personnel. It shall be the
neer who will have the primary responsibility for responsibility of each depot level activity to develop
coordinating the bearing program for that activity. and implement specialized training courses for
The cognizant bearing engineer will help provide certifying personnel for the following functions within
the needed coordination on problems of common the bearing processing and inspection facility. Navy
concern with all the other branches and divisions personnel should contact Naval Aviation Depot North
of engineering, production, material planning and Island if assistance is required in establishing a
quality assurance. certification program.
1-42. Control of cleaning solutions, lubricants, pre- a. All inspection functions involving the accep-
servatives, packaging procedures and chemical pro- tance and rejection of new and used bearings.
cesses shall be the responsibility of the local
Materials Engineering/Physical Science Laboratory. b. Quality conformance, first article and spe-
Every effort should be made to conform to the cial inspections on new bearings performed under
recommended cleaning processes contained in Sec- Service and/or Defense Logistics Agency procure-
tion V. Changes to these procedures should be made ment contracts.
only when it is established that these processes
will not meet specific cleaning requirements, required c. Barrier film application.
equipment is not available, or when state or local
environmental regulations prevent the use of specific d. Buffing and polishing of bearings.
compounds or processes. Changes to these ap-
proved processes shall be issued as engineering e. Nondestructive testing of bearings.
directives and shall be coordinated with the respec-
tive Service Command headquarters and the Naval 1-46. E N G I N E E R I N G R E S P O N S I B I L I T Y F O R
Aviation Depot North Island. REFURBISHMENT/HONING PROCEDURES. Due
to the criticality of rolling element bearings, it is
1-43. BEARING PROCESSING RESPONSIBILITY necessary to establish adequate technical controls
(LEVEL I). A bearing processing facility shall be over all operations that effect and/or modify the
1-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
dimensional and/or physical characteristics of a 1-49. Prime Contractor Controlled Bearings. A

bearing. The need for extensive technical training prime contractor’s (OEM) part number is defined
of engineering personnel that will be responsible as the assembly, component, installation or airframe
for making decisions regarding the rework of critical manufacturer’s identification and is not to be con-
bearings cannot be overemphasized. Therefore, the fused with the bearing manufacturer’s part number.
Naval Air Systems Command, the Air Force Logistics These bearings shall be controlled as follows:
Command and the Army Aviation System Command
shall designate a specific activity that will be a. Standard Procedure - All bearings that have
responsible for the technical/engineering control over been assigned a prime contractor’s part number,
the refurbishment and/or regrind of bearings. Naval as referenced in the applicable illustrated parts
Aviation Depot North Island has been assigned this breakdown, drawings and/or specifications, shall be
responsibility by the Naval Air Systems Command. procured by the prime number assigned under the
The Air Force has designated the Warner Robins appropriate National Stock Number.
Air Logistics Center (WR-ALC/MMI). The Army has
designated AMSAV-MR Corpus Christi Army Depot, b. Bearings Bought Direct from the Bearing
Corpus Christi, Texas. Manufacturer - When bearings cannot be procured
through the Supply system in accordance with
1-47. BEARING REFURBISHMENT RESPONSI- paragraph 1-49a, or when directed by the responsi-
BILITY. A Technical Repair Center (TRC) for bear- ble Service command headquarters, they may be
ings shall be established and maintained by each purchased directly from the bearing manufacturer
Service. All bearings that have been designated as by using the prime contractor’s part number. Bear-
being refurbishable shall be shipped to the respec- ings shall meet all of the O.E.M. requirements unless
tive Service TRC for rework. Bearings shall be there is written deviation by the depot level cognizant
refurbished in accordance with the technical require- bearing engineer with concurrence from the respec-
ments contained in Section VI of Air Force tive Service command headquarters.
T.O.44B-1-102, and with supplementary require-
ments provided by the designated Service Bearing c. Emergency Procurement - When bearings
Engineering Center. Navy personnel should refer to cannot be procured by the assigned National Stock
Appendix D for listing of bearings currently qualified Number or the prime contractor’s part number, they
for rework and candidates scheduled for qualification may be procured, with the concurrence of the depot
b y N a v a l Av i a t i o n D e p o t N o r t h I s l a n d . N a v y cognizant bearing engineer and the respective Ser-
personnel must adhere to the latest revision of vice Command headquarters, by the complete bear-
NAVICP Field Instruction 4030.5. The Service TRC’s ing manufacturers part number. The bearings shall
for bearings are as follows: conform to all prime contractor drawing requirements
unless there is written deviation given by the depot
a. Air Force. Oklahoma City Air Logistics cognizant bearing engineer with concurrence from
Center, Tinker Air Force Base, Oklahoma the respective Service command headquarters.
b. Army. Corpus Christi Army Depot, Corpus 1-50. Complete Bearing Manufacturer ’s Part
Christi, Texas Number (No Prime Contractor Assigned Part
Number). The complete bearing manufacturer’s part
c. Navy. Naval Aviation Depot North Island, number is defined as that code system which details
San Diego, California all pertinent dimensional, material, testing, lubrication
and inspection requirements for a specific bearing.
1-48. BEARING PROCUREMENT POLICIES. Due The part number stamped or etched on the face
to the critical nature of aeronautical components and of a bearing ring is only the basic part number and
assemblies, the use of unqualified or substandard does not fully describe the bearing design or
bearings is a dangerous practice that can jeopardize performance parameters. The bearing manufacturer
the safety of flight personnel and result in loss of may have to be contacted for this data. Bearings
aircraft. Always use the bearing that has been called out in applicable illustrated parts breakdown
specifically designed for the application. The depot or drawings shall be ordered by this complete part
level cognizant bearing engineer shall be consulted number to ensure the procurement of the proper
when there is a question of design comparability bearings with the required design and performance
and/or adequacy of the bearings. The following characteristics. Adequate steps shall be taken to
instructions shall be adhered to and deviations shall completely decode the part number including lubrica-
be submitted in writing to the responsible Service tion requirements. The cognizant depot bearing
command headquarters. engineer will be responsible for assisting with
1-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
bearing identification and for specifying required NOTE

engineering parameters.
The primary danger of this practice is the
responsibility of a bearing failure resulting
1-51. RULES FOR SUBSTITUTION OF BEARINGS. from incorrect installation and/or the pres-
Unauthorized substitution of bearings is not per- ence of thrust loads that will pace the
mitted. However, in emergency situations or due to ball path in contact with the edge of the
long term shortages of a particular bearing, certain loading slot.
substitutions can be safely made. All pertinent
application and performance data must be available 1-56. Substitution of Sealed/Shielded Bearings
to permit proper selection of a substitute bearing. for Nonsealed/Shielded Bearings. Open or single
Precision gaging equipment shall be used for addi- sealed and shielded bearings can be made from
tional dimensional comparisons. Certain applica- double sealed and shielded bearings by removing
tions, due to their critical nature and uncertain fatigue one or both seals or shields, with all other parame-
life, should not have any changes incorporated ters being identical.
without factory approval. In all instances, bearing
selection and substitution shall be an engineering 1-57. Qualifying Bearings to a Stock Number or
responsibility with the technical support from the Drawing. Bearings under one national stock number
cognizant depot bearing engineer. Bearing shop may be requalified for use under another stock
workers shall not substitute bearings without proper number by one of the Service depots. The cognizant
engineering approval. The following substitutions can depot bearing engineer shall be responsible for
normally be made with engineering approval. providing the required technical direction to ensure
the complete bearing interchangeability.
1-52. Substitution of Higher Precision for Lower 1-58. PROCESSING OF BEARINGS BY DEPOT
Precision Bearings. In general, bearings of higher LEVEL ACTIVITIES. Route all bearings removed
precision can be substituted for any bearing of lower from airframes, engines, accessories, instruments
precision, with all other dimensional and perfor- and other aeronautical components during overhaul,
mance parameters being equal. An ABEC-5 bearing repair or rework at the depot to the designated
may be substituted for a bearing having an ABEC-3 bearing processing facility for inspection to determine
classification, with all other characteristics being serviceability for continued use. Used bearings shall
identical. be processed as required to meet current production
schedules and/or anticipated workload requirements.
1-53. S u b s t i t u t i o n o f S e a l e d B e a r i n g s f o r Forward rejected used bearings that are on the
Shielded Bearings. A sealed bearing can be authorized Service’s rework list to the applicable
substituted for a shielded bearing of the same type, Bearing Technical Repair Center for rework and
size, dimensional tolerances and operational charac- disposition. Navy personnel should refer to Appendix
teristics, except in high temperature or high speed D for list of bearing rework candidates and follow
applications. Rubbing speeds may cause excessive NAVICP Field Instruction 4030.5.
seal drag and overheating.
1-59. PROCESSING OF BEARINGS BY INTER-
MEDIATE LEVEL ACTIVITIES. Route all bearings
1-54. Substitution of Angular-Contact Bearings. removed from airframes, engines, accessories and
An angular-contact bearing having a contact angle other aeronautical components by intermediate level
of 25 degrees or more, may be substituted for a maintenance (IMA) personnel to the designated IMA
bearing having a contact angle of 25 degrees or bearing shop for cleaning and inspection to deter-
less, with all other parameters being identical. This mine serviceability for continued use and reinstalla-
type of substitution shall be limited to low and tion in the same or similar equipment. Rejected
medium speed applications. Consult engineering for bearings that are on the authorized Service rework
application details. list shall be preserved and shipped to the appropriate
Bearing Technical Repair Center for rework and
disposition.
1-55. Substitution of Bearings with Loading
Grooves. In some applications, a ball bearing having 1-60. RETURNING USED BEARINGS TO SUPPLY.
a loading groove may be substituted for a nonloading Used bearings that have been processed or refur-
groove-type bearing, with all other parameters being bished and certified as RFI by a designated Bearing
identical. The application should not have any Technical Repair Center can be returned to Supply
appreciable axial/thrust loads. stock as RFI material (See paragraph 1-43).
1-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE 1-62. Return of Bearings to a Service Bearing

Technical Repair Center. Bearings that have been
Depots other than those listed in para- identified by the Services as Level II refurbishable,
graph 1-43 shall not return used bearings and that have been rejected by a depot or an
to Supply unless authorized by their re- Intermediate Maintenance Activity, shall not be
spective Service Command. demilitarized. Preserve and ship the bearings to the
designated Service Bearing Technical Repair Center
1-61. DISPOSITION OF SURVEYED BEARINGS. (TRC) for possible rework, certification and return
Bearings that have been rejected for cause shall to Supply as RFI stock. Bearings must be cleaned,
be carefully disposed of to prevent the possible reuse preserved and packaged to prevent corrosion and
of rejected and/or defective bearings in other aircraft handling damage. The following types of bearings
assemblies. Requests are sometimes made for the will be subject to return to a bearing TRC:
return of the rejects or for samples of rejected
bearings. In order to minimize the possibility of using a. Engine main and differential shaft bearings.
defective bearings, the following rules shall apply:
b. Helicopter dynamic component bearings.
NOTE Economic justification shall be established by each
TRC.
The following rules do not apply to bear-
c. Short supply bearings designated for refur-
ings that are returned to a designated
bishment.
Service Bearing Technical Repair Center.
1-63. Use the following criteria to determine which
a. The bearing shop shall retain all surveyed bearings will be returned to the designated Service
and rejected bearings in a designated holding area Bearing Technical Repair Center:
and shall be responsible for their disposal as scrap
material. Precious metal platings and coatings on a. Bearings that are beyond the Level I
bearing components, such as silver, should be processing capability of the local Service activity.
salvaged by chemical stripping to realize a monetary
savings and to save a material in short national
b. Bearings that will require the special rework
supply.
operations called out for Level II Refurbishment (See
paragraph 6-15).
b. Submit all requests for rejected or question-
able bearings to the cognizant engineering office c. Bearings of sufficient replacement value to
for approval before the bearings are released by ensure economic justification. Economic justification
the bearing shop. shall be established by each TRC.
c. Departments and or activities sending bear- d. Bearings of sufficient size to facilitate re-
ings to the bearing shop shall submit in writing all work.
requests for the return of rejected bearings.
e. Bearings in critical short supply and/or long
d. Demilitarize (mutilate) all surveyed and lead time procurement status.
rejected bearings that have been removed from
critical components such as gas turbine engines, 1-64. RECEIVING INSPECTION OF NEW BEAR-
helicopter dynamic components and constant speed INGS. Subject all new bearings received from Supply
drives to prevent their reuse. Authority for this action stock that are used in aeronautical applications
is contained in the Defense Supply Agency Manual, designated as critical to an inspection prior to use.
Defense Disposal Manual, DSAM 4160.1. Immersion This policy will prevent the use of Non-RFI, unquali-
in a salt bath or equivalent is a recommended fied and/or defective bearings in critical aeronautical
method of demilitarization. applications. This policy covers all bearings procured
as follows:
NOTE
a. P r o c u r e m e n t t h r o u g h r e g u l a r S u p p l y
Do not demilitarize bearings that have channels - Sample Inspection.
been designated for refurbishment by one
or more of the Services (See paragraph b. Direct procurement from local distributors
1-62). and bearing manufacturers - 100 Percent Inspection.
1-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Bearings stocked in parts kits - Sample a. First Article Inspection.

Inspection.
b. Quality Conformance/Verification Program.
d. Bearing stocks obtained through interser-
vice agreements - 100 Percent Inspection. c. Special Inspection. Navy Special Inspection
bearings procured by a government agency, such
as DLA, for the Navy, shall be inspected at Naval
NOTE
Aviation Depot North Island or at the manufacturer’s
facility with Naval Air Depot North Island Engineering
New rod end and airframe bearings will oversight.
not require inspection prior to use unless
specified by the local cognizant bearing 1-68. BEARING REMOVAL POLICIES.
engineer.
CAUTION
1-65. Inspection of new bearings shall be the
responsibility of well trained personnel in the bearing Exercise sound judgment when determin-
processing facility. Route bearings to the bearing ing the in-place condition of bearings and
processing facility as soon as possible to prevent their suitability for an additional service
work stoppages and unnecessary interruptions of tour. Bearings are being checked under
production, and to reduce the possibility of corrosion ideal conditions when the equipment is
and physical damage. undergoing overhaul at the depot. Evi-
dence of bearing roughness and binding
1-66. The type and depth of the inspection will be will be magnified many times when the
determined by the instructions contained in Section bearing is loaded in flight. Bearing that
IV of this manual. New bearings shall be inspected feels stiff or rough during ground check
for condition in accordance with criteria contained will rotate with even more difficulty when
in the applicable overhaul instructions, drawings and subjected to operational temperatures and
the known end use for the particular bearings. Navy loads.
activities will prepare and submit Quality Deficiency
Reports (QDR) Standard Form 368 on each lot of 1-69. MAJOR OVERHAUL. (COMPLETE OVER-
defective new bearings. Air Force activities will HAUL). Major overhaul of aeronautical equipment
submit reports in accordance with T.O.00-35D-54. is complete disassembly/reassembly of the compo-
Army activities will submit reports in accordance with nent. While it is not the intent of this manual to
AR702-7-1. Defective material reports are used by establish the depth of overhaul necessary under
the procuring agencies to maintain bearing quality various conditions, it is a good practice to replace
and to preclude provisioning of new bearings based or service all bearings during major overhaul. Nor-
on misleading usage data. mally, replace all bearings during major overhaul
because of the difficulty of inspecting bearings in
place. All removed bearings shall be routed to an
1-67. SPECIAL BEARING INSPECTION PRO- approved bearing processing facility for inspection
GRAMS. New bearings designated critical applica- and processing (see paragraph 1-45).
tion are often sent to a designated Service depot
for special inspection before being accepted by the
government and before they are placed into the 1-70. Exceptions to the 100 percent bearing removal
Supply system. New bearings that are sent to policy are as follows:
designated depots by the Defense Logistics Agency
(DLA) or one of the Service Supply Offices shall a. Do not remove bearings that are held in
be routed to the bearing processing facility of the place by housing staking, riveting, adhesive bonding
designated Service depot for quality verification and/or other “permanent” type of installation reten-
inspection in accordance with the specific contract tion. Inspect these bearings in place. Remove the
document. The cognizant depot bearing engineer bearings only when directed by engineering or when
shall provide all of the necessary technical data for the bearing is defective.
inspecting the bearings for conformance to drawing
and contract requirements. A formal program with b. Do not remove bearings that are deeply
proper implementing instructions shall be established embedded in the airframe structures which would
at each depot that has been authorized to perform require major disassembly unless directed by engi-
the following special bearing inspections: neering.
1-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Inspect in-place bearings installed in ex- e. Replace all exposed bearings that have
posed airframe structures by disconnecting the been subjected to, and not protected from, steam
control linkages and rotating the individual bearings. cleaning, detergent cleaning, hard/soft grit abrasive
Inspect for looseness, roughness or stiffness caused blasting, or paint stripping compounds.
by wear, deterioration of lubricants or corrosion.
f. Check in-place Group B shielded airframe
NOTE and aircraft control bearings. Refer to paragraph
13-31 for detailed inspection criteria. Remove and
In-place inspection shall be carefully con- replace defective bearings. Whenever possible, lubri-
trolled and shall be performed by trained cate bearings that are left in place.
personnel. Refer to Section XIII for specif-
g. Check in-place Group B sealed airframe
ic instructions. Replace bearings if there
and aircraft control bearings using the visual inspec-
are any questions as to their serviceability
tion and “feel test” criteria contained in paragraph
regardless of the amount of disassembly.
13-31. Remove and replace defective bearings.
Conduct analytical studies on bearings left
Lubricate the bearings left in place when the
in place to determine service life and to
assembly is equipped with lubrication fittings.
establish realistic replacement intervals.
h. Sample inspect bearings that are installed
1-71. Summary of Bearing Removal Policies in aircraft components that have been subjected to
During Major Overhaul. Use the following instruc- extended protected storage, such as in dehydrated
tions to determine which bearings are to be removed containers. The components require only a check
during major overhaul: and test. Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical
Science Laboratory personnel should subject the
NOTE bearings to a random sampling inspection for condi-
tion of the lubricant. Components passing the check
The words “replace bearings” found in and test, and the bearing lubricant condition sample
various overhaul instructions and manuals inspection, will not require bearing replacement and
shall be defined to mean, “Replace bear- or bearing relubrication.
ings with new or processed used bearings
unless a predetermined life limit or reuse 1-72. LIMITED OVERHAUL. Policies covering this
restriction has been established for the type of rework also apply to such programs as minor
particular bearing.” overhaul, standard depot level maintenance, interim
overhaul and inspect and repair as necessary. These
a. Replace all Group A,C,D, and E bearings concepts of limited overhaul are developed due to
(See paragraph 2-100) with new or processed the high cost of modern aircraft, the limited quantity
bearings. Exceptions to this requirement is when of aircraft procured, their complexity and the cost
removal will destroy the bearing or mounting, or and difficulty of complete disassembly. It is assumed
when the bearing is permanently installed. Whenever that installed bearings, not affected by the required
possible, lubricate bearings left in place. repair, modification or overhaul, should be in good
condition providing that they have had adequate
maintenance while in service. However, certain
b. Inspect in-place bearings that are installed
precautions must be observed and are outlined as
with “permanent” type retentions such as housing
follows:
or bearing staking, riveting and/or adhesive bonding.
Remove these bearings only when directed by
1-73. Standard Depot Level Maintenance (SDLM):
engineering or when shop inspection indicates a
defective condition. a. Remove and replace Group A,B,C,D, and
E bearings that are on mandatory removal lists, shop
c. Replace all bearings having a history of processing instructions, SDLM requirements devel-
failure or malfunction that will affect flight safety oped by each depot level activity or as established
regardless of location or difficulty of removal. by the responsible field activity.
d. Replace all bearings that are installed in b. Check Group B airframe and aircraft control
emergency or standby equipment that operate infre- bearings by actuating the control mechanisms with
quently, but must operate to sustain the aircraft in the power off. Reject and remove bearings with
flight and assure a safe return after failure of the indications of stiffness, roughness or excessive
regular equipment. looseness.
1-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Check self-lubricated bearings with fiber or c. Replace all bearings that are removed to
composite liner systems against applicable overhaul allow other work to be performed on the component/
and/or wear limits established by local depot engi- assembly unless engineering approval has been
neering. Wear limits given in handbook of service given to permit holding and reinstallation without
instructions shall not be used by depot level activities processing through the bearing processing facility.
for components inducted for overhaul or SDLM.
Establish overhaul limits that will provide an ade-
quate wear allowance for squadron/field activity d. Remove and replace all bearings as speci-
utilization. Refer to paragraph 1342 for detailed fied by the respective Service Command headquar-
information on inspecting self-lubricated bearings. ters and/or local engineering directive.
d. Replace all bearings removed during disas- e. Remove and replace all bearings that have
sembly of airframes and/or components with new been subjected to metal contamination In the oil
or processed used bearings. See note under para- wetted system.
graph 1-71.
f. Remove and replace all bearings from
NOTE crash and/or fire-damaged aircraft.
Depots may establish procedures that will g. Remove and replace all bearings where
permit the retention of certain removed there is a history of bearing failure or malfunction.
bearings in the shop area for reassembly
in the component. This procedure is
1-75. Overage Ready-for-Issue (RFI) Material.
limited to low operating time components
Evaluate overage RFI components that are subject
disassembled for internal inspection and
to overhaul, primarily to relubricate contained bear-
minor rework. See paragraph 13-47 for
ings, in accordance with sampling instructions con-
information on handling bearings in the
tained in Section IV. Based on the sample evaluation,
assembly/disassembly shop.
the entire lot or group of units may be accepted
without having to remove the bearings. A lot is
e. Remove and replace all bearings that have defined as a collection of units overhauled or
been exposed to, and not protected from, steam manufactured by the same activity and packaged
cleaning, vapor degreasing, paint strippers or hard/ by the same method during the same year and
soft grit abrasive blasting. quarter. Contact the Materials Engineering Laborato-
ry/Physical Science Laboratory before removing
f. Check the condition of all bearings that sample bearings.
were installed in crash/fire damaged components,
assemblies or airframes. Contact the cognizant NOTE
depot bearing engineer for assistance.
Units must have all mandatory changes
1-74. Inspect-Repair as Necessary (IRAN). The incorporated, and post-overhaul functional
cognizant depot bearing engineer will be responsible tests performed in accordance with NAV-
for establishing procedures for evaluating bearings SUP publication 4105 “Shelf Life Items”
left in place under the IRAN concept. The following or equivalent Service directive.
general precautions apply:
1-76. Low Time Components. Bearings installed

a. Remove all grease lubricated or self-lubri-
in components that have accumulated 10 percent
cated bearings that have been exposed to, and not
or less of the maximum allowable operating time
protected from, steam cleaning, solvents, paint
or time between overhaul (TBO) allowance will not
strippers and hard/soft grit abrasives.
require replacement. This time allowance is applica-
ble to all life limited components, even though the
b. Protect oil-impregnated bearings from ex- total time with another service tour will exceed
posure to vapor degreasing, abrasive blasting or established life limits, unless prohibited by the
steam cleaning. Use solvents that have been ap- respective Service Commands or local engineering
proved by the Materials Engineering Laboratory/ directives. Components shall pass all test require-
Physical Science Laboratory. ments.
1-9/(1-10 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION II
GENERAL INFORMATION
2-1. GENERAL. 2-8. RADIAL BALL BEARINGS.
2-9. S I N G L E - R O W, D E E P - G R O O V E B A L L
2-2. This section includes information that is of BEARING (Figure 2-2). This is the most popular
a general nature and applicable to all rolling and type of rolling bearing and can be used in many
plain bearings. All personnel having responsibility different types of applications. The effective radius
for implementing the depot bearing program should of the balls is only slightly less than the raceway
be familiar with these fundamental facts in order groove radius. This allows the use of relatively large
to intelligently maintain a sound, workable and cost ball sizes and a closely conforming ball-to-groove
effective program. This is particularly true of the contact. This type of bearing has a relatively high
bearing shop personnel since the proper processing radial load carrying capacity. In addition, to radial
of bearings cannot be performed without a thorough loads, the bearing can carry significant thrust/axial
knowledge of bearing fundamentals. Included is a loads in either direction.
clarification and explanation of the specialized bear-
ing terminology used throughout this manual. All of 2-10. Radial load capacity can be improved by
the different types of rolling and plain bearing either increasing the ball diameter and/or increasing
designs used in aeronautical applications are de- the ball complement. For any given number and
scribed and illustrated. size of balls there is an optimum ball groove
curvature and internal radial clearance that will
provide maximum load capacity. Thrust capacity is
2-3. BEARING TERMINOLOGY. controlled by the contact angle that is established
by the internal clearances and the operating shaft
2-4. The term antifriction has long been used to speed. The bearing is sensitive to misalignment thus
differentiate between rolling and sliding bearings. shaft and housing parallelism should be maintained.
The term antifriction is gradually being dropped in 2-11. The deep-groove ball bearing has a continu-
favor of the word rolling to describe ball and roller ous raceway groove without a filling slot. The bearing
bearings. The term rolling bearings will be used contains the maximum number of balls that can be
throughout this manual to describe bearings that introduced by eccentric displacement of the rings
have ball or roller elements that are positioned and (figure 2-3). This type of assembly is also called
roll between concentric inner and outer rings. The a Conrad assembly after Frank Conrad, an early
term plain or journal bearings will be used to describe patentee of this ball bearing design. The number
two-piece bearings where the surfaces of two rings and diameter of balls are selected so that the inner
are in sliding contact with respect to each other. ring, when inserted between the first and last balls
can be positioned concentric with the outer ring
2-5. There are many terms that are used to because of the elasticity of both rings. The balls
describe the manufacture and application of rolling are then positioned equidistant apart and a retainer,
and plain bearings. These terms must be under- sometimes called a cage or separator, is installed
stood. Each term is defined the first time it is used to maintain ball separation. Refer to paragraph 2-68
in the text of this manual and again in the glossary for information on retainers.
of terms in appendix A. Basic terms describing
typical rolling bearings and their common features 2-12. Deep Groove Bearings can also be equipped
are illustrated in figure 2-1. with shields and/or seals to retain the lubricant, and
to keep dirt out. Refer to paragraph 2-73 for
information on shields and seals.
2-6. CLASSIFICATION OF BEARINGS.
2-13. Single-Row, Deep-Groove, Filling Slot Ball
Bearing (Figure 2-4). The filling slot-type bearing
2-7. Rolling bearings can be classified in many has a groove machined in the faces of the inner
different ways. The following descriptions are given and outer rings that extend into the raceway grooves.
as a means of understanding all the different bearing This feature allows more balls to be assembled into
types, their design parameters and how each param- the bearing than the Conrad-type bearing. The added
eter affects the application and function of the balls provide increased radial load capacity. Howev-
bearing. er, since the filling slot disrupts part of the raceway
2-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING
002001
Figure 2-1. Common Bearing Features and Terminology
2-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002002
Figure 2-2. Single-Row, Deep-Groove Ball Bearing
002004
Figure 2-4. Single-Row, Deep-Groove,
Filling Slot Ball Bearing
the inner and outer rings fractured in two places.

By expanding the outer ring, a maximum ball
complement can be introduced without the need for
filling slots or counterbored rings. The fractured ring
bearing with a maximum ball complement has
greater radial and thrust capacity than the Conrad,
deep-groove bearing. Holding wires that fit into
shoulder grooves in the outer ring hold the ring
together during handling and installation.
2-15. EXTERNAL SELF-ALIGNING, SINGLE-ROW,

BALL BEARING (Figure 2-6). This type of bearing
is identical to the radial ball bearing except for a
spherically shaped outer diameter for self-alignment.
The bearing is installed in a spherical shaped seat
in the housing. This allows the bearing to swivel
into an aligned position. The bearing is also available
with an aligning ring that is self aligning on a
spherically shaped outer diameter of the outer ring
of the bearings (figure 2-7).
002003
Figure 2-3. Conrad Assembly of Deep-Groove
Ball Bearings 2-16. COUNTERBORED OUTER RING, BALL
BEARING (Figure 2-8). The counterbored bearing
is very similar to the radial or Conrad bearing except
groove, the bearing is not recommended for thrust the outer ring has one raceway shoulder removed
loaded applications. The number of balls that can with only a low land adjacent to the ball groove.
be added varies from a maximum complement that The bearing is assembled by heat expanding the
can be assembled with a retainer, to a maximum outer ring and snapping it over the inner ring and
number of balls that can be introduced without a ball assembly. This design may be assembled with
retainer. The latter bearing is called a “full-type or a maximum complement of balls and a retainer, or
full complement,” retainerless bearing. a full complement of balls and no retainer. The
increased ball complement gives the counterbored
2-14. FRACTURED RING, DEEP-GROOVE BALL bearing a greater radial load capacity than the
BEARING (Figure 2-5). Fractured ring bearings have deep-groove bearing, and a capability to carry thrust
either the outer ring fractured in one place, or both loads equal to the radial load capacity in one
2-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
direction. The bearing has very little thrust capacity

in the direction of the low shoulder and should not
be used when thrust loads in both directions will
be encountered.
2-17. MAGNETO BEARING (Figure 2-9). Magneto

bearings are separable bearings, which have the
outer ring counterbored so that it can be separated
from the inner ring and ball-cage assembly. Magneto
bearings are capable of carrying thrust loads equal
to radial load capacity. Bearings can be thrust loaded
in only one direction since there is no shoulder on
one side of the ball groove. Magneto bearings are
always used in pairs and are usually mounted so
that the counterbored side of the outer rings face
each other. A certain amount of internal axial
clearance is established. They were developed for
use in magnetos, small motors and compasses. The
bearing is completely separable and the inner ring
and ball assembly can be pressed onto the shaft
002005
and the outer ring separately installed into the
Figure 2-5. Fractured Ring, Deep-Groove housing.
Ball Bearing
2-18. DOUBLE-ROW, DEEP-GROOVE, BALL
BEARING (Figure 2-10). The rings of a double row
ball bearing contain two sets of ball grooves for
two ball complements. The width of the ring is slightly
less than the total width of two single bearings. The
double-row, radial ball bearing is designed for greater
radial load capacity than the single-row bearing. This
type of bearing should not be used in thrust loaded
applications. Refer to paragraph 2-26 for double-row
bearing designs that can carry thrust loads. Equal
load distribution between the two rows of balls is
dependent upon the geometric accuracy of the ball
grooves.
2-19. The radial load capacity of the double-row,

002006 deep-groove ball bearing is 1.5 times the radial
Figure 2-6. External Self-Aligning, Single-Row capacity of a single-row, deep-groove ball bearing.
Ball Bearing The contact angle within the bearing is zero with
respect to a vertical plane.
2-20. ANGULAR-CONTACT BALL BEARINGS.
2-21. SINGLE-ROW, ANGULAR-CONTACT BALL

BEARINGS (Figure 2-11). The angular-contact bear-
ing has the shoulder on one side of the ball groove
(generally the outer) partially removed to facilitate
the assembly of a maximum complement of balls.
The outer ring is heat expanded and installed axially
over the ball, retainer, and inner ring assembly. When
the outer ring cools, the remaining part of the low
shoulder of the ball groove keeps the bearing
together as a self-contained assembly. This type
of assembly permits the use of a one-piece retainer.
002007
Bearings with large contact angles have low shoul-
Figure 2-7. External Self-Aligning, Single-Row Ball ders on the ball grooves of both the inner and outer
Bearing with Aligning Ring rings.
2-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
2-24. D U P L E X A N D M U LT I - S TA C K E D B A L L
BEARINGS (Figure 2-13). Angular-contact, counter-
bore, and magneto bearings are frequently as-
sembled as matched pairs or sets. This arrangement
increases load carrying capacity, reduces shaft
deflection and carries thrust loads in both directions.
Applications with extremely heavy loads and limita-
tions on size and weight utilize different arrange-
ments of four, five or six angular-contact bearings.
Helicopter rotor blade systems are an example of
an aircraft application that uses multi-stack arrange-
ments.
2-25. The angular-contact bearing is the most
common type of bearing used for duplex and/or
002008 multi-stack configurations. Duplex bearings are
Figure 2-8. Counterbored Outer Ring Ball Bearing matched pairs of specially manufactured angular-
contact bearings. They are available in the following
combinations:
NOTE
Refer to paragraph B-66 of Appendix B
for additional design information on angu-
lar contact bearings.
a. B a c k - t o - B a c k M o u n t i n g ( D B ) ( F i g u r e
2-14a). The rings of DB duplexed angular-contact
bearings are specially ground and dimensioned.
This provides a predetermined preload or Internal
clearance when the bearings are installed and the
rings are damped together. DB duplexed bearings
002009 are always installed with the high shoulders of the
Figure 2-9. Magneto Bearing outer rings in direct contact or separated by
spacers. This duplex arrangement can carry high
2-22. Single-row, angular-contact ball bearings are radial and thrust loads in any direction. However,
designed to carry thrust loads in one direction at DB duplexed bearings are more sensitive to mis-
high speed. The forces applied to the bearing rings alignment than the DF duplexed configuration.
through the balls form a load line or angle of contact bearings are specially ground and dimensioned.
with the vertical plane. The contact angle is depen- This provides a predetermined preload when the
dent on the bearing design and on the ratio of low shoulder face surfaces of the outer rings are
thrust-to-radial load (figure 2-12). The bearing can clamped together. This bearing arrangement can
carry radial loads only when sufficient thrust loads carry high radial and thrust loads in either direction
are present to prevent ball contact with the low and is less sensitive to misalignment than the DB
shoulder of the ball groove. The bearing must be arrangement. However, the DF mounting arrange-
mounted so that the thrust load is applied to the ment is not as stiff as the DB arrangement and
side of the bearing ring with the words “thrust here” is less resistant to over-turning moments and
marked on the ring face. Bearings are also used angular deflections.
in pairs or in other multiple combinations, see
b. F a c e - t o - F a c e M o u n t i n g ( D F ) ( F i g u r e
paragraph 2-30.
2-14b). The face surfaces of the rings of DF
2-23. The thrust capacity of this type of bearing duplexed angular-contact bearings are specially
increases with increasing contact angles: ground and dimensioned. This provides a predeter-
mined preload when the low shoulder face surfaces
a. Small Contact Angle (10_ to 22_) (Figure of the outer rings are clamped together. This
2-12a). Thrust load capacity is approximately 1.5 bearing arrangement can carry high radial and
times the radial load capacity in one direction. thrust loads in either direction and is less sensitive
to misalignment than the DB arrangement. Howev-
b. Medium Contact Angle (22_ to 32_) (Figure er, the DF mounting arrangement is not as stiff
2-12b). Thrust load capacity is approximately 2 as the DB arrangement and is less resistant to
times the radial load capacity in one direction. over-turning moments and angular deflections.
2-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002010
Figure 2-10. Double-Row, Deep-Groove
Ball Bearing
002013
Figure 2-13. Duplexed, Angular-Contact
Ball Bearings
c. Tandem Mounting (DT) (Figure 2-14c). The

face surfaces of the rings of DT duplexed angular-
contact bearings are specially ground so that the
load is shared between the bearings. Due to
inherent dimensional tolerances in bearings and
bearing mountings, equal load distribution between
the bearings is very difficult if not impossible to
achieve. The DT duplexed bearing set has in-
creased thrust capacity in one direction. However,
the increase is somewhat less than a multiple of
the same number of bearings. As with single
angular contact bearings, the tandem arrangement
002011
cannot carry a pure radial load, but must also have
Figure 2-11. Single-Row, Angular-Contact a significant thrust load.
Ball Bearing
d. Multi-stack Mounting (Figure 2-15). Some
applications, such as helicopter rotor blades, utilize
4 to 6 bearings in tandem with 1 or more opposing
(preload) bearings, all clamped together. High thrust
loads can be carried in one direction. The multi-
stack arrangement will have moderate radial load
capacity.
2-26. DOUBLE-ROW, ANGULAR-CONTACT BALL

BEARINGS (Figure 2-16). This type of bearing is
just like the double-row, radial ball bearing except
that the direction of load through the balls forms
an angle with a vertical plane running through the
bearing instead of being parallel. This is accom-
plished by locating the ball grooves of the inner
and outer rings slightly to one side or the other
with respect to each other. The load plane can
converge outside the bearing (like DB duplexed
bearings), or converge inside the bearing (like DF
duplexed bearings), (figure 2-17).
002012
Figure 2-12. Different Contact Angles in 2-27. The same general advantages and disadvan-
Angular-Contact Ball Bearings tages that apply to DB and DF duplex angular-
contact bearings apply to double-row, angular-
2-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
contact bearings. The bearings may be assembled

by the Conrad method (figure 2-3), or by using a
filling slot, as the radial ball bearing (figure 2-4).
Bearings are used for heavy radial and thrust load
applications and to limit axial movement of the shaft.
The radial load carrying capacity is approximately
1.5 times that of a single-row ball bearing.
2-28. SELF-ALIGNING, DOUBLE-ROW BALL

BEARING (Figure 2-18). The raceway diameter of
the outer ring is spherically shaped (no ball grooves)
and the inner ring has two normal ball grooves. The
balls, retainer, and inner ring assembly are self-
aligning within the outer ring. This feature is particu-
larly useful when it is difficult to maintain parallelism
of the shaft and housing bores. Since the bearing
is internally self-aligning, it cannot support a moment
or overturning load. The radial load carrying capacity
002014
is reduced since the outer ring is spherically shaped, Figure 2-14. Different Arrangements of Duplexed,
and the race curvature is much greater than the Angular-Contact Ball Bearings
ball diameter. However, the loss of radial load
capacity due to low ball-to-raceway conformity is
primarily offset by the larger ball complement that
reduces the load on individual balls.
2-29. SPLIT RING, ANGULAR-CONTACT BALL

BEARING (Figure 2-19). The inner ring consists
of two separable halves that are held in place by
the assembly design. The rings are specially dimen-
sioned and finished on the mating face surfaces.
This type of bearing has a maximum ball comple-
ment because of its two-piece inner ring design,
and can support heavy thrust loads in either direction
and moderate radial loads. The one-piece retainer
design makes the bearing suitable for high speed
operation.
2-30. Split inner ring bearings are frequently used

in high speed gas turbine engines to support heavy
thrust loads. Special pairs of these flush ground
bearings are used in tandem in very high thrust
load applications. Due to their completely separable
design, split ring bearings are much easier to inspect
than nonseparable, deep-groove type bearings.
2-31. THRUST BALL BEARINGS (Figure 2-20).

Ball bearings with a contact angle greater than 45
degrees are rated as thrust ball bearings (figure
2-21b). Bearings with a contact angle less than 45
degrees are generally classified as angular-contact
or radial ball bearings. A ball thrust bearing with
a 90 degree contact angle has rings called washers.
The ball grooves are ground in the flat face of the
washer (figure 2-21a). For low friction applications,
the balls roll on flat hardened washers without ball 002015
grooves (figure 2-21c). Due to higher than normal Figure 2-15. Stack Mounting of Angular-Contact
ball contact stress the applied load must be kept Ball Bearings
light and the rotational speed low.
2-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
shock loads may be encountered and where long

life is required. The rollers’ surfaces are usually
crowned to reduce the high stress levels that occur
at the ends of two loaded cylinders in contact. The
crown is actually a very large radius ground on the
roller outer diameter, such that approximately 20
percent of the roller length at each end is curved
toward a slightly smaller diameter at the ends (figure
2-22). Crowned raceways can be used in lieu of
crowned rollers.
2-35. The rollers are guided between guide ribs

located on either the inner or outer ring. There are
three types of cylindrical roller bearings that differ
primarily according to the axial guidance they provide
the shaft assembly.
002016
Figure 2-16. Double-Row, Angular-Contact a. Inner Ring Separable Roller Bearings (Fig-
Ball Bearing ure 2-23). The rollers of this type of bearing are
guided between two ribs on the outer ring and no
ribs on the inner ring. The bearing does not provide
the shaft any axial guidance and is therefore called
a nonlocating type bearing. This design allows
limited free shaft movement in the axial direction
with respect to the housing as long as the move-
ment is slow compared to shaft rotation. This
compensates for length variation in the shaft due
to the effects of thermal gradients. The separable
design allows the bearing rings to be individually
installed. This facilitates the assembly of complex
mechanisms such as gas turbine engines. Since
there are no ribs for axial restraint the bearing
cannot support thrust loads.
b. Outer Ring Separable Roller Bearing (Fig-

ure 2-24). This type of roller bearing is similar to
the inner ring separable configuration except that
the rollers are guided by guide ribs on the inner
ring. The outer ring has no guiding ribs. The same
002017 general information applies as in paragraph 2-35a.
Figure 2-17. Contact Angles in Double-Row,
Angular Contact Ball Bearings c. Separable, One-direction Locating, Roller
Bearings (Figure 2-25). The rollers of this type of
2-32. Ball thrust bearings with a contact angle of roller bearing are guided by two guide ribs on either
90_ cannot support radial loads. Normally the ball the inner or the outer ring and one guide rib on
thrust bearing is designed to support thrust loads the other ring. This allows axial guidance in one
in one direction only, although with special housing direction (the direction of the guide rib) provided
and shaft designs, thrust loads can be supported the thrust load is not excessive. The thrust load
in both directions. should not exceed 20 percent of the applied radial
load and should only be for short periods of time.
2-33. RADIAL ROLLER BEARINGS.
d. Snap Ring Retainment, Nonseparable Roll-
2-34. CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARINGS. As indi- er Bearings (Figure 2-26). The rollers are guided
cated by the name, this type of rolling bearing has by two solid guide ribs on either the inner or outer
cylindrically shaped rolling elements and raceways. ring and a combination of solid and/or snap rings
They have a high radial load carrying capacity and on the other ring. This provides axial guidance of
are used in applications where radial loads are high, the shaft in either direction.
2-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002018
Figure 2-18. Self-Aligning, Double-Row-Ball
Bearing
002021
Figure 2-21. Typical Thrust Ball Bearing
Configurations
002019
Figure 2-19. Split Ring, Angular-Contact
Ball Bearing
FLAT
002022
002020
Figure 2-22. Crown Roller Geometry
Figure 2-20. Thrust Ball Bearing
2-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002023 002026
Figure 2-23. Inner Ring Separable Roller Bearing Figure 2-26. Snap Ring Retainment,
Non-Separable Roller Bearing
2-36. Needle Roller Bearings. The needle roller

bearing has been defined by the American Bearing
Manufacturer’s Association (ABMA) as “A radial
cylindrical roller bearing having a large ratio of pitch
diameter to roller diameter and a large ratio of roller
length to roller diameter.” This means the rollers
are very long with respect to their small diameters.
The bearings are designed to occupy less radial
space than standard cylindrical roller bearings and
support high radial loads. The needle rollers often
roll directly on a hardened shaft that serves as the
inner ring. Needle roller bearings are designed for
high radial loads and cannot support thrust loads.
2-37. Needle roller bearings can be placed into the

002024 following general classifications:
Figure 2-24. Outer Ring Separable Roller Bearing
a. Loose Needle Roller Bearings (Figure
2-27). The shaft and gear bore surfaces act as
the inner and outer rings for the needle rollers.
b. Drawn-cup Needle Roller Bearings (Figure

2-28). This type of needle roller bearing consists
of an accurately deep-drawn, low-carbon steel outer
cup and a set of needle rollers. A press fit into
the housing bore locates, rounds and sizes the
bearing. A shaft serves as the inner ring for the
bearing assembly. They are also available with
retainers and a case hardened cup for needle roller
retention.
c. Heavy Duty Needle Roller Bearings (Figure

2-29). This type of needle roller bearing has
heavy-section outer rings made of AIS152100, a
carburizing-grade steel like AISI 8620 or AISI M-50
002025 tool steel. The heavy duty outer ring can be installed
Figure 2-25. Separable, One-Direction Locating, with either a press fit or slip fit as required by the
Roller Bearing application. The bearing has a high static and
dynamic radial load capacity.
2-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
permit lubrication of the bearing through the housing

or shaft. Types NBF and NBL have solid outer rings
and can be lubricated only through the inner ring.
2-38. Journal Roller Bearings (Figure 2-32). Jour-

nal roller bearings have a larger roller length-to-roller
diameter ratio than the cylindrical roller bearing, yet
smaller than for the needle roller bearing. The inner
and outer rings do not have roller guiding ribs and
are completely separable from the retainer-roller
assembly. The roller assembly can be used without
one or both rings when the shaft and/or housing
is properly dimensioned, heat treated and finished.
Journal bearings will only support radial loads. They
are used in high load, low speed applications where
002027
radial space is limited.
Figure 2-27. Loose Needle Roller Assembly
2-39. Elliptical Ring Roller Bearings. To under-
stand the need for elliptically designed roller bearings
it is necessary to understand the operation of a
conventional roller bearing. Roller bearings should
operate with the surface speed of each roller being
the same as the surface speed of the contacting
raceway surface at the point of contact (figure
2-33a). However, with high shaft speeds and light
external loads, the centrifugal force of the rotating
rollers tends to increase internal bearing clearances.
This reduces the number of rollers in contact with
the rotating inner ring raceway (figure 2-34). Friction-
al (drag) forces at the stationary outer ring raceway
may then exceed the frictional (drive) forces at the
rotating inner ring raceways, reducing the roller
speed/cage speed (figure 2-33b). When this condi-
tion occurs, the inner ring will slide past the roller
contacting surfaces and damage the raceway and
rollers surfaces.
002028
Figure 2-28. Drawn-Cup, Needle Roller Bearing 2-40. The elliptical ring roller bearing has an outer
ring design configuration that is intentionally
manufactured out-of-round. This out-of-roundness
d. Cam Roller, Needle Roller Bearings (Fig- will self-induce a radial load in the bearing causing
ure 2-30). This type of heavy duty, needle roller a positive pinch (preload) at all times on a few rollers
bearing has a thick outer ring and an integral stud at two points 180 degrees apart. The resulting
that serves as the inner ring. They are used as internal preload provides positive roller-to-raceway
cam followers and track rollers to carry heavy radial contact for true rolling motion. This greatly reduces
loads at slow speeds. Some are equipped with seals sliding damage.
for grease lubrication or self-lubricating rings for
better lubrication. 2-41. There are several elliptical design configura-
tions that utilize either an elliptically shaped outer
e. Aircraft-type Needle Roller Bearings (Fig- ring diameter or outer ring raceway that induces
ure 2-31). Heavy-duty aircraft needle roller bearings an internal preload. This reduces roller sliding.
have minimum section, small-diameter needle roll-
ers and two retaining washers. The end washers a. Cylindrical Outer Ring Raceway and Ellipti-
are permanently attached to the inner ring to cal Outer Diameter (Figure 2-35a). This type of
prevent them from falling apart during installation. elliptical bearing has an elliptical shape in the
They must be clamped in the installation to prevent unmounted or free state. When mounted in a round
separation. This type of bearing is designed for housing the elliptical shape is transferred to the
high radial loads under static conditions, slow raceway (roller path), developing a preload across
speeds or oscillatory motion. Types NBC and NBK the bearing.
2-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Elliptical Outer Ring Raceway and Outer

Diameter (Figure 2-35b). This type of elliptical
bearing is Internally preloaded in the free state.
When the bearing is mounted in a round housing
the preload is partially relieved by the interference
fit and the stiffness of the bearing parts.
c. Elliptical Outer Ring Raceway and Cylindri-

cal Outer Diameter (Figure 2-35c). This type of
elliptical bearing is initially preloaded in the free state.
The preload is increased when the bearing is
mounted in a round housing with an interference fit.
NOTE
Bearings are sometimes manufactured

002029
with a tri-lobe (3 point out-of-round) outer
Figure 2-29. Heavy Duty Needle Roller Bearing
ring design configuration.
2-42. TAPERED ROLLER BEARINGS (Figure

2-36). Tapered roller bearings differ from convention-
al roller bearings in the way that rolling motion is
generated. True rolling motion is generated in a
tapered roller bearing by constructing the working
surfaces of the outer ring (called a cup), the inner
ring (called a cone), and the rolling elements with
tapered sections. Notice in figure 2-36 that lines
drawn coincident with the working surfaces, between
the rolling elements and the cone and cup, converge
at the same point on the centerline of the bearing
and form a cone. The shoulders or flanges on the
inner ring serve to keep the rollers properly aligned
and prevents skewing. The bearing rings are usually
002030 separable and therefore mounted in pairs (figure
Figure 2-30. Cam Roller, Needle Roller Bearing 2-37).
2-43. Tapered roller bearings are divided into groups

which are called series. Series numbers have no
significance. Each size of cup and cone has its own
number, which is a variation of the basic series
number. Each number must be known to identify
a complete bearing. All the bearings in a given series
have the same size rollers, the same retainer and
the same internal construction. The external dimen-
sions of the cups and cones in a series may vary
but, since the internal dimensions are the same,
any cup may be used with any cone in a given
series.
2-44. Properly mounted tapered roller bearings can

carry high radial and thrust loads. However, pure
radial cannot be supported since the rings would
tend to separate. Single-row tapered bearings can
sustain a thrust load in one direction, while
002031
double-row types are used where thrust loads in
Figure 2-31. Aircraft-Type, Needle Roller Bearing both directions are to be encountered (figure 2-38).
2-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
raceway is part of a sphere, the center of which

is the center of the bearing (figure 2-43). The
spherical bearing is made in either of two primary
configurations.
a. The spherical outer ring raceway with

convex-type rollers, (Figure 2-41).
b. The spherical inner ring raceway with

concave-type rollers, (Figure 2-42).
2-47. The convex rollers can be either symmetrical

or nonsymmetrical, depending on the manufacturer’s
design (figure 2-44). The convex roller contour radius
is slightly less than the raceway radius of the outer
ring raceway. The spherical bearing may be designed
with or without an integral roller guide flange (figure
2-45). The rollers or raceways may be crowned to
prevent damage due to roller end loading. The
spherical roller bearing, like the tapered roller bearing,
has a common vertex if lines are drawn out from
the raceway and roller surfaces (figure 2-46).
002032 2-48. The spherical roller bearing supports thrust

Figure 2-32. Journal Roller Bearing loads in either direction, radial loads, or any com-
bination of radial and thrust loads. They are used
for heavy-duty, high shock-load applications.
2-49. Thrust Roller Bearings (Figures 2-47 to

2-50). Thrust bearings are designed to support heavy
thrust/axial loads and not radial loads. Their open
space (space between the rings) is perpendicular
to the axis of rotation. The bearings consist of two
hardened steel thrust washers, one with a large bore
and one with a small bore. Only one ring can contact
the shaft or there can be no relative movement.
The thrust roller is manufactured in four basic design
configurations.
002033
Figure 2-33. Roller Speed VS Inner Ring Speed
2-45. The thrust capacity of a tapered roller bearing

is dependent primarily on the taper or the angle
of the cup. The larger the angle/taper, the greater
the load carrying capacity (figure 2-39). Double-row
tapered roller bearings can be obtained with the
contact angle in two different configurations, depend-
ing on the rigidity or stiffness of the shaft assembly.
Contact angles that converge toward the axis of
bearing rotation are less rigid than those that diverge
away from the axis (figure 2-40).
2-46. Spherical Roller Bearings (Figures 2-41

and 2-42). The inner ring, retainer and rollers of
a spherical roller bearing are self-aligning with
002034
respect to the outer ring. This provides an internal
bearing adjustment to varying degrees of shaft Figure 2-34. Internal Configuration of a
and/or housing misalignment. The inner or outer ring Conventional Roller Bearing
2-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002035
Figure 2-35. Elliptical Ring Design Configurations
a. Cylindrical Roller Thrust Bearing (Figure loads along with significant thrust loads. The rollers
2-47). Cylindrical roller thrust bearings usually have are tapered as well as being spherically shaped.
two or more rows of short cylindrical rollers that
roll on flat steel washers. They are used to support c. Tapered Roller Thrust Bearing (Figure
heavy thrust loads in one direction at low speeds. 2-49). The tapered roller thrust bearing can be made
with both raceways tapered as in figure 2-49, or
with one tapered raceway and the other flat. The
b. Spherical Roller Thrust Bearing (Figure bearing with one flat raceway permits the shaft to
2-48). The spherical roller thrust bearing has a very displace radially without placing a strain on the
high load carrying capacity due to the close bearing. These bearings can support heavy thrust
conformity of the roller radius to raceway contour. loads in one direction at moderate speeds. They
This type of thrust bearing can support limited radial are very sensitive to misalignment.
2-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002036
Figure 2-36. Tapered Roller Bearing
002037
Figure 2-37. Typical Mounting Arrangement 002038
of Tapered Roller Bearings Figure 2-38. Double-Row, Tapered Roller Bearings
d. Needle-Roller Thrust Bearing (Figure c. External surfaces are usually plated for
2-50). The needle roller bearing is very similar to corrosion protection.
the cylindrical roller thrust bearing except the d. Equipped with shields and/or seals to
length-to-diameter ratio of the rollers is very large. retain the lubricant and exclude dirt and moisture.
The raceways must be hardened, flat, and square
with the bearing bore. e. Width of inner rings is greater than the outer
rings to eliminate the need for spacers when
2-50. A I R C R A F T C O N T R O L A N D P U L L E Y installed.
BEARINGS (Figures 2-51 to 2-55). f. Misalignment capabilities of 8 to 10_ in
either direction is provided by many bearings in
2-51. Aircraft control bearings are designed for use this classification.
in the airframe and the control systems of modern
aircraft. They are used in low-speed and/or oscil- 2-52. SLIDING/PLAIN BEARINGS (Figure 2-56).
latory applications. They have the following charac- 2-53. GENERAL. The sliding or plain bearing, as
teristics and features: it is often called, has load carrying elements that
are separated by either a film of grease, oil or a
a. Lighter weight than a standard series thickness of solid film lubricant. The primary mode
bearing. of motion is the sliding of one surface against
another surface. The sliding bearing is usually
b. Dimensions are in inches instead of metric. broken down into two general classifications:
2-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Journal or sleeve bearings which are used

to position a shaft or moving part in a radial
direction.
b. Thrust bearings which are used to prevent

the axial movement of a shaft.
2-54. The straight, bushing or sleeve type journal

bearing is the simplest of bearing designs. It
basically consists of a sleeve of bearing material
in which the shaft rotates, or oscillates (figure 2-56).
The bearing may be either oil or grease lubricated,
or it may be lubricated with dry (solid) film lubricant.
Spherical or uniball bearings are variations of the
straight bearing, with a spherically shaped inner ring
002039
that is self-aligning in an outer ring.
Figure 2-39. Load Capacity of Tapered Roller
Bearings as a Function of Contact Angle 2-55. SLOTTED-ENTRY BEARING (Figure 2-57).
A variation of the spherical bearing is the slotted-
entry/loaderslot bearing. The outer ring has loader
slots machined 180_ apart into one face of the ring
to allow the spherical ball to be easily installed or
removed. The ball is removed by turning it sideways
with respect to the outer ring so that the flat surfaces
of the ball are aligned with the loader slot. This
design provides a means for complete ball inspection
and replacement. The slotted-entry bearing is used
in hydraulic/pneumatic attach points, piston ends and
in landing gear struts.
2-56. In addition to improved maintenance capabili-

ty, the slotted-entry design has tighter control on
axial and radial play tolerances through improved
conformity between the ball and outer ring raceway
surfaces. High strength steels, special materials and
002040 ceramic coatings can be used in the manufacture
Figure 2-40. Rigidity of Tapered Roller Bearings of the balls and rings. This provides improved wear
as a Function of Contact Angle characteristics, high static load capacity, high tem-
perature capability and corrosion resistance.
2-57. The primary disadvantage of a slotted-entry

bearing is the need to properly orient the slot with
respect to the load. It is also difficult to retain grease
inside the bearing and to keep contamination out.
Newer designs have a threaded side plate and an
“O” ring assembly that will effectively seal grease
in and keep contamination out.
2-58. THREADED RETAINER RING (Figure 2-58).

The threaded retainer ring design bearing (Kahr-
Kaptor) was developed and patented by the Kahr
Bearing Division of Sargent Industries. This bearing
type was designed to be used in assemblies where
accessibility for stake retention is restricted and/or
002041
where high thrust loads will be encountered. The
Figure 2-41. Convex-Roller, Spherical Roller bearings are dimensionally interchangeable with
Bearing comparably sized Military Standard (MS) bearings.
2-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
al in a manner similar to that of a sponge retaining

a fluid. Special machining procedures must be
followed to prevent smearing or closing of the
surface pores. Avoid the use of abrasives for
finishing, such as in honing and lapping operations.
Additional instructions on lubrication of oil-impreg-
nated bearings are contained in paragraph 10-53.
2-60. FABRIC-LINED, SELF-LUBRICATED BEAR-

INGS (Figures 2-60 and 2-61). This type of plain
bearing is self-lubricating, has zero internal radial
clearance and may have an initial rotational preload.
They are used extensively in helicopter and fixed
wing aircraft control systems where backlash and
accumulative clearances are detrimental to flight
dynamics.
2-61. The bearing is lined with a fabric of Teflon

fiber. “Teflon” is a DuPont trademark. The common
name for this type of chemical compound is tetrafluo-
roethylene, or TFE fluorocarbon. The fabric liner
002042
Figure 2-42. Concave-Roller, Spherical usually consists of a single layer of fabric having
Roller Bearing two different type surfaces; (1) the bearing surface,
which contacts the ball or other moving surface,
and (2) the supporting surface which is bonded to
the outer ring. The bearing surface is composed
of Teflon fibers, whereas the supporting or bonding
surface is composed of glass, cotton, polyester, or
some other combination of readily bondable fibers.
This is necessary to ensure a satisfactory and
durable bond to the substrate (outer ring) which is
usually metal. The Teflon fibers are mechanically
interlocked by weaving them into the supporting fiber
backing. The adhesive used to bond the fabric to
the metal is usually an epoxy or phenolic resin,
depending on service temperature requirements.
See paragraphs 7-33d and 13-42 for inspection
requirements and wear limits.
002043
Figure 2-43. Spherical Design of Spherical
Roller Bearings
2-59. OIL-IMPREGNATED BEARINGS. The oil-im-

pregnated bearing is manufactured from metal pow-
der that is die pressed and sintered (heated to a
temperature to cause cohesion but not melting) at
high temperature (figure 2-59). The bearing is then
002044
finished to dimension and vacuum impregnated with
Figure 2-44. Shapes of Rollers Used in
a high quality, non-gumming type oil. The oil is
Spherical Roller Bearings
retained within the pores/voids of the bearing materi-
2-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002045
Figure 2-45. Inner Ring Designs for
002049
Figure 2-49. Tapered Roller Thrust Bearing
002046
Figure 2-46. Design Parameters for
002050
Figure 2-50.Needle-Roller Thrust Bearing
002047
Figure 2-47. Cylindrical Roller Thrust Bearing
002051
002048
Figure 2-48. Spherical Roller Thrust Bearing Figure 2-51. Self-Aligning, Airframe Roller Bearing
2-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
for strength, a middle layer of spherical bronze

particles solidly filled with PTFE and lead for long
wear life, and a surface layer of PTFE and lead
(0.0004 inch to 0.0012 inch thick) for low friction.
See paragraphs 7-34d and 13-42 for visual inspec-
tion requirements and wear limits.
2-64. WICK-OILED BEARINGS. The wick-oiled

journal bearing is lubricated by means of a wick
that is saturated with oil. The wick contacts the shaft
and feeds oil to the bearing surfaces. This is also
referred to as a nonpressurized bearing. The oil is
generally retained by seals and returned to the wick
by gravity flow.
002052
Figure 2-52. Torque Tube Type Airframe 2-65. PRESSURE-FED BEARINGS. Oil is supplied
Ball Bearing to a pressure-fed bearing under pressure from an
oil storage tank. Lubrication depends on a hydrody-
namic oil film that is developed within the bearing.
The oil pressure generated within the fluid film then
supports the load.
2-66. EXTERNALLY PRESSURIZED BEARINGS.

Externally pressurized bearings, also known as
hydrostatic bearings, depend on oil pressure from
an external source to support the bearing load. A
separating oil film can be maintained even with zero
rotational speed. The gas bearings are a specialized
form of an externally pressurized bearing. Gas
bearings are used in some of the latest inertial
guidance gyros. Externally pressurized air is used
as the separating film for applications involving very
high speeds and very low friction levels.
002053
Figure 2-53. Self-Aligning, Airframe Control
Ball Bearing
2-62. Modified fabric liner systems have been devel-

oped by several manufacturers, some of which
suspend the PTFE material in an epoxy resin and
then impregnate the mixture into a fabric to provide
a low friction liner system with high structural
strength and resistance to cold flow.
2-63. COMPOSITE, PLASTIC-BASED SELF-LU-

BRICATING BEARINGS (Figure 2-62). There are
many composite materials used as liners for self-lu-
bricating bearings. One of the materials commonly
encountered in aeronautical applications is the DU
bearing material. “DU” is a registered trademark of
Glacier Metal Co. LTD. It consists of a low carbon
steel backing onto which is sintered a thin porous
layer of spherical bronze. The bronze is impregnated 002054
with a mixture of PTFE fluorocarbon resin and lead Figure 2-54. Pulley Bearing
powder. This process provides a steel backing strip
2-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
002055
Figure 2-55. Rod End Bearing
002057
Figure 2-57. Slotted-Entry Type Bearing
2-69. Retainers are designed and manufactured

from materials that will provide good flexibility and
have adequate strength to maintain design configu-
ration. Retainers are not designed to carry external
loads, since this is the function of the rings and
rolling elements. The retainer is radially positioned
between the inner and outer rings by either the rolling
002056 elements or the land surfaces of the rings (figures
Figure 2-56. Types of Sliding/Plain Bearings 2-65 and 2-66). Retainers that ride on the rolling
elements and do not touch either ring are called
ball/roller guided retainers. Ring guided retainers are
2-67. C O M P O N E N T P A R T S O F R O L L I N G
used in most all high speed applications where
BEARINGS.
accurate positioning of the retainer is critical. Either
ring can be used as the retainer guiding surface
2-68. RETAINERS (Figure 2-63). The primary func- depending on design requirements. The guiding
tions of the retainer (also called separator and cage) surfaces on the rings that contact the retainer are
is to: (1) equally space the rolling elements around called lands. The ring guided retainer is usually made
the raceway to ensure proper load distribution and in one piece, whereas most ball/roller guided retain-
balance, and (2) to reduce sliding friction due to ers are of two piece construction.
ball-to-ball rubbing contact. The retainer, by separat-
ing the rolling elements, reduces the rubbing speed 2-70. Bearing retainers are flexurally loaded even
by one-half as compared to a retainerless, full though they do not carry external loads. When a
complement bearing (figure 2-64). This is because rolling element bearing is radially loaded, the rings
at the point of rubbing contact, the rolling elements are displaced by the amount of internal radial
of two balls in contact are rotating in opposite clearance, resulting in a load zone with no clearance.
directions. The retainer substantially reduces internal The rolling elements resist rotation into this load
friction due to sliding contact. The retainer is zone and exert a restraining (compressive) force
sometimes used to keep the rolling elements from on the retainer. The reverse is true for the rolling
falling out of the bearing during bearing removal element leaving the load zone. Therefore the stres-
and installation. sing of the retainer is cyclic.
2-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Threaded
Locking Flange
Integral
Flange Outer Ring
Inner Ring
002059
Figure 2-59. Microscopic View of a Sintered
002058 Bronze Material
Figure 2-58. Threaded Retainer Ring Bearing
NOTE
Deformation of the rolling elements as LINER

they enter and leave the load zone affects
their diameter and consequently their
rotational speed. Since the diameter
change is proportional to the load, the
diameter of the rolling elements decreases
slightly to a minimum at the maximum METAL BACKING
area of load and then increases back to ADHESIVE
its original diameter as it passes out of
TEFLON AND COTTON/GLASS
the load zone. As the diameter decreases, FIBERS, INTERLOCKING WEAVE
the rotational speed decreases to a mini-
mum value (at maximum load). The re-
verse is true as the rolling elements leave
the load zone and proceed into the
unloaded zone. The decelerating rolling
elements place part of the retainer in
compression and the accelerating rolling
elements place a tension-type load on the 002060
retainer. Figure 2-60. Fiber-Lined, Self-Lubricating
Spherical Bearing
2-71. These compressive and tensile forces that
act on the retainer cause wear in the pockets of
ball and roller centered retainers and on the land
surfaces of ring guided retainers. The pockets are
designed large enough to allow the rolling elements
a certain amount of freedom to minimize the effects
of compressive-tensile forces and still maintain a
concentric position with respect to the bearing rings
(figure 2-67).
2-72. There are numerous retainer designs in use FIBER LINING

today and they are manufactured of many different
kinds of materials. See paragraph B-26 of appendix 002061
B for retainer materials. Some of the more common Figure 2-61. Fiber-Lined, Self-Lubricating
types of bearing retainers designs are as follows: Spherical Rod End Bearing
2-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
two halves freedom of movement with respect to

each other. This loosely clinched design gives low,
PTFEĆLEAD
uniform friction torque levels at starting and low
speeds.
b. Pressed Metal Retainers. The one piece

SINTERED BRONZE
IMPREGNATED WITH pressed metal retainer, like the two piece ribbon
PTFEĆLEAD
retainer, is usually manufactured from low carbon
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
STEEL BACKING
steel and is used extensively for tapered roller
bearings. The roller pockets are normally punched
out simultaneously by a single impact of a multiple
die. This prevents undesirable distortion of the
retainer. Retainers for some cylindrical roller bear-
ings are cold formed from low carbon strip material.
002062
Figure 2-62. “DU” Bearing Material Microstructure c. Machined/Cast Retainers. Machined re-
tainers are made in either one or two pieces. They
are used in high speed and critically balanced
applications. They can be machined from tubing
stock, or cast to shape. The rolling element pockets
are burnished to improve surface finish. Light weight
metal alloys and nonmetallic retainers are used
in small, precision balanced ball bearings. Larger
bearings, such as used in gas turbine engines, are
usually machined from brass, steel, or an alloyed
material with high strength properties. Two-piece
retainers are not as well balanced as one piece
RIBBON CROWN retainers, but are used in the nonseparable,
single-row, deep-groove ball bearings. They are
joined together with rivets. Some small precision
bearings use machined nonmetallic retainers be-
cause of their low density, quiet operating character-
istic. Their porous structure acts as an oil reservoir.
d. Crown Retainer. The crown retainer is of

one-piece construction and is formed to provide
a smooth spherical pocket for the ball with a
minimum contact area. The crown retainer is used
in small precision bearings and is manufactured
ONE PIECE TWO PIECE of high carbon or stainless steels. They are heat
MACHINED MACHINED treated to provide strength, and for distortion-free
assembly when snapped into place. The retainer
rides on the inner ring land surface. This type of
002063
retainer design has low friction torque characteris-
Figure 2-63. Common Types of Retainer Designs
tics in critical starting and low speed applications.
a. Ribbon/Strip Type Retainer. The most e. Spring/Slug Retainer. Small, thin sectioned
common type of retainer used in single-row ball instrument bearings may use small coil springs to
bearings is the ribbon or strip configuration separate the balls. The diameter of the spring must
manufactured from low carbon steel. Stainless steel not be greater than the ball diameter or it will touch
is used for some applications. The retainer is the rings. Springs are used only at low speeds
stamped from strip steel and then cold formed in and with light loads. They have a tendency to pop
shaped dies. The two halves are joined together out at medium to high speeds. They have low torque
by rivets, welding or by crimping tabs or prongs characteristics during startup. Some applications
of one half of the retainer over the outer diameter replace the coil springs with small diameter PTFE
of the other half. This type of retainer can be (fluorocarbon material) slugs to separate the balls.
economically manufactured, is light in weight, and The slugs have spherically shaped seats that
resistant to shock loads. Small precision bearings conform to the ball curvature. They are also used
have loosely clinched ribbon retainers allowing the for low friction torque applications at low speeds.
2-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
the outer ring. This feature makes it easy to clean,

inspect and relubricate the bearing.
b. Seals. Seals are used when a positive

means of retaining the lubricant is needed, and/or
there is a greater danger from external contamina-
tion. The inner diameter of the seal contacts the
inner ring land with a predetermined pressure.
Some seals are reinforced with a flat, low carbon
steel ring to provide added rigidity and strength.
Seals are usually made of Buna N rubber and are
limited to applications where temperatures will not
002064
exceed 250_F. Special high temperature materials
Figure 2-64. Rubbing Speeds of Retainer such as Viton (Fluorocarbon) are usable to 400_F.
and Retainerless Type Bearings Since the seals are made to contact the rotating
ring with a certain pressure, there is heat buildup
due to frictional forces. This limits the maximum
speed of most sealed bearings to 1,000 - 2,000
fpm (feet per minute) at the seal surfaces. Typical
types of seals are as follows:
(1) Molded rubber with steel reinforcement
(2) Flat rubber stock retained by a snap

washer
002065
Figure 2-65. Inner and Outer Land Riding
Bearing Retainers
2-73. Shields and Seals (Figures 2-68 and 2-69).

Seals and shields are used in rolling element
bearings for two specific reasons; (1) to retain the
lubricant inside the bearing; and (2) to keep abrasive
or corrosive contamination outside the bearing. They
are primarily used in grease lubricated applications,
and with limited use in oil lubricated systems where
protection against outside contamination is impor-
tant. Shields and seals can be installed on both
sides of the bearing or only on one side. They are
made nonremovable by being spun, swaged or
staked in place, or removable with snap rings or
snap washers for retention. Different configurations
are shown in figure 2-70.
a. Shields. Grease lubricated, single-row,

deep-groove ball bearings are generally equipped
with metal shields on one or both sides. The shield
is secured in the nonrotating member, usually the
outer ring, and there is a running clearance with
the rotating inner ring. This clearance is sometimes
used as a means of controlling the entrance of
fresh lubricant to the bearing from an adjacent
002066
grease chamber. There is no speed limitation on
Figure 2-66. Retainer and Bearing Ring
shielded bearing. Removable shields are always
Land Surfaces
used on precision bearings to avoid distortion of
2-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
DOUBLE SEALED, SINGLE SEAL,

STEEL REINFORCED STEEL
REINFORCED
DOUBLE SEALED, SINGLE SEAL,

SNAP WASHER SNAP WASHER
RETAINED RETAINED
002067
Figure 2-67. Forces Acting on Retainer
Pockets by Rolling Elements
DOUBLE SHIELDED SINGLE SHIELD,

SWAGE RETAINED SWAGE RETAINED
002070
Figure 2-70. Typical Seal and Shield Installations
(3) Felt seals

(4) Fiberglass seals
(5) Teflon seals
2-74. SNAP RINGS (Figure 2-71). The snap-ring
type bearing has a groove ground in the outer
diameter of the outer ring. A removable spring steel
002068
snap ring is inserted in the groove to axially position
Figure 2-68. Bearing Shield
the bearing in the housing. This eliminates the need
for a shoulder to support the bearing and simplifies
housing designs. Snap ring will support light to
medium thrust loads. Snap rings locators should not
be used with heavy thrust loads or where precision
alignment and positioning is a factor.
2-75. I D E N T I F I C A T I O N A N D C O D I N G O F
BEARINGS.
2-76. NATIONAL STOCK NUMBERS. National
Stock Numbers (NSN) have been established for
use in identifying a product procured by the govern-
ment. A significant number of parts and components
are purchased from NATO countries. Therefore, two
additional digits have been added to the basic stock
number between the 4 digit stock class and the
7 digit item identification number to indicate the
002069
Figure 2-69. Bearing Seal nation of origin. United States has been assigned
the -00- and -01- codes.
2-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
teristics and/or construction features. It should be

noted that the part number marked on the bearing
ring face is only the basic part of the complete part
number that fully describes the bearing.
2-80. The basic bearing part number cannot be

used to substitute or procure rolling bearings for
most aircraft applications. Serious problems could
result, including the possible loss of lives and aircraft
if bearings are not correctly purchased using all
pertinent data.
002071
2-81. Every bearing manufacturer has their own
Figure 2-71. Snap Ring for Bearing Retention coding system. While there is some similarity be-
tween manufacturer’s codes, caution should be
exercised when cross referencing part numbers. The
2-77. Examples of NSN’s that identify bearings applicable illustrated parts breakdown and/or assem-
produced by the United States are 3110-00-799-0376 bly drawing should always be checked for the
and 3110-01-540-4662. complete bearing part number. A typical complete
bearing part number is as follows:
2-78. Rolling element bearings, except for a few
specialized cases are assigned an FSC code of SFR2SSWX3K3C0-11
3110. Plain bearings, including sleeve and spherical
uniball/monoball type bearings are assigned an FSC S AISI 440C Stainless Steel
Code of 3120.
F Flanged outer ring
R Inch series instrument

Example
W Stainless steel, 2-piece pressed ribbon, loosely
(NCB) National Codification Bureau Code
clinched
3110 Ć 00 Ć 293 Ć 8567 Ć FN X3 Special features
K3 Radial play (0.0003” to 0.0005”)

FSC NIIN SMIC
Federal Special Material
Supply C Calibrated bore or outer diameter
Identification
Classification Classification
0-11 Lubricant (Winsorlube L-245X)
National Item
Identification 2-82. A I R C R A F T / E N G I N E / C O M P O N E N T
Number MANUFACTURER’S PART NUMBER. Part numbers
assigned to a bearing by the manufacturer of an
aircraft, engine, or component, are often referred
NOTE to as prime contractor part numbers or original
equipment manufacturer (OEM) part number. These
The Air Force uses MMAC designations part numbers refer to a specific drawing for a
instead of SMIC as indicated in the example particular bearing. The drawing will call out all the
above (Ref T.O. 00Ć25Ć115). special features, design and inspection criteria that
fully describes the bearing. Special quality control
and/or selective screening requirements are usually
specified that may often exceed normal bearing
2-79. BEARING MANUFACTURER’S PART NUM- manufacturers requirements. The bearing manufac-
BER. The part number assigned to a particular turer’s part number, even though it is a complete
bearing by the bearing manufacturer describes that number as described in paragraph 2-81, cannot be
bearing as to size, type, precision, lubricant, retainer relied upon to substitute and/or procure these
type, internal clearances, and other special charac- bearings.
2-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
2-83. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES. cognizance of roller bearings. Currently, there are
five classes of precision for ball bearings: ABEC-1,
ABEC-3, ABEC-5, ABEC-7, and ABEC-9. There are
2-84. GENERAL. Tolerances in a fine watch are two classes of precision for roller bearings: RBEC-1
crude when compared with ball or roller bearing. and RBEC-5. The requirements for many of aeronau-
The rollers, balls and rings of modern rolling bearings tical applications can be satisfied by the use of
are among the finest and most accurate surfaces ABEC-1 and RBEC-1 standard precision bearings.
possible to produce by mass production methods.
The bearing mechanic works with tolerances of one,
two and three ten-thousandths of an inch accuracy 2-89. ABEC-3 bearings are sometimes used in
and smaller. The rolling elements in a bearing rotating electrical and accessory components. Very
seldom differ in diameter by more than 25 millionths limited use is made of this class since the tightened
of an inch, often less than half that much. The Air tolerances are not sufficiently accurate to meet the
Force uses MMAC designations instead of SMIC requirements of most precision applications, yet are
as indicated in the example above (Ref T.O. not needed for general purpose use. Applications
00-25-115) that require strict control on dimensions and running
characteristics usually bypass ABEC-5 bearings and
specify ABEC-7 and ABEC-9, although some are
2-85. Much of the fine precision and accuracy built being used in jet engine accessory components.
into a bearing is taken for granted. Carelessness, RBEC-5 roller bearings are used extensively in gas
lack of appreciation, and misunderstanding of bear- turbine main shaft applications where performance,
ing dimensions can greatly reduce the service that alignment and balance are critical factors.
the average bearing is capable of providing. It is
generally recognized that if the accuracy and quality
built into a bearing are properly maintained by careful 2-90. ABEC-7 and ABEC-9 precision tolerances are
handling and maintenance at all levels of the bearing required for applications involving high speeds and
program, the useful life of the bearing can be greatly under conditions of critically controlled oil lubrication.
increased. However, any hope of attaining such
results requires a good educational program at all
levels of maintenance.
2-86. STANDARD BEARING SERIES. The bound-

ary dimensions and tolerances for rolling bearings
have been standardized by the American Bearing
Manufacturer’s Association (ABMA). This includes
the outer diameter, inner diameter (bore), width, and
fillet sizes on shaft and housing which the bearing
corner contours must clear. This maximizes the
interchangeability of bearings of different manufac-
turers. See Table 2-1.
2-87. Deep-groove ball bearings are made in sever-

al different proportions or series as shown in figure
2-72. The designer has, for a given bore size, four
different bearing choices with respect to outer
diameter series. Thus the best combination of shaft
and housing sizes can be used to obtain the required
load capacity, shaft alignment, system rigidity and
overall component package size.
2-88. ABEC/RBEC TOLERANCES. The ABMA

(American Bearing Manufacturer’s Association) is
organized to establish and maintain a set of stan-
dards for the rolling bearing industry. The Annular
Bearing Engineers Committee (ABEC) is a commit- 002072
tee of the ABMA that has the responsibility for Figure 2-72. Standard Bearing Series
establishing standards for ball bearings. Similarly, with Respect to OD and ID sizes
the Roller Bearing Engineers Committee (RBEC) has
2-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
2-91. Group B airframe bearings generally have b. Group B - Airframe and General Bearings;
dimensional requirements lower than ABEC-1. Air- including rod ends, plain bearings, wheel bearings
frame bearings usually have greater internal clear- and aircraft control bearings.
ances because of nonuniformity of fit-ups and
possible misalignments in the application. c. Group C - Instrument Bearings; including
all bearings used in aircraft instruments and related
equipment.
2-92. ABEC standard tables are included as part
of appendix B. d. Group D - Rotating Electrical Bearings;
including generators, starters, small motors, invert-
ers and hydraulic accessory bearings.
2-93. GROUPING OF BEARINGS BY APPLICATION.
e. Group E - Helicopter Bearings; including
transmissions, gearboxes, rotor heads and drive
2-94. Rolling bearings will be grouped or classified shaft bearings.
in five major categories depending on their applica-
tion. 2-95. Use of these groupings is limited, and the
placement of individual bearings in a particular group
is sometimes arbitrary. However, they are useful in
a. Group A - Powerplant Bearing; including establishing general processing requirements and
gas turbine and reciprocating engine bearings, policies for the handling of bearings according to
gearbox bearings and related accessory bearings. their application and operational environment.
Table 2-1. Listing of ABMA and ANSI Standards
ABMA Standards ANSI Standards

Section
Terminology 1
Gaging Practices 4
Mounting Dimensions 7 B 3.17
Mounting Accessories 8
Load Ratings (Ball Bearings) 9
Ball (Rolling Element) 10 B 3.17
Load Ratings (Roller Bearings) 11
Instrument Ball Bearings 12
Vibration and Noise Testing 13
Bearing Housings with Spherical Outside Surfaces 14
Ball Bearings with Spherical Outside Surfaces/Extended Rings 15
Airframe Ball, Roller and Needle Bearings 16
Needle Rollers, Metric 17
Inch & Metric Radial Needle Bearings 18
Tapered Roller Bearings 19
Metric Ball & Roller Bearings 20
Thrust Needle Roller and Cage Assemblies 21
Spherical Plain Bearings, Join Type 22
2-27/(2-28 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION III
REMOVAL AND HANDLING OF BEARINGS
3-1. GENERAL. 3-6. SPECIAL CONTAINERS. Special materials

handling containers shall be provided for certain
3-2. The greatest single source of unnecessary bearings due to their special construction features
bearing damage is improper removal practices. All and/or critical application. Mixed storage and
too often, adequate removal tooling is nonexistent handling of these special bearings in a single
and only makeshift tools are available. Even when container with other bearings may damage the
bearings are carefully removed, poor handling bearings. The containers can be constructed of
practices and inadequate protection of bearings wood, metal, or nonmetallic materials and utilize
during periods of temporary storage cause unnec- noncorrosive cushionings such as plastic films and
essary loss of many bearings that could be foams. Use the following criteria to determine the
processed and reused. The general attitude of many need for special bearing handling containers:
people toward used material must be overcome in
a. Bearings with delicate or fragile construc-
establishing a program to reclaim and reuse
tions such as large, thin section rings that are easily
serviceable bearings. Only by carefully controlling
deformed.
removal and handling practices, with adequate
provision for interim protection of removed bearings, b. Rings that have precision lapped ring faces
can the maximum potential life be obtained from that are used as carbon seal contacting surfaces.
existing bearing stocks. Removal procedures must
be as carefully established and implemented as c. Critical high cost bearings that are used
installation and process instructions. It is with this in compressor and turbine shafts applications of gas
objective in mind that the following instructions are turbine engines and other similar high performance,
given. heavily loaded assemblies.
3-3. BEARING REMOVAL AREAS. d. Bearings that are an integral part of a gear
assembly.
3-4. Well-defined bearing removal areas should 3-7. BEARING REMOVAL TOOLS.
be established in each disassembly shop that will
provide adequate protection for the bearings. The 3-8. GENERAL. The availability of adequate
areas shall be kept clean and protected against bearing removal tooling is very important. The
exposure to moisture, abrasive materials, and mechanic should seek new and/or better ways to
corrosive fumes. Proper removal tools that are in remove bearings from the assembly without causing
good condition shall be provided for each work area. damage.
Personnel removing bearings shall be properly
trained and supervised so that bearings are not NOTE
damaged by the removal operation.
Each mechanic is responsible for making
sure that adequate tooling is either
3-5. ACCUMULATION CONTAINERS. Suitable available or the need has been brought
accumulation containers shall be placed in all work to the attention of the cognizant tool
areas for the temporary protection and storage of designer. Notify the cognizant depot
remove bearings. Containers shall be leakproof, bearing engineer when bearing damage
preferably of metal construction, and preferably does occur from current removal
equipped with self-closing type lids. Reusable metal practices.
containers are acceptable. Container interiors shall
be clean and free from corrosion. Line the interior 3-9. TOOLING REQUIREMENTS. General require-
of the container with a disposable polyethylene bag. ments for selecting and/or designing bearing removal
Clearly identify the containers as a “Bearing tools are as follows:
Container”. Mark them as returnable to the origi-
nating shop. Provide the containers in sizes that a. Cylindrical tools shall be square-faced at
will handle all of the different bearing types that both ends, free of burrs, nicks, or other defects that
will be removed and sent to the bearing processing would prevent uniform contact and even distribution
facility. of the removal load.
3-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Tools (other than pullers that require higher

material hardness levels for greater strength) that
will contact the shaft or bearing surfaces shall be
made of soft steel or brass so as not to scratch
the shaft or bearing surfaces.
c. Tools shall be of the proper diameter so

that only one bearing ring will be contacted. Do not
allow the tool to contact the seal or shield.
d. Tools shall be kept clean and free of

corrosion and protected against physical damage.
3-10. ARBOR PRESS. An arbor press is the best

and most easily controlled removal tool. The press
can be either manually or hydraulically operated,
depending on shop requirements.
3-11. The arbor should operate smoothly and with

good operator control. The arbor press may be used
with accessories that will assist in bearing removal. 003001
Always use backup bars that are of the same size, Figure 3-1. Use of Backup Bars and Arbor Press
with squared-up sides and a sufficient width to
support both the inner and outer bearing rings (figure
3-1). In more difficult positions, or where complete
ring support is desirable, a split ring support may
be required (figure 3-2). Another method of removing
bearings with an arbor press includes the use of
a drift pipe (figure 3-3).
CAUTION
The face of the arbor ram must be kept

smooth, flat, and square with the axis of
the ram.
3-12. OUTSIDE PULLERS (Figure 3-4). This type

of bearing puller can be used without accessories
to remove inner rings when there is no obstruction
and where long reach is not necessary. When the
inner ring is obstructed by a gear, housing flange,
or some other object, the bearing can be removed
by attaching the puller to the gear or flange and
forcing the bearing off the shaft ahead of the
003002
obstructing object (figure 3-5). Figure 3-2. Use of Split Ring and Arbor Press
3-13. PUSH-PULLERS (Figures 3-6 and 3-7). This

type of puller is adjustable in width, and the length 3-15. The use of a split collar puller for removing
can be changed by adding leg extensions of various tight-fitting shaft-mounted bearings, ensures the
lengths. application of pressure to the inner ring (figure 3-9).
3-14. PULLER ADAPTERS (Figure 3-8). A cup 3-16. SPECIAL REMOVAL TOOLS. A variety of
pulling attachment may be used to force the bearing special tools are available or can be constructed
from closed housing seats. Apply removal pressure to remove bearings from special installations. The
only to the outer ring of the bearing. following are typical examples.
3-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
003006
Figure 3-6. Basic Push-Puller Bearing Puller
003003
Figure 3-3. Use of Drift Pipe and Arbor Press
003007
Figure 3-7. Push-Puller Tool with Extended Legs
003004
Figure 3-4. Two-Jawed, Outside Bearing Puller
003005
Figure 3-5. Removing Bearing Ahead 003008
of Gear Bearings Figure 3-8. Puller Attachment for Bearings Cups
3-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Special Tools for Rod End, Bellcrank and

Aircraft Control Bearings (Figure 3-10). Bearings can
be removed with production efficiency from subas-
semblies such as rod ends, bellcranks, and levers
by use of a turret assembly and a suitable arbor
press. The turret assembly is positioned on the table
of the arbor press and rotated until the proper-sized
mandrel is located under the arbor press ram. The
bearing is removed by the arbor press ram exerting
pressure on the mandrel.
b. Screw-Type Bearing Puller (Figure 3-11).

Screw-type bearing pullers with split-nut adapters
can be used to remove bearings from shafts of
armatures, spindles, and rotors when there is limited
gripping clearance behind the bearing. To remove
the bearing:
(1) Position the adapter on the bearing.
(2) Assemble the puller.
(3) Exert pressure against the shaft by 003009

turning the screw and remove the bearing. Figure 3-9. Split Collar Puller Plate for
Removing Shaft-Mounted Bearings
c. Internal Expansion Collet-Knocker Type
Puller (Figure 3-12). An internal expansion collet-
knocker type puller can be used to remove a bearing
from a recess that is accessible from only one side.
Use the following procedure:
(1) Insert the proper size collet through the

inner ring of the bearing.
(2) Expand the collet by turning the knob

at the end of the tool.
(3) Remove the bearing by use of the

knocker.
CAUTION
The method of removal will often brinell

the bearing and should be used only when
there is no other way.
003010
Figure 3-10. Turret Press for Removing Bearings
d. Heavy-Duty, Collet Type Tool for Removing
Large Bearings (Figure 3-13). A screw-type puller
with a heavy-duty internal expansion collet can be (3) The screw collet is then held by the flats
used to remove bearings from a recess that is with a wrench while the hex nut is turned, removing
accessible from only one side. Use the following the bearing.
procedure:
e. Clamp-Type Bearing Puller (Figure 3-14).
(1) Insert the proper-size collet through the Many bearings can be removed from flight control
inner ring of the bearing. assemblies with a clamp-type bearing puller by
selecting the proper-size collar and ram accessories.
(2) Tighten the square-headed plunger with An internal spring applies an even pressure to the
a wrench to expand the collet. bearing ring face.
3-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(1) Grip the bearing in the chuck.
(2) Apply pressure to the end of the shaft.
(3) Turn the screw, pressing the shaft from

the bearing.
CAUTION
The method of removal may brinell the

bearing rings and balls. Slow, evenly
applied pressure will minimize brinell dam-
age.
3-17. PREPARATION FOR BEARING REMOVAL.
3-18. C L E A N I N G B E A R I N G S P R I O R TO R E-
MOVAL. Cleaning of assemblies prior to bearing
removal can cause unnecessary damage to the
bearings. Do not expose installed bearings to
solvents, steam, detergents, abrasive blast media,
003011 cleaners, paint stripping compounds, water or vapor
Figure 3-11. Screw Type Bearing Puller degreasing fluids. This is particularly true when
degreasing and stripping fluids are applied under
pressure. Contamination forced into a bearing during
the cleaning process must subsequently be removed
and may damage the bearing beyond repair.
3-19. Clean bearings prior to removal by carefully

wiping foreign material such as metal chips and
abrasive particles from the bearing ring faces with
clean cloths.
CAUTION
Many bearings are damaged beyond rec-

lamation by contamination with corrosive
fluids. Protect bearings from stripping and
003012
degreasing compounds.
Figure 3-12. Expansion Collet-Knocker
Bearing Puller
3-20. SELECTION OF PROPER REMOVAL PRO-
CEDURE. Select the correct removal procedure
f. Screw-Type Airframe Bearing Puller (Figure before starting to remove a bearing. The correct
3-15). The screw-type bearing puller is extensively procedure for removing a bearing will depend on
used to remove airframe bearings from flight control the type of shaft and housing mounting fits. Usually,
surfaces and where working space is limited. Force the bearing ring that rotates during operation is
is applied by tightening the nut against the proper mounted with an interference fit to prevent slip.
size ram, forcing the bearing out of the housing However, there are some specialized applications
into the cavity of the puller cup. that utilize interference fits on both the inner and
outer bearing rings. Shaft and housing mounting fits
g. Armature Bearing Puller (Figures 3-16 and range from loose, which does not require forcible
3-17). A special armature bearing puller is used to removal, to degrees of interference or tightness,
remove bearings from shafts of motors, alternators, which requires special removal techniques that will
inverters, starters, and other similar equipment. not damage the bearing. Consult the applicable
Bearing size is limited only by the maximum chuck drawing or overhaul instruction for the type of
opening. Use the following procedure: bearing ring-to-mounting fit.
3-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Never spin the bearing before it has been cleaned

and lubricated.
b. Press on the correct ring. Press or pull

only on the bearing ring with the interference fit.
When pressure is applied against the wrong ring
or through the rolling elements or retainer, damage
in the form of brinelling, bending, or fracture will
result.
c. Consult drawings and directives. Obtain the

applicable drawing or illustrated plans breakdown
of the assembly prior to disassembly. When assem-
bly information is not available, a sketch should be
made showing the order in which the components
are removed and their relative position in the
assembly.
d. Have a clean work area. Always work in

clean surroundings. Assemble together the needed
items such as clean covered containers, clean tools
and clean cloths.
e. P r o t e c t i v e h a n d c r e a m . U s e a n a n t i -
perspirant handcream when physically handling
bearings during the removal process.
f. Remove external contamination and grime.

Use a clean, dry cloth to wipe away any dirt which
might enter the bearing during disassembly.
g. Select proper removal tools. Decide on the

proper bearing removal tool to be used and the
general procedure to be followed. Use an arbor
press, bearing puller, or similar equipment which
003013 applies a firm, steady pressure to the bearing when
Figure 3-13. Heavy Duty Expansion Collet possible. Do not use a drift punch and hammer or
Bearing Puller other pounding devices.
3-21. SELECTION OF PROPER TOOLING. Ex- h. Use the removal tools correctly. When using
amine the bearing mounting installation to determine an arbor or a bearing puller, adjust the tool carefully
the best method of bearing removal. Select the so that the pressure is applied only against the fixed
appropriate tooling that will remove the bearing bearing ring and as uniformly as possible over the
without causing damage. Notify the cognizant tool entire face of the ring. Uneven pressure will rock
designer when adequate tooling does not exist to the ring and will damage the shaft, and/or bearing.
properly remove the bearing.
i. Relieve any load that is on bearing. The
3-22. BEARING REMOVAL PROCEDURES. bearing should be unloaded before it is removed.
Failure to do so will brinell the rings and damage
3-23. GENERAL. The following procedures shall be the rolling elements.
followed to salvage the maximum number of bear-
ings and to preclude damage to the assembly: j. Remove related parts with care. When
disassembling a component containing bearings, be
a. Do not rotate the bearing. Do not rotate aware that high static loads may be placed on hidden
the bearing any more than necessary as it will grind bearings when strenuous methods are used to
dirt or grit into the rolling elements and raceways. remove housings, covers, shafts, and other parts.
3-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Remove bearings with an arbor press or

a bearing puller when the shaft assembly is free
of flanges, gears, or other attaching parts, and the
shaft extends beyond the inner ring.
b. A bearing puller is the best method of

removal when the end of the shaft is flush with the
inner ring (figure 3-6).
c. A regular bearing puller can be used to

pull the bearing ahead of the gear that is mounted
next to the bearing (figure 3-5).
d. Use split rings for applications having a

large flange or collar located directly behind the
bearing to pull the bearing off the shaft (figure 3-19).
3-25. Although the only proper method of removing

shaft-mounted bearings is by exerting pressure on
the inner ring, there are some applications where
003014 the inner ring is not accessible (figure 3-20). When
Figure 3-14. Clamp Type Bearing Puller pressure must be exerted on the outer ring of a
shaft-mounted bearing observe the following proce-
dures:
k. Note unusual conditions. Take care to
preserve any evidence of why the bearing may have a. Keep the pull on the ring steady and apply
failed when removing failed and/or defective bear- the removal force evenly.
ings. This information can be used to isolate the
cause of failure and assist in the development of b. Examine the bearing for deep or shallow
an improved design. shoulders. Do not apply pressure to the shallow
shoulder of a counter-bore or angular-contact bear-
NOTE ing (figure 3-21).
c. Rotate the outer ring to reduce the possibil-

Components containing failed, damaged ity of brinelling the raceways. This can be done by
or improper bearings shall be reported holding the center screw of the bearing puller
to the cognizant local depot engineer and stationary and turning the legs.
an Unsatisfactory Report initiated per the
applicable Service Command.
l. Removing roller bearings. Rotate the shaft

when removing a separable cylindrical roller bearing
to prevent scoring of the raceway or rollers.
m. Use thermal expansion for tight fits. Do not

use mechanical force alone to remove bearings with
severe interference mounting fits. Use heat expan-
sion to remove bearing rings when the interference
fits are 0.001 inch or greater.
3-24. REMOVAL OF TIGHT SHAFT-MOUNTED

BEARINGS (Figure 3-18). Apply pressure to the
inner ring to remove a bearing from the shaft. Three
different types of shaft-mounted bearing installations
may be encountered, and specific removal proce- 003015
dures apply. Figure 3-15. Screw Type Airframe Bearing Puller
3-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
d. Advance the bearing sufficiently to allow

the puller claws to be inserted behind the inner ring.
Remove in the conventional manner.
NOTE
Specially designed tools can be made with

feet that can be forced into position behind
the inner ring to avoid applying force to
the outer ring.
3-26. REMOVAL OF TIGHT HOUSING-MOUNTED

BEARINGS (Figures 3-22 and 3-23). Bearings can
be removed from blind recesses in blind housings
003016
Figure 3-16. Armature Bearing Puller as easily as most shaft-mounted bearings. The
method of removal depends upon the type of
installation. In some cases, a puller with reverse
claws can be inserted through the bearing bore and
expanded to grasp the outer ring. Pressure is applied
to the screw and the bearing is eased out of the
housing without damage to the bearing.
3-27. The same general rules apply when using a

bearing puller on housing-mounted bearings as apply
to shaft-mounted bearings. Pressure must be applied
evenly and distributed as uniformly as possible over
the outer ring (figure 3-24). The puller must be
carefully placed to apply the pressure straight and
square so as not to damage the keyways or shoulders
during the removal process. Arbor presses can be
used if the housing is open on both sides.
3-28. REMOVAL OF TIGHT SHAFT, HOUSING-

MOUNTED BEARINGS. Applications using this type
of mounting design generally involve bearings of
separable construction and present no particular
003017
difficulty. However, there are designs that have
Figure 3-17. Armature Bearing Chuck utilized nonseparable bearings with interference fits
with Centering Pilot in the housing and on the shaft. It is usually possible
to let the shaft follow as the bearing is pressed
out of the housing (figure 3-25). This ensures that
the removal force is not transmitted through the
rolling elements. The bearing can then be easily
removed from the shaft. The opposite procedure
of letting the housing follow when the bearing is
withdrawn from the shaft may also be used.
3-29. REMOVAL OF BONDED BEARINGS. Bear-

ings held in place by adhesive bonding in lieu of
mechanical staking may require considerable removal
pressure. Structural adhesives will require from 1,500
to 3,500 psi removal pressure. Use of an adhesively
bonded bearing usually indicates that, when the
bearing is replaced, the bearing and shaft or housing
are replaced as a unit. However, adhesively bonded
003018 bearings can be removed with the standard removal
Figure 3-18. Removing a Shaft-Mounted Bearing tools. Bearings and mounting surfaces are then
carefully inspected for mechanical damage.
3-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
3-30. R E M O V A L O F A I R C R A F T W H E E L
BEARINGS. Aircraft bearings are removed using
the following procedures:
CAUTION
When removing the cone assembly, be

sure to properly align the ring to evenly
distribute the applied force and prevent
cocking of the cone which would damage
the shaft and bearing assembly.
a. Removing the Cone and Roller Assembly.

Remove the bearing cone and roller assembly from 003019
the axle. Since most aircraft wheel assemblies are Figure 3-19. Bearing Mounted Close to Gear
of stationary cone-type design, the bearing cone
and roller assembly can be easily removed by hand. (3) Use dry ice to remove the cups mounted
with extremely high interference fits. Remove the
b. Removing the Cup. Removing the wheel wheel from the oven and place dry ice in contact
bearing cup should not be a standard practice. with the cup. Clean and preserve the cup as soon
Remove the cup for physical defects, improper fit as possible to prevent corrosion from condensate
of the cup in the housing, or as directed by generated by the dry ice process.
engineering. Paint curing procedures also affect cup
removal policies. Bearing cups that have been 3-31. REMOVAL OF STAKED-IN BEARINGS.
subjected to temperatures over 300_F shall not be Many airframe and aircraft control bearings are held
reused. Refer to table 7-3 for acceptance limits for in place by mechanically staking the bearing hous-
surface defects on bearing cups. All questionable ing. These bearings can be removed in the same
bearing cups shall be removed. Bearing cups that manner as any tight housing-mounted bearing.
are left in place shall be protected against corrosion However, the V-groove design bearing will require
and mechanical damage. Aluminum and magnesium one additional operation when aluminum or magne-
alloy wheel assemblies require greater interference sium housings are used (steel housings are not
fits for bearing retention. Removal by physical force effected). The V-groove configured bearing (lip on
alone may damage the bearing seat. Thermal the outer ring) is swaged into the housing bore
expansion alone shall be used to remove cups. Use chamfer (figure 12-34). To remove, use a fly cutter
the following procedures. mounted in a drill press to cut away the swaged
lip. The bearing can then be easily removed with
CAUTION an arbor press and mandrel.
Support the wheel assembly on the hub 3-32. MINOR REWORK IN SHOP AREA. Bearings
and not by any part of the flange. may be retained in the disassembly and assembly
shops for minor rework and reassembly when
authorized by the cognizant engineering code and
(1) Place the wheel assembly in a heated the cognizant depot bearing engineer. Applicable
oven at a temperature not to exceed 250_F for bearings shall be identified by supporting engineer-
approximately 10 minutes. The oven temperature ing documentation that specifies the type and extent
can be set at a lower level if shop experience of authorized rework.
indicates the cup can be removed without excessive
removal force at the lower temperature. 3-33. Shop areas established for minor repair of
designated bearings shall meet the following mini-
(2) Remove the wheel assembly from the mum requirements.
oven. Cups that do not readily fall out can be
removed by using a hand arbor press or by lightly a. The minor bearing rework area shall be
tapping the cup using a mild steel plug of slightly separated from the disassembly and reassembly
smaller diameter and a small hammer. Do not force areas.
the cup until the highest permissible oven tempera-
ture of 250_F has been used. Use care to prevent b. The area shall be well lighted and provided
damage to the bearing seat. with adequate benches.
3-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
metal plating that can be reclaimed for significant

cost savings. Also, many bearings are of such critical
nature as to require special disposition to prevent
their accidental reuse (see paragraph 1-61). See
paragraph 3-44 for disposal of rejected bearings that
are designated for refurbishment at a designated
Bearing Technical Repair Center.
3-37. SEGREGATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF

REMOVED BEARINGS.
3-38. BEARINGS ROUTED FOR IMMEDIATE PRO-

CESSING. Whenever possible, group identical bear-
ings removed from the same location of identical
equipment together. Identify the bearings with the
applicable bearing part number from the illustrated
parts breakdown, service manual, or applicable
drawing. This is important in the case of bearings
with special precision or nonstandard design param-
eters. When the bearing processing shop receives
bearings without identification the bearings are
placed under a standard classification after proces-
sing. Identification of special bearings of high cost
and short supply is lost and the bearings cannot
be reused even though they are acceptable for
another service tour. Refer to paragraph 3-39 for
003020 special identification procedures.
Figure 3-20. Outer Ring Removal of
Shaft-Mounted Bearings 3-39. SPECIAL HANDLING PROCEDURE. Many
bearings require special handling procedures be-
cause of their use in critical applications or because
c. The area shall be kept clean.
of special matching characteristics. The following
procedures shall be followed:
d. Personnel performing the minor rework
shall be trained in handling bearings and have all
necessary documentation and instructions required a. Keep the components of a separable bear-
to perform the specified rework procedure. ing together. Never mix bearing components.
e. Adequate tooling shall be provided as NOTE

specified by the applicable directive.
The only exceptions are for those bearings
3-34. DISPOSITION OF REMOVED BEARINGS. that the components parts are separately
stocked and/or procured.
3-35. ROUTE TO BEARING SHOP. Forward all
removed bearings to an approved bearing proces- b. Securely fasten the inner ring halves of
sing facility for screening, processing, and/or rework all split inner ring bearings together with approved
as required. Processed bearings can sometimes be ties to prevent damage to the rings, balls and/or
used in other aeronautical or less critical nonaero- retainer.
nautical applications. Although bearings may appear
to be seriously damaged or corroded and of little c. Keep multiple matched bearings together.
value, the final decision on reusability shall be the Do not separate duplex or multiple stack bearings
responsibility of bearing processing personnel. since the original precise matching must be main-
tained for proper operation.
3-36. DISPOSAL OF REJECTED BEARINGS. The
bearing processing shop shall have the responsibility d. Identify the following bearings with the unit
of disposing of rejected, obsolete and/or otherwise number or engine serial number from which they
non-RFI bearings. Many bearings have a precious were removed.
3-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
f. Identify bearings that have a prime contrac-

tor or OEM part number (see paragraph 1-49 for
definition). Identification forms shall be developed
at each depot to forward with the removed bearings
indicating their application, lubrication, and all special
dimensional, torque and other unique requirements.
g. Place critical bearings in special individual

handling containers for routing to the bearing proces-
sing shop per paragraph 3-6.
h. Place the following bearings into low-cost,

individual, unsealed polyethylene bags. Use bags
003021
made of barrier material, Specification MIL-PRF-131,
Figure 3-21. Removing Bearings Having
Type I for heavy bearings. (This requirement is in
Shallow Shoulders
addition to step g).
(1) Gas turbine main bearings.
(2) Gas turbine accessory bearings over

3-inches outer diameter.
(3) Propeller shaft bearings.
(4) Helicopter dynamic component bearings

over 3-inches outer diameter.
(5) Hydraulic, pneumatic, and fuel accessory

bearings over 3-inches outer diameter.
(6) R o t a t i n g e l e c t r i c a l b e a r i n g s o v e r
3-inches outer diameter.
(7) Special high cost airframe and rod end

bearings.
(8) All separable-type bearings.
003022 (9) All bearings with lapped surfaces.

Figure 3-22. Removing Housing-Mounted Bearing
(10) All bearings coated with special barrier
film coatings.
(1) Gas turbine engine main shaft bearings.
(11) All matched bearing sets regardless of
(2) Helicopter dynamic component bearings. size.
i. Bearings, other than general airframe-type

(3) Gas turbine compressor bearings.
bearings, shall be multiple packaged in unsealed
polyethylene bags. Airframe bearings are cadmium
(4) Other bearings specified by the local plated and do not require the additional protection
cognizant depot bearing engineer. of a bag.
e. Record abnormal operating conditions, j. Bearings removed from water-crash/fire-

such as insufficient lubrication, overheating, pres- damaged naval aircraft shall be identified with the
ence of foreign material, evidence of misalignment, t a g s p e c i f i e d b y Te c h n i c a l M a n u a l N AVA I R
or obvious part failure along with bearing identity 15-01-500 “Preservation of Naval Aircraft.” Consult
and installation location. Forward this data with the appropriate Army and Air Force documents for
subject bearings to the bearing processing shop. applicable instructions.
3-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
bearings to the bearing processing shop as soon

as possible.
3-42. BEARINGS SCHEDULED FOR IMMEDIATE

PROCESSING. Bearings that are routed to a bearing
processing shop for immediate processing shall not
be cleaned except for the removal of external metal
chips and abrasive dirt prior to disassembly. Any
cleaning or spinning of a dirty bearing will cause
more damage than it will prevent.
a. Place removed bearings immediately in

covered accumulation containers per paragraph 3-5
and route to the bearing processing shop as soon
as possible.
003023
Figure 3-23. Removing Wheel Bearing Cup b. When delays in routing will exceed 5 days,
immerse the bearings in a preservative qualified to
MIL–PRF–32033 general purpose lubrication oil,
water displacing.
3-43. BEARINGS SCHEDULED FOR STORAGE

AWAITING PROCESSING. Bearings removed in
areas or facilities remote from an approved bearing
processing shop may require temporary protection.
Temporary protection of removed bearings up to 90
days shall be provided as follows:
003024 a. Open, single shielded bearings shall be

Figure 3-24. Applying Removal Pressure protected by immersion in a preservative qualified
to Housing-Mounted Bearings to MIL–PRF–32033 general purpose lubrication oil,
water displacing.
k. Identify bearings removed from compo-
nents under a Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program b. Unprotected external surfaces of double-
(SOAP). Include assembly, unit or serial number for sealed/shielded bearings may be smear coated with
engineering reference. clean operating lubricant.
c. Place preserved bearings in suitable con-

3-40. CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF REMOVED
tainers. Reusable metal containers are preferred;
BEARINGS.
but, when necessary, the use of other types of
approved sealed containers is permissible. Contain-
CAUTION ers shall be of such size that, when filled, total weight
does not exceed 40 pounds. Preservative coated
Do not spin a dirty bearing or attempt bearings shall be individually overwrapped with
to solvent spray or blow clean with com- noncorrosive Grade A barrier paper Specification
pressed air. A bearing can be seriously MIL-PRF-121. Containers shall be properly packed
damaged by unnecessary rotation. and cushioned to minimize handling damage and
be positively sealed.
3-41. WATER-CRASH/FIRE-DAMAGED COM-
PONENTS. Clean and preserve water-crash/fire- 3-44. BEARINGS BEING HELD FOR SHIPMENT
damaged naval components containing bearings in TO A TECHNICAL REPAIR CENTER (TRC) FOR
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h Te c h n i c a l M a n u a l , N AVA I R REFURBISHMENT. Preserve all used bearings that
15-01-500 “Preservation of Naval Aircraft.” Consult have been designated by the services as refurbish-
appropriate Army and Air Force documents for able, as soon as possible, in a preservative oil
applicable instructions. Immerse the bearings im- qualified to MIL–PRF–32033, a general purpose
mediately upon removal from the component in water displacing lubrication oil, or Specification
general purpose oil, MIL–PRF–32033. Route the MIL-C-11796 Class 3 hot dip compound, or an oil
3-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
that is equivalent to either of the above. The

individual bearings shall then be placed into packing
boxes for shipment to the appropriate Bearing TRC
for rework.
3-45. ROUTING AND HANDLING OF REMOVED

BEARINGS. Handle bearings with care at all times.
Keep the accumulation containers off the floor and
in areas where they are not exposed to contamina-
tion, moisture, and corrosive fumes. Covers shall
be kept in place except when bearings are being
added. Containers shall not be stored in outside
areas and provisions shall be made for their routing
to the bearing processing shop at specified intervals.
NOTE
Every precaution shall be taken to handle

used bearings in a manner equal to that
taken for new bearings. Every removed
bearing is a potential ready-for-issue re-
placement item.
3-46. DO’S AND DON’TS OF BEARING REMOVAL.
3-47. The following summary of do’s and don’ts of

bearing removal should appear in every bearing
removal area. 003025
Figure 3-25. Removal of Outer Ring
3-48. Do’s of Bearing Removal. with Shaft Assembly
f. Always apply pressure to the inner ring of

a. Remove bearings in established work areas a shaft-mounted bearing or the outer ring of a
that are kept clean and free from corrosive fumes housing-mounted bearing. If both rings are tight,
and abrasive materials. apply pressure evenly to both rings.
b. Insist on adequate tooling, kept in clean, g. Provide positive means for retaining re-
repaired condition. moved components and handle removed bearings
carefully at all times.
c. Remove bearings at earliest stages of h. Protect shaft and housing surfaces with
disassembly. Removal should be preceded by a preservative coatings, and immediately use suitable
minimum of cleaning consisting of carefully wiping protection against handling damage.
gross contamination from the external faces of the
bearing to prevent its entrance into the bearing i. Protect bearings by placing them in suitable
during removal. covered containers. If storage is to exceed 5 days,
immerse bearings in preservative oil.
d. Examine the assembly carefully to deter-
mine the best way to remove the bearing without j. Handle removed bearings carefully and
unnecessary damage, and select or develop the tool avoid unnecessary movement of rings and rolling
necessary to do the job. elements.
k. Apply temporary protection to bearings

e. Use steady pressure whenever possible during processing delays and use suitable dust
during removal. Apply pressure evenly to the entire shrouds to keep shop dirt from exposed assembled
bearing ring face. bearings.
3-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
l. Clean bench and tools immediately after f. Don’t apply pressure to the free ring, the
use. retainer, or the bearing closure.
m. Route removed bearings at frequent inter- g. Don’t let a bearing or shaft drop on a hard
vals to a processing shop in marked, covered surface during removal.
containers.
n. Identify bearings by part number and ap- h. Don’t neglect the immediate protection of
plication. bearing mounting surfaces.
o. Limit individual accumulation containers to i. Don’t attempt to clean bearings or remove

40 pounds maximum weight. oil grease at time of removal.
3-49. Don’ts of Bearing Removal. j. Don’t spin bearings during removal or toss
bearings into accumulation containers.
a. Don’t remove bearings in dirty, congested
areas.
k. Don’t allow exposed bearings to be unpro-
b. Don’t use poorly improvised or broken tected at any time.
tools.
l. Don’t leave a work area dirty.
c. Don’t preclean assemblies before bearing
removal. m. Don’t allow bearings to remain in accumula-
tion areas.
d. Don’t be haphazard in selection of removal
tools or procedures followed.
n. Don’t mix bearings indiscriminately.
e. Never use a hammer directly on a bearing,
nor any other devise that may cock or tilt the bearing o. Don’t accumulate uncontrolled numbers of
during removal. bearings in oversized containers.
3-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION IV
INDUCTION AND PRESCREENING OF BEARINGS
4-1. GENERAL. c. Personnel physically handling new bearings

that will not require additional processing shall use
clean hand gloves.
4-2. All new and used bearings shall be routed
to an approved bearing processing facility for deter- 4-6. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS.
mination of condition and processing. The induction
and prescreening functions can be used to effectively
4-7. Equipment needed in the induction and pres-
control the flow of work into the bearing shop. This
creening area is listed as follows:
will reduce the cost of operating the bearing proces-
sing facility and improve efficiency. Most depot have
a. Mobile carts to facilitate the movement of
a Production Control System to schedule and load
bearings within the shop.
bearings into the processing shop. Personnel in this
group should also be considered a part of the
b. Aperture card reader for technical data
induction and prescreening function. However, bear-
reference.
ing shop personnel will still be responsible for most
workload scheduling due to their accumulated expe-
rience and specific knowledge of bearing processing c. Files for bearing data reference.
requirements.
d. Baskets for segregation, routing and han-
dling of bearings (figure 5-1).
4-3. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS.
e. Miscellaneous tools for removing seals and
shields.
4-4. The type of work performed in the induction
and prescreening area makes the selection of
4-8. FUNCTIONS.
personnel a very important factor. Workers must be
able to quickly screen large quantities of bearings
4-9. The primary functions of the induction and
of all different types, properly identify them and
prescreening group are:
determine the most efficient and effective process.
Personnel assigned to this function shall have
a. the careful identification of all bearings
sufficient experience in bearing inspection and pro-
received,
cessing to enable them to determine accurate
processing requirements and to screen new RFI
(Ready-for-Issue) bearings for discrepancies. Per- b. preliminary evaluation of bearing condition,
sonnel must be familiar with bearing coding and and
the National Stock Number (NSN) system, and be
proficient in the use of drawings. Qualified personnel c. the determination of proper processing. The
should be rotated through this area in order to ensure following duties are performed during induction and
the continued availability of trained replacements. prescreening:
Refer to Section XVII for additional information on
personnel qualifications. (1) Perform the receiving functions for the
bearing processing shop.
4-5. Personnel handling bearings in the induction (2) Provide limited storage space for accu-
and prescreening area shall observe the following mulation of bearings to be processed.
requirements:
(3) Establish and control the efficient work
loading of the processing shop.
a. No smoking, eating and/or drinking in the
area.
(4) Survey bearings that are obviously be-
yond economical repair.
b. Personnel physically handling new or used
bearings that will be cleaned and/or lubricated shall (5) Preclean bearings for identification and
use an antiperspirant hand cream. screening.
4-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(6) Segregate bearings into lots according 4-10. COMPUTERIZED RECORDS.

to the prime contractor ’s part number, bearing
manufacturer’s part number, and/or special inspec- 4-11. The use of a personal computer to keep
tion requirements. processing records, historical records and to track
the progress of bearings through the bearing shop
(7) Attach an appropriate identification tag will prove valuable. The most important step is to
and process instructions to each bearing lot. develop a software program that will handle all of
the different types of bearings that will be inducted
into the bearing shop with all of the different
(8) Supply the complete National Stock parameters. The time required to daily input the data
Number identification and the following general into the computer is less than that required for
processing requirements with each lot of bearings manual record keeping. The computer will be able
inducted for processing. to track the progress of the bearings through the
shop, provide accurate processing costs and an
(a) Lot Number accurate count of the number of bearings processed
per a given time cycle.
(b) NSN
4-12. FORMS AND RECORDS.
(c) Part Number 4-13. Forms should be developed at each facility
that will provide necessary bearing processing
(d) Next Higher Assembly P/N instructions. Depot level activities that have estab-
lished quality characteristics lists (QCL’s) should
(e) Job Order Number utilize these forms to monitor the inspection of
important visual, dimensional and test parameters
for critical bearings. Each activity must develop its
(f) Quantity Inducted own critical bearing list. These forms will accompany
the bearings throughout the process cycle and
(g) Date Inducted should be compatible with a clean room environment.
Refer to Section XVII, List of Consumable Material
(h) Lubricant/Preservative for approved materials.
NOTE
(i) Routing Instructions
No wood fiber paper shall be taken into
(j) New or Used Status the environmentally controlled area due
to its contaminating properties.
(k) Cleaning Procedures 4-14. The maintenance of current records is neces-
sary to establish accurate processing data, deter-
(l) Measurement Requirements mine survey rates and most important, to establish
bearing processing costs. It is recommended that
(m) Packaging Requirement a card index file and/or computer software program
be established and maintained in the screening area
with complete information on all bearings used at
(n) Special Instructions that activity. Process flow charts should be devel-
oped to provide the processing procedures and
(o) Number Accepted/Number Rejected sequence for the more common bearings.
(9) Perform sample inspection of all new 4-15. TECHNICAL DATA.

RFI bearings procured from Supply stock in support 4-16. The need for maintaining the latest technical
of the production shops. data in a readily available state cannot be overem-
phasized. It shall be the responsibility of the bearing
d. Determine necessary action on all question- shop, with assistance from the local supporting
able new RFI bearings received from Supply stock. technical services group, to obtain all drawings
pertaining to bearings prior to induction in the shop
e. Establish and maintain bearing processing for processing. The following data shall be main-
data for each bearing. tained in the shop:
4-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Prime contractor (OEM) drawings on bear- reworked beyond normal Level I processing proce-
ings. dures as defined in paragraph 6-13. These bearings
are reworked and inspected under rigidly controlled
b. Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) specifications and quality assurance procedures.
Service/maintenance limits and special inspection They do not need to be rechecked for condition
requirements (contained in Technical Orders, Techni- and/or conformance to specification requirements
cal Manuals and Handbook of Overhaul Instructions by other depots or Government activities. Bearings
and/or special bulletins). that have been refurbished and made RFI by a
NAVAIR, Army, Air Force designated Bearing Techni-
cal Repair Center will be treated like new bearings
c. Lubrication requirements.
from Supply.
d. Master Cross Reference Lists (MCRL) to 4-22. Activities authorized to refurbish bearings shall
check stock number to part number and part number furnish a label with each bearing providing pertinent
to stock number. data needed during bearing installation. This action
will preclude the need to prematurely open the
e. Federal Supply Catalog Identification Lists package, or to dimensionally inspect the bearing
for Class 3110, 3120, and 3130 bearings. for parameters and measurements needed for instal-
lation. The minimum data is as follows:
f. Local engineering instructions pertaining to
bearings. a. CAGE (was FSCM) of refurbishment center.
4-17. Drawings and other technical data should be b. Serial number.

placed on aperture cards or some other similar
miniature filming process to facilitate storage of data c. Inner ring diameter.
in a minimum space. A data filing and storing system
should be developed that is compatible with clean
d. Outer ring diameter.
room facilities. This is important since the personnel
working in the clean room must also have bearing
drawings readily available for the dimensional, visual e. Radial play.
and dynamic testing verification of the bearing.
f. Axial play (ball bearings).
4-18. Bearings that are received in the shop without
any technical data, or when the available technical g. Other dimension/parameter data as re-
data is incomplete and/or confusing, shall be referred quired.
to the cognizant depot bearing engineer. The bearing
engineer will be responsible for providing technical 4-23. The depots that have been authorized by their
assistance and written instructions to process the respective Service to perform Level II Refurbishment
bearings. of critical bearings will be receiving used bearings
from not only their own depot shops but all other
4-19. SOURCES OF BEARINGS TO BE PRO- depots and applicable Intermediate Maintenance
CESSED. Level Activities. The designated depots will use
Section VI of Air Force T.O. 44B-1-102 as well as
4-20. USED BEARINGS. The major portion of the the instructions contained in this manual for proces-
bearing workload will be the used bearings removed sing and reworking bearings.
from aeronautical equipment during overhaul and/or
rework. The bearings will be received directly from 4-24. NON-RFI NEW BEARINGS. Route all new
the various disassembly shops in covered contain- bearings to the bearing processing shop for receiving
ers. The bearings are usually required for the support inspection. This includes bearings procured from the
of current production schedules. Critical and/or following sources:
special bearings will be received on work requests
and will require establishing special handling and a. Regular Navy, Army and Air Force Supply
processing procedures. Channels
4-21. REFURBISHED BEARINGS. Designated high b. D i re c t l y f r o m t h e o r i g i n a l e q u i p m e n t

cost and short supply used bearings are now being manufacturer (OEM).
4-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Directly from the bearing manufacturer. neering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory will
perform the material identification/conformation tests.
d. Interservice transfer of material assets.
4-29. QUESTIONABLE NEW NON-RFI BEAR-
e. Through local bearing distributors. INGS. All new bearings that are a part of an
inspection lot that has been sample inspected and
found to contain discrepant bearings, shall be100
4-25. Sample all new bearings to ensure confor-
percent screened for the reported defect(s) or
mance to drawing and/or engineering requirements.
returned to the manufacturer for screening of the
Critical bearings will be 100 percent inspected for
reported defect. Any lots screened by the manufac-
specific parameters. Critical bearing lists will be
turer shall be returned to the cognizant depot for
established at each activity that will include the
additional inspection.
bearings where either past history or performance
requires check of dimensional, visual and/or test
4-30. HANDLING OF USED BEARINGS.
parameters.
4-31. Used bearings shall be 100 percent screened
NOTE and processed. Bearings for most aircraft assemblies
are provisioned on a percentage replacement basis.
Many bearings are slushed with Specifica- Therefore, the processing of used bearings is
tion MIL-C-11796 Class 3 soft-film, hot necessary to support most production programs.
dip preservative by the bearing manufac- Used bearings shall be handled as follows:
turer for Supply storage. This material
must be removed prior to installation in NOTE
the aircraft engine/component due to in-
compatibility with the operating lubricant. Level I Processing consists of cleaning,
marking, visual inspection, dimensional
4-26. NEW RFI BEARINGS IN KITS. Bearings are inspection, testing, minor repair, lubrica-
sometimes included in parts kits with other replace- tion, preservation and packaging.
able/consumable items. Kit bearings will be routed
to the bearing shop for quality verification. The using a. Transfer bearings from the incoming accu-
shop or the cognizant material planning group will mulation containers to suitable tote pans/baskets
be responsible for removing the bearings from the and move the bearings immediately to segregation
parts kit and routing them to the bearing shop for tables.
inspection.
b. Segregate bearings by the original equip-
4-27. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM (QAP). men t man ufa ctu rer ’s p art num be r or bear i ng
The Defense Industrial Supply Center and other manufacturer’s name and part number.
government agencies have established special in-
spection programs for checking new bearings for c. Group bearings together with suitable ties
conformance to drawing and contract requirements. and place them in suitable containers for processing.
These inspections are conducted before the bearing
manufacturer is paid and before the bearings are
placed in the Supply system. The bearing sample WARNING
size is selected in accordance with ANSI/ASQC Z1.4
and is then shipped to the cognizant Service depot. Do not mix matched sets of bearings or
The depot inspects the sample bearings for confor- mix components of separable bearings of
mance to contract, applicable drawing requirements, different bearing manufacturers.
and for material conformation. Navy QAP bearings
shall be inspected at Naval Aviation Depot, North d. Identify each bearing lot by the correct
Island, or inspected at the manufacturer’s facility National Stock Number as determined from the
with Naval Aviation Depot North Island Engineering applicable manufacturer’s IPB and/or original equip-
present. ment manufacturer drawings.
4-28. The cognizant depot bearing engineer shall e. Check the processing record file and/or
be responsible for developing the inspection require- applicable drawing for the type of lubricant that is
ments for use by the bearing processing facility and required and for any special processing and/or
for providing technical support. The Materials Engi- precautions that need to be observed.
4-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE
Special bearing applications such as heli-

copter dynamic components, gas turbine
engines, gas turbine compressors and
ram air compressors will require special
identification. Identify bearings with the
engine or aircraft sequence or serial
number when specified by local engineer-
ing.
f. Prepare and attach to the bearing lot some

type of identification tag that will positively identify
the bearings during and after processing. The tags
should include lot number and lubrication require-
ments.
g. Prepare a processing form (handwritten/

computer) that will accompany the bearings to
provide special handling and processing instructions.
h. Induct bearing lots for processing as rapidly

as workload permits.
004001
Figure 4-1. New Material - Missing Ball and
i. Record each bearing lot by lot number,
Damaged Retainer
stock number and quantity.
4-35. INSPECTION PLANS. Sample inspections
j. Return bearing accumulation containers to shall be performed using the sampling plan shown
the appropriate disassembly shops as soon as in table 4-1. Acceptance or non-acceptance of the
possible to limit the number of special containers. bearing lot shall be based on the number and type
of defect(s)/nonconformity(s) noted. Refer to Section
4-32. INSPECTION OF NEW BEARINGS. XIV for acceptance and non-acceptance criteria for
instrument type bearings. A bearing lot shall be
defined as a collection of bearings received under
4-33. JUSTIFICATION. New bearings are preserved the same contract, under the same stock number,
w ith l ong te rm l ubri cat ion , not t he op erati on originating from one manufacturer and packaged
lubrication, in most cases. Expired preservative/lu- during the same year and quarter.
brication can lead to premature failure of the bearing
from rust and/or corrosion. Even properly packaged 4-36. M E T H O D S F O R D E T E R M I N I N G N O N -
bearings are susceptible to mechanical damage such ACCEPTANCE. Defects and Nonconformity are the
as static brinelling caused by the bearing’s own two criteria used to determine non-acceptance of
weight and brinelling from vibration during shipping bearings per ANSI/ASQC Z1.4. The definitions are
or storage. as follows:
a. DEFECT: A departure of a quality charac-

4-34. GENERAL. Route new bearings described in teristic from its intended level or state that occurs
paragraph 4-24 to the bearing shop for inspection with severity sufficient to cause an associated
of critical parameters and/or the condition of the product or service not to satisfy intended normal
lubrication prior to use. Defective bearings can be or foreseeable usage requirements.
detected at time of receipt rather than at time of
assembly. This will prevent costly component failure b. NONCONFORMITY: A departure of a
and reduce manhour expenditure for the disassem- quality characteristic from its intended level or state
bly of malfunctioning components. Figure 4-1 is an that occurs with severity sufficient to cause an
example of a defective bearing found during inspec- associated product or service not to meet a specifi-
tion of new material. cation or requirement.
4-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
4-37. BEARINGS REQUIRING 100 PERCENT IN- under the QAP and Special Inspection plans shall
SPECTION. The following new bearings shall be be inspected for the following parameters:
100 percent inspected for critical parameters and/or
the condition of the lubricant prior to use: a. Visual Inspection
NOTE b. Inner and outer ring diameters
New bea r ing s a re ins pe cte d fo r th e c. Width of rings

following reasons:
d. Internal radial clearance
· Lubricant becomes over age and
deteriorates. e. Internal axial clearance when specified
· Bearings are often preserved and not f. Contact angle when specified
lubricated.
g. Diametral retainer clearance when specified
· A supply shelf life does not exist to
prevent the use of corroded bearings. h. Ball diameter
· Defective bearings are received from i. Ring corner radius/break

Supply that would otherwise be used.
j. Ball Diameter
a. Instrument bearings. Refer to Section XIV
for detailed instructions. k. Material identification
b. Bearings that are preserved for long term l. Surface finish

storage that require cleaning and lubrication prior
to use. 4-39. I N S P E C T I O N R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R
ROLLER BEARINGS UNDER QAP AND SPECIAL
c. Gas turbine main and differential shaft INSPECTION. Roller bearings that are inspected by
bearings. the depots for DISC or other government procurement
agencies under the QAP and Special Inspection plans
d. Helicopter dynamic component bearings. shall be inspected for the following parameters:
e. High speed pneumatic component bearings. a. Visual inspection
f. Aircraft generator bearings. b. Inner and outer ring diameters
g. Any new bearing where a history of service c. Width of ring

failure or malfunction has been encountered.
d. Internal radial clearance
h. Bearings that have been designated by the
cognizant depot bearing engineer as requiring 100 e. Diametral retainer clearance
percent receiving inspection.
f. Roller crown drop
i. Bearings that are open-purchased from
local distributors. g. Roller end-to-roller rib clearance.
j. Bearings that are received in commer- h. Roller diameter

cial-type packages.
i. Roller length
4-38. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR BALL
BEARINGS UNDER QAP AND SPECIAL INSPEC- j. Roller crown radius
TION. Ball bearings that are inspected by the depots
for DISC or other government procurement agencies k. Roller cylindrical length
4-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
l. Roller corner radius Table 4-1. Sampling Plan for New

Bearing Receiving Inspection
m. Retainer-ring land diameter
LOT SIZE SAMPLE SIZE
n. Material 2-8 2
9-15 3
o. Surface Finish 16-25 5
26-50 8
p. Roller Drop
51-90 13
q. Ring corner radius/break 91-150 20
151-280 32
4-40. BEARINGS REQUIRING SAMPLE INSPEC-
T I O N. A l l ne w b ea r in g l ot s , n o t 1 0 0 pe r c en t 281-500 50
inspected, shall be inspected in accordance with 501-1200 80
the following sampling plan. The local depot
cognizant bearing engineer will be responsible for 1201-3200 125
developing the list. See the glossary in Appendix 3201-10,000 200
A for definitions of lot, lot size, sample, and sampling
plan. Refer to Standard ANSI/ASQC Z1.4 for AQL
(Acceptable Quality Level) to determine acceptance
or rejection of lot.
4-41. SAMPLING PLAN.
g. Tag (quality assurance personnel) the entire
a. Record each bearing lot by requisition lot when the sample inspection reveals questionable
number, National Stock Number, and quantity. Local or defective bearings, and the number of defects
production control procedures can affect these exceeds the limits of ANSI/ASQC-Z1.4. This will
procedures. preclude the stocking and issuance of defective
bearings.
b. Identify the samples and the lot so that
an accurate inspection can be performed and proper h. 100 percent inspect lots containing defective
identity preserved. New sample bearings and the bearings when the rejection of the entire lot of new
new bearing lots inducted for processing will require bearings will cause a serious material shortage. The
identification and processing procedures similar to ac c ep t a bl e b e a ri n g s c a n t h e n b e u s ed . Th i s
those for used bearings. procedure should be performed before the official
inspection rejection tag is attached and the lot or
any part cannot be utilized. However, there should
c. Select a random sample bearing lot in always be a sample saved for contractor/vendor
accordance with table 4-1. The sample size will be review.
determined by the lot size.
i. Hold bearing lots having major or critical
d. Route the sample bearings through the defects in a designated area pending disposition
proper cleaning process and to the inspection area instructions. Take adequate precautions to prevent
for visual and dimensional inspection. Inspect all their accidental use. Induct bearing lots with minor
sample bearings having special tolerance character- defects (that are not returnable to the manufacturer)
istics, special surface finish, smoothness, torque for processing in accordance with instructions from
and/or noise requirements. the cognizant depot bearing engineer.
4-42. HANDLING OF REJECTED NEW NON-RFI

e. Accept or reject the entire lot in accordance
SUPPLY CUSTODY BEARINGS.
with criteria contained in ANSI/ASQC Z1.4.
4-43. Bearings that are received on Supply custody
f. Accept the entire lot (including the sample paperwork will require 100 percent inspection and/or
bearings) if there are no noted discrepancies in the processing. The bearings will generally be inducted
sample lot. Identify all bearings with a date stamp as the result of a previous rejection of new NON-RFI
and a shop process certification stamp as required. bearings. Process as follows:
4-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Record each bearing lot by paper work corrective action. Except for the above identification
identification number, National Stock Number and requirement, kit bearings shall be handled the same
quantity. as other new bearings in paragraph 4-32.
b. I d e n t i f y t h e l o t s o t h a t a n a c c u r a t e 4-46. HANDLING OF RFI BEARINGS WITH EXPIRED

inspection will be performed and proper identity OR SUSPECT PRESERVATION/LUBRICATION.
preserved. Metal tags can be used for this purpose.
Bearing lots inducted for processing will require 4-47. Sample inspect bearing lots inducted by
identification and processing procedures similar to Supply inspectors as questionable new RFI bearings
those for used bearings. in accordance with criteria contained in table 4-1.
Use the following procedures:
c. Inspect the entire lot in accordance with
paragraph 4-41. a. Induct, identify, and inspect sample bearings
in accordance with paragraph 4-41.
d. Separate the rejects from the remainder
of the lot and attach an identification tag to prevent b. Reseal the packages of acceptable bearings
issuance as RFI material. that were opened for inspection of the preservative/lu-
bricant if the preservative/lubricant meets minimum
e. Package bearings found acceptable and requirements. Return the bearing lot to Supply as
return them to RFI stock. Disposition of rejected RFI stock.
bearings shall be as directed by cognizant personnel
having official custody of the material. c. Repackage the entire lot if the identification,
preservation, lubrication, or packaging is incorrect
4-44. HANDLING OF KITTED BEARINGS. or inadequate, but the bearings are acceptable.
Return packaged bearings to Supply as RFI stock.
4-45. All bearings placed in overhaul or repair parts
kits shall be subject to sample inspection. Maintain d. 100 percent inspect the bearings if the
proper bearing-to-kit identification throughout the condition of the lubricant is questionable. Return
process. Return kitted RFI bearings to the proper the relubricated and packaged bearings to Supply
shop. Provide a report on rejected bearings for as RFI stock.
4-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION V
CLEANING OF BEARINGS
5-1. GENERAL. Dust and particle control shall be specified by the

cognizant engineer at each depot or facility as
5-2. The success of any bearing processing specified in the latest revision of FED-STD-209 per
program is dependent on the effectiveness of the MIL-STD-197.
cleaning processes. Bearings must be clean before
they can be properly inspected. However, no 5-6. SAFETY AND GOOD HOUSEKEEPING.
standard cleaning process or single processing
sequence will clean all bearings 100 percent of the 5-7. The cleaning area will require continuous
time. Individual bearings vary in the type and amount housekeeping. A complete general cleaning is
of contamination that must be removed. Also, needed at least once a week. Tanks and equipment
cleaning results for a given cleaning procedure wiil should be flush with the floor or should be supported
vary. CIose control of the process and evaluation above the deck in such a manner as to provide
of cleaning results must be maintained. The selection for easy and effective cleaning. Ventilation, as
of cleaning materials and the length of time the designated by the local OSH, is required for all
bearings are subjected to these materials are heated tanks and for all tanks containing toxic or
additional factors that must be considered. flammable materials. Fire protective devices shall
be provided in sufficient quantities to ensure fire
5-3. DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED CLEANING protection and shall be conveniently located for
PROCESS. Depot level activities shall comply with ready access. Tank thermostats and valves shall
the cleaning procedures specified in this section. be checked monthly. Electric motors, wiring, and
Deviations and/or exceptions to basic procedures plug outlets shall comply with all local safety and
shall be handled in accordance with instructions fire requirements for materials used in bearing
contained in paragraph 1-35. However, local cleaning. Safety glasses, face shields, protective
deviations to the cleaning process may be necessary aprons, gloves and hand creams shall be available
to clean a limited number of bearings with difficult-to- for use by the employee. Smoking, eating, or drinking
remove soil contaminants. The local Materials shall not be permitted in the cleaning area.
Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory
shall be responsible for controlling all bearing
5-8. H A Z A R D O U S W A S T E R E D U C T I O N
cleaning processes and for developing limited
PROGRAM.
cleaning processes that may be required at each
facility.
5-9. Bearing processing facilities often utilize
NOTE materials to clean bearings that have been classified
as hazardous waste by the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA). A hazardous waste minimization
The cleaning processes and equipment (HAZMIN) program is currently being implemented
specified in paragraph 5Ć11 are interĆdeĆ by the Services that will establish waste reduction
pendent. The specified equipment is goals for specific materials and compounds. These
required to obtain the required level of materials have been classified by the EPA as
cleanliness for aeronautical bearings. hazardous to the environment and to humans. These
HAZMIN efforts will directly impact the operation of
5-4. FACILITIES. the depot bearing facilities and will require the full
cooperation of shop personnel in meeting these
5-5. The work area that is required at each activity goals while still producing clean bearings.
to clean bearings will depend on production workload
and the type of bearings being processed. The 5-10. The bearing processing facility shall comply
cleaning area shall be enclosed and separated from with all applicable EPA, OSHA, state and local
the rest of the bearing processing shop. Temperature regulations involving air and water pollution, and
and humidity control is not required. The presence solid waste disposal requirements during the
of dust and dirt producing source, such as cartons, operation of the shop. Solution levels may also be
trash barrels and boxes shall be kept to a minimum. regulated by environmental agencies as well.
5-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE (4) Heating shall be provided when required

by the cleaning process.
Certain cleaning materials called out in
this section may be restricted at a
particular depot or intermediate level acti- (5) Continuous filtration will be required for
vity. Providing substitute solvents shall be certain solutions.
the responsibility of the local Materials
Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science
Laboratory. b Solvent Spray Booth. Local regulations may
be imposed that will prohibit or restrict the use of
pressurized air to spray organic solvents unless the
5-11. EQUIPMENT. spray booth is equipped with a high efficiency
scrubber and/or carbon absorber system that will
5-12. GENERAL. The cleaning equipment required capture and recycle solvent mist vapors in the
by depot bearing shops will depend on the type of exhaust system. Direct impingement spraying may
bearings being processed and the workload. In be allowed if the delivery pressure is very low and
general, bearings of ABEC-5 precision or better and the solvent vapor pressure is below a published limit.
with an outer diameter of 1 inch or less, will require Consult the cognizant facility environmental office
the same special cleaning procedures and equipment for specific direction.
specified for instrument-type bearings in Section XIV.
5-13. MINIMUM INTERMEDIATE MAINTENANCE NOTE

LEVEL ACTIVITY (IMA) CLEANING EQUIPMENT.
Bearing cleaning equipment requirements for IMA
level shops will be less than for depot level facilities. The bearing can be cleaned in a self
In general, the minimum equipment needed by the contained pressure spray cabinet using
IMA bearing facilities will be agitated tanks that can a perfluorinated as described in paragraph
be used either as a static soak and agitated rinse. 14–82.
A spray booth for solvent spray rinsing of the
bearings may be used if the solvent and spray
equipment is approved for local use by the facility’s (1) The booth, piping, and other surfaces
environmental compliance office. coming in contact with the solvent shall be
constructed of stainless steel or other approved
non-reactive material or coating.
5-14. CLEANING EQUIPMENT. The following
equipment is required by depot level activities to
clean the many different types of bearings that are (2) The interior of the spray booth shall not
used in aeronautical applications: be painted or coated with any flaking or peeling
material.
a. Static and Agitated Soak Tanks.
(1) Static soak tanks shall be equipped with (3) Filtration of the air and solvent is
a moveable supported platform, or be equipped with required and the air shall be supplied from a dry
a false bottom or baffle. This prevents contamination air source. Ordinary shop air contains significant
of the bearings by the sludge and dirt that accumu- amounts of water/moisture and shall not be used
lated on the bottom of the tank. to supply air to the booth.
(2) The tanks may be of the agitated-type (4) The booth shall be designed to provide
equipped with additional controls to allow static one time use of the solvent prior to redistillation.
positioning of the bearings in either the lowered or
raised position.
(5) The solvent spray booths shall meet all
(3) T h e t a n k s s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d o f state and local environmental, safety, fire and
stainless steel or other approved nonreactive hygienic requirements including all air pollution
material or coating in those areas in contact with control requirements imposed by the EPA, state
the cleaning solutions. and/or local air pollution control boards.
5-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Ultrasonic Cleaning Machine.
CAUTION
The use of an ultrasonic cleaning machine

to clean bearings may cause internal
damage to rolling elements, raceways and
retainer pockets. Acoustic energy within
the bearing can cause contacting parts
to fret which can result in irreparable
damage. The use of an ultrasonic cleaning
machine must be approved by the local
bearing engineering authority. Properly
designed and powered machines will 005001
enhance cleaning of certain non-sepa- Figure 5-1. Cleaning Baskets for Bearing
rable, instrument and thin section Handling Throughout Process
bearings.
g. Rough Spray Cleaning. A rough solvent
(1) The ultrasonic cleaning tank shall be spray cleaner should be developed at each facility
constructed of 300 series stainless steel. Tank size to expedite the cleaning of heavily contaminated
will depend on the size of bearings that are grease lubricated bearings. The cleaning machine
processed through the cleaning line. should use a direct impingement spray from fixed
or hand held nozzles to blast at least 75% of the
grease from basketed bearings. The fixed nozzle
(2) The unit must be adequately powered machine should be conveyorized to allow proper
to clean non-separable, instrument, thin section and exposure of the bearings to the spray. The glove
metallic spherical bearings. The rated power must box type of machine should be ergonomically
compensate for the significant energy loss due to designed to minimize operator fatigue. The machine
the cleaning solution, the holding baskets and the should be self-contained and allow no solvent vapors
bearings. to escape to the atmosphere. The machine must
also be equipped to safely handle flammable
(3) A maximum energy level of 5 watts solvents. The machine should be located at the
average power per square inch, measured over the beginning of the entire cleaning process line so that
inside tank bottom surface, is recommended for subsequent cleaning solutions are not subjected to
bearing cleaning. gross contamination.
NOTE
d. Demagnetizer. The throat of the demagne-
tizing coil should be large enough to accommodate Consult state and local air pollution control
the largest bearing that will be normally processed regulations for effect on the design and
through the bearing shop. The width of the coil will operation of pressurized solvent spray
normally be 15 to 18 inches. The height of the coil equipment.
opening should be able to readily accommodate the
basket/tray in which the individual bearings are h. Vibro-Tumbling Finishing Mills. Several
placed during the demagnetizing process. sizes of finishing mills can be used in the bearing
cleaning line to handle the bearing workload. Mills
e. Gaussmeter. The gauss meter shall be are available in 1.2, 3, 10 and 20 cubic feet capacity.
capable of measuring residual magnetism from 0 The entire bowl assembly shall be mounted to the
to a minimum of 10 gauss. base by coil springs. The bowl shall have a vertical
motor attached to the center post. Counter weights
shall be adjustable to vary the vibrational energy
f. Cleaning Baskets. The bearing handling to the media and parts. The bowl shall be of a
baskets shall be made of 300 series stainless steel toroidal design with an outside lip curving back
of expanded metal construction (figure 5-1). The toward the center post. The toroidal bowl shall be
expanded metal baskets can also be used in lined with an abrasion resistant polyurethane elas-
ultrasonic cleaning processes. tomer. Refer to figure 5-2 for design details.
5-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
must be totally fire and explosion proof in order to

conform to all fire and safety regulations.
(b) The equipment shall have provisions

for nitrogen gas shrouding, CO2 fire extinguishing,
flame detection, fire alarm and automatic shut-down
equipment.
(c) Thermocouples shall monitor the

chiller coils, vapor zone height, the solvating sump
and the electronic cabinetry. This temperature
sensing system will shut down the unit if any preset
levels are exceeded.
(d) The top of the tank shall have a low

flow lip vent that captures any alcohol emissions.
005002 The vent system shall have a vapor monitor that
Figure 5-2. Vibro-Tumbling MIll Schematic shuts down the heating system if the alcohol
concentration in the vent air exceeds 20 ppm.
(e) The vent system shall be attached

i. Drying Methods. A method of removing the to a vapor scrubber to remove and recover alcohol
last solvent rinsate from the bearings is required. from the vent air.
Bearings must be clean and dry in order to perform
the subsequent visual and dimensional inspections.
Some of the successful drying methods are listed (f) There shall be a mechanical parts
below in order of preference: handling mechanism that immerses and retracts the
parts in a controlled rate so alcohol vapors are
properly contained in the dryer. The mechanism shall
(1) Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) Vapor Degreaser/ be monitored with motion sensors (or equivalent)
Dryer. This method has been shown to be the most that can detect excessive feed rates and will shut
effective alternative to ODS (OLDS) based methods.
down the system if so detected.
It utilizes a sophisticated vapor degreaser that has
been designed to handle the flammable alcohol and
restrict vapor emissions. The vapor dryer shall be (g) There shall be an automatically
capable of drying baskets of bearings that are controlled lid that opens only when the parts feed
covered in the final rinsate. The bearings are mechanism requires it to do so.
immersed into the vapor zone and Isopropyl Alcohol
(IPA) is allowed to condense on the cooler bearing (h) The unit shall be provided with an
surfaces. This action displaces the rinsate and automatic waste solvent removal and fresh solvent
continuously washes fresh IPA over the bearings replenishment system. The waste solvent shall be
until the temperature of the bearings and vapor
captured in a sealed container that is easily acces-
equalize. The bearings are then slowly raised
through the chilled zone of the dryer where the IPA sible for periodic disposal.
flashes off, leaving warm, dry bearings. The bearings
are clean and spot free and ready for inspection (2) HFE Co-Solvent Vapor Degreaser. This
when they cool down to comfortable handling tem- method features the use of a hydrocarbon (HC)
peratures. All ABEC/RBEC classified bearings are solvating agent and a Hydrofluoroether (HFE) liquid
authorized to be dried by this method. Some of the rinse and vapor drying solvent operating within a
salient features of the unit are listed below (refer specially designed degreaser. This system is a more
to figure 5-3.) aggressive cleaner than the IPA degreaser/dryer
system. It is an excellent final rinse and dryer
combination and its use is encouraged. All
(a) The entire unit must be designed with ABEC/RBEC classified bearings are authorized to
all necessary electronic and mechanical fire sensing be dried by this method. Some of the salient features
and fire suppression equipment. This equipment of this machine are listed below (refer to figure 5-4).
5-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
35 lb. max.
load
V.G./W.A.
95_C
Vapor
83_C Waste
Boiling I.P.A. Tank
1 gal.
005003
Figure 5-3. Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) Vapor Degreaser/Dryer
(a) Two sumps shall be provided at the (f) There shall be separation reservoirs
bottom of the tank below the vapor zone. In one attached to the unit in such a manner that the
sump the solvating agent and HFE rinsate is heated contaminated solvating agent is separated from the
and pump-agitated to degrease immersed bearings. HFE rinse solvent and drained into a proper disposal
The second sump is for immersion rinsing the vessel.
bearings in the pure liquid HFE rinsate.
(g) There shall be provided an efficient
(b) Ultrasonic agitation shall be provided method for the HFE rinse solvent to be filtered,
in the rinsate sump. The power of the ultrasonic distilled and returned to the rinse sump. These
energy measured at the bottom of the sump shall solvents are very expensive.
not exceed 5 watts per square inch.
(h) The entire unit shall be constructed
of corrosion resistant metals and solvent compatible
(c) The HFE vapor zone shall have a polymers.
150% freeboard.
(3) Air Circulating Oven. This method dries
(d) There shall be one primary condenser bearings at a relatively low temperature (120_ -
coil and two chiller coils to contain the vapor zone. 130 _F) inside of an air circulating oven. All
ABEC/RBEC classified bearings are authorized to
The primary coil shall be operated at 50_F and
be dried by this method.
secondary coils shall be operated at -20_F.
(a) The solvent vapors shall be exhausted
(e) The tank shall have a tight fitting lid through a vapor recovery system that complies with
to minimize solvent vapor emissions. local environmental regulations.
5-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
005004
Figure 5-4. HFE Co-Solvent Vapor Rinse System
(b) The oven must be designed so that (4) Air Blast. This is the least expensive
the circulating air is prefiltered to preclude airborne and most common method of drying bearings. It
contamination problems. is also the hardest to control and has the greatest
potential to damage bearings.
(c) T h e o v e n m u s t b e d e s i g n e d t o
(a) In general, compressed air (about 90
accomodate flammable vapors and handle them
PSI) is directed to each bearing from a hand held
safely.
nozzle. The bearings are held in a gloved hand as
the air blast displaces the final rinsate from internal
(d) After oven drying, the bearings shall and external surfaces. The bearing rings and rolling
be left dry to the touch. Some residues from the elements are carefully and deliberately moved by
final rinsate may still coat the surfaces. Typically, the artisan while being air blasted. This will prevent
these films will not interfere with visual and dimen- the bearing from spinning and destroying internal
sional testing. surfaces.
5-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(b) The air must be water, oil and partic- CAUTION

ulate free.
Do not pry from just one position on the
(c) The spray booth must have a solvent ring as the seals and shield may be
permanently distorted.
vapor recovery system efficient enough to comply
with local environmental and safety regulations.
5-17. Special tools can be developed for each type
of seal and shield so that they can be removed
CAUTION without damage and without damaging the bearing.
Special holding blocks and holding tools are usually
This air blast method is authorized only needed to facilitate seal and shield removal (figure
for non-precision bearings of ABEC/RBEC 5-5). Bearing lots requiring seal or shield removal
1 classification. Precision bearings of shall be marked with special tags at time of induction
ABEC/RBEC 3, 5, 7 and 9 classifications for processing. This special marking shall accompany
shall not be dried by any air blast method. the bearing lot all through processing to ensure that
the proper type of seal or shield is reinstalled after
lubrication.
(5) Air Blast Machines. This method is an
automated version of the hand held method 5-18. NONREMOVABLE TYPES. Nonremovable-
described in 5-14j(4). type seals and/or shields are not usually removed.
However, when one seal or shield is to be removed,
(a) These machines have nozzles fixtured it can be done without damage to the bearing if
inside of a chamber that directs warm, dry air to reasonable care is taken.
an area where baskets of bearings are placed.
CAUTION
(b) The movement of the baskets through
the chamber can be either by hand or by a conveyor When exerting pressure against a bearing
ring to remove the seal or shield, always
system.
apply force to the ring in which the seal
or shield is attached. Failure to observe
(c) A vapor recovery system must be this precaution can damage the bearing.
designed to capture solvent vapors to comply with
local environmental and safety regulations.
CAUTION
This method is authorized only for

non-precision bearings of ABEC/RBEC 1
classification. Precision bearings of
ABEC/RBEC 3, 5, 7 or 9 classifications
shall not be dried by any air blast method.
5-15. SEAL AND SHIELD REMOVAL.
5-16. REMOVABLE TYPES. Removable-type seals

and/or shields shall be removed prior to cleaning
the bearings. This will allow a thorough cleaning
and permit visual inspection of the internal bearing
surfaces. Some types of seals and shields can be
removed by using a slim blade that is inserted
between the inner ring and the seal or shield. A
005005
light twisting force is exerted against the seal or Figure 5-5. Special Holding Device for
shield as the blade is slid circumferentially around Seal/Shield Removal and Installation
the bearing.
5-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
5-19. DEMAGNETIZATION. (1) Demagnetize large bearings individually.

Airframe bearings and loose bearing components
5-20. GENERAL. Demagnetizing equipment is used can be demagnetized as lots in baskets or as
to remove residual magnetism from bearings. Most grouped on safety wire. Demagnetize all separable
bearings are made of steel alloys and accumulate bearing components individually rather than as a
a certain amount of residual magnetism during unit.
operation. A magnetized bearing will retain steel
chips and particles inside the bearing all through (2) H o l d t h e i n n e r a n d o u t e r r i n g s o f
the cleaning process. Therefore, it is very important non-separable bearings so they will not vibrate and
that bearings be free of residual magnetism prior be damaged.
to cleaning. A demagnetizing coil with an appropri-
ately sized throat is suitable for this purpose. (3) Pass the bearing slowly through the
demagnetizing coil. Rotate the bearing approximately
5-21. Conveyorized demagnetizing equipment can 90 degrees during the pass.
be used to expedite the process. However, magnetic
materials should not be used within 3 feet of the (4) Rotate the bearing rings slowly as the
magnetizing coil. bearing is returned through the demagnetizing field.
Move the bearing or bearing components at a rate
not to exceed 12 feet per minute.
5-22. PROCEDURE. Demagnetize all bearings prior
to cleaning, after buffing and at other times during
the cleaning process as indicated by the gaussmeter. (5) Slowly withdraw the bearing until some
Bearings shall be demagnetized after each rework distance from the coil while the demagnetizer is still
process. Bearings can be demagnetized while they on and the current is flowing through the coil.
are in the cleaning basket (figure 5-1) Facilities not
having a heavy-duty demagnetizer shall use the (6) Test the bearing or bearing parts for
hand method. residual magnetism. A maximum of five (5) gauss
residual magnetism is acceptable for large bearings
and two (2) gauss for small precision bearings 2
a. Basket Demagnetization. inches outer diameter and smaller.
NOTE (7) Repeat this procedure as many times
as necessary. The gaussmeter shall be used to
Demagnitize one basket at a time. Do not check both the effectiveness of the demagnetizing
stack baskets. procedure and the necessity for processing new
bearings received from Supply.
(1) Pass the basket slowly through the
demagnetizer coil. c. Conveyorized Demagnetizers will require
sufficient testing to determine proper operational
(2) Rotate the basket 90 degrees and pass speed for adequate demagnetization.
it again through the demagnetizer coil.
5-23. C H E C K I N G F O R M A G N E T I S M . U s e a
magnetometer (gaussmeter) that reads directly in
(3) W i t h d r a w t h e b a s k e t a s u f f i c i e n t
gauss to check the effectiveness of the demagne-
distance away from the coil before shutting-off the
tizing procedure. The gaussmeter shall be perma-
demagnetizer.
nently located in the cleaning area and shall be
used to monitor baskets of bearings after demagneti-
(4) Check bearings for residual magnetism. zation.
A maximum of five (5) gauss residual magnetism
is acceptable for bearings 2 inches OD or greater. 5-24. GENERAL CLEANING PROCEDURES.
A two (2) gauss limit applies to precision bearings
under 2 inches outer diameter. 5-25. SOAK. The purpose of the soak process is
to soften greases, preservative compounds, carbon
(5) Repeat this procedure as many times residues and adhering organic foreign matter for
as necessary to reduce the level of residual easier removal in subsequent washing operations.
magnetism to acceptable limits. The need for controlled heating will depend on the
cleaning solution that has been selected for the soak.
b. Hand Method Demagnetization. Agitation will usually increase the efficiency of the
5-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
cleaning action of the soak. However, agitation will N-methyl-2-Pyrrolidone (NMP). The recommended
necessitate rough filtering. Agitation cannot be used carbon removers are listed in Table 5-1.
with solutions that have a water seal on the surface
due to solvent evaporation. Soak time will depend 5-27. RINSE. Every soak or wash step shall be
on the type and amount of contamination to be immediately followed by an appropriate filtered
removed and the effectiveness of the cleaning solvent rinse. This process is used to remove
compound. Ultrasonic cleaning tanks with adequate residual cleaning materials. Solvent, Federal Specifi-
power levels will greatly facilitate the removal of cation MIL–PRF–680, Type II, shall be used in all
difficult-to-remove residues from inside the bearings. cleaning processes except the water detergent
process.
5-26. There are several different chemical solvents/
compounds that can be used in soak tank processes a. Filtration and agitation is required for all
depending on the type and amount of contamination solvent rinse tanks. Filtration of solvents shall be
on the bearings. in accordance with paragraph 5-52.
a. Light greases, slush preservative coatings, b. Rotate the bearing to dislodge internal
or oils may be removed by an organic solvent, listed contamination trapped in the ball/roller retainer
in Table 5-1. The advantage of a hydrocarbon solvent pockets. This procedure should be accomplished
(i.e. Stoddard Solvent, MIL–PRF–680, Type II) is during final rinsing.
that it can be recycled. All solvents shall be
continuously filtered through replaceable 10 micron c. Rinsing can be accomplished by the use
filters. of agitated tanks, or spray booths.
CAUTION
b. Heavy greases and soft film hot dip preser-
vatives can be removed by soaking in hot oil. Hot
Do not spin the bearing at high speeds,
oil soak is effective in softening grease deposits
even when solvent spraying. Raceways
prior to an agitated solvent rinse. The hot oil soak
and rolling elements will be damaged from
is required to help remove grease from miniature
sliding and skidding.
bearings and other bearings with small crevices or
openings such as thin section and non-removable
5-28. VAPOR DEGREASING. Vapor degreasing
seal-type bearings.
used in bearing cleaning is intended to remove light
oils and rinsates at the end of the process. The
c. Water based solutions are effective to process requires the use of environmentally safe
remove oils, greases and preservatives from solvents and specialized equipment as described
bearings and are listed in Table 5-1. These materials in paragraph 5-14j.
tend to be more effective cleaners than hydrocarbon
solvents. The water based materials are usually a. Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) degreasing (figure
heated and a hot water rinse is required, followed 5-3) is used for final rinsing or drying bearings just
immediately by immersion in a water displacing oil. prior to the preliminary inspection process. IPA
The solutions shall be continuously filtered through degreasing machines are manufactured in sizes to
10 micron filters. accommodate large bearings as well as miniature
instrument bearings.
NOTE
b. Hydrofluoroether (HFE) degreasing (figure
The major disadvantages to water based 5-4) is limited for use in the final processing of
materials is that they produce waste instrument bearings.
streams that must be treated in an indus-
trial waste treatment plant because they NOTE
are not normally recycled. For each
process tank a hot water rinse tank and The use of chlorinated and chlorofluori-
a water displacing oil tank are also nated solvents (i.e. 1,1,1 trichloroethane
required. (TCA) or “Freon” trichlortrifluoroethane) is
no longer authorized for use. Trichloroe-
d. Carbon or oxidized hydrocarbon greases thylene (TCE) and perchloroethylene are
are particularly difficult to remove. Most carbon exempt from these restrictions in certain
removers are aqueous based; some contain sodium areas, but their use for cleaning bearings
hydroxide, others contain monoethanolamine or is not recommended.
5-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
5-29. VIBRO-TUMBLING. The vibro-tumbling pro- inch triangles or the 3/8 x 1/2 cones are recom-
cess is effective in removing hardened deposits from mended for most bearings and bearing parts.
bearing parts when chemical means are found to
be ineffective. In general, rolling element bearings 5-31. Media Preparation. De-glaze the media as
must be completely disassembled into basic unit follows:
parts (rings, retainers, balls/rollers) before being
processed in the mill. Complete disassembly is a. Shut the mill drain.
authorized only if the bearing drawing or the
component technical manual allows complete disas-
b. Add 1/2 to 1 gallon water and one cup
sembly. Metal-to-metal plain or spherical bearings
of burnishing compound to wet the media.
which cannot be disassembled can be processed
in the mill as complete assemblies.
c. Run the mill for 100 hours.
CAUTION d. Open the drain and flush the media with

fresh water until it runs clear.
Assembled rolling element bearings may e. Media is now properly de-glazed and may
be processed in the mill when authorized be used for all finishing mill operations.
by the cognizant depot bearing engineer.
Assembled bearings with silver plated,
one piece machined bronze/steel retain- f. During use add more media to the mill as
ers, are particularly affected by entrapped required to bring the volume back to proper limits.
Further de-glazing is not required.
abrasive in the ball/roller pockets and
between the ring land guided surfaces.
Figure C-30 in Appendix C illustrates the NOTE
effects of abrasive contamination in silver
plated retainers. Use only the volume of media specified
for the particular model mill.
5-30. Vibro-Tumbling Media. The function of the 5-32. Vibro-Tumbling Procedure. The cleaning
media is to provide support and cushioning for the and burnishing operations of vibro-tumbling mills are
bearings during the tumbling operations. Ceramic as follows:
media is hard, wear resistant, and sufficiently dense
to provide support. The ceramic media is manufac- a. Prepare the mill.
tured from clay materials which are extruded into
various shapes and sizes and then kiln-fired to a
hard finish. Most of the ceramic media that is (1) Close the drain, add just enough water
produced contain abrasives (aluminum oxide, silicon to the mill to wet the media and add one or two
carbide) of varying grit sizes and quantities. Do not cups (8 oz.) of powdered burnishing compound.
use any media containing abrasives for bearing
cleaning as it will damage the microfinished bearing (2) Run the mill for about 20 minutes until
surfaces. Ceramic media used for bearing cleaning the water and burnishing compound are thoroughly
and burnishing operations shall meet the following dispersed. A ring of suds will appear around the
requirement: mill center post when the mixture is correct.
NOTE
a. Ceramic media shall be nonabrasive with
no added abrasive materials. Specify this require- Excessive compound will slow the tum-
ment when procuring the media. bling action of the media and will prevent
the parts from properly moving around
b. The recommended media shape shall be the mill. Insufficient compound will not
triangles, cones or 22 degree angle-cut cylinders. provide sufficient cushioning between the
parts and may cause damage to the
bearing.
c. The media size is dependent on the size
of the parts being tumbled. In general, the 3/8 x (3) Adjust the water-to-compound ratio until
5/8 inch cylinders, the 3/8 x 3/8 or the 3/8 x 5/8 the media action is proper.
5-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE for selecting and controlling the bearing cleaning

processes at their respective activity. Activities below
The balance between media, water, and the depot level that use this manual and do not
compound is achieved through experi- have a Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical
ence. Use rejected bearings to establish Science Laboratory at their disposal may contact
the vibrotumbling procedure. the Materials Engineering Division at the Naval Air
Depot, Naval Air Station, North Island for sugges-
b. Adding Bearings. Add the bearing parts to tions and recommendations on bearing cleaning
the mill one at a time to avoid nicking and denting. procedures. Air Force activities should contact WR-
Process similar sized parts together (all inner rings ALC/MMI.
or all outer rings).
5-35. Flow charts and legends summarizing ap-
NOTE proved bearing cleaning processes are illustrated
in figures 5-6 through 5-9. Indicated times are
Load the mill with parts not to exceed approximate and will vary according to the type and
one third (1/3) the rated volume of the amount of contamination. The flow charts are
mill. Some vibrotumblers are designed organized into:
with divided compartments to allow
different size parts to be run at the same a. Figure 5-6: Used, solvent based.
time.
b. Figure 5-7: Used, aqueous based.
c. Running Bearings. Run the parts in the mill
for two hours. Check the parts for condition. If c. Figure 5-8: New, solvent based.
needed, run the parts for two additional hours. Do
not run the parts any longer than is necessary to
d. Figure 5-9: New, aqueous based.
clean the bearings or achieve the specified surface
finish.
Refer to table 5-1 for the description of the cleaning
d. Rinsing Bearings. Remove the parts from material and the applicable government specification.
the mill and rinse them in hot or cold water to
thoroughly remove the burnishing soap compound. 5-36. SPECIAL PROCESSING LIMITATION. New
and used bearings should not be cleaned in the
e. Water Displacing Process. Immerse the same cleaning solutions and/or cleaning tanks. New
parts immediately in water displacing oil to prevent bearings are not contaminated with dirt, metal,
corrosion. carbon, and other abrasive particles, but are coated
with oils, greases or preservatives. New bearings
can be quickly contaminated and possibly damaged
f. Clean the bearings and bearing parts in when cleaned with used bearings.
the standard bearing cleaning line to remove the
water displacing oil and burnishing compound.
5-37. LIGHT GREASE AND OIL REMOVAL (NEW
OR USED).
NOTE
a. Demagnetize.
These procedures may be repeated and
the amount of compound or water varied
to achieve finer surface finishes. Experi- b. Static or agitated soak in hot (160_) oil
ence will come with trial and error. Bur- for 30 minutes or until the grease or preservative
nishing operations should not remove is removed.
measurable metal.
NOTE
5-33. TYPICAL CLEANING SEQUENCES.
Use either MIL–PRF–32033 or MIL-
5-34. GENERAL. The following cleaning processes PRF–6081 (1010) oil.
shall be followed for the cleaning of new and used
bearings. The local Materials Engineering Laborato- c. Agitated rinse in solvent/degreaser at room
ry/Physical Science Laboratory shall be responsible temperature for 5 minutes.
5-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MIL–PRF–32033(160_)
OR MIL–PRF–6081(1010)
DEGREASER
MIL–PRF–32033
AND NOTE1
MIL–PRF–680
005006
Figure 5-6. Solvent Based Cleaning Process for Used Bearings
5-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MIL–PRF–32033
AND NOTE1
MIL–PRF–680, TYPE II
005007
Figure 5-7. Aqueous Based Cleaning Process for Used Bearings
5-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MIL–PRF–32033(160_)
OR MIL–PRF–6081(1010)
DEGREASER MIL–PRF–680,
OR NOTE1
MIL–PRF–680, TYPE II
005008
Figure 5-8. Solvent Based Cleaning Process for New Bearings
5-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MIL–PRF–32033(160_)
OR MIL–PRF–6081(1010)
MIL–PRF–32033
MIL–PRF–680
005009
Figure 5-9. Aqueous Based Cleaning Process for New Bearings
5-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
d. Optional. Ultrasonic agitation may be locally e. Agitated rinse in solvent at room tempera-
authorized. Use a water based solvent mixture with ture for 5 minutes. This operation may be repeated
corrosion inhibitors and operate the tank at room in cleaner rinse tanks for several more cycles to
temperature. Bearings shall not be exposed to achieve the cleanest possible bearings.
ultrasonic energy for more than 5 minutes. The
ultrasonic power at the bottom of the tank must not f. Dry the bearings using one of the optional
exceed 5 watts per square inch (refer to paragraph methods described in paragraph 5-14j.
5-14d). After removal from the ultrasonic tank, rinse
the bearings in hot water, followed by immersion
in a water displacing oil. g. Place the clean and dry bearings in the
inspection area for further processing.
e. Agitated rinse in solvent at room tempera-
ture for 5 minutes. This operation may be repeated NOTE
in cleaner rinse tanks for several more cycles to
achieve the cleanest possible bearings. The bearing inspection area must be
f. Dry the bearings using one of the optional humidity and/or dew point controlled to
methods described in paragraph 5-14j. prevent corrosion. Personnel must wear
gloves or use an anti-perspirant cream
on their hands when they handle clean
g. Place the clean and dry bearings in the
bearings.
inspection area for further processing.
NOTE
5-39. CARBON REMOVAL.
The bearing inspection area must be
humidity and/or dew point controlled to
prevent corrosion. Personnel must wear a. Demagnetize completely.
gloves or use an anti-perspirant cream
on their hands when they handle clean b. Agitated soak in solvent at room tempera-
bearings. ture for 5 minutes.
5-38. HEAVY GREASE AND PRESERVATIVE c. Agitated soak in carbon removing com-
REMOVAL. pound for the time designated in table 5-1. Note
that the alkaline based carbon removers require no
a. Demagnetize completely. more than 15 SECONDS because long exposure
to hot alkaline cleaners will discolor or even etch
the bearings as seen in Figure 5–10.
b. Static soak in hot oil for 30 minutes or until
the grease or preservative is removed.
d. Optional Ultrasonic agitate in detergent and
water per table 5-1.
NOTE
e. Agitated rinse in hot deionized (DI) or
Use either MIL–PRF–32033 or MIL- reverse osmosis (RO) water.
PRF-6081 (1010) oil.
f. Agitated oil rinse in water displacing oil at
c. Agitated rinse in solvent/degreaser at room room temperature for 5 minutes.
temperature for 5 minutes.
g. Agitated rinse in solvent at room temper-
d. Optional. Ultrasonic agitation may be ature for 5 minutes. This operation should be
locally authorized. Use a water based solvent repeated in cleaner rinse tanks for several more
mixture with corrosion inhibitors and operate the cycles to achieve the cleanest possible bearings.
tank at room temperature. Bearings shall not be
exposed to ultrasonic energy for more than 5
minutes. The ultrasonic power at the bottom of the h. Dry the bearings using one of the optional
tank must not exceed 5 watts per square inch (refer methods described in paragraph 5-14j.
to paragraph 5Ć14d). After removal from the ultraĆ
sonic tank, rinse the bearings in hot water, followed i. Place the clean and dry bearings in the
by immersion in a water displacing oil. inspection areas for further processing.
5-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE NOTE
The bearing inspection area must be The bearing inspection area must be
humidity and/or dew point controlled to humidity and/or dew point controlled to
prevent corrosion. Personnel must wear prevent corrosion. Personnel must wear
gloves or use an anti-perspirant cream gloves on their hands when they handle
on their hands when they handle clean clean bearings.
bearings.
5-41. OIL-IMPREGNATED BEARINGS. Lubricating
oil was put into porous sintered bearings by a
5-40. OXYGEN SYSTEM BEARINGS (NEW AND vacuum impregnation process. The oil cannot be
USED). easily removed by vapor degreasing or a quick dip
in a solvent. Refer to Section X for detailed
a. Demagnetize completely. instructions for relubricating oil-impregnated bear-
ings.
b. Agitated soak in perfluorinated solvent per
a. Demagnetize iron base-type sintered bear-
table 5-1 for 30 minutes.
ings.
c. Visually inspect the bearings for cleanliness b. Heat bearings in an oven at 200_ + 10_F.
and repeat the perfluorinated solvent immersion until
visually clean. Brushing with a bristle brush may c. Agitated soak in solvent at room tempera-
be required. ture for 15 minutes.
NOTE d. Place in a vacuum chamber and evacuate

to 2 inches of mercury (28 inches gage) for 15
minutes.
The bearings can be cleaned in a self
contained pressure spray cabinet using e. Repeat steps b, c, and d except time in
a perfluorinated solvent as described in vacuum chamber can be reduced to 5 minutes.
paragraph 14-82.
f. Dry in oven at 200_ + 10_F for 1 hour.
d. Agitated rinse in a fluorocarbon solvent at
room temperature for 5 minutes. This operation may 5-42. BARRIER FILM COATED BEARINGS. See
be repeated in cleaner rinse tanks for several more paragraph 14-199 for details on barrier film coated
cycles to achieve the cleanest possible bearings. bearings.
e. Dry the bearings using the HFE Co-Solvent 5-43. DU Bearings.

vapor dryer/degreaser as described in paragraph
5-14j. a. Agitated soak in solvent at room tempera-
tures to remove exterior grime and dirt.
f. Place the clean and dry bearings in the b. Agitated rinse in solvent at room temper-
inspection areas for further processing. ature for 5 minutes. This operation may be repeated
in cleaner rinse tanks for several more cycles to
WARNING achieve the cleanest possible bearings.
CAUTION
Bearings that are used in gaseous or
liquid oxygen systems shall be handled Do not buff, polish, wire brush, vapor or
with clean nylon gloves that are free of grit blast the bearing surfaces.
petroleum hydrocarbons (mineral and syn-
thetic greases and oils). Keep away from 5-44. CERAMIC COATED, CARBON GRAPHITE
all non-authorized oils, greases, and sol- LINED BEARINGS.
vents. Contamination with the hydrocar-
bon materials will cause a violent, explo- a. Agitated soak in hot water at 180_F for
sion-like reaction with oxygen. 30 minutes.
5-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Rinse in hot water at 180_F for 10 minutes. g. Dry the bearings using one of the optional
methods described in paragraph 5-14j.
c. Dry the bearings using one of the optional
methods described in paragraph 5-14j. 5-47. C O N T R O L O F B E A R I N G C L E A N I N G
PROCESSES.
5-45. FABRIC-LINED BEARINGS.
5-48. GENERAL. Control of materials used in bear-
CAUTION ing cleaning shall be the responsibility of the local
Materials Engineering/Physical Science Laboratory.
Laboratory personnel will analyze the solutions as
Do not remove the self-lubricating fiber
required to ensure effective cleaning without damage
material that adheres to the ball and
to the bearings. All bearing facilities shall consult
raceway surfaces.
their local Materials Engineering/Physical Science
Laboratory for recommended solution and filter
a. Agitated soak in solvent at room tempera- changes since these changes are predicated by the
ture to remove exterior grime and dirt. volume of bearings being cleaned. Solutions that
are out of control can easily damage bearings
NOTE costing many thousands of dollars before being
detected (figure 5-10). Continual surveillance of all
Clean bearings by wiping with a clean, processes is necessary to prevent occurrences
dry, lint free cloth. No further cleaning will similar to that seen in figure 5-11.
be necessary.
5-49. SOLVENT. Use new solvent for all solvent
b. Agitated rinse in solvent at room temper- cleaning and rinsing of bearings unless otherwise
ature for 5 minutes. This operation may be repeated specified. It will be the responsibility of the local
in cleaner rinse tanks for several more cycles to Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science
achieve the cleanest possible bearings. Laboratory to monitor the quality of incoming ship-
ments of new solvent. The laboratory will also
c. Dry the bearings in an oven set between conduct periodic checks on the bulk delivery tank
150_ and 180_F for one half hour. cars, bulk storage tanks, and intrafacility delivery
equipment, to ensure the use of uncontaminated
5-46. BUFFING COMPOUND REMOVAL. Remov- solvent. Solid and liquid contamination of shipping
ing buffing compounds will require cleaning steps and storage containers can cause irreparable bear-
in addition to the processes specified in the typical ing damage and cause severe work stoppages and
cleaning sequences. After buffing in accordance with material shortages.
instructions contained in Section VI, clean the
bearing as follows: NOTE
a. Demagnetize. U. S. Army Tank–Automotive andArma-

ments Command, AMSTA–TR–E/EI is the
certifying authority for products qualified
b. Agitated soak in solvent at room temper- to MIL–PRF–680. ILO identification of a
ature for 15 minutes. particular manufacturer in a qualified pro-
ducers list, a certification letter from the
c. A g i t a t e d s o a k i n c a r b o n r e m o v i n g Army activity stating compliance of the
compound for the time designated in table 5-1. companies product with MIL–PRF–680 is
considered acceptable
d. Optional/recommended. Agitated rinse in
hot deionized (DI) or reverse osmosis (RO) water. NOTE
e. Agitated rinse in water displacing oil at Fill the final rinse tank(s) with clean, fresh
room temperature for 5 minutes. filtered solvent daily. Pump used solvent
to the next dirtiest rinse tank(s). This will
f. Agitated rinse in solvent at room temper- reduce solvent usage.
ature for 5 minutes. This operation may be repeated
in cleaner rinse tanks for several more cycles to 5-50. DISTILLED SOLVENT. Redistilled solvent
achieve the cleanest possible bearings. shall not be used unless authorized and controlled
5-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
by the local Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physi- 5-51. STORAGE TANKS. Tanks used for solvent
cal Science Laboratory. When authorized, solvent storage and piping used to transport solvent shall
shall be batched distilled and weekly tested for be constructed of stainless steel or other noncorrod-
appearance, distillation range and residue content. ing, noncontaminating material. Periodic inspections
Distilled solvent shall meet all specification require- should be made for water contamination due to
ments of the solvent. Solvent shall be clear, with condensation and/or leakage. Tanks used for intrafa-
no evidence of water droplets, cloudiness, and/or cility transport of solvent shall not be used for
suspended matter when visually inspected. carrying any other material.
5-52. FILTRATION. Solvent used for final rinsing

and preservation processes shall be continuously
filtered through 5- to 10-micron filters.
5-53. CARBON REMOVER. Maintenance of carbon

removing solutions will vary with the type of material.
Each local laboratory shall establish a monitoring
program to periodically test the carbon remover. In
general, these solutions will become contaminated
with oil and soap residues from greases, and their
cleaning effectiveness will decrease with use. Re-
place the solution when contamination level has built
up so it is no longer effective.
5-54. HOT OIL. General purpose lubricating oil,

MIL–PRF–32033, is used as a preservative, soak
solution, softening media and flush solution.
a. Provide continuous filtration for all hot oil

tanks.
b. Maintain temperature of the oil at 160_ +

005010 10_F.
Figure 5-10. Galvanic Corrosion Resulting from
Inadequate Controls on Carbon Remover c. Change unfiltered oil on a daily basis.
5-55. C O N T R O L O F B E A R I N G C L E A N I N G
WORKLOAD.
5-56. PROTECTING CLEANED BEARINGS.
a. Bearings shall not remain unprotected be-

tween cleaning processes for periods in excess of
2 hours in an uncontrolled environment.
b. Bearings requiring rework shall be given

temporary protection immediately following cleaning.
c. Clean only those bearings that can be

inspected and preserved within a work shift.
d. Protect bearings awaiting processing until

the next shift by storing them in a temperature and
005011 humidity controlled room (70_ " 5_F and 35 to 45%
Figure 5-11. Deplating During Fingerprint relative humidity). If a controlled environment room
Neutralizing Due to Improper is not available, protect the bearings with a locally
Selection of Materials approved preservative compound (e.g. MIL–
PRF–32033).
5-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE 5-59. HANDLING CHEMICALS. Many of the chemi-

cals specified in this section of the manual are toxic
and corrosive to the skin and mucous membranes.
Do not use the solvent rinse tanks for Always observe the safety precautions and fire
over night or weekend bearing storage. regulations for the use and handling of all chemical
materials. Use protective equipment when working
5-57. HANDLING CLEANED BEARINGS. Do not with or near these materials. Always use approved
handle bearings with bare hands after they have rubber gloves, aprons, face shields, and other
been cleaned unless specifically permitted by special appropriate clothing specified by local Safety and
instructions. Use clean nonabsorbent gloves or Industrial Hygienic personnel. Protective hand
special handling devices when handling bearings. creams shall be utilized to prevent defatting and
Hand creams are not adequate as an antiperspirant cracking of the skin.
for many people and there is also the problem of
leaving cream residues on the clean bearing sur- 5-60. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. The clean-
faces. ing area shall be well ventilated and the use of
required cleaning solvents shall be restricted to
5-58. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. specially designated areas. Avoid prolonged or
repeated breathing of vapors or physical contact
with the skin. Contact local medical personnel if
NOTE chlorinated solvents, carbon removers, or other
chemicals come in contact with the skin and/or eyes.
Materials specified or recommended in
Wash thoroughly with water and report immediately
this manual are subject to all applicable
to cognizant medical personnel.
federal, state, and local regulations. Local
modification to these processes and pro-
cedures, and material substitutions may 5-61. The vapor concentrations of solvents in the
be necessary to ensure compliance with working area shall not exceed maximum limits
these regulations. specified by the ACGIH.
Table 5-1. List of Cleaning Materials

Fig. Mfg. and/or Temp. _C Process
No. Item Function Material Specification (_F) Concentration Time
5-6 3 Degreaser Lower VOC Sol- Xxcel XLS–52 Room As Rec’vd As needed
vent
5-6 4 Carbon Monoethanolamine Envirosolv 654CR 60_ (140_) Use as 20-30
Remover1 + glycol Rec’vd minutes
5-6 4 Carbon NMP based Turco 5668 60_ (140_) Use as 20-30
Remover1 Rec’vd minutes
5-6 4 Carbon Monoethanolamine P-C-111, Type II Room Use as 20-30
5-6 4 Carbon Sodium hydrox. + MIL-C-14460, Type I 80_ (176_) 20 oz/g !15 SEC!
Remover1 chelaters 150 g/l MAXIMUM
5–6 4 Carbon Sodium hydrox. + Turco 4181L 80_ (176_) 24 oz/g !15 SEC!
Remover1 chelaters MAXIMUM
5-6 4 Carbon NMP based 60_ (140_) Use as 20-30
5-6 Opt. Ultrasonics Ultrasonic Turco Caviclean Room 5 minutes
Detergent 1
5-6 Opt. Ultrasonics Ultrasonic Fisher Brand Room 2-3% by 5 minutes
Detergent 1 Versa Clean volume
5-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 5-1. List of Cleaning Materials (Continued)

5-6 Opt. Ultrasonics Ultrasonic EZE Products Room 2-3% by 5 minutes
Detergent 1 Intex 8125 volume
5-6 5 Hot water DI or RO water + Turco Rust Bloc 80_ (176_) 0.7% by 1 minute
rinse inhibitor volume
5–6 6 Water Dis- Water Displacing Turco Aquasorb Room Use as Rec’d 3–5 min
placement Oil
5-7 2 Aqueous Non-alkaline Almco #150 60_ (140_) 5-7% by 3 minutes
Cleaner 1 Detergent volume
5-7 2 Aqueous Non-alkaline Branson MC-3 60_ (140_) 8.5% by 3 minutes
5-7 2 Aqueous Non-alkaline Turco 6751L 60_ (140_) 5-7% by 5 minutes
5-7 2 Aqueous Non-alkaline Allied Kelite 60_ (140_) 8-10 3 minutes
Cleaner 1 Detergent Isoprep 44 82_ (180_) oz./gal
5-7 3 Carbon Monoethanolamine Envirosolv 654CR 60_ (140_) Use as 20-30
5-7 3 Carbon NMP based Turco 5668 60_ (140_) Use as 20-30
5-7 3 Carbon Monoethanolamine P-C-111, Type II Room Use as 20-30
5-7 3 Carbon Sodium hydrox. + MIL-C-14460, Type I 80_ (176_) 24 oz/g !15 SEC!
Remover1 chelaters 150 g/l MAXIMUM
5–7 3 Carbon Sodium hydrox. + Turco 4181L 80_ (176_) 24oz/g !15 SEC!
Remover chelaters MAXIMUM
5-7 3 Carbon NMP based 60_ (140_) Use as 20-30
5–8 3 Degreaser Lower VOC Sol- Xxcel XLS–52 Room Use as Rec’d As needed
vent
5-9 3 Aqueous Non-alkaline Almco #150 60_ (140_) 5-7% by 3 minutes
5-9 3 Aqueous Non-alkaline Branson MC-3 60_ (140_) 8.5% by 3 minutes
5-9 3 Aqueous Non-alkaline Turco 6751L 60_ (140_) 5-7% by 5 minutes
5-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 5-1. List of Cleaning Materials (Continued)

5-9 3 Aqueous Non-alkaline Allied Kelite Isoprep 60_ (140_) 8-10 oz./gal 3 minutes
Cleaner 1 Detergent 44 82_ (180_)
N/A N/A Fluorinated FC-77 or PF 5070 Minnesota Mining & Room Use as 30 minutes
grease Manufacturing (3M) Rec’vd
remover
Note1: The solutions identified in this table have been used successfully but they are by no means
the only products that will perform adequately. New materials are continually being developed
and they should be evaluated for this application.
5-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION VI
REWORK OF BEARINGS
6-1. GENERAL. NOTE
6-2. This section contains instructions on how to Cotton gloves shall be frequently changed
perform economical Level I rework of bearings to preclude using perspiration soaked
including the limited replacement of defective bearing gloves.
components. Metal removal is limited to buffing and
polishing within specified dimensional limits. More 6-10. DEMAGNETIZATION AND CLEANING. De-
extensive rework such as grinding and machining magnetize and clean reworked bearings prior to
is feasible during periods of national emergency. inducting them into the clean room for visual and
However, unless otherwise directed, the more exten- dimensional inspection.
sive rework procedures will be performed at an
authorized Level II Service Technical Repair Center 6-11. TEMPORARY PROTECTION. Bearings that
(TRC) for bearings. Major restrictions are imposed are being reworked shall be given temporary protec-
on rework of bearing raceways that result in measur- tion when there will be delays of more than 4 hours.
able dimensional changes. See paragraph 6-13 for Preserve the bearings with preservative oil, MIL–
rework definitions and paragraph 1-43 for a list of PRF–32033, or equivalent, immediately after buffing
authorized Service TRC’s for Level II bearing rework. and/or polishing.
6-3. FACILITIES. 6-12. DEFINITION OF WORK LEVELS.
6-4. The bearing rework area shall be well lighted, 6-13. The following terms and processes define
with either individual bench lights at each work area authorized bearing rework procedures. The Service
or an adequate overhead lighting system. Buffing depots that are responsible for accomplishing and
and polishing equipment shall be positively vented controlling these procedures are also provided.
to remove harmful abrasive particles, and shall be Bearing rework operations have been placed in four
physically separated from the rest of the rework area. distinct categories and are identified by levels of
Space requirements will be based on local workload rework.
and the type of bearings being reworked.
6-14. Level I: Processing Bearings. Bearing pro-
6-5. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS. cessing involves taking a used bearing and checking
and/or comparing it to new bearing drawing require-
6-6. Personnel reworking Group A, B, D and E ments and/or authorized service wear limits. The
bearings should be specialists in one or more of instructions and procedures to accomplish the follow-
the bearing types, familiar with the bearing design ing operations are contained and authorized in
and dimensional tolerances, and have a working Sections V through XI of this manual. All Service
knowledge of bearing applications. depots are authorized to perform this level of rework.
6-7. BUFFING AND POLISHING. Personnel as- a. Demagnetization.

signed to buff and/or polish bearing surfaces shall
be given special training. Personnel shall hold a b. Cleaning.
buffing and polishing rate or be certified per instruc-
tions contained in Section XVI of this manual. c. Nondestructive Testing.
6-8. HANDLING REWORKED BEARINGS. d. Visual and Microscopic Inspection.
6-9. USE OF GLOVES. Reworked bearings have e. Minor repair; buffing and polishing of inac-
been cleaned of all protective films and are very tive and active surfaces and stoning of nicks and
susceptible to corrosive attack. Personnel physically gouges in corner radii.
handling clean bearings shall wear synthetic rubber
or vinyl gloves, or use an approved antiperspirant f. Dimensional Inspection.
hand cream. Clean cotton gloves can be used when
none of the preceding type gloves are available. g. Dynamic Testing.
6-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
h. Lubrication and Preservation. 6-17. Level IV: Remanufacturing of Bearings.

Rework of bearings that includes the manufacture
i. Packaging. of new components, in addition to rolling elements,
is referred to as bearing remanufacturing. This
6-15. Level II: Refurbishment of Bearings. Re- function will be performed only by the bearing
work of bearings that goes beyond the scope of manufacturer unless authorized by the Cognizant
processing as defined by paragraph 6-14 is classified Service Systems Command for assignment to the
as refurbishment. This level of rework is restricted designated Bearing Technical Repair Center, and
to designated Bearing Technical Repair Centers, see will be under the technical control of the respective
paragraph 1-43 for additional information. Service bearing engineering activity.
NOTE
NOTE
This term includes all of the operations
The term “refurbishment” encompasses of processing and may include the opera-
all of the operations of “processing”, and tions of either refurbishing or regrinding
one or more of the following operations. of the old parts which are reused, and
one or more of the following operations.
a. Replace rolling elements (balls or rollers).
a. Manufacture of a new inner or outer ring.
b. Rework or replace retainers (includes plat-
ing). b. Manufacture of a new rolling element retainer.
c. Interchange components (rings, rolling ele- c. Manufacture of new rolling elements.

ments and retainer).
6-18. TECHNICAL CONTROL OVER REWORK
d. Grind and/or plate the mounting surfaces PROCEDURES. The cognizant depot bearing engi-
(outer diameter of the outer ring and the inner neer will be responsible for all technical decisions
diameter of the inner ring). concerning the Level I rework of bearings. The Level
II (refurbishment), Level III (regrind) and Level IV
e. Honing of raceways (not to exceed 0.0003 (Remanufacture) rework of bearings, that are on the
inch per surface). Services’ critical bearing repair list, shall be under
the technical control of depot bearing engineers that
6-16. Level III: Regrind of Bearings. Rework of have been assigned technical responsibility by their
bearings that includes the removal of material from respective Service Command (See paragraph 1-42).
active surfaces by a grinding operation will be The Service bearing facilities that have been autho-
referred to as bearing regrind. This function will be rized by their respective Service Command to
performed only at designated Service Bearing Tech- perform Level II bearing refurbishment are listed in
nical Repair Centers or bearing manufacturers under paragraph 1-43.
the technical control of the respective Service
bearing engineering activity. See paragraph 1-43. 6-19. LEVEL I REWORK PROCEDURES.
Regrind of bearings has not been approved by the
Navy. CAUTION
NOTE The indiscriminate, uncontrolled applica-

tion of the following instructions by unqual-
ified engineers and/or shop personnel is
This term encompasses all of the opera-
strictly prohibited.
tions of processing and refurbishment and
one or more of the following operations.
6-20. BUFFING AND POLISHING. There is confu-
sion as to the differences between polishing and
a. Grinding of raceways (inner and/or outer buffing. Questions are also asked concerning what
rings). type of wheel and wheel dressing to use and what
type of equipment is required. A general definition
b. Installation of oversize rolling elements. of polishing and buffing is; “the art of producing a
desired surface finish by removing scratches, pits,
c. Installation of new redesigned retainer. holes and other surface imperfections with an
6-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
abrasive that will not leave marks that are as coarse Peripheral Speed (feet/min)= d x (Pi) x rpm
as those that are removed”.
Where:
6-21. At this point, similarity between buffing and
polishing ends and it is necessary to define the terms d = diameter of wheel in feet
and describe the differences between the two
operations and to provide important guidelines and Pi = 3.1416
procedures that must be followed.
rpm = revolutions per minute of the shaft
a. Buffing. Buffing is a refining operation that
uses a buffing compound applied to soft, flexible 6-24. Table 6-1 gives recommended surface speeds
cloth or felt wheels or buffs, to remove superficial for buffing or polishing different kinds of bearing
scratches, stains and tarnishes. Buffing produces materials. Table 6-2 gives the conversion from rpm
a surface that is semi-bright, without any pronounced to wheel diameter or surface speed of the wheel
line effect, and the process removes very little face.
surface metal.
6-25. Buffing and polishing materials that can be
safely used on bearings will depend on the bearing
b. Polishing. Polishing is an abrading opera-
material and the type and amount of the surface
tion that uses coarse abrasives applied to hard-faced
material to be removed. In general, use Lea polishing
wheels or buffs made of cloth, felt or leather. The
compound, Grade C, when polishing nonactive
process will remove tool marks, scratches, pits, and
(exterior) bearing surfaces. Refinishing inner and
other surface imperfections. A definite coarse line
outer ring raceways and rolling element surfaces
pattern remains after the polishing operation.
will be limited to buffing with chrome buffing com-
pound.
6-22. Do not polish or buff used bearings as a
standard practice or just for appearance’s sake. 6-26. GROUPING OF BEARINGS. Rework proce-
Buffing and polishing of new bearings shall require dures are categorized by basic bearing groups
the prior approval of the cognizant depot bearing described as follows:
engineer. Polishing or buffing is necessary when
the following conditions are present: a. Group A - Powerplant Bearings; including
gas turbine and reciprocating engine bearings,
a. Rust or corrosion on external bearing gearbox bearings and related accessory bearings.
surfaces.
b. Group B - Airframe and General Bearings;
b. Fretting corrosion on external bearing sur- including rod ends, plain bearings, wheel bearings
faces. and aircraft control bearings.
c. Stains (other than oil stains) or tarnishes c. Group C - Instrument Bearings; including
on bearing surfaces that interfere with visual inspec- all bearings used in aircraft instrument and related
tion. equipment.
d. Group D - Rotating Electrical Bearings;

d. Measurable films or coatings remain on including generator, starter, small motor, invertor and
bearing surfaces after cleaning. hydraulic accessory bearings.
e. Superficial rust or corrosion on active e. Group E - Helicopter Bearings; including

bearing surfaces. transmission, gearbox, rotor head and drive shaft
bearings.
6-23. Selecting the correct speed of the wheel is
important. The proper speed will depend on the type 6-27. GROUP A BEARINGS. Group A bearings
of bearing material, the type of defect to be removed have high replacement values and shall be salvaged
and the equipment that is used. The wheel speed whenever possible. Many Group A bearings are of
in revolutions per minute (rpm) must be converted separable design and it is possible to provide special
into the peripheral or surface speed of the polishing/ treatment for individual bearing components. It must
buffing wheel face. This is calculated by the following be emphasized that inspection requirements must
formula: be clearly defined and high quality standards main-
6-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
tained. Keep bearing assemblies with matching serial 6-29. Rolling Elements (Balls and Rollers). The
numbers and/or mounting sequence markings to- following procedures are only to be used on bearings
gether at all times. Renew obscure or difficult-to-read designed to be completely disassembled. The
identification markings by vibratool etching prior to, bearing drawing or the original component technical
or during, bearing disassembly. manual should specify that the rolling elements are
removable.
NOTE
a. Screen used balls and rollers for surface
flaws and defects.
Bearings received with incomplete or mis-
sing manufacturers numbers and/or prime/ b. Remove superficial corrosion, stains and
vendor part numbers shall not be re- discolorations with crocus cloth.
marked by shop personnel unless positive
identification can be made, and authoriza- c. Vibro-tumbling may be used to finish balls
tion is given by the local cognizant depot and rollers as discussed in paragraph 5-29.
bearing engineer.
d. Buff the rollers of large bearings that show
6-28. Inner and Outer Bearing Rings. light corrosion stains and discolorations. Refer to
Section VII for acceptable visual inspection
standards.
a. Remove superficial corrosion stains and
discolorations on active and/or inactive surfaces NOTE
using crocus cloth. Stains and discolorations that
are easily removed will not require additional rework. Dimensionally inspect all rolling elements
that have been buffed to applicable
b. Buff raceways of separable bearings using drawing requirements.
suitable buffing equipment to restore the original
finish and to accentuate defects that may be present. 6-30. Retainers. Very little rework is required for
Operate buffing wheels at the proper speed specified retainers during Level I bearing processing. If the
in table 6-1. Use loose muslin disk wheels, that are bearing drawing or original component technical
8 to 10 inches in diameter, for buffing larger bearings. manual states the bearing can be completely disas-
Use properly applied buffing compounds. sembled the following procedure can be used when
authorized by the cognizant depot bearing engineer.
c. Polish inner and outer ring mounting Bronze or silver plated retainers should not be
surfaces to remove corrosion products, fretting chemically cleaned to remove tarnish. The tarnish
corrosion, light smearing and galling. Do not use is not detrimental to bearing performance. Remove
abrasives that are coarser than Lea polishing tarnish from these retainers using the vibro-tumbling
compound, Grade C. Use several smaller cloth operation (See paragraph 5-29).
wheels with adapter mountings for buffing smaller
6-31. Nonseparable Bearings. Very little rework
bearings.
can be performed on nonseparable bearings. The
following procedures and limitations apply:
(1) Dimensionally inspect all ring surfaces
that have been polished for compliance to drawing a. Remove any light surface corrosion and/or
requirements. fretting corrosion products on the external surfaces
by buffing or polishing.
(2) Bearings that have been buffed do not
require dimensional inspection. CAUTION
Bearings with close tolerance bores

d. Blend nicks and gouges on ring corner radii should not be polished. Polishing will
using dressing stones and/or deburring tools. Always remove enough metal to cause the
blend high spots on the bore, the outer diameter dimension of the reworked surface to be
and face surfaces of the rings. out-of-tolerance
e. Vibro-tumble rings to remove superficial b. Carefully remove any evidence of metal

stains and discolorations from active and inactive pickup/transfer that is on the inner ring bore surfa-
surfaces. Refer to paragraph 5-29 for instructions ces. Check the final bore dimension against drawing
and information on vibro-tumbling bearing rings. requirements.
6-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 6Ć1. Recommended Wheel Speeds in Surface Feet per Minute
Carbon & Low Stainless Aluminum Chromium

Operation Alloy Steels Steel Brass Nickel and Zinc Plate
Polishing 7Ć8000 8Ć9000 7000 8000 6000
Buffing
Cutting 9000 9Ć10000 7Ć9000 7Ć9000 6Ć8000

Down
Coloring 7Ć9000 8Ć9000 6Ć8000 6Ć8000 6Ć7000 7Ć8000
Table 6Ć2. Speed Chart for Determining Surface Speed of Buffing/Polishing Wheels
Diameter of Wheel in Inches

RPM 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
of
Shaft Surface Speed in Feet per Minute
Ą800 Ą429 Ą837 1256 1675 2094 2513 2932 3351
Ą900 Ą471 Ą942 1413 1885 2356 2827 3298 3770
1000 Ą524 1047 1570 2094 2618 3141 3665 4189
1100 Ą576 1152 1727 2304 2880 3445 4031 4608
1200 Ą629 1256 1884 2513 3142 3769 4398 5027
1300 Ą681 1361 2042 2723 3404 4084 4764 5446
1400 Ą734 1466 2199 2932 3666 4398 5131 5865
1500 Ą786 1571 2356 3142 3927 4712 5497 6284
1600 Ą838 1675 2513 3351 4189 5026 5864 6703
1700 Ą891 1780 2670 3560 4451 5340 6230 7121
1800 Ą943 1885 2827 3770 4713 5654 6597 7540
1900 Ą996 1989 2984 3979 4975 5969 6963 7959
2000 1048 2094 3141 4189 5236 6283 7330 8378
2100 1100 2199 3298 4398 5498 6597 7696 8797
2200 1153 2304 3455 4608 5760 6911 8063 9215
2300 1205 2408 3612 4817 6022 7225 8429 9634
2400 1258 2513 3770 5027 6284 7540 8796 10053
2500 1310 2618 3927 5236 6545 7854 9162 10471
2600 1362 2722 4084 5445 6807 8168 9529 10890
2700 1415 2827 4241 5655 7069 8482 9895 11309
2800 1467 2932 4398 5864 7331 8796 10262 11728
2900 1520 3037 4555 6074 7592 9110 10629 12147
3000 1572 3141 4712 6283 7854 9425 10996 12566
3600 1886 3769 5654 7539 9425 11310 13192 15079
6-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. R e j e c t b e a r i n g s w i t h d e f e c t s i n t h e
functional surfaces of the rings that can not be
removed by the buffing process.
d. Minor staining of nonfunctional surfaces is

generally accepted for bearings scheduled for
immediate installation.
6-32. Thrust bearings are of four general types.
(1) full thrust, split roller blade bearings:
(2) preload ball bearings
(3) stack ball bearings
(4) single row ball bearings. The single row

(nonseparable) ball bearings are treated the same
as other nonseparable bearings described in
paragraph 6-31.
a. Full Thrust, Split Roller Blade Bearings. Buff

the split roller bearings after preliminary cleaning
and prior to disassembly to remove stains or
discolorations that are on the roller surfaces. Figure
6-1 illustrates one method of rapid cleaning rollers
in the assembled condition using a special disk-type
paper faced rotor.
(1) Use special knockout blocks to avoid

006001
bending the retainer during roller removal (figures
Figure 6-1. Polishing of Thrust Bearing Rollers
6-2 and 6-3).
(2) Roller segregation is not necessary.
(3) Clean roller ends that are rusty. Refer

to paragraph 5-29 for vibro-tumbling cleaning instruc-
tions.
(4) Retainers that are severely discolored

or corroded may be vibro-tumbled per paragraph
6-30. Retainers shall be checked for dishing and
shall be reshaped if they are out of parallel.
(5) Dimensionally screen replacement rol-

lers. The rollers and retainers may be interchanged
or replaced between bearings. Ensure that roller
sets are properly matched when required.
(6) Reassemble the processed components

using the same type of fixture used in the disas-
sembly process.
b. Preload Ball Bearings. Preload bearings are

006002
nonseparable and normally cannot be reworked.
Most preload bearings will be rejected because of Figure 6-2. Special Fixture for Removing
true brinelling. Test bearing as follows: Thrust Bearing Rollers
6-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
before disassembly, while they are still held in

position by wire retainer.
(5) Reject rings and balls with deep pits.
6-33. GROUP B BEARINGS. Blend nicks and dents

in the corner radii of the bearing rings by stoning
off the high spots. Rusty bore surfaces can be buffed
or abrasively polished as long as applicable dimen-
sional requirements are met.
6-34. Rework of Cadmium Plated Surfaces. Air-

frame and aircraft control bearings are usually
double-shielded or sealed and are externally
protected by cadmium plating. Loss of the sacrificial
plating reduces the corrosion protection that was
originally provided and may shorten the operating
life of the bearing (figure 6-4).
a. Staining of the cadmium plated surfaces

is not cause for rejection (figure 6-5).
006003
Figure 6-3. Removal of Thrust Rollers NOTE
Using Special Fixture
Do not wire brush or buff cadmium plating
merely to improve the physical
(1) Subject the bearings to a 100-pound appearance of the bearing.
thrust load as an acceptance/rejection test.
b. Remove active rust that has penetrated the
(2) Reject bearing with any indication of cadmium plate. Remove minor or superficial rust
catchiness or ratcheting. on non-functional surfaces by the careful use of a
wire brush.
c. Propeller Stack Bearings. Propeller stack
bearings consist of three, four, five, or six matched 6-35. Reworking Unplated External Surfaces. Un-
bearings. Each bearing set has sequential V-shaped plated outside diameters of Group B bearings can
marks on the outer surfaces to indicate their position. be cleaned by wire brushing or buffing. Bore surfaces
Bearings may be constructed with individual rings can be buffed and/or polished to remove corrosion
or may have a common inner ring. Rework the products.
bearings as a unit. Bearings with a multiple inner
ring are numbered in sequence on both rings and a. Clean the bearing bores using a bench
must be reassembled in the same order. mounted motor equipped with .30 and .50-caliber
gun cleaning brushes (figure 6-6). Special holding
(1) Rejection of one bearing ring in a stack pliers are needed to hold the inner ring stationary
is cause for rejection of the entire stack. See during the cleaning operation (figure 6-7).
paragraph 6-57 for special rematching procedures.
When the preload bearing is part of the stack, it b. Use fine grinding compounds such as one
may be treated as a separate bearing and replaced micron alumina on the cleaning brushes. Mix the
as necessary. powdered alumina and bearing lubricant to a pasty
consistency for easy removal during cleaning. Do
not use alumina-water mixtures.
(2) Retainers may be interchanged or
replaced as necessary. c. Careful use of chuck-mounted, 400-grit
aluminum oxide disks is permissible in cleaning
(3) R e p l a c e f l a t o r d a m a g e d b a l l s i n airframe bearing bores.
accordance with component technical manual.
d. Dimensionally inspect the bearing whenever
(4) Remove surface stains and discoloration polishing is used to clean bore and/or outer diameter
on individual balls by carefully buffing the balls surfaces.
6-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
e. Buff the outside bearing diameters and

unplated bearing faces. Buffing will effectively
remove staining and superficial pitting. Reject
bearings for deep corrosion pitting which cannot be
completely cleaned of active rust.
f. Accept bearings when all evidence of

corrosion products is removed from the external
unplated surfaces and dimensional limits have not
been exceeded.
6-36. Rework of Internal Bearing Surfaces. The

amount of rework that can be performed will depend
on whether the bearing is of separable or nonse-
parable construction.
006004
Figure 6-4. Unacceptable Removal of Cadmium
Plating on External Surfaces a. Remove slight rusting on nonfunctional
surfaces of ferrous retainers by using small brushes
and other special tools. However, because of the
low replacement value of this type of bearing, the
cost of rework is generally prohibitive.
b. Staining of nonferrous retainers can usually

be disregarded, and minor corrosion can be either
removed or chemically inhibited.
6-37. Reworking Tapered Roller Bearings. Be-

cause of their design, tapered roller bearings can
be more extensively reworked, and more severe
corrosion products can be removed from nonfunc-
tional surfaces.
a. The cups (outer rings) of tapered roller

006005
bearings can be buffed with loose muslin disk wheels
Figure 6-5. Acceptable Staining of to remove surface stains and minor corrosion
Cadmium Plated Bearings products.
b. The retainers and rollers can be cleaned

by wire brushing. Final acceptance shall be in
accordance with inspection requirements contained
in Section VII.
6-38. R e w o r k i n g C o n t r o l P u l l e y s . B e a r i n g s
installed in aircraft control pulleys are generally
cadmium plated on the external surfaces. They are
equipped with corrosion resistant shields or seals.
Almost all used pulleys will show some rusting on
the bearing ring faces. Most pulleys can be effec-
tively cleaned and reused.
a. Buff the bearing rings faces when light

rusting is present. Use small felt buffs held in hand
operated electric and/or air motors. Accept the
pulleys if all rust can be removed.
006006 b. Reject pulleys with rust that cannot be
Figure 6-6. Cleaning Airframe Bearing removed by buffing and when there is deep pitting
Bore Surfaces in the exposed bearing ring face surfaces.
6-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
surfaces. Refer to paragraph 6-35 for instructions

on reworking bearings within the above limitations.
6-41. GROUP E BEARINGS. Many ball bearings

used in helicopter applications are nonseparable,
and rework shall be restricted to the removal of
stains, light rust, and blending of minor defects on
the exterior surfaces. Many of the roller and needle
bearings are separable and can be completely
disassembled.
6-42. Identify bearings that must be returned for

reinstallation on a specific helicopter with the proper
sequence number.
6-43. Matched Bearings. Keep all matched bearing

assemblies together. Duplex and/or stack bearings
shall not be interchanged without written authoriza-
006007 tion from the cognizant depot bearing engineer.
Figure 6-7. Special Holding Tools for Refer to paragraph 6-65 for special rematching
Cleaning Bearing Bores procedures.
6-44. Nonseparable Bearings. Refer to paragraph

c. Abrasively clean pulley bearing bores using 6-31 for instructions on the rework of nonseparable
levigated alumina on gun cleaning brushes or bearings.
abrasive disks mounted in jacobs chucks.
6-45. Needle Bearings. Disassembly of certain
d. Reject nonmetallic pulleys with cable
types of needle bearings can be performed by the
grooves showing cable markings in excess of 0.20
following procedures:
deep. Grooves can be reworked during periods of
short supply. The outside diameter of the pulley must
be maintained, but grooves may be safely machined a. Knock out the key needle through the
3/32 inch on the diameter (3/64 inch on the radius). loading groove. The end configuration of one needle
is modified for this purpose.
e. Reject nonmetallic pulleys that are frayed,
have broken edges, surface cracking or checking. b. The rest of the needles can be easily
removed.
f. Smoothness or general visual condition of
the phenolic finish on nonmetallic pulleys is relatively c. Keep the needles together in fine mesh
unimportant and shall not be cause for rejection as wire baskets during the cleaning process.
long as dimensional requirements are met.
d. Check individual needles for flat spots
g. Damage to metallic pulleys will generally and/or wear. Dimensionally inspect all needles be-
render the part unacceptable for use. Cracks shall fore reuse. All needles shall be within a 0.0001 inch
be cause for rejection. No rework is permitted. diameter.
6-39. GROUP C BEARINGS. Rework instructions e. Check the needle channel in the shell for
for miniature and instrument bearings are contained gouging caused by canting of the needles during
in Section XIV. operation.
6-40. GROUP D BEARINGS. Bearings used in f. Reject the bearing if binding is noted.
motors, generators and invertors are of nonsepar-
able design and very little rework can be performed. g. Reassemble needle bearings in the reverse
Rework of rotating electrical bearings shall be of disassembly. Reassembled needles shall move
restricted to the removal of stains, light rust, or freely in the shell, and when specified, shall meet
stoning and blending of defects on the external the maximum specified clearance between needles.
6-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
6-46. Bearings that must be returned for installation dependent upon the replacement cost of the bearing,
on a specific helicopter shall be identified with the the availability of replacement parts, the urgency
proper sequence number during handling and re- of the program and design parameters. When
work. warranted, rework procedures can be developed for
practically any bearing in which the raceways have
6-47. Raceways of needle and roller bearings can not been damaged. Even nonseparable bearings can
be buffed to highlight any discrepancies such as be disassembled, and the individual components
flat spots and minor brinell marks. inspected and processed if the need for the bearings
is urgent. In times of national emergency, extensive
6-48. Replacement of needles or rings in needle rework of rolling bearings would be a necessity.
bearings is permissible if specified in the applicable Refer to Section VI of Air Force Technical Order
component technical manual. Components from the T. O . 4 4 B - 1 - 1 0 2 f o r d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n
same manufacturer must be used. TRI-Service approved rework procedures.
6-49. Separable Bearings. Group E separable ball 6-55. Authorized Bearing Rework Centers. Exten-
and roller bearings used in transmissions, gearboxes sive rework which includes refurbishment and re-
and rotor head assemblies are similar in size, grind, shall be under the technical control of the
precision and criticality to Group A powerplant designated Service Bearing Engineering Center (see
bearings. The same rework instructions can be paragraph 1-42). The designated Service bearing
applied. Refer to paragraphs 6-27 through 6-30 for Technical Repair Centers (TRC’s) that have been
applicable instructions. authorized to perform Level II refurbishment are
listed in paragraph 1-43.
6-50. REWORKING ROLLING ELEMENTS. Balls
and rollers can be effectively cleaned in vibro-tum- 6-56. GRINDING OUTER DIAMETERS FOR ADHE-
blers using the procedure in paragraph 5-29. SIVE BONDING. Adhesive bonding is sometimes
used in lieu of mechanical staking in limited airframe
6-51. REWORKING BEARING SEALS. Rework of applications. To obtain the clearance required by
seals is not normally economical. However if replace- the adhesive material for maximum film strength,
ment seals are not available, the following proce- the bearing outer diameter must be ground.
dures shall apply:
a. In general, where adhesive bonding is
a. Clean felt seals using any approved solvent used, a clearance of 0.001 to 0.003 inch is required.
cleaning method except vapor degreasing. To obtain a uniform clearance for the adhesive film,
a total of 0.002 to 0.006 inch of metal must be
b. Use the clean seals as replacements on
removed from the bearing outer diameter surface.
bearings with the same part number and manufactur-
er as the bearings the seals were originally on.
b. The ground surface should be left relatively
6-52. REWORKING BEARING SHIELDS. Rework- rough to improve adhesion of the bonding material
ing of shields is not normally economical. However (125 micro inch AA).
if replacement shields are not available, the following
procedures shall apply: CAUTION
a. Remove rust from the shields by buffing Adhesive bearing retention shall not be
or by electrolytic derusting. used in areas of significant vibration such
as flight control systems or any other
b. Reshape distorted shields using the proper application where dislocation of the bear-
forming tools. ing could cause catastrophic failure.
c. Use the reworked shields as replacements 6-57. REMATCHING DUPLEX AND STACK BEAR-
on bearings with the same part number and INGS. In general, the rejection of one bearing out
manufacturer as the bearings the shields were of a duplex pair or multiple stack will require the
originally on. rejection of the entire set or stack. Restacking or
matching is feasible if certain precautions are strictly
6-53. SPECIAL REWORK PROCEDURES. enforced. Familiarization with the theory of duplexing
and preloading is required prior to attempting to
6-54. GENERAL. The extent that rework can be restack a bearing set. The following precautions shall
economically performed on a rolling bearing is be observed:
6-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Use bearings of the same part number and

manufacturer.
b. Measure the bore and outer diameter of

all bearings to be stacked in each set. Keep all
diameters within 0.0003 inch of each other as
specified in applicable drawings.
c. Check and maintain ring widths to drawing

requirements.
d. Use a flushness gage to determine the

flushness, stick-out or stick-in of the rings. Do not
attempt to match bearings without the proper equip-
ment. Refer to Section VIII for details concerning
flushness and offset measurements.
e. Check individual bearings within a stack

for proper sharing of the load. Individual bearings
shall not rotate freely or indicate overloading.
f. Progressively add the individual bearings

to the stack while a constant thrust load is applied 006008
through the inner and outer rings. Figure 6-8. Identification of Processed
(Used) Bearing
g. The rotational torque (when specified) shall
increase in equal increments as successive bearings NOTE
are added until the required torque value is reached.
Stone the areas on the ring when vibra-
6-58. M A R K I N G A N D C O D I N G O F U S E D tools are used to mark or code the
BEARINGS. bearings.
6-59. PROCESS CODE. Place an identification 6-60. Smaller bearings, except miniature bearings,
mark on all used bearings to differentiate between shall be marked with a single point following the
new and processed used bearings. The code mark manufacturer’s part number.
indicates the bearing has been previously used, has
been inspected and certified by an authorized 6-61. Bearings that have operated for a service tour,
government facility. The bearing is acceptable for and were previously processed and code marked
reinstallation in an aeronautical component, installa- by a facility, and are acceptable for additional use,
tion and/or airframe. The code designation indicating shall be marked as follows:
the processing activity will be placed on the ring
face after the manufacturer’s part number (figure a. Mark a number one after the initial proces-
6-8). A vibratool or chemical etch are the approved sing facility code.
methods for marking bearings. The following code
designations shall be used by depot level activities b. Each additional service tour shall be indi-
under the Naval Air Systems Command/Army Avi- cated by another numeral. Example: S1 (2 service
ation Systems Command/Air Force Logistics Com- tours).
mand.
c. Each additional service tour shall be indi-
a. NAVAVNDEPOT Jacksonville J cated by another numeral. Example: S111 (4 service
tours).
b. NAVAVNDEPOT Cherry Point E
6-62. LEVEL II REWORK CODE. All bearings that
c. NAVAVNDEPOT North Island S have been reworked to Level II Refurbishment
requirements by one of the authorized Bearing
d. CCAD Corpus Christi C Technical Repair Centers will be identified by a three
letter facility identification code followed by a new
e. AFALC Tinker AFB O serial number.
6-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
6-63. The three letter facility identification code will

be as follows:
a. Corpus Christi Army Depot - CCR
b. Naval Aviation Depot North Island - SDR
c. Tinker Air Force Base - OCR
6-64. OPERATING TIME CODE. Certain bearings

are marked with the total operating time that has
elapsed since the bearing was new. Each time the
bearing is removed from the assembly, after a period
of service, the time that has accumulated since the
last inspection is added to the previously recorded
time. The accumulated operating time data is used
to monitor life limited bearings, establish realistic
life limits and realistic time between overhauls (TBO),
and to provide useful data to isolate specific applica-
tions that need design changes to improved service
life.
006009
6-65. Time Code. When required, the operating Figure 6-9. Marking Operating Time on Bearings
time on the bearing shall be recorded on the ring
face in actual hours to the nearest unit hour (figure
6-9). Example: T560 (Time is 560 hours) 6-68. Unknown Time History. Bearings with fixed
life limits shall be rejected when an accurate time
history is not available. RFI used bearings without
6-66. Adding Time. Line out the previous operating fixed life limits that are received without operating
time that was marked on the bearing. The total time history are too costly to be arbitrarily thrown
operating hours since new shall then be marked away. The following coding procedure shall be used
on the bearing ring face (figure 6-9). to identify these bearings and to establish a time
base for future operating life history.
6-67. Type of Bearings to be Marked. All gas
turbine main and differential shaft bearings and life a. Place an asterisk mark in front of a capital
limited helicopter dynamic component bearings T to denote unknown past history.
should be time coded. Other bearings will be time
coded as directed by Naval Air Systems Command/ b. Add operating time that accumulates from
Army Aviation Systems Command/Air Force Logis- this base time in the same manner as described
tics Command Directive or the local cognizant depot in paragraph 6-61. Example: *T598 (Known time
bearing engineer. is 598 hours).
6-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION VII
VISUAL INSPECTION OF BEARINGS
7-1. GENERAL. for final inspection of bearings requiring

this level of environmental control.
7-2. This section contains detailed instructions for
visually examining new and used bearings. A good 7-5. Services may authorize the use of bearing
visual examination can usually detect surface flaws processing facilities that operate at higher levels of
and service related defects that could cause opera- permissible contamination for inspecting less critical
tional problems and/or bearing failure. It is important bearings. However, these facilities shall meet the
that this fact be exploited to the greatest extent following minimum requirements:
possible in a bearing processing facility. Used
bearings, when properly processed, are as reliable a. The visual inspection room shall be closed
as new bearings for most applications. and separated from all dirt-producing functions such
as grinding, buffing, polishing, honing and cleaning.
7-3. FACILITIES.
b. Maintain controls on temperature and hu-
midity to eliminate large variations in room condi-
7-4. The final visual inspection of bearings shall tions. Relative humidity shall be held to 40 + 5 per-
be performed in a clean room environment equal cent. Temperature should be held to 72_F + 5_F.
to or better than that required for rework, assembly,
and testing of the unit or assembly in which they CAUTION
are installed. The facility shall conform to the
requirements contained in Section XV. Unless other-
wise specified, bearings shall be inspected in at least When relative humidity exceeds 50 per-
a Class 100,000 clean room in accordance with cent, rust will initiate on the unprotected
Federal Standard FED-STD-209 (see table 15-2). bearing surfaces and on highly polished
Some bearings will require even lower levels of gaging equipment surfaces. When relative
contamination control. The following bearings shall humidity falls below 35 percent, there is
be inspected in a Federal Standard FED-STD-209, a real potential for static electrical charge
Class 100 clean room environment. buildup. Spark discharges could cause
fires around flammable solvents.
a. ABEC-7P or higher miniature and instru- c. Provide air filtration through normal air
ment precision bearings (refer to paragraph 14-14). conditioning.
b. Bearings that have low starting/running d. Provide lighting of 100 to 150 lumens per
torque requirements as defined in paragraph 14-151. square foot.
c. Bearings that have smooth running or noise e. Locate the room away from major sources
quiet requirements that cannot be met when proof vibration.
cessed in a lesser controlled environment.
f. Maintain the area at a maximum practical
level of cleanliness.
d. All bearings that are used on units or
assemblies that require this level of cleanliness for
processing. 7-6. PERSONNEL.
7-7. GENERAL. Each depot shall maintain a group

NOTE
of well trained personnel with at least 5 years of
practical bearing processing experience. A working
Depots and intermediate level mainte- knowledge of bearing applications is very beneficial.
nance activities that do not have clean It is essential that training programs be established
room facilities for bearings inspection can at each activity to ensure the continued availability
use Class 100 laminar flow work stations of a well trained bearing work force.
7-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
7-8. CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. Person-

nel assigned the responsibility for accepting and
rejecting critical bearings shall have successfully
completed a special course on bearing theory and
defect analysis, and shall have a valid license/stamp.
Refer to Section XVI for details concerning personnel
requirements.
7-9. GLOVES. Approved hand gloves or handling

tools shall be used during visual inspection. This
requirement also applies to intermediate visual in-
spection areas outside the clean room. Gloves shall
conform to requirements contained in Section XV.
NOTE
007001
Figure 7-1. Fingerprint on Bearing Surface
Figure 7-1 is an example of what happens from Handling without Gloves
when unprotected bearings are physically
handled without gloves.
7-15. USE OF MAGNIFICATION. Visual inspection
is performed using the unaided eye and low power
7-10. TEMPORARY PROTECTION OF BEARINGS. magnification. Low power magnifying equipment
(2X-6X MAG) is illustrated in figures 7-3 and 7-4.
A microscope similar to that shown in figure 7-5
7-11. The quantity of bearings inducted into the is to be used when higher magnifications are
clean room shall be limited to the number of bearings required for detailed inspection or for defect analysis.
that can be inspected and gaged in one work shift. A dual eye piece microscope is useful when training
However, a limited number of bearings can be stored personnel in visual inspection (figure 7-5).
in the room if adequate temperature controlled ovens
or dry storage cabinets are available (figure 7-2).
The temperature of the ovens shall be maintained NOTE
at 110_ + 5_F.
The unnecessary use of high magnifica-
tions will result in the rejection of many
7-12. Bearings that have been visually inspected good bearings.
outside the clean room shall not be left unprotected
for more than two hours. Bearings shall be coated 7-16. USE OF RADIUS SCRIBE (Figure 7-6).
with preservative oil, MIL–PRF–32033, or a mixture Radius scribers are used to help the bearing
of solvent, Federal Specification MIL–PRF–680 Type inspector determine the acceptability of bearings with
II and 3 percent preservative oil, MIL–PRF–32033. surface-type defects. When correctly used, a scriber
of known radius can be used to accept or reject
NOTE bearings with various size surface defects or flaws
with a fair degree of consistency.
Bearings preserved with a mixture of 7-17. The scriber should be lightly held in the hand.
solvent and oil (MIL–PRF–680 Type II and Do not grip the scribe in the hand. Guide the scribe
oil, MIL–PRF–32033) will require cleaning with the finger and thumb so that it is perpendicular
and drying before inspection. (straight up and down) against the area or defect
being inspected. The weight of the scribe is the
7-13. VISUAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. only force exerted on the defect while the bearing
is being checked. Most irregularities can be felt if
heavy pressure is applied to the scribe. The size
7-14. GENERAL. The following detailed instructions of defect that can be readily felt is approximately
for visual inspection are applicable to Group A, B, one-half the scribe radius. Example: A 0.040-inch
D and E bearings. Inspection requirements for Group radius scribe will readily detect a 0.020 inch surface
C bearings are contained in Section XIV. indication.
7-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
shall be -0.001 inch, + 0.005 inch from the nominal

radius. Periodically inspect the scriber radius for
wear and surface flaws. The radius scribers can
be purchased through several commercial
companies.
7-19. DEFINITIONS OF BEARING SURFACE

TERMS. Terminology used to describe bearing
surfaces are defined for the purpose of establishing
visual standards for bearing acceptance and non-ac-
ceptance. The following definitions apply:
a. Functional (or active) Surfaces. All ball,

roller (except corner radii) and raceway (inner and
outer) contacting surfaces (figure 7-7).
b. Nonfunctional (or inactive) Surfaces. Outer

and inner ring diameter, face, land and flange
surfaces; and roller corners.
007002 c. Retainer Surfaces. All surfaces including

Figure 7-2. Oven Storage for Temporary rivets.
Protection of Bearings
7-20. APPEARANCE OF BALL OR ROLLER PATH.
A normal bearing has a dull, matte or satin finish
on ball or roller paths. Bearings that are properly
mounted and adequately lubricated will show a dull
matte-like finish in the highly polished raceway. The
microscopically fine grinding and honing marks
produced during original manufacture have been
smoothed out by the rolling elements. Do not reject
bearings with this type of visual appearance.
7-21. LOCATION OF BALL OR ROLLER PATH. The

ball paths of ball bearings, operating under normal
loading conditions, are illustrated in figure 7-8.
Abnormal ball paths are discussed in paragraph C-5
of Appendix C.
7-22. Cylindrical Roller Bearings. Normal roller

paths of roller bearings, operating under normal
loading conditions, will be uniform in the circumferen-
tial (around the raceway) and the axial (across the
raceway) directions. Roller path will be approximately
the same distance from the edge of the raceway
all around the circumference of the ring.
007003
Figure 7-3. Low Power Magnifying 7-23. Elliptical Roller Bearings. Normal roller
Inspection Equipment paths on elliptical, or tri-lobed (out-of-round outer
ring) roller bearings, will have roller paths that are
circumferentially uniform except for two or three
7-18. Radius scribers are made in 0.010-inch incre- well-defined, wider-than-normal, load path segments.
ments from 0.010-inch radius to 0.080-inch radius These wider segments are located 180_ or 120_
(sometimes even larger). High material hardness apart at the minor raceway diameter of the outer
is needed to reduce wear that occurs during daily ring. The inner ring load path should be circumferen-
use. Tolerance of the highly polished nose radius tially uniform.
7-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007004
Figure 7-4. Large Lens, Low Power
Inspection Equipment
007006
Figure 7-6. Radius Scriber for
Evaluating Surface Defects
d. Ball path contacts the low shoulder of the

raceway of an angular-contact bearing (Appendix
C, figure C-62).
007005 e. A well-defined ball path is present on the

Figure 7-5. Dual Microscope for Personnel Training edges of the split inner ring halves of a separable
ball bearing.
7-24. Misaligned Ball/Roller Paths. Reject bear- f. A well-defined ball path is located near the
ings when any of the following conditions are noted edge of the shoulder of a deep-groove ball bearing.
concerning the ball/roller paths (figure 7-8):
g. A well-defined roller path is concentrated
a. Misalignment Indications. on one edge of raceway of a standard cylindrical
roller bearing.
b. Roller Bearing. Load indications are on only 7-25. DESCRIPTIONS AND DEFINITIONS OF
one end of the roller and one side of raceway (figures SURFACE DEFECTS. Surface defects and condi-
C-8 and C-9). tions that can be present when inspecting ball and
roller bearings are defined and described in the
c. Ball or roll paths are irregularly shaped or following paragraphs to help the bearing evaluator
have varying widths (figures C-3, C-4 and C-5). correctly assess the bearing acceptability.
7-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
surface finish lines will have been abraded away

and the worn surfaces appear to be highly polished.
(2) True Brinelling (Figure 7-13): There are

shallow, smooth indentations on the balls, rollers,
or raceways. The indentations still have the original
surface finish lines on the bottom of the depressions.
The indentations in the rings have the same contour
as the rolling element.
d. Burnishing: Burnishing is a mechanical

smoothing of a surface when the original surface
roughness has been rolled over during running. The
contact area is often discolored, but there is virtually
no measurable wear. Retainer lands will sometimes
burnish the inner or outer ring land guiding surfaces
during periods of marginal lubrication.
e. Chatter: The bearing raceway or mounting

surface has a wavy surface profile. The condition
is caused by vibration of the grinding wheel, tool,
or work piece during the metal working operations
at time of manufacture.
f. Crack: A separation, fissure, or rupture that

is characterized by sharp edges, and/or sharp
changes in direction.
g. Flaking: Pieces of the metal plating break

away from the plated surface of the ring or retainer.
007007
Similar to blistering (see paragraph 7-25b).
Figure 7-7. Location of Functional
Surfaces on Rolling Bearings
h. Finishing Marks (Figure 7-14): Residual
surface abrasions or discontinuities resulting from
final finishing operations during bearing manufacture
a. Banding (Figure 7-10): There are circumfer- (grinding, honing and lapping).
ential bands on the ball and raceway surfaces. These
band indications are from continuous thrust loading
i. Fluting (Figure 7-15): Transverse grooves
during rotation. The original surface finish/texture
are formed around the circumference of the ring
is not disturbed. Banding is mostly an oxide film
raceway. Close examination of the grooves reveals
on the surface, usually a result of high temperature
minute electrical arc pits that have eroded away
operation or continuous axial preloads.
some of the bearing surface material. Fluting is a
specialized form of electrical arc pitting.
b. Blistering (Figure 7-11): There are raised
areas of metal plate on the ring or retainer. This j. Fracture: A crack that has broken through
indicates a lack of bond between the plating and the entire thickness or cross section of the bearing
the base metal, or an overheating above the melting ring.
temperature of the plating material.
k. Fretting, Fretting Corrosion (Figure 7-16):
c. Brinelling: Nonactive surfaces have a characteristic rusty ap-
pearance ranging in color from black (well bonded)
(1) False Brinelling (Figure 7-12): There are to a fairly bright brick-red color (often loosely bonded
surface marks or blemishes on the balls, rollers and or even free iron particles). There has been a rapid
raceways. Marks will appear as lines at each roller oxidation of the metal surfaces caused by cyclic
position on roller bearings, and as points (or ellipses) (back-and-forth) movement of closely fitted parts in
at each ball position on ball bearings. The original the presence of oxygen.
7-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007008
Figure 7-8. Normal Ball Paths Under Different Load Combinations
l. Frosting (Figure 7-17): Irregularly shaped is transferred as a result of a welding and tearing
areas on the active surfaces where the surface finish away process that occurs during metal-to-metal
has been modified. The areas have a gray or dull sliding contact.
appearance compared to the normal shiny appear-
ance of the raceway or rolling element surface. n. Healing (Figure 7-19): Healing is the me-
Frosting sometimes appears as numerous gray chanical smoothing or blending of the raised edges
flecks on the balls or rollers and sometimes on the of a scratch, indentation or other raised surface
ring raceways. Microscopic examination of frosted condition.
areas will reveal surfaces that are distressed from
many minute tears. This is the first stage of skidding
damage. o. Heat Discoloration: Bearing surfaces are
discolored from a light straw to gray. Color will
m. Galling (Figure 7-18): Metal buildup on an depend on;
active or inactive bearing surface by material being
transferred from one surface to another. The material (1) the temperature of the environment,
7-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(2) the length of time at a given tempera-

ture, and
(3) the thickness of the oxide film that is
formed on the surface (table 7-1). The heat discolor-
ation is due to the effects of high operating tempera-
tures in the presence of oxygen.
NOTE
Chemical discoloration of the bearing sur-
faces by synthetic engine oils should not
be confused with heat discoloration. Addi-
tives in Specifications MIL–PRF-23699 and
MIL-PRF-7808 oils react with the steel
007009
Figure 7-9. Misaligned Ball Path surfaces to form a brownish color stain.
This stain is not detrimental to the opera-
tion of the bearing and should not be
removed.
p. Inclusions (Figure 7-20): Inclusions are any
foreign material (metallic or nonmetallic) that is
enclosed in the surface or subsurface of bearing
steel. An inclusion will occasionally appear as a dark
spot or line after the bearing has been operated.
q. Indentation (Figure 7-21): Shallow indenta-
tions or depressions in the functional surfaces of the
rolling elements and raceways where metal has been
displaced but not removed. The edges of the indent
are usually rounded, having the shape or form of
the foreign particle/object causing the indentation. The
originally manufactured surface finish and lay is still
on the bottom of the depressions.
Table 7-1. Coloration of AISI 52100 Bearing Steel
vs Temperature Environment1
Color Temperature Degrees F

Bright Steel Color Room Temperature
007010
Figure 7-10. Banding on a Ball from Light straw 350
a Constant Thrust Load
Medium straw 375
Dark straw 400
Light violet 425
Dark violet 450
Dark blue 500
Medium blue 550
Light blue 600
Blue gray 650
Gray 700
1 The color is dependent on time. Longer exposure
to a given temperature will shift the colors slightly.
007011 The above bearings were heat soaked at the
Figure 7-11. Blistering of Plating on Retainer stated temperature for 1 hour.
7-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007015
007012 Figure 7-15. Fluting - a Specialized

Figure 7-12. False Brinelling of Tapered Form of Electrical Arcing
Roller Bearings
007013 007016
Figure 7-13. True Brinelling of Ball Bearing Figure 7-16. Severe Fretting on Outer
Diameter of a Ball Bearing
007014
Figure 7-14. Finishing Marks on a Race 007017
Groove Surface and Ball Figure 7-17. Frosting on Roller Bearing Raceway
7-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007018
Figure 7-18. Close-up of Galling on 007021
Bearing Raceway Figure 7-21. Indentation in a Roller
Bearing Raceway
r. Lap (Figure 7-22): A lap is a surface defect

that appears as a seam, caused by a folding over
of hot metal, fins, or sharp corners. The defect was
then rolled or upset during subsequent manufactur-
ing processes into the bearing surface.
s. Peeling: The term peeling is used to

describe two different conditions on rolling bearings:
(1) Metal Plating: Strips of plating material

are lifting away from the base metal.
(2) Spalling (Surface): Shallow (less than

0.001 inch deep) micro spalling in the ball/roller and
007019 raceway surfaces. Peeling spalling is caused by thin
Figure 7-19. Healing or Flattening of lubricant films. Partial metal-to-metal contact between
Surface Finish Marks the bearing surfaces resulting in micro spalling.
t. Pitting:
(1) Corrosion: Small, irregularly shaped ca-

vities in the bearing surfaces from which material
has been removed by chemical reaction. Corrosion
pitting can be caused by oxidation (oxygen combin-
ing with iron to form rust), acid attack (etching,
perspiration, acidic oils), electrolytic attack (non-dis-
tilled water). The bottom surfaces of the cavities
are characteristically dark and irregularly shaped.
(2) Electrical Arcing (Figure 7-23): Pitting of

the bearing surfaces as a result of the passage of
high electrical currents through the bearing. This
results in the microwelding (during the short period
of contact) and tearing away of the surface metal
007020
(during rotation) from raceways to the rolling elements.
Figure 7-20. Nonmetallic Inclusions
When it is in the form of transverse patterns across
in Bearing Steel
the ring raceway it is called fluting (figure 7-15).
7-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
w. Scuffs: Groups of small/fine, superficial

scratches, usually parallel with each other that are
abraded into the bearing surface. Scuffing is a mild
form of scratching.
x. Seams (Figure 7-25): An unwelded fold or

lap on the bearing surface that looks like a crack.
It is the result of defective casting processes or flaws
in raw material that are not removed during metal-
working processes (same as lap).
y. Seizure (Figure 7-26): The sudden stop-

page of rotation of the rolling elements or retainer
007022 and bearing assembly. Causes massive sliding
Figure 7-22. Lap Defect in Roller damage, the development of extremely high surface
Bearing Surface temperatures and complete bearing failure.
z. Skidding Damage (Figure 7-27): An irregu-

lar frosted appearance on raceway and rolling
element surfaces. It is seen at low magnifications
(under 6X). High magnifications will reveal microspal-
ling and tearing away of the surface material.
aa. Smearing (Figure 7-28): Transferred metal

from one bearing surface to another surface as a
result of sliding contact with marginal lubrication.
Spiral smearing indications on roller ends is seen
in figure 7-29.
ab. Spalling, Fatigue (Figures 7-30 through

7-33): Initial stages are in form of irregularly shaped
pits. The edges of the pits have indications of
cracking and further crack progression. Advanced
spalling will show a large area of metal removed
over a circumferential segment of the raceway and/or
rolling elements. Fatigue spalling is the breakdown
of a functional/active bearing surface due to cyclic
loading.
ac. Staining: Discolorations or tarnishes on

bearing surfaces due to the reaction of certain types
of oil with the bearing steel. Stains have no apparent
thickness and are not associated with corrosion
007023
pitting.
Figure 7-23. Electric Arc Damage
ad. Wear (Figure 7-34): Surface metal is re-
moved by metal-to-metal sliding contact and/or
u. Scratches (Figure 7-24): Narrow, shallow abrasive wear due to contamination.
marks on the raceways and rolling element surfaces
that are caused by the abrasive action of a sharp 7-26. INSPECTION OF ACTIVE (FUNCTIONAL)
object or hard particle moving across the surface. SURFACES. Visually inspect all used bearings, and
new bearings (as required by the cognizant depot
v. Scoring: Deep, multiple scores/scratches bearing engineer) for surface conditions and defects.
on the raceways and rolling element surfaces that Refer to table 7-2 for inspection limits for specific
are formed by contact with hardened sharp edges surfaces of ball and roller bearings and the limits
or hard/abrasive foreign particles. Scoring is a more of acceptance and rejection. Refer to figure 7-7 for
severe form of scratching. location of functional surfaces.
7-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 7-2. Visual Inspection Criteria
Visual Defects for Groups A-B-D-E

Functional Surfaces
Condition or Non Functional
Damage Ball Roller Races Surfaces
Banding (1) A-B-E (1) B (1)A-B-E (3)A-B-D-E
(Circumferential) (2) D (3) A-D-E (2)D
Blistering (3) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E (2) A (2) A-D-E
(Plating) (3) B-D-E (4) B
Burnishing (3) B (3) B-D (3) B (3) B
(5) A-D-E (5) A-E (5) A-D-E (5) A-D-E
Chatter (Manufacturer’s (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E
Defect)
Crack (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E
Finishing Marks (6) A-B-D-E (6) A-B-D-E (6) A-B-D-E (6) A-B-D-E
Fluting/Electrical (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E
(Arcing) (3) D
Fracture (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Fretting Corrosion (3) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E (7) A-B-D-E
Frosting (3) B (3) B-D (3) B (3) A-B-D-E
(8) A-D-E (8) A-E (8) A-D-E
Galling (2) A-D-E (2) A-E (2) A-D-E (9) A
(10) B (3) D (10) B (10) B (11) B-D-E
Healing (12) A-B-D-E (12) A-B-E (12) A-B-D-E (12) A-B-D-E
(3) D
(1) Acceptable.
(2) Not Acceptable.
(3) Non Applicable.
(4) Minor Loss of Plating Acceptable with No Evidence of Rust.
(5) Discoloration Acceptable with No Visual Wear.
(6) Acceptable if Surface Finish Meets O.E.M. Specifications.
(7) Acceptable when Removed by Buffing or Polishing if Dimensions Meet Blueprint Limits after Buffing or
Polishing.
(8) Acceptable if There is No Evidence of Surface Deterioration under 10x Mag.
(9) Acceptable if Bearing Meets Dimensional Limits. Polishing is Permitted.
(10) Acceptable Unless Bearing is Rough when Rotated.
(11) Acceptable when High Spots are Stoned Smooth. Polishing is Permitted. Must Meet Blueprint
Specifications.
(12) Acceptable if No Evidence of Spalling or Cracking.
7-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 7-2. Visual Inspection Criteria (Continued)
Visual Defects for Groups A-B-D-E

Functional Surfaces
Heat Discoloration (13) A-E (2) D (13) A-E (3) D (13) A-E (2) D (13) A-E (2) D
Check Hardness (14) B (14) B (14) B (14) B
Inclusion Surface (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (3) A (16) B-E
(3) D (15) D
Lap (3) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Peeling (Spalling) (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Seizure (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Smearing (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-E (3) D (2) A-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(16) B (16) B
Skidding (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Spalling (2) A-B-D-E (2) A-B-E (2) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Staining (1) A-B-D-E (1) A-B-E (1) A-B-D-E (1) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Wear (18) A-B-D-E (18) A-B-E (18) A-B-D-E (18) A-B-D-E
(3) D
Roller Ends: (3) A-B-D-E (1) A-B-E (3) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(a) Superficial (3) D
Scratches
(b) Wear (3) A-B-D-E (19) A (20) B (3) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
(3) D (21) E
(c) Eccentric (3) A-B-D-E (2) A (3) A-B-D-E (3) A-B-D-E
Wear or (3) B-D-E
Burnishing
(1) Acceptable.
(3) Not Applicable.
(13) Meet Blueprint Requirements or RC 58 when Not Specified. Check Nonfunctional Surface Only.
(14) Unless Specifically Designed for High Temperature Applications, Indication of Heat Discoloration
is Unacceptable.
(15) Accept if Not in an Area that Would Cause Cracking.
(16) Light Marks 0.080 Inch Acceptable Radius Scriber.
(18) Must Meet Blueprint Requirements.
(19) 0.0005 Inch Maximum.
7-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Visual Tactile Defects for Groups A-B-D-E

Condition or Functional Surfaces Non Functional
Damage Surfaces
Ball Roller Races
Brinelling (22) General Rule for Groups A-B-D-E
(a) False Ball/Roller (22) A (23) D (22) A (3) D (22) A (2) D (3) A-D
Less Than 0.5 (23) B-E (23) B-3 (24) B (28) E
Inch Diameter (3) B-E
0.5 to 1 Inch (23) B-E (23) B-E (25) B (24) E (3) B-E
Diameter
Over 1 Inch (23) B-E (23) B-E (26) B (29) E (3) B-E
Diameter
Over 1.5 Inch (23) E (23) E (25) E (3) E
Diameter
(b) True Ball/Roller (24) A (22) B (24) A (22) B (24) A (22) B (3) A-B-D-E
Less Than 0.5 (2) D-E (3) D-E (2) D-E
Inch Diameter
0.5 to 1 Inch (26) A (22) B (26) A (22) B (26) A (22) B (3) A-B-D-E
Diameter (2) D-E (3) D-E (2) D-E
1 to 1.5 Inch (27) A (22) B (27) A (22) B (27) A (22) B (3) A-B-D-E
Over 1.5 Inch (27) A (22) B (27) A (22) B (27) A (22) B (3) A-B-D-E
(2) Not Acceptable.
(3) Not Applicable.
(22) If Brinelling is Sufficient to Cause Roughness when Bearing is Rotated, it is Not Acceptable.
(23) If Reddish Color, Not Acceptable.
(24) Acceptable if Not Felt with 0.040 Inch Scriber across Width of Brinell.
7-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

Functional Surfaces
Indentations Ball/Roller (31) B (45) D (3) B-D (31) B (45) D (37) B (46) D
Size Less Than 0.25
Inch Diameter
0.25 - 0.5 Inch Diameter (32) B (41) D (33) B (3) D (44) B (31) D (37) B (46) D
Less Than 0.5 Inch (31) A-E (31) A (32) E (44) A-E (30) A (39) E
Diameter
0.5 - 1.0 Inch Diameter (33) A-E (33) A (36) B (44) A-B-E (30) A (37) B
(34) B (34) E (39) E
Over 1.5 Inch Diameter (36) A-E (36) A-E (44) A-E (30)A (39) E
Corrosion Pits Ball/ (31) B (45) D (3) B-D (44) B-D (7) B (46) D
Roller Sizes 0.25
Diameter or Less
(3) Non Applicable.
(7) Acceptable when Removed by Buffing or Polishing if Dimensions Meet Blueprint Limits after Buffing
or Polishing.
(30) Bore and O.D. Surfaces:
150mm - 0.125 Inch Max Size
Over 150 mm Bore - 0.250 Inch Max Size.
Split Inner Ring Surfaces. Accept if No High Metal Extends to Raceway.
(31) Accept if Not Felt with 0.40 Inch Scriber.
(37) Bore and O.D. Surfaces:
Less Than 150 mm Bore - 0.200 Inch Max Size.
Over 150 mm Bore - 0.400 Inch Max Size.
(39) Bore and O.D. Surfaces under 150 mm Bore the Max Size Is 0.150 Inch
Over 150 mm Bore the Max Size is 0.300 Inch.
Split Inner Ring Surfaces, Acceptable if No High Metal Extends to Raceway.
(41) Accept if Not Felt with A 0.30 Inch Scriber.
(44) Same as Ball/Roller
(45) No Visible Pitting.
(46) Buffing/Polishing Permitted. Must Meet Dimensional Limits.
7-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

Functional Surfaces
0.25 - 0.5 Inch Diameter (33) B (41) D (33) B (3) D (44) B (31) D (7) B (46) D
0.5 Inch Diameter or (41) A-E (31) A-E (44) A-E (42) A (47) E
Less
0.5 - 1.0 Inch Diameter (31) A (34) B (32) A (34) B (44) A-B-E (42) A (7) B
(32) E (33) E (47) E
1.0 - 1.5 Inch Diameter (32) A (33) E (33) A (34) E (44) A-E (42) A (47) E
Over 1.5 Inch Diameter (33) A (34) E (34) A (35) E (44) A-E (42) A (47) E
Scratches/Scoring Ball/ (31) B (41) D (31) B (3) D (31) B-D (1) B-D
Roller Sizes 0.25 Inch
Diameter or Less
0.25 - 0.5 Inch Diameter (32) B (31) D (33) B (3) D (44) B (31) D (1) B-D
0.5 Inch Diameter or (31) A (34) B (31) A (34) B (44) A-B-E (1) A-B-E
Less (32) E (32) E
0.5 - 1.0 Inch Diameter (31) A (34) B (31) A (34) B (44) A-B-E (1) A-B-E
(32) E (32) E
Over 1.0 Inch Diameter (32) A (32) A (32) A (1) A
1.0 - 1.5 Inch Diameter (33) E (33) E (33) E (1) E
Over 1.5 Inch Diameter (34) E (34) E (44) E (1) E
(1) Acceptable.
(3) Non Applicable
(7) Acceptable when Removed by Buffing or Polishing if Dimensions Meet Blueprint Limits after Buffing
or Polishing.
(41) Accept if Not Felt with A 0.30 Inch Scriber.
(42) Any Amount if Diameter of Pits Do Not Exceed 0.030 Inch and Affect Less Than 1/4 Inch Diameter
Area. Three 0.050 Inch Diameter Pits in Any 1/4 Inch Diameter Area. Depth Not to Exceed 0.10 Inch.
(44) Same As Ball/Roller.
(46) Buffing/Polishing Permitted. Must Meet Dimensional Limits.
(47) Any Amount if Diameter of Pits Do Not Exceed 0.035 Inch and Affect Less Than 1/4 Inch Area,
Three 0.060 Inch Diameter Pits in Any 1/4 Inch Diameter Area. Depth Not to Exceed 0.015 Inch.
7-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007024 007027
Figure 7-24. Scratches across the Figure 7-27. Skidding Indication on a Roller Bearing
Raceway (SEM 800X)
007025
Figure 7-25. Seam/Lap in Roller (SEM 40X) 007028
Figure 7-28. Smearing of Metal on a Ball Bearing
007026
Figure 7-26. Seizure of Tapered Roller Bearing
7-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Table 7-2 Group B, Airframe and Wheel

Bearings.
c. Table 7-2 Group D, Rotating Electrical

Bearings
d. Table 7-2 Group E, Helicopter Bearings
e. Table 7-3 Retainers.
NOTE
Inspection requirements and limits for

Group C Instrument Bearings are provided
in Section XIV.
007029 7-27. INSPECTION OF BEARING RETAINERS.

Figure 7-29. Spiral Smearing on Ends of Rollers There are many different types of defects or condi-
tions that must be considered when inspecting
bearing retainers depending on their design, material
and operational environment. Retainer defects may
be in the form of cracks, breaks, distortion, scoring
and general wear. Refer to table 7-3 for specific
inspection criteria and acceptance and rejection
limits. Use low power magnification up to 3X for
visual inspection unless otherwise specified. Use
higher power for interpretation of type and severity
of the defect detected with low level magnification.
7-28. Cracks. Cracks in the ball or roller retainer

may be the most difficult defect to detect. Closely
inspect the following areas for cracks and other
retainer related conditions.
a. Ribbon Retainers - Check the small fillet

area formed by the spherical ball pocket and the
flat rivet area, and the center of the curved ball
pocket. Check the ring land guided surface for wear
by ball-centered, ribbon retainers.
b. Nonmetallic Retainers (Figure 7-36) - Check

for cracks or delaminations in the thin section
separating the balls, and the sides of the retainer.
c. Machined Metal Retainers - Check for

cracks in the corners of the roller pockets (figure
7-37), and the rolling element retaining tabs (figure
7-38).
d. Two-piece Machined Metal Retainers -

007030
Check for radial and circumferential mismatch (figure
Figure 7-30. Incipient Fatigue Spalling 7-39) and gaps between the two halves of the
on Ball Bearing Raceway retainer.
e. Riveted Retainers - Check for loose and/or

a. Table 7-2 Group A, Powerplant Bearings poorly headed rivets (figure 7-40).
7-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
f. Plated Retainers - Check for wear of plating graph 7-19 for definition of nonactive/nonfunctional
in the ball or roller pockets and the ring land-riding surfaces. The following general information applies
surfaces (figures 7-41). to inspecting nonactive bearing surfaces:
7-29. INSPECTION OF NONACTIVE SURFACES. a. Minor defects are commonly found on the
Refer to table 7-2 for acceptance and non-accep- bore, ring face or outer diameter ring surfaces. Minor
tance criteria and limits for inspecting the nonactive galling or scoring in the form of light scratches will
surfaces of ball and roller bearings. Refer to para- not require rework.
7-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 7-3. Visual Inspection Criteria for Bearing Retainers
Condition or Damage Limit

Bent (Out-of-round) Not Acceptable
Blistering of Plating Silver Plating - Not Acceptable
Burrs (raised metal) Not Acceptable - Stone off burrs then inspect to limits for indenta-
tions and nicks.
Chips Not Acceptable
Corrosion Not Acceptable
Cracks (in webs and in the roller retaining Not Acceptable. Certain crack prone bearings will require 30X
tangs). mag. for crack detection. Use high power magnification as
directed by engineering. (See figures 7-38 and 7-39)
Delamanination (Phenolic) Not acceptable (See figure 7-36)
Flaking of Plating (See Blistering)
Heat Discoloration Discoloration resulting from hot operation of rivets shall not
extend more than 0.050 inch from edge of rivet head.
Imbedded Particles Random particles are acceptable. Imbedded particles that have
caused wear, scoring to the ring land surface, are not acceptable.
Indentations (Nicks
Ball/roller Sizes
Nonfunctional surfaces
Less than .5 inch diameter Larger than 1/4 inch - Not Acceptable
Over .5 inch diameter Larger than 1/8 inch - Not Acceptable
Functional Surfaces
Less than .5 inch diameter Larger than 1/32 inch - Not Acceptable
Over .5 inch diameter Larger than 1/16 inch - Not Acceptable
Mismatch
(1) Circumferential Two-Piece retainers .004 inch max.
(2) Radial Two-Piece retainers .004 inch max.
Overheating Not Acceptable
Out-of-Round Any evidence of restriction of movement of the rolling elements is
not acceptable.
Peeling of Plating Silver Plating - Not Acceptable
Lead Plating - Acceptable
Porosity Not Acceptable
Retention (Ball/Roller Nonseparable retainer with wear or improper staking retention
that allows rolling element to drop free from the retainer is not
acceptable.
Rivets
(1) Missing, unheaded or loose Not Acceptable (See figure 7-40)
(2) Nonuniformity of heads on either Not Acceptable
side of retainer.
(3) Rivet hole not completely Not Acceptable
covered by the rivet head
(4) Flat spots on conical/spherical Acceptable
heads
7-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 7-3. Visual Inspection Criteria for Bearing Retainers (Continued)
Condition or Damage Limit

Rivets (Continued)
(5) Unseated rivet heads Not Acceptable
(6) Cracks or Splits Not Acceptable
(7) Head Discoloration Acceptable
(8) Loose metal and burrs on Not Acceptable
rivet heads
Spalling (Ball/Roller Pocket) Not Acceptable
Staining (tarnish) Acceptable
Wear (Base Metal Exposed) (see figure 7-41)
Main Engine Shaft Bearings
Ball/Roller Pocket
Up to 1/2” Diameter Up to 1/16” Band
Over 1/2” Diameter Up to 1/8” Band
Land Surfaces Not Acceptable
c. Deep galling or scratching of more than

50 percent of the mounting area is cause for bearing
rejection. Reject bearings when the surface defects
cause a loss of more than 20 percent of the area
of contact and for defects that affect face squareness
over more than 20 percent of the circumference.
Slight fretting corrosion on the mounting surfaces
may be removed by light buffing (figure 7-42).
d. Inspect for loss of plating on bearing

mounting surfaces. Specific inspection limits on
plating will be provided by the local cognizant
bearing engineer. Refer to Section VI for information
on replating bearing surfaces.
7-30. INSPECTION OF BEARING SEALS AND

SHIELDS.
a. Nonremovable seals and shields shall be

inspected for dents, distortion, or deterioration that
007031 will interfere with the rotating parts of the bearing,
Figure 7-31. Early Stage of Fatigue Spalling or that will allow the lubricant to leave and/or dirt
on Ball Bearing Raceway to enter the bearing (figure 7-43). Reject the bearing
if the seal or shield contacts the retainer.
b. Light to medium scoring or galling can be b. Removable seals and shields shall be
reworked by light buffing and or polishing. Inspect carefully inspected for correct part number and
for nicks, dents, scratches, or other defects that will physical condition. Reject shields that are bent,
interfere with the proper bearing mounting and warped or corroded. Reject seals that are distorted,
seating. cracked, hardened or deteriorated.
7-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Defective Plating.
(1) Lead plating has been used in past to

give initial protection during engine run-in and is
not required for service operation. Blistering, flaking,
or normal wear of the lead plating is acceptable
provided local overheating is not evident. Tempera-
tures exceeding 600 _F will cause melting and
bending of the lead plating.
NOTE
Bearings having lead plating may be

encountered when overhauling old aircraft
engines. Lead plating is no longer used.
(2) Silver is the primary plating material

used to provide a low friction, solid lubricant bearing
surface during engine start-up.
(a) Plating may show some wear on the

land riding surfaces of the retainer but the base
material of the retainer shall not be exposed.
(b) Limited wear of the plating in the

rolling element pockets of the retainer is normally
acceptable.
007032
Figure 7-32. Network Type of Fatigue (c) Large main shaft engine bearings
Cracking on Ball Bearing Raceway with rolling element diameters over .5 inch, can
have a wear band 1/8 inch wide.
7-31. SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. (d) Bearings with rolling element diame-
ters less than .5 inch can have a wear band 1/16
7-32. The following instructions include standard inch wide (figures 7-41).
inspection requirements that are applicable to bear-
ing Groups A through E. They expand upon the (e) Accessory bearings can have a wear
abbreviated inspection criteria contained in table 7-2. band 1/32 inch wide.
These instructions may require modification, change
and/or supplementing by the local cognizant depot
NOTE
bearing engineer. When inspecting to the OEM
drawing, use the OEM visual inspection specification These wear limits apply unless otherwise
if it is listed on the drawing. restricted by specific overhaul/engineering
specifications.
7-33. GROUP A (POWERPLANT BEARINGS). The
following instructions apply to all types of main and c. Separable Bearings. Check the rings and
differential shaft bearings, accessory gearbox bear- retainer for matching serial numbers to ensure
ings and propeller shaft bearings: mixing of bearing components has not occurred.
Reject bearings with nonmatching serial numbers.
a. Frosted Condition. A light frosted condition Rematch duplex and matched bearings per instruc-
on the active bearing surfaces is not cause for tions contained in paragraph 6-57.
bearing rejection. Frosting is caused by minute
particles in the oil that passes through the filtering d. Stack Bearings. Loss of up to 50 percent
system and into the bearing with the lubricating oil. of the anti-galling copper plating on bearing exteriors
It is not detrimental to bearing operation. Do not is acceptable. Wire retainer wear is not cause for
confuse with skidding indications where actual metal rejection unless wear exceeds 50 percent of the
is displaced or transferred. original wire diameter.
7-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007033
Figure 7-33. Close-up of a Fatigue
Spall (SEM 120X MAG)
007036
Figure 7-36. Cracks and Delaminations
in Nonmetallic Type Retainers
007034
Figure 7-34. Wear on Ends of Cylindrical Rollers
007037
007035 Figure 7-37. Crack in Corner of
Figure 7-35. Wear of Retainer Pocket Machined Metal Retainer
of Tapered Roller Bearing
7-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007038
Figure 7-38. Cracks in Roller Retaining Tabs
007040
Figure 7-40. Poor Rivet Heads in Gear
Box Bearing Retainer
007041
Figure 7-41. Typical Plating and Wear Indications
of Main Engine Bearing Retainers
007039
Figure 7-39. Inspection Criteria for (1) Do not reject for ball scuffing in full
Two-Piece Retainers complement (retainerless) airframe bearings from
ball-to-ball rubbing contact.
7-34. GROUP B (AIRFRAME AND AIRCRAFT (2) Accept bearings with minor ball loading
CONTROL BEARINGS). Airframe and aircraft con- marks outside of the ball path.
trol bearings are generally less critical than Group
A bearings and have looser tolerances. Larger (3) Do not reject bearings for staining of
internal clearances are common, and many Group cadmium plating. Do not attempt to remove the
B bearings have provisions for misalignment. Bear- staining by buffing or polishing. Remove all active
ings do not require noise testing and should not corrosion, however, removal of the cadmium plating
be rejected on appearance. shall be held to a minimum. Bearings with cadmium
plating that is missing or partially removed shall be
a. General Inspection Requirements. processed in accordance with paragraph 6-63.
7-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Needle Bearings. Needle bearings require

slightly different inspection procedures than standard
ball and roller bearings. The following inspection
requirements are in addition to the general inspection
requirements of paragraph 7-34a and will include
some minor gaging:
(1) Check the rotation of the set of needles

within the bearing by use of a prod or pick. The
entire group of needles shall rotate one complete
revolution (figure 7-44).
(2) Reject thin shell needle bearings for

deformation of the shell ends that displaces the
needles.
007042
Figure 7-42. Light Fretting Corrosion on (3) Check bore diameter of open-end type
Outer Diameter Surface of Ball Bearing bearings with a plug gage equivalent to the diameter
of the applicable mounting shaft.
(4) Accept thin shell needle bearings with

minor out-of-roundness. The shell will return to the
correct shape when properly mounted in the assem-
bly.
(5) Reject thin shell needle bearings with

deep scoring of the shell. Light marking is accept-
able.
(6) Check thin shell needle bearings for fine

cracks originating at the shell end. Reject for
cracking.
(7) Accept airframe bearings by using the

hand feel test described in paragraph 8-125. Normal
looseness of retainer washers is approximately 0.020
inch. Reject bearing showing looseness in excess
of 0.025 inch, or as limited in applicable drawings
(figure 7-45).
007043
Figure 7-43. Damaged Seal by Improper Handling (8) Spicer-type flexible joint components
are generally forwarded with the needle bearings.
The needles are hand fitted on the spicer journals
(4) Check threads on rod end bearings for with a zero clearance. Reject for any indications
corrosion. Threads shall be free of all active corrosion. of looseness.
c. Spherical Bearings (Metal-to-Metal). Metal-

(5) Accept minor damage to the shields/ to-metal spherical bearings shall be subjected to
seals unless the misaligning feature is impaired. the following minimum inspection requirements. Re-
Allowable misalignment is normally about 10 de- fer to paragraph 13-39 for additional instructions.
grees. The seals/shields shall be intact, and securely
attached to the outer ring. Seals shall make full
(1) Cracks - None are acceptable. Inspect
contact with the inner ring to prevent loss of
for cracks at the oil holes and grease grooves in
lubricant.
the outer ring. Cracks will develop both externally
and internally. The spherical ball may also be
(6) Check metal and nonmetallic pulleys for cracked by excessive loads or as a result of stress
cracks. Reject if cracks are found. corrosion cracking.
7-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(3) External Wear - Wear of the inner

diameter and/or outer diameter surfaces is accept-
able if all dimensions are within tolerance.
(4) Internal wear - Wear inside the bearing

shall be determined by checking the internal radial
and/or axial clearances.
(a) Maximum internal radial clearance

for bearings over 1.5 inches outer diameter shall
be 0.003 inches unless otherwise specified in the
applicable drawing or overhaul instruction.
(b) Maximum internal radial clearance

for bearings under 1.5 inches outer diameter shall
be 0.002 inches unless otherwise specified in the
applicable drawing or overhaul document.
007044 (c) Internal axial clearance allowances

Figure 7-44. Checking Needle Bearing will be 3 times the internal radial clearance limits
for Rotation of Needles unless otherwise specified.
d. Spherical Bearings (Self-Lubricating). Self-

lubricated, spherical-type bearings have different
kinds of liner systems that need to be inspected
for wear and condition. Each bearing manufacturer
has developed a different type of liner system, some
with initial clearance and some with zero initial
clearance. During service the liner system gradually
wears as it is subjected to cyclic loads. With time,
the bearing develops a certain amount of internal
looseness. Close visual inspection of the self-lubri-
cating liner is needed to determine bearing accept-
ability. The following instructions apply:
(1) Check for missing liner. Reject the

bearing if all, or sections of the liner, is missing.
(2) Check liner condition. Accept the bear-

ing if there is limited loss of liner at the outer edge
of the ring, and there is no evidence of metallic
007045 rubbing of the outer ring on the ball surface. Reject
Figure 7-45. Unacceptable End Clearance a fabric-lined bearing if the fraying extends into the
on Airframe Needle Bearing load area. Edge fraying is acceptable if there is no
loss or loosening of the liner.
(2) Corrosion - Remove corrosion from
unplated surfaces by polishing and/or buffing. Plated NOTE
surfaces can be buffed to so as not to remove the
plating. Do not polish. Light pitting of the spherical Do not pull out or remove loose fibers.
ball is acceptable if not associated with peeling of Do not remove the wear debris that is
plating. Unplated corrosion resistant spherical sur- attached to the ball surface. Bearing life
faces, with light pitting, can be buffed and then will be reduced if this material is removed.
treated by a mild corrosion inhibitor. Contact the
local depot Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physi- (3) Check the integrity of the liner-to metal
cal Science Laboratory for corrosion inhibiting pro- bonding. Reject the bearing if there is any evidence
cess. of looseness and/or liner delamination.
7-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(4) Check internal surface of liner. Rotate 7-42, can be removed by buffing/polishing in
ball to inspect the internal surfaces of the liner. accordance with instructions contained in Section
Reject the bearing if the surface fibers of woven VI.
fabric-type liners are missing. Reject composite-lined
bearings if the internal surface of the liner is cracked. e. Heat Discoloration. Check bearings for
indications of overheating. Reject bearings with any
(5) Check for internal looseness. Reject heat discoloration (table 7-1).
bearings that exceed internal radial clearance values
specified in applicable overhaul instructions or local f. Wear. Check bearings for excessive wear
engineering instructions. When not otherwise speci- on mounting surfaces. Reject bearings that have
fied, the internal radial clearance shall not exceed mounting surfaces that are out-of-dimension.
0.003 inches. Due to the effect of conforming
curvatures, the internal axial clearance will be
approximately 3 times the internal radial clearance. g. Pitting. Check bearings for corrosion pitting
on the internal and external surfaces. Reject
bearings with pitting on the internal surfaces. Reject
(6) Check plating. Check the plated sur- bearing with pitting on the external surfaces that
faces of the ball for delamination or peeling of the can not be removed by light polishing. Drawing must
plating. Reject the bearing if these conditions exist. be maintained.
7-35. GROUP C (INSTRUMENT BEARINGS). Refer 7-37. GROUP E (HELICOPTER BEARINGS). Bear-
to Section XIV for detailed visual inspection instruc- ings in this group are used in many different types
tions for miniature and instrument bearings. of helicopter applications. Use table 7-2 to accept
or reject Group E-type bearings. Inspect bearings
7-36. GROUP D (ROTATING ELECTRICAL BEAR- for the following conditions or defects:
INGS). Rotating electrical bearings are usually of
nonseparable design and it is difficult to inspect 7-38. Oscillating Bearings. Inspect for false
internal surfaces. Inspection criteria contained in brinelling on the active surfaces of the inner and
table 7-2 will be used to accept or reject Group outer ring raceways and rolling elements. Reject
D bearings. Special attention shall be given to the bearings for conditions exceeding limits specified
following conditions: in the table. Check external mounting surfaces (outer
and inner diameters and face) of the rings for
a. Retainer Wear. Inspect retainers for wear. evidence of fretting corrosion (figure 7-42).
Reject bearings if a ball centered retainer visibly
drags on the inner and/or outer ring land riding 7-39. Helicopter Main and Tail Rotor Stack Bea-
surfaces. rings. Inspect individual bearings in the stack for
missing anti-fretting copper plating.
b. Misalignment. Check bearings for evidence
of operational misalignment. Reject bearings if there a. Determine the amount of missing plating
is any evidence of operation under significant by visual estimation.
misalignment. Reject for heat discoloration, wear or
pitting.
c. Preload. Check bearings for indications of

having operated under excessive preloads. Reject
bearings with oxidized bands on the outer diameter
surface of the inner ring that corresponds to the
location of the ball path on the outer ring raceway
(figure 7-46).
d. F r e t t i n g C o r r o s i o n . C h e c k e x t e r n a l
mounting surfaces of the bearings. Reject bearings
for excessive fretting on the inner or outer surfaces
007046
(figure 7-16). Severe fretting indicates excessive
vibration and possible internal bearing damage. Light Figure 7-46. Preload Band on Outer
fretting of external surfaces, such as shown in figure Diameter of Ball Bearing
7-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
007047
Figure 7-47. Typical Wear Indications on Helicopter Main and Tail Rotor Stack Bearings
7-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Replate bearings if more than 20 percent 7-40. Drive Shaft Bearings.

of the plating on the bore and/or outer diameter
surface is missing. a. Check drive shaft bearings for retainer wear
and indications of operational misalignment. Reject
bearings that have loose retainers. Reject bearings
NOTE that have ball paths that oscillate (move back and
forth) around the circumference of the raceway.
The copper plating is an anti-fretting b. Check bearings for indications of preloading
coating material designed to protect the and overheating. Reject bearings that have heat
steel against titanium. Check with the local discolored bands on the outer diameter surfaces
cognizant aircraft engineer for its continued of the outer ring or that are generally heat discolored.
requirement.
c. Check for incorrect mounting fits. Reject
c. Accept the bearing if the remaining 80 bearings not meeting drawing requirements.
percent or more of the copper plating is continuous
around the inner and outer ring diameter circumfer- 7-41. Gearbox Bearings. Check gearbox bearings
ences (figure 7-47). Two small gaps in the plating, for indications of overheating (heat discoloration),
each no more than 1/4 inch wide, are acceptable. preloading (heat discolored bands), and/or
misalignment (oscillating ball path). Check retainers
for wear and/or cracking. Refer to paragraph 7-33
d. Accept fretting damage if it cannot be felt for additional inspection information.
with an 0.060 inch radius scribe. Fretting damage
that can be felt with an 0.060 inch radius scribe 7-42. Airframe and Control Bearings. Inspect
must be polished and replated. helicopter airframe and aircraft control bearings the
same as Group B bearings. Inspect for wear of
spherical bearings that would be especially affected
e. Replate bearings using stylus plating by vibration. Check for wear to self lubricating liner
techniques as specified in local engineering direc- systems. Check for false brinelling of rolling bearings
tives. and fretting on bearing mounting surfaces.
7-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION VIII
DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION OF BEARINGS
8-1. GENERAL. completed a course on metrology and possess a

valid certificate/stamp. The course will include basic
8-2. This section contains instructions for dimen- theory and hands-on operation of the gaging equip-
sionally inspecting and mechanically testing of new ment. One year of shop experience is required for
and used bearings. Used bearings will show very certification. Refer to Section XVI for detailed infor-
little measurable wear under normal conditions of mation concerning personnel and certification
moderate speed and adequate lubrication. However, requirements
many aeronautical bearings are subjected to high
speeds, high loads, high temperatures and abrasive 8-10. EQUIPMENT.
environments. Therefore, dimensional measure-
ments of critical parameters can be very important. 8-11. GENERAL. Precision gaging equipment must
be readily available and in good operating condition.
8-3. Mechanical testing is necessary when the Equipment described in this section are listed in
bearings are to be used in certain critical applica- Section XVIII.
tions.
8-12. MINIMUM GAGING EQUIPMENT. It is recom-
8-4. FACILITIES. mended that all Level I facilities be equipped with
the following types of gaging equipment.
8-5. The general facility requirements of
paragraph 7-3 will apply to facilities dedicated to a. Inner diameter gages.
dimensional inspection. A clean environment is
required for proper operation of precision gaging b. Outer diameter gages.
equipment. Temperature control is needed to
stabilize room temperature for gage calibration and c. Internal axial clearance gages.
for measurement correlation. Additional information
on the operation of clean room facilities is contained d. Width measuring gages.
in Section XV and paragraph B-208 in Appendix
B. e. Internal radial clearance gages.
8-6. PERSONNEL. f. Flushness stick-in/stick-out measuring gage.
8-7. GENERAL. It is essential that well-trained g. Surface finish measuring equipment.

personnel be used to dimensionally inspect bearings.
Bearing gaging equipment is sophisticated and h. Surface profile measuring gages.
requires careful handling and operation. It is often
necessary for gaging personnel to improvise new i. Concentricity measuring equipment.
methods for measuring critical parameters. A
hands-on working knowledge of gaging practices is j. Material hardness measuring equipment.
needed.
k. ABEC and RBEC parameter measuring
8-8. Most bearings dimensions have tolerances equipment.
of ten thousandths (0.0001) of an inch and some
in millionths (0.000001) of an inch. Carelessness, 8-13. CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS.
indifference, or ignorance on the part of bearing shop
personnel to these extremely close tolerances can 8-14. GENERAL. All measuring and test equipment
cause bearing failure and component malfunction. shall be calibrated utilizing reference standards
whose calibration is certified and traceable to an
8-9. CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. Shop international standard or national standard. Calibra-
personnel assigned to dimensional inspection tion is defined in the International Standard ISO
functions, that results in the acceptance and/or 10012-1 “Quality Assurance Requirements for
rejection of bearings, shall have successfully Measuring Equipment”.
8-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-15. GAGE BLOCKS (Figure 8-1). Gage blocks to eliminate the other digits, working towards the
are the most frequently used reference standard for left. Most sizes can be obtained by wringing together
setting up and/or checking shop gaging equipment. several different combinations of blocks from the
Gage blocks are hardened steel blocks that are used same set. Choose the combination that will require
to set up linear measuring equipment for accurate the minimum number of gage blocks.
measurements. The two opposite surfaces are
ground and lapped parallel. The thickness of each
block is controlled within a few millionths of an inch Example 1
of its designated size. Gage blocks are available
in graduated sets. Two or more blocks are used Build up .9323
in combination to obtain the desired size. Gage
Subtract .1003 - First Block
blocks are traceable to National Institute of
Standards and Technology. .8320
8-16. Gage blocks are available in several grades Subtract .1320 - Second Block
of precision depending on the accuracy requirements .7000 - Third Block
of the parts being measured (table 8-1). Gage blocks
are subject to hazards of abrasion, wear, scratches,
Example 2
corrosion and dimensional instability, and must be
periodically checked by an authorized calibration
laboratory. Grade 1 or 2 blocks are required for Build up .9323
precision bearing gaging (table 8-2). Subtract .0103 - First Block
.9220
8-17. Gage Block Build-up Instructions. Select
the first block or combination of two blocks that will
first eliminate the righthand digits of the value to Subtract .1220 - Second Block
be measured. Then the other blocks are selected .8000 - Third Block
Table 8-1. Terminology and Usage of Graded Gage Blocks
Grade Common Name Usage

.5 Ultra Precision Basic Reference Standard
1 Laboratory Reference Standard
2 Precision Gage Room Reference
3 Inspection Gage Set-up
Table 8-2. Tolerances for Gage Blocks (per Federal Specification GGG-G-15B)
(Measurements are in micro inches)
Grade
Length1 in Texture AA Flatness/Parallelism2 in
New Old
.5 AAA $1 0.8 1
1 AA $2 0.7 2
)4 1.0 4
2 A) *2
3 A, B )8 1.0 5
*4
1 Blocks 1 inch in length and smaller
2 Blocks 2 inches in length and smaller
8-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
damaged areas caused by careless handling and/or

contact with other hard materials. Examine the gage
blocks under 10X magnification. If small burrs are
found (usually on the edge of the block) the block
should be forwarded to the standards or calibration
laboratory for refinishing and verification of dimen-
sional accuracy. All gage blocks will require periodic
calibration by an authorized calibration laboratory.
8-21. Observe the following rules.
a. Avoid touching the gaging surfaces of the

blocks.
b. Hold the gage blocks by the sides.
c. W i p e b l o c k s w i t h a c l e a n c h a m o i s
008001 dampened with a light oil after each use.
Figure 8-1. Precision Gage Blocks
NOTE
Each individual gage block has a

tolerance error that must be taken into
consideration when performing critical
measurements.
8-18. Wringing Gage Blocks Together as a Set.

It is often necessary to use several blocks to build-up
a stack that will match the dimension of the bearing
being measured. Gage blocks are not just set on
top of each other but are “wrung” together by
pressing one block against the other block with a
twisting motion that squeezes out the air from
between the blocks. Refer to figure 8-2 for visual
instruction.
8-19. The absence of a measurable air film and

the presence of a very thin oil film between the
two “geometrically flat” surfaces provides a molecular
attraction and adhesive forces that hold the blocks
together with considerable force. The thickness of
the wringing film is approximately 1/4 millionth of
an inch regardless of the type of lubricant used.
NOTE
Separate the blocks at the end of each

day. The longer the blocks are left wrung
together the tighter they will adhere to
each other.
8-20. Handling and Care of Gage Blocks. Used

008002
gage blocks may not readily wring together with other Figure 8-2. Wringing Gage Blocks Together
blocks. This is usually the result of nicks or other
8-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-22. MASTER BALLS. Precision master balls are f. Handle bearings, masters and gage stand
used to calibrate ball and roller classifying equip- with gloves or other insulating material.
ment. They serve the same purpose as gage blocks
in setting up the measuring equipment. Master balls CAUTION
are used for calibrating Grade 10 or better ball sets.
They shall be round and calibrated to size within
Fluctuations in the gage room temperature
3 millionths of an inch. Calibration shall be traceable
will affect the accuracy of measurement.
to the National Institute of Standards and
Always check room temperature when
Technology.
making precision measurements or when
making correlation measurements.
8-23. MEASUREMENT ERROR. The following
environmental conditions and equipment parameters 8-25. Equipment. Gaging equipment must be kept
must be considered if accurate, precise measure- clean, in good condition, and in calibration. Utilize
ments of bearings are to be obtained. gaging equipment that will provide the required
accuracy for the specific measurement.
8-24. Temperature. Heating of the gaging system,
reference standards or bearings, will adversely affect a. Use a gage that is 10 times more accurate
measurement readings. Steel expands in size with than the tolerance of the part to be measured. Use
corresponding increases in temperature (figure 8-3). a gage that is accurate to 0.0001 inch when
Therefore, the following measuring techniques measuring parts to 0.001 inch accuracy. A gage
should be carefully accomplished to reduce system accurate to 0.000010 inch is needed when
measuring errors: measuring bearings to 0.0001 inch.
a. Locate measuring gages away from heat NOTE

sources.
When using a gage that is only 2 times
b. Do not handle bearing parts or master as accurate as the part tolerance, the
blocks or balls any more than absolutely necessary. usable tolerance spread of the meter must
be cut in half to ensure accurate measure-
c. Do not handle or move gage by the column. ments.
d. Always let the bearings stabilize to gage b. Use the proper magnification. Do not split
room temperature when bringing them in from divisions on a meter or indicator.
outside areas.
c. Position the gage stylus at right angles
e. Always let the gage blocks stabilize to gage (approximately 90 degrees) to the surface being
room temperature after the wringing process. measured to eliminate cosine error (table 8-3 and
figure 8-4). Gages can be procured that will automati-
cally compensate for cosine error.
d. Secure fixtures, stand and support so they

are rigid.
Table 8-3. Cosine Error vs Angle of Gage

Stylus (Figure 8-4)
Angle in Degrees Error %
0_ 0
5_ .4
10_ 1.5
008003
Figure 8-3. Effects of Temperature on 20_ 6
Measuring Accuracy 30_ 13.4
8-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
is the smallest graduated line (mark) on a dial

indicator or meter and the last digit to the far right
of the decimal point of a digital readout.
8-28. Limitations of Gaging Techniques.
a. Two-point Measurement (Figure 8-5a).

Two-point measuring systems can detect out-of-
roundness such as an oval shape or even-number
lobing conditions. It can not detect odd number
lobing, or random spaced lobing.
b. V-block Measurement (Figures 8-5b and

008004
8-6). V-block measuring systems will not necessarily
Figure 8-4. Gaging Error Due to Angular detect oval or even number lobing conditions. The
Position of Gage Stylus worker must select specific V blocks for detecting
odd lobing as follows:
8-26. Air and Oil Films. Measuring errors can Number of Lobes VĆblock
result from air films, oil, dust, and burrs on the gage
blocks, gage stands, and surface plates. 3 60_
a. Wring together all contacting surfaces to 3&5 90_
eliminate air films.
5 108_
b. Clean gaging area and equipment on a
daily basis. Carefully wipe the surface plate, masters, 7 128_ 40'
anvils, and the parts to be measured with lint free,
clean room-type wipes. c. Bench Center Measurement (Figure 8-5c).
c. Check bearing parts and gaging equipment Bench centers are limited by the accuracy and
for burrs, nicks, and other surface irregularities. alignment of the center and center holes. To measure
0.0001 inch or less, the accuracy and alignment
8-27. Three terms that relate to bearing metrology of the center must be controlled to 0.000010 inch
and that directly bear on gaging error need to be or better.
briefly explained.
d. Stylus Size/Shape (Figure 8-7). The gage
a. Precision (Repeatability). Precision has to stylus should make good contact with the surface
do with how well several measured readings agree of the part. Choose the gage and stylus that will
or repeat (Repeatability). Check each measurement ensure solid intimate contact. Do not use a wide
several times to ensure repeatable readings. When gage stylus with irregular or curved surfaces.
readings do not repeat within the desired precision,
check the measuring technique and then the gage. e. D i s t o r t i o n ( F i g u r e 8 - 8 ) . H i g h s t y l u s
pressures will measurably distort thin-walled rings.
b. Accuracy. Accuracy can be defined as “the The elastic property of the distorted ring is being
closeness of a measurement to the true value of measured instead of the ring outer diameter. Elec-
the parts being measured, traceable to an ultimate tronic and pneumatic gages should be used for
standard located at the National Institute of measuring all thin-walled bearing rings.
Standards and Technology”. Accuracy implies there
are degrees of closeness to the true value since f. Deformation (Figure 8-9). Deformation
absolute accuracy is unobtainable and exists only occurs even with light gaging forces due to the
in theory. The level of “perfection” attained in the elastic properties of steel. It is especially evident
flatness, parallelism, roundness, and surface finish with ultra-close dimensional tolerances. Both the
will determine the degree of accuracy of a part. shape of the part and the gaging stylus will effect
accuracy (figure 8-10). Effects of elastic deformation
c. Resolution/Sensitivity. Resolution is “the on measuring accuracy are progressively more
degree to which the measuring instrument can severe as seen in figure 8-10a through 8-10f. The
discriminate and indicate small variations of the unit stress level increases with decreases in surface
measured dimension from the nominal size”. This contact area.
8-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008005
Figure 8-5. Types of Gaging Errors
008006 008007
Figure 8-6. Effect of Lobing on Figure 8-7. Effect of Improper Stylus
Measuring Accuracy on Accuracy
8-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Check marginal bearings for serviceability.
c. Size markings for selective fitting in critical

applications.
d. Maintain critical dimensions for specialized

applications.
e. C h e c k i m p o r t a n t d i m e n s i o n s o f n e w
bearings prior to installation in their intended
application.
f. Verify the dimensions of new bearings

under special inspection programs.
8-31. It will be the responsibility of the bearing

processing facility supervisor, with assistance from
the cognizant depot bearing engineer, to establish
inspection criteria for new bearings received from
Supply.
8-32. MINIMUM DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION

008008 REQUIREMENTS FOR USED BEARINGS (Table
Figure 8-8. Effect of Excessive Stylus 8-4). There are certain dimensions that must be
Pressure on Thin-walled Rings checked when certifying the acceptability of used
bearings. The following paragraphs give the
minimum inspection requirements for specific
bearing applications. Other measurements shall be
made as directed by applicable handbook of
overhaul instructions and/or local engineering direc-
tives, and the local cognizant bearing engineer.
8-33. GAGING STANDARDS.
8-34. GENERAL. Standard gaging practices for

measuring bearing geometry have been established
by the American Bearing Manufacturer’s Association
(ABMA) and the American National Standard Insti-
tute (ANSI).
8-35. GAGING LOADS. Stylus pressure must be

carefully controlled when gaging bearing geometries.
The use of excessive stylus pressure will significantly
reduce measuring accuracy and may be a factor
008009 in accepting bad bearings while rejecting good
Figure 8-9. Effect of Stylus Pressure on bearings. Use table 8-5 to set gage stylus pressure
Ultra-Accurate Measurement and to select gage point radii.
8-36. TEMPERATURE CONTROL. Standard gage

8-29. GAGING REQUIREMENTS. room temperature is 68_ + .5_F. This temperature
is rather cool for personnel comfort, a higher
8-30. GENERAL. Not all bearings require the same temperature such as 72_ + 1_F is permissible for
kinds of dimensional checks. In general, dimensional bearing gaging. However, it should be noted that
gaging shall be used to: when correlating measurements made in millionths
of an inch it will be necessary to compensate for
a. Reestablish precision identification of a temperature variation by using the coefficients of
bearing. thermal expansion listed in table B-6.
8-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008010
Figure 8-10. Surface Deformation Increases Due to Shape of Parts and Increased Unit Pressure
8-37. Allow sufficient time for the bearings to Dmax - the maximum diameter reading obtained by two
thermally stabilize (cool down) to the gage room point measurements of a bearing outside dia-
temperature before making measurements. The time meter having out-of-roundness and taper.
will depend on the temperature of the bearings and
their mass (size). Attempts to measure bearings prior dm - (dmax + dmin)/2 for a particular bearing.
to temperature stabilization will result in inaccurate
readings. Two hours is a minimum time period to Dm - (Dmax+Dmin)/2 for a particular bearing
allow bearings to dimensionally stabilize to the lower df - mean diameter of the flat face of a bearing inner
gage room temperature. ring.
8-38. MEASURING BEARING PARAMETERS. Be - on side runout to bore measurement distance
between locating stop and gage contact
8-39. SYMBOLS USED IN BEARING MEASURE-
MENT. The following symbols are used to describe L - gage load.
specific parameters and dimensions. They are also
applicable to the tables of tolerances in Appendix 8-40. INNER DIAMETER (BORE) MEASURING
B. PROCEDURES (Figure 8-11a). Measure the inner
diameter using the following method:
Explanation of symbols is as follows:
r - the shaft or housing fillet radius. a. Select the gaging equipment that will make
dmin - the minimum diameter reading obtained by two- two-point measurements.
point measurements of a bearing bore having
out-of-roundness and taper. b. Position the bearing with the axis in a
vertical direction (bearing laying flat).
dmax - the maximum diameter reading obtained by two-
point measurements of a bearing bore having
out-of-roundness and taper. c. Place the bearing on the gage and take
at least 3 readings approximately 120 degrees apart.
Dmin - the minimum diameter reading obtained by two A minimum diameter reading, dmin, and a maximum
point measurements of a bearing outside dia- diameter reading, dmax, will be obtained if there is
meter having out-of-roundness and taper. out-of-roundness and/or taper.
8-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 8-4. Minimum Dimensional Inspection Requirements for Used Bearings
Certifying the Following Types of Bearings

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5 Type 6
a-b-c a-b a-b-e a-b-e a-b a-b
d-e-f e-g f-h-d e-i e-i
Type 7 Type 8 Type 9 Type 10 Type 11 Type 12
j e-f-j k l m-n-o m-n-p-q
k-u r-s-t
Bearing Type Surfaces/Dimensions to be Measured
(Type 1) Gas Turbine Main Shaft Bearings (a) Inner Diameter
(Type 2) Gas Turbine Balance Bearings (b) Outer Diameter
(Type 3) Gas Turbine Accessory Gearbox Bearings (c) Contact Angle
(Type 4) Helicopter Dynamic Component Bearings (d) Flushness When Specified (Ball Bearings)
(Type 5) Rotating Electrical Bearings (Motors, (e) Internal Radial Clearance
Generators, Invertors, and Dynamometers) (f) Internal Axial Clearance (Ball Bearing)
(Type 6) Accessory Bearings (Constant Speed (g) Radial Runout of Inner and/or Outer Ring
Drives, Gearbox, Hydraulic Pumps, (h) Preload on Duplex and Stack Bearings
and Motors) (i) Flushness or Preload on Duplex Bearings
(Type 7) Bearings That Have Been Polished (j) Surfaces That Have Been Polished
(Type 8) Spherical Bearings (Metal-to-Metal and (k) Any Surface if There Is an Indication of Rotating
Fabric Lined) or Spinning
(Type 9) Bearings with Indications of Spinning in (l) Affected Surfaces of Bearing That Were
the Housing or On the Shaft Machined, Honed, or Plated Shall Be Measured
(Type 10) Bearings That Have Been Dimensionally (m) Diameter
Reworked (Machined, Honed, or Plated) (n) Diameter Variation Within the Set
(Type 11) Level II - Matched Ball Set (o) Sphericity when Specified
(Type 12) Level II - Matched Roller Set (p) Length
(q) Corner Radius and Runout
(r) Cylindrical Flat Length
(s) Crown Radius
(t) Crown Drop
(u) Surfaces That Have Been Plated
d. Check measurements against drawing or Example 2. Measuring bore with 3 readings (3 measure-
engineering requirements. ments taken 120_ apart)
d1 = 1.4996
8-41. The bore diameter, d m , is defined as the
d2 = 1.4997
arithmetic average of the two readings, dmin and
dmax. d3 = 1.4998
dm = (1.4996 + 1.4997 + 1.4998)/3 = 4.4991/3 = 1.4997
8-42. Examples of bearing bore measurements are
as follows: 8-43. TYPICAL EQUIPMENT USED FOR BORE
GAGING. Use equipment with a resolution or least
count of 0.0001 inch. Dial, air or electronic gages
Example 1. Measuring bearing bore with out-of- are acceptable.
roundness.
dmin = 1.4995 Minimum bore measurement 8-44. Inner Diameter (Bore) Gage. The inner
diameter gage employs a digital display to read the
dmax = 1.4999 Maximum bore measurement actual bore size of the bearing to the nearest ten
millionths (0.000010) inch and is adjustable over
dm = (1.4995 + 1.4999)/2 = 2.9994/2 = 1.4997 a range of dimensional values.
8-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008011
Figure 8-11. Gaging Practices for Inner Ring Dimensions
8-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 8-5. Stylus Pressures for Gaging Rolling Bearings
Bore and Outside Diameter Gaging Loads

Nominal Diameter (millimeters)
Gage Load Gage Point
Over Incl. (ounces) (millimeter) Radius (inch)
Inner Ring 0 10 Not to exceed 7 0.8 0.032
Bore 10 30 Not to exceed 7 2.5 .098
30 and up 12 2.5 .098
Inner Ring 0 and up Not to exceed 7 2.5 .098
Outside
Diameter
Radial Internal Clearance Gaging Loads
Loads
Bore Size (millimeters) Kilograms Pounds
Over 0 to and including 18 2-1/2 5-1/2
Over 18 to and including 50 5 11
Axial (End) Play Gaging Loads
Loads
Outside Diameter (millimeter) Kilograms Pounds
Over 0 to and including 50 2-1/2 5-1/2
Over 200 20 44
Ball and Roller Gaging Load
Ball Diameter Gage Point Load (ounces)
Over 0 to and including 1 Flat 4
Over 1 Flat 8
* Lower stylus pressures must be used when gaging thin section rings to preclude erroneous
readings due to deflection.
8-45. Air Gages (Figure 8-12). Air gaging systems air passage and air jets on opposite sides of the
use an airflow indicator gage and calibrated gaging spindle.
spindles. Calibration is performed by establishing 8-46. The true diameter of a bearing is based on the
upper and lower float positions with appropriate amount of clearance between the air jet in the spindle
minimum and maximum setting masters representing and the bearing bore surface. A change in air flow
the tolerance limits. Setting rings are available in velocity is reflected as a dimension by the float position
several grades of precision depending on require- on the instrument scale. The greater the clearance
ments of the application. Use the XX grade for (oversize), the higher the float will rise in the tube. A
gaging precision bearings (table 8-6). The gaging drop of the float indicates an undersize condition.
spindle is similar to a plug gage and has a central
8-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 8-6. Tolerance for Setting Rings
Size Range
To and Class Class Class Class Class Class
Above Including XXXX XXX XX X Y Z
.005” .010” .000005” .00001” .00002” .00004” .00007” .00010”
.010” .029” .000005” .00001” .00002” .00004” .00007” .00010”
.029” .825” .000005” .00001” .00002” .00004” .00007” .00010”
.825” 1.510” .000008” .000015” .00003” .00006” .00009” .00012”
1.510” 2.510” .00001” .00002” .00004” .00008” .00012” .00016”
2.510” 4.510” .000013” .000025” .00005” .00010” .00015” .00020”
4.510” 6.510” .000017” .000033” .000065” .00013” .00019” .00025”
6.510” 9.010” .00002” .00004” .00008” .00016” .00024” .00032”
9.010” 12.260” .000025” .00005” .00010” .00020” .00030” .00040”
8-47. External air gaging is opposite to internal air 8-49. The outside bearing diameter, Dm, is defined
gaging. A high float position indicates an undersize as the arithmetic average of the two readings, Dmin
outer diameter and a low float position indicates an and Dmax.
oversize diameter.
Example 1. Measuring Outer Diameter with Out-of-
8-48. OUTSIDE DIAMETER MEASURING PROCE- roundness
DURES (Figure 8-13a). Measure outside diameters Dmin = 3.5429 Minimum O.D. Measurement
using the following method.
Dmax = 3.5433 Maximum O.D. Measurement
a. Select the gaging equipment that will mea- Dm = (3.5429 + 3.5433)/2 = 7.0862/2 = 3.5431
sure between either a flat surface and an indicator
point, or a two-point measuring arrangement. Example 2. Measuring Outer Diameter with 3 Readings
D1 = 3.5429
b. The normal gaging position of the bearing D2 = 3.5433
will be with the bearing axis in a vertical direction
(bearing laying flat). D3 = 3.5432
Dm = (3.5429 + 3.5433 + 3.5432)/3 = 10.6294/3
c. Place the bearing on the gage and take = 3.5431
at least 3 separate readings approximately 120 8-50. TYPICAL EQUIPMENT USED FOR MEA-
degrees apart. SURING OUTER DIAMETERS. Use equipment with
a least count or resolution of 0.0001 inch. Dial, air
d. When out-of-roundness and/or taper exists or electronic gages are acceptable.
in a bearing, a minimum diameter reading, of min,
may be obtained. 8-51. WIDTH MEASURING PROCEDURES (Fig-
ures 8-11b and 8-13b). Measure widths of bearings
by the following method:
NOTE
a. Place the bearing or one of the bearing
The size or thin section of the rings may rings (if the bearing is disassembled) on the flat
effect the accuracy of the measurement anvil or granite surface table.
if the bearing is positioned with its axis
in the horizontal direction (bearing stand- b. Slide the bearing or ring under the gaging
ing on end) due to the effect of gravity stylus and take readings while rotating the bearing
and gage load. or ring one revolution.
8-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
and contact angle. A change in one will cause a

direct and proportional change in the others (figure
8-14).
8-58. S I G N I F I C A N C E OF INTERNAL
CLEARANCE. The radial and axial clearance
designed into a bearing are dependent on the
application. There are many parameters that reduce
or increase internal clearance. Some of these
parameters are listed below:
a. Interference fits cause expansion of the

inner ring and compression of the outer ring effec-
tively reducing internal clearance.
b. Centrifugal forces produced in gas turbine

engines operating at speeds in excess of 16,000
RPM cause expansion of the inner ring and cage
and accelerate rolling elements radially outward.
c. Thrust transmitted through a turbine shaft

causes axial displacement of the inner ring relative
to the outer ring which is accommodated by axial
clearance.
008012
Figure 8-12. Airflow Gaging Equipment d. In high temperature environments, each
for Bore Measurement component of the bearing will undergo thermal
expansion.
8-52. WIDTH MEASURING EQUIPMENT. Use 8-59. Aside from the effects of such operational
equipment with a least count of 0.001 inch. Dial, parameters, a minimal amount of clearance is
air or electronic gages are acceptable. necessary to allow lubrication to flow between the
floating element and raceway.
8-53. INTERNAL CLEARANCE.
8-60. Internal clearance is arguably the most
8-54. GENERAL. When discussing the internal important design feature of a rolling element bearing.
clearance of a bearing, we are typically referring
to radial and axial clearance in a ball bearing and 8-61. INTERNAL RADIAL CLEARANCE MEA-
radial clearance only in a cylindrical roller bearing. SURING PROCEDURES. The internal radial clear-
The clearance is often referred to as “play”. Although ance of a single-row radial bearing is the average
axial play is not measured in cylindrical roller outer ring raceway diameter, minus the average
bearings, they do have axial movement which is inner ring raceway diameter, minus twice the diame-
called end-float. Cylindrical roller bearings have no ter of the rolling element. Raceway diameters for
axial load carrying capacity. ball bearings are taken at the bottoms of the ball
grooves. Standards for internal radial clearance of
8-55. RADIAL CLEARANCE. Radial clearance is ball and roller bearings are given in tables B-39
described and illustrated in figure B-37 of Appendix through B-40.
B.
8-62. Procedure:
8-56. AXIAL CLEARANCE. Axial clearance is
described and illustrated in figure B-38 of Appendix a. Seat the balls or rollers in the bottom of
B. the raceways.
8-57. RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN RADIAL AND b. Take 3 readings approximately 120 degrees
AXIAL CLEARANCE. There is a direct relationship apart.
between radial and axial play in a radial ball bearing.
There is also a correlation between the clearances c. Record readings.
8-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008013
Figure 8-13. Gaging Practices for Outer Ring Dimensions
8-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Place the bearing on a horizontal flat plate.

Place a 0.002 to 0.003 inch thick shim between
the bearing inner ring and the plate for a small
bearing, and two or three shims for a large bearing.
Secure the inner ring of the assembled bearing to
the plate.
b. Place a dial indicator stylus against the

center of the outer ring outer diameter surface at
the centerline of the ball groove.
Bearing shown with radial play of
0.0002 in. The bearing axial play is c. Hold the outer ring in contact with the balls
approximately 0.002; the resulting in Direction A (figure 8-15). Use care not to lift the
contact angle (B) is about 8_. “F” is opposite side. Move up and down while oscillating
a negligible force. circumferentially (for the purpose of moving the ball
to the bottom of the ball groove) until the indicator
gives a maximum reading. Record the measured
value.
d. Hold (gently) the outer ring in contact with

the rest of the bearing in Direction A (figure 8-15).
Move the outer ring first up and then down without
circumferential motion. When the balls pass through
Same bearing as above with radial play the bottom of the grooves, the indicator will show
of 0.0008 in. The resulting axial play is a maximum reading. Record the measured value.
approximately 0.008; the contact angle
(B) is about 20_. “F” is again a negligible e. Without changing the general location of
force. the outer ring, hold the outer ring in contact with
the balls in Direction B (figure 8-15), with care not
to lift up and down (tilt). Oscillate the ring circumfer-
008014
entially a small amount (for the purpose of moving
Figure 8-14. Relationship Between Radial the balls of the opposite side to the bottoms of the
and Axial Clearance ball grooves) until the indicator gives a minimum
reading. Record the measured value.
NOTE
f. Continue to gently hold the outer ring in
contact with the rest of the bearing in Direction B
Procure master bearings from the bearing
(figure 8-15). Move the outer ring first up and then
manufacturer to establish inherent gage
down without circumferential motion. When the balls
error and for equipment calibration.
pass through the bottoms of the raceway grooves,
the indicator will show a minimum reading. Record
8-63. ABMA Simplified Method for Internal Ra- value.
dial Clearance Measurements. The ABMA has
developed a referee method to measure the internal g. The difference between the two recorded
clearance of a single-row ball bearing. The method readings is the internal radial clearance.
is simple and can be performed with equipment
normally available in any well equipped bearing h. Repeat the procedure three times at 120
shop. Although not practical for checking large degrees angular position of the outer ring in relation
quantities of bearings, the gaging procedure is to the indicator to compensate for outer ring out-of-
dependable and will give accurate internal radial roundness.
clearance values. This standard method will be used
as the referee procedure when a difference of i. Repeat the procedure three times at 120
opinion or dispute exists on the measurement of degrees angular position of the inner ring in relation
internal radial clearance. to the indicator to compensate for inner ring out-of-
roundness.
8-64. Method of ABMA method of measuring inter-
nal radial clearance is shown in figure 8-15. The j. Take the average of the six readings as
following steps apply: the internal radial clearance of the bearing.
8-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
direction and then in the other direction. Use the

following procedure:
a. Place the bearing in the gage against the

locators.
b. Clamp one ring to prevent axial movement.
c. Apply the specified reversing gaging load

to the unclamped ring.
d. Keep the movement of the ring parallel to

008015 the bearing axis.
Figure 8-15. ABMA Method of Measuring
Radial Internal Clearance e. Apply the axial gaging load to firmly seat
the rolling elements between raceways.
NOTE f. Record measured values of internal axial

clearance.
When handling large and heavy bearings,
insert three pieces of 1/2 inch flat stock, 8-68. INTERNAL AXIAL CLEARANCE MEASUR-
between the flat plate and both bearing ING EQUIPMENT. Use equipment with a least count
rings. The pieces should be radially lo- of 0.0001 inch. Air, dial, or electronic gages are
cated with two relatively close together, acceptable.
one at each side of the indicator stylus,
and the third directly opposite the indica- 8-69. FLUSHNESS, STICK-OUT/STICK-IN MEA-
tor. Place the paper shims between the SURING PROCEDURES. Duplex bearing ring faces
inner ring and the metal pieces. For have been specially ground during manufacture
smaller bearings, use a rubber topped under a specified initial load and will be flush when
stick for moving the outer ring. If the installed with the same load (paragraph B-83). To
indicator needle does not pass through measure flushness, support one ring and place a
a clear maximum or minimum reading, specified coaxial load (refer to specific drawing
the shim is probably too thin. requirement) on the other ring. The free ring is
rotated back-and-forth several times to seat the balls
and the raceways. The measured distance the inner
8-65. TYPICAL EQUIPMENT USED FOR MEA-
ring either sticks out past the outer ring face, or
SURING INTERNAL RADIAL CLEARANCE. Use
is set in, with respect to the outer ring face, will
equipment with a least count of 0.0001 inch. Dial,
determine the out-of-flushness of the bearing (figure
air, or electronic gages are acceptable.
8-18).
8-66. Split-Inner Ring Internal Radial Clearance 8-70. Prepare the bearings for measurement as
Gage (Figure 8-16). The gage measures the internal follows:
radial clearance of a split inner ring bearing. The
split inner ring is held in correct alignment by means a. Lap the faces of separable inner and outer
of insert plugs. The clamping pressure on the inner rings on a charged cast iron plate to reduce high
ring is applied by tapered plates designed to allow spots. Make approximately four (4) circular passes
several bearing sizes to be measured on the gage. for each ring face.
The gage is designed to measure the bearing using
the ABMA method. It makes little difference in b. Wipe the ring faces clean with a lint free
internal radial clearance readings whether the bear- wiping cloth. Apply a light film of oil to the active
ing bore is horizontal or vertical as long as the radial bearing surfaces.
gaging load pressure is the same.
8-71. The following procedures apply to measuring
8-67. INTERNAL AXIAL CLEARANCE (PLAY) bearing flushness:
MEASURING PROCEDURES (Figure 8-17). Internal
axial clearance is the total movement of the un- a. Align mounting marks as applicable (X or
clamped ring when the load is applied first in one V marks, lines, etc) on inner and/or outer rings.
8-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-72. FLUSHNESS STICK-OUT/STICK-IN MEA-

SURING EQUIPMENT. Use equipment with a least
count/resolution of 0.0001 inch. Air, gage, electronic
gages are acceptable. Figure 8-19 shows a gaging
system that is used to measure flushness and
stick-out and stick-in values of ball bearings.
8-73. CONTACT ANGLE MEASURING PROCE-

DURES. Contact angle is the angle in degrees
between a plane perpendicular to the bearing axis
and a line drawn between points of tangency of
the balls to the inner and outer ring raceways.
Contact angle is measured using fixtures that have
been specially designed for a particular bearing. The
bearing is supported with the thrust side of the ring
face up. A template or adapter ring with graduated
markings, in degrees, is then placed on the inner
ring or over the outer ring of the bearing. The inner
ring or outer ring is then rotated a prescribed number
of revolutions, usually 10 to 20, to verify that the
bearing contact angle falls within the prescribed
angle. The formula that is used to calculate the data
needed to mark the graduations on the adapter ring
008016 is found in paragraph B-75 of Appendix B. The
Figure 8-16. Radial Play Gage for Split following procedures apply to measuring contact
Inner Ring Bearings angle (figure 8-20):
a. Apply a light film of lubricating oil to the

active bearing surfaces.
008017
Figure 8-17. Measuring Axial Play of
Single-Row Rolling Bearings
b. Take readings at four or more positions

on the bearing. Seating of balls should be done
at each position.
c. Arithmetically average any fluctuation in the

indicator readings to obtain the degree of flushness,
stick-out or stick-in.
008018
d. Check measured flushness and/or stick-out/
stick-in values against applicable drawing require- Figure 8-18. Measuring Flushness and Stick-in/
ments. Stick-out of Single-Row Ball Bearing
8-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008019
Figure 8-19. Flushness and Stick-out/Stick-in Measuring Equipment
8-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008020
Figure 8-20. Contact Angle
8-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Support the outer ring on a surface plate is the difference in the diameters of two concentric
or a special holding fixture. Remove the lower half circles (in planes normal to the axis) (figure 8-21b).
of the inner ring of a split-inner ring bearing.
8-76. Eccentricity. When two or more circular
c. Place the graduated adapter ring (marked profiles do not have a common center (axis) a
in degrees of bearing contact angle) over the outer condition known as eccentricity exists (figure 8-22).
ring.
8-77. Types of Roundness Measuring Spindles.
d. Mark the retainer opposite the zero (0) or There are two different kinds of spindles that are
reference mark on the adapter ring. used to measure roundness, concentricity and ec-
centricity. They are as follows:
e. Place the contact angle measuring template a. Rotating Table. The bearing ring is accu-
and the specified weight on the inner ring. Align rately positioned (centered) on a rotating table which
pointer or gaging mark with zero or reference mark
carries the part past a fixed comparator or gaging
on the graduated ring.
system.
NOTE b. Rotating Overhead Spindle. The bearing
ring is fixed while the overhead spindle in which
Line up all of the reference marks on the a comparator is attached is rotating around the part.
graduated ring, retainer and rotating bear-
ing ring. 8-78. Circular (Polar) Traces (Figure 8-21). The
polar trace or chart is the most common means
f. Rotate the weight and/or gage pointer of representing the roundness profile of the part.
assembly clockwise the exact number of revolutions The chart is rotated at the same speed as the
specified for each template. Use 10 revolutions rotating spindle/table, providing a 360 degree tracing
unless otherwise specified. that can be correlated with the actual profile of the
part.
NOTE
8-79. Precautions that must be observed when
measuring concentricity are as follows:
The graduated lines on the template do
not represent the actual contact angle.
a. Angular position of profile plane. Make sure
They represent the internal angular and
the profile plane is perpendicular (right angle) to
geometric relationship within the bearings
the axis (figure 8-23).
as calculated by the formula in Appendix
B, paragraph B-75.
b. Location of part center. Any eccentricity
between the center of the part and the rotational
g. If the line on the retainer falls within the axis of the measuring spindle causes a distortion
specified lines on the contact angle template the of the profile trace. Maximum distortion occurs at
bearing must then be turned counterclockwise the an angular position 90 degrees from the direction
same number of revolutions. Check that the mark of the eccentricity measured from the chart rotational
on the retainer lines up with the starting mark on center (figure 8-24).
the reference ring to ensure that there was no
skidding during the measurement. 8-80. CONCENTRICITY AND ROUNDNESS MEA-
SURING EQUIPMENT. The equipment measures the
8-74. CONCENTRICITY AND ROUNDNESS MEA- roundness and concentricity of bearing rings and
SURING PROCEDURES. Roundness is defined as retainers. Measurements are made in relationship
a circular surface (or plane) where every point on to an ultraprecision spindle axis which has an
the circumference is equidistant from the center. The accuracy of +0.0000015. The instrument is capable
circle (plane) must be perpendicular (right angle) of measuring (figure 8-25):
to the axis passing through the center (figure 8-21a).
a. Roundness of either bore or outside diame-
8-75. Since a perfectly round part cannot be ters.
manufactured, it is necessary to measure the devi-
ation, or out-of-roundness, from a theoretical “per- b. Concentricity of any bore or outer diameter
fect” roundness. The amount of out-of-roundness to any other bore or outer diameter.
8-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008021
Figure 8-21. Roundness Versus Out-Of-Roundness
008023
008022 Figure 8-23. Angular Position of
Figure 8-22. Eccentricity of Two Circles Measurement Plane
8-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-83. The following bearing characteristics can be

inspected and evaluated by the use of an appropriate
linear profiling system (figure 8-26):
a. Straightness of the bore and outer diameter

surfaces.
b. Parallelism of two bearing surfaces.
c. Curved (crown) contour of a roller.
d. Length of a surface such as the roller

bearing raceway width not accessible to direct
008024 measurement.
Figure 8-24. Distorted Polar Profile of a
Miscentered Essentially Round Part
e. Waviness or other contour deviations from
a straight line reference.
c. Parallelism of two faces.
f. Rib-face angle of a tapered roller bearing.
d. Alignment of any axis to any other axis.
g. Profile and angle of a tapered roller bearing.
e. Squareness of face or flange to any axis.
8-81. The differential gage system is used to h. Lead-in chamfer and length of roller bearing.
measure diameters, taper, profile, contour, wall
thickness, and other precision measurements. The i. Roller guide flange lay back angle of
differential amplifier permits either one or two heads cylindrical roller bearings.
to be used, singularly or both heads differentially
connected. This combination gaging system can be NOTE
used as production equipment without the need of
a controlled environment. The differential gaging
Use care to properly align the tracer and
system consists of two identical gage heads and
the bearing surface to be measured. Also
an amplifier. The signals from the two gage heads
make sure the bearing or bearing compo-
are combined by means of special input circuitry
nent is level.
in the amplifier. The difference between the two
signals is indicated on the meter. The differential
amplifier is used in combination with concentricity 8-84. TYPICAL LINEAR PROFILE MEASURING
gaging equipment to measure wall thickness devi- EQUIPMENT. The linear profile measuring equip-
ations to an accuracy of a few millionths of an inch. ment is a mechanical-electrical instrument which
provides a permanent magnified record of the shape,
8-82. LINEAR PROFILE MEASURING PROCE- height and spacing of surface irregularities. The
DURES. Measuring linear profiles involves checking tracing component transforms the physical displace-
the linearity or straightness of a surface against a ment of the stylus into electrical values. These
reference straight line path. A stylus attached to electrical values are translated onto graph paper
an electronic sensing member is moved in a straight for evaluation and as a permanent record.
line on the surface. Deflections of the stylus in a
direction perpendicular (right angle) to straight line 8-85. SURFACE TEXTURE MEASURING PROCE-
movement will produce a signal that is proportional DURES. All surfaces are in theory designed with
to the surface variations causing the stylus to deflect. perfectly straight and/or curved contours. However
The signal is electronically processed and the output it is obvious that this is not obtainable in practice
is fed to a linear chart recorder. The chart trace with manufactured parts due to inherent manufactur-
line is an accurate representation of the actual ing errors, and tolerances. Deviation of the part
surface of the part. Various chart speeds can be surface from a theoretically straight or round contour
selected to change the horizontal magnification at consists of surface texture and profile. Surface
the trace and the vertical height is changed by texture is superimposed on the profile of the surface
electronic adjustment. contour.
8-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008025
Figure 8-25. Roundness Measuring Equipment
8-86. Surface texture is defined as “repetitive or c. Roughness Width. The distance between
random deviations from the nominal surface and successive peaks/ridges that makes up the surface
includes roughness waviness lays and flaws” (figure pattern.
8-27). Refer to American National Standard Institute
B-46.1 for details concerning surface texture, mea- d. Roughness - Width Cutoff. The maximum
suring equipment, and measuring procedures. width, in inches, of surface irregularities to be
included in a measurement of roughness height. it
8-87. Definitions and Terminology. The following must always be greater than the actual roughness
terms apply to surface texture: (Refer to figure 8-27). width of the predominant pattern of surface rough-
ness. Standard values are 0.003, 0.010, 0.030, and
a. Roughness. The finer irregularities in the 0.100 inch. The 0.030 inch value is recommended
surface texture including those that are produced for most bearing measurements.
by the production process.
e. Waviness. The widely spaced components
b. Roughness Height. The arithmetic average of surface texture. Can result from machine or work
deviation measured perpendicular (right angle) to deflections, vibration, chatter, etc. Roughness is
the center line (micro inches). superimposed on a wavy surface.
8-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008026
Figure 8-26. Bearing Surfaces that can be Evaluated by Linear Tracing Techniques
8-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-90. SURFACE TEXTURE MEASURING EQUIP-

MENT. The two different types of transducers that
are used to measure surface texture are called
velocity and displacement probes.
8-91. Velocity Transducer. The average vertical

velocity of the probe moves at a set horizontal
velocity over a constantly varying surface and is
proportional to the average roughness height. Cur-
rent standards use Arithmetic Average values to
describe surface roughness. Arithmetic average is
called center-line-average (CLA) in British Stan-
dards. Instruments based on velocity probes are
called averaging equipment since the total signal
output as roughness height values is fed to a meter
or chart recorder.
008027
Figure 8-27. Terminology used in 8-92. Displacement Transducer. Instruments uti-
Surface Texture Measurement lizing a linear displacement transducer are called
profiling equipment since the signal output includes
all components of surface texture (figure 8-29). The
profile is a direct trace of the surface and is the
f. Waviness Height. The maximum peak to sum of the roughness and waviness traces. The
valley distance. waviness trace is obtained by electrically filtering
and removing the high frequency component of the
g. Waviness Width. The spacing of successive profile. The roughness profile trace is obtained by
wave peaks or valleys. filtering out the waviness component.
h. Lay. The direction of the predominant 8-93. Specialized Form of Displacement Trans-
surface pattern. ducer. The equipment shown in figure 8-28 was
designed to rapidly measure internal and external
contours of bearing and bearing related components.
i. Flaws. Irregularities which occur at one The LVDT (linear variable differential transducer)
place or at relatively infrequent or widely varying converts the stylus movements to electrical voltages
intervals in a surface. which are amplified and transmitted to the chart
recorder. The stylus probe is guided by a built-in
8-88. Surface Roughness Readings. Surface granite block which is lapped flat and parallel within
roughness is usually specified as an Arithmetical 25 millionths of an inch. The equipment will repro-
Average (AA) and is usually measured with a stylus duce an accurate trace of the actual bearing
type instrument. The Arithmetical Average (AA) surface/contour. Use the equipment as follows:
system has replaced the Root Mean Square (RMS)
system as a means of measuring roughness. To a. Set-up and calibrate equipment.
convert from one system to the other, the following
relationships apply: b. Set tracing head to desired angle.
AA = 0.9 RMS (Microinches) c. Set bearing in a fixture on the surface of

the profiling equipment and position it directly under
RMS = 1.1 AA (Microinches) the stylus.
8-89. Methods of Surface-Texture Measurement.
d. Locate the stylus onto the bearing.
a. Roughness. Measure roughness by moving e. Start the apparatus to trace the bearing
the measuring stylus at right angles (90 degrees) surface.
to the surface pattern (lay) (figure 8-28).
f. Compare the trace to a calibrated standard
b. Roughness Width Cutoff. Use a roughness trace or measure the contour on the X, Y axis of
width cutoff of .030 unless otherwise specified. the chart paper.
8-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008028
Figure 8-28. Contour Equipment for Profiling Bearing Surfaces
8-94. The lead-in chamfer of a cylindrical roller b. Ball profile.

bearing inner ring can be easily checked with the
contour measuring machine as shown in figure 8-32. c. Roller contours (straight line, crown, corner
radius).
8-95. Laser Interferometric Transducer. This
equipment is capable of measuring in one traverse d. Shaft and housing shoulders contours.
of a diamond-tipped stylus the profile (form), surface
texture, radius and angle of surface inclination and e. Actual bearing dimensions.
actual part dimensions. The range is achieved by
the use of laser interferometric transducer. The stylus f. Surface roughness.
signal is transmitted to a microcomputer for detailed
8-97. BALL AND ROLLER CLASSIFYING PRO-
processing. The microprocessor separates texture
CEDURES. Balls and rollers are matched to specific
and form by fitting a reference profile to the measured
size and tolerance requirements depending on the
profile. The reference can be a best fit straight line,
type and precision of the bearing. Always refer to
a best ft concave/convex circular or conical arc.
the applicable drawing for size and grade (tolerance).
Basic measurement consists of two point gaging
8-96. Typical applications for the laser interferomet- using precision electronic comparators. Excessive
ric transducer are: stylus pressure will cause elastic deformation and
erroneous readings. Use stylus pressures listed in
a. Cross track curvatures of ball bearings. table 8-5 unless otherwise specified.
8-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008031
Figure 8-31. Surface Texture
Measuring Equipment
008029
Figure 8-29. Direction of Stylus Movement
for Surface Finish Measurement
008032
Figure 8-32. Checking the Lead-in Chamfer on an
Inner Ring Raceway Using a Contour Reader
8-98. Grade 10 ($10 millionths) or better rolling

elements require special handling to ensure accurate
gaging. Even the heat of the operator’s hand can
cause significant error when measuring or comparing
balls/rollers to tolerances of 10 millionths of an inch
or better.
8-99. Ball and Roller Classifying (Sizing) Equip-

ment (Figure 8-33 and 8-34). Use an electronic
comparator that is equipped with a special anvil and
interchangeable cross slides for precision selection
of balls or rollers into matched sets. The cross slide
locates the ball or roller under the gaging stylus
for measurement and then guides the ball or roller
008030
into a discharge chute. An interchangeable bushing
Figure 8-30. Chart Traces Showing
adapter is used to guide the ball or roller from the
Components of Surface Texture
feed chute to the cross slide.
8-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-104. R A D I A L R U N O U T ( A S S E M B L E D
BEARINGS) MEASURING PROCEDURES. Radial
runout is the degree of concentricity of the raceway
diameter with respect to the centerline of the bore
or outer ring diameter (figure 8-37). Runout can be
checked on an assembled baring using the following
procedures. Refer to paragraph 8-80 for procedures
for measuring the runout of unassembled bearing
rings using roundness and differential measuring
instruments.
a. Mount bearing on a precision arbor having

a very slight taper (0.0001 to 0.0002 inch on
diameter per inch of length).
b. Place gaging stylus on the center of the

outer ring.
c. Record the minimum and maximum read-

ings while rotating the arbor one revolution. Keep
008033 the outer ring stationary.
Figure 8-33. Roller Diameter Measuring Gage
d. Radial runout of the inner ring is the
difference the minimum and maximum readings
(figure 8-11c).
NOTE
8-105. The radial runout of the outer ring can be
determined using the same gage setup by rotating
Use a flat-surfaced stylus to measure ball the outer ring while holding the arbor stationary
and roller diameters. Use care to keep (figure 8-11c).
the fiat of the stylus parallel with the base.
Use a special lapping plate obtainable
8-106. When greater accuracy is required:
from the equipment manufacturer.
a. Support the ring and apply a dynamically
8-100. WIDTH VARIATION MEASURING PROCE- stable coaxial light load to the reference side of
DURES (Figure 8-35). Width variation is also referred the other ring to ensure contact between balls and
to as parallelism of sides. The width variation of an raceways.
individual ring is the difference between the largest
and smallest widths. b. Record the minimum and maximum read-
ings while rotating one ring one revolution with
8-101. WIDTH VARIATION MEASURING EQUIP- respect to the other ring.
MENT. Width variation can be measured using either
a single or double probe setup. Use equipment with c. The radial runout of the ring is the differ-
a least count of 0.0001 inch. Dial, air or electronic ence between the maximum and minimum indicator
gages are acceptable. readings.
8-107. Radial Runout Measuring Equipment (Fig-

8-102. Double Probe Setup (Figure 8-36). The ure 8-38). A precision bench center and arbor is
gaging setup makes use of two opposed transducers required to mount an assembled bearing for checking
that contact both the ring faces. A differential the radial runout of the inner and outer rings.
amplifier displays the width variation as a function
of the difference of the two signals as the bearing
is rotating between the probes. 8-108. BALL GROOVE RUNOUT (ASSEMBLED
BEARING) MEASURING PROCEDURES (Figure
8-39). The ball groove should be centered and
8-103. Width variation can also be measured with parallel with the reference side. The amount of
a concentricity gage system (figure 8-25). deviation from parallel is called ball groove runout.
8-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008034
Figure 8-34. Calibration and Operation Instructions for Electronic Comparator Type Ball Sizing Equipment
8-29
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-109. Inner Ring Groove Runout (Figure 8-11d). a. Place the bearing on an arbor having a
The groove runout with reference side of the inner very slight taper (0.0001 to 0.0002 inch on diameter
ring is measured as follows: per inch of length).
a. Support the outer ring on the face. b. Place the gaging stylus against the face
surface of the inner ring.
b. Place a dynamically stable coaxial light load
to the inner ring to seat the balls in the raceways. c. The side runout is the difference between
the maximum and minimum readings taken while
c. Place the gaging stylus on the inner ring face. rotating the arbor one revolution (figure 8-11e).
d. Rotate the inner ring one revolution. 8-116. Second method of measuring bore-to-side
runout is:
e. The ball groove runout is the difference
between the maximum and minimum readings. a. Place the reference side of the inner ring
on a flat plate and locate it by a stop near the lower
8-110. Outer Ring Ball Groove Runout (Figure end of the bore.
8-13d).
b. Place the gaging stylus directly above the
8-111. The measuring procedures for the ball groove stop and near the upper end of the bore.
runout of the outer ring is similar to paragraph 8-110
except for the following deviations: c. The reference side runout with bore is the
difference between maximum and minimum readings
a. The inner ring is supported. taken while rotating the inner ring one revolution
multiplied by the ratio df/2Be (figure 8-11e).
b. The outer ring is lightly loaded.
8-117. The runout of the outer diameter with respect
to the reference side is measured as follows:
c. The gaging stylus is placed against the outer
ring face while it is being rotated one revolution.
a. Place the reference side of the outer ring
on a flat plate of suitable dimensions.
8-112. Ball Groove Runout (Assembled Bearing)
Measuring Equipment. A precision bench center
and arbor is required to mount the assembled b. The inner ring is free. The outer ring is
bearing for checking the ball groove runout of the held against a stop located near the lower corner
outer rings. Accurately support the outer ring while of the outside diameter.
checking the runout of inner ring ball groove.
c. The runout is the difference between the
8-113. BALL GROOVE RUNOUT MEASURING minimum and the maximum readings of the indicator
EQUIPMENT. Use equipment with a least count of taken while rotating the outer ring one revolution
0.0001 inches. Dial air or electronic gaging is (figure 8-13e).
acceptable. A universal flushness gage can be
readily adapted to measure ball groove runout. 8-118. BORE AND OUTER DIAMETER RUNOUT
WITH REFERENCE SIDE MEASURING EQUIP-
8-114. BORE AND OUTER DIAMETER RUNOUT/ MENT. Use equipment with a least count of 0.0001
SQUARENESS WITH REFERENCE SIDE MEA- inch. Dial, air or electronic gages are acceptable.
SURING PROCEDURES. The bore surface of the The following equipment is required to measure bore
inner ring should be square/right angle (90 degrees) and outer diameter runout with reference side:
with the face of the ring. The amount of deviation
from true squareness is called bore runout with the a. Bore Runout. A precision bench center and
reference side (figure 8-40). Use the same proce- arbor is required to check bore runout/squareness
dures for checking the runout or squareness of the with reference side.
outer diameter with respect to the reference side.
b. Outer Diameter Runout. A flat reference
8-115. The runout of the bore with the reference plate is required to check outer diameter runout/
side is measured as follows: squareness with reference side.
8-30
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
008035
Figure 8-35. Width Variation of an Inner Ring
008038
Figure 8-38. Radial Runout Measuring Equipment
008039
Figure 8-39. Ball Groove Runout
Measuring Equipment
008036
Figure 8-36. Differential Measurement
of Width Variation
008037
Figure 8-37. Radial Runout of Ball 008040
Groove with Respect to the Bore Figure 8-40. Bore Runout with Reference Side
8-31
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
8-119. ROLLER CORNER RADIUS RUNOUT MEA-

SUREMENT. The corner radius of a roller is an
important parameter for cylindrical roller bearings.
An improper or uncontrolled corner radius can
adversely affect bearing performance and is espe-
cially important for high speed roller bearings. When
the corner radius varies on individual rollers within
a roller set, detrimental skewing is initiated and
bearing life is reduced. Individual rollers are checked
by placing a stylus tip on the corner and rotating
the roller as shown in figure 8-41.
8-120. FLATNESS MEASURING PROCEDURES.

Bearings with ring faces that are used as carbon
008041
seal contacting surfaces will require the use of Figure 8-41. Checking the Corner
optical flat equipment to determine the condition of Radius Runout of a Roller
the ring face surface. The flatness of the ring face
surface is measured as follows:
8-124. HAND FEEL TESTS. Bearings that cannot
a. Place the flat on the bearing ring face be visually inspected internally will be given hand
surface. feel tests to determine bearing condition. Experi-
enced personnel shall conduct these tests. Person-
b. Observe the interference bands that appear nel without a background in bearing analysis cannot
between the two surfaces. The bands are the result be expected to know the subtle differences between
of a very slight wedge of air between the work acceptable and defective bearings. The following
surface and the bottom surface of the flat. The bands procedures apply:
indicate the steepness of the wedge of air (figure
8-42). a. Apply a light film of oil to the active bearing
surfaces.
8-121. FLATNESS MEASURING EQUIPMENT. A
highly polished optical flat, made of either fused b. Check bearing wear by feeling the axial
quartz or pyrex, is used with a monochromatic (one (end) play, radial play, and rock. Use a new bearing
color/wavelength) light source (figure 8-43). The light as a standard of comparison.
source is usually a helium grid that emits a light
with a dominating wavelength of 23.2 millionths of
an inch. This gives a constant band width of 11.6 (1) Check internal axial clearance by hold-
millionths (0.0000116) inch. Using this value as a ing the inner ring and applying a slight alternating
standard, comparison measurements can be made pressure perpendicular (right angle) to the opposite
to within millionths of an inch. face of the outer ring. Do not tilt or rock the rings.
8-122. MECHANICAL TESTING. (2) Check internal radial clearance by hold-

ing the inner ring and applying pressure perpendicu-
lar (right angle) to the bore and outside diameter.
8-123. GENERAL. The amount of mechanical test-
ing of rolling bearings that will be required will
depend on the application. Although visual and (3) Check rock by tilting one ring with
dimensional inspections can detect most bearing respect to the other ring.
discrepancies, there are certain operating character-
istics that require dynamic (rotating) testing for c. Hold the bearing flat so the axis of rotation
proper bearing evaluation. This is particularly true is in the vertical position to ensure contact between
of nonseparable bearings where internal surfaces the raceway and each rolling element. Spin the
cannot be adequately inspected. The extent of bearing, invert, and keep spinning. Bearings shall
mechanical and/or dynamic testing will depend on rotate smoothly without catchiness, chatter or other
how critical the bearing application is, and how rough running condition. Bearings not passing the
important it is to evaluate for smoothness, vibration feel test shall be cleaned and rechecked. Reject
and noise characteristics. the bearing if it continues to feel rough.
8-32
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
to measure rotational drag, and two common

methods are discussed in the following paragraphs.
8-127. Measuring Torque of Assembled Bearings.

The test is accomplished with the bearing mounted
on the shaft and in the housing (figure 8-44). Use
the following procedure:
a. Attach a cord to the shaft as shown in figure

8-44.
b. Attach the end of the cord to a calibrated

spring scale.
c. Pull on the spring scale and measure the

amount of force required to maintain rotation.
d. Calculate the torque or drag by multiplying

the pull by a radius equal to the distance from the
point of measurement to the center of the shaft.
Readings are measured in inch-pounds, foot-pounds,
or inch-ounces.
008042
Figure 8-42. Explanation of Fringe Counting
in Optical Flat Measurement
NOTE
Feel tests are subjective and require

considerable experience. Personnel per-
forming feel tests that is used to accept
and reject bearings should have a mini-
mum of 2 years experience in bearing
evaluation.
8-125. TORQUE TESTS. Duplex and stack bearings

shall be checked for rotational torque. This test is
normally accomplished by the production shop,
either during assembly buildup or at time of final
inspection. However, the bearing shop will often be
in a better position to measure the torque prior to
assembly. This will preclude the use of unacceptable
bearings and reduce the number of bearing rejec-
tions by the production shop for high or irregular
torque levels.
8-126. It may also be necessary to check the drag

of questionable and rejected new RFI bearings. The
008043
rotational torque, or drag, is the result of a thrust Figure 8-43. Optical Flat for Checking
load that is applied when the bearings are mounted Lapped Surfaces
and secured in the assembly. There are several ways
8-33
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
S A DF duplex mounting (face-to-face)

requires the clamping of the outer rings.
A specially designed jig or mounting is
needed. Perform tests as described in
paragraph 8-128.
8-129. Precautions to be observed during torque

testing are:
a. Remove all seals, gears, and springs to

prevent erroneous drag readings.
b. Use reduced quantities of lubricant since

the torque being measured is the result of a preload.
c. Maintain squareness of all parts to prevent

unwanted bearing loading. It is recommended that
the preload be checked with the shaft in the vertical
008044 position.
Figure 8-44. Measuring Rotational Torque
of a Duplex Set of Bearings
NOTE 8-130. VIBRATION AND NOISE TESTS. Various
types of equipment have been developed to evaluate
The pull needed to maintain rotation is the dynamic characteristics of new and used rolling
important and not the starting torque. Take bearings. One of the primary difficulties to be
several readings and average them to overcome is that a standard must be established
obtain reliable results. for each bearing size, type, and application. A
sufficient number of bearings must be evaluated to
8-128. Measuring Torque of Jig-Mounted Bearings. determine the limits of acceptability and criteria for
rejection. Realistic limits must be established which
a. Mount the bearings to be tested on a jig will reflect the end use of the bearing. This will
designed to meet the dimensional requirements of preclude the rejection of acceptabls bearings which
the actual application (figure 8-45). would needlessly increase the cost of overhaul.
b. Apply the required axial load by tightening

the adjustment nut to the torque level specified in
the application.
c. Insert the torque wrench in a cap designed

to fit over the outer rings.
d. Twist the torque wrench and read the

amount of drag.
NOTE
S Since the torque wrench is positioned

at the center of the shaft, additional
calculations are not necessary. This 008045
method of measuring torque or drag is Figure 8-45. Measuring Rotational

especially useful for helicopter stack Torque of Set of Stack Bearings
bearings.
8-34
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION IX
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING/INSPECTION
9-1. GENERAL. 9-10. The NDT equipment required for use by the
bearing shop will be similar to the standard NDT
9-2. This section provides special process instruc- equipment used throughout the facility or depot.
tions for nondestructive testing and inspection of Special fixtures and/or holding devices may have
new and used rolling and plain bearings. Nondestruc- to be designed and manufactured for holding or
tive testing (NDT) supplements visual and dimen- retaining bearings during NDT.
sional inspections for determining the acceptability
of bearings for use in aeronautical applications. 9-11. I N S P E C T I O N B Y N O N D E S T R U C T I V E
TESTING.
9-3. FACILITIES.
9-12. GENERAL. There are several NDT methods
9-4. The facility requirements of paragraph 5-4 will that will be used to inspect bearings for surface
apply to nondestructive testing and inspection. Addi- and/or subsurface defects. Nondestructive testing
tional requirements will be the responsibility of the is used to supplement visual and dimensional
local depot cognizant bearing engineer. inspection, improve bearing life, and to preclude
premature failure due to defects such as cracks,
9-5. PERSONNEL. seams, laps and inclusions. Due to complex metallur-
gical and material factors, good correlation between
nondestructive testing and individual bearing life
9-6. GENERAL. This method of inspection is
cannot always be attained. However, many defective
covered by MIL-STD-00410C, NADEP
bearings can be detected by nondestructive testing
INST.12410.25B, NADEP INST 4855.16J. Well
and many component failures can be prevented.
trained personnel are required for the nondestructive
Figure 9-1 is an example of a cracked inner ring
testing and inspection of aircraft bearings. Defects
that was detected by the dye penetrant process.
that cannot be found using other means can be
detected by using one of the following NDT methods.
Personnel dedicated to NDT work can be assigned 9-13. The following list shows the various methods
to the bearing shop. It is important to have a working of nondestructive testing that are in current use.
knowledge of bearings and their applications as well Approved methods will be described more fully in
as being an experienced NDT inspector. the following paragraphs.
9-7. CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. Person- a. Magnetic Particle Inspection

nel performing NDT inspections on bearings, other
than hardness testing, will be provided training in
b. Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection
NDT theory and given practical NDT work assign-
ments. They will be tested and certified by the
designated depot organization in charge of the NDT c. Electromagnetic Testing.
program. Personnel performing NDT on bearings
will possess a valid certification card and/or stamp (1) Eddy Current
as required by NADEP INST.485516J.
(2) Permeability
9-8. EQUIPMENT.
9-9. GENERAL. This procedure is covered by (3) Conductivity

NAVAIRDEPOT INST 5100.1F OS&H CHAP.18.
Nondestructive testing equipment shall be procured d. Ultrasonic Inspection:
for the bearing processing facility that will perform
the necessary NDT inspections. Routing bearings
to other shops and/or buildings within the depot for e. X-Ray Inspection
NDT inspection may subject the bearings to unnec-
essary physical and environmental hazards. f. Hardness Testing
9-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Used gas turbine engine main and differ-

ential shaft separable bearings.
b. U s e d h e l i c o p t e r d y n a m i c c o m p o n e n t
bearings (separable design). Figure 9-2 is an
example of a cracked outer ring that was detected
by magnetic particle inspection.
c. Bearings and bearing components where

magnetic particle inspection is required by applicable
handbook of overhaul instructions and/or local
engineering instructions.
d. Bearing rings that have been reworked by

grinding, honing and/or machining operations.
e. New gas turbine and helicopter dynamic

component bearings (separable design) that are
being inspected under a Quality Conformance,
SECTIONAL VIEW 50X MAG. “Special Inspection” or First Article Inspection Pro-
gram.
9-17. RESTRICTIONS. The following bearings and

bearing components shall not be magnetic particle
inspected:
a. Nonseparable bearings.
b. Nonseparable components of bearings.
c. Balls.
009001
Figure 9-1. Cracked Inner Ring Detected
by Dye Penetrant Process 9-18. PROCEDURE. Magnetic particle inspection
shall be performed in accordance with the general
requirements of ASTM E1444 and supplemented
with detailed requirements of the applicable overhaul
9-14. MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION. instructions as amended by local engineering instruc-
tions.
9-15. GENERAL. This type of inspection is covered
by ASTM E1444. With this type of inspection the NOTE
part is first magnetized by being placed in a magnetic
field. Fine particles of magnetic iron in liquid
suspension are then flowed over the magnetized Fatigue cracking in bearing rings may
part. A defect, such as a crack, will cause magnetic occur in the transverse and circumferential
leakage fields that will magnetically attract the iron directions. To ensure detection of cracks
particles and form a definite indication that will in any direction, each bearing part shall
pinpoint its location, extent, and shape. Fluorescent be magnetized in at least two directions
particles that glow under black (ultraviolet) light are at right angles to each other using the
preferred and shall be used for bearing inspection. circular and induced current methods.
9-16. Bearings Requiring Magnetic Particle In- 9-19. Circular Magnetization with Offset Central
spection. The following bearings shall be inspected Conductor (Figure 9-3). The following general
by fluorescent magnetic particle inspection: procedure applies:
9-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 9-1. Current Settings for Magnetizing

Bearing Rings
Outer Diameter Current
Less than 1 inch 400-500 Amps

1 to 2.5 inch 700-800 Amps
Greater than 2.5 inches 1200-1500 Amps
d. Flood the surface of the bearing parts by

hosing or immersing in the fluorescent magnetic
particle suspension and turn on the magnetizing
current.
7X MAG. e. Rotate the bearing 1/4 turn on the central
conductor, and repeat paragraph 9-19d.
009002
Figure 9-2. Cracked Outer Ring of f. Continue the process until the entire
Helicopter Support Bearing circumference of the ring has been magnetized.
g. Visually inspect the bearing parts for

NOTE magnetic particle indications (cracks and other
discontinuities) in a suitable hooded booth using the
Personnel performing magnetic particle proper intensity of “black light” (ultraviolet light).
inspection shall be qualified and certified
to Level II in accordance with local nonde- 9-20. Induced Current Magnetization Procedure
structive inspection requirements. (Figure 9-4).
a. C l e a n b e a r i n g p a r t s t h o r o u g h l y i n a. Rotate the coil to the working position.

accordance with instruction contained in Section V.
Surfaces to be inspected must be free from grease
or other material which might interfere with the
proper distribution and concentration of the magnetic
particles, or with the intensity, character or definition
of the deposit of the magnetic suspension.
b. Circular magnetize cylindrically shaped

parts such as bearing rings on a copper or brass
rod for 1/5 to 1/2 second. This method magnetizes
the bearing with the electrical conductor passing
through the inside of the bearing ring with the inside
surface of the ring against the conductor (figure 9-3).
The central conductor is clamped between the heads
of the magnetizing unit to ensure good electrical
contact.
CAUTION
Do not magnetize bearings by placing

them in direct contact with the electrode
plates. Serious damage will result from
electrical arcing.
c. Set the current level to values corre- 009003
sponding to the diameter of the rings (table 9-1). Figure 9-3. Circular Magnetization Process
9-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
009005
009004 Figure 9-5. Fluorescent Penetrant
Figure 9-4. Induced Current Magnetization Process Inspection Procedure
b. Set the current level to 1000-1200 Amps. 9-25. Bearings Requiring Fluorescent Penetrant
Inspection. The following bearings parts shall be
c. Position the bearing ring as close as inspected by the fluorescent penetrant inspection
possible to the coil. Bearings which are smaller in method:
diameter than the iron core shall be held against
the end of the core. a. Nonmagnetic bearing retainers that have
a history of cracking and service failure. This
d. Flood the surface of the ring with the especially applies to the roller retention tabs.
magnetic particle bath, then simultaneously stop the
bath flow and turn off the magnetizing current.
b. All retainers, balls, rollers, and nonmagnetic
e. Inspect the ring under ultraviolet light for materials when required by applicable overhaul
crack indications and other discontinuities. instructions and/or local engineering instructions.
9-21. Identify detected imperfections and record 9-26. RESTRICTIONS. When there is a possibility
data. Mark or tag the defective bearings to prevent of corrosion due to entrapment of the rinse water,
further use. Refer all bearings with questionable a solvent wash procedure shall be developed by
indications to the cognizant engineering personnel the local Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical
for final decision and disposition. Science Laboratory.
9-22. Demagnetize the bearings in accordance with 9-27. PROCEDURE. The fluorescent penetrant
instructions contained in paragraph 5-19. process shall be in accordance with the general
requirements of Specification MIL-I-6866 and
9-23. FLUORESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTION. detailed requirements of applicable overhaul and
local engineering instructions. General procedures
9-24. GENERAL. Fluorescent penetrant method of are as follows:
nondestructive inspection is covered by Specification
MIL-STD-6866. Parts are first coated with a highly a. C l e a n b e a r i n g p a r t s t h o r o u g h l y i n
fluorescent penetrant. The surface penetrant is then accordance with instructions contained in Section
washed off, leaving the oil that has penetrated into V. Greases, oils and other surface films will interfere
any cracks and laps. Residual penetrant will show with the penetration of the penetrant oil into surface
under black (ultraviolet) light as indications (figure 9-5). defects or cause false indications.
9-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Coat bearing parts with the fluorescent

penetrant solution.
c. Drain parts for 30 minutes to allow proper

dwell (remove excess penetrant).
d. Wash bearing parts by pressure spraying

with warm water.
e. Check completeness of washing procedure

under ultraviolet light in a darkened booth.
f. When using a dry powder developer, dry

bearing parts in a recirculating oven at a temperature
of 160_F.
g. Apply dry developing powder on all surfaces

to be inspected and let stand for the specified time.
Shake off excess powder. When using wet developer,
apply by immersion spraying or brushing.
h. Place wet developed parts in a hot air dryer

set at 160_F for 10 minutes.
i. Visually inspect the bearing parts in a

suitable hooded booth using ultraviolet light.
j. Identify imperfections and record data.

Mark or tag defective parts to prevent further use.
Refer bearing parts with questionable indications to
the cognizant engineering personnel for decision and
final disposition.
k. Clean all bearing parts immediately after

penetrant inspection to remove penetrant and devel-
oper.
9-28. ELECTROMAGNETIC TESTING (EDDY

CURRENT).
9-29. GENERAL. This method of inspection is

covered by MIL-STD-271F. This type of nonde-
structive testing utilizes the interaction of an alter-
nating magnetic field and circulating electrical cur-
rents. The most widely applied technique is eddy
current testing. A probe or through coil, carrying
an alternating current, induces an alternating current 009006
(eddy current) of the same frequency in the part Figure 9-6. Eddy Current Inspection Procedure
being inspected. Flaws such as cracks, voids, laps,
or differences in hardness and conductivity, will effect
the magnitude and phase difference of these cur-
rents. Two different types of probes are used: 9-30. A P P L I C AT I O N . E d d y c u r r e n t t e s t i n g i s
becoming more useful for inspecting bearings for
a. a probe coil which is placed perpendicular subsurface flaws and material condition. It is also
(right angle) to the surface to be inspected, and being used to replace the acid etch that is used
to inspect for grind burns on bearing surfaces. Eddy
b. a circumferential coil through which the test current testing is currently used in the following
part is passed (figure 9-6). applications:
9-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Metal Identification - The primary use of

eddy current testing in bearing inspection has been
to screen bearings and bearing parts for material
identification. As an example; using a coil probe,
and a known material as a standard, bearings
manufactured of AISI 52100 steel and AISI 440C
corrosion resistant steel can be easily identified and
separated.
b. Material Condition - Many bearing manufac-

turers are utilizing eddy current testing instead of
acid etch to detect surface tempering (grind burn)
conditions that may have occurred during the metal
removing processes. Improper grinding of bearing
surfaces can cause sufficient overheating that will
soften the metal.
9-31. T h e M a t e r i a l s E n g i n e e r i n g L a b o r a t o r y /
Physical Science Laboratory will be responsible for
developing procedures and processes for using eddy
current to evaluate bearings.
9-32. INDENTATION HARDNESS TESTING. 009007

Figure 9-7. Principle of Hardness Test
9-33. GENERAL. Hardness testing is used to
measure the resistance of a material to permanent b. Used bearings that show signs of heat
deformation. Relationships have been established discoloration.
between hardness values and tensile strength. c. New or used bearings that appear to be
Hardness testing of bearing steels is usually of the wrong material or material hardness.
performed with equipment that provides readings
in Rockwell numbers. Refer to table 9-2 for d. New or used bearings that are being
comparison of Rockwell C values to tensile strength. qualified for use as replacement/substitute bearings.
9-34. Rockwell hardness tests are based on the 9-37. HARDNESS TESTING PROCEDURE. The
measurement of the depth of penetration of a following procedures for conducting hardness tests
diamond tipped penetrator into the material being shall be followed:
tested. A minor load is applied that seats the
penetrator in the part and establishes a reference a. Carefully follow the equipment manufac-
or “Set” position. A major load is then applied and turers instructions when using the hardness testing
the depth of the penetration from the “Set” position equipment to perform hardness tests on bearings.
is measured in terms of a number read on the gage b. Setup hardness tester for Rockwell C
(figure 9-7). readings using a calibration block.
9-35. Bearing steels are heat treated to high c. Place the bearings so that the ring face
strength levels in order to carry the required loads lies flat on the flat anvil under the indicator.
and meet the designed service life. Aeronautical
bearings will have hardness values that range from d. Align the bearing so that the indicator will
56 to 66 Rockwell C. contact a flat area on the ring face.
e. Perform hardness tests on the face of the
9-36. BEARINGS REQUIRING HARDNESS TES- ring.
TING. The following bearings shall be inspected by
hardness testing. f. Take a minimum of three hardness tests
at different places on the ring. Be careful not to
a. New bearings that are inspected under First get too close to the edge of the ring face or overlap
Article, Quality Conformance and other Special other indentations or markings. Average the three
Inspection Programs. readings.
9-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
g. Record hardness readings. Table 9-2. Approximate Tensile Strength for

Rockwell C Hardness Numbers
h. Compare recorded hardness values to
for Steel (Continued)
drawing requirements.
i. Stone or lap the raised metal around the Rockwell C Tensile Strength
indentations.
53 269,000
9-38. HARDNESS VERSUS TENSILE STRENGTH. 52 262,000
Hardness testing is a measure of the resistance
of material to permanent indentation. Relationships 51 253,000
have been established between hardness values and 50 245,000
tensile strength. Hardness testing of bearing steels
is usually performed with equipment that provides 49 239,000
reading in Rockwell numbers. Refer to table 9-2 48 232,000
for comparison of Rockwell C values to tensile
strength. 47 225,000
CAUTION 46 219,000
The accuracy of Hardness testing of a 45 212,000

curved surface decreases with a decrease 44 206,000
in the diameter of the part. Testing of
43 201,000
curved surfaces shall not be performed
without approval and instruction from the 42 196,000
local engineering authority.
41 191,000
Table 9-2. Approximate Tensile Strength for 40 186,000
Rockwell C Hardness Numbers for Steel
39 181,000
Rockwell C Tensile Strength 38 176,000
66 I 37 172,000
65 N 36 168,000
64 E 35 163,000
63 X 34 159,000
62 A 33 154,000
61 C 32 150,000
60 T 31 146,000
59 326,000 30 142,000
58 315,000 29 138,000
57 305,000 28 134,000
56 295,000 27 131,000
55 287,000 26 127,000
54 278,000 25 124,000
9-7/(9-8 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION X
LUBRICATION AND PRESERVATION OF BEARINGS
10-1. GENERAL. inspection area. Unprotected bearings can be easily

damaged by contamination and corrosion. Keep
10-2. This section establishes minimum require- bearing surfaces free of contamination during all
ments for lubricating and preserving rolling and plain phases of the process.
bearings and loose bearing components. Miniature
and instrument bearings are covered in Section XIV. 10-10.FINAL CLEANING. Bearings that have been
Bearings will require either a lubricant or preservative physically handled (hand contact) during inspection,
coating before being installed in a component or gaging or testing will require limited cleaning prior
sent to storage. The only exception is fabric-lined/ to the application of the lubricant or preservative
self-lubricated bearings manufactured of corrosion- coating. Bearings handled by gloves and/or handling
resistant materials that are designed to be installed devices will not require cleaning prior to lubrication
and used dry. or preservation. See paragraph 7-9 for additional
information on the use of gloves and handling
10-3. In general, bearings that are grease lubricated devices.
in service will be lubricated with the specified
operating grease. Bearings that are oil lubricated 10-11. Fingerprint Neutralizing. Treat all bearings
in service will be protected with a preservative that have been physically handled with a fingerprint
coating that is compatible with the operating oil. neutralizer for removal of any water soluble residues
Seals and shields that were removed from the on the external surfaces.
bearings for cleaning will be reinstalled as a part
of the lubrication process. NOTE
10-4. Additional information concerning the theory External rusting of bearing from perspiration
of lubrication, principles of lubrication and selection residues or environmental conditions can
of lubricants is contained in paragraph B-84 in be minimized by the proper use of
Appendix B. protective hand creams, suitable hand
coverings and a preservative oil film on
10-5. FACILITIES. bearing surfaces during all waiting periods.
10-6. UNINSTALLED BEARINGS. Lubrication and a. Place bearings in vertically agitated tanks
preservation of uninstalled rolling and plain bearings containing fingerprint neutralizer, Specification
shall be performed in a dust and humidity controlled MIL-C-15074.
environment. The working area shall be located in
a designated part of the clean room complex and b. Agitate for approximately 2 minutes or
be subject to the same environmental control as sufficient time to dissolve the water-soluble residues
specified for the inspection and gaging areas in (figure 10-1).
paragraphs 7-3 and 8-4. Refer to Section XV
(Processing Facilities) and paragraph B-208 in c. Rinse bearings for 5 minutes in vertically
Appendix B for more information on facilities for agitated tanks containing solvent, Federal Specifica-
lubricating and preserving rolling bearings. tion MIL–PRF–680, Type II, or equivalent, to remove
residual neutralizer.
10-7. PERMANENTLY INSTALLED BEARINGS.
Bearings that are permanently installed in control CAUTION
rods, bell cranks, fittings, cylinders, control linkages
or aircraft structure by means of rivets, staking or Failure to properly rinse the bearings may
adhesives, shall be lubricated in accordance with cause discoloration and/or deterioration
instructions contained in Section XIII (Maintenance of component part manufactured from, or
of Installed Bearings). plated with copper, or made of a copper
alloy.
10-8. H A N D L I N G B E A R I N G S P R I O R T O
LUBRICATION. 10-12.HANDLING LUBRICANTS. Contaminated
lubricants can not be used. Every precaution shall
10-9. PROTECTION. Protect bearings immediately be taken to prevent lubricants from becoming
upon receipt from the visual and dimensional contaminated (figure 10-2).
10-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
to dispense the grease directly into the bearing

interior surfaces. Figure 10-6 shows an adjustable
greasing head designed and manufactured primarily
of nylon for use with the greasing table.
10-16.METHODS OF LUBRICATION. There are

several methods of lubricating bearings:
10-17.Controlled Methods. The best means of

controlling the amount of grease dispensed into a
bearing is to use a greasing system that will meter
the correct amount of grease as discussed in
paragraph 10-15. Other greasing equipment can be
used if the exact amount of lubricant per injection
into each bearing is predetermined by weight or
volume calculations. The easiest way to determine
the exact weight of grease for a specified percentage
010001
of bearing void is with an accurate weight scale.
Figure 10-1. Removal of Perspiration Residues
with Fingerprint Neutralizer CAUTION
Overlubrication can be detrimental to

a. Wipe off the original containers before bearing life.
removing the lids.
a. Clean bearing of all protective coatings.
b. Keep all grease containers closed except
during use or when the lubricant is being transferred b. Select an accurate weight scale.
from one container to another.
c. Weigh bearing to the nearest 0.1 gram.
c. Use a stainless steel spatula when trans-
ferring grease. d. Fill bearing void 100 percent full with the
specified grease. Be sure that the entire bearing
10-13.LUBRICATION EQUIPMENT. The bearing void is filled.
shop shall be equipped with a closed grease system
located outside the clean room. A minimum of 3 e. Weigh the bearing to the nearest 0.1 gram.
major use grease outlets is usually required, and
sufficient grease capacity should be provided for f. Subtract weight of empty bearing from
a minimum of 1 week without replenishment. The weight of 100 percent full bearing to obtain weight
system should use the original grease containers of the full pack of grease.
so that transfer of grease between containers is
unnecessary. g. Take total weight of full pack of grease and
multiply times the maximum allowable fraction of
10-14.Commercial grease dispensers are available bearing void to be filled to obtain weight of the
that utilize the above principles of construction (figure required amount of grease.
10-3). Container covers and tubing attachments are
an integral unit, eliminating the need for discon- 10-18.A n a l t e r n a t e m e t h o d o f d e t e r m i n i n g
nection during drum replacement. The system should percentage of grease in a bearing is to substitute
use the original grease containers so that transfer a low melting material such as petrolatum, Federal
of grease between containers is unnecessary. Specification VV-P-236, with a known specific weight
for the specified grease. The melting point of
10-15.Grease Dispensing Equipment. The grease petrolatum is 140_F. Using a low melting material
dispensing table shown in figures 10-4 and 10-5 will ensure 100 percent filling of the bearing void.
was developed to dispense variable, metered Weight conversion will be necessary when deter-
amounts of grease. The grease table can be built mining the weight of grease to be used from the
to dispense as many greases as required by the low melting material, since there is usually a
depot. Different greasing heads can be developed difference in specific weight.
10-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
d. Make sure that roller paths are covered

with a continuous film of grease.
e. Wipe a film of grease over the exposed

roller surfaces.
f. Make sure there is a continuous film of

grease on the inner ring surfaces.
10-21.LUBRICATING BEARINGS WITH OIL. Bear-

ings that are lubricated in service by a circulating
or central supply of lubricating oil, shall be lubricated
with the operating oil. Filter the oil through a 5 micron
filter.
10-22.Bearings that are destined for Supply storage,

extended local storage, or indeterminate storage,
010002 shall be preserved in accordance with instructions
Figure 10-2. Contamination of Lubricants contained in Section Xl. A 30 to 90 day shelf life
by Improper Handling Procedures is generally imposed on most mineral and synthetic
oils used for temporary bearing protection. Refer
to paragraph 11-56 for recommended shelf life.
10-19.Approximate Method. When an approximate
amount of lubricant is acceptable and accurate 10-23.Many small precision bearings are expected
greasing facilities are not available, the bearing may to operate in service with only an initial oil lubrication.
be hand packed to ensure complete coverage and Where torque and slow running characteristics are
then the excess grease removed with a small significant factors, lubricate the bearings with clean
stainless steel or teflon spatula (figure 10-7). Weigh operating oil that has been filtered in accordance
sample bearings in accordance with paragraph 10-17 with instructions in paragraph 14-170.
to establish the correct amount of grease.
10-24.Small amounts of oil are actually needed to
NOTE provide a satisfactory lubricating film between the
moving surfaces of the bearing. The amount of oil
Spin bleeding excess quantities of grease needed increases as the bearing size and speed
out of aeronautical bearings is not per- increases and as loads become more severe. Large
mitted. Many greases break down using heavily loaded bearings are lubricated with larger
this procedure, and the remaining excess amounts of oil to dissipate heat generated within
quantity of grease is packed tightly around the bearing.
the rolling elements and retainer in the
outer ring raceway area. 10-25.LUBRICATING BEARING WITH GREASE.
10-20.Hand Lubrication. Greasing bearings by 10-26.Correct Lubrication. Fill the internal void of
hand is not normally recommended because of the the bearing with a one-third (1/3) full pack of the
possibility of contamination. However, wheel bear- specified grease.
ings and other very large bearings may be lubricated
NOTE
in this manner by Intermediate Maintenance Activi-
ties when pressure systems are not available. The The one-third full pack requirement is
following procedures apply: applicable to all grease lubricated bear-
ings unless otherwise stated in applicable
a. Wash hands. instructions.
b. Wear rubber or plastic gloves. 10-27.Tests have shown that only the grease im-
mediately adjacent to and in contact with the bearing
c. Ta k e a s i z e a b l e a m o u n t o f c l e a n , provides actual lubrication. Grease shall be applied
moisture-free grease on the palm of one hand, grasp equally to both sides of the bearing whenever
the bearing assembly in the other hand, and force possible. There is a significant reduction in bearing
the grease between the inner ring and retainer life (up to 50 percent) when the lubricant is applied
(figure 10-8). to only one side of the bearing.
10-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
10-28.Underlubrication. Insufficient amounts of

grease will cause premature bearing failure. The
oil component of the grease is quickly expended
and higher operating temperatures and internal
bearing wear will result in early failure.
10-29.Overlubrication. Excessive amounts of

grease inside bearings causes a churning action
to occur with corresponding rises in temperature
and volume. This is particularly true of bearings
running at high speeds where the churning lubricant
will cause the bearing to run excessively hot.
NOTE
A series of controlled tests have shown

that the amount of grease within a bearing
will effect the operating temperature of
the bearing. Properly lubricated bearings
had an equilibrium temperature of 100_F.
When the bearings were one-third full the
temperature was 102_F; with a two thirds
pack the temperature was 107_F; and with
the bearings fully packed a temperature
of 136_F was reached.
10-30.The excess grease of an overlubricated bear-

ing will be thrown out, causing contamination or
possible malfunction of other components. Overlu-
brication can cause early grease breakdown and
premature bearing failure.
010003 10-31.Contaminated Grease. The condition of the

Figure 10-3. Pressured Lubrication System grease used to lubricate bearings is also important.
for Dispensing Grease Greases present a problem because they usually
contain foreign particles and cannot always be
filtered. Military specifications allow particles of a
certain size to be present in grease. These allowable
particles exceed the acceptable limits for some
precision bearing applications. Special clean greases
have been developed for use in miniature and
NOTE
Specification MIL-G-81937 has been de-

veloped for critical applications requiring
an ultra clean grease. Particulate size is
limited to 2000 particles per milliliter of
10 microns diameter or larger. Particles
35 microns or larger are not allowed.
10-32.Handling Greases. The following precautions

shall be followed when handling greases for bearing
applications:
010004
Figure 10-4. Grease Dispensing Table a. Keep grease container closed except when
for Lubricating Bearings in use.
10-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CAUTION
The oil and thickener components of

grease cannot be blended back together
by hand stirring. The oil is lost to the
grease as available lubricating oil.
i. Do not filter greases through a screen

smaller than 200 mesh unless approved by the local
Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science
Laboratory. A 200 mesh screen will effectively
remove particles over 75 microns in size.
10-33.LUBRICATING GROUP A (POWER PLANT)

BEARINGS. Power plant bearings are usually lubri-
cated from a central recirculating oil system. The
bearings will be lubricated with the same oil used
in the application or with a compatible preservative
oil/compound.
010005 10-34.Main Shaft and Accessory Bearings (Navy/

Figure 10-5. Grease Table in Use Army). Lubricate by dip coating in oil, Specification
MIL–PRF–23699 or corrosion preventative, MIL–
PRF–32033.
b. Do not leave the container lid off for
extended periods of time.
10-35.Main Shaft and Accessory Bearings (Air
Force). Lubricate by dip coating in oil, Specifications
c. Use nonshedding clean implements for
MIL–PRF-7808 or preservative oil, Specification
transferring grease from the container.
MIL–PRF-8188.
d. Do not mix lubricants of different specifica-
tions. 10-36.Linkage/Control Box Bearings. Consult ap-
plicable drawings and/or overhaul instructions.
CAUTION
10-37.Fuel-Lubricated Power Plant Bearings. Lu-
Some greases are not compatible when bricate by dip coating in corrosion preventative,
mixed together and may cause bearing MIL–PRF–32033.
failure.
NOTE
e. Submit samples of greases to the Materials
Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory Many small fuel lubricated bearings are
for certification before using them to lubricate bear- of instrument size and quality. They are
ings. Refer to paragraph 10-82 for laboratory certifi- procured and stocked under NSN’s that
cation requirements. specify synthetic oils, Specifications MIL-
PRF-6085 or MIL-C-16173. Use of bear-
f. Critically inspect greases that are older than ings lubricated with synthetic oils is ac-
three years for condition and acceptability. ceptable due to their small size and
insignificant amount of residual synthetic
g. Use the lubricant that is specified by the oil that could contaminate the fuel system.
applicable drawing maintenance instruction or engi-
neering directive. 10-38.LUBRICATING GROUP B (AIRFRAME AIR-
CRAFT CONTROL) BEARINGS. Bearings used in
h. Do not use greases with large quantities rod ends, pulleys, bell cranks and airframes require
of oil lying on the top surface of the grease unless more grease than normal. Near full packs of grease
it has been certified as acceptable by the Materials will help provide protection against fluid and solid
Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory particle contamination and give better corrosion
(figure 10-9). protection.
10-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
correctly utilized, the pressure method will provide

a more even distribution of grease within the bearing
(figure 10-10).
10-42.LUBRICATING GROUP C (INSTRUMENT)
BEARINGS. Refer to paragraph 14-158 for instruc-
tions concerning the lubrication of miniature and
10-43.LUBRICATING GROUP D (ROTATING ELEC-
TRICAL) BEARINGS. Bearings installed in rotating
electrical equipment are particularly affected by over
lubrication. The quantity of grease shall not exceed
one-third of the bearing void unless authorized by
engineering directive. This is especially critical on
the commutator or voltage pick-up end of the
electrical assembly.
10-44.Aircraft Generator Bearings. Lubricate bear-
ings with a one-third (1/3) full pack of grease,
Specification MIL-PRF-81322. Evenly apply the
grease to both sides of the bearing. Grease,
Specification MIL-PRF-81322, shall be used unless
otherwise specified.
010006
Figure 10-6. Adjustable Greasing Heads 10-45.Motor Fan, Blower Bearings. Lubricate bear-
for Lubricating Bearings ings with a one-third (1/3) full pack of grease,
Specification MIL-PRF-81322. Evenly apply the
10-39.Rod Ends, Cylinder Ends, Airframe Bear- grease to both sides of the bearing. Increase the
ings. Lubricate bearings with a full pack of grease, quantity of grease for heavily loaded or reversing
Specification MIL-PRF–81322. applications to a one half (1/2) full pack. Use Grease,
Specification MIL-PRF-81322 unless otherwise spe-
NOTE cified.
10-46.Nonremovable Shielded or Sealed Bearing.
Specification MIL-PRF-81322 grease shall
Bearings that are equipped with nonremovable seals
be used unless another lubricant is specifi-
or shields cannot be lubricated with other than a
cally called out by a local engineering
full pack of grease. There is no way to control the
directive or Service Command directive.
amount or location of the grease inside the bearing.
10-40.Wheel Bearings. Only those nonremovable shielded or sealed bear-
ings that are to be used in oscillating and/or
a. Lubricate wheel bearings, including those noncritical low speed (1000 rpm or less) applications
used on helicopters, with grease, Specification shall be relubricated with grease.
MIL-PRF-81322. 10-47.Hydraulic Accessory Bearings. Lubricate
accessory bearings used in pumps, control valves,
b. Completely cover the rollers, retainer and air compressors and other similar components with
cone with a continuous film of grease. a one-third (1/3) full pack of grease specified in
the applicable overhaul instruction. Lubricate bear-
c. Wheel bearings packaged as a complete ings operating in hydraulic fluid with a dip coating
bearing assembly (cup, cone, and roller assembly) of corrosion preventative, MIL–PRF–32033.
shall be lubricated with a one-third (1/3) full pack
of grease. Excess grease will be thrown out of the 10-48.LUBRICATING GROUP E (HELICOPTER)
wheel assembly and will serve no useful purpose. BEARINGS. Bearings used in helicopter applications
often carry heavy loads and are subjected to
10-41.Wheel bearings may be lubricated either by oscillatory motion. Helicopter bearings will require
using pressure equipment or hand methods. The greater quantities of grease. Since churning from
pressure method is recommended for all but carri- rotation is not a factor, a one-half (1/2) to a full
er-type wheel bearings since it is easier, faster and pack of grease is acceptable. However, high speed
reduces the possibility of contamination. When helicopter bearings will require special attention.
10-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
10-55.Oil-impregnated bearings do not need grease

fittings, oil holes, grooves, cups, or wicks, although
sometimes these devices are used for supplemental
lubrication. Obvious advantages are slow feeding,
nondripping lubrication that does not require frequent
servicing. However, the lubricant eventually will
require replacement, and this may occur before the
bearing is worn out.
CAUTION
Cleaning with solvents, detergents and

cleaning compounds will prematurely re-
move the lubricant.
10-56.Cleaning. Clean oil-impregnated bearings

prior to relubrication in accordance with instruction
in paragraph 5-41. De-oil all oil-impregnated bear-
ings prior to relubrication. The only exception shall
be for new oil-impregnated bearings that will require
010007
relubrication after a machining operation. These
Figure 10-7. Removing Excess Grease
bearings will not require de-oiling if the recharging
with a Stainless Steel Spatula
oil is compatible with the original oil contained in
the bearing.
10-49.Oscillating Bearings. Lubricate bearings with
a 50 to 75 percent pack of grease, Specification 10-57.Relubrication. Use the following vacuum
MIL-PRF-25537 or as specified by the applicable impregnation procedure to re-oil porous metal bear-
engineering directive. ings. Figure 10-11 shows the difference between
vacuum impregnation and oil soaking. Vacuum
10-50.Drive and Rotor Shaft Bearings. Lubricate impregnation is the only recommended process.
bearings with a one-third (1/3) full pack of the grease
specified in the applicable overhaul instruction.
a. Place bearings in a suitable stainless steel
container.
10-51.Control Rod, Link and Bellcrank Bearings.
Lubricate bearings with a full pack of grease,
Specification MIL-PRF-81322 unless otherwise spe- b. Immerse bearings in the specified lubricat-
cified in applicable directives. ing oil. Either of the following oils are acceptable
depending on the operating conditions:
10-52.Gearbox and Transmission Bearings. Lubri-
cate bearings operating in mineral base oil systems (1) Mineral oil, Specification MIL-PRF-3150.
(such as Specification MIL-PRF-21260) with a dip
coating of corrosion preventative, MIL–PRF–32033 (2) S y n t h e t i c oil, Specification
MIL-PRF-6085.
10-53.RELUBRICATION OF OIL-IMPREGNATED
BEARINGS. c. Place the container in a vacuum oven
preheated to a temperature of 140_ to 160_F. Hold
10-54.GENERAL. Most oil-impregnated bearings are for 30 minutes.
made of die-pressed powdered bronze or sintered
iron as described in paragraph 2-59. Microscopic
pores in the bearing material absorb about 20 d. Reduce vacuum to 5 inches of mercury
percent lubricant by volume (figure 2-59). The pores (25 inches gage) or less and hold for an additional
of the sintered material act as a reservoir. A heat 30 minutes.
rise due to sliding friction causes the oil to flow
from the bearing material. Capillary action holds the e. Bring the oven to atmospheric pressure with
oil in the bearing and prevents it from bleeding out. the bearings still soaking in the oil.
10-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
shall be observed when machining oil-impregnated

bearings:
a. Machine bearing surfaces before oil-im-

pregnation whenever possible.
b. Use dead sharp cutting tools to cut the

bearing surfaces. This will reduce metal smearing
which will close or seal the surface pores.
c. Use high-speed steel or cemented tungsten

carbide cutting tools. Carbide tipped cutting tools
are preferred.
d. Avoid using any cutting oils, lubricants or

coolants during the machining operation. Use low
010008 pressure dry air blast to remove dust and chips from
Figure 10-8. Hand Lubrication of Bearings tools and bearing surfaces.
f. Allow the bearings to cool to room tempera- NOTE

ture.
Renew damaged surface pores with a
nitric acid etch. Neutralize and relubricate.
g. Remove bearings from the oil.
Allow for dimensional changes from the
h. Wrap bearings in Grade A barrier material, acid etch. Test for porosity in accordance
Specification MIL-PRF-121. with paragraph 10-58.
10-61.Grinding, Lapping, Honing and Reaming

CAUTION
Oil-impregnated Bearings. Grinding, honing or
lapping oil-impregnated bearings is not recom-
Do not allow absorbent materials (paper
mended because of the possibility of contaminating
cloth) to contact the bearings. Oil will be
the pores. However, if one of these metal finishing
drawn out of the bearings. Keep bearings
operations is required by engineering directive the
clean as dust will absorb appreciable
following precautions shall be observed:
amounts of retained oil.
a. Oil-impregnate the bearings prior to grind-
10-58.Testing Oil-Impregnated Bearings. Test ing lapping or honing.
oil-impregnated bearings by heating in an oven to
a temperature of 300_F maximum for 5 minutes. b. Use a softer open-type grinding wheel.
a. Surface porosity. Check to see if oil exudes c. Use a dead sharp, fluted, straight reamer.
uniformly from all bearing surfaces.
NOTE
b. Oil Absorption. Check for evidence of
appreciable sweating or beading of oil on the bearing The surface finish of an oil-impregnated
surfaces. bearing is limited by the irregularities of
the surface pores.
10-59.Lubricating Oil-Impregnated Bearing Dur-
ing Installation. Drying of the external bearing 10-62.APPLICATION OF DRY FILM LUBRICATION.
surfaces will occur during storage. After installation Dry film lubricants are sometimes applied to bore
apply a small amount of clean oil of the same type and outer diameter surfaces of bearings. Some
used for recharging to the bearing surfaces for initial uniball bearings have dry film coatings on the internal
start-up lubrication. This procedure applies to new surfaces of the outer ring. Some binders that are
bearings as well as to bearings which have been used in formulating dry films cure at room tempera-
recharged. ture, while others require heat to cure. Adhesion
is increased when the dry film lubricant is applied
10-60.Machining Oil-Impregnated Bearings. to a roughened surface. Application or reapplication
Oil-impregnated bearings may be subjected to ma- of the dry film can be accomplished by using the
chining operations. The following special precautions following procedures.
10-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(3) Strain the material through a standard

paint strainer, or two thicknesses of cheesecloth.
(4) Swirl the gun periodically during the

spraying operation to keep the dispersion in suspen-
sion.
(5) Adjust the spray gun to produce a

thoroughly atomized fine spray.
(6) Apply the coating in wet, uniform cross

coats to produce a final coating thickness of 0.0002
to 0.0005 inch. Apply two or three coats as required
to produce required film thickness.
(7) Air dry for at least 10 minutes between

coats. Spray dry films in a well-ventilated area or
hood, free from ignition sources.
d. Drying and Curing of Coating.
(1) Air dry for a minimum of 15 minutes.
(2) Bake for 1 hour at 300_ $10_F.

010009
Figure 10-9. Excessive oil Separation in NOTE
a 35-lb. Pail of Grease
These times and temperatures are appli-
cable only to material under Specification
NOTE MIL–L–46010. Other materials will require
reference to manufacturer’s recommenda-
Always refer to the specific manufacturer’s tions. Use lower temperatures for nonme-
recommended procedures before begin- tallic bearings or other materials which
ning the process. Mask bearing to prevent may be affected by the 300 _F curing
contaminating or damaging the active temperature.
bearing surfaces.
e. Quality of Coating. The baked coating shall
a. Removing Existing Solid Film Lubricants. be suitable for burnishing and shall be smooth and
Remove defective or unsatisfactory lubricant films uniform, free from cracks, blisters, foreign matter,
by chemical stripping, or by light vapor blasting with bubbles, pinholes, runs, sags, or other surface
200-mesh grit. The chemical method is preferred imperfections. Test adhesion of the dry film as
when close tolerances are involved. follows:
b. Final Preparation of Surfaces. Coat the (1) Apply a fresh piece of masking tape,
parts as soon as possible after surface preparation Federal Specification AA–883 to the dry film surface.
for improved film adhesion. The surfaces shall be
clean, dry, and free from grease, dust and finger- (2) Immediately remove the tape with a
prints. rapid motion.
(3) Reject the bearing if enough dry film

c. Application of Dry Film Coating. material is removed that exposes the base metal
surfaces.
(1) Apply the coating by spraying unless
otherwise specified in drawings handbooks or other (4) Accept the bearing if a uniform deposit
specifications. of powdery dry film material sticks to the tape.
(2) Stir the dispersion thoroughly. Use me- 10-63. R E I N S T A L L A T I O N O F S E A L S A N D

chanical agitation as necessary. Do not thin the SHIELDS. Reinstall the appropriate seals and shields
dispersion unless directed. after the bearing has been properly lubricated.
10-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
assemblies, should be coated with a preservative

oil for approved protection during shelf storage.
e. Bearings given Method IB-2 protection in

accordance with Specification MIL-B-197, shall be
coated with hot dip preservative, Specification
MIL-C-11796 Class 3.
NOTE
All open bearings shall be treated with

fingerprint neutralizer Specification
MIL-C-15074 or equal prior to processing
in accordance with paragraph 10-11.
10-66.EQUIPMENT. Provide tanks with temperature

capabilities for heating preservative compounds to
180_F (figure 10-12). Thermostatic control is re-
quired to prevent over heating the preservative
materials. Tanks will be required for fingerprint
neutralizing, solvent rinsing and hot dip oil applica-
tions. Typical equipment is shown in figure 10-13.
010010
Figure 10-10. Pressure Lubrication of 10-67.STORAGE LIFE LIMITATIONS. Shelf life of
Wheel Bearings preservative coated bearings varies with the type
of oil or compound that is used and the type of
a. Check seals and shields for condition and bearing material. Refer to paragraph 11-56 for
cleanliness before reassembly. specific storage time limitations for different types
of preservatives. In the following paragraphs, general
preservation procedures and materials are given for
b. Reassemble seals or shields on applicable general categories of storage, such as long-term
bearings using appropriate assembly tools.
storage, short-term storage and for immediate use.
c. Check the bearings for smooth running 10-68.PRESERVATIVE MATERIALS.
characteristics after the seals or shields are installed
and prior to forwarding the bearings to packaging.
10-69.Hot Dip Preservative. Hot dip, soft film
preservative compound, Specification MIL-C-11796
10-64.PRESERVATION. Class 3, is the most commonly used material to
preserve bearings. This material is a low melting
10-65.GENERAL. The following guidelines will apply petrolatum-based material that is satisfactory for
when preserving bearings: extended or indefinite storage of all open bearings.
a. Sealed and shielded bearings are usually CAUTION

lubricated with the operating lubricant and do not
require any additional preservation. Bearings preserved with Specification
MIL-C-11796 Class 3 material are not
b. Bearings of open construction will be ready for use until depreserved and lubri-
coated with a preservative film for corrosion protec- cated. Bearings preserved with this mate-
tion until installed in the assembly. rial must be cleaned and relubricated
before use.
c. A heavy, long-term protective film is re-
quired for open bearings not scheduled for immedi- 10-70.Cold Preservative. For periods of storage
ate use. up to 2 years, materials under MIL–PRF–32033, soft
film, cold application preservative, can be used when
d. Open bearings that are grease lubricated facilities for applying the hot film preservative are
in service, such as duplex and stack bearing not available.
10-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
10-73.Hot Dip, Soft Film Preservative Tank. Main-

tain the temperature of the tank at 150_ $10_F.
Temperatures over 180_F will cause deterioration
of the preservative compound. Separate multiple
stack bearings to allow the preservative compound
to reach all bearing surfaces for corrosion protection.
10-74.Preservation steps for long-term storage using

a hot dip, soft film coating, are as follows:
a. Immerse bearings in fingerprint neutralizer,

Specification MIL-C-15074, at room temperature and
agitate for 2 to 3 minutes to ensure complete removal
of water-soluble residues.
b. Rinse in solvent, Federal Specification MIL–

PRF-680 Type II or equivalent, at room temperature,
and agitate for 5 minutes.
c. Place bearings in hot dip preservative

compound, Specification MIL-C-11796, Class 3, at
150_F for 10 to 15 minutes.
NOTE
Large bearings may require a slightly

longer immersion time for the bearings
to reach the approximate temperature of
the preservative compound before remov-
al.
010011
Figure 10-11. Oil-Impregnation of d. Remove bearings from the hot dip tank and
Porous Metal Bearings allow to cool. Bearings shall be protected against
contamination during this period.
10-75.Short-Term Storage. Bearings to be held in

NOTE local storage for up to 2 years shall be immersed
in MIL–PRF–32033.
Unless otherwise specified by local engi-
neering directive, it will not be necessary 10-76.Preservation Steps for Short-Term Storage.
to remove the preservative oil coating prior
to installation in an assembly. a. Immerse bearings in fingerprint neutralizer,
Specification MIL-C-15074, at room temperature,
10-71.APPLICATION OF PRESERVATIVE COAT- and agitate for 2 or 3 minutes to ensure complete
INGS. The following procedures apply to preserving removal of water soluble residues.
rolling and plain bearings:
b. Rinse in solvent, Federal Specification MIL–
10-72.Long-Term Storage. Bearings stored for PRF-680 Type II or equivalent, at room temperature
more than 1 year in an uncontrolled environment and agitate for 5 minutes.
shall be protected with a hot dip coating of Specifica-
tion MIL-C-11796 Class 3 preservative compound c. Place bearings in corrosion preventative
or the MIL–PRF–32033 preservative. These types MIL–PRF–32033.
of preservative are required for preserving all bear-
ings except grease lubricated bearings and instru- 10-77.Short Term Preservation Up to 90 Days.
ment type bearings for Supply storage. Bearings shall be preserved as follows:
10-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ture. Refer to paragraph 11-58 for specific time

limitations on each type of lubricating oil.
10-79.Preservation requirements for immediate use

up to 90 days, using the system operating oil, are
as follows:
a. Immerse bearings in fingerprint neutralizer,

Specification MIL-C-15074, at room temperature,
and agitate for 2 to 3 minutes.
b. Rinse bearings in solvent, Federal Specifi-

cation MIL–PRF-680 Type II, at room temperature,
and agitate for 5 minutes.
c. Place bearings in the operating lubricating

oil, at room temperature, for 5 minutes. The oil shall
be filtered to a 5 micron level.
d. Remove bearings from the oil and package.
10-80.P R E S E R VAT I O N O F R E J E C T E D N E W
BEARINGS. Used bearings that are rejected as
unacceptable for use are disposed of as scrap and
010012 preservation is not required. However, preservation
Figurre 10–12. Application of Preservative requirements for rejected new bearings will depend
Material to Bearing Surfaces on final disposition instructions.
10-81.Preserving New Rejected Bearings. The

a. Engine Bearings (Navy and Army). Pre- following rules apply to preserving rejected or
serve oil, Specification MIL-PRF-23699 or corrosion questionable new bearings:
preventative, MIL–PRF–32033.
a. Return Supply stock bearings, that have
b. Engine Bearings (Air Force). Preserve with been inducted into the bearing shop for condition
oil, Specifications MIL-PRF-7808 or preservative oil, inspection at the request of either Supply inspection
MIL-PRF-8188, or as specified in the applicable or the using activity, to the Supply Department in
directive. a properly preserved status. Bearings are still the
property of Supply and shall require long-term
c. Helicopter Transmission Bearings (When protection in accordance with paragraph 10-72.
the Operating Oil is Petroleum Base). Preserve with
corrosion preventative, MIL–PRF–32033. b. New bearings that are purchased from
Supply stock by the using activity and found unac-
d. Helicopter Transmission Bearings (When ceptable for use shall be preserved for long-term
the Operating Oil is Synthetic Base). Preserve with protection when returned to Supply for credit.
oil, Specification MIL-PRF-23699 or corrosion pre-
ventative, MIL–PRF–32033. c. New bearings that have been removed from
the manufacturer’s package and found unacceptable
e. Hydraulic System Bearings. Preserve with for use shall be given long-term preservation prior
corrosion preventative, MIL–PRF–32033. to being returned to the manufacturer or prime
contractor for inspection and/or credit. The remaining
f. Fuel System Bearings. Preserve with corro- bearings that were not inspected shall be returned
sion preventative, MIL–PRF–32033. to the manufacturer or contractor in the original
unopened package. Failure to provide adequate
10-78.Immediate Use. Open bearings that are to protection for the bearings will allow additional
be used within 30 to 90 days may be coated with mechanical and/or chemical damage to occur and
the specified operating oil applied at room tempera- may adversely affect any replacement negotiations.
10-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
10-82.C O N T R O L S O N L U B R I C A N T S A N D
PRESERVATIVE MATERIALS.
10-83.Lubricants and preservative materials used

in the bearing processing facility shall be under the
control of the local Materials Engineering Laboratory/
Physical Science Laboratory. Tests and visual in-
spections shall be performed as necessary to ensure
the use of good, clean lubricants. The use of
unqualified, contaminated, and/or defective lubri-
cants can have serious consequences and may
result in component failure.
10-84.Lubricants shall be sample inspected and

certified for use prior to being used in bearing
lubrication. The following procedures shall be estab-
lished at each facility under the control of the
010013 Laboratory. These controls are considered to be
Figure 10-13. Layout of Equipment for minimum requirements. Additional controls should
Preserving Bearings be established to meet local problems.
a. Send a sample of each lubricant lot to the

Laboratory for analysis and certification. Certification
d. All bearings returned to the component is necessary when any one of the following condi-
contractor or bearing manufacturer for credit or tions are encountered.
analysis shall be handled as follows:
(1) New lots of grease or oil are received
from different lubricant manufacturers.
(1) Open bearings shall be preserved with
hot oil compound, Specification MIL-C-11796, Class
3, or when shipment will be completed within 180 (2) New lots of grease or oil are received
days by immersing in MIL–PRF–32033. with different batch numbers from the same lubricant
manufacturer.
(2) Sealed or shielded bearings shall be (3) Visual inspection of the grease or oil
preserved with corrosion preventative, MIL– reveals apparent excessive bleeding, drying contami-
PRF–32033. nation, etc.
(4) Age of the lubricant exceeds 3 years

(3) Instrument bearings or other bearings since manufacture.
under 1 inch outer diameter shall be preserved with
instrument oil, Specifications MIL–PRF–32033 or (a) Excessive oil separation in container.
MIL-C-16173.
(b) Contamination with metallic, nonme-
tallic, crystalline particles under microscopic ex-
(4) Individually wrap each bearing or bear- amination.
ing set in a material specified in paragraph 11-15.
Do not multiple package bearings unless they are (c) Excessive cracking or drying.
a matched assembly.
(d) Odor (should not be rancid).
(5) Package each bearing individually or as
a bearing set in accordance with paragraph 11-28. (5) Physical/Chemical Properties (As re-
quired). See tables B-14, B-15 and B-17 for test
methods.
(6) Identify each package in accordance
with paragraph 11-44. (a) Dirt Count
10-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(b) Dropping Point and controls shall be established to accomplish the

monitoring function.
(c) Worked Penetration
10-85.L I S T S O F M I L I TA RY S P E C I F I C AT I O N
LUBRICANTS AND THEIR PROPERTIES.
(d) Oil Separation
10-86.Information concerning military specification
(e) Evaporation lubricants are contained in Appendix B. Tables B-8,
B-9, and B-10 contain lists of military specification
b. The local Materials Engineering Labora- greases oils and dry film lubricants. Tables B-11
tory/Physical Science Laboratory shall monitor pre- and B-12 contain lists of physical and chemical
servative compounds to preclude the use of defective properties of specification lubricants. Tables B-13,
materials that could damage critical bearings. Tests B-14, and B-15 contain lists of inspection methods.
10-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XI
PACKAGING, STORING AND DISTRIBUTION OF BEARINGS
11-1. GENERAL. 11-8. Miniature and instrument-type bearings shall

be packaged in a Class 10,000 environment that
11-2. This section provides minimum packaging complies with Federal Specification FED-STD-209.
requirements for bearings against chemical and Relative humidity shall be held to 40 $ 5 percent
mechanical damage during storage and/or shipment. and the temperature to 72_ $ 5_F. Refer to Section
The RFI condition of bearings can be maintained XIV for additional information.
by following good preservation and packaging
practices. This section also includes instructions for NOTE
storage, shipment and distribution of bearings.
Temporary and/or short-term, in-house
packaging methods shall require the same
11-3. The general procedure consists of the
environmental control that is required for
following sequential steps:
long term methods of preservation.
(1) Demagnetization 11-9. Lesser controlled environmental areas may
be used for packaging bearings if the first wrapping
(2) Cleaning operation is performed in the specified environment
and the bag is heat sealed to exclude contamination.
(3) Drying This procedure will ensure a clean bearing that will
not be affected by the more dirt producing packaging
(4) Preservation/Lubrication operations.
(5) Intimate Bagging or Wrapping 11-10. PERSONNEL.
11-11. The preservation and packaging area shall

(6) Unit Packaging be kept clean. Minimum control for Class 100,000
environment shall include, but not limited to the
11-4. FACILITIES. following guide lines:
11-5. GENERAL. Environmental control of the a. Use lint-free coats or smocks.

preservation and packaging area shall be maintained
in accordance with instructions contained in Section b. Use head and shoe covers.
XV and the latest revision to Specification
MIL-B-197, “Packaging of Bearings, Associated c. Use lint-free, nonporous gloves.
Parts, and Sub-Assemblies”. Minimum requirements
for packaging facilities are as follows: d. Bring into the packaging room only those
items that are essential to the operation of the
11-6. AIR PARAMETERS. The air entering the preservation and packaging area.
packaging area shall comply with Class 100,000
11-12. Personnel shall take every precaution to
requirements. The relative humidity shall not exceed
prevent bearing contamination. Workers may use
40 $ 5 percent and the temperature shall be 72_
an antiperspirant hand cream in lieu of gloves when
$ 5_F. Industrial gases, such as sulphur dioxide
physically handling airframe bearings and other
and hydrogen sulfide shall be eliminated from the
noncritical bearings that are made of, or plated with,
incoming air by the use of scrubbers, filters, electro-
corrosion resistant materials (cadmium, aluminum).
static precipitators or other approved equipment.
11-13. Personnel lubricating bearings with grease
11-7. CLEAN ROOM CLASSIFICATION. The clean should use disposable polyethylene or vinyl gloves.
room shall comply with Federal Specification
FED-STD-209 for Class 100,000 environment or as 11-14. MATERIALS.
specified by the respective Service Command. Static
eliminators should be provided to remove electro- 11-15. GENERAL PACKAGING MATERIAL. Pack-
static charges from plastic materials prior to use aging materials shall conform to the following
in the clean room. requirements.
11-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
11-16. Intimate Wrapping. The following materials nylon. Antistatic nylon is usually color coded to
can be used as the intimate wrap for packaging differentiate it from ordinary nylon.
bearings:
NOTE
a. Polyethylene-kraft or cellulose acetate-kraft
materials, Specification MIL-PRF-121 (material thick- Antistatic polyethylene (pink poly) is
ness is determined by type, See table 11-1). known to react with certain instrument oils.
Antistatic nylon is the preferred material
b. Polyethylene plastic films, Federal Specifi- for the intimate wrap of instrument bear-
cation AA–3174 (2-6 mils thick). ings.
c. Nylon films (2 mils thick). 11-23. LOX Compatible Material. Bearings that are
used in Liquid Oxygen (LOX) or Gaseous Oxygen
NOTE (GOX) systems shall be packaged in an inner bag
of 0.002 inch thick fluorocarbon or chlorofluoro-
Do not use aluminum foil or polyvinyl carbon film. This film meets the compatibility require-
chloride materials to intimate wrap bear- ments of NASA Publication 8060.1. Use special
ings. cleaning procedures to clean packaging materials
for bearings being used in oxygen systems. Purging
gases shall be a precleaned, dry, inert gas such
11-17. Plastic Film Bags (Method IA-8). Bags can
as argon, Specification MIL-A-18455, or nitrogen,
be made from Specification MIL-PRF-22191, a
Specification, MIL-PRF-27401, Type I. Bag closure
fluoropolymer material.
shall be by heat sealing.
11-18. Plastic Forming Material (Skin Pack). Io- 11-24. METHODS OF PRESERVATION.
nomer plastic materials can be used to form a
stretched film over the bearing that is heat sealed 11-25. GENERAL. Bearings packaged for return to
to a raised bump backing made of cardboard Supply, or for return to a bearing manufacturer, shall
laminated with the same type of film (paragraph be packaged in accordance with Specification
11-35). MIL-B-197 and applicable requirements contained
in this manual. Bearings will be preserved for local
11-19. Flexible Bags (Method IA-8). Bags can be storage the same as for Supply storage. However,
made from Specification MIL-PRF-131, a laminated when storage time is known to be short or when
film material. bearings are destined for immediate use, less
stringent packaging requirements can be approved
11-20. CLEAN PACKAGING MATERIAL. Ordinary for local use. The method used will depend on
packaging material is not clean and is not acceptable available equipment and material. Figure 11-1 illus-
for packaging most bearings. Most conventional trates approved methods of preservation under
packaging materials will contaminate precision Specification MIL-B-197.
cleaned bearings when used as the first or intimate
wrap. 11-26. Method IA-8 will be the primary method of
bearing preservation. A modified IA-19 (single vacu-
11-21. Use specially fabricated and cleaned plastic um drape) can be developed for local use for
tubing and/or sheeting material for the first or packaging bearings for in-house depot storage.
intimate bearing wrap. In addition, materials that
have been specially formulated with antistatic proper- NOTE
ties are preferred over nontreated materials. Surface
cleanliness of the packaging materials shall conform The real corrosion protection of a bearing
to the requirements of table 11-2 for instrument is the preservative/lubrication coating that
precision bearings or other critical bearings. is applied to the bearing. When a bearing
is stored in a humidity and temperature
11-22. The material that is used most frequently for controlled environment the protection is
precision clean packages is 0.006 inch thick polyeth- also increased.
ylene film. When improved scuff resistance is re-
quired, 0.002 inch antistatic nylon 6 packaging 11-27. METHOD IA-8 (FLEXIBLE BAGS). Method
material shall be used. Nylon materials are more IA-8 is the most commonly used packaging method
scuff resistant than polyethylene materials. Table for bearings. Package bearing using the Method IA-8
11-3 gives cleanliness requirements for ultra clean as follows:
11-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 11-1. Types of Barrier Materials for c. Insert each bearing or bearing set into a
Packaging Bearings bag fabricated from Specification MIL-PRF-131 barri-
er material. Class 1 barrier material may be used
Preservation Methods for all bearings. Class 2 (paperback) barrier material
IA-8 shall be limited to bags of 5 inches square or less.
Weight of Bearings (MIL-PRF-121 Grade A)
d. Exhaust the air by conforming the bag to
Up to 1 pound Type II the shape of the bearing with the hands or by using
From 1 to 5 pounds Type I a vacuum source to remove the air.
Over 5 pounds Type I e. Heat seal the bags with a rotary or press
heat sealing machine (figure 11-2). Set the tempera-
Table 11-2. Surface Cleanliness Requirements for ture, dwell time and pressure in accordance with
Precision Clean Packaging Materials the manufacturer’s instructions.
Particulate Nonvolatile NOTE

Distribution Per Residue Per
Square Foot of Square Foot of Paperbacked barrier material (Class 2)
Surface Tested Quantity Surface Tested generally heat-seals at temperatures rang-
Size Range (Max.) Maximum ing from 250_ to 350_F. Class 1 materials
heat-seals at temperatures of 525_F.
0-5 micron Unlimited 1 milligram
number
11-28. Prefabricated Bags for Method IA-8. Fin-
5-15 micron 50 1 milligram ished bags can be locally procured under Specifica-
tion MIL-DTL-117, Class E. Approximately 13 bag
15-25 micron 25 1 milligram
sizes will be required for packaging aeronautical
25-50 micron 10 1 milligram bearings. The internal dimensions will range from
2 inches by 2 inches to 13 Inches by 13 inches.
Helicopter bearings will require bags sizes up to
> 100 micron 0 1 milligram 30 Inches by 30 inches inside dimensions.
Table 11-3. Surface Cleanliness Requirements for 11-29. Manufacturing Bags for Method IA-8. Bulk
Ultraprecision Clean Nylon barrier material conforming to Specification MIL-
Packaging Material PRF-131 may be used to locally manufacture bearing
bags. Cut the material to size using any suitable
Particulate Nonvolatile cutting device and heat seal on three sides using
Distribution Per Residue Per appropriate sealing equipment. There are two differ-
Square Foot of Square Foot of ent types of material that will be used depending
Surface Tested Quantity Surface Tested on the size and weight of the bearing to be
Size Range (Max.) Maximum packaged.
0-5 micron Unlimited 1 milligram a. Small Bearings. Use Specification MIL-

number PRF-131, Type 2, kraft-metal foil material, to fabri-
cate bags up to 5 inches by 5 inches.
15-25 micron 20 1 milligram b. Large Bearings. Use Specification MIL-
25-50 micron 6 1 milligram PRF-131, Type 1, reinforced material to fabricated
bags larger than 5 inches square. Type 1 bags will
50 micron 0 1 milligram provide extra strength for handling and shipping
heavy or bulky bearings.
a. Intimate wrap each bearing immediately
after preservation or lubrication with one of the 11-30. The following precautions shall be observed
materials specified in paragraph 11-17. when locally fabricating bearing bags:
b. Intimate wrap duplex or multiple stack a. Bag sizes are internal dimensions and seal
bearings as sets. widths shall be disregarded in filling orders.
11-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
011001
Figure 11-1. Approved Methods of Preservation
11-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE
Test must be conducted as soon as

possible after removing the bags from the
cooling unit. Quickly inspect the bag sur-
faces before the internal air pressure is
depleted. All packages exposed to water
immersion tests shall be discarded and
replaced with dry packaging materials.
11-31. Heat Sealing Specification MIL-PRF-131
Barrier Material. Certain precautions must be ob-
served to make good heat seals for bearing pack-
ages.
a. Clean Surfaces. Ensure that all heat sealing

surfaces on the equipment are kept clean, free of
grease, corrosion and dirt.
011002
Figure 11-2. Band-Type, Continuous Heat Sealer b. Warpage. Check equipment for warpage
and misalignment of heat sealing surfaces. Check
for worn parts which would prevent uniform contact
and pressure.
b. Keep seal widths to the minimum necessary
for a positive seal in order to conserve barrier c. Heat Sealing Capacity. Avoid using the heat
material and reduce the bulk of the finished package. sealer beyond its best recovery capacity during
continuous operations.
c. Control the quality of manufactured bags
by visual inspection and periodic “quick leak” testing d. Avoid Too Much Heat. The temperature of
of representative bag samples. the sealing surfaces should not cause delamination
or separation of the barrier material.
NOTE e. Pressure Adjustment. Maintain the pressure
at 40 to 80 psi.
Dwell time, pressure and operating tem-
perature will vary with the type of heat f. Handling. Avoid handling the bags in a way
sealing equipment and type of foil material that places a strain on the new seals before they
used. Bags shall be produced that have have cooled to room temperature.
positive vapor proof seals, free of foil
ruptures and pin holes. g. Wrinkles and Puckers. Avoid wrinkles and
puckers to prevent channeling in the seam and air
d. Periodically check sealed foil packages for leakage.
effectiveness of seals and quality of foil material.
A “quick leak” test consists of the following: h. Contamination of Material. Keep bag mate-
rials free of oils, greases and other contamination
that would interfere with quality heat seals.
(1) Cool the sealed bag to 50_F or lower.
i. Sealing Together Different Plastics. Do not
try to seal two different types of thermoplastics such
(2) Immerse the bag in warm water at as polyethylene and vinyl. Fusion (sealing) will not
approximately 100_F. Hold the bag parallel to the take place.
water surface and not more than 1 inch below the
surface. j. Test Seals. Test heat seals in accordance
with Specification MIL-STD–2073–1.
(3) Inspect the bag for air bubbles. The 11-32. L O C A L / I N - H O U S E PA C K A G I N G M E-

slight internal air pressure produced by the tempera- THODS. Many temporary, short-term storage and
ture differential is sufficient to detect any serious immediate use requirements can be satisfactorily
pinholing or seal failure. met with less expensive packaging methods.
11-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
11-33. Plastic Bag Method. Low cost bearing pack-

ages can be fabricated of unsupported plastic films
such as polyethylene or nylon. The bags are heat
sealed with thermal impulse equipment as shown
in figure 11-3. Depending on storage conditions, the
package can consist of a single bag for controlled
environment storage, or a second plastic bag over-
wrap for uncontrolled storage conditions.
11-34. Bags can also be procured in tear-pack rolls

with multiple, prefabricated bags connected by easily
separated seams or perforations. This type of
packaging is used for miniature and instrument size
bearings.
11-35. UNIT PACKAGING.
11-36. GENERAL. Bearings may require additional

packaging, depending on their intended usage,
method of preservation and final destination.
11-37. LOCAL STORAGE. Bearings scheduled for

delivery to production assembly shops for immediate
installation or to a central bearing storeroom for local
distribution will not require additional external protec-
tion. Forward bearings in any suitable container that
provides mechanical protection against handling
damage.
11-38. SUPPLY STORAGE. Bearings preserved in

accordance with Method IA-8, shall be placed one
to a unit container.
11-39. Fold the corners of Method IA-8 bags prior

to inserting them into the unit container to conserve
space and restrict movement. Unit containers shall
conform as closely as possible to the size of the
unit package without forcing to restrict internal 011003
movement and conserve space. Figure 11-3. Thermal Impulse Heat Sealer
for Sealing All Types of Unsupported
11-40. CLOSURE OF UNIT PACKAGE. Close unit Plastic Film Bags
containers with 2 inch wide tape conforming to ASTM
D5486 when the unit container is to be placed in
an intermediate container. Unit containers that are 11-43. MINIMUM REQUIRED IDENTIFICATION.
enclosed in an intermediate container that is used Identify all unit packages in accordance with Stan-
as a shipping container shall have the seams and dard MIL-STD-129. Minimum unit package markings
joints closed with tape a minimum of 3 inches wide shall be as follows:
conforming to ASTM D5486.
a. National stock number.
11-41. MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION.
b. Nomenclature.
11-42. GENERAL. Bearing packages shall be prop-
erly identified as to part number and other pertinent c. Prime contractor (OEM)/bearing vender
data. This will prevent confusion as to the contents part number.
of the bag and eliminate the need to open the
package for content inspection. d. Quantity.
11-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
e. Level of preservation. package with the words “Barrier Coating.” Refer to

paragraph 14-199 for information concerning this
f. Place and date packaged. special process.
11-44. SPECIAL MARKING INSTRUCTIONS. Mark 11-48. MARKING EQUIPMENT. A method shall be
all unit packages as follows: provided for marking the proper identification coding
on the bearing package. Some of the more common
methods utilize the following equipment.
a. Preserved - MIL-B-197.
11-49. Labels. The labels can be marked with an
b. Lubricated with (Specification No.), or Pre- addressograph or computer printer by using specially
served with (Specification No.). keyed rolls of spaced labels. Special imprinters with
adjustable type on cylindrical rolls can also be used
NOTE to mark labels. Personal computers are especially
useful for storing packaging data for use in printing
Bearings preserved with Specification labels for bearing packages.
MIL-C-11796 Class 3 compound shall be
marked “Clean and lubricate prior to use”. 11-50. Direct Imprint. Certain plastic packaging
materials, such as cellulose acetate butyrate, poly-
11-45. Local/In-House Packaging Methods. Bear- ethylene and nylon can be directly marked with
ings that have been packaged in vacuum formed heated type or addressograph plates (figure 11-4).
skin packs, plastic bags, or by other temporary The dwell time and heat level can be adjusted for
packaging methods, shall be permanently identified different material thicknesses.
with certain basic data. Self-adhering labels that stick
to plastic materials can be premarked by an address- 11-51. SUPPLY STORAGE.
ograph or computer printer, and placed on the clear
package material. Direct imprinting of the polyethyl- 11-52. GENERAL. The following procedures shall
ene and nylon bag by heated type or addressograph be observed in handling bearings that will be held
plates is also acceptable. in Supply storage:
a. Store all bearings under cover in a cool,

11-46. Minimum package identification shall be as
dry area. Excess heat should be avoided to prevent
follows:
unnecessary aging of the grease from evaporation
and separation of the oil component. Extreme
a. National stock number. environmental conditions of any kind are to be
avoided.
b. Prime contractor/bearing vendor part num-
ber. b. Do not tear open bearing packages just
to check the identity of bearings when they are
c. Date packaged. received.
d. Lubricant/preservative. c. Route broken and or opened packages

received from Supply to an approved bearing proces-
e. Local activity/CAGE code. sing facility for inspection and processing as re-
quired.
f. Used/processed bearing. d. Route undated and/or inadequately pro-
tected bearings to an approved bearing processing
Example: facility for inspection and processing as required.
RM3110-915-1971 AVER . . . . NSN
A02RS263-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prime Contractor 11-53. BEARING ISSUES. Issue all new and used
MIL-PRF-6085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricant bearings, including bearings refurbished by a desig-
91145 12/87 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . North Island Processed nated Bearing Refurbishment Center, on the basis
of a “First In-First Out” (FIFO) stock issue policy.
11-47. Identification of Barrier Film Coated Bear- This stocking and issue procedure will prevent the
ings. Bearings that have been specially coated with accumulation of older bearing stocks and reduce
an oil repelling barrier film coating shall have a the deterioration of bearing stocks due to overage
positive identification on the package. Identify the lubricants and surface corrosion.
11-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
11-54. DEPOT LEVEL STORAGE. All Ready for c. Environmental conditions of the bearing
Issue (RFI) bearings have the same stocking status. storage area. How well are the limits on temperature
However, a policy should be established to issue and relative humidity controlled.
used processed bearings as rapidly as possible and
conserve new RFI bearing stocks for extended NOTE
storage requirements and critical issues.
The type of barrier material used to
11-55. BEARING ISSUES. The following general package bearings is a secondary factor.
policies cover the issue of RFI bearings: Moisture-vapor transmission through the
barrier material causes the atmosphere
a. Issue used bearings first to meet local inside and outside the package to reach
production requirements. equilibrium after a relatively short time
storage period (days or weeks). Therefore,
b. Do not return used bearings to Supply stock. preservatives are the primary means of
protecting the bearing surfaces from corro-
NOTE sion damage.
Bearings coded repairable by the Services 11-57. The following shelf lives have been devel-
and that have been refurbished by a oped over a period of many years. These require-
Service designated Level II Bearing Refur- ments shall be observed unless modified by the local
bishment Center can be turned into Sup- cognizant depot bearing engineer:
ply as RFI stock material.
NOTE
c. Issue new bearings to fill material requests
from other government activities. Do not issue used Bearings must be adequately cleaned,
bearings to government activities without a written preserved, and packaged in accordance
agreement. with the specified requirements. Once
these requirements have been met, the
d. Issue bearings on the basis of “First In-First bearing(s) should be stored in an area
Out” (FIFO). This policy will require that the where the humidity and temperature are
packaging date be checked to prevent the issue controlled to prevent the deterioration of
of bearings with deteriorated lubrication and possibly preservation/lubrication and subsequent
corrosion. corrosion.
NOTE 11-58. MIL-C-11796 Class 3. Bearings preserved

with hot dip preservative compound, Specification
MIL-C-11796, Class 3 will have the following shelf
Bearings with package dates over 3 years
life:
shall be sample inspected in accordance
with requirements contained in Section IV.
a. Bearings with brass/bronze 3 years
retainers.
e. Issue new bearings after subjecting them
to the receiving inspection requirements contained
in Section IV. b. Bearings with steel retainers. 5 years
11-56. SHELF LIFE. A uniform shelf life on pre- 11-59. Grease Lubricated. Bearings that are grease
served and lubricated bearings is difficult to establish lubricated with external surfaces coated will have
since there are many factors to be considered. the following shelf life:
However, there exists a definite storage life limit
on most lubricants and preservative coatings. The a. Bearings with brass/bronze 2 years
three primary factors effecting storage life are: retainers.
a. Cleanliness of the bearing surfaces before b. Bearings with steel retainers. 3 years
the preservative/lubricant coating is applied.
c. Externally cadmium plated 3 years
b. Type of preservative/lubricant used. bearings.
11-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(1) Specification MIL-PRF-6081, 2 years

Grade 1010.
(2) Specification MIL-PRF-23699. 2 years
(3) Specification MIL-PRL-6085. 2 years
(4) Specification MIL-C-16173. 2 years
b. Bearings made of AISI 52100 bearing steel:
(1) Specification MIL-PRF-7808 90 days

(Air Force).
(2) Specification MIL-PRF-8188 90 days

(Air Force).
(3) Specification MIL-PRF-6083. 90 days
011004
Figure 11-4. Plastic Film Marking Machine
(8) Specification MIL-C-16173. 180 days
11-60. Bearings that are lubricated with a military
specification grease, with external surfaces uncoated c. Bearings made of AMS 6490 (AISI M-50)
will have the following shelf life: tool steel. Same shelf life as for AISI 52100.
a. Bearings with brass/bronze 2 years d. Bearings made of case hardened steels.

retainers. Same shelf life as for AISI 52100.
11-63. Bearings that are oil preserved (internal

b. Bearings with steel retainers. 3 years
surfaces only) will have the following shelf life:
* May require removal of corrosion products from exter- a. Bearings made of AISI 440C corrosion
nal surfaces prior to use. resistant steels:
11-61. Oil Lubricated. Bearings that are oil pre- (1) Specification MIL-PRF-6085 180 days
served by immersion in a storage container will have without barrier film.
the following self life:
(2) Specification MIL-PRF-6085 *1 year
a. Bearings with Brass/Bronze 2 years with barrier film.
retainers.
(3) Specification MIL-C-16173 180 days
b. Bearings with steel retainers. 3 years without barrier film.
11-62. Bearings that are oil preserved by a dip (4) Specification MIL-C-16173 *1 year
coating will have the following shelf life: with barrier film.
a. Bearings made of AISI 440C corrosion * May be evaluated after 1 year for potential 2 year
resistant steel. storage life.
11-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
11-64. Bearings left dry with no lubricant or preser- b. The levels of preservation that are specified
vative will have the following shelf life: in paragraph 11-29 can be reduced.
a. Bearings made of corrosion resistant steels 11-69. DETERMINING USAGE DATA. Valid bearing
with TFE liners. No shelf life limit. usage data and exact figures for bearing replace-
ment rates and bearing processing costs can be
b. Bearings stored in heated ovens in accor- easily obtained by the following method:
dance with paragraph 7-10.
a. Procure bearings on an initial 100 percent
(1) Specification AISI 440C 2 years replacement rate to meet overhaul/rework schedules.
(2) Specification AISI 52100 1 year
b. Route bearings removed from assemblies
to the bearing processing shop for inspection and
11-65. PROCUREMENT, HANDLING AND DIS-
processing as required.
TRIBUTION.
11-66. GENERAL. Methods of handling and distrib- c. Return the acceptable bearings to the
uting bearings within a government activity will vary central storeroom for reissue.
depending on the size of the bearing processing
program and the physical layout of the facility. The d. Determine survey rates for each bearing
following procedures have been used at a major application.
naval activity but are to be considered as illustrative
and the use of any or all of the procedures listed e. Determine replacement rates for each bear-
is a local option. ing application by subtracting the survey rate from
the 100 percent procurement requirement.
11-67. CENTRAL BEARING STOREROOM. A cen-
tral bearing storeroom is strongly recommended
because of the complexity of bearing identification 11-70. PRODUCTION SHOP BEARING STORAGE.
and the potential interchangeability in usage of Stocking spare bearings in the production assembly
individual bearings. The central storeroom can ser- shops should be kept to the minimum necessary
vice an entire activity and operate in close liaison to ensure the availability of the bearings needed
with the bearing processing facility. This will reduce to support production schedules. Overstocking pro-
many of the problems encountered in bearing duction shop can cause the following problems:
procurement and distribution.
a. Records on RFI bearing inventory will be
11-68. The bearing storage area should be environ- inaccurate, causing excessive new bearing procure-
mentally controlled. Controlling the storage environments actions.
ment can provide significant cost benefits that will
be worth the extra facility costs. An environmental b. Bearings will become overage in the uncon-
bearing storage area will have the following advan- trolled shop storage areas and will have to be
tages: returned to the bearing processing facility for inspec-
tion of preservative/lubrication and possible corro-
a. Recommended shelf lives for bearings that sion. This practice causes unnecessary costs in the
are specified in paragraph 11-57 can be extended. loss of RFI material and labor.
11-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XII
INSTALLATION OF BEARINGS
12-1. GENERAL. 12-9. Extra care shall be taken to avoid contami-

nating the bearings after they are removed from
12-2. Bearings that are received by assembly their protective package. Contaminating bearings
shops are either new or processed used bearings. during assembly can cause a malfunction or failure.
These bearings are precision mechanisms that have The use of protective anti-perspirant hand creams
been manufactured to dimensional tolerances mea- and/or suitable gloves is required.
sured in tenths of thousandths or millionths of an
inch. It is very important that care be taken to protect 12-10. FACILITIES.
these bearings during the installation process.
12-11. Bearing installation areas shall be kept clean.
12-3. RFI bearings have been correctly lubricated, Bearing life depends upon maintaining close toler-
wrapped, and packaged in environmentally con- ances and keeping foreign material out of the bearing
trolled rooms. Their usefulness can be permanently during installation.
destroyed before ever being placed in service by
careless handling, inadequate protection or faulty a. Keep areas where bearings are installed
installation procedures. free of abrasive dusts and corrosive fumes.
b. Keep tops of the work benches clean.

12-4. It is estimated that 90 percent of all bearing
failures are caused by one of the following condi-
c. Cover bench tops with clean kraft paper
tions:
(polyethylene treated kraft is preferred). A metal or
composition top that can be maintained in a clean
a. Contamination entering the bearing either condition is also acceptable.
before or during assembly.
d. Keep tools clean and in good working
b. Faulty installation practices. condition.
c. Inadequate or defective installation tools. 12-12. R E Q U I S I T I O N I N G A N D H A N D L I N G

REPLACEMENT BEARINGS.
12-5. Provisions for protecting bearings awaiting
installation or after they are assembled in the 12-13. GENERAL. Requisitioning and handling
component is usually left to the discretion of the bearings by the installing production shop shall be
mechanic. This section will standardize bearing as follows:
installation procedures and will prescribe correct
installation practices. a. Draw sufficient quantities of bearings from
the central storeroom for use only as needed to
meet planned quarterly schedules.
12-6. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS.
b. Do not use bearings from broken or opened
12-7. Production workers installing bearings shall packages. Do not open bearing packages prior to
be well trained in bearing installation procedures. bearing installation just to check identification.
Personnel installing bearings must understand and
appreciate the close toleranced mounting fits and c. Return bearings found in open packages
measurements used in bearing installations. An or in an otherwise unprotected condition to the
understanding of the need to balance shaft assem- bearing processing facility for inspection, processing
blies is also very important. and repackaging as necessary.
12-8. Installation of Group A, B, D, and E bearings d. Identification on the bearing package shall
should be the responsibility of qualified machinists be considered complete and accurate. If discrepan-
or equally qualified personnel. Group C instrument cies are noted at time of installation, return the entire
bearings are usually installed in an instrument shop bearing lot to the bearing processing shop for
by instrument mechanics. screening and inspection.
12-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-14. DEPRESERVING BEARINGS PRIOR TO b. Cover grease cans/containers when not in

INSTALLATION. The bearing processing facility shall use.
be responsible for depreserving all bearings received
from Supply when the installation of preserved c. Use clean stainless steel spatulas for
bearings will cause contamination and/or incompati- removing the grease from the container. Do not use
bility with the operating oil. wooden spatulas and other contaminating applica-
tors.
NOTE
12-20. PREPARATION OF BEARING MOUNTING
Bearings preserved with hot dip preserva- SURFACES.
tive, Specification MIL-C-11796 Class 3,
shall be depreserved prior to issue to the 12-21. Clean, inspect and prepare the bearing
assembly shops. mounting surfaces before removing the bearing from
the package. The following paragraphs describe the
12-15. The bearing processing facility shall issue procedures that should be followed in preparing
bearings to the assembly shop with a preservative bearing mounting surfaces.
coating that is compatible with the operating oil. This
will eliminate the need for any preinstallation clean- 12-22. SHAFT MOUNTING SURFACES. Check the
ing of bearings by the assembly shop. shaft for the following conditions and defects:
12-16. LUBRICATION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 12-23. Cleanliness. Clean and remove all loose
The assembly shop shall not clean and relubricate foreign material from the shaft and bearing mounting
bearings received from RFI stock at time of installa- surface.
tion. Bearings have been properly lubricated by the
manufacturer or the bearing processing facility. The NOTE
lubricant is identified in the stock number and on
the bearing package. A dirty mounting may cause misalignment
and/or poor bearing seating against the
shaft shoulder (figure 12-1).
CAUTION
12-24. Burrs. Remove all burrs and score marks.
Lubricant has been applied under con- Poor surface finish will not provide a good bearing
trolled, clean conditions and its replace- mounting surface and a breakdown of the ridges
ment is not only unnecessary, but its and raised areas may result in a loose bearing (figure
removal under most shop conditions can 12-2). Remachine or polish serious imperfections
destroy the protection given the bearing that are on the shaft. Limit dressing with abrasive
up to this time. cloth to the removal of minor burring.
12-17. When an incorrect or questionable lubricant NOTE
is suspected, route the defective bearings to the
bearing processing shop for inspection and relubrica- Excessive dressing with abrasive cloths
tion as necessary. will result in shafts that are tapered and
out-of-round shafts. A high ridge will be
12-18. LUBRICATION DURING INSTALLATION. left close to the shaft shoulder where the
There are certain bearings which require limited abrasive cloth did not reach.
servicing and additional lubricant at time of installa-
tion. Some bearings are equipped with grease fittings 12-25. Diameter. Check the dimensional accuracy
and require maintenance servicing. Wheel bearings of the bearing mounting surface diameter against
are normally coated with additional operating grease drawing specifications:
on exterior bearing surfaces and shaft mounting
surfaces at times of installation. a. An incorrect mounting surface diameter
causes an incorrect fit with possible damage to the
12-19. Where additional lubrication is required, the bearing.
following precautions shall be observed to maintain
the cleanliness of the lubricant: b. An excessively loose fit of the bearing on
the mounting seat will allow fast creep or turning
a. Clean grease guns and dispensers. of the inner ring on the shaft (figure B-35).
12-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
waviness which will cause uneven internal loading

of the bearing. Use either a micrometer or, prefer-
ably, a dial indicator for these checks. Take at least
two readings at right angles (90 degrees) to each
other and at two axial locations to check for
out-of-roundness and taper. Use precision air or
electronic gaging equipment for critical applications.
12-27. Shaft Shoulder. Check the shaft shoulder

for squareness with the bearing mounting surface.
The squareness of the mounted bearing assembly
is determined by the squareness of the shoulder.
Figures 12-4 and 12-5 are examples of faulty
shoulders that would seriously affect bearing life.
The squareness of the shoulder can be checked
as follows:
a. Locate a small square against the shaft

shoulder and check the clearance (figure 12-6).
b. Place a dial indicator against the shaft

shoulder face surface (figure 12-7) and rotate the
shaft between centers. Check at several points on
the radius to detect shoulder misalignment.
12-28. Check the height of the shoulder for ade-

quate surface area for bearing support during thrust
012001 loading (figures 12-8 and 12-9). Physical checks
Figure 12-1. Effect of a Dirty Bearing should always be coupled with a visual examination
Mounting Surface for uneven or narrow mounting surface indications.
The shaft shoulder should be large enough to
provide sufficient thrust capacity but not so large
as to prevent bearing removal from the shaft.
12-29. Check the shoulder surfaces for any flaking,

burrs and scoring that would prevent proper bearing
contact.
12-30. Shaft Fillets. Check the shaft fillet to make

sure the radius is not larger than the corner radius
of the bearing ring (figure 12-8). Correct fillet design
is shown in figure 12-9. A fillet radius larger than
the bearing comer radius will prevent the bearing
from properly seating against the shaft shoulder.
Check fillet radius as follows:
012002 a. Place a template against the fillet with the

Figure 12-2. Effect of a Poorly Finished maximum permissible fillet radius.
Bearing Mounting Surface
b. Check for light at the edges of the fillet.
c. Excessively tight fits of the bearing on the Light should not be visible. A small amount of light
shaft seat may preload the bearing by absorbing at the center is acceptable.
all the internal bearing clearances, causing fatigue
failure, or inner ring fracture (figure 12-3). 12-31. Radial Runout. Radial runout of precision
rotating devices must be held to a predetermined
12-26. Taper, Waviness and Out-of-Roundness. amount to ensure proper operation. Check radial
Check the shaft seat for out-of-roundness, taper or runout as follows:
12-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Locate the shaft on a centering jig.
b. Place a dial indicator against the mounting

surface and rotate the shaft (figure 12-10).
c. Measure runout. Record measured value

and check against drawing requirements.
12-32. Shaft Corners. Break shaft corners to pre-

vent damage to the edge surfaces and to preclude
the possibility of a defective bearing mounting (figure
12-11).
12-33. Shaft Threads. Check shaft threads for

squareness with respect to the bearing mounting
surface and shoulder. These surfaces are used to
guide clamping nuts for securing the bearing ring.
Out-of-squareness can cause incomplete bearing
clamping or preload and induce bending stresses
in the shaft.
012003
12-34. HOUSING MOUNTINGS. Preparation of the
Figure 12-3. Effect of Excessive Interference housing assembly for bearing mounting is as impor-
Fit on Bearing Geometry tant as shaft preparation. The outer ring of a bearing
is not very resistant to distortion and will take the
general shape of the housing. The bearing is intended
to be installed in a housing that is round. The housing
will require the same kind of inspection as the shaft.
12-35. Refer to paragraph 12-22 for supplementary

information for checking the following housing condi-
tions and defects:
a. Clean internal housing surfaces of all chips,

filings, core sand and traces of primer and paint.
b. Remove protruding metal that remains from

012004
Figure 12-4. Effect of an Off-Square previous staking operations.
Shaft Shoulder
NOTE
Failure to remove the displaced metal may

cause spot loading and reduction of the
internal clearances of the bearing. This
procedure applies to Group B bearings.
c. Check the bearing seat diameter for confor-

mance to the applicable drawing. The diameter
should be checked at three locations to detect taper,
out-of-round or waviness. Use internal micrometers,
air gaging or other suitable gaging equipment.
d. Check housing shoulders and fillets in the

same manner as for shaft inspection (paragraph
12-22). Check the distance between the shoulders
and compare to the distance between the outboard
012005 faces of the bearing rings. An insufficient shoulder
Figure 12-5. Bearing Misalignment from distance will result in pinched (preloaded) bearings
an Off-Square Shaft Shoulder when the unit is assembled.
12-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
whenever possible. On many thrust and angular-

contact bearings, the thrust side of the bearing is
clearly indicated in order to assure correct mounting
(figure 12-12).
12-38. Apply the mounting force to the bearing ring

which is to be mounted with an interference fit (figure
12-13a. right way). Do not apply the mounting force
to the bearing so that the force is transmitted through
the balls or rollers (figure 12-13b. wrong way).
CAUTION
Applying the mounting force incorrectly

will damage the bearings by brinelling the
raceway and balls, and/or by destructively
disassembling the bearing.
12-39. Installing Sealed or Shielded Bearings.

Install single sealed and shielded bearings with the
012006 open sides toward the rotating part and away from
Figure 12-6. Checking for Off-Square Shaft the source of contamination. This will seal the
Shoulders with a Small Square lubricant in and keep out foreign contamination.
12-40. Installing Tapered Roller Bearings. Ta-

pered roller bearings are usually adjusted during
installation. Normal fit-up is obtained by lightly
torquing the bearing by means of a locknut or similar
device until all internal clearances have been re-
moved and then backing off the securing device
until the required tightness is obtained.
12-41. Stack, Duplex Bearings. Bearings used in

duplex and stack arrangements have directional
markings etched on the outer diameter of the outer
ring to indicate the correct position of each bearing
in the stack (figure 12-14). Check the matching serial
numbers on each bearing of a matched set at the
012007 time of installation.
Figure 12-7. Check Shaft Shoulder
Squareness with a Dial Indicator
NOTE
e. Check the alignment of the housing bores
and squareness of the ring faces. Misalignment will Reject bearing sets that have nonmatch-
place undue localized stress on the bearing assem- ing serial and or sequential markings.
bly and may cause early bearing failure. Housings
may be parallel but out-of-line, or the axis of the 12-42. Balanced Bearings. High speed bearings
housing may not be parallel with the true axis of are dimensionally inspected for eccentricity and
the shaft. specially marked for installation to reduce rotor
imbalance. Bearings that have been specially
12-36. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES. marked for high point of eccentricity shall be installed
with the high point mark on the bearing ring located
12-37. GENERAL. Install bearings with identification 180 degrees away from the high point mark on the
markings visible from the outside of the mounting shaft assembly.
12-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-43. INSTALLING SHAFT-MOUNTED BEAR- faces of the drift square. The drift shall fit solidly
INGS. Most shaft-mounted bearings will be installed against the face of the inner-ring. Particular care
with a slight to moderate interference fit on the shaft. shall be used to hold the drift square against the
This can be accomplished by cold mounting the bearing ring face to prevent cocking of the bearing
bearing using suitable installation tools without the on the shaft. Equip the drift pipe with fins to keep
use of heat. Heavy interference fits, or precision dirt from dropping into the bearings and a plug in
assemblies, will require special heating and/or cool- the pipe interior to catch mallet chips (figure 12-16).
ing methods. These special procedures are covered
in paragraph 12-61. General steps for shaft mounting CAUTION
of bearings are as follows:
Never hit the bearing with direct hammer
12-44. Secure the Shaft. Secure the shaft in a blows. Do not use lead, babbitt, or wooden
holding device that will not result in strain or hammers, or other such material that is
deformation. The use of a vise is not recommended subject to chipping.
as a general practice. When one is used, the vise
jaws shall be equipped with soft metal protectors 12-48. Aligning and Guiding the Bearings. Use
in order to not mar the shaft surfaces. Apply the aligning or piloting devices to guide the bearing into
pressure as far away as possible from the bearing place. Discontinue installing the bearings if there
mounting to minimize distorting the bearing seat. is any evidence of binding. Check the mounting for
high spots on the shaft, shaft taper, out-of-round
NOTE shaft, or for the presence of obstructing chips or
other foreign material on the bearing seat.
When working in tolerances of 0.0001
inch, any deformation of the shaft will 12-49. Post Installation Inspection Procedures.
result in faulty mounting conditions and
may cause permanent bearing damage. a. Check bearings for proper seating. Make
sure the bearings are mounted solidly in place
against the shaft shoulder.
12-45. Lubricate the Shaft. Apply a drop or two
of general purpose oil, MIL–PRF–32033 or equiva-
b. Check the bearing-to-shoulder contact with
lent, on the shaft bearing mounting surface before
a feeler gage or hold the assembly up to the light
mounting the bearing. This will decrease the possibil-
for proper fittings.
ity of scoring or burring from the interference fit.
Special mounting or assembly fluids should be used
c. Check the shaft shoulder to make sure the
to mount bearings with severe interference fits.
shaft fillet clears the bearing corner radius and the
These fluids have special properties that will reduce
shoulder contacts the bearing ring with a sufficient
the tendency to gall and cold weld during bearing
height to support the load.
installation. Use Ultrachem Assembly Fluid Number
1, or equivalent, with synthetic oils such as Specifica- NOTE
tion MIL-PRF-23699.
There should be a clearance between the
12-46. Pressure Mounting Equipment. Install corner radius of the bearing and the shaft
bearings, whenever possible, using an arbor press. fillet radius.
Apply pressure evenly to the inner ring, or equally
to both rings (figure 12-15). Do not apply pressure 12-50. INSTALLING HOUSING-MOUNTED BEAR-
to the outer ring of a shaft-mounted bearing. INGS. Install housing-mounted bearings by applying
pressure to the outer ring (figure 12-17). The same
CAUTION general practices that are used to install shaft-
mounted bearings shall be followed for housing
Use support blocks that contact both mountings. The following general precautions apply:
bearing rings of radial ball bearings that
have sufficient internal axial clearance. a. Use a pilot ahead of the bearing whenever
possible to check the alignment and clearances. If
12-47. Hand Mounting Tools. Special Installation the housing is open on both sides, the pilot should
tools can be used when an arbor press is not precede the bearing during the mounting operation.
available or can not be used. In an emergency, the
use of a pipe as a drift and a mallet for applying b. Start the bearing square with the shaft.
the necessary pressure is permissible. Keep the Never force the bearing when binding is evident.
12-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
INNER RING INNER RING

OF BEARING OF BEARING
SHAFT SHAFT
WRONG - CORNER RADIUS TOO SMALL WRONG - CORNER RADIUS TOO LARGE/
NOT ENOUGH FACE AGAINST
SHAFT SHOULDER
INNER RING
OF BEARING
SHAFT
CORRECT
012008
Figure 12-8. Acceptable and Unacceptable Shaft Shoulder and Fillet Configurations
c. Check to ensure the bearing is seated positioning date to properly guide the outer ring into
squarely against the housing shoulder and/or cen- the housing (figure 12-18).
tered in the housing.
12-53. Installing Airframe Bearings. Clean the
housing assembly and lightly coat the bearing
d. Use controlled pressure on close tolerance
mounting surfaces with grease, Specification MIL-
applications. Establish maximum and minimum
PRF–1322 or other specified operating grease, prior
loads. Loads will depend on the housing material.
to bearing mounting. Install the bearing with an arbor
press and a mandrel similar to the design shown
e. Use heating and/or cooling processes when in figure 12-17.
installing bearings with tight interference fits.
12-54. Installing Needle Bearings. Specially de-
signed tools are used to install needle bearings
12-51. Blind Recesses. Use arbor presses and
because of their fragile construction. The curvature
reverse pullers to install bearings in closed-end
of the face of thin shell bearings must be accommo-
housing recesses. Necessary stops shall be incorpo-
dated by the mounting tool. Arbor presses should
rated to prevent damage from over extension of the
include a pilot to keep the bearing in line. Use stops
press. Another method is to use a reverse puller
to prevent damage from over extension of the press.
shown in figure 3-8 that is bolted to a flange or
support. The bearing is pressed into the recess by
a. Use mandrels conforming to the dimension-
rotating the screw on the puller.
al requirements shown in figure 12-19.
12-52. Installing Self-Aligning Bearings. Self- b. Do not remove the lubricant from the
aligning bearings are difficult to start into a housing outside of the needle bearing. The grease will
because the outer ring is free to swivel. Use a lubricate the surfaces during installation.
12-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Keep open bearings clean during installa-

tion.
d. Install the stamped face of the bearing so

the identification markings can be seen when the
bearing is mounted.
e. Start the bearing into the housing to an

approximate depth of 1/8 inch. Remove the mandrel
and check the needles for freedom of movement
and alignment.
f. Dimensionally check most needle bearings

in the mounted position.
NOTE
012009 Thin shell needle bearings cannot be

Figure 12-9. Acceptable Shaft gaged until pressed into a housing mount-
Shoulder/Fillet Geometry ing.
12-55. Installing Wheel Bearings. Installing wheel

bearings will require the use of heat and cooling
to mount the bearing in/on the wheel assembly. The
method of installation will depend on whether the
wheel assembly utilizes axle or carrier-type bearings.
Refer to paragraph 12-61 for additional information
on thermal mounting practices.
a. Axle-Type Bearing Cups (Outer Rings).
(1) Clean the bearing mounting surfaces.
(2) Prime the mounting surfaces with an

approved primer.
012010
Figure 12-10. Check Radial Runout of Shaft
Bearing Seat with a Dial Indicator (3) Heat the wheel assembly in a thermo-
statically controlled oven to a maximum temperature
of 250_F for 10 minutes.
WARNING
Do not overheat wheel assembly because

high temperature will cause severe dam-
age.
(4) Chill bearing cups with dry ice when

severe interference fits are encountered.
(5) Install bearing cups with a driver tool

similar to that shown in figure 12-20.
(6) Seat the cup against the housing liner

012011
shoulder using the driver. Make sure the cup is
Figure 12-11. Breaking of Shaft Corners solidly seated on the entire periphery of the shoulder.
12-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(7) Inspect bearing seating with a feeler

gage after the cup and wheel assembly have cooled
to room temperature. A maximum of 0.002 inch
maximum clearance is permitted if it does not exceed
one-half of the bearing circumference.
(8) Lubricate the bearing cup with grease,

Specification MIL-PRF-81322A or as specified in the
applicable specification.
NOTE
Dry cups that have been cooled with dry

ice prior to lubrication to remove moisture
and prevent corrosion.
b. Axle-Type Bearing Cones (Inner Ring) and

Roller Assemblies.
(1) Clean bearing mounting surfaces on the

axle.
(2) Align the cone and roller assembly to

prevent cocking and binding on the shaft.
012012
Figure 12-12. Special Thrust Markings (3) Place the cone and roller assembly
on an Angular-Contact Bearing firmly against the cup to assure full radial contact.
(4) Install the inboard and outboard grease

washer seals.
(5) Install the grease retaining washer and

seal snap ring.
c. Carrier-Type Wheel Bearings.
(1) Clean the carrier assembly.
(2) Chill the carrier with dry ice to minus

65_F.
(3) Heat the cone and roller assembly in

a thermostatically controlled oven to 250_F for 15
minutes.
(4) Place the cone and roller assembly over

the chilled carrier assembly.
(5) Place a weighted ring on the cone to

seat the cone face surface against the carrier
shoulder.
(6) Allow parts to cool to room temperature.

012013
Figure 12-13. Acceptable and Unacceptable
(7) Check the carrier seat for proper bearing
Installation Methods for Shaft-
mounting. Clearance shall be between 0.000 to
Mounted Bearings
0.010 inch.
12-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ring tight in the housing, or on the shaft, or both.

In any case, the individual rings should be separately
mounted and then the ball retainer assembly is
installed (figure 12-21). Do not apply pressure
through the complete bearing assembly as it will
brinell or nick the ball raceways.
12-58. SPECIAL MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS

FOR DUPLEX BEARINGS. Duplex bearings are not
two standard bearings installed side by side. They
are two bearings with special features and some-
times offset rings. See paragraph 2-24 for detailed
information concerning duplex arrangements and
preloading. Duplex bearings are normally preloaded
during mounting. Flush ground duplex bearings will
012014
not be preloaded but have limited end play after
Figure 12-14. Directional and Sequential mounting. The following precautions shall be ob-
Markings on Stack Bearings served when mounting duplex bearings:
CAUTION
12-56. Installing Rod End Bearings.
a. Clean the threaded parts of the rod end Duplex bearings are manufactured as
and tube assembly. matched sets and shall not be intermixed
unless rematching procedures are estab-
lished and authorized by the cognizant
b. Lubricate the threaded portion of the tube depot bearing engineer.
and rod end assemblies with a light coat of grease,
Specification MIL-PRF-81322 or other specified
grease. a. Position together the high point of eccen-
tricity marks that are on the face surfaces of the
inner and outer rings. This will allow the shaft to
c. Hand turn the threaded portion of the rod
rotate parallel to the axis of rotation. The high point
end bearing into or onto the threaded portion of
of eccentricity of the rotating rings should be aligned
the rod/tube assembly until the proper distance is
180_ away from the high point of the rotating shaft
reached or until increased torque prevents further
or housing.
hand rotation.
d. Screw the rod end bearing the additional NOTE

required distance by using a tool which bears against
the outer ring of the bearing or eye of the rod end Failure to properly align the high points
and not against the inner ring, seals or shields. will result in an axis of rotation that is
angular with respect to the shaft center-
CAUTION line. This increases shaft eccentricity and
misalignment.
S (1) Do not use an adjustable wrench
as the adjustable jaws might slip and b. Avoid excessive interference fits that will
damage the seals, the plating and/or change the internal clearance of the bearings or
the threads. the flushness or offset of the ring faces.
S (2) Do not assemble rod end bearings CAUTION

to the rods/tubes by exerting force
through a bolt or shaft placed in the Excessive preloads will cause premature
bearing bore. Serious seal and internal bearing failure.
damage can result from inner ring mis-
alignment. c. Spacers. Duplex bearing arrangements
may use precision spacers between the inner and
12-57. Installing Ball Thrust Bearings. Ball thrust outer rings to accurately separate the bearings. The
bearings of the open construction may have one following precautions apply:
12-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(1) Carefully handle the spacers to prevent

surface damage. Damaged spacers will cause mis-
alignment of the bearings.
(2) Check spacer faces for squareness and

parallelism.
(3) Check to see that the spacers are the

same width.
CAUTION
Uneven or unequal spacers will cause

either underpreloading or overpreloading,
depending on the dimensions of the two
spacers.
d. Shoulder Squareness. Keep the shaft and

housing shoulders square to prevent misalignment
of the mating parts.
e. Misalignment. Use extra precaution when

012015 mounting a set of duplex bearings to prevent cocking
Figure 12-15. Installing Shaft-Mounted or misalignment. Any abnormal mounting is detri-
Bearings with an Arbor Press mental to a duplex bearing set (figure 12-22)
f. Modification of Preload. The preload on

duplex bearings can be modified as shown in figure
12-23.
NOTE
Authorization to change bearing preload

values must be given by the local cogni-
zant depot bearing engineer.
12-59. SPECIAL MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS

FOR ELLIPTICAL BEARINGS. Elliptical outer-ring
roller bearings will require careful installation tech-
niques to prevent damage to the rollers and ring
raceways. Refer to paragraph C-20 in Appendix C
for failure analysis of incorrectly installed elliptical
bearings. Always refer to the applicable engine or
component overhaul instruction for specific informa-
tion on how to properly install this type of bearing.
12-60. The following general precautions shall be

observed when installing elliptical roller bearings:
a. Use Assembly Fluid, Ultrachem Number 1

or equal, to keep the rollers in place during installa-
tion.
012016
b. Squeeze the outer ring during assembly
Figure 12-16. Modified Pipe Tool for
whenever possible to help eliminate the interference
Mounting Bearings
fit between the rollers and the inner ring raceway.
12-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-61. T E M P E R A T U R E M O U N T I N G P R O -
CEDURES.
12-62. GENERAL. The use of heat or cold to

thermally enlarge or contract the housing and
bearing diameters is often utilized to install bearings
with very tight interference fits. The use of heat
and/or cold is required where:
a. Bearings are mounted with moderate to

heavy interference fits.
b. Bearing ring face is inaccessible to the

mounting force.
c. There is an excessive distance through

which the bearing must be displaced to be properly
seated.
012017
Figure 12-17. Mandrel for Installing d. The shaft or housing material is soft and
Housing-Mounted Bearings there is a possibility of permanent damage to the
mounting surface.
12-63. Bearing installations in the above situations

are made easier by heating and/or cooling the parts.
Expansion or contraction is the result of differences
in temperature between parts, providing the neces-
sary clearance for easier mounting of the bearing.
A temperature differential is obtained as follows:
a. Heat one of the parts (bearing or shaft/

housing).
b. Cool one of the parts (bearing or shaft/

housing).
c. Heat one part and cool the other part

(bearing and shaft/housing).
012018 12-64. HEATING THE BEARING. Bearings that are

Figure 12-18. Mounting a Self-Aligning mounted with a tight interference fits on the shaft
Bearing Using a Stabilizing Ring seats will require thermal expansion to prevent
damage to the bearing bore and shaft surfaces.
c. Use a nylon pilot or some other approved Thermal expansion of the bearing is accomplished
nonmetallic material to guide the inner ring and shaft by using hot oil, hot air or induction heating.
assembly through the outer ring/roller assembly.
NOTE
d. Align the shaft assembly to facilitate instal-
lation.
Many safety problems are encountered
e. Rotate the inner ring and shaft assembly with hot oil baths making this a third
while carefully and slowly inserting them into the choice as an approved method for heat
outer ring and roller assembly. expanding bearings.
12-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
bottles have been used for aircraft wheel assemblies

and heat lamps for other applications.
WARNING
Never exceed a temperature of 250_F

unless authorized by engineering.
12-67. M E T H O D S O F H E AT I N G B E A R I N G S /
HOUSINGS. There are three basic methods of heat
expanding bearings and housings; hot air, hot oil
and induction heating. Hot air is the preferred
method, however, all three methods are given in
the following paragraphs.
12-68. Hot Air Method of Bearing Installation.

The hot air method of bearing installation includes
the use of thermostatically controlled electric ovens
similar to the one shown in figure 12-24. The
following requirements apply when using this method
of heat expansion:
a. The electric oven shall be thermostatically

controlled. Temperature shall be maintained within
$10_F of the indicated temperature. The maximum
temperature of 250 _F shall be red lined on the
temperature gage. Seal the thermostat to prevent
012019 unauthorized changes.
Figure 12-19. Mandrel Designs for Installing
Needle Roller Bearings b. The volume of the oven shall be no less
than 20 times the volume of the bearing load.
12-65. Heat the bearing within the authorized tem- c. The oven shall be equipped with shelves
perature range to prevent damage to the bearing. or hooks to hold the bearings. Position the hooks
The maximum temperature to which bearings made near the center of the oven.
of AISI 52100 steel can be safely heated is 250_F.
Do not exceed this limitation without engineering WARNING
authorization. AMS 6490 (AISI M-50) tool steels can
be heated to higher temperature levels. However,
handling the hotter bearings will be an even greater Never use galley or kitchen ovens with
problem. direct gas-flame heating. Temperatures at
the floor of the oven may reach levels
of 600_F or more. Loss of material hard-
WARNING ness due to tempering will cause early
bearing failure.
Heating bearings to high temperatures for 12-69. Installation procedures using hot air to heat
extended periods of time will reduce the the bearings are as follows:
hardness of the steel and reduce load
carrying capacity. This can cause cata- a. Keep bearings in their protective package
strophic bearing failure. until just prior to expansion heating. Special contain-
ers may be developed to help keep the bearing
12-66. HEATING THE HOUSING. The housing may assembly free of contamination during the heating
require heating when the bearing outer ring is process.
mounted with an interference fit. This is especially
true of wheel bearing cups mounted in a magnesium b. Place bearings in the heat controlled oven.
or aluminum housing. The most common method Place bearings on shelves or hooks as directed in
of heat expansion is with hot air ovens. Hot water paragraph 12-68c.
12-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
mounting clearance can be obtained. Refer to figure

12-25 for recommended temperatures.
d. Keep bearings In the oven for the shortest

possible time required to give adequate clearance,
usually 10 to 20 minutes. Do not heat bearings for
extended periods of time.
NOTE
Lower oven temperatures will allow longer

heat soak time and not overheat the
bearings.
e. Lubricate bearing mounting surfaces with

clean operating oil. Coat wheel bearing cup housings
with zinc chromate paste for corrosion protection.
f. Remove bearings from the oven with care

since they are very hot. Use approved safety
equipment. Mount bearings as soon as possible to
prevent excessive cooling prior to installation.
012020
g. Install the heated bearing against the shaft
Figure 12-20. Mandrel for Installing or housing shoulder and hold in place until it cools
Wheel Bearing Cup sufficiently to be self retained.
h. Lubricate bearing surfaces with the speci-

fied operating oil or grease.
12-70. Hot Oil Method of Bearing Installation.

The use of hot oil to heat expand bearings is not
recommended if adequate hot air ovens are avail-
able. When it is necessary to use hot oil, the
following requirements shall be met:
a. Equip tanks with covers to minimize con-

tamination. Tank volume shall be at least 10 times
the maximum bearing load to provide adequate
heating.
b. Equip tanks with forced circulation of the

heated oil and an adequate filter system for continu-
ous removal of solid contaminants.
c. Provide adequate safety devices for fire

protection and for accidental splashing of the person-
nel with the hot oil.
012021
Figure 12-21. Mounting Thrust Bearings d. Place a heavy screen or series of rods
in a Housing and on a Shaft 3 or more inches above the tank location to keep
bearings off the bottom of the tank (figure 12-26).
This will keep bearings from laying in direct contact
c. Set oven temperature at 250 _F unless with the heated tank floor and precludes contamina-
otherwise directed by engineering. Use lower tem- tion with the foreign material that has settled to the
peratures when experience indicates sufficient bottom of the tank.
12-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-72. Heat Induction Method of Bearing Installa-

tion. Bearings with interference fits can be installed
by using an induction heating process. A coil, one
inch larger than the size of the bearing outer
diameter, is placed around the bearing. An electrical
current is passed through the coil which heats the
coil and the surface that it surrounds. This method
requires the use of special equipment that is
specifically designed to inductively expand bearings.
The equipment shall have thermostatically controlled
thermocouples that are in direct contact with the
bearing surfaces. The surface temperature of the
bearing is measured and monitored as it is being
inductively heated. This is to prevent overheating
the bearing ring.
012022
Figure 12-22. Effect of Misalignment 12-73. Installation procedures using heat induction
on Duplex Bearings are as follows:
a. Remove bearings from their protective

12-71. Installation procedures using hot oil are as
packages just prior to induction heating.
follows:
a. Remove bearings from the package just b. Place the appropriate size induction coil
prior to immersion in the hot oil bath. around the outer diameter of the bearing.
b. Set heat control at a temperature not to c. Set the panel controls to the predetermined
exceed 225_ + 10_F. Use a light or medium grade values that will heat the bearing rings to the required
lubricating oil that is compatible with the operating temperature.
lubricant and that has a minimum flash point of
400_F. CAUTION
c. Keep bearings in the hot oil for the mini- Do not exceed 250_F as measured on
mum time required to achieve the needed thermal the bearing outer diameter surface.
expansion. Time will usually be 10 to 20 minutes
depending on bearing size. d. Lubricate the bearing mounting surface with
clean operating oil.
d. Remove bearings from the tank and drain
off the excess oil. e. Remove the coil from around the bearing
ring.
e. Lubricate the bearing mounting surface with
clean operating oil.
f. Install the heated bearing against the shaft
f. Install the bearing against the shaft or or housing shoulder and hold in place until sufficient-
housing shoulder and hold in place until cool enough ly cool to be self-retained.
to be self retained.
g. Lubricate the bearing surfaces with the
NOTE specified operating oil or grease.
The induction heating equipment must be 12-74. BEARING RETENTION BY STAKING.

calibrated for all the different bearing sizes
and shapes that will be heat expanded 12-75. GENERAL. Airframe and aircraft control
by this method. It is recommended that bearings are retained in place by an interference
rejected bearings of the same size and fit in the housing and sometimes by a light interfer-
type be used to calibrate the equipment. ence fit on the shaft. Interference fits are not
sufficient to retain the bearing in the axial direction
g. Lubricate the bearing surfaces with the when there is any significant axial/thrust load and/or
specified operating or grease. vibration.
12-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
012023
Figure 12-23. Duplex Mounting Methods
12-76. Slight axial movement of installed bearings or spot testing as specified by local engineering
can often be prevented by one of several approved and/or quality assurance personnel. Refer to tables
staking methods. However, staking should never be 12-1 and 12-4 for applicable pushout values.
used to compensate for poor bearing-to-housing fits.
12-78. Proof testing shall be accomplished by using
NOTE a hydraulic arbor press and a suitable force-mea-
suring compression gage (figure 12-27).
Do not stake steel housings that are heat
treated above 175,000 psi. 12-79. BOLTED PLATE (Figure 12-28). This meth-
od of retention is used along with a shoulder in
12-77. PROOF TESTING INSTALLED BEARINGS. the housing whenever high axial retention capacity
Proof test bearings that are retained by staking to is required. Some of the advantages and disadvan-
evaluate the integrity of retention. Perform sample tages are:
12-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
metal into the recess formed by the bearing chamfer

and the edge of the housing. Some of the advan-
tages and disadvantages are:
a. Advantages.
(1) No added weight or space required.
(2) Easy to Install bearings.
b. Disadvantages.
(1) Can effect bearing clearances.
(2) Induces high residual stresses.
(3) Bearing removal may damage housing.
(4) Low bearing retention capacity in the

axial direction.
NOTE
All staking impressions shall be no closer

012024
than 0.030 inch from the housing edge.
Figure 12-24. Thermostatically Controlled
Oven for Thermal Expansion of Bearings 12-81. Types of Impression Staking. The three
different types of impression staking are:
a. Advantages.
a. Circumferential Line. This type of stake
(1) High axial retention capacity. consists of three or six impressions made with a
tool designed with cleats which are located on a
(2) Can be used when interference fits are circle. Each impression has a depth of 0.030 inch
not allowed. and a length equal to an approximate 20 degree
segment of the circle.
(3) Has no effect on bearing clearance.
b. Ball. This type of stake consists of three
or more round impressions, made with a tool
(4) Bearing replacement will not damage designed with ball shaped projections, which are
housing. located on a circle. Each impression has a depth
of about 0.030 inch.
(5) Easy to install replacement bearings.
c. Point. This type of stake consists of three
b. Disadvantages. or more point impressions made with a tool designed
with cone shaped projections, which are located on
(1) Requires bolt holes in the housing. a circle. Each impression has a depth of about 0.030
inch.
(2) Raises residual stress levels in the
housing. 12-82. Impression Staking Tools. Perform impres-
sion staking with adequate tools. A typical circumfer-
(3) Adds weight and requires more space. ential line staking tool is shown in figure 12-30. The
same type of tool design shall be made for point
12-80. IMPRESSION STAKING (Figure 12-29). Im- and ball impression staking. A different tool is
pression staking consists of equally spaced impres- required for each size bearing bore and outer
sions around the circumference of the housing bore. diameter. The following criteria applies when design-
There are three different basic variations depending ing and manufacturing tools for impression staking
on the type of impression. All three methods force bearings in housings:
12-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
TOLERANCE SYMBOL ABMA STANDARD NO. 7

EXPANSION – INCHES
SHAFT DIAMETER – mm
012025
Figure 12-25. Recommended Temperature Differentials for Mounting Bearings
12-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Staking tools shall have a pilot-centering

device to ensure accurate alignment. The outer
diameter shall be equal to the minimum bore
diameter of the applicable bearing.
b. The cleat on the circumferential line staking

tool shall have a length equal to a 20 degree
segment of the circle to be staked.
c. Design the tools with automatic stops so

that the tool shoulder comes to rest against the
housing at the proper staking depth.
d. The depth of the stake impression shall

not exceed 0.030 inch.
e. Stake impression shall not be closer than

1/32 inch of the outer diameter surface of the bearing.
012026
Figure 12-26. Hot Oil Tank for Thermal 12-83. Unapproved Impression Staking Tools. Do
Expansion of Bearings not use center punches, chisels, screwdrivers in lieu
of proper tooling. Bearing and housing mountings
can be severely damaged by improper staking tools
(figure 12-31). It is the responsibility of personnel
installing the bearing to use the proper staking tool.
Contact the tool design engineer at the local
Production Engineering Department if the proper
tools are not available.
12-84. Impression Staking Procedure. Always use

properly designed staking tools with automatic stops.
The following procedure shall be followed:
a. Install and center the bearing in the housings.
b. Select the proper kind and size staking tool.
012027
c. Place the staking tool pilot into the bearing
Figure 12-27. Compression Gage for Measuring
bore.
Retention/Pushout Forces
d. Position the staking tool so as to leave
adjacent new material for future staking.
e. Locate the tool and bearing under the arbor

press. Align the tool with the ram of the press,
making sure the housing is perpendicular to the axis
of the arbor press.
f. Apply pressure gradually and evenly

around the circumference of the housing bore until
the automatic stop position is reached. Uneven
pressure may deform the outer ring of the bearing
and cause the bearing to bind and be rough.
012028
Figure 12-28. Bearing Retention by a Bolted Plate g. Bearing retention shall meet the minimum
axial pushout requirements of applicable drawings.
12-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 12-1. Proof Test of Impression Stake

Bearing Retention
Bearing OD Minimal Axial Pushout

Inches Force Lbs
Under .500 100
Up to .750 200
Up to 1.000 300
Up to 1.250 400
Up to 1.500 500
Up to 1.750 600
Up to 2.000 700
b. Insert the proper size staking tool into the

driving chuck of the drill press.
c. Align the bearing and make sure the

012029
Figure 12-29. Staking Methods for Retaining surface of housing is perpendicular to the axis of
Housing-Mounted Bearings the drill press spindle.
d. Set the rotational speed of the drill press

h. Check installed bearings for retention per at 50 rpm. Excessive speeds will work harden the
table 12-1. Proof test load is applied to the outer metal and damage the tool.
ring. Do not apply the proof test load through the
inner ring or ball. e. Bring the roller swaging tool in contact with
the housing surface and start spindle rotation.
12-85. ROLLER-SWAGED HOUSING STAKING
(Figure 12-32). This method of retention consists f. Gradually apply sufficient pressure to stake
of deforming the bearing housing by means of the housing metal over the bearing chamfer.
swaging rollers. The rollers swage a section of the
housing over the outer ring corner chamfer around g. The operation is complete when the roller
the entire circumference of the bearing. begins to polish the area outside of the stake.
h. Use air to cool the surfaces as necessary

12-86. Roller Swaging Tools. The tool has rollers
during staking.
with staking beads that, when under load, will
displace the housing metal. Staking is completed
i. Check the swaged-in bearing for excessive
when the roller bottoms out and begins to polish
tightness, binding, or looseness in accordance with
the housing outside of the stake. This staking method
drawing and/or local engineering requirements.
is intended for use with steel, aluminum and titanium
alloys.
j. Check sample bearings for pushout force
in accordance with drawing requirements.
12-87. Restaking can be performed up to three
times on steel and titanium housings heat treated 12-89. ROLLER-SWAGED SLEEVE STAKING
up to 175,000 psi without significant loss of bearing (Figure 12-33). This method of staking consists of
retention capacity. Aluminum alloy, 7075-T6 cannot placing an aluminum alloy sleeve between the
be restaked since the stake ring is sheared off when bearing diameter and the enlarged housing bore
the bearing is removed. surface. The aluminum sleeve is swaged over both
the chamfers of the bearing and housing. This
12-88. Roller Swaging Staking Procedure. The provides axial and radial retention of the bearing.
following staking procedures shall be followed:
12-90. Roller-Swaged Sleeve Staking Procedure.
a. Install and center the bearing in the housing. The following procedures shall be followed:
12-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
g. Check the swaged-in bearing for excessive

tightness, binding, or looseness in accordance with
drawing and/or local engineering requirements.
h. Check bearing retention against minimum

axial pushout requirements of applicable drawings
and/or local engineering directives.
12-91. OUTER RING GROOVE STAKING (Figure

12-34). This method of bearing retention consists
of swaging the outer ring of the bearing over a
chamfer machined In the housing. The outer ring
of the bearing is specially manufactured with a 60
degree V-groove configuration (figure 12-35). The
ring is sufficiently soft (Rockwell C 35) to be swaged
without cracking or retaining significant residual
stresses.
12-92. This type of retention has all the advantages

of roller staking without damaging the housing. No
limits are placed on the number of times bearings
can be replaced. It has an axial retention capacity
equal to the rated capacity of most bearings and
can withstand thrust loads during misalignment.
12-93. Outer Ring Groove Staking Procedure.

The following procedure shall be followed when
staking V-groove type bearings:
a. Machine a 45 degree chamfer in the

housing bore per requirements of table 12-2 and
figure 12-36.
012030
b. Inspect for cracks.
Figure 12-30. Self-Centering Circumferential
Line Staking Tool c. Install the V-groove bearing into the hous-
ing using an approved mandrel.
a. Install the sleeve into the housing and the d. Center the bearing in the housing to within
bearing into the sleeve. Use sealing material as 0.005 inch TIR (figure 12-37).
specified by the manufacturer’s drawing or local
engineering directive. e. Stake the V-groove bearing lip over the
corner chamfer of the housing, using an approved
b. Insert the proper size staking tool into the anvil tool per table 12-3 and figure 12-38 or a
driving chuck of the drill press. Rexnord roller staking tool shown in figure 12-39.
The Rexnord tool is the preferred tool for staking
c. Align the bearing under the drill press V-groove bearings.
making sure the housing surface is perpendicular
to the axis of drill press spindle. NOTE
d. Set the rotational speed of the spindle at A hydraulic press will be required to
50 rpm. swage the bearing using the anvil swaging
tools. Refer to table 12-2 for the required
e. Bring the tool in contact with the sleeve staking pressure.
and start the spindle rotation.
f. Check the bearing for properly formed and
f. Gradually apply pressure to the sleeve and seated outer ring lips. The swaged lip should be
upset the protruding portions of the sleeve over both in continuous contact with the chamfered surfaces
the chamfers of the bearing and housing. on both sides of the housing (figure 12-34).
12-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 12-2. V-Groove Type Bearing Installation Requirements (See Fig. 12-36)
Recommended
Housing Staking Pressure 1 Rotational Torque 2
Bearing OD A B C3 Narrow Wide Installed
Bearing +.0000” +.0005” +.005” +.005” Series Series Uninstalled in-lbs
Dash No. -.0005” -.000” -.000” -.005” Lbs. Lbs in-lbs max max
-3 .5625 .5623 .020 .218 8000 9000 5 6

-4 .6562 .6560 .020 .250 10000 9000 5 6
-5 .7500 .7498 .030 .281 12000 10500 5 10
-6 .8125 .8123 .030 .312 13000 13000 5 10
-7 .9062 .9060 .030 .343 14500 14500 5 10
-8 1.0000 .9998 .050 .390 23000 16500 5 10
-9 1.0937 1.0935 .050 .437 25500 18500 5 10
-10 1.1875 1.1873 .050 .500 28000 19500 5 10
-12 1.4375 1.4373 .050 .593 34500 30000 5 10
-14 1.5625 1.5623 .050 .703 37500 39500 8 16
-16 1.7500 1.7498 .050 .797 42500 52500 8 16
Notes:
1. These values apply to steel outer ring bearings. Aluminum outer ring bearings will be one-half these
values and aluminum-bronze outer ring bearings will be two-thirds these values.
2. These values apply to fiber-lined bearings before and after installation.
3. When housing thickness is different than bearing width, the chamfer depth shall be calculated by the
following formula:
C = [T-(H-2G)] +15 inches
2 -.000 inches
C = Chamfer
T = Nominal thickness of housing
H = Nominal width of outer ring
G = Mean depth of V-groove in outer ring
g. Inspect metal-to-metal bearings after stak- Refer to table 12-2 for rotational torque values when
ing for freedom of movement of the ball. Reject the not otherwise specified.
bearing if the ball cannot be freely rotated by hand
and/or binds. i. Check installed V-groove bearings for
retention per table 12-4.
NOTE
NOTE
Component assembly drawing should be
checked since some metal-to-metal bear- Make sure the load is applied to the outer
ings are designed with an initial preload. ring and not through the inner ring or ball.
Due to elastic spring back of the swaged
h. Inspect fiber-lined bearings for rotational lips of the V-groove, it is possible to have
torque values as specified on the applicable drawing axial movement of the bearing during
or Handbook of Overhaul Instruction/Technical Order. proof load testing.
12-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 12-3. Staking Tool Requirements for strict control and each application shall require prior
V-Groove Type Bearings (See Figure 12-38) approval by the Materials Engineering Laboratory/
Physical Science Laboratory. Personnel responsible
MS21230 d1 PD for adhesive bonding bearings shall be trained in
Wide Width +.000 +.005 H the proper handling and application of adhesives.
Series -.001 -.000 Min.
12-95. Adhesive bonding with mechanical interfer-
-3 .189 .575 .15 ence fits will provide good bearing retention. The
-4 .249 .575 .15 surfaces are roughened by shot peening to obtain
void areas for good adhesive bond while retaining
-5 .311 .637 .16 sufficient interference fit. Interference fits must be
-6 .374 .724 .16 controlled to prevent loss of internal radial clearance
-7 .436 .849 .16 and/or preloading of the bearing.
-7A .436 .818 .16 12-96. The use of shot peening or abrasive paper
-8 .499 .912 .16 to roughen the surfaces of housing/rod end bores
-9 .561 1.037 .18 will be as specified by the cognizant bearing or
equipment engineer to obtain the predetermined
-10 .624 1.099 .21 retention requirement.
-12 .749 1.263 .26
-14 .874 1.513 .20 12-97. Materials. Various adhesives can be used
to retain bearing rings in aeronautical applications.
-16 .999 2.013 .33 Single component self-hardening retaining com-
pounds under Specification MIL-R-46082 Type III
MS21232 (Locktite 35 or equal), are effective within a tempera-
MS21154 ture range of -65_F to +300_F. Treat the surfaces
Narrow d1 PD with a primer to improve adhesion and increase
Width +.000 +.005 H shear resistance. No preparation or mixing is re-
Series -.001 -.000 Min. quired for single component compounds.
-3 .189 .512 .11 12-98. Cleaning. Clean thoroughly all surfaces to
-4 .249 .600 .14 be bonded with an approved solvent to remove
-5 .311 .662 .16 residual oil or grease films. Use a scrubbing action
when cleaning, and then wipe dry with a clean, dry
-6 .374 .724 .16 cloth or reinforced paper towel.
-7 .436 .818 .15
-8 .499 .888 .17 CAUTION
-9 .561 .982 .18 Do not physically touch cleaned surfaces,
-10 .624 1.075 .18 since oils from the skin are sufficient to
-12 .749 1.325 .20 prevent satisfactory bonding. Protect
cleaned surfaces from all contamination
-14 .874 1.450 .21 prior to application of adhesives.
-16 .999 1.638 .22
12-99. Installation of Adhesively Bonded Bearings.
Note: 1. Piloting pin shall extend out of upper
die sufficiently to enter lower die at least CAUTION
oneĆhalf the distance when in staking
position Bearings with grease grooves in the outer
diameter surfaces of the outer ring require
strict controls on the application of adhe-
12-94. BEARING RETENTION BY ADHESIVE sives. The adhesive shall be applied only
BONDING. Adhesive bonding can be especially to the specified surfaces as shown in
useful in airframe and aircraft control bearing ap- figure 12-40. Failure to observe this pre-
plications. An adhesive bonded bearing, if properly caution may result in the adhesive flowing
handled, mounted and cured, will resist high thrust into the bearing causing complete seizure.
and compressive loads under normal temperatures.
However, this method of bearing retention requires 12-100. The following procedures apply:
12-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 12-4. Proof Test of V-Groove Bearing

Retention
Minimum Axial Pushout

Force lbs. 1, 2
Bearing Size Rod Ends 3 All Others 4
-4 1000 1500
-5 1100 2000
-6 1660 2800
-7 1850 3100
-8 2040 3400
-9 - 3700
-10 2430 4100
-12 2810 4900
-14 3320 5400
-16 4340 6000
Notes:
1. These values are for steel and titanium
housings. Aluminum and magnesium will
012032
be 1/3 of these values. Figure 12-32. Roller Swaging Tool for
2. Load is applied to the outer ring. Housing Staking Retention Method
3. These values are for rod ends similar to
MS21242 and MS21243. a. Apply a uniform coating of the adhesive
to the surface to be bonded.
4. These values are for rod ends similar to
MS21230 and MS21232. b. Center the bearing and slowly press the
bearing in place. It is recommended that a centering
jig be used to help guide the bearing into the
housing.
c. Continue to insert the bearing until the outer

ring is flush or slightly recessed in the housing.
d. Clean off the excess adhesive before It

has had time to cure. Use an approved solvent.
Use care not to transfer the adhesive to the bearing
ring face.
12-101. I n s p e c t i o n o f I n s t a l l e d A d h e s i v e l y
Bonded Bearings.
a. Allow the adhesive to cure.
b. Visually inspect the bearing after the re-

quired curing time.
c. Rotate the bearing to detect if adhesive

contamination has occurred.
d. Lubricate the bearing with the operating

012031 lubricant. If a restriction is present, grease will not
Figure 12-31. Poor Staking Impressions flow freely and uniformly through the grease holes
from Wrong Staking Tool and grooves.
12-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
012033 012034
Figure 12-33. Sleeve Type Housing Figure 12-34. Outer Ring Groove
Retention Method (V-Groove) Retention Method
e. Reject the bearing if there is any indication 12-105. A properly installed bearing will usually have
of adhesive contamination as detected by bearing a certain amount of internal radial clearance. It is
seizure, tightness, catchiness or difficulty experi- possible to detect internal radial clearance by holding
enced in lubrication. the outer ring tightly between the thumb and
forefinger and rocking it back and forth (figure
12-102. Proof Testing for Retention. Check adhe- 12-41). A radial play of 0.001 Inch will allow axial
sively bonded bearings for retention per Table 12-5. movement of approximately 0.010 Inch.
Apply the load to the outer ring and not through
the ball or inner ring. NOTE
12-103. C H E C K I N G BEARINGS AFTER There are some exceptions where bearing

INSTALLATION. design and/or specified interference fits
will result in a tight bearing installation
12-104. Check bearings for condition immediately and no looseness can be detected. Always
after installation. Physical checking of heat expanded refer to applicable overhaul instructions
bearings should be delayed until the bearings have and drawings when tightness Is encoun-
cooled to room temperature. When an installed tered.
bearing shows evidence of malfunctioning not pres-
ent in the unmounted bearing, the mounting is 12-106. Personnel physically touching an installed
incorrect and the discrepancy should not be blamed bearing shall use protective gloves and/or an
on the bearing. approved hand cream.
12-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 12-5. Proof Test of Adhesive Bonded Bearing

with Interference Fits
Bearing O.D. Minimum Axial Pushout

Inches Force Lbs.
Under .500 100
.500-.750 200
.750-1.000 300
1.000-1.250 400
1.250-1.500 500
1.500-1.750 600
1.750-Up 700
012035
Figure 12-35. Outer Ring V-groove Type
Spherical Bearings
012036
Figure 12-36. Housing Dimensions for
V-Groove Type Bearings
012038
Figure 12-38. Staking Tool for
V-Groove Type Bearings
12-107. The following static checks shall be made

on bearings Installed in an assembly:
a. Check bearings for required internal clear-
ance under mounted conditions.
b. Check to make sure that the bearings are
clean and free of contamination.
012037
c. Check seals and shields for damage that
Figure 12-37. Installing V-Groove Type Bearing may have occurred during installation.
12-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
12-109. D I S P O S I T I O N O F Q U E S T I O N A B L E
BEARINGS.
12-110. Remove bearings when there is any question

of the correctness of the mounting. Removed bearing
shall be returned to the bearing processing facility
for inspection, cleaning and disposition.
12-111. PROTECTION OF BEARINGS INSTALLED

IN UNCOMPLETED ASSEMBLIES.
12-112. Bearings will require protection at all times

after their removal from their protective packaging.
This includes periods of delay in assembly lines or
012039 shops. Open bearings need to be protected against
Figure 12-39. Roller Swaging Tool abrasive materials and corrosive contaminants. Mini-
for V-Groove Bearings mum protection is the use of some type of cover
that will keep foreign material from settling on the
bearing surfaces. If an assembly is left partially
d. Check shaft shoulders for solid bearing
completed for several days, such as over a weekend,
contact completely around the shoulder and for
with bearings exposed, additional protective mea-
squareness of the bearing in the mounting.
sures must be taken by providing temporary cover-
ings of clean polyethylene or equivalent material.
e. Check bearing for roughness, catchiness,
binding and/or random tightness. Replace bearings
12-113. D O ’ S A N D D O N ’ T S O F B E A R I N G
exhibiting these conditions.
INSTALLATION.
12-108. The following dynamic checks shall be made
12-114. A summary of the most important principles
on the installed bearing assembly:
and malpractices of bearing installation is provided
for use in educational bulletins and shop practice
a. Check for abnormally high shaft torque. placards.
This can be caused by excessive interference fits,
or misalignment of the shaft or housing. Excessive 12-115. DO’S.
thrust preload can be caused by an improperly
located cover plate.
a. Order only the number of bearings needed
for current workload requirements.
b. Check operating noise as a means of
evaluating bearing condition and performance. See
paragraph C-127 in Appendix C for information on b. Return open bearing packages and overage
the analysis of operating noise in installed bearings. bearings to the bearing processing facility for proces-
Note the frequency of occurrence of any noise while sing.
slowly rotating the shaft. This will help to isolate
the source of noise. A stethoscope, screwdriver or c. Remove protective packaging only when
noise analyzer can sometimes be used to check ready to install bearing.
bearing condition.
d. Keep work area clean: clean hands, clean
NOTE work bench and clean tools. Use protective hand
gloves and/or antiperspirant hand creams.
Special equipment is commercially avail-
able that will evaluate bearings in place e. Check housings and shafts before opening
and during operation. bearing package.
c. Check for indications of excessive heat f. Leave lubricant in place and undisturbed.
being developed within the bearing. Higher than
normal operating temperatures will generally accom- g. Return bearings with incorrect or excessive
pany noise and/or an excessive amount of lubricant. lubricant to bearing processing facility for correction.
12-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
j. Apply controlled pressure to the bearing

ring with the interference.
k. Check the bearing for proper seating in

the house on the shaft.
l. Check installed bearings for any malfunc-

tioning.
m. Remove questionable bearings and check

for cause.
n. Protect bearings at all times from mechani-

cal and corrosion damage.
12-116. DON’TS.
a. Don’t let bearings accumulate in work

areas. Forward excess bearings to the bearing
processing facility.
b. Don’t get careless. Be sure of your work.

Use the bearing designed and specified for the
application.
c. Don’t remove bearings from packages be-

fore they are needed. Do not open a package just
to check bearing identification.
012040
d. Don’t install bearings in dirty work areas.
Figure 12-40. Correct Method of Applying Adhesive
to a Grease Groove Type Bearing e. Don’t install bearings in or on dirty or
unprepared housings or shafts.
f. Never attempt to clean bearings before

installation.
g. Never relubricate bearings at time of as-

sembly unless directed.
h. Don’t use haphazard alignment methods.

Be sure you are right – then proceed.
i. Never use devices such as hammers to

mount a bearing.
j. Don’t exert pressure/force on the free

bearing ring.
012041 k. Don’t force a “reluctant” bearing.

Figure 12-41. Checking Installed Bearing
for Internal Clearance l. Don’t assume that your job is done when
the bearing is in place.
h. Use adequate aligning jigs to assure
squareness of bearing mounting. m. Don’t blame the bearing for all discrepancies.
i. Use proper mounting tools, such as a con- n. Don’t leave installed bearing exposed to
trolled arbor press with a pilot, for correct alignment. contamination.
12-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XIII
MAINTENANCE OF INSTALLED BEARINGS
13-1. GENERAL. 13-10. The transparent plastic bag method of protec-

tion is especially useful for rod end bearings and
13-2. The protection and maintenance of bearings bearings installed in cylinder attachment caps or
installed in aeronautical applications is extremely fittings. Transparent bags allow inspection of the
important if the expected service life of the assembly part without having to remove the protective bag.
is to be realized. Protection starts when the bearing This reduces the possibility of contamination. The
is removed from its sealed package and continues plastic bag will give adequate protection until the
during component installation and assembly, through assembly is installed on the aircraft. At this point
storage and aircraft installation and during the the bearings are protected by the aircraft structure.
operating life of the bearing.
13-11. FABRIC-LINED BEARING. Most fabric-lined
13-3. Bearings shall be protected against rough or bearings are made of corrosion resistant steel and
careless handling. Take every precaution to prevent will not require supplementary protection against
contaminating the bearings with abrasives, solids and corrosion damage. The liner is a self-lubricating
fluids. Conscientious maintenance programs that material that does not require supplementary lubrica-
include periodic inspection and lubrication require- tion. However, solid and fluid contamination can
ments will ensure long bearing life that will often detrimentally affect the wear or service life of the
exceed the useful life of the next higher assembly. fiber liner.
13-12. The following instructions apply to fabric-lined

13-4. APPLICATION.
bearings:
13-5. This section on maintaining installed bearings a. Do not vapor degrease the bearings.
is applicable to depot, intermediate and organization-
al level maintenance activities. b. Mask bearings to prevent contamination
with detergents, steam cleaning or stripping com-
13-6. P R O T E C T I O N O F B E A R I N G S I N pounds.
ASSEMBLIES AWAITING INSTALLATION.
c. Mask bearings to prevent contamination
13-7. ENCLOSED BEARINGS. Bearings installed with glass, seed or abrasive blast material.
inside assemblies are usually well protected. Open-
ings in the assembly shall be positively closed at d. Do not lubricate. No supplemental lubrica-
all times to prevent the entrance of moisture and tion is required unless specified by engineering
abrasive material. Permanent closures shall be used directive.
whenever possible.
e. Mask bearings when solvent cleaning an
13-8. EXPOSED BEARINGS. Bearings mounted assembly prior to painting.
in exposed locations on aeronautical equipment are
usually protected by bearing seals and shields and f. Remove all fabric-lined bearings that have
a light coating of the operating lubricant. Most of been subjected to abrasive blast media, detergents,
these bearings are equipped with double seals and steam cleaning and stripping compounds.
have plated external surfaces. However, supplemen-
tary protection is usually required. 13-13. P R O T E C T I O N O F B E A R I N G S I N
ASSEMBLIES GOING INTO STORAGE.
13-9. Place transparent plastic material such as
polyethylene bags over the exposed bearings. Hold 13-14. Bearings installed in most aeronautical equip-
the plastic in place with twist ties or tape. Assembly ment are adequately protected for the shelf life of
personnel are responsible for the initial covering of the item by one of the following processes:
the bearing immediately after installation. Personnel
working or handling the assembly should see that a. Contact preservative is applied during the
a plastic cover is intact before the assembly leaves operational check of the equipment or by lubrication
the work area. with the approved operating lubricant.
13-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Protection is applied to the assembly. In NOTE

the case of most accessories, instruments, and
critical components, this protection will be equivalent Remove all bearings that have been
to Method IA (water-vaporproof) or Method II (dehy- contaminated with detergents, steam
drated) preservation, applied by packaging in reus- cleaning and stripping compounds that
able metal containers. cannot be purged by lubrication.
13-15. Many larger assemblies such as aircraft 13-21. The following general rules are applicable.
control surfaces, or less critical small assemblies For frequency of inspection and lubrication of bear-
such as control rod linkages, are not given supple- ings, consult the applicable handbook of service
mentary protection in storage. In these applications, instructions and other maintenance requirements.
installed bearings must be given additional protec-
tion. All such assemblies shall be stored indoors 13-22. CLEANING OF AIRCRAFT AND AIRCRAFT
and kept as cool and dry as possible. ASSEMBLIES. Use care when washing down an
aircraft with water, steam, solvents or detergent
compounds to prevent the cleaning media from
13-16. Individual bearings, in addition to being filled entering and contaminating installed bearings.
with the operating lubricant, shall be smear-coated Whenever possible, exposed bearings shall be
on exterior surfaces with the same grease. Bearings covered for added protection.
shall then be overwrapped with grease-proof, non-
corrosive paper or aluminum foil secured as snugly CAUTION
as possible with tape. Use noncorrosive tape when
it is necessary for the tape to extend to metal Do not vapor degrease grease lubricated
surfaces, either painted or unpainted. Whenever bearings. The oil will be removed from
possible, protect overwrapped bearings by a strip- the grease and a dry deposit of soap or
pable plastic coating (figures 13-1 and 13-2). nonsoap thickeners will be all that remains
(Figure 13-3).
13-17. MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF
B E A R I N G S I N S TA L L E D I N A I R C R A F T A N D 13-23. Many cleaning compounds are excellent sol-
AIRCRAFT ASSEMBLIES. vents for the grease in the bearing and can cause
seal deterioration. Do not direct the cleaning stream
13-18. GENERAL. An estimated 90 percent of all against exposed bearings. Airframe and aircraft
bearing failures are caused by dirt and other foreign control bearings are completely filled with grease
materials getting into the bearing. Contamination can and any appreciable removal of grease will leave
be the result of poor installation practices or occur voids in which moisture can accumulate. When it
while the bearings are in service. is not possible to protect bearings which are subject
to cleaning stream contamination, the bearings shall
be cleaned, dried and relubricated.
13-19. Contamination Through the Oil System.
Most bearings in accessories, power plants and NOTE
sealed components are protected against external
contamination by the construction of the assembly. S (1) Lubricate bearings prior to cleaning
Contamination can result from the introduction of when limited amounts of water or water
foreign material into the oil lubricating system. emulsion contamination is unavoidable.
Contamination of this type can be minimized by strict
compliance with maintenance requirements for oil S (2) Lubricate bearings immediately after
and filter changes. cleaning. This precaution will minimize
the entrapment and retention of the
13-20. Contamination During Cleaning and Paint- cleaning solvent.
ing. Many aircraft control bearings are exposed not
only to severe atmospheric conditions, but to care- CAUTION
less treatment during cleaning and painting pro-
cesses. Much can be done to reduce exposed Use care to prevent solvents or solvent
control bearing failures caused by careless and soaked cleaning cloths from contacting
inadequate maintenance. Careful preventative main- dry film lubricants. Dry film lubricant coat-
tenance can extend the useful life of installed ings may be removed by commercial or
bearings. specification solvents.
13-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
013003
Figure 13-3. Grease-Lubricated Bearing
that has been Vapor Degreased
13-24. GENERAL MAINTENANCE. The following

procedures shall be followed:
a. Remove the contamination surrounding the

external surfaces of airframe bearings and lubrication
fittings by wiping with a clean cloth.
013001 NOTE
Figure 13-1. Application of Plastic Coating
to Rod End Bearing Foreign matter or contamination may be
forced into bearings during relubrication
or operation.
b. Wipe excess grease off the bearings and

surrounding surfaces. Excess grease will collect
contamination.
c. Relubricate bearings that have been sub-

jected to temperatures in excess of 160_F.
d. Replace bearings that have been heated

above 300_F AISI 52100 steel will begin to lose
permanent hardness above 300_F.
e. Replace sealed bearings that have been

subjected to temperatures above 250_F. Most seal
materials will become brittle and char above this
temperature.
013002
f. Cover bearings when component parts are
Figure 13-2. Aluminum Overwrap and subject to blowing sand, dirt, and water vapor,
Plastic Coating of Installed Bearing especially salt water and other corrosive-type con-
taminants.
13-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
g. Do not misalign self-aligning bearings be- personnel should increase the scope and frequency
yond the maximum permissible amount, which is of inspection when inspection and maintenance
usually $10_. Excessive misalignment will bend or requirements are not adequate for satisfactory main-
loosen the shield or seal. This will destroy the tenance. Defects will be corrected by bearing re-
effectiveness of the seal. placement or maintenance action as outlined herein.
CAUTION 13-29. DEPOT LEVEL. These instructions are to

be used during examination and evaluation of
Certain sealed bearing designs in the KSP inducted aircraft and in preventive maintenance
airframe series will come apart when programs during the service tour of the aircraft.
misaligned over 10 degrees. The seals are However, it should be noted that the amount of
easily displaced and the balls will drop out. in-place (installed on aircraft) bearing servicing
during depot level custody shall be limited to
inspection and relubrication of bearings. Assembles
h. Cover or protect bearings when drilling,
containing bearings requiring cleaning shall be
grinding, or glass bead blasting to prevent metal
removed and processed or have bearings replaced.
or abrasive particles from entering the bearing.
Refer to paragraph 1-68 for bearing removal policies
for depot level maintenance activities.
NOTE
13-30. INTERMEDIATE AND ORGANIZATIONAL
The clearance between the inner ring LEVEL. The importance of good squadron and IMA
outer diameter and the inner diameter of maintenance cannot be over-emphasized as prime
the shield is large enough for metal factors in obtaining full service life from aircraft
particles or other contaminants to enter equipment. These instructions are to be used by
the bearing. Seals of contact sealed intermediate and organizational level maintenance
bearings may be damaged or distorted personnel to inspect accessible rolling and plain
during repairs and will require protection. bearings in aeronautical assemblies.
13-25. PRESERVATION OF THE AIRCRAFT. When 13-31. INSPECTION PROCEDURES.

an aircraft is prepared for overseas shipment, an
overall surface preservative compound or a strip- 13-32. INSPECTION OF MECHANISMS.
pable film coating may be applied to the aircraft.
Cover all exposed bearings with Grade A paper a. Disconnect sufficient parts of the system
conforming to Specification MIL-PRF-121 to keep so that suspect bearings can be inspected by hand
out the preservative compound or protective film. rotation.
The paper should be left on until the protective
coating has been removed. This will reduce the b. Check the “feel” of rod end bearings and
possibility of any compound and/or cleaning fluid torque tube shaft bearings by moving various parts
contaminating the bearings. of the mechanism (per paragraphs 13-35 and 13-36).
Do not use linkages, pulleys or cables for handholds
13-26. INSPECTION OF INSTALLED BEARINGS. or steps when inspecting linkages and systems.
13-27. GENERAL. Concepts of limited overhaul and NOTE

Standard Depot Level Maintenance (SDLM) are
concerned with controlling the extent of component Many bearings show defects better when
removal from the aircraft and subsequent depth of loaded. If roughness was noted in the
overhaul. These programs require the use of sound system and defective bearings are not
judgment and reasonable inspection standards to apparent, load the bearings by hand
ensure the reliability of the bearings left in place pressure or connect sections of the sys-
and the removal of bearings not meeting the required tem and move the mechanism. Defective
level of quality. bearings should then become apparent.
13-28. Inspection and maintenance procedures con- 13-33. I N S P E C T I O N O F C O N T R O L C A B L E

tained in this section of the manual are considered SYSTEMS.
minimum requirements. Local conditions, peculiari-
ties of equipment or abnormal usage may create a. Release cable tension to check for defec-
additional maintenance problems. Local engineering tive bearings in the control system.
13-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Rotate individual pulleys and bearings by a. Fractured Components. Replace all bear-
hand. ings with cracked or broken rings, retainers or rolling
elements.
c. Remove bearings and/or pulleys if they are
defective per paragraphs 13-35 and 13-36. b. Seized Bearings. Replace bearings that are
seized and cannot be rotated.
d. Check pulleys and control cables for inter-
ference with any surrounding structure. Remove or c. Damaged Seals and Shields. Replace bear-
repair if interference is detected. ings if seals and shields are damaged, warped or
bent from improper installation or handling. Replace
CAUTION bearings with charred seals from excessive over-
heating.
Restore proper cable tension to the control
cables after inspection of the bearings and d. Rough Bearings. Replace bearings that
pulleys. have any obvious catching or binding when rotated
by hand.
13-34. INSPECTION OF ENGINE CONTROL LINK-
AGES. NOTE
a. Disconnect engine control bearings and
Roughness can be caused by caked or
examine per paragraphs 13-35 and 13-36.
deteriorated grease, foreign particles, cor-
rosion, brinelling from improper installa-
b. Carefully inspect all engine control linkage
tion, or spalling of the raceway or rolling
bearings which are exposed to heat. Engine bearings
elements from metal fatigue. The latter
are subjected to more severe service and require
three causes of roughness are corrected
closer inspection.
by replacing the bearings. The first two
causes may be corrected by cleaning
CAUTION
and/or lubrication.
Do not misalign self-aligning bearings
beyond the permissible $10 degrees, as Preloaded or reduced internal clearance
seals and shields can be damaged. bearings will not move or rotate as freely
as normal airframe control bearings unless
13-35. DETECTION OF DEFECTIVE BEARINGS. they are loaded. Reduction of internal
The following guidelines are provided for evaluating clearances normally occurs when bearings
bearings: are pressed into a housing; however,
certain control bearings are originally as-
a. Serviceable, well-lubricated bearings will sembled with a definite preload and
feel smooth when rotated with no perceptible rough- should not be confused with frozen or
ness, catching or binding. defective bearings.
b. Retainerless bearings (full complement e. Loose Bearings. Excessive looseness in

bearings) are likely to have some noticeable resis- bearings, either axial or radial, indicates excessive
tance to turning due to rolling elements rubbing wear to the bearing functional surfaces. Wear results
against each other. from abrasive contaminants or lack of lubricant and
is cause for bearing replacement.
c. Excessive external corrosion or worn plat-
ing should not be evident on the bearing exterior. NOTE
d. Shields and seals should be undamaged The maximum allowable end play or
and functional. looseness of the flight control system will
influence the acceptable clearance limits
e. Only a slight axial or radial play should of the component bearings.
be evident.
f. Heat Discolored Bearings. Discoloration or
13-36. DEFECTIVE BEARINGS. Defective or unac- bluing of the exterior of bearings usually indicates
ceptable bearings are those which have the following overheating. Examine closely the bearings, especial-
defects: ly the seals. A straw color is the first indication of
13-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
overheating, and loss of hardness may have oc- e. Replace any pulley when there is any doubt
curred (table 7-1). Bubbling or flaking of plating as to its serviceability.
indicates overheating. Carefully examine the engine
linkages for overheating. NOTE
g. Noisy Bearings. Noisy or dry bearings Pulleys are made of aluminum, light metal
usually indicate a lack of lubricant. Many bearings alloys and phenolic materials. Metallic
can be cleaned, relubricated, and returned to service pulley sheaves are less subject to wear
if they are not worn. and cracking than the phenolic sheaves.
h. Corroded Bearings. Excessive external cor- f. Check carefully the condition of the cable
rosion frequently indicates that the interior surfaces when pulleys are examined.
may be corroded, especially if the plating has been
worn off or damaged. Exterior corrosion is cause NOTE
for close examination of the bearings and possible
rejection. Corrosion on heavily loaded rod ends Pulley bearings are considered an integral
assemblies can initiate corrosion fatigue and frac- part of the pulley sheave. Failure of either
ture, and is cause for rejection. the bearing or the sheave will require the
replacement of the pulley assembly.
13-37. ROD END BEARINGS. Inspect rod end
bearings as follows: 13-39. PLAIN SPHERICAL BEARINGS (METAL-
TO-METAL). Check plain spherical or sliding bear-
ings for the following defects:
a. Inspect the threaded part of the rod end
shank. Replace bearings with badly damaged a. Corrosion. Check for excessive corrosion
threads. Check for looseness between the shank resulting from loss of plating, especially on the
and the linkage or rod on which the rod end is internal bearing surfaces.
mounted. Looseness may be caused by fretting
corrosion or wear, and may require replacement of
b. Galling and Scoring. Check for galling and
rod end bearings and/or rods.
scoring, and loss of dry film lubricant which cause
roughness or binding when the bearing is moved.
b. Replace rod ends with a bent or twisted
shank. c. Internal Clearance. Check for excessive
internal radial or axial clearance resulting from wear.
c. Check for cracks in the thin section of the (Refer to drawing or service instructions require-
housing (or banjo) adjoining the shank. ments for dimensional limits).
d. Check for cracks around the grease fitting d. Catching and Binding. Check for catching
area of the rod end banjo. or binding from contaminants or caked grease.
13-38. PULLEY BEARINGS. Inspect bearings per e. Heat Discoloration. Check for excessive
paragraphs 13-35 and 13-36. Inspect pulley sheaves discoloration from heating which indicates a lower
as follows: bearing hardness and reduced load carrying capac-
ity.
a. Check for cracks or broken portions on the
flanges and the pulley body. f. Cracks. Check for cracking originating at
the oil holes that may extend circumferentially
around the ring or fractures that extend towards the
b. Inspect the sheave cable groove for exces- side of the ring.
sive wear or deep cable marks.
g. Cracks. Check for cracking of the ball (inner
c. Replace pulleys with broken or cracked ring).
flanges.
h. Reduced Internal Clearance. Check for
d. Accept pulleys with small nicks in the reduced internal clearances from buildup of foreign
flanges if they do not interfere with the operation residues, varnishes and soap deposits from deterio-
of the cable. rated grease.
13-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
13-40. Replace bearings with any of the above e. Internal Radial Clearance. Reject bearings
discrepancies. Most plain spherical bearings can be with internal radial clearances that exceeds applica-
misaligned any amount after the shaft or pin has ble service, overhaul or local engineering limits.
been removed from the bearing bore. The entire
ball surface can be easily inspected. Cleaning and NOTE
lubrication is usually the only required maintenance
for plain (metal-to-metal) spherical bearings. When measuring internal radial clearance,
hold the bearing ring steady while moving
NOTE the shaft at right angles to the bearing.
Do not rock the ring during the measure-
Wipe excess grease off the exterior of ment as this will add some of the internal
the bearing to prevent collection of dirt. axial clearance to the internal radial clear-
ance measurement.
13-41. MOUNTING SURFACES. Examine bearing
(1) A maximum internal radial clearance of
mounting surfaces as follows:
0.006 inch will apply to applications not having
established service limits, for maintenance inspec-
a. Examine bolts or pins, which act as shafts tion, limited rework and other limited overhaul
for airframe control bearings, for excessive wear, concepts. Measure internal radial clearance with a
scoring or galling. These defects can result in too dial indicator with the assembly mounted in a fixture.
tight or too loose a fit in the bore of the bearing.
(2) A maximum internal radial clearance of
b. Check locking devices such as locknuts 0.003 inch will apply to applications not having
and lockwashers to determine if the bolt is locked established overhaul limits, and for Supply destined
to prevent loss of the nut or loss of adequate torque components. Measure clearance with a dial indicator
on the bearing installation. with the assembly mounted in a fixture.
13-42. FABRIC-LINED OR COMPOSITE BEAR- f. Internal Axial Clearance. Use a value of

INGS (TFE-TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE). This type three (3) times radial clearance for internal axial
of bearing has a liner system made of self-lubricating clearance measurement. Internal axial clearance is
TFE fabric bonded to the outer ring. The bearing measured by holding the assembly and moving the
is frequently designed with zero initial internal radial bearing back-and-forth in line with the shaft. Measure
clearance and usually a light to heavy initial preload. internal axial clearance with a dial indicator with
The liner is designed to wear in service under cyclic the assembly mounted in a fixture.
loads, gradually developing internal radial and axial
clearances. Inspection should be made in place by NOTE
either bearing shop personnel or other properly
instructed shop personnel. Refer to paragraph 2-60 Since fabric-lined bearings are designed
for detailed information on self-lubricated bearings. to develop an internal clearance during
service, many aircraft manufacturers have
13-43. Inspect fabric-lined bearings as follows: established allowable internal radial/axial
clearances limits. Consult table of limits
in the applicable handbook of service,
a. Liner is missing. Reject bearing and re-
maintenance or overhaul instructions.
place.
g. Liner Fraying. Reject bearings when fraying
b. Section of the liner is missing. Reject of the fabric liner extends into the load area of the
bearing and replace. bearing.
c. Partial Loss of Liner at the Edge. Accept h. Liner Edge Fraying. Accept bearings when
the bearing with a limited loss of liner at outer edge there is fraying of the fabric at the edges with no
of the ring if there is no evidence of metallic rub loss of liner or loosening of the liner.
of the outer ring on the ball.
CAUTION
d. Missing Surface Fibers. Reject bearings if
the surface fibers of the woven fabric are missing Do not pull out or remove loose fabric
(all or part). fibers from the liner.
13-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
i. Loss of Liner Bond. Reject the bearing d. Internal Radial Clearance. Same as para-
when there is a loss of fabric liner bonding to the graph 13-43e.
base metal.
e. Internal Axial Clearance. Same as para-
NOTE graph 13-43f.
Care must be exercised in checking for f. Loss of Liner Bond. Reject and replace
liner looseness to preclude damaging bearing.
good material.
g. Housing Looseness. Reject and replace
j. Liner Separation. Reject bearings with an bearing.
apparent separation or delamination of the fabric.
The interlocked self-lubricating fibers on top will be h. Plating. Reject bearings with severe corro-
broken loose from the reinforcing fibers at the bottom sion pitting or peeling of plating on ball surfaces.
of the liner. Light pitting on ball surfaces is acceptable.
k. Housing Looseness. Reject bearings with i. Shaft and Ball Surfaces. Reject bearings
axial looseness in the housing. with scoring and/or wear indications on shaft or ball
surfaces that indicates bare areas where solid liner
l. Plating. Reject bearings with severe corro- was missing.
sion pitting or peeling of plating on ball. Light pitting
on bail surfaces is acceptable. 13-45. CLEANING OF INSTALLED BEARINGS.
13-46. GENERAL. Bearings will normally be re-

m. Fabric on the Ball. Accept bearings with
moved from aircraft or aeronautical components and
transferred fabric material adhering to spherical ball
be sent to an approved bearing processing facility
surface.
for cleaning. However, there are some exceptions
and limited cleaning of rolling and plain bearings
CAUTION is possible at various levels of maintenance.
Do not remove wear debris that is at- 13-47. DEPOT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ACTIVI-
tached to the ball. Leave the fabric residue TIES. Exceptions to the general policy of sending
on the ball as the bearing is actually bearings to a bearing processing facility for cleaning
lubricated by the wear debris. Removal are as follows:
of attached debris will accelerate the rate
of bearing wear. a. Bearing installed in control rods, torque
tubes, and bellcranks that require bearing relubrica-
n. Shaft and Ball Surfaces. Reject bearings tion but are not equipped with lubrication fittings.
with scoring and/or wear indications on shaft or ball
that indicates bare areas where fabric was missing. b. Bearings that are permanently installed by
riveting, staking or adhesive bonding.
13-44. Inspection procedures for solid liner, self-lu-
bricated bearings are similar to fabric liner bearings c. Bearings that are an integral part of an
except for the absence of fiber inspection. The liner assembly or airframe installation.
system is a solid composite material as compared
to a woven fabric. The following inspection proce- d. Bearings installed in components that re-
dures apply: quire only limited disassembly or processing.
a. Broken Liner. Reject and replace bearings 13-48. Supplementary bearing cleaning facilities
when pieces or sections of the liner are loose or shall meet the following minimum requirements:
missing.
a. Provide tanks for hot oil soak of hardened
b. Missing Liner. Reject and replace bearings grease deposits. Use oil, MIL–PRF–32033.
when the liner system is missing.
b. Provide a spray booth for solvent spray
c. Cracked Liner. Reject and replace bearings cleaning of bearings using solvent, Federal Specifi-
with cracked liners. cation MIL–PRF–680 Type II. Booth shall be
13-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
equipped with a 5 micron filter on solvent and air. d. Work Table. Provide one or more work
Aircraft type filters can be easily adapted to provide tables. Table tops should be made of phenolic or
solvent filtration. Solvent shall be continuously fil- other wear resistant materials that are easy to clean
tered and shall be used only once before redistilla- and maintain.
tion. The spray booth shall be used only for bearing
cleaning.
e. Light. Provide a light with a built-in 2 to
NOTE 3X power magnification lens to inspect bearings for
condition and cleanliness.
Solvent spray booths must meet all feder-
al, state and local pollution control regula- 13-51. Cleaning Materials. The following cleaning
tions covering volatile organic solvents. materials are approved for use:
c. Provide a cleaning area that is dust con-

trolled. There shall be no grinding, polishing or other a. Solvent. Clean bearings in clean solvent,
dirt producing operations performed in the area. MIL–PRF–680, Type II. Bearings that are heavily
caked with grease should be soaked for several
13-49. INTERMEDIATE LEVEL MAINTENANCE hours in solvent, MIL–PRF-680 Type II.
ACTIVITIES. Certain intermediate level maintenance
activities have limited capability to clean, inspect b. Hot Oil. Use hot oil, MIL–PRF–32033 to
and lubricate certain bearings. The following mini- soften difficult to remove contaminates. Temperature
mum requirements apply: should not exceed 180_$10_F.
13-50. Equipment. Certain basic pieces of equip-
ment are required as follows: c. Fingerprint Neutralizer. Use fingerprint
neutralizer, Specification MIL-C-15074 to remove
a. Cleaning Tanks. Provide two tanks for and/or neutralize perspiration and fingerprint resi-
solvent soaking and rinsing grease and oil lubricated dues.
bearings. A small vertically agitated lift tank, such
as a Miji-Lif manufactured by the Magnus Chemical
d. Emulsion Cleaners. The following com-
Company, can be used. Less expensive and less
pounds have been tested and are acceptable for
effective equipment can be made by aerating static
use in bearing cleaning in lieu of hot oil and
tanks with compressed air.
especially for removing clay-based greases under
MIL-PRF-81322:
b. Spray Booth. Provide a solvent spray booth
for cleaning heavily contaminated bearings. The
bearings are “control” rotated back-and-forth by the (1) Mulsaway 4040 Magnaflux Surface Con-
pressurized solvent-air mixture. ditioners; (formerly Omega Chemical Co).
CAUTION
(2) CR 112 Super-Emulsorite: Chemrite
Do not spin bearings. Uncontrolled spin- Corp.
ning will permanently damage bearings
due to skidding of the balls on the (3) B&B 2020 NV Special: B&B Chemical
raceways. Co., Inc.
NOTE
(4) Chem-Mulso: Pro Chem Specialty Prod-
Solvent spray booths shall meet all feder- ucts.
al, state and local air pollution control
regulations covering volatile organic com- 13-52. Cleaning Processes:
pounds.
c. Baskets. Provide wire mesh baskets made a. Soak bearings in clean solvent, MIL–
from hardware cloth mounted on a suitable steel PRF-680 Type II. Soak time will depend on type
frame. Baskets are used to hold bearings during and amount of soil. Scrub, wipe and/or brush as
cleaning and handling processes. necessary to remove soils.
13-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CAUTION maintenance of the grease guns and lubricants and

close adherence to the following procedures are
Do not spin dirty bearings, as dirt will required to establish a satisfactory maintenance
scratch the active surfaces. Rotate bear- program.
ing slowly while cleaning the surfaces.
13-58. GREASE GUNS AND ADAPTERS. A variety
b. Rinse in clean solvent, MIL–PRF-680 Type of equipment can be either procured or developed
II. Agitate as necessary to facilitate cleaning. for in-place lubrication of bearings. A typical grease
gun is shown in figure 13-4. The type of greasing
c. Treat bearings with a fingerprint neutralizer, adapter required will depend on the type of grease
Specification MIL-C-15074, by immersing and agitat- fitting used in the installation and the style of bearing
ing bearings for two to three minutes. to be lubricated. Cartridge loaded grease guns
should be used by organizational activities whenever
d. Rinse bearings in clean solvent, MIL– possible to preclude contamination from dirty operat-
PRF-680 Type II. ing environments. Fourteen ounce grease cartridges
conforming to Specification AMS–C–22587 are avail-
e. Dry bearings with filtered compressed air, able for the following greases.
a temperature controlled oven or infra-red lamps.
a. Specification MIL-PRF-23827 aircraft and
CAUTION instrument grease.
Do not spin bearings since unfiltered b. Specification MIL-G-25013 extreme high

compressed air contains moisture and temperature grease.
foreign particle contamination.
c. Specification MIL-G-21164 molybdenum
13-53. ORGANIZATIONAL LEVEL MAINTENANCE disulfide grease.
ACTIVITIES. Organizational or squadron level clean-
ing of rolling and plain bearings is usually limited d. Specification MIL-PRF-81322 wide temper-
to wiping the exterior of the bearings with clean ature grease.
cloths. Cleanliness cannot be over emphasized with
respect to prolonging bearing life. Wiping cloths can
be soaked with solvent, MIL–PRF-680 Type II to
aid in the removal of soils.
13-54. Since most squadron activities do not have

cleaning facilities, flush lubrication of airframe and
aircraft control bearings is the primary means of
cleaning or purging bearings at the organizational
level. Refer to paragraph 13-55 for lubrication
instructions.
13-55. R E L U B R I C A T I O N O F I N S T A L L E D
BEARINGS.
13-56. GENERAL. These lubrication instructions ap-

ply to aircraft subject to rework by depot level
activities, intermediate maintenance activities and
can also be used during periodic maintenance of
the aircraft by squadron personnel. All bearings
removed from assemblies by depot level personnel
shall be forwarded to an approved bearing proces-
sing shop for inspection and lubrication.
13-57. Lubrication of bearings shall be performed

013004
at intervals specified in the applicable periodic
maintenance instructions for the aircraft or more Figure 13-4. Typical Grease Gun Used for
often as indicated by service experience. Proper In-Place Lubrication of Bearings
13-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
13-59. Grease guns for the 14 ounce self-contained

grease cartridges are available under Specification
MIL-G-3859, “Cartridge type, high pressure, lever
operated, hand grease gun”. Figures 13-5 and 13-6
show the two basic styles of grease fittings and
the corresponding type of required grease adapter.
13-60. Keep grease guns clean internally as well as

externally. Forcing dirty grease into a bearing can
cause damage. Keep adapters clean and wipe grease
fitting with clean cloths prior to greasing operation.
13-61. TYPE OF LUBRICANT. Always refer to the

applicable handbook of maintenance instruction
(HMI/TO/TM) for the correct lubricant.
CAUTION 013006
Figure 13-6. Zerk-Type Grease Fitting
S (1) Never mix two different specification with Grease Nozzle
greases together unless authorized. In-
compatibility of the greases may cause
bearing failure. NOTE
S (2) Never substitute lubricants unless Lubricate all airframe and aircraft control
authorized. The wrong lubricant may not bearings with a full pack of grease unless
meet application requirements causing otherwise specified. Refer to paragraph
bearing failure. 10-38 for additional information concern-
ing lubrication of these bearings.
13-62. Lubrication of Airframe and Aircraft Con-
trol Bearings. Grease, Specification MIL- 13-63. Lubrication of Helicopter Bearings. Many
PRF-81322, has been established as the primary helicopter bearings are lubricated with oscillating
lubricant for airframe and aircraft control bearings grease, Specification MIL-PRF-25537. Check the
on all types of aircraft. However, there are occasions applicable HMI/TO/TM to determine which bearings
where another lubricant will be specified. Consult are lubricated with this type of grease.
applicable maintenance or service instructions, and
maintenance record cards for the correct lubricant NOTE
for specific applications.
Lubricate all oscillating bearings with a
full pack of grease. Lubricate rotating
bearings with a 1/3 full pack of grease.
Refer to paragraph 10-49 for additional
information concerning lubrication of these
bearings.
13-64. Lubrication of Wheel Bearings. Lubricate

all aircraft wheel bearings with grease, Specification
MIL-PRF-81322 unless otherwise directed. Refer to
paragraph 10-40 for additional information concern-
ing lubrication of wheel bearings.
13-65. LUBRICATION PROCEDURES. Wipe dirt off

of grease fittings before attaching grease gun. Wipe
the exterior surfaces of bearing housings that must
013005
be opened up before the cap or cover is removed.
Figure 13-5. Flush-Type Grease Fitting The following lubrication procedures shall be ob-
with Greasing Nozzle served:
13-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
13-66. Lubrication of Control Bearings. Many

control bearings can be relubricated only when the
control surfaces are in the extreme up or down
position or when adjacent linkages are removed or
disconnected. No lubrication fitting should be ne-
glected just because it is difficult to reach. The
primary control system bearings are flight safety
items, and bearing operation can affect flight safety.
a. Clean dirt off the grease fittings.
b. Attach grease gun to the grease fitting and

pressurize.
c. Allow the grease to flow until clean grease

exudes out from around the fitting or bearing.
13-67. Shielded MS Ball Bearings. This type of

bearing is equipped with metal shields and can be
relubricated using the adapter shown in figure 13-7.
a. Disassemble sufficient parts to permit ac-

013007
cess to the bearing for lubrication.
Figure 13-7. Adapters for In-Place
b. Clean dirt off the grease fitting. Greasing of Shielded Bearings
c. Attach the grease gun and pressurize. 13-70. Concave Roller Bearings. These bearings
usually have relubrication provisions. However, care
d. Purge the bearing until the displaced must be taken when greasing concave roller bear-
grease flows clean. ings. Most of the present concave bearings require
only one shot or pump of grease from a grease
13-68. Needle Bearings. Needle bearings usually gun. The seal design is such that excessive pressure
have lubrication provisions and will be completely or large quantities of grease under pressure will
purged of old grease when relubricated. force the rubber seal out of the bearing.
a. Clean dirt off the grease fitting. 13-71. A new seal design being incorporated into
all concave type-bearings allows complete purging
b. Attach the grease gun and pressurize. of the bearing with no danger of forcing out the
seal. Unless the inside diameter of the seal is
c. Purge the bearing until the displaced notched to permit purging the old grease, one shot
grease flows clean. or pump from a grease gun is all the lubrication
that is needed. Rotate the bearing 360 degrees
d. Rotate the needle bearing 360 degrees during lubrication whenever possible.
during relubrication, as the needles will prevent the
grease from reaching all parts of the bearing. 13-72. Wheel Bearings. Lubricate all wheel bear-
ings with grease, Specification MIL-PRF-81322.
e. Wipe excess grease off with a clean, There are several different methods of lubricating
lint-free cloth. wheel bearings.
13-69. Rod End Bearings. See paragraph 13-67 a. Pressure Lubrication.

for relubrication instructions concerning rod end
bearings with metal shields. Concave roller bearing (1) Use pressure lubricating equipment
rod ends have integral relubrication provisions. Care whenever possible.
must be used when relubricating concave roller rod
ends (see paragraph 13-70). Other types of roller (2) Place the large diameter end of the cone
bearing rod ends do not have integral relubrication (inner ring) and roller assembly face down on the
provisions. neoprene pad (figure 13-8).
13-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
013008
Figure 13-8. Pressure Lubrication Equipment for Greasing Bearings
(3) Lower the holding plate with neoprene (2) Put on rubber gloves.
pad onto the bearing face.
(3) Take a sizable amount of clean, moisture-
free grease on the palm of one hand.
(4) Operate the control valve and force
grease into the bearing. (4) Force the grease between the cone and
retainer.
(5) Wipe of excess grease with a clean
lint-free wiping cloth. (5) Ensure the roller paths are amply cov-
ered with a continuous film of grease.
b. Grease Gun. An adapter nozzle can be (6) Wipe a film of grease over the exposed
manufactured that threads into the grease gun. The roller surfaces.
end of the nozzle is wedge shaped and tapered
so it can be inserted in between the retainer and NOTE
cone. Actuate the grease gun handle to force grease
into the bearing and move the nozzle tip around Carrier-type wheel bearings are especially
the circumference of the bearing. difficult to lubricate. Extra care is required
to ensure a continuous grease film on the
inner ring raceway surfaces.
c. Hand Lubrication. Hand lubrication is ac-
ceptable only when pressure equipment is not 13-73. REMOVAL AND DISPOSITION OF BEAR-
available (figure 10-8). INGS. Defective bearings will be removed in accor-
dance with instructions contained in Section III or
(1) Clean hands. the applicable Service instruction.
13-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
13-74. Bearings Removed for Shipment to De- a. Protect bearings held for shipment from
pots. Bearings that are removed by field activities mechanical damage.
for shipment to a depot level activity will be
preserved in accordance with instructions contained b. Preserve bearings with a dip coating of oil,
in Section X and/or the applicable Service instruc- MIL–PRF–32033, corrosion preventative, or corro-
tion. sion preventative compound, MIL-C- 11796 Class
3.
13-75. Bearings Returned to Service Designated
Technical Repair Centers (TRC) for Bearing Re- c. Identify the bearings with the original Prime
furbishment. Carefully protect all bearings that are Contractor’s part number or OEM part number.
scheduled for return to a bearing TRC for Level
II Refurbishment. These bearings are critical and
high cost, and must be adequately preserved and d. Package the bearings Method IA-8 for
packaged to prevent corrosion and mechanical shipment to the applicable Service bearing TRC.
damage. Refer to preservation instructions contained
in Section X and applicable Service preservation, e. Place bearings in an appropriate shipping
packaging and shipping instructions. The following container that will protect the bearings from mechani-
general procedures apply: cal damage during transportation to the TRC.
13-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XIV
INSTRUMENT BEARINGS
14-1. GENERAL. 14-9. FACILITIES.
14-2. This section contains special processing 14-10. All instrument bearing processing and in-
instructions for classifying, removing, cleaning, inspection shall be performed in a Class 10,000 clean
specting, gaging, lubricating, preserving, packaging room or Class 100 environmentally controlled work
and installing miniature and instrument ball bearings. space conforming to Federal Standard FED-
These specialized instructions are in addition to the STD-209. Detailed information concerning the pro-
general instructions contained in Sections II through cessing facility and environmental controls is con-
XIII. Refer to Appendix C for engineering data on tained in Section XV and paragraph B-208 in
materials and design criteria. Appendix B.
14-3. Miniature and instrument size precision ball 14-11. PERSONNEL.

bearings are used in various instrument applications
including gyro motors and gimbals, synchros, servo- 14-12. Inspection and processing of instrument
motors, gearheads, potentiometers, encoders, differ- bearings shall be performed by properly trained
entials, tape guides, pinch rollers and flowmeters. personnel that are well acquainted with bearing
design and instrument use. Workers engaged in an
14-4. The proper operation of aircraft instruments instrument bearing processing facility must be quality
depend primarily on bearing quality. The perfor- conscious in every phase of the work. It is recom-
mance of new and processed instrument bearings mended that instrument mechanics or other person-
in turn depends upon good visual inspection, accura- nel with similar experience with close tolerances and
cy of critical measurements, dynamic testing, proper instrument buildup be utilized to process and inspect
processing and handling and proper application. The instrument bearings.
small size of miniature and instrument bearings, and
the close tolerances on shafts and housings, neces- 14-13. Training and certification programs shall be
sitates special removal and installation tooling and established at each depot to train new personnel
techniques. for instrument bearing handling and processing.
Refer to Section XVI for additional information on
14-5. Most instrument applications use bearings personnel.
with very low starting and running torque levels
depending on the function of the instrument. Rota-
tional speeds may vary from slight oscillation (mea- 14-14. C L A S S I F I C AT I O N O F I N S T R U M E N T
sured in degrees) to ultra high speeds (250,000 rpm). BEARINGS.
Instrument bearings are usually subjected to light
or moderate loads. 14-15. Instrument bearings are by definition ball
bearings that are used in instrument applications.
14-6. Instrument bearings seldom fail from “classi- They are divided into three basic size categories:
cal” metal fatigue which is due to cyclic loading under
dynamic load conditions. The primary mode of failure a. Miniature Instrument Bearings. Miniature
for instrument bearings is an increase in operating instrument bearings have an outside diameter less
torque that is beyond acceptable limits. Excessive than 0.375 inch. The term also includes thin-section
torque levels are usually the result of contamination bearings with outer diameters up to 0.500 inch.
inside the bearing and/or the deterioration of the
lubricant. b. Instrument Bearings. Instrument bearings
have outside diameters from 0.3750 to 1.0000 inch.
14-7. APPLICATION. They can be in either the inch series (R-Series)
or the metric series (30-series).
14-8. These instructions apply to all new and used
instrument bearings inducted into the depot for use c. Thin-Section Instrument Bearings. Bearings
in aircraft instruments. Instrument bearings con- having thin sections with respect to bore-to-outer
tained in kits drawn from the Supply system are diameter. Extra thin section bearings may have
also subject to these instructions. bore-to-outer diameter sections of only 0.1250 inch.
14-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-16. PRECISION. c. Width variation of inner and outer rings.
14-17. GENERAL. Instrument bearings can be d. Reference side runouts with bore and
divided into two categories with respect to precision. outside cylindrical surfaces.
14-18. INSTRUMENT PRECISION BEARINGS. e. Bail groove runouts of inner and outer ring
Instrument precision ball bearings have tolerances with respect to face surfaces.
conforming to ABEC-5P, ABEC-7P, ABEC-9P,
ABEC-5T and ABEC-7T requirements. ABEC-5P, 7P 14-21. INSTRUMENT SEMI-PRECISION BEAR-
and 9P generally conform to the requirements INGS. Instrument semiprecision ball bearings are
contained in Specification MlL-B-81793 “Bearing, bearings with tolerances conforming to ABEC-3.
Ball, Precision, for Instruments and Rotating Compo- Refer to table B-28 in Appendix B for specific table
nents.” of tolerances. The following information applies:
a. Semi-precision bearings are used in low

14-19. Performance Requirements. Satisfactory precision rotating components.
performance of instrument precision bearings re-
quires that they meet two or more of the following b. This type of bearing does not conform to
requirements: the requirements of Specification MIL-B-81793.
a. Torque Tested. Bearings that must be c. This grade of bearing is not required to
checked for low or uniform operating torque. Exam- the special requirements of paragraph 14-20.
ples: (1) Bearings used in gimbal positions of gyros
require low breakaway torque, (2) Low rpm indicators 14-22. TYPES OF INSTRUMENT BEARINGS.
that require running torque tested bearings.
14-23. There are many types and designs of
b. Smooth Running. Bearings that must be instrument bearings used in aeronautical equipment.
checked for smooth running or critical vibration Figure 14-1 shows common terminology used with
characteristics. Example: Vibrations in critical gyros instrument bearings and basic dimensional parame-
induce a frequency which can disturb the electronic ters. Different outer ring configurations are shown
pickup sensing elements and thus introduce false in figure 14-2. Figure 14-3 shows several different
signals that cause errors in flight control. types of bearings that have been designed for
specific instrument applications.
c. Contact Angle/Preload Control. Bearings
that are designed and installed so as to control the 14-24. RADIAL RETAINER BEARINGS (Figure
operating contact angle and preload. Example: 14-1). The radial retainer (Conrad design) bearing
Bearings used in rotor positions of precision gyros is the most versatile bearing for instrument applica-
where isoelasticity is required. Isoelasticity is defined tions. The deep-groove construction and use of a
as the property of specially designed bearings to retainer makes the bearing especially useful for
yield in equal magnitude both axially and radially applications with the following requirements:
regardless of direction of applied load.
a. Low to moderate load capacity in either
d. Cleanliness. Degree of cleanliness for both the and/or axial direction.
the processing area and the cleaning solutions must
be considerably better than that normally considered b. Reversing load capability.
adequate for commercial grade instrument size
bearings. c. Low to high speed capability.
d. Minimum torque levels at low and moderate.

14-20. Dimensional Requirements. Instrument
precision bearings are manufactured with very tight 14-25. Radial retainer bearings are available with
controls on specific dimensional parameters. Refer several retainer configurations, including the crown,
to tables B-23 through B-27 in Appendix B for ribbon, nonmetallic and spacer designs. Typical
specific tables of tolerances. applications for radial retainer bearings are:
a. Inner and outer ring diameters. a. Gyro Gimbals
b. Radial runout of inner and outer rings. b. Synchros
14-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014001
Figure 14-1. Common Terminology and Dimensional Controls for Instrument Bearings
014002
Figure 14-2. Different Outer Ring Designs Used in Instrument Bearings
c. Servo Motors or breakaway torque is held to an absolute minimum

and must be uniform. Older gimbal bearings used
d. Miniature Motors small coil springs to separate the balls instead of
the conventional two-piece ribbon retainer. Later
e. Tach Generators bearing designs use loosely clinched, two-piece
ribbon retainers. The loosely clinched retainer mini-
f. D.C. Motors mizes torque variations by being able to move easily,
adjust to variations in loads, minor misalignment
g. Tape Recorder Guide Rolls and/or vibration. Teflon slugs and toroidal spacers
are also used in applications where uniform low
h. Actuators torque is a requirement.
i. Gear Trains 14-27. ANGULAR-CONTACT BEARINGS. Angu-

lar-contact ball bearings are designed to support
j. Potentiometers thrust loads and combinations of thrust and radial
loads. They provide low friction levels at high speeds
14-26. Gimbal Bearings (Figure 14-4). Bearings and have high axial rigidity. The normal ball path
used in gyro gimbals are the most sensitive type is located at some angle to the vertical plane, usually
of bearing used in precision instruments. Starting 15 to 35 degrees.
14-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014003
Figure 14-3. Special Types of Instrument Ball Bearings
14-28. The retainer is a one-piece machined non- ing the spin axis bearings is a precisely positioned
metallic design. Light weight paper/linen based rotating mass that maintains a constant speed. Its
phenolic and porous polyimide materials are com- deflection characteristics are predictable when sub-
monly used in angular-contact bearings. Frequently jected to accelerating loads. Gyro spin axles bear-
the retainer is vacuum impregnated with oil (2 to ings are made with contact angles of 15 to 35
3 percent of the retainer weight) to provide additional degrees depending on the type of gyro. The larger
reserve lubrication for critical applications. Porous, contact angles are usually found in gyros requiring
sintered nylon and fluorocarbon materials are also a high degree of isoelasticity (paragraph 14-19c).
used to make retainers for gyro spin motors.
14-29. Typical applications for angular-contact 14-32. A common type of spin axis bearing is the
bearings are: outer ring (cup) and ball assembly utilizing a cone
as the inner ring. The one-piece, machined, nonmetal-
a. Gyro Spin Axles. lic retainer retains the balls in the outer ring when
the removable inner ring (cone or shaft) is taken out.
b. Capstan Assemblies. This type of construction makes it possible to mount
the inner ring or cone as an integral part of the rotor
14-30. Gyro Spin Axis Bearings (Figure 14-5). assembly and to accurately balance the assembly.
One of the most important types of instrument This improves balance since the relative position of
bearing supports the gyro rotor. The gyro rotor the inner ring and shaft is not disturbed during
consists of a high-speed rotor, supported by bearings assembly. Unless a specific contact angle is specified,
in a frame or gimbal. Gyroscopic rotors generally any outer ring and ball assembly will function properly
revolve at speeds of 24,000 rpm, although some with any inner ring of the same basic size.
gyros operate at 4,000, 8,000, 12,000, 16,000,
36,000 and 48,000 rpm. Gyro manufacturers of NOTE
miniature gyro assemblies often increase rotor speed
to gain greater rigidity of the stabilized gimbal.
Contact angles are usually matched, and
14-31. Gyros are used in various parts of the cup and ball assemblies cannot be inter-
aircraft navigational system. The gyro motor contain- changed.
14-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
within the dimensional limitations of paragraph

14-15a. The radial ball bearing is the most common
type of miniature bearing. Super light, thin section,
radial bearings are used where space and miniatur-
ization are important design considerations.
14-37. SELECTING INSTRUMENT BEARINGS.
14-38. Tables B-44 through B-45 are provided to

assist in selecting the right type of bearing for various
instrument applications. Figure 14-8 shows the
marking codes that have been established by
Standard MIL-STD-1647 to identify domestic instru-
ment bearing manufacturers and the type of bearing
steel.
14-39. INSPECTION OF NEW BEARINGS.
14-40. New instrument bearings with a history of

discrepancies shall be 100 percent inspected by
depot level activities for condition and conformance
to applicable contractor drawing requirements. Fig-
ure 14-9 is an example of defective new material
014004 that was found during receiving inspection. Bearings
Figure 14-4. Types of Rotor Bearings received from Supply are usually overlubricated for
preservation purposes and must be cleaned and
relubricated prior to use.
14-33. The removable, interchangeable inner ring CAUTION

(cone) design makes it possible to use a single shaft
having identical ball raceways ground on both ends,
as well as two separate inner rings (cones) pressed Do not clean bearings that have vacuum
onto solid rotor shafts (figure 14-6). impregnated retainers unless the right
lubricating oil and processing equipment
are available to reimpregnate the retainers.
14-34. PIVOT BEARINGS (Figure 14-3). A pivot
bearing consists of an outer ring and ball set that 14-41. All new bearings, not 100 percent inspected
is used with a cone shaped pivot shaft as the inner shall be inspected in accordance with the sampling
ring. The pivot bearing is often used to replace jewel plan outline in Section IV, 4-41. Refer to table 4-1
pivots in instruments that will encounter shock loads. of Section IV for sample size and accept or reject
Pivot bearings can only support thrust loads and quantities.
are limited to low speed applications.
14-42. INSTRUMENT INDUCTION.
14-35. MAGNETO BEARINGS (Figure 2-9). The
magneto bearing was primarily designed for magneto
applications. It is still used in some turn-and-bank 14-43. Remove the protective packaging from the
indicators where high speed capabilities are not instruments outside the clean room. Removal of the
required. The inner ring is held in place by the protective packaging should be delayed until just
retainer and balls. The outer ring can be readily prior to induction into the overhaul shop and should
separated from the inner ring, retainer and balls. be done as close as possible to the overhaul shop.
It requires careful handling procedures to disas- This will minimize handling damage between pro-
semble the balls and retainer from the inner ring. tected storage and the disassembly area. Materials
used to clean the instruments shall be approved
by the Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical
14-36. MINIATURE BEARINGS (Figure 14-7). Min- Science Laboratory to prevent contamination of the
iature bearings are manufactured in many sizes clean room by the use of the unapproved materials.
14-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
in the “as removed” condition. Do not clean bearings

before routing them to the bearing processing facility.
Process the bearings as follows:
a. Identify bearings by either the prime con-

tractor part number, the original equipment manufac-
turer ’s part number or the complete bearing
manufacturer’s part number.
NOTE
Bearings with special controls on radial

play, torque, vibration or calibrated bores
are lost if they are mixed with other
“similar appearing” bearings.
b. Place bearings in clean polyethylene bags

with proper identification.
c. Group like bearings from several instru-

ments of the same type together in clean polyethyl-
ene bags with the proper identification.
d. Preserve the removed bearings if they will

not be processed within 1 week. Immerse the
bearings in aircraft instrument oil, Specification MIL-
PRF-6085, Specification MIL-L-81846, or equivalent.
14-47. BEARING REMOVAL.
14-48. GENERAL. Properly removing instrument

bearings is often more difficult than it is to install
them. Serious damage can result when removal
014005
operations are not carefully performed. Study the
Figure 14-5. Types of Rotor Bearings
assembly to determine the best way to remove the
bearing. Trial and error methods can damage the
14-44. INSTRUMENT DISASSEMBLY. bearing and the assembly. Always use the recom-
mended removal methods and the bearing pullers
14-45. Forward rotors to the rotor processing area listed in applicable instrument overhaul manuals.
as complete assemblies for evaluation, segregation,
disassembly and processing. 14-49. REMOVAL PRECAUTIONS. Some of the
common precautions that should be observed during
a. Evaluate rotor pivots (inner rings), cones bearing removal are as follows:
and/or removable shafts without removing them from
the rotor. a. Some instruments require the use of a
hammer and drift for bearing removal. Use caution
b. Remove the rotor cone or shaft only after when using this method of removal since the drift
it has been determined that the raceway is defective may slip and damage the retainer and/or shield.
or cannot be processed in place.
b. Do not press or pull directly against bearing
c. Process rotor cones and/or shaft assem- shields or retainers.
blies in the assembled condition whenever possible
to prevent the introduction of misalignment errors. c. Save bearings removed from instruments.
Bearings which are not damaged during removal
14-46. All other bearings removed from instruments may be used again after proper cleaning, inspection,
shall be placed in covered accumulation containers testing and lubrication.
14-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014006
Figure 14-6. Types of Gyro Rotors, Shafts, and Separable Outer Rings
d. Remove bearings that have been installed following removal procedures make use of special-
with light finger press fits by a light jarring action. ized tools either supplied by the manufacturer or
were developed at a depot.
e. Use the correct removal tools. Develop new
tools for each special type of bearing installation. 14-51. Deep-Groove Rotor Bearings. Bearings
mounted with a light finger press fit can be removed
using a collet expander puller, figure 14-10. The
f. Press or pull on bearing rings with the
puller expands in the bearing, applying slight pres-
interference fit.
sure through the balls to the outer ring.
g. Apply pressure to the inner ring when CAUTION
removing bearings from shafts, and to the outer ring
when removing from housings. The raceways of deep-groove rotor bear-
ings that are mounted too tight may be
h. Apply removal pressure straight and true. brinelled when removed in this manner.
Distribute the pulling force as uniformly as possible
over the entire face of the ring. Uneven pressure 14-52. Angular-Contact Rotor Bearings. Angular-
may cock the bearing, causing damage to the shaft, contact rotor bearings can be removed using a
bearing rings or bearing components. special puller similar to figure 14-11. The puller
utilizes a collet which expands into the snap ring
CAUTION groove and applies the holding force for removing
the bearing from the housing. The snap ring and
retainer plate must be removed from the bearing
Do not spin a bearing before it is cleaned. to allow proper use of the puller.
Removed bearings may contain dirt, often
introduced during removal. Dirt can seri- CAUTION
ously damage bearing when it is rotated.
Use of this puller can cause the loss of
14-50. METHODS OF REMOVAL. Special removal the matched ball set unless both the
tools are usually supplied by the instrument manufac- retainer and bottom snap-on plate are
turer for most instrument bearing applications. The replaced after bearing removal.
14-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
hammer (figure 14-17). Replace these bearings 100

percent with new bearings.
14-59. Arbor Press. An arbor press is one of the

best bearing removal tools when controlled pressure
can be applied. The following procedures apply:
a. Rest the inner ring or both rings (never

the outer ring only) against a pair of flat blocks of
the same size.
b. Displace the shaft with firm steady pressure

(figure 3-3).
c. Rotate the rotor several times during bear-

014007 ing removal to keep the shaft straight.
Figure 14-7. Types of Miniature Bearings
14-60. B E A R I N G S C R E E N I N G A N D S E G -
REGATION.
14-53. The expander tool shown in figure 14-12
is used to remove angular-contact bearings. Apply 14-61. GENERAL. Special segregation and screen-
removal force to the outside face of the bottom thrust ing of removed instrument bearings is needed to
lip. Remove the balls before using this type of puller. retain the identity of special features. Forward
Reassemble the balls and secure them in place with bearings removed from instruments to the instrument
a bottom cover plate after bearing removal. This bearing facility for processing and inspection. The
type of bearing is very difficult to remove with a following guidelines apply:
snap ring groove puller due to the shallow depth
and inadequate gripping surface within the snap ring a. Keep bearings with matched sets of balls
groove area. and duplex pairs of bearings as individual matched
units.
14-54. Small Bore Radial Bearings. Small bore
gages may be modified and used to remove very b. Use polyethylene bags with a special inter-
small bore radial ball bearings (figure 14-13). locking seal for handling and routing instrument
bearings.
14-55. Housing-Mounted Bearings. Remove R-2
size (1/8-inch Bore, 3/8-inch outer diameter) bear- c. Keep bearing part number identification
ings and other similar sized housing-mounted bear- with the bearings.
ings with an expander puller (figure 14-14).
14-62. PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION OF BEAR-
INGS. Segregate instrument bearings that have been
14-56. Single-Row, Deep-Groove Bearings. This
returned to the bearing processing shop. Group lots
type of bearing is installed with a finger press fit.
of like design and/or part number bearings for
They can be removed with a smooth face expanding
economical processing. An estimated 70 to 80
collet by exerting pressure only against the inner
percent of all bearings passing preliminary examina-
ring bore surfaces. The tool shown in figure 14-15
tion can be reused.
is designed with two sizes of collets on one puller.
The smaller collet may be used to remove 1/4-inch
14-63. An understanding of the accuracy main-
bore bearings and the larger collet to remove
tained in the original manufacture of precision rolling
3/8-inch bore bearings.
bearings is needed to fully appreciate the care with
which they must be processed. Well-trained and
14-57. Rotor Shaft Cones (Inner Ring). The motivated bearing maintenance and processing per-
special cone puller shown in figure 14-16 is designed sonnel are needed that have quality workmanship
to remove rotor shaft cones that function as the as their primary goal. Refer to paragraph 4-3 for
inner ring. information concerning personnel requirements for
this functional area.
14-58. Pivot Bearings. Many small pivot bearings
cannot be removed without damage. Remove this 14-64. The preliminary examination involves the
type of bearing with a needle punch and light following operations:
14-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Separate bearings with special features

such as low torque, calibrated bores, smoothness.
Place in handling containers.
d. Secure matched sets of bearings together.
e. Attach identification tags as necessary.
f. Remove at least one shield or seal from

bearings equipped with removable shields or seals.
g. Identify the type of contaminant and deter-

mine best method of cleaning.
14-65. DETERMINING AMOUNT OF BEARING

PROCESSING. Successful bearing processing is
dependent upon thorough cleaning, good visual
inspection, adequate gaging, proper lubrication and
functional (nondestructive) testing. Following these
simple procedures there is no reason for the 100
percent replacement with new bearings during instru-
ment overhaul.
14-66. Segregated bearings are categorized by

condition as follows:
a. Bearings that are obviously defective and

beyond repair.
b. Bearings that require cleaning.
c. Bearings that require inspection, gaging

and/or dynamic testing.
d. Bearings that require minor rework not to

exceed the cost of a new replacement bearing.
e. Bearings that have usable component parts

that can be cannibalized.
14-67. REMOVING BEARINGS FROM PACKAGES.
14-68. It is important to keep all applicable identifi-

014008 cation data with each bearing or lot of bearings.
Figure 14-8. Code Marks on Instrument Remove bearings from cardboard unit containers
Bearings to Designate Type of Steel outside the bearing shop. All other unwrapping should
and Identify Manufacturer be done outside of the clean room processing area.
CAUTION
a. Segregate and immediately reject bearings
with obvious defects. Bearings lubricated with grease or oil and
sealed in plastic containers will remain
b. Separate bearings with identical OEM or in good condition for extended storage
complete bearing pan numbers. Place bearings in periods if left unopened. Do not open any
approved handling containers to minimize handling container until bearings are ready to be
damage. processed.
14-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014011
Figure 14-11. Angular-Contact Bearing Puller
014012
Figure 14-12. Improved Angular-Contact
Bearing Puller
014009
Figure 14-9. Defective New Pivots
014013
Figure 14-13. Small Bore Radial Bearing Puller
014010 014014
Figure 14-10. Deep-Groove Bearing Puller Figure 14-14. R-2 Bearing Puller
14-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CAUTION
Do not turn the demagnetizer off until the

bearing has been removed from the mag-
netic field, otherwise the bearing will be-
come strongly remagnetized. Do not place
any bearing within the magnetic field of the
demagnetizer except when demagnetizing.
a. Demagnetize bearings before removing

them from the container/package.
014015
b. Slowly move the bearing (or bearing pack-
Figure 14-15. Single-Row, Deep
age) into the center of the magnetic field of the
Groove Bearing Puller
demagnetizer and out again turning the package
180 degrees during the operation.
c. Repeat the procedure several times, finally

withdrawing the bearing out of the magnetic field
(at least 3 feet from the demagnetizing unit) before
shutting off the current.
d. Residual magnetism shall not exceed 2

gauss.
14-73. CLEANING PROCEDURES.
14-74. GENERAL. From the time the bearing is

unpackaged or disassembled from an instrument it
is subject to dirt corrosion and improper handling
techniques that can adversely affect bearing perfor-
mance and life. The following guidelines apply:
a. Handle instrument bearings with handling

tools, properly designed tweezers, forceps, finger
cots, plastic palmed nylon gloves or other approved
equipment.
014016
Figure 14-16. Cone (Inner Ring) Bearing Puller NOTE
Corrosion starts the moment fingers touch

14-69. DEMAGNETIZE. the highly polished steel bearing surfaces.
Residues left on metal surfaces from bare
14-70. GENERAL. Demagnetization is performed hand contact are highly corrosive and the
to eliminate the residual magnetism which causes best protection against such contamina-
ferrous particles to be held to the bearing steel. tion is to prevent its occurrence.
All bearings are presumed to be magnetized. Bear-
ings used in gyroscopic instruments have operated b. Store new and used bearings in clean,
in electrical fields. New bearings may have become covered and properly identified containers.
magnetized during dynamic testing. It is even
c. Do not spin used bearings before they are
possible for bearings to become magnetized during
cleaned. Dirt is abrasive and can easily score the
extended storage periods.
raceways, balls, and retainers, causing their rejection.
14-71. GAUSSMETER. The level of residual mag- 14-75. CLEANING MATERIALS. The following
netism for instrument bearings is determined by a cleaning solutions are recommended for cleaning
suitable gaussmeter. miniature and instrument bearings:
14-72. PROCEDURE. Demagnetize instrument a. Solvent - Formulated hydrocarbon per

bearings as follows: Table 14-1.
14-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-1. Cleaning Solution Requirements
Part Number or Size of Filter

Material Specification Change Solution (Microns) Filter Change 6
Hot Oil MIL–PRF–32033 Weekly 100 Monthly

Solvent 1 Envirosolv 655 Every other day 10 Weekly
Formulated Axarel 6000
Hydrocarbon Turco 6226
Waterless Ultra- L&R No. 222 Every other day 5 Weekly
sonic Cleaning No NSN
Solution
Isopropyl Alcohol A.C.S. Grade Continuous 2 Weekly
Vapor Rinse 2 6810-00-227-0410 replenishment
HFE co-solvents 3M HFE 7100 and Continuous 0.2 Monthly
Vapor Rinse 2 Solvating Agent - 19 replenishment
Spray Rinse Perfluorocarbon As required 0.2 Monthly
Solvent 3 (B.P. - 120_F)
Deionized Water Ultra Pure System Continuous 0.2 6 months
(< 1 ppm TDS) 4 replenishment
Detergent, U.Sonic EZE Products Daily NA NA
(2- 3%) 4 Intex 8125
-or- -or-
Detergent, U. Sonic Fisher Brands Daily NA NA
(2- 3%) 4 Versa Clean
Nitrogen Gas 4 BB-N-411, Type I Continuous NA NA
Class 2, Grade A replenishment
Solvent 5
Silicone Oil &
Grease Remover
Notes:
1. Prefiltered per paragraph 14-78.

2. Vapor rinse solvents per paragraph 14-84.
3. High pressure spray rinse solvent per paragraphs 14-80, 14-86f and 14-88.
4. Aqueous cleaning procedures per paragraph 14-90.
5. Silicone oil and grease remover per paragraph 14-96.
6. Filter changes are determined by workload and the amount of pressure drop across the filter
as recommended by the manufacturer.
b. Hot Oil - Specification MIL–PRF–32033. d. Vapor rinse/dry solvents - Isopropyl alcohol

or HFE Co-Solvent as described in paragraph 5-14j.
c. Waterless Ultrasonic Instrument Cleaning
Solution - L&R 222 (Ammonia free).
14-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE
Solvents and cleaning solutions shall meet

all EPA, OSHA state and local environ-
mental regulations.
14-78. PREFILTRATION OF SOLVENTS. Solvent,

Federal Specification MIL–PRF–680 Type II shall
be filtered before being used to clean instrument
bearings. Solvent filtering apparatus is as follows:
a. Use a Millipore 0.45-micron (Type WH) filter

and stainless steel filter holding apparatus.
b. Use a storage tank that is connected by

stainless tubing to the Millipore filter and from the
filter to a filling manifold with a filling spigot control.
Equip the tank with a low pressure relief valve preset
at 10 psi with a sight gage and pressure regulator.
c. Use one gallon, unbreakable, polyethylene

bottles.
14-79. CLEANING EQUIPMENT. The following

cleaning equipment is used in instrument bearing
cleaning processes:
a. Cold solvent soak tanks (refer to figure

14-18).
b. Ultrasonically agitated tanks.
c. Vertical lift agitated tanks.

014017
d. Vertical lift agitated tanks capable of heat-
Figure 14-17. Removing Small Pivot-Type Bearing ing oil, MIL–PRF–32033 or MIL-PRF-6081 (grade
1010), to at least 180_F.
e. Vapor rinse/drying equipment per para-

graph 5-14j.
NOTE f. Self contained solvent spray glove box

cabinets as described in paragraph 14-81.
Silicone based oils and greases shall be
cleaned from bearings per paragraph 14-80. SPRAY RINSING OF BEARINGS.
14-98. Perfluorolube (i.e. Krytox) shall be
cleaned from bearings per paragraph 14-81. GENERAL. Solvent spray rinsing of bearings
5-40. has been prohibited in many air pollution control
districts of the country and total prohibition is immi-
nent. The procedures described in this chapter will
14-76. Solvents not listed in paragraph 14-75 and not require the use of spraying to adequately clean
14-88 should not be used unless authorized by the instrument bearings. The ultrasonic agitation in the
local Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical Sci- main cleaning operation and in the final will be
ence Laboratory. sufficient to dislodge particulates. However, solvent
spraying is recommended as an alternate process
if the vapor rinse equipment is unavailable or malfunc-
14-77. Approved Materials. Table 14-1 lists the tioning. There are specialized, self-contained, non-va-
materials that have been tested and used by various por emitting glove box spray cabinets available that
government and private industrial activities. will satisfy most air pollution regulations.
14-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014018
Figure 14-18. Solvent Soak Tank
14-82. Self-Contained Pressure Spray Equip- NOTE

ment. This is specialized equipment that will allow
high pressure atomized spraying of certain non-flam- The choice of solvent will be the responsi-
mable solvents in completely self contained glove bility of the local environmental com-
box cabinets. The equipment shall comply with the pliance office, the materials or physical
solvent emission requirements of the local air science laboratory and the equipment
pollution control district. Refer to Figure 14-19 for manufacturer.
the equipment schematic and to Table 19-2 for c. The unit shall be totally self-contained, in
procurement information. The salient features of the that all volatile organic compound (VOC) vapors will
equipment follows: be captured, condensed, refined and reused within
the equipment cabinet.
a. The equipment shall be designed so that
the bearings can be hand sprayed per paragraph d. The high pressure spraying system shall
14-90. Automated or fixtured parts handling is be designed so that the bearing surfaces are not
acceptable if the bearings can be protected from supercooled below the ambient dew point (i.e.
spinning. cabinet dehumidification, heated blast air, etc.).
e. The equipment shall have an internal bel-
b. The spraying system must be compatible lows system (or equal) that will not allow VOC vapors
with perfluorocarbon (PFC) and hydrofluorocarbon to escape while bearings are being loaded into and
(HFC) solvents. unloaded out of the spray chamber.
14-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014019
Figure 14-19. Self-Contained Pressure Spray Equipment
14-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
f. The equipment shall be capable of produc- e. Power output to the tank bottom surface
ing clean and dry bearings when they are removed should provide 2.5 to 5 watts per square inch.
from the spray chamber. The bearings cannot have
any entrained solvent that may evaporate to the
f. Transducers should be evenly spaced on
atmosphere.
the tank bottom to provide uniform distribution of
mechanical energy and induced acoustical energy.
g. The equipment shall be available in either
floor consoles or bench top models that are compat-
ible with Class 10,000 (or cleaner) instrument 14-86. Vapor Rinse Equipment. Vapor rinse units
bearing processing clean rooms. are specially designed to handle environmentally
compatible solvents that have replaced chlorofluoro-
14-83. Ultrasonic Cleaners. Cleaning methods carbon and certain hydrochlorocarbon solvents that
using ultrasonic cavitation are important to the proper were commonly used in vapor rinse operations.
cleaning of instrument bearings. Tests have shown Isopropyl alcohol (IPA) and hydrocarbon/perfluoro-
that ultrasonic energy is essential for removing carbon (HC/PFC) rinse units are the approved
inaccessible soil and dirt particles. The solvent must alternates for instrument bearing vapor rinsing opera-
have good cavitating properties to be able to tions. The equipment is described in paragraph
dislodge and disperse insoluble soils as well as 5-14j, and the procurement information is listed in
remove softened organic residues. Table 19-2.
CAUTION 14-87. CLEANING METHODS. Cleaning processes

to clean instrument bearing are simple yet very
Damage from ultrasonic cavitation can effective when properly selected and utilized. The
occur. Direct contact with high power following general cleaning process will adequately
transducers can brinell raceway surfaces clean most bearings used in instrument applications.
of instrument bearings with tight internal Refer to Table 14-1 for recommended solution and
radial clearances that do not allow move- filter change schedules.
ment of the bearing.
14-88. General Instrument Bearing Cleaning
14-84. The size, shape, power level and power Procedure (Refer to Figure 14-20).
distribution of the ultrasonic equipment is very
important. Excessive power levels can induce brinel-
a. Immerse the basketed bearings in a verti-
ling of the balls and raceways. Piezoelectric crystal
cally agitated tank of hot oil to remove/soften grease
transducers will perform satisfactorily without damag-
or oil for 30 minutes or until visually clean.
ing the bearings. The crystal transducers are ar-
ranged across the bottom of the cleaning tank to
provide uniform distribution of the acoustical energy b. Rinse the bearings in a vertically agitated
over the tank surface at medium power levels (up tank, using a formulated hydrocarbon solvent per
to 5 watts per square inch). Cleaning time should Table 14-1, for 5 minutes.
be limited to 3 to 5 minutes maximum.
c. Ultrasonically clean in L&R waterless ultra-
14-85. The following recommendations apply when sonic instrument cleaning solution number 222
selecting ultrasonic equipment for small precision (ammonia free) for 5 minutes.
bearing cleaning:
a. Select units with piezoelectric crystal trans- d. Rinse the bearings in a vertically agitated
ducers. tank using solvent, Federal Specification MIL–
PRF-680, Type II, for 5 minutes.
b. Output frequency of the transducer should
be 25 to 40 kilocycles. e. Vapor rinse bearings in either IPA or
HC/PFC (refer to paragraph 14-86).
c. The transducers should be permanently
bonded to the bottom of the cleaning tank. f. Optional/recommended. Solvent spray the
bearings in the self contained pressure spray equip-
d. The solid state generator should have ment described in paragraph 14-81 using the proce-
automatic tuning circuits. dures outlined in paragraph 14-88.
14-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MIL–PRF–32033 (180_)
MIL–PRF–680 TYPE II
014020
Figure 14-20. Instrument Bearing Cleaning Process (Solvent Based)
14-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NOTE Spray each side of the bearing for 10 to

20 seconds.
Pressure spraying may be the only meth-
od that will shear tightly adhering particu- g. Dry the bearings using warm, dry, filtered
lates out of the bearings that must under- air as specified by the spray equipment manufacturer.
go starting or running torque testing. 14-91. SPECIAL CLEANING METHODS. The fol-
lowing special cleaning instructions are included to
14-89. Preliminary Cleaning. Clean miniature and cover unique cleaning process requirements (refer
instrument bearings before preliminary examinations to figure 14-21).
as follows:
14-92. Aqueous Cleaning. The following process
a. Disassemble all separable bearings prior is currently being used, successfully, at a DOD
to cleaning. facility. Insure the the soaps or detergents used have
adequate corrosion inhibitor. The equipment is listed
in Table 19-2 and materials are listed in Table 14-1.
b. Clean the bearings as described in para-
graph 14-86. a. Demagnetize.
c. Maintain bearing parts as matched sets. b. Mount the bearings on a special multi-
Use suitable partitioned containers. armed fixture that is made of PTFE coated metal.
d. Store bearings awaiting processing or ex- c. Immerse the bearings in an ultrasonic

amination either in an oven held at 110_F. or in cleaner containing 3% detergent in deionized water;
a desiccating cabinet. Use vented containers. heated to 165_F for 2 minutes.
d. Drain the detergent solution and then rinse

NOTE
the bearings in deionized water heated to 160_F
for 2 minutes.
Clean only one day’s supply of bearings
when oven storage is not available. e. Inspect for cleanliness. Reclean, if neces-
sary.
14-90. Spray Cleaning Procedures. Spray clean
the bearings in the self contained pressure spray f. Blow dry the bearing with heated, ultrapure
cabinet, per paragraph 14-84f, and 14-81, in the nitrogen gas at 25 psi until the bearings are dry.
following manner:
g. Final dry in a vacuum oven at 28 inches
a. Place the bearing on a holding mandrel. of Mercury and heated to 165_F for 4 hours.
h. Inspect for cleanliness. Reclean, if neces-

b. Restrain the outer ring. Bearings can be sary, repeating steps a through g.
retained on the mandrel with the tip of the finger
using a neoprene finger cot. 14-93. Permanently Sealed and Shielded Bear-
ings. A very small percentage of instruments use
c. Thoroughly wet the bearing with the chosen nonremovable sealed or shielded bearings. The
solvent before allowing the bearing to rotate. bearings are difficult to clean by normal cleaning
methods. Attempts to clean these bearings by either
d. Work the bearing back and forth across solvent spraying or immersion will trap dirt and some
the spray pattern so that the bearing is rotated first of the fluid inside the bearing. When cleaning is
in one direction and then the other direction. necessary due to unavailability of replacement bear-
ings, the following procedures shall be used:
e. Position the bearing and rotate the mandrel
so that the spray is directed against the inner ring CAUTION
raceway and then against the outer ring raceway. This procedure is approved for emergency
use only.
f. Reverse the bearing on the mandrel and
repeat step e. a. Carefully remove one seal or shield. Use
care not to damage the retainer. Discard the seal
NOTE or shield.
14-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014021
Figure 14-21. Instrument Bearing Cleaning Process (Aqueous Based)
14-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Clean, dry, lubricate and test the bearing 14-98. C l e a n s i l i c o n e l u b r i c a t e d b e a r i n g s i n

per paragraph 14-88. separate cleaning vessels and follow the flow
diagram of figure 14-20 except pre-clean (step 2)
c. Install bearing with the sealed or shielded in L&R 222 VM&P naphtha based instrument cleaner
side toward the dirt producing area. or aliphatic naphtha per TT-N-95 (0.45 micrometer
filtered) instead of the specified hot oil soak.
14-94. Gyro Erection System Bearings. Miniature CAUTION
pivot ball bearings used in gyro reaction system
assemblies are usually installed with light press fits,
Aliphatic and VM&P naphthas are
followed by light staking to permanently hold them
extremely flammable. All cleaning
in position. The following procedure shall be used
equipment must be designed to prevent
when cleaning gyro erection system bearings:
ignition.
a. The materials and equipment described in 14-99. Separable Pivot Bearings. A few aircraft
paragraph 14-75 and 14-79. instruments use gimbal support bearings that are
of single-row, angular-contact design with no ball
b. Vapor rinse per paragraph 14-86. retainers. The balls space themselves around the
pivot and are held in place within the ring by a
retainer plate and snap ring. Retainer plates and
c. Relubricate serviceable bearings immedi-
snap rings shall be cleaned by solvent spray
ately after visual inspection.
cleaning, followed by visual inspection for obvious
damage.
14-95. Gyro Rotor Bearings. Most gyro rotor and
spin motor bearings can be disassembled for proper 14-100. REWORK OF INSTRUMENT BEARINGS.
cleaning and adequate inspection. However, due to
variations in retainer materials and critical lubrication 14-101. GENERAL. Rework of miniature and instru-
requirements, it will be necessary for the cognizant ment bearings is not normally economical or techni-
field activity to develop special cleaning processes cally feasible. During times of extreme emergency,
for gyro spin bearings. special rework processes can be developed to
salvage some bearings. These special rework proce-
14-96. The balls are matched sets and extreme dures shall be under the guidance and strict technical
care must be used to make sure balls are not control of the local cognizant bearing engineer. Refer
interchanged between bearing. When balls of a to paragraph 14-226 for special rework instructions.
matched set are lost, replace with a complete
matched set. If ball sizing equipment is available, 14-102. VISUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURES.
balls for less critical bearings may be accumulated
in covered containers under adequate preservation. 14-103. GENERAL. Most instrument bearings are
difficult to visually inspect due to their small size
and nonseparable design. However, trained workers
NOTE
can often inspect the active bearing surfaces with
the proper use of bearing holding tools and good
Ball sets used in processed instrument lighting. Additional information on visual inspection
bearings shall be graded to ABMA Grade criteria, definitions and examples is contained in
5 ball tolerances or better (tables B-35 Section VII. Use 10X magnification for normal
and B-36). inspection.
14-97. Silicone Lubricated Bearings. Bearings 14-104. EQUIPMENT. The following equipment is
that have been lubricated with silicone oils and needed to visually inspect miniature and instrument
greases require special cleaning procedures. The bearings:
cleaning tanks and chemicals must be separate from
the standard instrument bearing cleaning line be- a. Microscope with a range of 7X to 30X
cause small concentrations of silicone materials that magnification.
are left behind in the standard cleaning tanks can
easily contaminate other bearings that are processed b. Eye loupes with 10X magnification.
afterward. This contamination can cause wettability
problems with hydrocarbon lubricants. c. High intensity light sources.
14-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
d. Holding and handling tools. d. Brown circumferential bands - Reject.
e. Small probes such as dental picks. e. Scratches felt with a 0.010 inch radius
scribe or a small probe - Reject.
NOTE
f. Electrical arc pits - Reject.
Bearings to be visually inspected shall be
clean, and free of all oil and grease films. g. False brinelling - Reject.
14-105. TYPES OF DEFECTS. The following visual h. Indentations - Reject.

defects are commonly encountered when inspecting
instrument bearings. The type of defect will depend 14-108. Shields and Seals.
on the application. Refer to paragraph 7-19 for
definitions of defects. a. Bent or distorted - Reject.
14-106. Bearing Rings. b. Corrosion - Reject.
a. Cracks and fractures - Reject. 14-109. Retainer.
b. True brinelling of raceways - Reject. a. Cracks and fracture breaks - Reject.
c. Corrosion on raceways - Reject. b. Charred - Reject.
d. Corrosion on outer and inner diameter c. Chipped - Reject.

surfaces and faces - Reject.
d. Loose fuzz on nonmetallic type - Reject.
e. Indentations in raceways - Reject.
f. Fatigue spalling on raceways - Reject. e. Distorted - Reject.
g. Brown circumferential band on raceways - f. Retainer drags on ring lands (ball centered
Reject. design) - Reject.
h. Irregular ball paths - Reject. 14-110. NORMAL OPERATING CHARACTER-

ISTICS. The following inspection criteria is used to
i. Electrical arc pits - Reject. determine if the bearing has been functioning
satisfactorily and is suitable for reuse. The informa-
tion can also be used when conducting a failure
j. Scratches that cause roughness when
bearing is rotated or scratches that can be felt with analysis.
a small probe - Reject.
14-111. Radially Loaded Bearings.
k. False brinelling on raceways - Reject.
a. The ball path should be centered in the
l. False brinelling on external surfaces - bottom of the raceway.
Reject.
b. The ball path should be of uniform width
m. Stains on external surfaces- Accept. and parallel to the face of the ring.
14-107. Balls. c. The ball path should be distinct yet be

highly polished.
a. Brinell marks - Reject.
d. There should be no measurable wear to
b. Fatigue spalls - Reject. raceways or balls.
c. Corrosion pits - Reject. 14-112. Angular-Contact Loaded Bearings.
14-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. T h e b a l l p a t h w i l l b e h i g h u p o n t h e involves comparing the measured length to a prees-

raceway, but not reaching the edge. tablished standard length. Various types of gages
are required to accurately measure the size of
b. The ball path should be of uniform width bearings, bearing components, shafts and housings.
and parallel to the face of the ring.
14-118. Gaging equipment includes mechanical (dial
c. The ball path may have a slightly brown indicators), electric or electronic indicators, and
or gray color due to the effects of load. The ball pneumatic gages (air gages) capable of measuring
path should be free of surface defects. accurately 0.0001 inch or better. The equipment acts
only as a comparator and requires precision stan-
d. The ball surfaces should have a bright dards for calibration.
appearance.
14-119. Refer to Section VIII for detailed information
14-113. ABNORMAL OPERATING CHARACTER- concerning gaging techniques and gaging errors.
ISTICS. The following inspection criteria is applicable
to bearings not operating correctly or that are 14-120. TOLERANCES FOR INSTRUMENT BEAR-
subjected to abnormal operating conditions. INGS. Tolerances for Instrument precision bearings
shall conform to ABEC-5P, ABEC-7P, ABEC-9P,
14-114. Radially Loaded Bearings. ABEC-5T and ABEC-7T requirements (tables B-24
through B-27 Appendix B). Semi-precision instru-
a. Ball path is not parallel with the ring face ment bearings shall conform to ABEC-3 require-
- Reject. Indicates misalignment. ments (table B-28 Appendix B).
b. Ball path is wavy - Reject. Indicates the 14-121. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRU-
ring was misaligned with respect to the load. MENT PRECISION BEARINGS. The following spe-
cial requirements apply to instrument precision
bearings as controlled by Specification, MIL-B-81793
c. Brown circumferential ball path - Reject.
and ABMA Standard, Section Number 12.
Indicates operation under a preload or with marginal
lubrication.
14-122. Surface Finish:
d. Single wide section in ball path - Reject.
a. Raceways. Surface finish shall not exceed
Indicates dynamic imbalance of the rotating part or
3 to 4 micro-inches AA for AISI 52100 and AISI
a fixed radial load on a stationary part.
440C steels, and 5 micro-inches AA for beryllium
copper.
e. Multiple wide sections in ball path - Reject.
Indicates an out-of-round raceway. b. Bore and Outer Diameters. Surface finish
shall not exceed 10 to 12 micro-inches AA.
f. Mottled, dull, discolored ball path and ball
surfaces - Reject. Indicates overheating during c. Shaft and Housing Mounting Surfaces.
operation or contamination. Surface finish shall not exceed 16 micro-inches AA.
14-115. Angular-Contact Loaded Bearings. 14-123. Ball Selection. Balls used in the same
bearing shall be selected and graded so that the
a. Ball path is not parallel with ring faces - sphericity and the maximum difference in diameter
Reject. Indicates misalignment. between the largest ball and the smallest ball in
that bearing shall not exceed the limits of tables
b. Wide ball path - Reject. Indicates excessive B-35 and B-36 in Appendix B.
loads.
14-124. Internal Radial Clearance. Internal radial
c. Brown circumferential bands on raceways clearance shall be as specified in tables 14-2 through
and balls - Reject. Indicates excessive preloads. 14-4 unless the contact angle is specified. Internal
radial clearance shall not exceed 2 percent of the
14-116. DIMENSIONAL INSPECTION. ball diameter.
14-117. GENERAL. Measuring the physical dimen- 14-125. Gaging Load. The maximum gage load for
sions of a bearing is a comparative process that instrument bearings shall be 2 ounces unless other-
14-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
wise specified in the overhaul instruction or engineer- a. Inner Diameter Gages.

ing directive.
b. Outer Diameter Gages.
NOTE
c. Internal Radial Clearance Gages.
Ring deflection must be considered even
with a 2 ounce gage load when checking d. Ball Classifying Equipment.
thin, light section bearings.
e. Electronic Comparator Gages.
14-126. Running Torque. The maximum or average
torque limit values shall be tested in accordance
f. Starting Torque Tester.
with Standard MIL-STD-206.
g. Running Torque Tester.
14-127. Starting Torque. The average torque re-
quired to start and maintain rotation for a prescribed
area of travel of one ring while holding the other h. Smoothness or Vibration Tester.
ring stationary shall be in accordance with table 14-5
unless otherwise specified. 14-129. The following additional equipment will be
required for more extensive bearing processing
14-128. MINIMUM GAGING EQUIPMENT. Instru- programs:
ment bearing processing facilities shall be equipped
with the following gaging equipment: a. Internal Axial Clearance Gage.
Table 14-2. Radial Internal Clearance for Radial Instrument Precision Bearings
Amount of Clearance
Clearance Designation in Inches
Tight 0.0001 to 0.0003
Standard 0.0003 to 0.0005
Loose 0.0005 to 0.0008
Extra Loose 0.0008 to 0.0011
Table 14-3. Radial Internal Clearance for Torque Tube Instrument Ball Bearings
Amount of Clearance
Size of Bore Clearance Designation in Inches
Up to and including Standard 0.0005Ć0.0011
2.5
2 5 inches
Loose 0.0008Ć0.0014
Over 2.5 Inches Standard 0.0007-0.0015
Loose 0.0012-0.0020
Table 14-4. Radial Internal Clearance for Extra Thin Instrument Ball Bearings
Amount of Clearance
Clearance Designation in Inches
Standard 0.0003Ć0.0008
Loose 0.0005Ć0.0010
14-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Flushness - Preload Gage. ters against dimensional coding requirements. The

c. Ring Matching Gage. diameters shall be checked when there is any
evidence of wear or slippage or when the surfaces
d. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment. have been buffed or reworked.
e. Contact Angle Gage.
c. Ball Sizing. Measure individual ball diame-
14-130. GAGING REQUIREMENTS. Not all minia- ters whenever replacing ball sets, screening groups
ture and instrument bearings will require the same of balls, or when assembling bearings from compo-
types of dimensional checks. Minimum gaging re- nent parts.
quirements for used instrument bearings will depend
on the type of instrument in which they are installed.
d. Race Ball Groove Diameters. Size the inner
a. Internal Radial Clearance. Check the inter- ring and outer ring ball groove diameters whenever
nal radial clearance of all used instrument bearings assembling bearings from component parts.
against drawing requirements.
e. Internal Axial Clearance. Measure internal
b. Bore and Outer Diameters. Check all used axial clearance when specified by drawing require-
bearings with calibrated bores and/or outer diame- ments or when replacing ball sets.
Table 14-5. Average Starting Torque Values (ABEC-7P bearings)

Bendix Models 13716-6-A and 13717-2-A
Maximum Starting Torque milligram - millimeters
Bore Diameter Outside Diameter
d D Test Load Radial Internal Clearance
Tight Fit Normal Fit Loose Fit
Inches Inches Grams .0001” - .0003” .0002” - .0005” .0005” - .0008”
0.0400 0.1250 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.0469 0.1562 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.0550 0.1875 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.0781 0.2500 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.0937 0.3125 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.1250 0.2500 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.1250 0.3125 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.1250 0.3750 75 2,000 1,600 1,500
0.1250 0.3750 400 5,000 4,500 4,200
0.1250 0.5000 400 5,000 4,500 4,200
0.1562 0.3125 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.1875 0.3125 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.1875 0.3750 75 2,000 1,600 1,500
0.1875 0.5000 400 6.500 5,500 5,000
0.2500 0.3750 75 1,800 1,500 1,400
0.2500 0.5000 400 6,000 5,200 4,800
0.2500 0.6250 400 7,000 6,000 5,500
0.2500 0.7500 400 8,000 7,000 6,500
0.3750 0.8750 400 11,000 9,500 9,000
14-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-131. GAGING METHODS. The following gaging shaft whole contributing a minimum amount of
procedures are used to measure the dimensional opposition to its rotation. Torque testing is a process
parameters of miniature and instrument bearings: of measuring and evaluating the friction (torque)
level. A brief review will give a better understanding
14-132. Ball Gaging. Ball sizing is important to of torque testing operations.
ensure proper load distribution within a bearing. The
actual diameter is also an important factor and 14-140. BACKGROUND THEORY. Although a good
controls the internal radial clearance and contact quality ball bearing is almost frictionless, the nature
angle. Tolerances for instrument precision graded of the small amount of friction in any rotating bearing
balls are given in table B-35, in Appendix B. is complex and depends on a number of factors.
Balls make contact with the inner ring raceway, the
14-133. Use an electronic comparator equipped with outer ring raceway and the retainer. The retainer
classifying accessories to measure ball diameter. generally makes contact with the inner or outer ring
Refer to paragraph 8-109 for detailed instructions. land surfaces. All of these areas of moving contact
contribute to the level of friction within a bearing.
14-134. Size Coding of Bore and Outer Diameter.
Bearings are sometimes supplied with bore and outer 14-141. Even the balls rolling in the raceway are
diameter sizes classified in steps of 0.0001 inch sources of friction since the area of contact between
for selective assembly. The classified bores and/out- the ball and its raceway is not a single point, but
er diameters allow closer control on mounting fits. an elliptically shaped contact area. This is because
of surface deformation under load (see paragraph
14-135. The bore and outer diameter classification B-53e). Since all parts of the contact ellipse are
identification is comprised of two digits. The first not equidistant from the axis of rotation of the ball,
number refers to the bore dimension and the second certain proportions of the “load area” represent areas
number to the outer diameter. When one dimension of sliding friction. Under light loads the load area
only is classified, the other dimension is denoted is small, and the amount of sliding friction is
by a 0. negligible. As loads increase, friction from this source
becomes appreciable.
Example: Code 21 refers to a bearing with the bore
dimension classified as Code 2 and the outer 14-142. The surface finish of the contacting parts
diameter as Code 1. of the bearing determine also affects the amount
of total bearing friction. Other factors which contrib-
ute to the torque level of a ball bearing are viscous
14-136. Refer to table 14-6 for code number and
examples of codes. Letter codes are used by the friction of the lubricant, variations in geometry of
bearing manufacturer to classify bore and outer balls and raceways, type of retainer and contamina-
diameter sizes in increments of 0.000050 inch. tion of the bearing with foreign material.
14-137. Internal Radial Clearance Measurement. 14-143. TYPES OF BEARING TORQUE. There are
Internal radial clearance is measured using an two basic types of torque or resistance to movement
internal radial clearance gage. generated within a bearing assembly. They are
starting torque and running torque.
NOTE
14-144. Starting Torque. Starting torque is the
Radial play is not included in ABEC amount of torque required to initiate and maintain
classification. An ABEC-5 precision does bearing rotation, for a prescribed arc of travel, of
not mean that internal radial clearance one ring with the other ring held stationary. Starting
is held within a specified range. torque values are important when the bearing
application is a “zero rpm” application such as gyro
14-138. TORQUE TESTING. gimbals and servo motors. The sensitivity of the
instrument will depend upon the starting torque of
14-139. GENERAL. Instrument bearing performance the bearings. The average value of starting torque
will depend to a large extent upon its torque of a bearing will be greater than the average value
characteristics. Torque is a key factor in instrument of running torque. Greater emphasis is usually
precision bearings since the primary function of a placed on starting torque measurements than on
ball bearing is to position the ends of a rotating running torque measurements.
14-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014022
Figure 14-22. Torque Conversion Chart
14-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-6. Size Classification of Bore and Outer Diameter Dimensions
Size Range
Inch Code
0.0000 to -0.0001 1
-0.0001 to -0.0002 2
-0.0002 to -0.0003 3
-0.0003 to -0.0004 4
-0.0004 to -0.0005 5
Size Range
Inch Code
0.00000 to -0.00005 A
-0.00005 to -0.00010 B
-0.00010 to -0.00015 C
-0.00015 to -0.00020 D
-0.00020 to -0.00025 E
-0.00025 to -0.00030 F
-0.00030 to -0.00035 G
-0.00035 to -0.00040 H
-0.00040 to -0.00045 I
-0.00045 to -0.00050 J
Examples:
Code Description Tolerance
12 Bore falls between 0.0000 and -0.0001
Outer diameter falls between -0.0001 and -0.0002
2B Bore falls between -0.0001 and -0.0002
DC Bore falls between -0.00015 and -0.00020
10 Bore falls between -0.0000 and -0.0001
Outer diameter is not coded.
14-145. Running Torque. Running torque is the for torque. Other torque units are listed in the
torque required to maintain bearing rotation under conversion chart shown in figure 14-22.
a specified load after rotation has been initiated.
Many testers have been developed to measure 14-147. GENERAL TORQUE TESTING PROCE-
running torque and the running characteristics of DURE. The following procedures apply to torque
a bearing. Platform gyro systems require the mea- testing instrument bearings:
surement of both starting and running torque. Many
of the newer type instruments utilize constantly
driven “piggy back” gimbal support bearings. This a. Demagnetize bearings.
type of bearing must be subjected to running torque
tests for true operational analysis. b. Clean bearings that are to be torque tested.
c. Lubricate the bearings with a light instru-

14-146. TORQUE MEASUREMENTS UNITS. Milli- ment oil per table 14-7, and rotate the bearing to
gram-millimeter is the standard unit of measurement evenly distribute the lubricant.
14-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-7. Torque Test Lubrication Chart 400-gram axial thrust load. While the bearing Is being
rotated, the tester explores the various configuration
Bearing O.D. Amount of Oil * of the bearing and gives precise measurements of
low running friction torque on a chart recorder. A
Less than .3750 1 Drop pass and reject indicator, which can be set for any
0.3750 - 0.6250 2 Drops torque level within the capabilities of the instrument,
stops the test upon reaching a reject point.
0.6250 - 0.8750 3 Drops
0.8750 - 1.2500 4 Drops 14-152. The running torque tester identifies many
common bearing problems such as retainer hangup,
* Oil drops from a 26 BD needle, free forming ball or raceway surface problems, contamination,
from a vertical plane. problems with internal geometry, or other structural
defects.
d. Select the torque testing equipment that 14-153. Conduct the running torque test as follows:
is specified for the particular bearing.
NOTE
e. Torque test in accordance with instructions
provided with the torque testing equipment. A 75 gram load is used for bearings up
to 0.3750 inch outer diameter. A 400 gram
14-148. MINIMUM TORQUE TESTING REQUIRE- load is used for bearings over 0.3750 inch
MENTS. The following bearings shall be torque outer diameter.
tested by the bearing processing facility prior to
being routed to the instrument shop for use: a. Place the lubricated bearing on the lower
(outer) tooling and properly seat the bearing.
a. Synchros - Starting torque test.
b. Slide the air bearing assembly under the
b. Servo motors - Running torque test. spindle (the FLOAT/DOWN switch should still be
in the FLOAT position).
c. Gyro gimbals - Starting torque test.
c. Set the SLEEVE LOAD/UNLOAD switch to
the LOAD position.
d. Gyro rotors - Running torque test.
d. Check to ensure the bearing is properly
e. Precision potentiometers - Running torque seated in the inner tooling. Slowly spin the sleeve
test. on the air bearing in a clockwise direction approxi-
mately one half of a revolution per second for a
f. Tape guides - Running torque test. minimum of five revolutions to distribute the oil.
14-149. TORQUE TESTING EQUIPMENT. Numer- e. Set the torque arm to the horizontal position
ous torque testers have been used by the bearing and gently bring it in contact with the transducer.
industry and bearing users to test instrument bear-
ings. The military services have standardized on the
following equipment to check the starting and f. Press the START CYCLE button.
running torque of instrument bearings.
g. The bearing will rotate 360 degrees coun-
14-150. Military Standard 206 Running Torque terclockwise, then automatically reverse direction
Tester. This torque tester was designed to function and rotate another 360 degrees in the opposite
as an industry standard for measuring the running direction. At the completion of the test cycle, the
torque of instrument and miniature bearings (figure cycle button will go off.
14-23). It was developed to enable the military
services and industry to set friction torque standards h. Place the torque arm in the vertical position
for procurement of instrument precision bearings. (UP).
14-151. Bearings are tested by slowly rotating the i. Place the FLOAT/DOWN switch to the
outer ring at 2 RPM under a prescribed 75- or DOWN position.
14-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
j. Place the SLEEVE LOAD/UNLOAD switch third test cycle will be considered unacceptable to
to the UNLOAD position and remove the bearing the torque level specified.
from the tooling.
14-154. Automatic Starting Torque Tester (Figure
k. Read the chart for the applicable torque 14-24). The automatic starting torque tester performs
characteristics. the torque measurements with electronic precision
and consistency. The operator is required only to
load and unload the bearings for each test. One
l. Bearings that fail to pass the first test operator can easily handle as many as five automatic
should be washed, lubricated and retested. Bearings testers at the same time. This will allow a test rate
failing the second test shall be washed, relubricated of approximately 150 bearings per hour. Testing
and retested a second time. All bearings failing the limits are included in table 14-5.
014023
Figure 14-23. Running Torque Tester
14-29
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-155. Conduct the starting torque test as follows: d. Rotate the rotor to ensure proper seating
of the test bearing and to distribute the lubricant
within the bearing.
a. Make sure the bearings have been properly
cleaned and lubricated. All torque tests are made e. Push cycle start switch to initiate the
with controlled oil lubrication. automatic gaging cycle.
b. Mount bearings, using tweezers or other (1) At the end of a successful test, the
proper handling tools, on the inner ring tooling and Accept Light will come on.
then place the outer ring rotor onto the bearing.
(2) Failure of a bearing to pass the test
will cause the Reject Light to come on and the gage
c. Gently push the rotor down until the white will terminate the test program.
circumferential line on the rotor is flush with the
top of the mechanical unit and tighten clam screw (3) To stop a test, press the Cycle Stop
on side of mechanical unit. Switch and the testing cycle will be aborted.
014024
Figure 14-24. Starting Torque Tester
14-30
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Limits for vibration testing using the Barden Smoo-

thrator are listed in table 14-8. A separate calibration
procedure is required for the counter and the dwell
level meter (figure 14-26).
NOTE
There are several models of the Barden

Smoothrator in use throughout industry
and government. Consult the calibration
and operating instructions for the specific
model Smoothrator.
14-158. LUBRICATION OF INSTRUMENT BALL

BEARINGS.
14-159. GENERAL. Lubrication is a critical factor

in the proper functioning of Instrument bearings. The
type of lubricant must be carefully chosen and
matched to operating conditions, life requirements
014025 and envelope size. The small size of miniature and
Figure 14-25. Model II Barden Smoothrator instrument bearings provides very little space for
the lubricant. Dynamic requirements may limit the
amount of lubricant to a single small drop of oil
for thousands of hours of operation.
f. If bearings fail to pass the torque test

requirement, reclean, lubricate, and retest. 14-160. Lubrication reduces friction and torque lev-
els to very low values for satisfactory instrument
operation. As previously indicated, rolling and sliding
g. Repeat this procedure on individual bear- friction is always present even in instrument and
ings a minimum of three times. If the bearing still miniature size bearings. The lubricant, even in very
falls to meet torque test requirements on the fourth small quantities, must control the sliding friction that
test, reject the bearing or downgrade it for less develops between the retainer and rings, retainer
critical applications. and balls and the rolling friction of the balls on the
raceways.
h. Immediately after torque testing, place the
bearing in a clean, dry, covered container. 14-161. The lubricant film separating metal and
nonmetallic surfaces is very thin, usually 10 microin-
14-156. Smoothrator (Figure 14-25). The Smoo- ches or less. Therefore, cleanliness of the bearing
thrator is manufactured by the Barden Corporation surfaces and purity of the lubricant are important
and is used by government and industry to test factors. Metal-to-metal contact occurs each time the
instrument bearings for vibrational characteristics. lubricating film is penetrated. This uncontrolled
It detects vibrations caused by imperfections in the random metal contact generates unwanted heat,
raceway finish or by foreign matter in the running causes wear and initiates lubricant degradation.
path of the balls. Bearing are rotated approximately
60 times as the rotor coasts down from 600 to 300
14-162. Suitability of a lubricant for a particular
rpm. The smoothrator tests more of the ball groove
application, is a function of its physical and chemical
surface than the starting torque tester.
properties. Lubricant selection will depend on the
operating parameters such as temperature (low or
14-157. Smoothness of operation, as indicated by high), torque limitations, loads and speeds. Refer
the running torque testers and the Smoothrator, to Section X and paragraph B-84 in Appendix B
provides information concerning the functional opera- for more detailed Information on lubricant definitions,
tion of a bearing for critical instrument applications. parameters, and descriptions.
14-31
Table 14-8. Smoothrator Vibration Limits of Bearings 1
14-32
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
ABEC-5 Deep-Groove Torque Tested Angular Contact 3 Nontorque Tested ABEC-5 Bearings
Bearing Types 2 Chrome Stainless
and Sizes Chrome Steel Stainless Steel Steel Steel Chrome Steel Stainless Steel
Radial Radial Radial Radial Radial Radial
Type Bore O.D. Code 4 Limit Code 4 Limit Code 4 Limit Limit Limit Code 4 Limit Code 4 Limit Code 4 Limit
R1-5 .0937 .3125 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 6 A 4 B 6 C 6

R2-5 .1250 .3125 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 6 A 4 B 6 C 6
R2 .1250 .3750 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 6 A 3 B 4 C 6
R2A .1250 .5000 A 3 B 4 C 6 ---- ---- A 3 B 4 C 6
3 .1875 .5000 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 6 A 3 B 4 C 6
R4 .2500 .6250 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 6 A 3 B 4 C 6
R6 .3750 .8750 A 3 B 4 C 6 ---- ---- A 3 B 4 C 6
34 .1575 .6299 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 ---- A 4 B 4 C 6
34-5 .1969 .6299 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 ---- A 4 B 4 C 6
35 .1969 .7480 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 ---- A 4 B 4 C 6
36 .2362 .7480 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 ---- A 4 B 4 C 6
37 .2756 .8661 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 ---- A 4 B 4 C 6
38 .3150 .8661 A 3 B 4 C 6 4 ---- A 4 B 4 C 6
1 Dwell limits shown are computed from readings taken using the Barden Smoothrator.
2 Bearing types include open, shielded, and flanged bearings in the various types of retainers.
3 Angular-contact bearings are both separable and nonseparable types.
4 Radial clearance code: A = .0001 in. - .0011 in.; B = .0002 in. - .0011 in.; C = .0001 in. - .0003 in.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-166. Controlled Oil Lubrication. Instrument ball

bearings are generally lubricated with instrument oils,
Specification MIL-C-16173 or Specification MIL-L-
6085. The amount of oil needed to lubricate the
bearing will depend on both the size of the bearing
and operational requirements. Table 14-9 is a guide
to lubricating Instrument bearings.
14-167. Gyro spin axis bearings are usually lubri-

cated with special super refined and compounded
petroleum oils such as Teresso V-78, Kendall KG-80,
SRG 60/160, RL-714, RL-743 or MO119. For rea-
sons of gyro balance, only a limited quantity of
lubricant should be used. This limited quantity of
oil must be retained so as to minimize possible
unsymmetrical mass distribution within the gyro that
would cause instability, drift and poor instrument
performance.
014026 14-168. Porous retainer materials were developed

Figure 14-26. Calibration Set-up for to meet critical gyro balance and instrument life
Model II Smoothrator requirements. Porous retainer materials such as
linen-based phenolics, sintered nylon and polyimides
are used to hold controlled quantities of oil in reserve
for long bearing life. Retainers are vacuum impreg-
14-163. Oil Type Selection. A high viscosity oil is nated with oil and centrifuged to remove the excess
usually specified for bearings that must operate over oil. The oil is fed to the balls during operation by
a wide temperature range. For very low starting capillary action that limits the rate of oil feed to
temperatures, an oil with a low pour point should each ball in contact with the retainer surfaces. The
be selected so that the bearing will not be locked quantity of oil is very small and usually no more
by frozen oil. At high speeds and/or heavy bearing than 2 to 5 milligrams.
loads, oil is used to remove heat that has been
generated as well as to lubricate the bearing.
14-169. Method Of Oil Application.
14-164. Silicone oils generally are unsatisfactory at

high speeds or where any significant sliding contact a. Do not allow the hypodermic needle to
occurs. Silicone oils tend to polymerize (thicken) touch any of the bearing components.
and/or gel during friction heating due to sliding
metal-to-metal contact. This will cause early bearing
failure. b. Let the oil droplet fall directly from the
needle onto the raceway and ball surfaces.
CAUTION
NOTE
Use silicone oils or greases for instrument

bearing lubrication only when specified by This prevents the transfer of outside
engineering directive and/or specific con- contamination into the bearing and over
tractor drawing requirements. lubrication from capillary action of the oil
being drawn into the bearing.
14-165. The quantity of oil needed for satisfactory
operation becomes greater with increases in temper- 14-170. Filtration of Oils. The oil used in instrument
atures, load, speed and bearing size. The optimum bearing shall be triple filtered through 0.45-micron
quantity required for a particular application can be regenerated, cellulosic porous membrane filters, or
determined only by experimentation and tests. equal, prior to use (figure 14-27).
14-33
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-9. Amount of Oil to Use for b. Change cleaning solvent and repeat Step
Specific Bearing Sizes a. at least 3 times.
Basic Bearing Size Amount of Oil to Use
R-1 1 drop No. 24 needle.

R-2 1 drop No. 24 needle.
R-3 2 drops No. 24 needle.
CAUTION
Do not draw the oil into a hypodermic

syringe through the needle. Fill the hypo-
dermic by removing the plunger and filling
the barrel directly from the oil filter. After
reinserting the plunger, invert the hypoder-
mic needle and bleed out excess air.
14-171. Filter instrument bearing oils just prior to

injection into the bearing by using special filter
adapters attached to the hypodermic syringe. Attach
a 13-mm (1/2-inch) 0.45-micron filter directly to the
hypodermic syringe using a swinny filter holder
adapter (figure 14-28).
14-172. Vacuum Impregnation of Retainers. Vacu-

um impregnated, nonmetallic retainers will require
special handling and processing procedures. As a
general rule do not mix oils of different specifications
unless specifically authorized by the local cognizant
depot bearing engineer.
014027
NOTE Figure 14-27. Oil Filtration Unit
c. Place retainers in an oven that has been

When it is necessary to change lubrication preheated to 160_ to 170_F. Hold in heated oven
requirements for bearings with vacuum for 12 hours.
impregnated, nonmetallic retainers, the
retainer shall be cleaned and reimpreg-
nated with new lubricating oil. 14-174. Reimpregnation of Porous Nonmetallic
Retainers. Porous retainers shall be reimpregnated
with oil as follows:
14-173. Cleaning of Porous Nonmetallic Retain-
ers. Clean the retainers as follows:
a. Place the retainers in a glass container with
sufficient oil to cover the retainers. Retainers sur-
a. Ultrasonically clean the retainers for 20 faces shall not be more than 2 inches below the
minutes in Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA). surface of the oil.
14-34
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
more than offset by fewer instrument breakdowns,

improved bearing performance and increased opera-
tional life.
14-177. Grease Filtration. Clean grease is manufac-

tured from clean raw materials, formulated in clean
equipment and processed in a clean environment.
Many greases cannot be safely filtered without
removing some additives or affecting the basic
structure of the grease. Grease shall not be filtered
through less than a 200 mesh screen (75-micron
effective size) without written authorization from the
Material Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science
Laboratory.
014028 14-178. Mobilgrease 28 manufactured per Specifica-

Figure 14-28. Hypodermic Syringe with tion MIL-PRF-81322 has been effectively filtered for
Filter Holder Adapter use as an instrument precision bearing lubricant by
successive filtration through 17- and 10-micron filter
screens.
NOTE
14-179. Clean Grease, Specification MIL-G-81937.
Oil shall be prefiltered through a 0.45-
Lubricate instrument precision bearings that require
micron filter per paragraph 14-170.
a clean grease with Specification MIL-G-81937. This
grease meets all of the performance requirements
b. Place the container in a vacuum chamber. of Specification MIL-G-23827A.
Evacuate to 28 inches of mercury at room tempera-
ture.
14-180. Controlled Grease Lubrication. The
amount of grease that Is required by an instrument
c. Continue vacuum treatment until all bub- bearing will vary with the application. However, the
bling activity ceases from the retainer. following rules are provided as a general guide.
d. Raise pressure level to atmospheric pres-
14-181. Do not overlubricate bearings. Grease will
sure and allow to stabilize for 1 hour.
ooze out of an overfilled housing past seals and
shields, collect dirt, and cause trouble.
e. Remove retainers from the oil and centri-
fuge them as required by drawing requirements, or
at 400 G’s for 5 minutes if time is not specified. 14-182. Lubricate grease lubricated gyro spin axle
bearings with Specification MIL-PRF-81322 (Mobil-
grease 28) grease unless otherwise directed. The
14-175. G R E A S E L U B R I C AT I O N . L u b r i c a t i n g amount of lubricant will be equivalent to the volume
grease is basically a mixture/blend of lubricating oil of one or two of the balls.
and a thickening agent and is used where a reserve
of lubricant is required. The grease, acting as a
lubrication reservoir, exudes oil from its structure NOTE
at a controlled bleed rate to lubricate the bearing
surfaces for extended periods of time. The thickener Too much lubricant will overheat the
is usually a metallic soap such as calcium, sodium, bearing. This is particularly true of bear-
lithium, or an organic compound. ings that run at high speeds where churn-
ing of the lubricant will cause the bearing
14-176. Clean Grease. Instrument applications re- to run hot.
quire the use of a grease that Is cleaner than
standard military specification lubricants. The allow- 14-183. Lubricate motor, fan and blower bearings
able dirt count for military specification greases is with a 30 to 40 percent full pack of grease.
far too high for most instrument applications. A clean
grease should be used that has been specially 14-184. SELECTION OF LUBRICANTS. The follow-
formulated under a clean environment (paragraph ing recommendations are provided for lubricating
14-179). The higher cost for clean grease will be instrument bearings:
14-35
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Gyro Spin Axis Bearings. (Grease lubrica- 14-188. LONG TERM PRESERVATION (over 180
tion): days). Preserve oil lubricated bearings by immersing
in instrument oil, Specification MIL-PRF-6085 or
(1) Specification MIL-PRF-81322 for high Specification MIL-C-16173, and place in a Level A
temperature and high loads. package per paragraph 14-194. This procedure
applies to the following bearings:
(2) Specification MIL-G-81937 for normal
temperatures (under 250_F) and normal loads. a. Bearings that will not be used for more
than 6 months.
b. Gyro Spin Axis Bearings. (Oil Lubrication).
b. New bearings that are being returned to
the vendor or contractor for evaluation or credit.
(1) SRG 60/160
14-189. Preserve grease lubricated bearings by
(2) SHC 224, synthetic hydrocarbon oil. lubricating with specified type and quantity of grease
or oil and place in a heat-sealed polyethylene or
(3) RL-714 nylon bag.
(4) RL-743 14-190. SHORT-TERM PRESERVATION (under

180 days). Lubricate the bearings with the specified
(5) MO119 type and quantity of grease or oil and place in a
heat-sealed polyethylene or nylon bag.
c. Gimbal Bearings.
14-191. PRESERVATION FOR SUPPLY STORAGE.
Return new RFI bearings to the Supply system with
(1) Specification MIL-PRF-6085 the operating lubricant that is specified under the
applicable National Stock Number (NSN). Bearings
(2) Specification MIL-C-16173 that are slush preserved in accordance with the NSN
special features shall be immersed in oil, Specification
d. Servo Motors, Blowers, Motors and Tach MIL-PRF-6085 or Specification MIL-C-16173 and
Generators. packaged in a Level A package per paragraph
14-194.
(1) Specification MIL-G-81937 - Normal
temperature. 14-192. PACKAGING PROCEDURES.
(2) Specification MIL-PRF-81322 - High 14-193. GENERAL. Refer to Section XI for detailed
temperature over 250_F. Information concerning packaging materials and
methods. A brief description of tile common packag-
ing methods is included in this section as general
e. Synchros, Gear Train, Servo Mechanisms.
information.
(1) Specification MIL-PRF-6085 14-194. Flexible Bag (Method IA-8). Use Method
IA-8 packaging for all miniature and instrument
(2) Specification MIL-C-16173 bearings unless otherwise specified. The following
procedures apply:
14-185. CERTIFICATION OF LUBRICANTS. The
Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science a. Insert the bearing into a certified ultraclean,
Laboratory shall be responsible for checking and nylon transparent bag.
certifying the lubricants used in miniature and
instrument bearings. Refer to paragraph 10-82 of b. Heat seal the bag to preclude contamina-
Section X for detailed information on laboratory tion the external environment.
qualification.
c. Place in a water-vaporproof bag conforming
14-186. PRESERVATION. to Specification MIL-PRF-131 Class I or Specification
MIL-PRF-22191 Type 1.
14-187. Preservation of instrument bearings shall
be in accordance with the requirements of Section 14-195. PROCEDURE. The following preservation
XI and the following general requirements. procedures shall apply to instrument bearings for
14-36
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
various levels of protection depending on storage 14-200. One of the most critical problems encoun-
conditions and time. tered in lubricating instrument bearings has been
the retention of the lubricant within the bearing. Since
14-196. In-House Storage with Controlled Envi- most instrument bearings are lubricated with limited
ronment. Controlled environment is defined as 40 quantities of lubricating oil, the premature loss of
$5 percent relative humidity and 70_ $5_F. oil can significantly reduce bearing life.
a. Place the preserved or lubricated bearing

into an ultraclean nylon bag meeting the require- 14-201. The purpose of barrier film coating is to
ments of paragraph 11-20. prevent migration of lubrication oil from bearings
by rendering selected bearing surfaces unwettable
b. Evacuate excess air and heat seal the bag. to oil. Applying barrier film to bearing steels will
substitute a very low surface energy interface (barrier
c. Place the packaged bearing into a humidity film-to-air) for the normally very high surface energy
and temperature controlled environment as soon as interface (metal-to-air). This renders the easily
possible (no later than 24 hours). wettable metal surface unwettable to liquids (oil) with
higher surface energy values.
d. Inspect the stored bearings by sampling
unused bearings after one year of storage for
14-202. Prior to imposing the Barrier Coating
condition of bearing and lubricant.
requirement to bearings within an instrument, it must
be demonstrated that lubrication migration from the
14-197. In-House Storage without Environmental
bearings will cause the premature failure of that
Control.
instrument and that the lubrication migration can
be deterred by using Barrier Coating. Barrier Coating
a. Place the preserved or lubricated bearing
will not prevent lubrication sling, atomization, or
into an ultraclean, nylon bag meeting the require-
evaporation. Barrier Coating is not necessary with
ments of paragraph 11-20.
grease lubricants or porous retainers (except silicone
greases).
b. Evacuate the excess air and heat seal the
bag.
14-203. Barrier film coatings are applied to bearing
c. Place the packaged bearing into a bag ring faces and metal shields of shielded bearings
meeting the requirements of paragraph 11-27. (figure 14-29 and 14-30). The film is readily applied
to the bearing surfaces and quickly dries to a
d. Evacuate excess air and heat seal the bag. non-tacky, almost invisible polymer coating. Applying
the film to these surfaces will keep a metered amount
e. Inspect the stored bearings by sampling of oil lubricant inside the bearing both in operational
unused bearings after six months of storage for use and during shelf storage.
condition of bearing and lubricant.
14-198. Supply Storage. Bearings that are being 14-204. Refer to SAE AS13341 for methods and
returned to Supply shall be preserved and packaged procedures of barrier film application or contact the
Level A for long term storage in accordance with Bearing Department of the Materials Engineering
Packaging Specification, Specification MIL-DTL-197. Laboratory at the Naval Air Depot, North Island.
The following limitations apply:
a. Bearings shall be new and unused. Do not 14-205. INSTALLATION PROCEDURES.

return used bearings to Supply for credit.
14-206. GENERAL. The importance of good installa-
b. Bearings shall be RFI and shall meet all tion techniques and practices cannot be overempha-
of the requirements of the applicable NSN. sized. The primary cause of many bearing failures
in service is due to mishandling prior to and during
c. Bearings shall be lubricated or preserved bearing installation. This is especially true of instru-
per the requirements of the NSN under which they ment bearings because of their small size. Proper
are being placed. installation tools must be used. Tweezers or other
appropriate handling tools shall be used for handling
14-199. BARRIER FILM COATING. instrument bearings during installation.
14-37
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
14-208. CLEANLINESS. Dirt or other contaminants

are responsible for many bearing failures. The
importance of keeping bearings clean during mount-
ing or removal cannot be overstressed. The following
precautions will do much to ensure maximum bearing
life:
a. Do not remove new bearings from their

protective packaging until ready to install them in
the assembly.
b. Do not lay bearings on a dirty bench.
c. Place bearings in clean, covered glass

containers.
d. Cover exposed bearings installed in uncom-

pleted assemblies with plastic covers or bags.
014029
Figure 14-29. Location of Barrier Film e. Place unwrapped bearings in a covered
Coating on Ball Bearing glass container to keep out dust particles and to
prevent exposure to contamination.
14-209. MOUNTING SURFACES. Bearings will take

the shape and/or position of the shaft or housing
in which they are installed. This can be detrimental
to bearing alignment, balance, internal radial/axial
clearance and/or torque if the mounting surfaces
are not geometrically correct.
14-210. Corner Fillets. Shafts and housings have

fillets at the junction of the bearing seat and the
locating shoulder. It is important that these fillets
be a smaller radii than the bearing corner radius
so there is no danger of interfering with the bearing
mounting. A corner radius larger than the bearing
corner radius will not allow the bearing to properly
seat against the shoulder surface. This may cause
preloading and misalignment.
14-211. Spacers and Clamping Nuts. Possibilities

for error increase with an increased number of parts
used in a bearing installation. Always use the
minimum number of spacers, washers and similar
parts. All spacers, clamping nuts and washers should
be square faced and true so that when the assembly
is secured there is minimum tendency for misalign-
014030 ment of the bearings or bending of the shaft.
Figure 14-30. Barrier Film Coated Surfaces
of Shielded Flange Bearing 14-212. Geometry and Surface Finish Require-
ments. The following values are the maximum
numerical limits that are allowed for shaft and housing
14-207. Many noisy rotors can be related to improp- finishes and geometry when using the recommended
er preload, and/or misalignment of the bearing rings. fits listed In tables 14-10 through 14-12.
The installing mechanic must make certain that the
bearing is well shouldered, properly aligned and the a. Shaft and Housing Mounting Surfaces.
preload adjustment is correct. Surface finish shall not exceed 16 AA maximum.
14-38
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Out-of-Roundness. Tolerance for roundness NOTE

shall meet the tolerance requirements of Appendix
B for instrument precision bearings. Refer to tables
Interference fits reduce internal radial
B-23 through B-28.
clearance by approximately 80 percent of
the interference fit. A bearing with an
c. Squareness. Squareness of the bearing internal radial clearance of 0.0005 inch will
face to the shaft and housing mounting surfaces have 0.0001 inch internal radial clearance
shall be equivalent to the values specified for the when installed with a tight interference fit.
ABEC class of the bearing for “bore runout with
reference side,” and “outside cylindrical surface
14-216. SHAFT MOUNTING FITS (Figure 14-31).
runout with reference side.”
a. Clearance Fits. Clearance fits are recom-

d. Misalignment. Limits for permissible mis- mended for lightly loaded, low speed applications
alignment are dependent on the bearing internal with housing rotation. Clearance fits are also used
geometry and mounted internal radial clearance. when the shaft is subject to thermal elongation at
high temperatures. Elongation would result in an
e. Taper of Mounting Surface. Tolerance for undetermined preload of the bearing unless the inner
taper shall be such that the tolerance requirements ring is allowed to axially adjust.
of Appendix B for Instrument precision bearings shall
be met (tables B-23 through B-28). b. Interference Fits. Interference fits are rec-
ommended for heavy loaded applications with inner
14-213. Alignment and Misalignment. Bearing mis- ring rotation and for comparatively rapid oscillatory
alignment can lead to vibration, retainer breakage motion.
and early fatigue failure. This is because of high
internally generated stresses in the bearing. Seating 14-217. HOUSING MOUNTING FITS (Figure 14-32).
surfaces of both shaft and housing should be held
in-line within 0.0002 inch per inch length to minimize
the adverse effects of misalignment. a. Clearance Fits. Clearance fits are recom-
mended for applications with shaft rotation. The
clearance fit allows the outer ring to axially displace
14-214. MOUNTING FITS. Miniature and instrument to compensate for shaft elongation that results from
bearings have very thin cross sections that are easily thermal expansion.
deformed when Improperly handled and/or Installed.
Proper fits are important for satisfactory performance
of instrument and miniature ball bearings. Appropri- b. Interference Fits. Interference fits are rec-
ate shaft diameter and housing bore tolerances, ommended when the bearing outer ring is not
expressed as clearances or interferences, must be clamped against the shoulder. This will prevent axial
selected. movement of the bearing in the housing. A clearance
fit on the shaft will compensate for high thrust loads.
14-215. Interference fits tighter than line-to-line are
not recommended for most instrument applications 14-218. Bearing Creep. The very slow creep of a
for the following reasons: bearing ring mounted with a close precision fit in
a stationary part should not be confused with the
comparatively rapid turning of a ring (improperly
a. Bearings are difficult to assemble. mounted, and loose) in, or on, a rotating part. Creep
is not detrimental unless wear occurs.
b. Bearings are difficult to remove. The remov-
al operation damages more bearings than assembly 14-219. Preloading. Ball bearings will operate best
and results In the destruction of many bearings. at high speeds if they are under a continuous thrust
load. The thrust load serves to take up internal radial
c. Internal radial clearance is reduced. clearance in the bearing and confines the center
line of rotation to a precise location. Without an
applied thrust, the internal radial looseness of a
d. Bearing distortion may be caused by poor bearing at high speed will allow eccentric rotation,
geometry of shafts and housings. which in turn will cause an unbalanced condition.
14-39
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-10. Typical Shaft and Housing Fits for Miniature and Instrument Bearings
(Fit extremes in 0.0001 inch)
Fit Extremes 1
Application Random 2 Selective 2

Requirements Fitting Fitting Typical Application
Shaft fits Inner ring clamped:
Normal accuracy 0 to -4L -1L to -3L Tape guide rollers, textile
spindles.
Very low runout, high radial +1T to 3L 0 to -2L Gyro rotors.

Rigidity.
Inner ring not clamped:

Normal accuracy +1T to -3L 0 to -2L Synchros, small motors,
servos, potentiometers,
gyro gimbals, computers.
Very low runout, high radial rigidity. +3T to -1L 2T to 0 Gyro rotors.
Very high speed service +2T to -2L 1T to -1L Blower motors, textile
spindles.
Inner ring must float to 0 to -4L -1L to -3L Clutches, brakes.

allow for expansion.
Inner ring must hold fast to +3T to 1L +2T to 0 Motors, generators, gear
rotating shaft. drives, dental drills
Housing fits Normal accuracy, low to high

speeds 0 to-4L -1L to -3L Motors, servos, generators,
(Outer ring can move readily in blowers, dental drills, tape
housing for expansion). spindles, potentiometers.
Very low runout, high radial

rigidity +1T to -3L 0 to -2L Gyro gimbals, synchros,
(Outer ring need not move readily resolvers, platform
to allow for expansion). gimbals, computers.
Heavy radial load +1T to -3L 0 to -2L Rollers, pivots.

(Outer ring rotates)
Outer ring must hold fast to

rotating housing. +4T to 0 +3T to +1T Cam rollers, pulleys, idler
(Outer ring not clamped) gears.
1 Tight fits are positive (+) and loose fits negative (-) for use in shaft and housing size determination.
2 T = Tight, L = Loose.
14-40
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-11. Typical Shaft and Housing Fits for Spindle and Turbine Bearings
(Fits extremes in 0.0001 inch)
Fit
Application Requirements extremes 1, 2 Typical Applications
Shaft Fits Inner ring clamped:
Very low runout, high radial +.5T to -2.5L Grinding spindles, magnetic
rigidity drums, platform gimbals
Low to high speeds, low to +.5T to -2.5L Turbines, compressors, motors,

moderate loads generators
Heavy radial load:

Inner ring rotates +.5T to 3.5L Gears or belt loaded
Outer ring rotates 0 to -3L Idler or planet gears.
Inner ring not clamped:

Very low runout, high radial +.5T to +3.5T Magnetic drums, grinding spindles,
rigidity platform gimbals.
Moderate to high speeds, light to +.5T to +3.5T Turbines, compressors, motors,

moderate radial loads generators, gear shafts.
Heavy radial load, low to moderate

speeds:
Inner ring rotates +.5T to +3.5T Gear or belt loaded applications
Outer ring rotates 0 to -3L Idler or planet gears
Inner ring must float to allow for

expansion, low speed only -.5L to -3.5L Platform gimbals
Housing Fits Normal accuracy, low to high

speeds, moderate temperature 0 to -4L Spindles, magnetic drums,
motors, generators
Very low runout, high radial rigidity +1T to -3L Platform gimbals, resolvers,
(Outer ring need not readily move inductosyns.
to allow for expansion)
High temperature, moderate to

high speed -1L to -5L Turbines, compressors, starters
(Outer ring can readily move to
allow for expansion)
Heavy radial load +2T to -2L Idler or planet gears, cam rollers
(Outer ring rotates)
2 T = tight, L = loose
14-41
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 14-12. Recommended Mounting Fits for Random Assembly of Non-Classified Bearings
(Dimensions in 0.0001 inch)
Housing
Shaft Diameter Diameter
Tolerance Limit Tolerance Limit
Ring Diameter Resulting 1 Fit of Resulting Fit of
Tolerance Limit Max. Min. Bearing on Shaft Max. Min. Bearing in Housing
1 -1 -2 0 to 2L 0 +1 0 to 2L
1.5 Not Applicable 0 +1 0 to 2.5L
2 -2 -4 0 to 4L 0 +2 0 to 4L
3 -3 -6 0 to 6L 0 +3 0 to 6L
4 -4 -8 0 to 8L 0 +4 0 to 8L
5 Not Applicable 0 +5 0 to 10L
14-220. The thrust load is usually applied by spring 14-224. SEPARABLE GYRO ROTOR BEARINGS.
loading rather than by solidly preloading one bearing Disassemble and process separable gyro rotor
against another. The spring will permit axial move- bearings with nonmetallic retainers as follows:
ment of the outer ring within the housing. This type
of loading will not impose thrust loads due to a. Support the bearing outer ring.
temperature differentials between shaft and housing.
With solid preloading, the centrifugal force on the b. Separate bearing components by carefully
balls will tend to increase the preload, whereas the pressing the retainer containing the balls out of the
constant spring load will minimize the effects of outer ring.
centrifugal force.
c. Use care not to mix retainers of different
14-221. Recommended Mounting Fits. Recom- manufacturers.
mended mounting fits for specific applications are
listed in tables 14-10 and 14-11. General recom- CAUTION
mended mounting fits are listed in table 14-12.
Internal dimensions of gyro rotor bearing
14-222. SPECIAL REWORK OF INSTRUMENT rings and retainers differ between
BEARINGS. manufacturers so that interchanging can
cause bearing and component failure.
14-223. GENERAL. Special rework of miniature and
instrument bearings can be accomplished during d. Carefully inspect phenolic and porous re-
times of significant need. The following instructions tainers using 10X magnification for indications of
apply: delamination or other material damage. Check the
ball pockets for cleanliness. The following instruc-
tions apply:
a. Rework procedures shall be under the
guidance and strict technical control of the local (1) Delamination and/or visual damage reject.
cognizant depot bearing engineer.
(2) Cannibalization of retainers from sur-
b. Separable bearings should be disas- veyed bearings will provide sufficient replacement
sembled for cleaning and inspection. retainers.
c. Nonseparable bearings shall not be disas- (3) Segregate excess retainers by manufac-
sembled. turer.
d. Always replace a complete ball set when (4) Immerse retainers in oil and store in
an individual ball is defective or lost. a warm dry oven until needed.
14-42
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014031
Figure 14-31. Shaft-to-Bearing Bore Fit-up Nomograph
14-43
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
014032
Figure 14-32. Housing-to-Bearing OD Fit-up Nomograph
14-44
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CAUTION d. Hand polish the clean rings to restore the

original finish using long cloth (long staple cotton)
with suitably formed polishing sticks.
Retainers that have been vacuum impreg-
nated with special gyro lubricating oils
such as Teresso V-78, Kendall KG-80, (1) Hold the ring by an appropriate collet
SRG 60/160, SHC 224, RL-714, RL-743 mounted on a dental lathe spindle.
and MO119 shall not be immersed in
instrument oil Specification MIL- (2) With a formed stick covered by no more
PRF-6085. Refer to paragraph 14-172 for than two thicknesses of long cloth, dip the long cloth
instructions on relubricating retainers. into clean, filtered Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA), and polish
the raceway area while it is revolving by moving
the stick under slight pressure in an oscillating
e. The only adequate way to check the
motion in direct opposition to the direction of rotation.
condition of rotor bearings is under actual operating
conditions. When the inner ring is an integral part
of the rotor assembly the components must be tested (3) Follow this final cleaning operation by
together for proper preload. A gage to check the buffing with a clean long cloth.
clearance between the outer diameter of the retainer
and the land area of the outer ring is shown in NOTE
figure 14-33.
Practice polishing raceways to demon-

f. Preliminary screening of cup-and-ball gyro strate the correct amount of movement
rotor bearings can be performed by adapting the and pressure that is required.
Smoothrator, or equivalent. This would require a
cone to be attached to the adapter stud of the pickup
assembly with a slightly modified rotor. (4) Blow off the polished ring with warm,
clean, filtered air.
(1) Mount the bearing on the test stud cone. e. Examine the rings under 10X magnification.
(2) Spin the rotor and observe the perfor- (1) Defects in the ball path such as “comets”,
mance of the bearing. small scratches or minor pits, will require rework of
the raceway.
(3) Any evidence of excessive friction, stick-
iness, bumps or erratic action will require additional (2) Slight defects on the edge of the ring
cleaning or rechecking of the gyro rotor bearing. outside of the ball path are not cause for rejection.
14-225. SEPARABLE PIVOT BEARINGS. Rework (3) Evidence of active corrosion is not
separable pivot bearings by the following method: permissible.
(4) Staining and pressure marks on the

a. Separable pivot bearings are generally oil
exterior of the bearing rings are not cause for
lubricated and usually require only a solvent spray
rejection. These indications can be removed by a
cleaning to remove excess lubrication.
buffing operation.
b. Angular-contact bearing rings usually re- f. Acceptable rings are ready for immediate
quire a preliminary buffing operation to ensure a assembly. Rings showing minor defects shall be
clean surface for visual inspection. Use a dry felt accumulated for further hand polishing operations.
buff mounted on one end of a variable speed dental
lathe spindle.
g. Protect rings that are being accumulated
for further polishing operations by either dry storage
c. Following felt buffing, spray clean the rings in a temperature controlled even set at 110_F or
with filtered MIL–PRF-680 Stoddard Solvent. Blow immersion in aircraft instrument oil, Specification
dry with warm, dry filtered air. MIL-PRF-6085 or Specification MIL-C-16173.
14-45
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(a) Very Fine Compound, 20 ounces

petrolatum, 4 ounces Specification MIL-PRF-7870
general purpose oil and 4 ounces levigated alumina.
(b) Fine compound: 16 ounces petrola-

tum, 4 ounces Specification MIL-PRF-7870 general
purpose oil and 8 ounces levigated alumina.
(c) Medium Compound: 12 ounces pet-

rolatum, 4 ounces Specification MIL-PRF-7870
general purpose oil and 12 ounces of levigated
alumina.
(d) Coarse Compound: 8 ounces petro-

latum, 8 ounces Specification MIL-PRF-7870 gener-
al purpose oil and 16 ounces levigated alumina.
014033 (e) Very Coarse Compound: 8 ounces

Figure 14-33. Rotor Bearing Retainer petrolatum, 8 ounces Specification MIL-PRF-7870
Clearance Gage general purpose oil and 20 ounces levigated
alumina.
(2) Liquify the petrolatum by heating to

14-226. SPECIAL METHODS OF REWORKING
150_F.
BEARING COMPONENTS. These special instruc-
tions are included for the economical processing
of bearings by more extensive rework procedures. (a) Add Specification MIL-PRF-7870 oil
These instructions shall be subject to prior engineer- and blend.
ing authorization at each activity. Since rework
involves time and money, only those bearings (b) Add levigated alumina and stir until
required on an emergency basis should be subject the solution is thoroughly mixed (about 40 minutes).
to these instructions.
(3) Remove heat and continue stirring until
14-227. Materials. The following materials are re- the homogenized mixture has cooled.
quired to accomplish the special rework procedures:
(4) Pour compound into clean containers
prior to congealing.
a. Cord, cotton, sash, venetian blind, special,
and general purpose, Specification AA–55622, in 14-228. Rework of Outer Ring.
sizes from 3 to 10 cord.
a. Face Surfaces.
b. Paper, abrasive, silicon carbide, waterproof,
(Use ANSI B74.18) Federal Specification B74.18, (1) Lay a sheet of silicon carbide, 600-grit,
paper backing designation A, 600 and 400 grit size. wet grinding paper on a surface plate.
c. Cloth, crocus, ferric oxide and quartz abra- (2) Hold the outer ring with forefinger and
sive sheets, Federal Specification ANSI B74.18. thumb.
(3) P l a c e t h e f a c e o f t h e r i n g o n t h e
d. Levigated alumina, 200 mesh or finer (com- polishing paper, and move the ring in a figure eight
mercial source). motion until rust or discoloration is removed from
face of the bearing ring.
(1) Alumina-Levigated, pure white, shall be
mixed with petrolatum Federal Specification (4) Repeat the same operation on the
VV-P-236 as follows: opposite face of the bearing ring if necessary.
14-46
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Outside Diameter Surfaces. (3) Repeat operation on the opposite side

of the bearing if necessary.
(1) Mount outer ring on an arbor and rotate.
Use the finest grade of abrasive material that will b. Bore (inner Diameter) Surface.
return the raceway to acceptable levels.
(1) Wrap a stick slightly smaller than the
(2) Remove rust and discoloration from the bore with a small piece of 600-grit wet grinding
outer diameter and radii of the outer ring. paper.
(2) Insert the stick covered with grinding

c. Ball Raceway Surfaces. paper into bore and move stick back and forth with
slight pressure applied until bore is clean.
(1) In shops equipped with power ma-
chines, the outer ring may be held by the outer c. Ball Raceway Surfaces.
diameter using a chuck or collet. Use care to grip
the ring lightly to prevent distortion. (1) In shops equipped with power ma-
chines, mount bearing on an arbor (figure 14-34).
(2) Rotate the chuck at approximately 3,000
rpm. (2) Rotate the arbor at approximately 3,000
rpm.
(3) Use special tools made of orange wood
or phenolic materials, with the same radius as that (3) Select a soft cotton cord with radius
of the raceway. Hold the polishing paper against closely approximating raceway radius and cut to
the raceway. approximately a 12-inch length.
(4) Polish with 0 grade aluminum oxide (4) Apply medium grade polishing and lap-
polishing ping compound to the cord (paragraph 14-227c).
(5) Polish with 3/0 to 4/0 grade polishing (5) Hold ends of cord and contact raceway
paper. with “seesaw” motion while applying light pressure.
(6) To another cord of the same size, apply

(6) Apply the very fine polishing compound very fine finishing compound (paragraph 14-227a)
(paragraph 14-227b) to a small piece of long cloth and repeat “seesaw” operation.
and hold it against raceway with lapping stick.
(7) Repeat previous operation using levi-

gated alumina in paste form.
NOTE
Completely immerse rings and scrub (stiff
bristle brush), spray wash and warm air
dry the raceway after each operation.
14-229. Rework of Inner Ring.
a. Face Surfaces.
(1) Lay a sheet of silicon carbide, 600-grit,

wet grinding paper on a surface plate.
(2) Hold the inner ring with forefinger and

thumb. Place the face of the ring on the polishing 014034
paper and move the ring in a figure eight motion Figure 14-34. Ring Holding Arbor
to remove rust stains and discoloration. for Polishing Operations
14-47/(14-48 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XV
PROCESSING FACILITIES FOR BEARINGS
15-1. GENERAL. 15-8. PERSONNEL.
15-2. Bearings are some of the most precise 15-9. People are the most critical and difficult part
mechanisms made today and there is a need to of a clean room operation to control. People react
utilize clean room facilities for their processing and to quality and precision in direct relation to their
inspection. The bearing processing facility must be environment. Constant supervision, training, and
environmentally controlled to prevent contamination repetitive instruction may be necessary. Not all
and corrosion, and to ensure dimensional integrity. people are adaptable to working in a clean room
and careful screening is needed. Bearing processing
is not a mass production type operation but rather
15-3. Most production shops are grossly contami- a meticulous, exacting, judgment and decision type
nated with all kinds of abrasive particles that would work. Some workers are impatient, quick to judge,
detrimentally affect the function of precision minia- not sufficiently concerned with details and generally
ture and instrument bearings and other close toler- nervous. This type of person would be unsatisfactory
ance precision bearings. Clean rooms provide the to work in a clean room environment. Finger dexterity
controlled environment needed to prevent the tests should be given all personnel working on small
introduction of particulate contamination into these precision bearings.
critical close tolerance parts. Figure 15-1 shows the
approximate sizes of common particles encountered 15-10. A complete mental orientation must be made
in the work environment. Figure 15-2 compares the by each person regarding housekeeping, personal
size of particles to filter screen mesh sizes. cleanliness, neatness and integrity. Some of the
more important factors are:
15-4. Controlled Environment work spaces/stations
can be used to function as ultra clean areas within a. Compatibility with fellow workers.
a clean room complex or in a lesser controlled work
area. The air is supplied as a continuous flow of b. Workers must be stable and reasonably
clean air filtered through HEPA (High Efficiency content to continue at the same job since training
Particulate Air) filters, IEST IES-RP-CC-001–86. is long and relatively slow.
c. Personnel with an overacid system should

15-5. CLEAN ROOM FACILITIES.
not work on microfinished parts.
NOTE d. The clean room complex is a no-smoking,

no-eating area. Chainsmokers would not be happy
in this environment.
Air Force personnel shall refer to T.O.
00-25-203 for clean room operation and
shop practices. e. The number of people in the clean room
should be kept to the minimum required to perform
the work. Additional trained personnel should be held
15-6. Each depot level activity shall develop bear- in reserve.
ing processing facilities that will best meet the needs
of the activity. Whether there is more than one 15-11. GROUP COMFORT. Consideration must be
bearing shop will depend on local production/working given to group association and group comfort. The
of requirements, physical location of the buildings following recommendations will help:
and the availability of usable floor space.
a. The feeling of claustrophobia (fear of close
15-7. Most bearing processing facilities are divided places) may be relieved by use of windows in the
into two separate shops, usually at widely separated clean rooms.
physical locations. This requires some duplication
of expensive gaging equipment and critical high-cost b. Clean rooms should not be drafty due to
clean room areas. poor air circulation.
15-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
015001
Figure 15-1. Approximate Sizes of Common Particles
15-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
015002
Figure 15-2. Relative Sizes of Particulate Contamination and Filter Screen Mesh
15-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Locker rooms should be large enough to b. Shampoo hair weekly and take action
store changes of clothing and be equipped with against heavy dandruff.
benches, and lockers to store purses. Adequate
wash basins should be provided to wash off and c. Wear clean under and outer garments.
remove facial makeup and nail polish.
d. Avoid scratching or rubbing exposed areas
d. The interior color scheme should be a of the body.
pastel green, blue, or yellow.
e. Wear gloves when hands are severely
e. An inter-communication system should be chapped.
installed with piped-in, low volume, instrumental,
advertisement-free background music. f. Male personnel are to shave daily.
15-12. PERSONAL HYGIENE. The following recom- g. Keep hair, beards and mustaches covered
mendations should be considered when selecting by caps and hoods.
and/or training personnel for assignment in the
bearing clean room complex: 15-16. CLEAN ROOM PERSONNEL REGULA-
TIONS. The following regulations shall be strictly
15-13. Personnel with skin or upper respiratory enforced by the bearing shop supervisor:
diseases should not work in the clean room. Specific
physiological ailments that would be detrimental to a. Restrict access to only authorized personnel.
clean room operations are:
b. Clean all equipment and tools prior to
a. Allergies to synthetic fabrics. bringing them into the clean room. Clean by dusting,
vacuuming, washing or other suitable means.
b. Allergies to solvents use of in the clean
room. c. Wear approved clean room clothing at all
times when in the clean room. Clean room clothing
shall not be worn outside the clean room.
c. Profuse nasal discharge.
d. No smoking or drinking will be permitted
d. Skin conditions which result in above nor- in the clean room.
mal skin shedding, dandruff, or skin flaking.
e. Use dusting-off procedures with the air
e. High acid level in the moisture of the hands. shower, shoe brush or other approved dust removal
method before entering the clean room.
f. Severe nervous conditions, itching, scratch-
ing or claustrophobia. f. Store all personal effects outside the clean
room in areas provided for this purpose.
15-14. All personnel should be provided periodic
training on the importance of personal hygiene in g. Visitors shall observe all the rules that the
clean room operations. clean room personnel are required to observe. This
includes top management and supervisors.
15-15. Personnel shall be encouraged to practice
good clean room habits and observe clean room h. The following good housekeeping practices
regulations in order to maintain a healthy environ- shall be enforced.
ment. Personnel with colds, temporary coughing and
sneezing and severe sunburn, should be assigned (1) Keep hands, fingernails and face clean.
to temporary jobs outside the clean room until they
have sufficiently recovered. The high desired cleanli- (2) Use liquid soaps and hot air dryers to
ness required necessitates the indoctrination of all prevent chapping.
clean room personnel in the development of the
following habits: (3) Do not comb hair in the clean room.
a. Bathe frequently. (4) Do not wear fingernail polish.
15-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(5) Do not wear powder or other flaking b. Do not use lead pencils and rubber erasers.
cosmetics. Lipstick is acceptable.
c. Do not use natural fiber cloths.
(6) Avoid wearing jewelry such as watches
and rings. d. Do not bring drawings and blueprints into
the room unless required by engineering or manage-
(7) Do not eat food, chew tobacco or smoke ment instruction. When required, place the drawing
in the clean room. into a plastic envelope or heat seal in plastic.
(8) Avoid nervous mannerisms such as e. Do not use natural sponges or cotton
scratching head, rubbing hands or parts of the body. strings mops.
15-20. The following materials are approved for use

(9) Do not wear soiled or dirty street clothes
in the clean room: (Refer to table 18-4 for ordering
in the clean room.
data on approved materials).
(10) Wear the appropriate clean room gar- a. Use nonretractable ball point pens (without
ments in the specified manner. pocket clips).
(11) Wear finger cots or gloves when physi- b. Use special plasticized paper for written
cally handling bearings. communications. Special forms and reports that are
required in the clean room shall be printed on clean
(12) Keep parts and tools at the work station room compatible material.
as clean and orderly as possible.
c. Use synthetic fiber wiping cloths or clean
(13) Keep surplus parts in appropriate con- room approved polyeurethane foam wipes for minor
tainers. cleaning of parts and work area.
(14) Work on a clean surface. d. Install micro-film, aperture card and micro-
fiche readers for technical data reference in the clean
(15) Don’t walk around unnecessarily since room.
this action will generate a large number of particles
(table 15-1). e. Use laminated plastic for sealing technical
data not on microfilm.
(16) Report adverse changes in environmen-
tal conditions such as dust, temperature and humid- f. Use polyurethane foam sponges for general
ity, to the supervisor. clean-up.
(17) Do not unzip clean room garments 15-21. CLEAN ROOM CLOTHING.
within the clean room.
15-22. Use approved clothing within the clean room
complex. Clothing is classified as Type I or Type
(18) When in doubt, contact the supervisor. II, depending on the class of clean room (Federal
Standard of FED-STD-209). Clothing shall be made
15-17. MATERIALS APPROVED FOR USE IN from 100 percent dacron polyester continuous fila-
CLEAN ROOMS. ment yarns. There shall be no exposed raw edges,
either inside or outside of the garment. All garments
15-18. Use approved materials in the clean room. shall be sewn with synthetic thread.
Serious contamination can result from unapproved
particulate producing items such as paper, cloth and NOTE
wood. The local Materials Engineering Laboratory/
Physical Science Laboratory shall be responsible Tyvek-type, nonfiber clean room smocks
for selecting, testing and approving materials for use can be used when approved by the local
in clean rooms. cognizant bearing engineer. Tyvek is a
Dupont registered trademark.
15-19. The following restrictions apply to materials
that will be used in the clean room: 15-23. Class 10,000 and 100,000 Clean Rooms.
Use Type I clothing (figure 15-3) consisting of a
a. Do not use ordinary wood fiber papers. cap, smock coat and vinyl shoes.
15-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
015003
Figure 15-3. Clean Room Clothing (Type I)
15-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 15-1. Contamination Resulting From Personnel Activity
Particles Generate of per Minute

Activity ≥0.3 Microns
Standing or sitting (no movement) 100,000
Sitting (light head, hand, and forearm
movement) 500,000
Sitting (average body and arm movement,
toe tapping) 1,000,000
Changing positions (sitting to standing) 2,500,000
Slow walking (2.0 mph) 5,000,000
Average walking (3.5 mph) 7,500,000
Fast walking (5 mph) 10,000,000
15-24. Class 100 Clean Rooms. Use Type II a. P u t o n t h e s u i t a n d s e c u r e t h e s n a p

clothing, (figure 15-4) consisting of a cape hood fasteners. The coverall suit resembles a light weight
or head covering, full coveralls, nylon boots, and flight suit with fasteners and will fit snugly around
nylon gloves with plastic palms. the neck, wrists, and ankles.
NOTE b. Place the hood inside the neck of the suit.
Maximum protection hoods are required c. Secure the top fastener around the neck.
when personnel have beards, mous-
taches, long sideburns or long hair. The d. Secure the snap fasteners snugly around
head cover must cover all hair except the the wrists and ankles.
eyebrows.
15-28. Boots.
15-25. DONNING AND WEARING TYPE II CLOTH-
ING. The following step-by-step procedure shall be
a. Put on the boots.
observed when donning Type II clothing prior to
entrance Into the clean room:
b. Tuck the legs of the suit into the boots.
NOTE
c. Make sure the boots cover the ankles of
the suit and fits snugly on the calf of the leg.
Loose foreign material such as dandruff,
skin flakes, loose hairs, and/or dust par-
ticles carried into the clean room will tend d. Secure the boots with the fasteners and
to migrate downward inside the suit to ties.
the belts and gloves when clean room
clothing is sequentially donned in the 15-29. Gloves.
following order.
a. Put on the gloves.
15-26. Hood. The hood is put on first.
b. Make sure the gloves cover the wrists and
a. Wear the hood so it completely covers the fit snugly up over the wrists of the suit.
hair and comes down below the neckline of the
coverall suit, leaving only the face exposed. NOTE
b. Close the hood below the neck to the Use nonpowdered latex finger cots or
bottom of the cape with two rows of adjustable tweezers when gloves will restrict finger
grippers. dexterity. Plastic gloves can be used for
short operation, but they can be too hot
15-27. Suit. Next put on the suit. for full-time use.
15-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
015004
Figure 15-4. Clean Room Clothing (Type II)
15-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
15-30. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS. plex. Air should flow from the cleanest
room in the complex to the dirtiest room
15-31. GENERAL. The air supplied to the bearing by means of positive pressure differentials.
clean room shall be conditioned, filtered and circu-
lated in accordance with requirements contained in 15-35. CONTAMINANT CONTROL. Control the par-
Federal Standard FED-STD-209. This Standard ticulate contamination of the bearing clean room in
details the requirements for environmental control accordance with Federal Standard FED-STD-209.
of clean rooms and clean work spaces. Particulate control will depend on the classification
of the room. Table 15-2 shows the three classes
15-32. TEMPERATURE CONTROL. Standard gage of clean rooms and specifies the maximum level
room temperature is 68° $0.5°F. for gage calibration of contamination for each class.
and operation. A sightly higher temperature of 72°
$5°F. will be more suitable for personnel comfort. 15-36. The use of light scattering particle counters
Daily temperature records shall be maintained. will facilitate particle counts and will provoke a
positive means of continuous monitoring of the clean
NOTE room. Microscopic particle counting can be per-
formed periodically to check counter accuracy and
Correlate all dimensional values to the to recheck high particle counts prior to room
standard gaging temperature of 68° shutdown. Maintain daily records of the particle
$0.5°F. when critical close tolerance mea- counts in the shop.
surements are compared to OEM drawing
requirements. 15-37. C O N T A M I N A T I O N C O N T R O L P R O -
CEDURES.
15-33. HUMIDITY CONTROL. Maintain the humidity
of the air in the clean room at 40 percent $5 percent 15-38. FILTRATION OF INCOMING AIR. Filtration
relative humidity. Daily relative humidity records shall of the incoming air is possible down to particle size
be maintained in the facility. of 0.3 micron in diameter with 99.97 percent efficien-
cy using HEPA (High Efficiency Particulate Air) air
15-34. AIR PRESSURE CONTROL. Maintain the filters.
pressure level of the clean room at a minimum of
0.05 inches of water above the preparation room. NOTE
NOTE HEPA filters controls only the air being

supplied to the room. Air showers, lintfree
Maintain the air pressure of the gage and clean clothing and good housekeeping
inspection room at a positive differential practices are essential for areas that re-
over other rooms in the clean room com- quire particle control to 5 microns or less.
Table 15-2. Maximum Contamination Levels for Clean Rooms per Federal Standard FED-STD-209
(Per cubic foot of air)
Particle Size Total Number of

Room Class Microns Particles Counted
100 0.5 micron and
larger 100
10,000 0.5 micron and
larger 10,000
5 microns and
larger 65
100,000 0.5 micron and
larger 100,000
5 microns and
larger 700
15-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
15-39. HEPA filters should be serviced when pres- particle count level. Readings shall be taken after
sure differentials show a decrease in airflow on the people come to work in the morning, after leaving
downstream side of the filters. Changing filter and returning at noon, and after leaving at the end
elements causes a particle buildup in the air down- of the normal workday. Compile the “recovery rate”
stream from the filters. Use the following procedures from the average of these recovery periods.
when changing filters:
NOTE
a. Change filters following the last work period
of the last work day in the week. Allow for a sufficient Standards for particle counting of a clean
recovery time for the air conditioning system before room shall be established after a careful
the next work period. computation and complete review of the
particle counter recordings taken every
b. Vacuum the duct areas before and after 10 minutes over a 2-week period.
filter change to prevent particle buildup.
15-42. Refer to ASTM Standard Test Method F50-92
15-40. A U T O M AT I C A I R B O R N E PA R T I C L E for details on skin and counting of airborne particles
COUNTING METHOD. The light scattering particle using an Automatic Light Scattering Particle Counter.
counter is an instrument capable of detecting and
automatically recording the number of airborne 15-43. M A N U A L M I C R O S C O P I C PA R T I C L E
particles. A sample of air containing the particles COUNT METHOD. A microscope can be use of as
is passed through a light beam. The particles scatter an alternate procedure to establish the particle count
the light in all directions. Some of the light is picked level of a room. This can be done by manually or
up and processed so that an electrical impulse is electronically counting the particles on a test sample
generated each time a particle passes through the filter disk. The manual method is as follows:
light beam. The electrical impulses are amplified
and counted.
a. Collect air on a Type HA Millipore or equal
filter disk using vacuum to collect the contaminants
15-41. The particle count level of a clean room using on the surface of the filter.
a light scattering particle counter is performed as
follows:
b. Examine microscopically the filter disk to
determine the amount of contaminants present in
a. Sample the air to establish the “at rest” state of size ranges.
level of the cleanroom.
c. A maximum variation of 2 to 1 ($33 percent
NOTE of the average of the two runs) of the test results
should be obtained on repetitive counts on the same
Check the “at rest” condition of the clean sample.
room after the room and/or rooms have
been thoroughly cleaned. Allow the room NOTE
to remain idle with no personnel entering
the area for at least one 8-hour shift and
The test includes a self-checking proce-
the air conditioning system in full opera-
dure for determining the amount of small
tion.
airborne contaminants 5 microns or great-
er in size.
b. Establish the particle count level for “light
activity” conditions with a small number of people
15-44. Samples taken should be as representative
performing typical bearing processing operations.
as possible of the sampled area. Procedures for
taking samples will be established by each activity.
c. Establish the particle count level for “heavy To ensure reproducibility, the sampling program
activity” conditions, with the maximum number of should be initially checked by testing repetitive
people that will be performing normal work opera- samples from the bearing clean room. Personnel
tions in the clean room. performing contamination analysis shall wear lint-
free laboratory coats with head and shoe covers
d. Establish the “recovery rate” or the total and perform the work within Class 100 clean work
time required for the room to return to its “at rest” stations.
15-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
15-45. CONTROL OF SOLVENTS, LUBRICANTS 15-49. C O N T R O L O F C L E A N R O O M M A I N -

AND PRESERVATIVES USED IN THE BEARING TENANCE.
CLEAN ROOM.
15-50. MAINTENANCE WORK. Maintenance work
15-46. SOLVENTS. Process solvents used in the in the clean room shall be held to a minimum during
clean room as follows: working hours. The following requirements apply:
a. Clean containers by thoroughly rinsing with a. Drilling, scraping, filing, cutting or other dirt
filtered solvent. Discard the rinse solvent. producing work shall not be permitted on any part
that can be removed from the room.
b. Filter solvents used in the clean rooms to
remove particles that are 0.45 micron in size or larger b. When removal of equipment being modified
(figure 15-5). is impossible due to size or permanent installation,
a thorough cleanup of the area shall be performed
following modification and prior to any further bearing
c. Store filtered solvents in containers with production.
either shielded openings or dustproof, spring-loaded
safety closures.
c. Particle counts shall be taken both before
modification, and after cleanup to determine the
d. Refilter solvents before returning to the effectiveness of the cleanup operations.
storage container.
15-51. GAGING, TOOLING AND MATERIALS. The
15-47. LUBRICANTS AND PRESERVATIVES. Pro- tools and gaging equipment used in bearing proces-
cess the lubricants used in the bearing clean room sing must be properly processed prior to being
as follows: brought into the clean room.
a. Place lubricating oils, fingerprint removers a. Clean gaging instruments, test stands,
and preservatives in storage containers that are parts and materials prior to bringing them into clean
plainly marked with both the military and commercial room. Specific cleaning instructions shall be in
specification numbers, date received and other accordance with local process specifications under
pertinent information. the control of the Materials Engineering Laboratory/
Physical Science Laboratory.
b. Filter lubricating oils through 0.45 micron
filters prior to use. b. Clean bearing handling tools that have
become contaminated during bearing processing to
the cleaning area prior to any further assembly or
c. Store lubricants in containers having re-
test operations.
movable airtight lids.
c. Check for residual magnetism in tools and
d. Sample inspect lubricants by microscopic steel components with a gaussmeter.
examination prior to use. Use only the lubricants
that have been inspected and accepted by the
15-52. MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL. Maintenance
personnel shall wear the same clothing required of
Laboratory.
clean room personnel. This includes the cleaning
of preservation tanks inside the clean room. Wearing
15-48. Provide a closed, multiple grease dispensing street clothes in the clean room will contaminate
system and/or injectors with separate grease guns the room to such an extent that cleanliness levels
maintained for infrequently used or small usage cannot be met.
lubricants. The following procedures apply:
15-53. CONTROL OF CLEAN ROOM CLOTHING.
a. Identify all grease guns to prevent mixing
or misuse of lubricants. 15-54. GENERAL. It is difficult to determine the life
of a clean room garment since it is impossible to
b. Use handling tools or spatulas made of know the exact time when the synthetic fibers will
nonshedding plastic or stainless steel when contact- breakdown. Three factors will largely determine the
ing lubricants. Do not use wood materials. length of service for each garment.
15-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
15-58. METHOD I (MICROSCOPIC). Refer to ASTM

Standard Test Method F51-00 for details on the use
of microscopic techniques for sizing and counting
particulate contamination on clean room garments.
15-59. METHOD II (LIGHT SCATTERING). Light

scattering particle counters can be set up with
special probes and a vacuum source to determine
the particle count of clean room garments.
15-60. JANITORIAL SERVICE.
15-61. The successful operation of a clean room

will depend on the type and quality of the janitorial
service that is established and maintained. Each
worker in the clean room is responsible for keeping
their own working area clean. However, full-time
janitorial service is necessary if the clean room is
to be maintained at its designed level of cleanliness.
Essential requirements for clean room janitorial
service are as follows:
a. Keep volatile solvents out of the clean room

whenever possible and quickly remove them when
they are introduced into the area.
015005
Figure 15-5. Apparatus for Filtering Solvents b. Do not use lint producing materials such
as paper and cotton wastes in the clean room.
a. The material of which the garment is made. c. Assign properly indoctrinated and trained
personnel to full-time custodial duties within the
b. The washing formulas used to clean the clean room.
material.
d. Methods, materials, dress and tods used
c. The type of work performed by personnel. by custodian personnel shall be approved by the
local Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical Sci-
ence Laboratory.
15-55. These three factors will always remain as
variables. However, under average conditions, 8 to
15-62. AUTHORIZED MATERIALS. Many cleaning
12 months wear can be expected.
materials used in the janitorial work contain pine
oil and/or ammonia. These materials shall not be
15-56. RENTAL OF CLEAN ROOM GARMENTS. used in clean rooms, since the fumes may form
It may prove advantageous to rent the garments gummy residues and/or react with the lubricating
from a specialty laundry rather than purchasing the oils. Materials must be approved by the Materials
garments and sending them out for laundering. This Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory.
will depend on whether there is a laundry in the
area that is equipped to provide this type of service. 15-63. Approved Cleaning Compounds for Gener-
al Use.
15-57. GARMENT INSPECTION FOR PARTICU-
LATE CONTAMINATION. Two methods of particle a. Use nonionic detergent, Specification
count determination are used for laundry service MIL-D-16791, Type I, in water solution (0.5 percent
inspection. One of the following procedures shall by volume maximum), for scrubbing floors, walls,
be used in the controlled environment room of the and work tables.
laundry service plant. Special test equipment is used
to determine the particle contamination of the b. Rinse with clear water.
garments and for evaluating foreign particles that
may be present in the liquid used for washing c. Do not use scrub rags, rag mops and
process. scouring powders.
15-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
d. Use polyurethane sponges, mops and rub- absolutely necessary (table 15-1). Bearings must be
ber (or elastomeric synthetics) squeegees for large protected from airborne aerosols or particles.
area wet cleaning. Sponges shall be thrown away
before they begin to deteriorate. 15-68. Cleaning Walls and Ceilings. Walls and
ceilings should be cleaned only when dirt counts
15-64. Extra-heavy duty clean up such as gross oil cannot be brought within limits by any other correc-
spillage may require an emulsion cleaner. It shall tive action. When ceilings must be cleaned, cover
be the responsibility of the local Materials Engineer- all equipment that cannot be removed from the room
ing Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory to ap- such as gages and benches with clean plastic drop
prove all materials used in the clean room. cloths. Clean ceilings during nonworking hours, with
sufficient recovery time prior to the next working
shift.
NOTE
15-69. Cleaning Work Areas. Work areas shall be
Whenever possible, remove all bearing cleaned daily by the assigned custodial personnel
parts, bearings, gages, fixtures and equip- prior to start of the work day and thereafter by the
ment when aqueous solutions are used mechanic assigned to the work area.
to clean-up a clean room until after the
cleaning is completed, and for at least 15-70. Cleaning Floors. Clean the floors as follows:
8 hours after the humidity recorder shows
the space to be within the limits estab- a. Clean floors (swabbed) daily or more often
lished for relative humidity. as directed.
15-65. Materials Used for Floor Maintenance. The b. Strip and reseal floors in the lubrication
following materials are acceptable for use in main- and preservation area every 2 weeks.
taining the clean room floors. The Materials Engi-
neering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory c. Strip and reseal the floor in the inspection
shall evaluate all materials before they can be used and gaging area once a month.
in the clean room.
15-71. INSPECTION AND MONITORING PROCE-
a. Stripper - Johnson Step Off DURES. Local instructions shall be established at
each depot level facility to monitor clean room
b. Sealer - Johnson Over/Under operations and to ensure compliance with particu-
late, temperature and humidity controls with respect
to facility, equipment and personnel.
c. Wax - Johnson Step Ahead
15-72. The general policies (shop rules) shall be
15-66. CLEANING SCHEDULES. in writing and enforced by the supervisor in all clean
rooms. A thorough inspection of the facilities should
15-67. All human activities generate particulate con- be made each week by trained personnel not
tamination, so all unnecessary activity such as wail normally engaged in operation or supervision of the
cleaning must be controlled and performed only when clean room.
15-13/(15-14 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTON XVI
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
16-1. GENERAL. personnel for inspecting rolling and plain bearings

for use in critical aeronautical components and
16-2. Personnel are an integral part of any success- installations.
ful bearing processing facility. A bearing processing
activity cannot function efficiently or effectively with- 16-5. APPLICATION AND POLICY.
out well trained and properly indoctrinated and
motivated personnel. Bearing processing involves
16-6. Depot level activities shall establish local
special skills and training requirements that are not
training programs and qualification procedures for
quickly learned. The bearing shop worker performs
personnel that are assigned bearing inspection and
many different kinds of inspections on a wide variety
acceptance responsibilities. Local training program
of bearings. Some of the basic skills required of
and qualification tests shall be based on the informa-
a bearing inspector are as follows:
tion and instructions contained in this technical
manual and other data deemed to be of importance
a. Evaluate bearings by visual and microscop-
by the local depot bearing engineer.
ic examinations.
b. Evaluate bearing condition against special- 16-7. HEALTH REQUIREMENTS.

ized application requirements.
16-8. VISION TESTS. Good vision is necessary
c. Make judgment decisions on bearing ac- for most of the inspection processes. Vision tests
ceptability based on engineering requirements. shall be performed by an ophthalmologist, optome-
trist or other professionally recognized personnel.
d. Detect defective and/or malfunctioning Bearing shop personnel performing visual and di-
bearings. mensional inspections will be required to pass vision
tests at the time of original qualification and each
e. Dimensionally inspect bearings using ultra- calendar year thereafter.
precision gaging equipment measuring in millionths
of an inch. 16-9. Vision Requirements. The following mini-
mum vision requirements shall apply:
f. Test bearings for torque, vibration and
smoothness characteristics and determine accept- a. Distant vision shall equal 20/30 in at least
ability for specific applications. one eye, either uncorrected or corrected.
g. Perform special inspections on new bear-
b. Near vision shall be equal to normal vision,
ings for the Defense industrial Supply Center or
as prescribed by the optical profession, in both eyes,
Service procurement agencies for conformance to
either corrected or uncorrected.
drawing and contract requirements.
16-3. Rolling and plain bearings must be inspected 16-10. DEXTERITY TESTS. Dexterity tests shall be
and evaluated against specific application require- given to personnel assigned to handling and proces-
ments. The same bearing size and type may be used sing miniature and instrument bearings. Instrument
in many different kinds of components with very size bearings include those under 30 mm (1 inch)
different operational requirements. Each bearing will outer diameter and miniature bearings are under
have special features that are peculiar to the require- 9 mm outer diameter. Personnel assigned responsi-
ments of a specific application. It is very important bilities with ultraprecision gaging equipment should
that personnel responsible for bearing inspection and also be given dexterity tests.
processing be familiar with these specialized require-
ments and that they make use of this background 16-11. ACIDITY TESTS. Personnel with high acidity
data during the bearing evaluation. levels can cause severe corrosion damage to
bearings and precision gaging equipment and should
16-4. It is necessary to establish special require- be restricted from operations involving the physical
ments, tests and certification procedures to qualify handling of bearings and gaging equipment.
16-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
16-12. GENERAL TESTS. Personnel assigned to d. Lubricant Condition Analysis. Be able to

the clean room area of the bearing processing facility evaluate greases and oils in new bearings, bearings
should be evaluated for compatibility with confining in storage and lubricant in containers for condition
and highly restrictive work functions. The following and acceptability for use.
undesirable characteristics should be considered
when selecting personnel to work in clean room e. Wear Indications. Have a knowledge of the
environments. type of wear that is normal or abnormal for particular
types of bearings used in specific applications.
a. Severe dermatologic problems.
f. Wear Limits. Have a knowledge of maxi-
b. Severe allergy problem with excessive mum allowable wear for particular bearings for
sneezing and nose blowing. specific applications.
16-13. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALIFICATION. g. Gaging Requirements. Have a knowledge

of what measurements are important for specific
kinds of bearings and types of applications, and
16-14. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS. Bearing ability to accurately measure bearing parameters.
shop personnel shall possess a working knowledge
of the following types of processing, inspection h. Judgment Decisions. Be able to evaluate
equipment, materials and processes: critical rolling and plain bearings and decide, using
all available inspection criteria and historical knowl-
a. Cleaning processes that are used to re- edge, whether the bearing can be safely used for
move different kinds of contaminants from bearing another service tour in a specific application.
components.
NOTE
b. Gaging equipment and setup procedures
for measuring ABEC and RBEC parameters and The ability to make sound judgment deci-
critical drawing requirements. sions is very important for critical bearing
applications such as gas turbine engines,
c. Torque and vibration testing equipment. helicopter drive systems and inertial guid-
Including set-up procedures. ance systems. The flight safety of the
personnel and the safe return of the
d. Microscopic equipment. Their use in in- aircraft may hinge upon these decisions.
specting bearings and their limitations.
16-16. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS.
e. Lubrication and preservation materials, re-
quirements and processes. a. Personnel must know general bearing
theory regarding the operation and functioning of
f. Packaging materials, methods and pro- rolling and plain bearings.
cesses.
b. Personnel must know general theory con-
cerning gaging, including set-up procedures, opera-
16-15. INSPECTION PROCEDURES. Personnel as- tion, gaging practices and techniques.
signed to inspect bearings shall possess a thorough
working knowledge of the following conditions: c. Personnel must be thoroughly familiar with
processing and inspection requirements contained
a. Ball and Roller Path Analysis. Be able to in Sections IV through XIV of this technical manual.
identify normal and abnormal rolling element path
indications and conditions. This will involve making d. Personnel must be able to interpret inspec-
weighted judgment decisions. tion and test indications upon which to base accep-
tance or rejection of bearings in accordance with
b. Defect Identification and Analysis. Be able this technical manual, manufacturer’s drawings and
to detect, properly name and describe observed contractor requirements.
defects and conditions.
e. Personnel must be able to accurately read
c. Failure Analysis. Be able to determine and properly interpret technical drawings, govern-
causes of observed defects and conditions. This ment publications and military specifications and
involves making important judgment decisions. standards.
16-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
16-17. QUALIFICATION EXAMINATIONS. Person- d. Acceptable marks/indications, dimensional

nel assigned to the inspection and acceptance areas variations and wear limits.
of the bearing processing facility shall be qualified
by examinations. The examinations and tests can e. Cleaning, lubrication, preserving, packaging
be written, oral, functional and/or operational. and identification procedures.
16-18. The functional examinations will include sam- 16-21. OPERATIONAL TESTS. Functional tests
ple bearings with known defects and/or deficiencies. shall include sample bearings that have known
Personnel shall be tested for their ability to detect acceptable, borderline and unacceptable conditions.
and properly identify different types of defects and/or Operational tests shall include calibration and set-up
deficient conditions. procedures of gaging equipment.
16-19. The qualification status of a bearing inspector 16-22. S P E C I A L C E R T I F I C AT I O N R E Q U I R E-
shall be maintained by a continuous record of MENTS. Certain operations in the bearing proces-
satisfactory workmanship. Personnel shall be requal- sing facility require special certification testing before
ified if they are away from bearing related work for the workers can be authorized to certify successful
more than 1 year. Requalification shall be in accor- task completion. There are minimum on-the-job
dance with requirements contained in this section. training requirements that must be met before the
bearing shop worker will be considered for certifica-
16-20. QUALIFICATION TESTS. Applicants shall tion testing. The following special certifications and
take written or oral tests based on the documents on-the-job time requirements apply to bearing shop
listed in paragraph 16-16. Tests will cover the personnel:
following topics:
a. Induction, prescreening and cleaning of
NOTE bearings. 6 months.
Oral testing is not as effective as written
b. Inspection of noninstrument bearings. 1
testing to determine personnel qualifica-
year.
tion.
a. Basic theory of bearings and lubricants c. Inspection of instrument bearings. 1 year.

including nomenclature, design and application.
d. Lubrication and packaging. 6 months.
b. Methods of checking bearing dimensions
and parameters. e. Barrier film application. Certification in the
inspection of instrument bearings.
c. Common types of bearing defects and
deficiencies causing rejection and rework. f. Buffing and polishing. 6 months.
16-3/(16-4 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XVII
CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
17-1. GENERAL. numbers of convenient sizes. The description under

intended uses includes major uses for the material
17-2. This section contains a detailed listing of but does not exclude appropriate use in other
materials used in bearing processing, bearing remov- applications. Table 17-2 lists superseded specifica-
al and installation, maintenance of installed bearings tions.
and operation of a clean room complex. Table 17-1
is a specifications index with cross reference to
applicable consumable materials listed in table 17-3. 17-3. Consult the appropriate stock catalog and
Each item in table 17-3 is listed by nomenclature controlling specification for more detailed information
and applicable specification number, with stock concerning specific materials.
Table 17-1. Specification Index
Table 17-3
Specification No. Nomenclature Item No.
Federal
ASTM D461 Standard Test Methods for Felt 39
AA–3174 Plastic Film, polyethylene (thin gauge) 85
ASTM D2103 Plastic sheets, polyethylene 87
ASTM D329 Acetone, technical 2
O-M-232 Methanol (methyl alcohol) 74
P-C-111 Carbon removing compound 16, 27
P-C-444 Cleaning compound, solvent grease emulsifying 22
MIL–PRF–680 Solvent, dry cleaning 94
AA–1047 Paper, abrasive (artificial) (waterproof) 81
AA–55622 Cord, cotton, braided, prewaxed 30
QQ-A-1876 Aluminum Foil
TT-I-735 Alcohol, Isopropyl 5
TT-N-95 Naphtha, aliphatic 78
MIL–PRF–680 Thinner, paint, volatile mineral spirits (petroleum spirits) 100
MIL–PRF–32033 Lubricating oil, general purpose, preservative, water 69
displacing low temperature
VV-P-236 Petrolatum, technical 83
MIL-G-21164 Grease, molybdenum disulfide (for low and high 47, 57
temperatures)
MIL-PRF-21260 Lubricating oil, internal combustion engine, preservative 71
MIL-PRF-22191 Films, transparent, flexible, heat sealable, for packaging 40
applications
MIL–PRF–233776 Primer Coatings: Epoxy, High Solids 89
17-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 17-1. Specification Index (Continued)
Table 17-3
AA–51175 Wheel, buffing and polishing 102
MMM–A–250 Adhesive, water resistant for sealing fiberboard boxes 4
PPP-C-96 Cans, metal 28 gage and lighter 14
ASTM D5486 Tape, pressure-sensitive, adhesive waterproof, for 99
packaging and sealing
PPP-T-76 Tape, pressure-sensitive, adhesive, paper, water resistant 98
(for carton sealing)
Military
MIL-DTL–117 Bags, interior packaging 7
MIL-PRF-121 Barrier Material, grease-proof, waterproof, flexible 10
MIL-PRF-131 Barrier Material, water vaporproof, flexible 11
MIL-P-149 Plastic Coating Compound, strippable (hot dipping) 84
MIL-L-3918 Lubricating oil instrument jewel bearing 80
AA–1722 Grain, abrasive, soft, for carbon removal 44
MIL-B-5687 Bearings, sleeve, washers, thrust, sintered, metal powder,
oil-impregnated
MIL-PRF-6081 Oil, lubricating, aircraft, jet engine 79
MIL-PRF-6082 Lubricating oil, aircraft, reciprocating engine (piston) 62
MIL-PRF-6083 Hydraulic Fluid, petroleum base, preservative 59
MIL-PRF-6085 Lubricating oil, instrument, aircraft, low volatility 70
MIL-C-6529 Corrosion Preventive, aircraft engine 31
MIL-R-6855 Rubber, synthetic sheet, molded and extruded, for aircraft 91
applications
ASTM D4701 Methylene Chloride 76
MIL-PRF-7808 Lubricating oil, aircraft, turbine engine synthetic base 65
MIL-PRF-7870 Lubricating oil, general purpose, low temperature 67
MIL-C-11796 Corrosion Preventive Compound, petrolatum, hot application 32
MIL-C-15074 Corrosion Preventive, fingerprint remover 34
MIL-L-15719 Lubricating Grease (high temperature, electric motor, 61
ball and roller bearings)
MIL-C-16173 Corrosion Preventive Compound, solvent cutback, cold 33
application
MIL-D-16791 Detergents, nonionic 36
AA–59297 Buffing and polishing compounds 88
MIL-PRF-3150 Lubricating oil, general purpose 66
AMS–C–19853 Carbon Removing Compound 17
17-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 17-1. Specification Index (Continued)
Table 17-3
MIL-S-22473 Sealing, locking and retaining compounds, single component 92
AMS–C–22587 Cartridge, grease, 14 ounce (see applicable spec.)
SAE J1899 Lubricating oil, aircraft piston engine 63
MIL-PRF-23699 Lubricating oil, aircraft turbine engines, synthetic base 64
MIL-PRF-23827 Grease, aircraft and instrument, gear and actuator screw 48
DOD-G-24508 Grease, multi-purpose, ball and roller bearing 47, 53
MIL-G-25013 Grease, ball and roller bearing, extreme high temperature 54
MIL-PRF-25537 Grease, aircraft, helicopter oscillating bearing 49
MIL-PRF-27617 Grease, fuel & oil resistant 55
MIL-C-43616 Cleaning Compound, aircraft surface 20
MIL-S-81087 Silicone Fluid, chlorinated phenyl methyl polysiloxane 93
MIL-C-81302 Cleaning Compound, solvent, trichlorotrifluoroethane 23
MIL-PRF-81322 Grease, aircraft, general purpose, wide temperature range 51
MIL-T-81533 Methyl Chloroform 90
MIL-C-16173 Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback, Cold 68
Application
MIL-G-81937 Grease, instrument bearing 56
MIL-PRF-83261 Grease, Aircraft, Extreme Pressure, Anti-wear 50
AA–59323 Wiping cloths, clean room 103
Military Standard
SAE AS13341 Process for barrier coating of antifriction bearings 12
Table 17-2. Superseded Specifications
Old New
VV–L–800 MIL–PRF–32033
P–D–680 MIL–PRF-680
MIL-A-101 MMM-A-250
MIL–L–7807 MIL–PRF–7807
MIL-G-81322 MIL-PRF-81322
MIL–B–121 MIL–PRF–121
PPP–T–42 AA–883
LP–378 AA–3174
MIL–F–22191 MIL–PRF–22191
17-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table 17-2. Superseded Specifications (Continued)
Old New
MIL–P–116 MIL–STD–2073–1
MIL–G–23827 MIL–PRF–23827
F50–83 F50–92
F51–69 F51–00
C–F–206 D461
GGG–W–301 AA–51175
PPP–T–60 D5486
MIL–B–117 MIL–DTL–117
MIL–G–5634 AA–1722
MIL–H–6083 MIL–PRF–6083
MIL–B–16909 AA–59297
MIL–C–19853 AMS–C–19853
MIL–PRF–23377G
MIL–C–22587 AMS–C–22587
MIL–L–22851 J1899
MIL–C–16173 MIL–C–16173
MIL–C–85043 AA–59323
MIL–STD–1334 AS13341
O–A–51 D329
L–P–512 D2103
MIL-A-148 QQ-A-1876
P–P–101 B74.18
T–C–571 AA–55622
TT–T–291 MIL–PRF–680
17-4
Table 17-3. List of Consumable Material
Item
No. Nomenclature Specification Unit of Issue Stock No. Intended Use
1 Abrasive, aluminum oxide, ATA Companies Inc. 1 lb. Abrasive polishing of bearing
unfused, levigated, fine 200 O.K.C. N65388-3 surfaces.
mesh
2 Acetone, technical ASTM D329 1 pt. can 9G6810-00-223-2739 Cleaning of instrument
5 gal. can 9G6810-00-184-4796 precision bearings.
3 Adhesive (Retaining MIL-R-46082 Locktite 10 cc Btl. 9Q8030-00-180-6150 Bonding bearings in place.
compound, single RC-35
component, anaerobic)
4 Adhesive, water resistant, MMM-A-250 1 gal. can 9Q8040-00-266-0818 Used to seal intermediate
for sealing fiber-board containers.
boxes
5 Alcohol, isopropyl TT-I-735 1 qt. can 9G6810-00-983-8551 Cleaning visual count
1 gal. can 9G6810-00-286-5435 filtration apparatus.
55 gal. drum 9G6810-00-543-7915
6 Assembly Fluid Commercial Ultrachem 4 oz. tube 9G9150-00-159-5012 Mounting bearing with
Inc. Number 1 interference fits.
7 Bags, interior packaging MIL-DTL-117 Class E: Prefabricated water vapor-
Type I hvy. duty 6 in. x 8 in., 2000/case 9Q8105-00-264-5524 proof bags for bearing
Type I hvy. duty 8 in. x 12 in., 500/case 9Q8105-00-264-5525 packing Method IA-8.
Type II med. duty 3 in. x 5 in., 4,000/case 9Q8105-00-264-5522
8 Bags, plastic, interlocking 4 in. x 4 in. 9Q8105-00-837-7753 Intimate wrap, and temporary
6 in. x 6 in. 9Q8105-00-837-7754 protection of bearings in
8 in. x 8 in. 9Q8105-00-837-7755 transit.
10 in. x 10 in. Box 500 ea. 9Q8105-00-837-7756
12 in. x 12 in. Box 500 ea. 9Q8105-00-837-7757
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
9 Bags, plastic, micron clean, Richmond Corp. Tubing Ultra clean packaging
antistatic polyethylene/nylon RCAS-1200 poly. Bags materials for precision
RCAS-2400 nylon Sheets bearings.
10 Barrier Material, grease- MIL-PRF-121, Type II, 36 in. roll, 100 yds. 9Q8135-00-753-4662 Intimate wrapping of
proofed, waterproofed, Class 2, Grade A preserved bearings.
flexible
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
11 Barrier Material, water MIL-PRF-131: For Method IA-8
vaporproof, flexible Class I plastic on 36 in. roll, 200 yds. 9Q8135-00-282-0565 preservation.
woven backing
Class II paperback 36 in. roll, 200 yds. 9Q8135-00-282-8256
12 Bearing coating solution SAE AS13341 6850 series Barrier film applied to the
and solvent FC-706, FC-723 faces of bearing rings to
17-5
prevent lubricant migration.

17-6
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table 17-3. List of Consumable Material (Continued)
Item
13 Buffing Compound (chrome) FS AA–59297 Lb. 2 lb. can 9Q5350-00-193-7225 Used to buff bearing
Grade B surfaces.
14 Cans, metal, 28 gage and PPP-C-96 1 each 9Q8110-00-178-8289 Used as unit container for
lighter Methods IA-5 and IA-6
preservation.
15 Carbon Remover Commercial, 5 gal. can Remove heavy carbon
Turco Products Inc., 55 gal. drum deposits from bearings.
Turco Carb.
16 Carbon Removing compound P-C-111, Type II 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-965-2332 Remove carbon from engine
55 gal. drum 9Q6850-00-281-3042 bearings.
17 Carbon Removing Compound SAE AMS–C–19853 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-543-7801 Remove carbon from engine
(2 phase) 55 gal. drum 9G6850-00-550-7453 bearings.
18 Cellulose Acetate Commercial Sheets, 18 x 18 in. Transparent packaging
material for preservation
Methods IA-18 and IA-19.
19 Cellulose Acetate Butyrate Commercial Sheets, 18 x 18 in. Transparent packaging
material for preservation
Methods IA-18 and IA-19.
Tubing IA-6 preservation.

20 Cleaning Compound aircraft MIL-C-43616 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-144-9816 Cleaning compound for
surfaces heavy cleaning in clean
room.
21 Deleted
22 Cleaning Compound, P-C-444, Type II 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-965-2331 Use with trichloroethylene
solvent, grease emulsifying 55 gal. drum 9G6850-00-559-2835 as an ultrasonic cleaning
solution.
23 Cleaning Compound, solvent, MIL-C-81302 16 oz. can 9G6850-00-105-3084 Precision cleaner for small
trichlorotrifluoroethane 5 gal. drum 9G6850-00-984-5853 bearings.
55 gal. drum 9G6850-00-983-0282
Item
24 Cleaning Compound, E I. DuPont Freon Cleaning oxygen system
trichlorotrifluoroethane + TMC or equal components.
methylene chloride
25 Cleaning compound, L&R No. 222 1 gal. can Cleaning instrument
waterless, ammonia free bearings.
26 Deleted
27 Compound, engine cleaning P-C-111 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-965-2332 Removing carbon from
(cresol base) bearings.
28 Compound, lapping Commercial: Refinishing precision
KOCOUR Co. bearing surfaces.
L-84-0157
29 Compound, burnishing Commercial: SWECO, 100 pound container Vibro-Tumbling cleaning
inc. Burnishing process.
Compound No. 1
30 Cord, cotton, braided, AA–55622 CL 1200 feet Q24020-00-240-2160 Used in special instrument
prewaxed bearing rework procedures.
31 Corrosion Preventive, MIL-C-6529: Short time preservation of
aircraft engine Type I 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-281-2031 bearings up to 180 days.
Type II 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-209-7235
Type III 55 gal. drum 9G6850-00-209-7234
Type IV 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-209-7230
32 Corrosion Preventive MIL-C-11796 35 lb. can 9Q8030-00-285-1570 Long time preservation of
Compound, petrolatum, Class 3 bearings.
hot application
33 Corrosion Preventive MIL-C-16173, 1 gal. can 9Q8030-00-244-1297 Preservation of bearings
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Compound ,solvent Grade 2 5 gal. pail 9Q8030-00-244-1298 for temporary storage up
cutback, cold application 55 gal. drum 9Q8030-00-244-1295 to 1 year.
34 Corrosion Preventive, MIL-C-15074 1 gal. can 9Q8030-00-281-2338 Removal of fingerprint
fingerprint remover 5 gal. drum 9Q8030-00-252-8300 residues from bearing
55 gal. drum 9Q8030-00-252-8301 surfaces.
35 Creams, hand, protective Commercial, 16 oz. Jar Protect bearings against
(anti-perspirant). Invisible KERODEX 51 fingerprint residues.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
barrier cream AYERST Lab Inc.
36 Detergents, non-ionic MIL-D-16791 Type I 1 gal. can 9Q7930-00-282-9699 Cleaning solution used
5 gal. can 9Q7930-00-985-6911 in a clean room.
37 Dishes, plastic, petri Commercial, Millipore 100 mm dia., Protection of sample disks
(bottom and cover) Filter Corp. Cat. No. 20 mm high used in visual particle
17-7
P010 047 00 count procedure.

17-8
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Item
38 Deleted
39 Felt, sheet wool, pressed ASTM D461 square feet 9Q8305-00-286-3185 Buffing small bearings races
and for felt contact seals.
40 Film (plastic sheet), flexible, MIL-PRF-22191, Type I 600 ft. roll 9Q8135-00-079-2415 Packaging bearings for
heat sealable shipment or storage.
41 Filter, pore size 0.45 micron, Commercial, Millipore 100 disks per pack For visual particle count of
47 mm dia. grids spaced Filter Corp., Type HA dust controlled areas.
3.08 mm (black grid)
42 Deleted
43 Freon TF Commercial, Freon lb. can 9G6830-00-584-2957 Used as a solvent rinse for
113 E.I. cleaning bearings.
44 Grain, abrasive, soft, for F5 AA–1722 Bag 5066 9Q5350-00-050-1094 Tumbling of rolling elements.
carbon removal
45 Grain, abrasive aluminum 5 lb. can 9Q5350-00-291-8382 Tumbling of rolling elements.
oxide, grain size 500
46 Grease, aircraft and Commercial, Dow Lubricating bearings for high
instrument Corning DC-33 light speed and wide temperature
range.
47 Grease, Multipurpose ball DOD-G-24508 8 oz. tube 9Q9150-00-149-1592 For use in grease lubricated
and roller bearings 1 lb. 9Q9150-00-149-1593 ball and roller bearings.
48 Grease, aircraft and MIL-PRF-23827 4 oz. tube 9G9150-00-985-7244 Lubricating bearings for
instrument, gear and 8 oz. tube 9G9150-00-985-7245 low and high temperature
actuator screw 1.75 lb. can 9G9150-00-985-7246 applications.
6.5 lb. can 9G9150-00-985-7247
35 lb. can 9G9150-00-985-7248
49 Grease, aircraft, helicopter MIL-PRF-25537 1.75 lb. can 9G9150-00-616-9020 Lubricating oscillating type
oscillating bearing 6.5 lb. can 9G9150-00-721-8570 bearings.
35 lb. can 9G9150-00-721-8581
50 Grease, aircraft Extreme MIL-PRF-83261 5 gm. can 9G9150-00-267-7188 For use in oscillation
Pressure, Anti-wear bearings or accessories
under heavy loads.
Item
51 Grease, aircraft wide MIL-PRF-81322 1 lb. can 9G9150-00-944-8953 Medium high temperature
temperature 5 lb. can 9G9150-00-145-0268 range grease.
35 lb. pail 9G9150-00-935-5851
14 oz. cartridge 9G9150-00-484-4009
52 Grease, ball and roller Humble Oil and Refin- Lubricating bearings for high
bearings ing Co. ANDOK C speed and temperature.
53 Grease, ball and roller DOD-G-24508 8 oz. tube 9G9150-00-149-1593 Lubricating bearings of
bearing, +32° F to 225° F medium speed and average
temperature. Non-aircraft
use only.
54 Grease, ball and roller MIL-G-25013 1.75 lb. can 9G9150-00-141-6770 Lubricating bearings for high
bearing, extreme high 35 lb. pail 9G9150-00-141-6771 temperatures.
temperature 14 oz. cartridge 9G9150-00-935-4019
55 Grease, fuel & oil resistant MIL-PRF-27617 8 oz. tube 9G9150-00-961-8995 Grease in Lox systems.
56 Grease, instrument bearing, MIL-G-81937 100 gm tubes 9G9150-01-009-6235 Grease for lubricating
clean small instrument precision
bearings.
57 Grease, molybdenum MIL-PRF-21164 1.75 lb. can 9G9150-00-754-2595 Lubricating bearings for high
disulfide (for low and 14 oz. cartridge 9G9150-00-935-4018 unit loading.
high temperatures) 6.5 lb. can 9G9150-00-223-4004
35 lb. can 9G9150-00-965-2003
58 Handguard, clear Commercial, medium Protection of bearing
polyethylene/vinyl and large sizes surfaces and hands.
59 Hydraulic fluid, petroleum MIL-PRF-6083 1 gal. can 9G9150-00-935-9808 Temporary protection of
base 1 qt. can 9G9150-00-935-9807 bearings.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
60 Longcloth, cotton Commercial For polishing precision
bearing balls and races.
61 Deleted
62 Lubricating Oil, aircraft, MIL-PRF-6082 5 gal. can 9G9150-00-965-2303 Lubricating oil for mixing
reciprocating engine (piston) Grade 1065 with MIL-C-6529, Type I
concentrate.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
63 Lubricating Oil, aircraft SAE J1899 1 gal. can 9G9150-00-065-0115 Lubricating oil for mixing with
piston engine 5 gal. can 9G9150-00-753-5060 MIL-C-6529, Type I concen-
trate.
64 Lubricating Oil, aircraft MIL-PRF-23699 1 qt. can 9G9150-00-985-7099 Lubricating engine bearings
turboshaft engine, 55 gal. drum 9G9150-00-681-5999 for temporary storage.
synthetic
17-9
17-10
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Item
65 Lubricating Oil, aircraft, MIL-PRF-7808 1 qt. can 9G9150-00-782-2627 Lubricating jet engine bearings
turbine engine, synthetic and some gear box bearings.
base (Air Force only).
66 Lubricating Oil, general MIL-PRF-3150 5 gal. can 9G9150-00-231-6639 General purpose lubricating oil
purpose for temporary protection of
bearings.
67 Lubricating Oil, general MIL-PRF-7870 4 oz. tube 9G9150-00-542-1430 Preservative oil for Method IA-6
purpose, low 1 qt. can 9G9150-00-263-3490 and for lubricating bearing
temperature 1 gal. can 9G9150-00-273-2397 mounting surfaces.
55 gal. drum 9G9150-00-281-9438
68 Lubricating Oil, MIL-PRF-16173 4 oz. bottle 9G9150-00-238-5203 Lubricating oil for use in preci-
instrument ball sion instrument and miniature
ball bearings.
69 Lubricating Oil, general pur- MIL–PRF–32033 5 gal. can 9G9150-00-231-9062 General purpose preserving oil,
pose, preservative, water dis- 55 gal. drum 9G9150-00-281-2060 and hot oil soaking of preserved
placing, low temperature bearings.
70 Lubricating Oil, instrument, air- MIL-PRF-6085 1 1/2 oz. bottle 9G9150-00-664-6518 Lubricating small precision
craft, low volatility 1 qt. can 9G9150-00-223-4129 bearings, and as a preservative
oil for Methods IA-6 and IA-8.
71 Lubricating Oil, Internal com- MIL-PRF-21260: Lubricating oil for gearboxes.
bustion engine, preservative Type I Grade 30 5 gal. can 9G9150-00-111-0209
Type I Grade 50 5 gal. can 9G9150-90-111-0211
72 Lubricating Oil, water displacing Houghton Veto 4212 Turco 55 gal. drum Used to displace water without
5430 leaving a film or emulsion coat-
ing.
73 Media, ceramic Commercial, Vibra Finish Co. 50 lb. box Vibro-Tumbling cleaning.
VF-P 3/8 x 5/8 inch, 22
degrees angle cut cylinders NOTE NOTE
VF-P-3/8 x 5/8 inch, 22
degrees angle cut triangles About 90 lbs. of Specify “No added abrasives.”
VF-P 3/8 x 5/8 inch 22 Media occupies
degrees angle cut triangles one cubic foot.
74 Methanol (methyl alcohol), O-M-232 1 qt. can 9G6810-00-292-967 Precision cleaning of
technical 1 gal. can 6 instrument bearings.
5 gal. can 9G6810-00-597-360
8
9G6810-00-275-601
0
Item
75 Methyl Chloroform (inhibited) MIL-T-81533 5 gal. can 9G6810-00-476-5612 Vapor degreasing bearings.
76 Methylene Chloride ASTMD4701 1 pt. can 9G6810-00-223-2737 Special cleaning process
5 gal. can 9G6810-00-244-0290 for small bearings.
77 Mounting Fluid Mobil RT-403 Mounting bearings with
interference fits.
78 Naphtha, Aliphatic TT-N-95 1 gal. can 9G6810-00-238-8119 General solvent for cleaning
5 gal. can 9G6810-00-265-0664 small precision bearings.
79 Oil, Lubricating, aircraft, MIL-PRF-6081, 1 qt. can 9G9150-00-273-2388 Lubricating oil for mixing
jet engine Grade 1010 1 gal. can 9G9150-00-273-8807 with MIL-C-6529, Type I
concentrate.
80 Oil, Lubricating, instrument, MIL-L-3918 5 cc bottle 9G9150-00-252-6382 Lubricating oil for use in fine
jewel bearing instruments non-spreading
in polished surfaces.
81 Paper, abrasive (artificial, B74.18 ANSI: Special instrument and
waterproof) 400 grit 9 x 11 inch. 50 sheets 9Q5350-00-234-7201 general bearing rework.
600 grit 9 x 11 inch. 50 sheets 9Q5350-00-224-7215
82 Deleted
83 Petrolatum, technical VV-P-236 1.75 lb. can 9G9150-00-250-0926 Instruments bearing rework
7.5 lb. can 9G9150-00-250-0933 and establishing controlled
lubrication.
84 Plastic Coating Compound, MIL-P-149, Type II Box 50 lbs. 9Q8030-00-582-4598 Plastic coating of bearings
strippable (hot dipping) for Method IB-2 preserva-
tion.
85 Plastic Film, polyethlene AA–3174, Type I, Used as an intimate wrap.
(thin gauge) 0.004” thick 36” roll, 100 feet 9Q8135-00-068-9466
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
0.006” thick 72” roll, 100 feet 9Q8135-00-579-6489
86 Plastic paper Kimbery-Clark Corp Tex O 80 weight Use in clean room for writing
Print Decontamination Inc. and/or reports.
Decon Data Clean
87 Plastic Sheets and Sheeting, ASTM D2103 Sheet 9G9330-00-561-7979 General purpose shrouding
polyethylene for protection of open
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
assemblies containing
bearings.
88 Buffing and Polishing Com- FS AA–59297 3 lb., tube 9Q5350-00-191-9774 Abrasive polishing of
pounds (Superscedes bearing races.
MIL–B–16909
17-11
89 MIL–PRF–23377G 1 gal. can 9Q8010-00-515-2208 Prime on wheel bearing

housing bore.
17-12
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Item
90 Rouge, jewelers Commercial, Buehler Polishing rolling elements.
Ltd. 1559AB
91 Rubber, synthetic sheet, MIL-R-6855, Class 2, Sheets 9G9320-00-241-9760 Manufacture of replacement

molded and extruded, for Grade 60, bearing seals.
aircraft applications 1/64” thick
92 Sealing, locking and MIL-S-22473, 10 cc bottle 9Q8030-00-081-2339 Retaining bearings in place
retaining compounds, Grade A 50 cc bottle 9Q8030-00-081-2338 by adhesion.
single component
93 Silicone Fluid, Chlorinated MIL-S-81087, Lubricating fluid for

phenyl methyl polysiloxane Type I (F-50) 2 lb. can 9G9150-00-782-3946 instrument bearings.
Type II (F-44) 4 oz. bottle 9G9150-00-082-2448
94 Solvent, dry cleaning MIL–PRF-680, Type I 5 gal. can 9G6850-00-264-9038 General purpose solvent
55 gal. drum 9G6850-00-285-8012 for cleaning bearings.
MIL–PRF-680, Type II Gal. 9G6850-00-264-9039
95 Stone, Arkansas, super Commercial Norton Final stoning of rotor pivots

fine grade Abrasives Behr-Manning: and nonfunctional bearing
HF 113 4 x 1/4 inch triangle surfaces after major defects
HF 135 4 x 3/8 inch triangle are removed.
HF 13 4 x 1/4 inch square
HF 33 4 x 3/8 inch square
96 Stone, India, medium Commercial, Norton Rough stoning of major

grade Abrasives Behr-Manning: defects on bearing pivots
MF 114 4 x 1/4 inch triangle and nonfunctional bearing
MF 134 4 x 3/8 inch triangle surfaces.
MF 114 4 x 1/4 inch square
MF 34 4 x 3/8 inch square
97 Tags, metal marking Commercial, Metal Mar- 2 to 9 inch length For securing separable
ket Mfg. No. 237 bearings
and multiple matched bear-
ings.
98 Tape, pressure-sensitive PPP-T-76 120 yd. roll: Used to secure intimate
adhesive paper, water- 2 inch 9Q7510-00-297-6655 wraps
resistant (for carton seal- 3 inch 9Q7510-00-297-6656 and intermediate packages.
ing)
Item
99 Tape, pressure-sensitive ASTM D5486, Type III, 60 yd. roll: Used to secure shipping
adhesive waterproof, for Class I 2 inch 9Q7510-00-079-7906 containers.
packaging and sealing 3 inch 9Q7510-00-663-0194
100 Deleted
101 Ties, plastic, nylon Commercial, Richco 4 inch For securing separable/mul-
Pandut Corp. R & G 10 inch tiple
matched bearings.
102 Wheel, buffing and polish- AA–51175 each 9G3460-00-174-1856 Buffing and polishing bear-
ing ing
surfaces.
103 Wiping Cloths, Clean room AA–59323 Box 10 lbs. 9Q7920-00-165-7195 Used for wipe down of criti-
cal
surfaces and precision
instruments in a Class
100 clean room.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
17-13/(17-14 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SECTION XVIII
TOOLING AND EQUIPMENT
18-1. GENERAL. 18-4. Tables 18-2 and 18-3 list equipment required
to maintain an acceptable quality level for new and
18-2. The tooling and equipment that is required used bearings to be installed in aeronautical and
to successfully operate a bearing processing facility other critical applications. Equipment that has been
are divided into four categories and listed in tables selected are representative of commercial equipment
18-1 through 18-4. that has been successfully used in bearing proces-
sing facilities. Equipment of equal or superior quality
18-3. Table 18-1 lists many of the currently used and usefulness can be substituted.
bearing removal and installation tools. However, no
attempt was made to include an exhaustive listing
of all available tooling. Each activity shall be
responsible for developing adequate tooling for the 18-5. Table 18-4 includes some of the equipment
efficient and effective handling of rolling and plain needed to operate and control the bearing clean
bearings. room.
18-1
18-2
Table 18-1. Bearing Installation, Removal, and Maintenance Equipment
Equipment Manufacturer Uses

Grease Guns, hand, high pressure, lever-operated MIL-G-3859, FSC 4930 series Lubricating bearings using 14 oz. cartridge or bulk
Type I loading of grease.
Greasers, bearing, 1/8 to 3/8 in. I.D. up to 1/2 in. Bearing Inspection Inc., Model AF-14 Lubricate airframe and rod end bearings.
O.D.
Press, arbor, bench, 1/2 - ton capacity 00-P-636, FSC 3444 series Removal and installation of bearings with numer-
ous adapters.
Press, arbor, hand–operated (hydraulic) MIL-P-18629, FSC 3444 series Removal and installation of bearings.
Size I 25 ton capacity
Size II 50 ton capacity
Size III 75 ton capacity
Press, arbor, vertical, hydraulic and air driven MIL-P-80149, FSC 3442 Removal and installation of bearings. 25 to 150 ton
capacity.
Puller, armature bearing, chuck type NORIS P/N 26-17443 Removal of bearings from armature shafts
(figure 3-17).
Puller attachments, outside, split ring: Removal of shaft mounted bearings from
0-2 1/4 in. range 9Q5120-00-595-8424 accessible locations (figure 3-9).
1-5 in. range 9Q5120-00-288-6756
Puller, bearing 1/8 to 3/8 in. I.D. Bearing Inspection Inc., Model AF-12 Removal and installation of airframe bearings,
Series K, KA, KS and D.
Puller, bearing and gear, two arm, universal A: General purpose outside puller for large bearings
0-8 in. range 9Q5120-00-288-7710 (Fig. 3-4).
0-12 in. range 9Q5120-00-288-7712
Pullers, bearing Sperry Corp, P/N T1003714 Removal of deep-groove rotor bearings
(Fig. 14-10).
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Pullers, bearing General Electric, P/N 404 x 55 Removal of General Electric angular-contact
rotor bearings (Fig. 14-11).
Pullers. bearing Sperry Corp., P/N T100381 Removal of single-row, deep-groove bearings
(Fig. 14-15).
Pullers, cone Sperry Corp., P/N T100929 Removal of rotor shaft cones (Fig. 14-16).
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Puller, internal expansion, collet knocker NORIS 24-17180 with 3 adapters Removal of airframe bearings that are accessible
only from one side (Fig. 3-12).
Puller, pinion gear, two arms 1 7/8 in. max. 9Q5120-00-293-2925 Removal of small shaft mounted bearings that are
easily accessible from open side.
Table 18-1. Bearing Installation, Removal, and Maintenance Equipment (Continued)

Puller, screw, with split nut adapter NORIS 24-6291 Removal of bearings from armature, spindle and
rotor shafts where gripping clearance is limited
(Fig. 3-11).
Puller, wheel bearing cup, internal expansion hook NORIS 25-10831 Removal of wheel bearing cups (Fig. 3-8).
Push-Puller, bolt, Type H 2-7 3/4 in. spread 9Q5120-00-288-7713 Remove and installation of bearings in conjunction
with inside and outside puller attachments
(Fig. 3-6).
Tool, in-place bearing lubrication, vise qripplier NORIS 30113 with 4 adapters Lubrication of airframe bearings in-place
(Fig. 13-7).
Tool, staking, 3/16 to 3/8 in. I.D. Bearing Inspection Inc., Model AF-16 Staking Series K, KA, KS, and D bearings in
fittings, bellcranks, etc.
Tool, staking, pilot NORIS SK 30336 Self-centering staking tool for light staking of
housing-mounted bearings, (Fig. 12-30).
Tool, staking, V-groove NORIS Dwg. T-34214 or Commercial Staking V-groove bearings into chamfered
housings (Fig. 12-38).
Tool, tri-roller swaging Rexnord/Shafer Commercial Staking V-groove bearings into chamfered
housings (Fig. 12-39).
Table 18-2. Bearing Processing Equipment

Adapter, Swinny hypodermic Millipore Filter Corp., XX30 012 00 Prefiltering oil for small precision bearings
(fig. 14-27).
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Addressograph Commercial Production marking Method IA-8 packages.
Baskets, cleaning, mesh 2 x 2 wires per in., Local Manufacture Baskets to hold bearings during all cleaning
8 x 8 wires per in. operations.
Baskets, cleaning, expanded metal, stainless NORIS Dwg. MH0064 Baskets to hold bearings during all cleaning
processes (fig. 5-1).
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Chemical Etch Commercial Markings and/or identification of bearings.
Chuck, magnetic Commercial Holding bearings during abrasive dressing and
repolishing operations.
Demagnetizer 1,000-12,000 amp-turns, Magnaflux Corp., Model S-18-12 Demagnetizing bearings prior to cleaning and
18 x 12 in. openings after rework.
18-3
Demagnetizer, small, intermittent duty O.S. Walker Co., Inc., Model AXM 4738-263 Demagnetizing small bearings.
18-4
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table 18-2. Bearing Processing Equipment (Continued)

Dishes, culture, petri, pyrex covered, Commercial Temporary protection of small precision bearings.
100 mm dia. 20 mm high
Generator, Ultrasonic, 250 watt avg. power output Commercial Use with 3-gallon tank to clean small precision
bearings.
Graphotype Commercial Cutting master plates for marking Method IA-8
packages.
Handling Tools, small bearing Universal Technical Products Inc. Handling tool for miniature and small instrument
bearings.
Lapping Plate Commercial Removing burrs and other projections from
bearing ring faces.
Machine, marking Kingsley Machine, Model AM-1008A Marking and identifying bearing packages
(fig. 11-4).
Reader, aperture card Recordak, Model MKR-1 Miniature filming process to retain necessary
technical data.
Scale, weight, 0-500 grams, shadowgraph Exact Weight Scale Co., Model 4202 Metered lubrication control.
Sealer, rotary, thermostatically controlled to 600 Ralph Chaffer, Model US 5 Star Heat sealing Method IA-8 packages (fig 11-2).
degrees F., dwell time 2-15 seconds
Sealer, thermal, heat sealing machine, 15” jaw Commercial Sealing polyethylene bags for packaging
bearings.
Sealer, thermal impulse, heat sealing equipment, Vertrod Corp., Model 20PCRB Sealing all unsupported plastic bags for
20” jaw packaging bearings (fig. 11-3).
Sticks, formed, lapping Commercial Polishing instrument bearing rings.
Syringe, hypodermic, 2 cc, grad. 1/10 cc Becton Dickinson & Co., B-D Yale Metered oil lubrication of bearings (fig. 14-27).
Table, lubrication NORIS Dwg. T-34335 Controlled lubrication of bearings (fig. 10-13).
Tank, Cleaning, 3-gallon Commercial Cleaning small precision bearings.
Tank, Cleaning, vertical lift, agitated, 50 micron Magnus Chemical Co., Model 3AL-AJA-LIF General purpose cleaning and rinse tanks.
filtration
Tanks, preservation vertical lift, agitated 50 micron Magnus Chemical Co., Model MIJI-LIF General purpose preservation tanks, fingerprint
filtration neutralizer, rinse, preservative (fig. 10-13).
Tweezers, nonmagnetic: Flat face R5120-00-906-0991 Handling small precision bearings.
Ball R5120 00-095-7205 Handling small bearing balls.
Table 18-2. Bearing Processing Equipment (Continued)

Vibratool Buress Vibracrafters Marking bearing ring faces.
Vibro-Tumbling Mills: SWECO, Incorporated For the vibro-tumbling process to clean or burnish
1.2 cubic feet FM-1.2C bearings (fig. 5-2).
3 cubic feet FM-3-C
10 cubic feet FM-10-C
20 cubic feet FM-20HA
Table 18-3. Bearing Inspection and Gaging Equipment

Amplifier, electronic, 4 range: 500-1, 1000-1, Sheffield Corp., Accutron For use with radial and axial play gages.
5000-1, 10000-1
Balls, master Commercial Master balls for calibration of equipment for ball
cleaning.
Blocks, gage, Grades 0.5, 1 and 2 Commercial GGG-G-15 Calibration and set-up of gages (figure 8-1).
Center, bench, 21-inch capacity Brunswick Surfcenter Centering work pieces for accurate gaging.
Comparator, electronic Sheffield Corp., P/N 1020-YG-8 For use in ball gaging and other external mea-
surements.
Comparator, optical Jones & Lamson Model FC-14 or equal For checking and measuring difficult to reach
bearing dimensions.
Comparator, visual Sheffield Corp., Model 500 Gage For measuring external dimensions.
Eddy Current Equipment Nortec NDT-2 or equal For sorting AISI 440C and AISI 52100 steels.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Fluorescent Penetrant Equipment Magnaflux Corp. For nondestructive testing of retainers and other
non-ferrous metals.
Gage, axial play, instrument bearing Bendix Corp., Model E60548127 For measuring axial play of instrument bearings.
Gage, axial play, spherical bearing Bendix Corp., Model E60107281 For measuring axial play of spherical metal or
self-lubricated bearings.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Gage, ball measuring fixture Bendix Corp. For measuring and matching balls for use in
sets.
Gage, comparator, dual input Bendix Corp. For checking widths and width variations.
Gage, flushness, range 2” to 17” O.D. Bendix Corp. Model 70500371 For measuring stick-in, stick-out, and flushness
of duplex and stack bearings (figure 8-19).
18-5
Gage, I.D., range 1/2 to 9 inch Sheffield Corp., basic design, BD-100-82-1 For measuring bearing I.D., digital display.
18-6
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table 18-3. Bearing Inspection and Gaging Equipment (Continued)

Gage, I.D. - O.D. up to 15 in. ± 0.000050 in. Giddings & Lewis Model 61000162 For absolute measurement of I.D. and O.D.
accuracy of small and large bearings.
Gage, I.D. - O.D., up to 1-1/8 in. O.D. with 2 Sheffield Corp., P/N 253-CS-20118 For measuring simultaneously I.D. and O.D.
column Precisionaire of small bearings.
Gage, I.D. - O.D. up to 15 in. ± 0.000150 in. Bendix Corp. Cordax Model 18138-BG-6 For absolute measurement of I.D. and O.D.
accuracy of large bearings.
Gage, radial play, miniature bearings Dorsey Gage Co., Model 493-88-3-01 For measuring radial clearance of miniature
and instrument bearings.
Gage, radial play, spherical bearing Bendix Corp. Model DA74 For measuring radial clearance of spherical
metal and self-lubricating bearings.
Gage, radial play, split inner ring SDT 32254 Measure radial play of split inner ring bearings.
(figure 8-16).
Gage, roller measuring fixture Bendix Corp. For measuring and matching rollers for use in
sets (figure 8-33).
Gage, roundness concentricity, up to 18” O.D. Federal Products Model ATE/18002 For checking roundness, concentricity of large
(EAS-1286 and PR-102) bearings.
Gaussmeter, self-calibrated Bell Inc., Model 610, T-6102 transverse probe Measure level of residual magnetism.
Head, gage Cleveland Instrument Co., Model T-210 For use with Indiron gage.
Illuminator, Nicholas Bausch & Lomb, Cat. No. 31-33-53 Lighting specimen for microscopic examination
(figure 7-9).
Light Wave Equipment, 3-inch Quartz Flat, Acme Scientific Co., Model 601A Measure optical flatness of lapped surfaces
.000001” tolerance (figure 8-42).
Loop, binocular, 5 X magnification Edroy Products Co., Model 5 Bearing inspection with low power magnification
(figure 7-3).
Magnetic Particle Equipment Magnaflux Corp. For nondestructive testing of ferrous materials
for cracks.
Magnifying Equipment, low power Edna lite work viewer 2-1/2 X mag. Visual Inspection of bearings with low power
magnification (figure 7-4).
Microscope, Stereozoom, 7 X to 30 X with Bausch & Lomb, Model SVB-73. Microscopic examination of large bearings.
standard lens rotating horizontal arm
Microscope, Stereozoom, 7 X to 30 X with Bausch & Lomb, Model BVB-73-NSN Microscopic examination of small bearings and
standard lens and standard base 6650-973-00-6945. grease samples (figure 7-9).
Plate, granite surface with built-in work center, Taft Peirce, Dwg No. 7407 Used in precision gaging of various parts
24 x 36 x 6 inch swing (figure 8-38).
Table 18-3. Bearing Inspection and Gaging Equipment (Continued)

Proficorder, linear Bendix Corp., Model RAC For use in checking the profile and surface
condition of flat surfaces.
Profilometer, Pilotor, AA roughness Bendix Corp. Measure surface roughness of linear profiles.
measurement
Reference Specimen, 125 and 20 microinches Cleveland Instrument Co., Model BK-2600 For calibrating roughness meter.
Scribers, radius, 0.010, 0.020, 0.030, 0.040, Local manufacture For inspecting bearing defects (figure 7-5).
0.060 inch radii ± 0.002”
Surface Texture Measuring Instrument Taylor-Hobson, Form Talysurf For measuring surface texture; form error,
radius and dimensions of bearings (figure 8-31).
Tester, hardness (standard hardness) Wilson Mechanical Instrument Co., Model 4JR Check material hardness of rings.
Tester, torque MPB Model RT2C For measuring running torque of precision
bearings (figure 14-23).
Tester, torque, automatic MPB Model ST2 For measuring starting torque of instrument
precision bearings (figure 14-24).
Tester, vibration Bardon Corp., Smoothrator For determining smooth running quality of small
precision bearings (figure 14-25).
Vibration Analyzers Bendix Corp., Industrial Metrology-Anderometer For checking the smoothness or vibration
characteristics of ball bearings.
Profile Measuring Machine Pipe Machinery Contour Reader Model CR-150 For checking internal and external contours
(figure 8-28).
Table 18-4. Clean Room Equipment
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Can, waste, stainless steel, 18 qt. capacity Commercial For disposal of waste materials in clean room.
Cap, Men’s Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 10,000 and 100,000 clean
rooms (figure 15-3).
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Cap, Women’s dacron polyester fiber Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 10,000 and 100,000 clean
Cloth, Cleanroom, Wiping San Diego Wiping Materials P/N 1003 Wiping or minor cleaning of equipment, parts
in cleanroom.
Cover, shoe, dacron, plastic sole Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 100 clean rooms (figure 15-4).
18-7
Coveralls, dacron polyester fiber Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 100 clean rooms (figure 15-4).
18-8
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table 18-4. Clean Room Equipment (Continued)

Dispenser, solvent, filtering Millipore Filter Corp., XX 66 025 00 Provide ultraclean solvents for rinsing
NSN 9N6640-00-688-7882 (figure 15-5).
Filters: Millipore Filter Corp.,
.45 micron HAWP 012 00 Swinney filter holder.
.45 micron HAWP 047 00 Filtering solvents and oils.
1.2 micron HAWP 047 00 Filtering solvents.
Forceps, stainless steel Millipore Filter Corp., XX 62 000 06 For use in visual particle count procedure for
clean room control.
Gloves, nylon plastic palm fingers Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 100 clean rooms (figure 15-4).
Gloves, stretch, nylon Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 10,000 and 100,000 clean
rooms.
Grease system, closed Alemite system is typical A closed lubrication system using 35 lb.
containers (figure 10-3).
Holder, filter, aerosol open type Millipore Filter Corp., For use in visual particle count procedure for
XX 50 047 10 clean room control.
Filter, clean room monitoring XX 50 047 40 Sampling air in clean room and for clean room
garment monitoring.
Filter, stainless steel XX 20 047 20 Vacuum filtering of liquids for analysis.
Hood, head cover, white, taffeta dacron Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 100 clean rooms (figure 15-4).
Orifice, limiting Millipore Filter Corp., For use in visual particle count procedure for
XX 50 000 00 clean room control.
Oven, thermostatically controlled 200 degrees Commercial For temporary storage of bearings between
C. Max. operations (figure 7-2).
Particle Counter Commercial For monitoring the airborne contamination level
of clean rooms.
Pump, vacuum pressure Millipore Filter Corp., XX 60 000 00 For use in visual particle count procedure for
clean room control. (figure 15-5).
Smock, 3/4 length, dacron polyester fiber Angelica Uniforms Co. For use in Class 10,000 and 100,000 clean
Smock, 3/4 length, nonwoven, Tyvek. 100 Commercial For use in Class 100,000.
percent spun-bonded polyolefin
Wipers, foam, packaged in clean anti-static Commercial Wiping or minor cleaning of precision surfaces
poly bags in clean room.
Workspace, clean, laminar flow Commercial Class 100 clean environment.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
APPENDIX A
GLOSSARY OF BEARING TERMINOLOGY
A-1. FOREWORD. material, certain wavelengths are absorbed. The

amount of absorption can be determined by analysis
A-2. GENERAL. There are many words, terms, of the transmitted spectra. This technique is used
and phrases that are generally associated with the in the spectral analysis of lubricants.
processing, handling and inspection of all types of
rolling and plain bearings. Many of these words and ACCURACY: The closeness of a measurement to
phrases are “new and unusual” to persons not having the true value of the part being measured. Traceable
a bearing related background. Familiarization with to an ultimate standard located at the National
these words and terms will be an important part Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly
of any bearing shop worker training program. It is National Bureau of Standards). Compare to precision.
the purpose of this appendix to define these terms
in layman’s language. The terms and words are ACTIVE SURFACES: The contact areas on the
defined as they specifically apply to bearings and bearing rings and rolling elements that are generated
not necessarily in the general sense. as the bearing is rotated.
A-3. Refer to the end of Appendix A for applicable ADAPTER MOUNTING (Figure A-1): See Lock Nut.
figures referred to in this appendix that illustrate
some of the words and terms. ADAPTER RING (Figure A-1): See Aligning Ring.
A-4. WORDS AND PHRASES USED IN BEARING ADAPTER WASHER (Figure A-1): See Lock Washer.
PROCESSING AND HANDLING.
ADAPTER SLEEVE, TAPERED (Figure A-1).
AA - FINISH: Arithmetic Average. A numerical value
of the surface finish obtained by measuring vertical
displacements from the mean line of the profile of ADDITIVE: A chemical compound added in small
an irregular surface. The formula is: quantities to lubricant products to obtain certain
AA= S y(x)/L lubricating properties. Examples: rust and oxidation
where: inhibitors, detergents, viscosity index improvers, etc.
L = number of displacements greater
than the cut-off ABMA: American Bearing Manufacturers Associ-
y(x) = the individual displacement, y, at ation.
location x.
AIR GAGE: A gage that amplifies variations in the
ABEC: Annular Bearing Engineering Committee size of a part being measured by using air. When
(Committee of the American Bearing Manufacturers a part is placed on an air gage the back pressure
Association) that develops industry standards for ball or flow of the escaping air is changed from what
bearings. it was when the gage was set-up with a master.
ABEC 1, ABEC 3, ABEC 5, ABEC 7, ABEC 9: AIRFRAME BEARINGS: A bearing designed for use
Designations or classes indicating degrees of ball in the general structure, control systems and flight
bearing precision. control surfaces of an aircraft.
ABSOLUTE FILTERS: Filters capable of filtering out AISI NUMBERS: American Iron & Steel Institute
particles of a given size with near 100 percent numerical designations for bearing materials.
efficiency (see HEPA filters).
ALIGNING RING (Figure A-2): A ring with a
ABSORPTION SPECTRA: The wavelengths or spherical inside surface used as a secondary ring
frequencies of radiation which have been filtered on the spherical external surface of an outer ring.
out by passing through a specific material. Because
of the molecular structure and activity of the filtering ALIGNING SEAT RADIUS (Figure A-3).
A-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ALIGNING SEAT RADIUS CENTER (Figure A-3). ASSEMBLED BEARING WIDTH (Figure A-5).
ALIGNING SEAT WASHER (Figure A-3). ATOMIZE: To reduce to very small particles or to
a fine spray.
ALIGNING SEAT WASHER BORE (Figure A-3).
AVERAGE LIFE - EXPECTED LIFE - MEAN LIFE:
ALIGNING SEAT WASHER OUTSIDE DIAMETER These terms refer to the number of hours that a
(Figure A-3). bearing will operate under a set of fixed operating
conditions (load, speed, temperature, lubricant). Life
ALIGNING WASHER (Figure A-3). is obtained by summing up the individual bearing
lives of a group of bearings and dividing this sum
by the number of bearings. The percent of failure
ALLOY STEEL: Steel that contains significant at the Mean Life is usually greater than 50 percent.
quantities of alloying elements other than carbon
to give certain mechanical and/or physical properties.
Examples: Chromium, nickel and vanadium. AXIAL CLEARANCE (END PLAY): The total internal
axial movement of a bearing parallel to the bearing
axis. One ring is clamped to prevent axial movement.
AMPLITUDE: The magnitude or volume of a given Commonly referred to as bearing end play.
value such as noise, sound, voltage, etc.
AXIAL COMPLIANCE: Axial yield rate of preloaded
AMS NUMBERS: Aeronautical Materials Specifica- gyro rotor bearing. Mathematically, the yield rate
tions - numerical designations for various materials is equal to Axial Yield divided by Axial Load where
and processes. axial yield is expressed in microinches and axial
load in pounds.
ANAEROBIC: A material that does not require
oxygen to initiate a chemical reaction.
AXIAL LOAD (THRUST): Load/force/pressure
applied to the bearing ring parallel to the bearing
ANGLE OF CONTACT: See Contact Angle. axis.
ANGULAR-CONTACT BEARING (Figure A-4): A AXIAL MOTION: Movement that is parallel to the
type of ball bearing whose internal clearances and bearing axis.
ball raceway locations are such as to result in an
operating angle of contact greater than 0 degrees
AXIS OF ROTATION: A straight line about which
but less than 90 degrees.
the bearing rotates.
ANGULARITY: The state of being at an angle to
another surface/plane. A U D I O F R E Q U E N C Y: An y f r e q u e n c y t h a t i s
between 15 and 20,000 cycles per second. This
is considered the audible range.
ANNULAR BALL BEARING: A rolling bearing
primarily designed to support a radial load that is
perpendicular (90 degrees) to the shaft axis. AUSTENITE: A phase form of steel with a face-cen-
tered crystalline microstructure. Found in most
bearing steels.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute.
B-10 LIFE: See L-10 Life.
ANTIFRICTION BEARING: A bearing using rolling
elements such as balls, rollers, or needles to reduce
friction levels. BACK SIDE OR FACE (Figure A-6): The side of
a ball bearing ring on the highest side of the ring
raceway. It is the thickest side.
AQL: Acceptable Quality Level is a value specified
for a type or group of defects characteristic of an
item or product. The specified AQL value (example BACK-TO-BACK ASSEMBLY (Figure A-6): A duplex
AQL of 0.4) is referred to in the appropriate sampling pair of matched ball bearings where the outer ring
plan table of MIL-STD-105. The number of defects backs (thick side) are placed intimate contact.
for each AQL is then obtained that will determine
whether to accept or reject the bearing lot. BALL (Figure A-7): A spherical rolling element
A-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
BALL BEARING (Figure A-7): A rolling bearing BLEEDING: The tendency of an oil to separate from
using balls as rolling elements. a thickener in a grease.
BALL COMPLEMENT: Number of balls used/ BORE DIAMETER (Figure A-8): Inside diameter of
installed in a ball bearing. the inner ring.
BALL CONTACT: Point of tangency or contact BORE, INNER RING (Figure A-7): Surface area of
between the ring raceway and the ball. inner ring bore diameter.
BALL DIAMETER (Figure A-8): The largest BORE OUTER RING (Figure A-8): Inner diameter
dimension across the center of the ball. surface of the inner ring land area.
BALL GRADE: A number designating a specific BORE, TAPERED (Figure A-12): Inside diameter of
combination of dimensional, form and surface the inner ring is tapered.
roughness tolerance for balls.
BOUNDARY DIMENSIONS: The dimensions for the
BALL RACEWAY (Figure A-7): Grooves that are bearing bore, outer diameter, width and corner radii.
ground into the ring surfaces to guide the circular
movement of the balls. BRINELLS, MOUNTING: Indentations at intervals
on the raceway shoulder coincident with ball spacing.
BAND (Figure A-47): Used to keep the two separate The depth will depend on the magnitude of the static
parts of the bearing together as a unit assembly. loads. This type of damage is typically caused when
Common to ball and roller thrust bearings. installing a bearing by applying the load through
the unmounted ring.
BASIC DYNAMIC LOAD RATING: The constant
radial load (thrust load for thrust bearings) which a BRINELLS, RADIAL: Indentations at intervals on
group of apparently identical bearings with stationary the center of the raceway coincident with ball
outer rings can theoretically endure for a rating life spacing. This type of damage is caused by shock
of one million revolutions of the inner ring. loads in the radial direction while the bearing is
stationary.
BEARING AXIS: The center line of the bearing
about which the outer ring, inner ring, retainer and BRINELLS, SHIPPING (VIBRATION DAMAGE):
rolling elements rotate. Indentations at intervals on the raceway coincident
with ball spacing, usually accompanied by brownish
oxide. Caused by high cycle, low amplitude vibration
BEARING SEAT (Figure A-29): The shaft or housing in conjunction with corrosion. Similar to False
mounting surface on which the bearing is seated. Brinelling.
BEARING SERIES: Graduated dimensions of a BUNA N: A synthetic rubber made by polymerization
standard size group of bearings. of acrylonitrite with butadiene.
BEARING STACK: A matched, multiple set of more BURNISH: A luster or polish on a bearing surface
than two bearings. by friction or rubbing contact.
BEARING THRUST: Concentric axial loading along CAGE: Commercial and Government Entity. An
the bearing axis. acronym for the numeric code used to identify the
manufacturer of a product.
BELLMOUTH: A geometric condition that exists
when the inner ring bore is larger at both ends than CAGE (RETAINER, SEPARATOR) (Figures A-5,
at the middle. A-7): A bearing component that partly surrounds the
rolling elements and rotates with them. Its primary
BINDER: A material that is used to produce or purpose is to evenly space the rolling elements.
promote cohesion of loosely assembled substances.
CAGE POCKET: An opening in the cage (retainer)
BLACK LIGHT: See Ultraviolet Light. to accommodate the rolling element.
A-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CAGE TAB/TANG: A cantilevered bar projecting CENTISTOKE: The unit of kinematic viscosity (0.01
from the annular body of a rolling bearing retainer. stoke) of a lubricating oil.
CAGELESS: Bearing without a cage/separator/ CENTRIFUGAL FORCE: A force that tends to move
retainer. an object outward from a center of rotation (bearing
axis).
CALIBRATION: Comparison of an instrument or
measuring device to a standard which has a known CERMET: An alloy of a heat-resistant ceramic
accuracy traceable to national standards. compound (such as titanium carbide) and a metal
(such as nickel).
CAM FOLLOWER NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING
(Figure A-13). See Track Roller.
CHAMFER (Figure A-17): The beveled edge or
surface of a ring joining the bore or outer diameter
CANT: The tilt, incline, or slant of an object or
with one of the faces of the ring.
surface.
CAPILLARY: Being held by surface tension or a CHANNELING: A characteristic of greases to

tube of very small bore. maintain a groove or channel in the grease mass
for movement of the rolling elements.
CARBIDE: A microscopic crystalline formation of
metal and carbon. CIRCUMFERENTIAL: Referring to the perimeter of
a circle, cylinder, or sphere.
CARBURIZING: See Case Harden.
CLASS 100; 10,000; 100,000: Classes of environ-
CASE: See (1) Band or (2) Case Harden. mentally controlled clean rooms classified in
Standard FED-STD-209.
CASE HARDEN: To harden the bearing surface so
that it is considerably harder than the interior CLEAN ROOM: An environmentally controlled room
(Carburizing, Nitriding);. Carbon is added to the where dust, temperature, humidity, and air pressure
bearing surface to a predetermined depth to provide are controlled within specified limits.
the hardness.
CLEARANCE, AXIAL: See Axial Clearance.
CAVITATION: The formation of a partial vacuum in
a liquid by the use of high frequency sound waves.
Ultrasonic cleaning involves cavitation of the CLEARANCE, RADIAL: See Radial Clearance.
cleaning solutions.
CLOSE WOUND SEPARATOR: A helical coil
CENTER OF GRAVITY: See Center of Mass. expansion spring used as a bearing separator.
CENTER OF MASS: The point within a body or CLOSURE: See Shield or Seal.
collection of connected bodies that acts as the focal
point of all external forces and the origin of all
COAXIAL: Having the same or coincident axes.
internal reactions.
Mounted on concentric shafts.
CENTER RIB (Figure A-54): A narrow ridge that
is parallel to the direction of rolling projecting from COEFFICIENT OF THERMAL EXPANSION: The
a raceway surface to separate and guide two parallel rate of expansion of a material with changes in
sets of rollers. temperature.
CENTER WASHER, LARGE OUTSIDE DIAMETER COGNIZANT FIELD ACTIVITY (CFA): The Service
(Figure A-40). designated activity that has been assigned mainte-
nance or technical responsibility for, and delegated
CENTER WASHER, SMALL BORE (Figure A-63). authority to perform, aircraft maintenance engineering
functions.
CENTIMETER: A metric unit of linear distance equal
to 0.01 meters. One inch equals 2.54 centimeters. COHESION: Act or state of sticking together tightly.
A-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
COINCIDENT: Having the same position or direction. CONE BACKFACE RIB (Figure A-14): The rib on
a tapered roller bearing cone for retaining the roller
COLD-WORK: A metallurgical term that describes assembly and supporting roller end thrust.
a permanent strain in metal produced by an external
force that is applied without heat (Example: Bending CONE BORE (Figure A-14): The inner diameter of
metal). the cone.
COLLAR, LOCATING, ROLLER THRUST BEARING CONE LENGTH (Figure A-14): The width of the
(Figure A-34). cone.
CONE RADIUS (Figure A-14): Corner radii of the

COMBINED LOAD: Combination of radial and axial
forces acting on a bearing. inner and outer ring of a tapered roller bearing.
CONE SPACER (Figure A-15): Spacer between the

COMPATIBLE: Two greases that can be blended inner rings of a tapered roller bearing.
into a homogeneous mixture without physical
separation or chemical reaction. CONGEAL: Change from the liquid phase to the
solid state phase.
COMPLIANCE RATIO: Ratio of axial and radial yield
rates. A pair of gyro rotor bearings, or a complete CONRAD BALL BEARING (Figure A-8): Describes
gyro rotor configuration is isoelastic when the a deep groove, nonloading, slot ball bearing
compliance ratio is unity (1:1) and yields equally designed by Mr. Frank Conrad.
in all directions.
CONSISTENCY: The degree to which a semisolid
COMPLIANCE TORQUE: Disturbing torques in material such as grease resists deformation. Some-
gyros resulting from acceleration loads acting on times used to denote viscosity of liquids.
a non-isoelastic gyro configuration. Precession, or
drift, is, in part, related to the magnitude of the CONTACT ANGLE (Figure A-4): The angle between
disturbing torque. a plane perpendicular to the bearing axis and a
line drawn between points of tangency of the balls
COMPONENTS: The separate parts or subassem- to inner and outer ring raceways.
blies which, when joined together, perform a specific
function. CONTACT POINT OR LINE: The point (line) of
contact between a ball (roller) and a raceway.
CONCAVE: Having a geometric shape or profile that
curves inward. CONTACT SEAL (Figure A-16): A seal that makes
rubbing contact with the inner ring land surface.
CONCAVE ROLLER: The outside surface of the
roller curves inward. CONVERGING ANGLE BALL BEARING (Figure
A-9): A double row ball bearing where the vertex
of the contact angles is inside the bearing.
CONCENTRICITY: The quality or state of having
a common center. Ex: Two circles/diameters are
concentric. CONVEX: A surface that is curved or bulged
outward in the center (barrel shaped).
CONCENTRICITY (RADIAL RUNOUT): Circular CONVEX ROLLER: Outside diameter of the roller
surfaces that have a common center. Example: curves outward.
Uniform thickness between the bore and the ball
groove of an inner ring.
CORNER (Figure A-17): The form at the junction
of the outer ring outside diameter and ring faces,
CONDENSE: Change a gas into a liquid. and the inner ring bore and ring faces.
CONE (Figure A-14): The inner ring of a tapered CORNER HEIGHT (Figure A-17).
roller bearing.
CORNER, INNER RING (Figure A-8).
CONE BACKFACE (Figure A-14): The face of the
thick part of the inner ring of a tapered roller bearing. CORNER, OUTER RING (Figure A-8).
A-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
CORNER WIDTH (Figure A-17). CRYOGENICS: A branch of physics that deals with
the production and effects of very low temperatures.
COSINE: A trigonometric term described by the
length of the side adjacent to the angle divided by CUP (Figure A-14): The outer ring of a tapered roller
the hypotenuse (long side). bearing.
COUNTERBORED BALL BEARING (Figure A-4): CUP BACKFACE (Figure A-14).

A ball bearing with one side of the raceway removed
from either or both rings to allow assembly of a CUP FLANGE (Figure A-18).
maximum complement of balls.
CUP LENGTH (Figure A-14 and A-19).
COVER: See Band.
CUP OUTSIDE DIAMETER (Figure A-14).
CORROSION: A process which destroys the metal
by chemical or electrochemical action and converts CUP RADIUS (Figure A-14).
it to an oxide, hydrocide, or sulfate compound.
(Example: iron rust). CURRENT DENSITY: The electrical current per unit
area of cross section, perpendicular to the electric
current.
CRACK: A break, fracture, fissure, crevice or
separation in the metal of the bearing component.
CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING (Figure A-20):
A bearing with rolling elements that are cylindrically
CRITICAL DEFECT: A defect that judgement and shaped. The axes of the rollers are parallel to the
experience indicate is likely to result in hazardous bearing axis.
or unsafe conditions for individuals using, maintaining,
or depending upon the product; or a defect that CYLINDRICAL ROLLERS (Figure A-20): Applies to
judgement and experience indicate is likely to prevent short cylindrically shaped rollers whose length is
performance of the tactical mission of a major end the same as their diameter (also called square
item such as an aircraft, missile, or space vehicle. rollers).
CRITICAL SPEED: A speed at which the rotating DECIBEL: A unit of measurement of relative noise
assembly becomes dynamically unstable. The levels.
revolutions per second equal the frequency of its
natural vibration. DEEP GROOVE BALL BEARING: A radial ball
bearing with uninterrupted ball grooves of a circular
CROSS CORNER WIDTH: The distance from one cross section.
face of the inner ring to the opposite face of the
outer ring with all internal axial clearance removed. DEFECT (DISCREPANCY): Any deviation of a
bearing component from specified drawing and/or
CROSSED ROLLER BEARING: An angular-contact engineering requirements.
rolling bearing with one row of rollers positioned
crosswise in relation to adjacent rollers such that DEFLECTION: Deviation under stress or load from
an axial load in one direction is supported by half a normal at rest position.
the roller set (every second roller). Same is true
of loading in the opposite direction. DEIONIZE: To remove the atoms or groups of atoms
that conduct an electric charge from a gas or liquid.
CROWNED RACEWAY: A cylindrical raceway
having a continuous slightly convex curvature in a DELAMINATION: Separation of a material into
plane perpendicular to the direction of rolling. Pur- separate layers (Example: phenolic retainers).
pose is to reduce stress concentrations at roller
ends. DENSITY: The mass per unit volume of a material
(Example: grams per cubic centimeter.)
CROWNED ROLLER: A roller having a very large
radius profile ground on both sides of a straight DEW POINT: Temperature at which condensation
cylindrical center section to provide a modified line of moisture would occur if the existing atmosphere
contact with the raceways. were cooled without change in vapor pressure.
A-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
DIAL INDICATOR: A measuring device that amplifies DIMENSIONAL STABILITY: The degree of stability
the movement of the spindle by mechanical means, that steel may have with respect to growth or
and indicates this movement as a measurement on expansion is a function of the amount of retained
a calibrated dial. austenite (see Austenite). Heat treating processes
increase dimensional stability.
DIAMETER: The largest dimension of a circle or
sphere, measured by passing a straight line from DIRECTIONAL GYRO: A mechanical compass
one outer edge through the center of the object which, together with other instruments in an automatic
and to the opposing outer edge. pilot, tends to keep its carrier headed in a preselected
direction. It is a gyroscopic instrument which gives
DIAMETER, BALL (Figure A-8): The largest dimen- azimuth readings independent of the Earth’s magnetic
sion of a ball across the ball center. influence.
DIAMETER, BALL CIRCLE: See Pitch Circle Diam-
eter, Rolling Elements. DISC: Defense Industrial Supply Center.
DIAMETER, BORE (Figure A-8): See Bore. DISCREPANCY: See Defect.
DIAMETER, INNER RING RACEWAY (Figure A-21): DIVERGING ANGLE BALL BEARING (Figure A-10):
The diameter of the raceway or bail groove of an A double row ball bearing where the vertex of the
inner ring. contact angles are outside the bearing.
DIAMETER, OUTER RING RACEWAY (Figure

DN VALUE: Bearing inner ring bore diameter in
A-21): The diameter of the raceway or ball groove
millimeters multiplied by the speed of rotation in
of an outer ring.
revolutions per minute (rpm).
DIAMETER, OUTSIDE (Figure A-8 and A-22): See
Diameter. DOUBLE CONE (Figure A-23): The inner ring of
a tapered roller bearing with two raceways.
DIAMETER, PITCH CIRCLE, ROLLING ELE-
MENTS: See Pitch Circle Diameter, Rolling Ele- DOUBLE CUP (Figure A-19): The outer ring of a
ments. tapered roller bearing with two raceways.
DIAMETRAL CAGE CLEARANCE: The clearance DOUBLE DIRECTION THRUST BEARING: A thrust
between the retainer outer diameter and the land bearing that supports axial loads in both directions.
riding surface outer ring, and the inner diameter
of the retainer and the inner land riding surface of
the inner ring. DOUBLE ROW BALL OR ROLLER BEARING
(Figures A-9, A-15, A-38): A bearing with two
DIAMETRAL CLEARANCE: See Clearance, Radial. raceways and two sets of rolling elements.
DIESTER FLUIDS: Synthetic organic lubricating DOUBLE ROW BEARING WITH VERTEX OF CON-
compounds that are derived from the reaction of TACT ANGLE INSIDE OF BEARINGS (Figure A-9):
a dibasic acid and an alcohol. These fluids are The intersection of the two contact angles converge
characterized by high viscosity index, high thermal inside the bearing.
stability, low volatility and good lubricity.
DOUBLE ROW BEARING VERTEX OF CONTACT
DIFFERENTIAL SYNCHRO: A synchro that posi- ANGLE OUTSIDE OF BEARING (Figure A-10):
tions the controlled shaft of a servomechanism to The intersection of the two contact angles converge
a position which is the sum or difference of two outside the bearing.
shaft angles. Similar in appearance and construction
to an ordinary synchro except the rotor has a special
distributed winding. DOUBLE SEALED BEARING: Seals on both sides
of the bearing.
DIGITAL: Relating to the calculation by the use of
numerical methods (provides a readout in numerical DOUBLE SHIELDED BEARING (Figure A-25):
digits). Shields on both sides of the bearing.
A-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
DRAPE: To cover as with plastic film by a vacuum The result is nonuniform thickness between the inner
forming process. surface and outer surface.
DRAW: To form metal by extrusion. EDDY CURRENT: An electrical current that is in-
duced by an alternating magnetic field.
DRAWN CUP: An outer ring made of sheet metal
drawn to shape. ELASTIC: Property of a material. When deformed
the material will immediately return to its original
size, shape, or position.
DRAWN CUP NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING: A
needle bearing with a thin pressed steel outer ring
ELASTIC MODULUS: The ratio of the unit stress
(drawn cup) which may have one dose of end or
to the unit deformation of a material. E=s/e.
both ends open.
ELECTROLYTE: A nonmetallic substance that,
DROPPING POINT: The temperature at which a when dissolved in a solvent, will ionize and thus
grease passes from a semi-solid to a liquid state. conduct electricity.
DUCTILITY: Metallurgical property of a material to ELECTROMAGNETIC: Pertaining to magnetism de-

be formed, molded, drawn, or worked in a manufac- veloped by an electrical current.
turing process.
ELECTRONIC GAGE: A type of measuring device
DUNNAGE: Cushioning or padding used in a ship- in which the movement of a stylus/spindle produces
ping container to protect fragile items from damage. an electrical signal proportional to the distance
moved. The signal is amplified and indicated on a
DUPLEX BEARING: Two single-row, angular-con- meter graduated in units of measure.
tact bearings dimensionally selected to be a matched
pair or set. END PLAY: See Axial Clearance.
DUPLEX BEARING, BACK-TO-BACK (Figure END RINGS: See End Washer.

A-6): See Back-to-Back.
END SHAKE: See Axial Clearance.
DUPLEX BEARING, FACE-TO-FACE (Figure A-26):
A duplex pair of matched ball bearings with the END WASHER, NEEDLE BEARING (Figure A-24).
narrow faces of the outer rings in intimate contact.
E.P. (EXTREME PRESSURE) LUBRICANTS: Lubri-
DUPLEX BEARING, TANDEM (Figure A-27): A cants containing chemically active materials such
duplex pair of ball bearings mounted so as to divide as sulphur, chlorine, or phosphorous, which react
the thrust load in one direction. The thick face of with the surface. This permits contacting surfaces
the outer ring of one bearing is in contact with the to carry greater loads, without excessive wear or
narrow face of the next bearing. damage.
EPOXY RESIN: A thermosetting polymeric material

DWELL TIME: The elapse of time during which a
that is used as an adhesive.
material is subjected to a particular operation.
EQUIDISTANT: Of equal distance.
DYNAMIC BALANCE: A condition in a rotating body
where the axis of the mass and the geometric axis
EQUIVALENT RADIAL LOAD: The theoretical pure
of the part are coincident (the same).
radial load which if applied to a rotating ball or roller
bearing would give the same life as a bearing will
DYNAMIC LOAD: A load acting on a bearing when attain under actual conditions of load and rotation.
the rings are rotating in relation to each other.
EQUIVALENT THRUST LOAD: The theoretical pure
ECCENTRICITY (Radial Runout): A condition that thrust load which if applied to rotating thrust bearing
occurs when the center of one circular surface is would give the same life as a bearing will attain
not coincident with the center of another surface. under actual conditions of load and rotation.
A-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ESTABLISHED LINE BEARING: A bearing where FATIGUE LIFE: The normal life of a rolling bearing.
external or boundary dimensions are not in agree- It is determined by conducting tests that involve
ment with the ABMA’s “Basic Plans for Boundary stressing the rolling elements and raceways, under
Dimensions” but is produced by one or more certain load and speed conditions until spalling
manufacturers as a more or less complete series. occurs. Computer simulated modelling is also used
to calculate bearing life.
ETCHING: A permanent marking procedure other
than stamping. FELT SEAL, DOUBLE: A felt seal is installed on
both sides of the bearing.
EXPONENTIAL: A mathematical expression, result,
or factor that Is affected by another factor in a greater FELT SEAL, SINGLE (Figure A-16): A felt seal is
or lesser manner than a straight 1:1 proportion is installed on one side of the bearing.
said to be exponentially affected.
FIBER LINING: A self-lubricating liner system that
EXTENDED INNER RING: An inner ring extending is used to reduce friction between two sliding
on one or both sides. surfaces.
EXTERNAL SELF-ALIGNING (Figure A-2): A bear- FIFO: First-In-First-Out. A Supply stock issue term.
ing that has a spherical outside diameter with a
spherical bore of aligning ring. FILLET RADIUS: The corner dimension of a shaft
or housing which the bearing corner must clear.
EXTERNAL SNAP RING (Figure A-32): A locating
snap ring on the outside diameter of the outer ring. FILLET, SHAFT AND HOUSING (Figure A-29): The
corner at the junction of housing or shaft shoulder
and bearing seat.
EXTERNAL SNAP RING GROOVE (Figure A-22):
A groove ground in the outer diameter of the outer
ring to hold a locating snap ring. FILLING NOTCH: See Filling Slot.
FILLING SLOT (Figure A-7): An opening in the

EXTRA-SMALL BALL BEARING: Ball bearing with
raceway shoulder to permit insertion of balls into
an inner ring bore diameter under 10 mm.
the raceway. This allows a maximum complement
of balls for increased load carrying capacity.
FACE, INNER RING (see Side): The side surfaces
of the inner ring. FINISH LAY: The direction of the tool or abrasive
marks on a machined, ground or honed surface.
FACE, OUTER RING (see Side): The side surfaces
of the outer ring. FIT: Housing/shaft-to-bearing mounting fitup.
FACE, OUTER RING, DUPLEX BEARING (Figure FIXED BEARING: Bearing is clamped to prevent
A-26): Countersunk side of outer ring. axial movement.
FACE-TO-FACE DUPLEX BALL BEARING (Figure FLAKING: A metallurgical condition of advanced

A-26): A duplexed pair of matched ball bearings with fatigue failure where small pieces of metal are
the narrow faces of the outer rings placed in contact loosened under cyclic loads from the base material.
with each other.
FLANGE BACKFACE (Figure A-18).
FACE, THRUST (Figure A-4): The bearing ring face
that is in a direction to carry the load when properly FLANGE WIDTH (Figure A-18).
installed.
FLANGED BEARING (Figures A-18 and A-30): A
FACE, THRUST WASHER (Figure A-28): The exter- radial rolling bearing with an extended portion on
nal side surfaces of a thrust ball bearing. the outer diameter of the outer ring.
FATIGUE: The tendency of a material to crack/break FLANGED CUP, EXTERNAL (Figure A-18): External
under repeated cyclic loading. flange on tapered roller bearing outer ring.
A-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
FLANGED INNER RING, INTERNAL (Figure A-22). FULL-TYPE BEARING: A bearing that contains the
largest number of rolling elements that can be
FLANGED OUTER RING, EXTERNAL: See introduced without the use of a retainer.
Flanged Bearing.
FUNCTIONAL SURFACES: Same as Active Sur-
FLANGED OUTER RING, INTERNAL (Figure A-22): faces.
See Rib.
FUSION: A liquid or plastic state that is induced
FLAT RACEWAY, THRUST BEARING (Figure A-31). by the application of heat and/or pressure. A change
from the solid to the liquid state.
FLAT WASHER, THRUST BEARING (Figure A-31).
G-LOAD: The load resulting from acceleration, ex-
pressed in terms of the effect of gravity on the loaded
FLOATING BEARING: A bearing that is designed object. (That is in terms of the object’s weight). For
or mounted to permit axial displacement between example, a pilot accelerating his aircraft may be
shaft and housing. pressed into his seat with increasing force: 1 G =
his weight, 2 Gs = twice his weight.
FLUOROCARBON: A class of chemically inert com-
pounds that are composed of carbon and fluorine. GALLING: The transfer of material from one surface
to another during sliding contact.
FLUTING: A specialized form of electrical pitting in
which pits occur in a regular pattern so as to form GAP, SNAP RING (Figure A-32): The space be-
transverse (cross) grooves or flutes in the raceway. tween cutout ends of snap rings.
FLUX FIELD: A region of magnetic influence. GEL: Change from liquid to a semi-solid, homoge-
neous, jelly-like consistency.
FOUR-POINT CONTACT BALL BEARING: A
single-row, angular-contact ball bearing. When under GIDEP: Government and Industry Data Exchange
pure radial load, each loaded ball makes contact Program.
with each raceway at two points. Under pure axial
load each ball makes contact with the raceway at GIMBAL: A mechanical suspension system that
only one point. permits the suspended part to freely incline in any
direction, and/or remain level when the system is
FORCE COUPLE: Two equal and opposite forces tilted.
that act along parallel lines.
GIMBAL BEARING: Bearings used to support parts
FREE MOUNTING: A bearing mounted without any in a gyro gimbal system. Requires very low torque
interference fit between the bearing bore and shaft, values and free rotation. Usually does not complete
or bearing outer diameter and housing. a full revolution, but rotates through a few angular
degrees.
FRETTING (FRETTING CORROSION, FALSE
GOX: Gaseous oxygen.
BRINELLING): The rapid abrasion that occurs at
the interface between two contacting, highly loaded
GREASE SEAL: See Seal, Contact Type.
metal surfaces when subjected to vibratory motions
of low amplitude and high frequency. Usually accom-
GREASE SHIELD: See Shield.
panied by the formation of oxides of the abraded
metal.
GROOVE: The raceway of a ball bearing with a
cross section which is an arc of a circle with a radius
FRICTION: A force that resists relative motion slightly larger than half the ball diameter.
between two surfaces in contact.
GROOVE, LUBRICATING (Figure A-24): A continu-
FRONT FACE: The bearing face which is not ous recess ground in a bearing ring for conveying
intended to support axial loads. lubricant.
FSC: Federal Supply Class. GROOVE RUNOUT WITH REFERENCE SIDE, IN-
NER RING: See Raceway Runout with Reference
FULL COMPLEMENT: See Full-Type Bearing. Side, Inner Ring.
A-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
GROOVE RUNOUT WITH REFERENCE SIDE, HOT HARDNESS: A metallurgical property that de-
OUTER RING: See Raceway Runout with Reference scribes the hardness of a material or bearing compo-
Side, Outer Ring. nent at any temperature above room temperature.
GROOVE, SEAL (Figure A-16). HOUSING (Figure A-29): A next higher assembly
that has an opening in which a bearing outer ring
GROOVE, SHIELD (Figure A-33). is contained when mounted, or the part in which
such opening is located.
GROOVE, SNAP RING (Figure A-32).
HOUSING BEARING SEAT: That part of the housing
bore which contacts the bearing outside diameter
GROOVED RACEWAY, THRUST BEARING (Figure surface as mounted.
A-28).
HOUSING BORE (Figure A-29): Refers to housing
GUIDE RING: A separate ring in a roller bearing bearing seat.
that has two or more rows of rollers. Used to
separate and guide the rollers. HOUSING FILLET (Figure A-29): The corner at the
juncture of the housing bearing seat and the housing
GYROSCOPIC: Relating to or having the character- shoulder.
istics of a gyroscope.
HOUSING FIT: The amount of interference or clear-
HALO: Refers to a type of separator (retainer) ance between the bearing outside diameter surface
having a thin cross section and making contact with and the housing bearing seat.
the balls outside the ball circle (pitch) diameter.
HOUSING SEAT (Figure A-29): That part of housing
HARDNESS: A metallurgical term used to describe bore which contacts bearing outer diameter as
the resistance of a metal to plastically deform by mounted.
indentation.
HOUSING SHOULDER (Figure A-29).
HARMONIC: One of a series of overtones produced
by a vibration frequency that is a multiple of the HOUSING SHOULDER DIAMETER (Figure A-29).
fundamental frequency.
HOUSING SHOULDER FILLET (Figure A-29): Cor-
HAZMIN: Hazardous waste minimization. ner at the junction of housing bearing seat and
shoulder.
HEIGHT, THRUST BEARING (Figure A-28 and A-34).
HUMIDITY: A measure of the water-vapor content
HEIGHT OF RACEWAY SHOULDER: Vertical dis- of the air/atmosphere.
tance from the bottom of the raceway to the inner
ring outer diameter or outer ring inner diameter HYDROCARBON: A large class of organic com-
(same as race depth). pounds containing only carbon and hydrogen atoms.
HEIGHT OF SHAFT AND HOUSING SHOULDER: HYDRODYNAMIC: The forces developed by fluids
Distance from the shaft to the outer diameter of in motion.
shaft shoulder, or from the housing bearing seat
to the inner diameter of the housing shoulder. HYDROSTATIC: The forces exerted by or through
a fluid at rest.
HEPA: High efficiency particulate air filters that are
able to remove particles of 0.3 micron with 99.97 HYSTERESIS: The lagging of a physical effect
percent efficiency. Used to filter the incoming air behind its initiating cause.
in Class 100 clean rooms.
IMBALANCE: A loss of balance or state of being-
HF (HIGH FREQUENCY): The band of frequencies out-of-balance.
that are between 3,000 to 30,000,000 cycles per
second (hertz). IMPINGEMENT: Act of striking or colliding.
A-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
INCH-SERIES BEARING: A rolling bearing which INNER RING RACEWAY RADIUS (Figure A-21).
conforms to an inch series of a standardized
dimension plan. INNER RING RIB OR SHOULDER (ROLLER BEAR-
INGS) (Figure A-14 and A-35).
INCH OF Hg: That amount of atmospheric pressure
required to balance 1 inch of mercury. INNER RING SEAL GROOVE (Figure A-16).
INCH OF WATER: That amount of atmospheric INNER RING SHIELD GROOVE (Figure A-33).
pressure required to balance 1 inch of water.
INNER RING SPLIT (Figure A-25).
INCIDENT LIGHT: Light falling on or striking a
surface. INNER RING THRUST FACE (Figure A-36).
INCLUSION: A void, discontinuity, or solid foreign INNER RING WIDTH (Figures A-5 and A-37).
particle in the crystalline structure of a metal.
INORGANIC: A material that is composed of matter
INDETERMINATE: Storage time not known in ad- other than plant or animal. Sometimes referred to
vance. as mineral.
INERT ATMOSPHERE: Atmosphere containing a INSIDE DIAMETER (Figure A-7): Dimension across
chemically inactive gas such as argon and helium. the center of the ring bore. May be modified to
Will not react with oxygen. express dimension across bore of snap ring, shield,
seal, etc.
INERTIA: An opposition to any change in motion,
or from a state of rest. INSPECTION: The process of measuring, examin-
ing, testing, or otherwise comparing the unit of
product (bearing) with a specific set of requirements.
INFRARED: Radiation with wavelengths longer than
visible light.
INSPECTION, QUALITY CONFORMANCE (QCI):
All examinations and tests performed for the purpose
INNER RACE: See inner ring. of determining conformance with specified require-
ments.
INNER RING (Figures A-7 and A-22): The inner
component of a bearing incorporating the raceway INSPECTION, 100 PERCENT: An inspection in
or raceways on the outside diameter surface. which specified characteristics of every bearing is
examined or tested to determine conformance with
INNER RING BAND GROOVE (Figure A-36). requirements.
INNER RING BORE DIAMETER (Figure A-7): See INSTRUMENT BEARING: The term used to define
Bore. a bearing used in an instrument and which may
have special requirements to meet a specific instru-
INNER RING CORNER (Figure A-8): The area of ment application.
intersection of the face and bore surfaces.
INTEGRAL SEAL: A sealing device which is an
integral part of an assembled bearing.
INNER RING LAND (Figure A-7): Applies to ball
bearing only.
INTERNAL AXIAL CLEARANCE: See Axial Clear-
ance.
INNER RING OUTSIDE DIAMETER (Figure A-8).
INTERNAL RADIAL CLEARANCE: See Clearance,
INNER RING RACEWAY (Figures A-7 and A-22). Radial.
INNER RING RACEWAY DEPTH (Figure A-21). INTERNAL SELF-ALIGNING (Figures A-5, A-11,
and A-38): A type of bearing, or ring in which one
INNER RING RACEWAY DIAMETER (Figure A-21). of the raceways is spherical.
A-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
INTERCHANGEABLE ASSEMBLY: A group of rol- LAND, OUTER RING (Figure A-7): See Lands.
ling bearings so manufactured that any separable
ring can be assembled with any matching ring and LAND RIDING RETAINER: A retainer guided by
rolling element set to obtain desired internal radial either the inner or outer ring lands.
clearance.
LAPPING: The process of precision finishing a
INTIMATE DISPERSION: Complete intermixing of surface by the used a loose abrasive, special
substances such as a dry film dispersion. abrasive wheels, abrasive cloth, or abrasive paper.
INVERSE FUNCTION: Two mathematical operations LAPS: Discontinuities or irregularities in the bearing
that are reverse or opposite in nature and effect. steel (similar to Seams).
IPB: Illustrated Parts Breakdown. LARGE BORE, THRUST BEARING (Figures A-28
and A-34).
ISOELASTICITY: The property of specially designed
bearings to deflect in equal magnitudes both axially LARGE BORE, CORNER, THRUST BEARING (Fig-
and radially regardless of the direction of applied ure A-28).
load. Isoelasticity of bearings is required in gyros
where the mass shift of gyro components due to LARGE BORE WASHER, THRUST BEARING (Fig-
a directional change tends to build up compliance ures A-28 and A-34).
torques and a resulting drift.
LARGE OUTSIDE DIAMETER CENTER (Figure
JOAP: Joint Oil Analysis Program. The function of A-40).
the JOAP is to analyze engine oil and hydraulic
fluid for contaminents and integrity. LAY: Direction of the predominant surface finish or
pattern.
JOURNAL ROLLER BEARING: A cylindrical roller
bearing usually made to fractional dimensions having LEAST COUNT: Smallest graduation or measuring
a relatively high roller length-to-diameter ratio with mark.
a separable outer ring-type roller assembly and inner
ring.
LENGTH OF STRAIGHT CYLINDRICAL ROLLER
(Figure A-41): Axial dimension of the roller from
KC: Kilocycle (1,000 cycles). roller end face to roller end face.
KEYWAY ROLLER THRUST BEARING (Figure LEVEL A: A degree of preservation and packaging
A-39). that will provide adequate protection against corro-
sion, deterioration, and physical handling damage,
KINETIC TORQUE: See Running Torque. for an indeterminate time period or unknown storage
conditions.
L-10 LIFE (Was B-10 Life): The number of hours,
under a given set of fixed conditions (load, speed, LEVEL B: A degree of preservation and packaging
lubricant, temperature, etc.), that 90 percent of a that will provide protection against known conditions
group of bearings will meet or will exceed before and for a known period of time.
the first evidence of metal fatigue occurs.
LIFE: Life of an individual rolling bearing is the
LAMINAR AIRFLOW: The entire body of air within number of revolutions (or hours at a constant speed)
a confined area moves with uniform velocity along which the bearing will run before the first evidence
parallel flow lines, with a minimum of eddies or of fatigue develops in the material of either ring
turbulence. or any of the rolling elements.
LANDS: The flat surfaces on both sides of the LIFO: Last-In-First-Out. A Supply stock issue term.
raceway of rings usually associated with the retainer
contacting surfaces. LIMITS: Maximum and minimum allowable dimen-
sions, resulting from the application of predetermined
LAND, INNER RING (Figure A-7): See Lands. tolerances to a nominal dimension.
A-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
LINEAR: A surface or dimension that is capable LOCKWASHER (Figure A-1): A washer with tongue
of being represented by a straight line. and prongs to hold a lock nut in place.
LINEAR MOTION BEARING: A rolling bearing de- LOCKING RING (Figure A-38).
sign for linear (straight line) motion between race-
ways in the direction of rolling. LOOSE FIT: A mounting condition in which apprecia-
ble clearance exists between the bearing bore and
LIQUEFACTION: A process of making or becoming shaft, or between bearing outside diameter and
liquid. housing. Also used to describe the fitup of compo-
nents in an assembled bearing, which results in
internal radial clearance.
LOAD LINE: The path or direction that a load is
transmitted through the rings, raceways and rolling LOOSE RIB (Figures A-44, A-45, and A-46): A
elements. separable flange or shoulder (internal).
LOAD RATING: See Basic Dynamic Load Rating. LOOSE ROLLER: An individual roller.
LOADING GROOVE: See Filling Slot. LOOSE WASHER THRUST BEARING (Figures A-47
and A-48).
LOADING GROOVE BEARING (Figure A-7): A ball
bearing of maximum capacity-type, in which there LOT: The term lot shall mean “Inspection Lot,” a
is introduced, by means of a filling slot or loading collection of bearings, or kits from which a sample
groove, more balls than for a nonfilling slot or of bearings is to be drawn and inspected, to
Conrad-type bearing. determine condition and conformance to acceptance
criteria.
LOCATING COLLAR, ROLLER THRUST BEARING
(Figure A-39). LOT SIZE: The total number of bearings in a specific
lot or group.
LOCATING FLANGE (Figures A-18 and A-30): Ex-
LOX: Liquid oxygen.
tended part of bearing outer ring used for axially
locating the bearing in the housing.
LUBRICATION GROOVE: A groove in a bearing
component for conveying lubricant.
LOCATING RIB: See Rib.
LVDT: A Linear Variable Differential Transducer. An
LOCATING RING (Figure A-32): A bearing ring inspection device that is used to measure bearing
which is adequately clamped or pressed in place, parameters.
or a snap ring or retaining ring or wire which locates
a bearing or other parts in the housing. MAGNETO BEARING (Figure A-49): A radial con-
tact grooved bearing with one shoulder completely
LOCATING SHOULDER (Figure A-29): A shoulder removed from the outer ring making this ring
or flange which holds a bearing in a definite position. separable.
LOCATING SLEEVE, ROLLER THRUST BEARING MAGNETOMETER: An instrument used to measure

(Figure A-42). moderate magnetic field intensities.
MAJOR DIAMETER: The larger chord of an ellipse

LOCATING SLEEVE OR SLEEVE BORE, INNER,
that passes through the center and Is perpendicular
OUTER (Figure A-42).
to the minor axis.
LOCATING SLEEVE, OUTSIDE DIAMETER (Figure MAJOR DEFECT: A defect other than critical, that
A-42). is likely to result in a bearing failure, or to materially
reduce the usability of the bearing for its intended
LOCATING WASHER (Figure A-43). purpose.
LOCK NUT (Figure A-1): A nut used in combination MARTENSITE: A phase of bearing steel with a
with a lock washer for positioning and holding a body-centered crystalline structure characterized by
bearing inner ring on a shaft. a needle-like microstructure.
A-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MASS SHIFT: The relocation of the center of gravity MICROSCOPIC: So small as to be invisible to the
of a system. In gyros, mass shift is detrimental as unaided eye requiring the use of a microscope.
it reduces system accuracy through drift by bearing
deflection, loosely fitted components lubrication dis- MICROSCOPY: Pertaining to the use of a micro-
tribution, etc. scope.
MATCHING: Inner and outer rings in duplex sets MIL: A unit of measurement. One thousandth of an
that are matched for bore and outer diameter inch. (Example: one mil equals 0.001 of an inch.)
dimensions, and eccentricity, within specified toler-
ances. MILLI: One thousandth part of a specified unit.
MATTE SURFACE: A smooth surface finish that is MINIATURE BEARING: A ball bearing whose out-
dull, without a luster or polish. side diameter dimension is less than 3/8 inch or
9 millimeters.
MAXIMUM-TYPE BALL BEARINGS (Figures A-7
and A-49): A ball bearing with a retainer, filling-slot MINOR DEFECT: A defect that is not likely to
or counter-bore assembly. materially reduce the usability of the bearing for its
intended purpose, or is a departure from established
MAXIMUM-TYPE ROLLER BEARING: A bearing standards having little bearing on the effective use
with a full complement of rolling elements and or operation of the unit.
without a retainer.
MINOR DIAMETER: The smaller chord of an ellipse
MAY: A term used to indicate an acceptable or passing through the center and perpendicular to the
suggested means of accomplishment. major axis.
MEDIAN LIFE: Median life of a group of apparently MISALIGNMENT: Deviation from the correct rela-
identical ball or roller bearings is defined as the tionship of the bearing or other parts. A lack of
number of revolutions (or hours as a constant speed) parallelism of the axis of the bearing inner and outer
that 50 percent of a group of bearings will complete rings, or shafts and housings.
or exceed before the first evidence of fatigue
develops in either ring or any of the rolling elements. MOLECULAR STRUCTURE: Pertaining to the ar-
rangement or position of molecules in a material.
METALLIZE: A process that coats the surface with
a metal by means of spraying or electroplating. MULTI-ROW BEARING: A bearing with more than
2 rows of rolling elements.
METRIC SERIES BEARING: A bearing which con-
forms to a metric series of a standardized dimension NBS: National Bureau of Standards. Now the Na-
plan. tional Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
METRIC DIMENSIONS: Bearing dimensions ex- NEEDLE ROLLER: A load-carrying rolling element
pressed in millimeters. of a needle roller bearing that is long in relation
to the diameter (usually 3 to 10 times).
MICRO: One millionth part of a specified unit
NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING (Figures A-24, A-43,
(Example: one micro inch equals one millionth of
and A-50): A bearing having a full complement of
an inch.)
rolling elements that are long in relation to their
diameter, with roller guidance controlled by circum-
MICRO FINISH: A term used to designate the ferential clearance within the complement.
roughness of a surface.
NIIN: National Item Identification Number assigned
MICROINCH: One millionth of an inch (0.000001 to a part or bearing that is procured, stocked and
inch). issued by Supply.
MICRON: One millionth of a meter (Example: one NIST: National Institute of Standards and Technolo-
micron equals 0.00003937 inches.) gy. Was National Bureau of Standards (NBS).
A-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NITROGEN BLANKETING: A process or operation OPTICAL FLAT: A precision ground glass block,
that is conducted in a nitrogen atmosphere. having precision lapped parallel sides that are used
in determining surface finish.
NOAP: Navy Oil Analysis Program. See JOAP.
ORGANIC: A material derived from living organisms
NOMINAL: Approximate or rated value or dimen- plant or animal origin.
sion.
OSCILLATING LOAD: Loads which rotate back and
NOMINAL DIMENSION: Related to a designated forth through an angle of less than one revolution
theoretical dimension or size. It will vary from the in relation to one or both bearing rings.
actual measured dimension.
OSCILLATORY: Moving back and forth in a periodic/
cyclic manner.
NONFILLING SLOT (Figure A-8): No loading groove
in the ring for adding additional balls.
OUTAGE: A space left between the contents and
the ends of a package/container for thermal expan-
NONHOMOGENEITY: A state of not having a uni- sion.
form structure of composition. Bearing steel is
basically nonhomogenous. OUTER RING (Figures A-7 and A-22): The outer
component of a bearing containing the raceway.
NONMETALLIC RETAINER: A type of bearing re-
tainer that is formed from a nonmetallic substance, OUTER RING BACK (Figure A-6): Thick side of
such as linen or paper base, bonded with phenolic an angular-contact bearing ring.
resin. Use of primarily in gyro rotors and similar
applications where speeds are high, usually in OUTER RING, BALL BEARING (Figure A-7): See
excess of 24,000 rpm and temperatures are less Outer Ring.
than 250_F.
OUTER RING BORE (Figure A-8): The inner diame-
NONSEPARABLE BEARING: A rolling bearing that ter of the outer ring (also called the land surface).
is manufactured so the component rings and rolling
elements cannot be freely separated from the unit. OUTER RING CORNER (Figure A-8): The intersec-
tion of the outer diameter and the face surfaces
NONSYMMETRICAL: Exhibiting imbalance or irreg- of the ring.
ularity in shape or size. (Example: nonsymmetrical
rollers). OUTER RING FACE (Figures A-26 and A-36): The
side surfaces of the ring.
NORMAL: Perpendicular.
OUTER RING FLANGE EXTERNAL (Figures A-18
NULL: A balanced condition that results in a zero and A-30): A protrusion on the outer surface of the
reading. ring for positioning the bearing in the housing.
OBLIQUE: Neither perpendicular or parallel. OUTER RING LAND (Figure A-7): See Outer Ring
Bore.
OFFSET: See Stickout.
OUTER RING OUTSIDE DIAMETER (Figure
A-8): The diameter of the external surface of the
OIL GROOVE (Figures A-24 and A-43): Grooves bearing.
in rings for collecting lubricant from parts in shaft.
OUTER RING RACEWAY (Figures A-5 and A-7):
OIL HOLES (Figure A-43): Holes from the grooves The surface on the ring that serves as the path
to guide the lubricant into rotating parts in shaft. for the rolling elements.
OPEN BEARING: A bearing with no seals or shields. OUTER RING RACEWAY DEPTH (Figure A-21):
The depth of the raceway groove in the ring.
OPEN WOUND SEPARATOR: A helical coil com-
pression spring used to separate the balls of older OUTER RING RACEWAY DIAMETER (Figure A-21):
instrument and torque tube ball bearings. The diameter of the bottom of the raceway groove.
A-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
OUTER RING RACEWAY RADIUS (Figure A-21): OXIDE COATING: A finish applied to a steel or
The radius of curvature of the raceway groove. monel bearing component to prevent galling and
scuffing during assembly and service. It increases
OUTER RING RACEWAY SHOULDER (Figure A-21): the affinity for lubricant and improves corrosion
The outer part of the raceway groove near the resistance.
intersection with the land surface.
OXIDIZE: To combine with oxygen. Generally
OUTER RING RACEWAY, SPHERICAL (Figure associated with the process of rusting of steel in
A-11): The active load surface of a segment of a the presence of oxygen.
sphere the center of which lies on bearing axis
midway between the bearing ring faces. PAR: Progressive Aircraft Rework.
OUTER RING RACEWAY WIDTH, ROLLER BEA- PARAFFINIC: A complex mixture of hydrocarbon
RING: The width of the roller contacting surface compounds.
between the roller locating side ribs.
PARALLELISM OF SIDES: The degree that the
OUTER RING ROLLER BEARING, CYLINDRICAL sides/faces of the ring are equidistant. The difference
(Figure A-20). between the largest and smallest width of the bearing
rings.
OUTER RING ROLLER BEARING, NEEDLE (Figure
A-24). PARTICULATE: Dirt or contamination that exists in
the form of very small separate particles.
OUTER RING ROLLER BEARING, SPHERICAL
(Figure A-37). PASSIVATION: A chemical treatment that renders
a surface less reactive to oxidation. Used on AISI
440C corrosion resistant steel to give it maximum
OUTER RING ROLLER BEARING, TAPERED
corrosion resistance.
(CUP) (Figure A-14).
PERCENTAGE CURVATURE: The radius of the ball
OUTER RING SEAL GROOVE (Figure A-16). groove expressed as a percentage of the ball
diameter (usually 51 to 57 percent).
OUTER RING SHIELD GROOVE (Figure A-33).
Ball Groove Radius
OUTER RING, SPHERICAL (Figure A-33 and A-51). Percent Curvature = x 100
Ball Diameter
OUTER RING, SOLID (Figure A-7): Standard one

PERIPHERY: The external boundary or surface of
piece.
a bearing.
OUTER RING, SPLIT (Figure A-52): More than one PERPENDICULAR: Being at right angles (90 de-
piece. grees) to a given surface or plane of a bearing.
OUTER RING THRUST FACE (Figure A-4). PETROLATUM: A neutral odorless, colorless, taste-
less substance obtained from petroleum.
OUTER RING WIDTH (Figure A-5).
PI: The 16th letter of the Greek alphabet. The symbol
OUTSIDE DIAMETER (Figures A-8, A-22 and A-34). is used to denote the ratio of the circumference of
Tile external diameter of an outer bearing ring. a circle to its diameter.
OUTSIDE DIAMETER SQUARENESS WITH SIDE: PILLOW BLOCK: An assembly utilizing a radial
Outside diameter squareness with side (face) is the bearing and a bearing housing which has a base
closeness to 90 degrees (right angle) of the two plate with bolt holes for mounting on a support
surfaces. surface parallel with the bearing axis.
OVERHAUL: Standard rework performed on a com- PIN-TYPE RETAINER: A two piece retainer with
ponent at established service intervals. pins holding the two halves together.
A-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
PITCH CIRCLE DIAMETER, ROLLING ELEMENTS loaded. Also associated with the width of the ball
(Figures A-8, A-28 and A-41): The diameter of a path.
circular center line drawn through the centers of
the rolling elements. PROCESSED BEARING: A bearing that has been
previously used and then cleaned, inspected, gaged,
PITTING: Minute removal of material from the ring tested and lubricated, and certified acceptable for
raceways or rolling element surfaces through corro- continued use.
sion or electrical arcing.
PROFILE: The contour (external outline) of a sur-
PLAIN SPHERICAL BEARING: See Spherical, face in a plane perpendicular (right angle) to the
Plain Bearing. surface.
PLATE (Figure A-33): See Shield. PROFILE (CENTER LINE): The line about which
roughness is measured and is parallel to the general
PLATEN: A flat plate or surface. direction of the profile.
PLASTIC FLOW: Permanent deformation in a PROFILE (MEASURED): A representation of the

material during the application of a load. profile obtained by instrumental means.
PLENUM: An enclosed space or chamber used in PROFILE (NOMINAL): The profile of a bearing
laminar flow clean rooms to take the room exhaust disregarding surface texture.
air and additional external makeup air and return
the mixture of pressurized air to the entry point of PROFILOMETER: A device for measuring the rela-
the clean room. tive roughness of surfaces.
POCKET, RETAINER: That portion of the retainer
PRONG-TYPE RETAINER: A two piece rolling bear-
which is shaped to receive the rolling element.
ing retainer with prongs for retaining the rolling
elements.
POLAR: Having two opposite qualities or powers,
such as positive and negative poles in electricity.
QAP: Quality Assurance Program. A special inspec-
tion program for new bearing inspection conducted
POUR POINT: The lowest temperature at which a by the Defense Industrial Supply Center.
lubricant will pour or flow under specified test
conditions.
QCL: Quality Characteristics List. A term used by
Quality Assurance personnel to monitor and verify
PRECESSION: Angular motion or displacement of
specific parameters.
a gyro rotor about one (or more) gimbal axis resulting
from external torques.
QUALITY ASSURANCE: A planned program of
actions necessary to provide confidence that the
PRECISION: The degree of agreement of repeated
material conforms to established standards.
measurements of a dimension/quantity. Compare
with Accuracy.
RACE: See Ring.
PRELOAD: An initial thrust load that is placed on
a bearing to increase rigidity during operation. RACEWAY (Figures A-7, A-11, and A-14): The
Preloading decreases deformation and deflection by contact path of the rolling element on the rings of
absorbing the initial portion of the deflection curve rolling bearing.
which is steep and increases at a high rate.
RACEWAY DEPTH (Figures A-21 and A-29): The
PRELUBRICATED BEARING: A shielded or sealed vertical distance from the bottom of the raceway
bearing that has been lubricated by the bearing to the inner ring outside diameter or the outer ring
manufacturer. inside (land) diameter.
PRESSURE ELLIPSE: The area of contact between RACEWAY DIAMETER (Figure A-21): Diameter of
a ball and the ball raceway when the bearing is the inner or outer ring raceway of a bearing.
A-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
RACEWAY, FLAT, THRUST BEARING (Figure RANDOM SAMPLING: A Quality Assurance term
A-31). used to describe a procedure for choosing sample
units in a random or nonregular pattern for inspec-
RACEWAY, GROOVED, THRUST BEARING (Figure tion.
A-7).
RATE GYRO: A gyro which measures the rate of
RACEWAY, INNER RING (Figure A-7): Track or change of direction such as rate of turn and bank,
groove for the rolling elements in/on the inner ring. etc.
RACEWAY, OUTER RING (Figures A-5, A-7, and RATING LIFE (L-10): Number of hours at a given
A-11): Track or groove for the rolling elements in/on speed that 90 percent of a group of identical bearings
the outer ring. will attain or exceed before the first indication of
fatigue in either ring or any of the rolling elements.
RACEWAY RUNOUT WITH REFERENCE SIDE,
INNER RING: The degree of conformity a plane RBEC: Roller Bearing Engineering Committee. A
representing the centerline of the inner ring raceway committee of the American Bearing Manufacturers
is parallel with the reference side. Association (ABMA) that develops industry standards
for roller bearings.
RACEWAY RUNOUT WITH REFERENCE SIDE,
RBEC 1, RBEC 5: Designations by the ABMA
OUTER RING: The degree of conformity a plane
indicating classes of roller bearing precision.
representing the centerline of the outer ring raceway
is parallel with the reference side.
REFINISH: To restore an existing surface finish
without removing all of the existing finish.
RACEWAY RADIUS, INNER AND OUTER RING
(Figure A-21): Dimension of the raceway curvature.
REFURBISH: In general, to repair used bearings
by replacement of worn and/or defective parts and
RACEWAY SHOULDER (Figure A-21). resurfacing any surface including raceways.
RADIAL CLEARANCE: The total diametral move- RELIABILITY: The probability that material will per-
ment of a free ring with respect to a fixed ring when form its intended function for a specified period of
a specified load is applied and reversed. time and conditions.
RADIAL COMPLIANCE: The radial yield rate of a RESIDUAL MAGNETISM: Magnetism which remains
set of preloaded gyro rotor bearings. Mathematically in bearing after the magnetizing force is removed.
the yield rate is equal to the Radial Yield divided
by the Radial Load; where radial yield is expressed
RESILIENT: Capable of withstanding shock without
in microinches and radial load in pounds.
permanent deformation or rupture. Elastic properties.
RADIAL LOAD: A load that is applied to the inner RESOLUTION: The capability of a measuring instru-
or outer rings perpendicular (right angle/90 degrees) ment to detect and indicate small variations of the
to the bearing axis. measured dimensions from a reference size ex-
pressed in least counts or graduations on a meter
RADIAL LOOSENESS: See Internal Radial Clear- or dial.
ance.
RESONANT FREQUENCY: A frequency capable of
RADIAL PLAY: See Internal Radial Clearance. exciting a vibration in a given body or system.
RADIAL RUNOUT: This deviation of the inner and RETAINER (CAGE, SEPARATOR) (Figure A-7): A
outer ring raceway diameters with respect to the bearing pan that partly surrounds the rolling ele-
bore and outer diameter surfaces. ments and travels around the raceway with them.
The main purpose of the retainer is to space the
RADIAL BEARING: A rolling bearing that has been rolling elements in proper relationship to each other.
designed to support a radial load perpendicular to
shaft axis. RETAINING BAND (Figure A-52): See Band.
A-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
RETAINING RIB (Figure A-35): See Rib. along the mean line. Square these measurements,
add the squares, divide by the number of measure-
RETAINING RING, ROLLER BEARING (Figures ments and take the square root of the number.
A-15 and A-53).
ROCKWELL HARDNESS TEST: A mechanical test
RETAINING SHELL: See Band. for determining the hardness of a material based
upon the depth of penetration of a specified penetra-
RETAINING WASHER (Figure A-43). tor into the specimen under a specified load.
RFI: A Supply term meaning Ready-for-Issue. ROD END, FEMALE BEARING (Figure A-56): A
rod end bearing with internal threads in the shank.
RIB (Figure A-35): Roller-retaining, and roller guid-
ing member. ROD END, MALE BEARING (Figure A-57): A rod
end bearing with external threads on the shank.
RIB, CENTER (Figure A-54).
ROLLER (Figures A-14 and A-20): A cylindrically
R I B C O N E B A C K FA C E , TA P E R E D R O L L E R shaped load carrying rolling element having one axis
BEARING (Figure A-15). of symmetry and being circular in cross section in
any plane perpendicular to that axis.
RIB CONE FRONTFACE, TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING (Figure A-14). ROLLER AND RETAINER ASSEMBLY (Figure
A-34): A roller set assembled with a retainer.
RIB, LOCATING (Figure A-22).
ROLLER ASSEMBLY INSIDE DIAMETER (Figure
RIB, LOOSE INNER RING, EXTERNAL (Figures A-55): The diameter under the rollers measured
A-45 and A-46). without the inner ring.
RIB, LOOSE OUTER RING, INTERNAL (Figure ROLLER ASSEMBLY OUTSIDE DIAMETER (OVER
A-44). ROLLER DIAMETER) (Figure A-58): The diameter
over the rollers when in radial contact with the inner
RIB, ROLLER-RETAINING (Figures A-35 and A-54). ring.
RIB WIDTH, OUTER RING (Figure A-55): Width of ROLLER BARREL (SPHERICAL) (Figure A-54):
the roller guiding rib of a roller bearing. Rollers that are spherically shaped instead of being
cylindrically shaped.
RING, EXTERNAL SELF-ALIGNING (Figure A-2):
An aligning ring mounted on the outer diameter of ROLLER RETAINER (CAGE) (Figure A-20): See
the ring. Retainer.
RIGHT ANGLE: The angle bounded by two lines ROLLER COMPLEMENT: The total number of roll-
perpendicular to each other; an angle of 90 degrees. ers in a specific bearing.
RING: An annular component of a radial rolling R O L L E R C O M P L E M E N T B O R E D I A M E-

bearing that incorporates one or more raceways. TER: (UNDER ROLLER DIAMETER): The diameter
inscribed inside the rollers when in radial contact
RING, INNER (Figures A-7 and A-20): Inner bearing with the outer ring raceway.
component.
ROLLER DIAMETER (Figure A-55): Maximum circu-
RING, OUTER (Figures A-7 and A-20): Outer lar dimension of a straight roller.
bearing component.
ROLLER, HOURGLASS (Figure A-5): A roller that
RMS FINISH: Root Mean Square. A numerical value is concave on the outer diameter surface.
of surface finish obtained by measuring the vertical
distance from the mean line of an irregular surface ROLLER LENGTH (Figure A-41): The measured
to the profile at a number of equally spaced intervals distance between the ends or faces of the roller.
A-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ROLLER LOCATING RIB (Figure A-22). The roller R U N - I N - T I M E ( P R E L O A D E D R O TO R B E A R-

guide ribs. INGS): The time that is required for new preloaded
rotor bearings to achieve stable torque, preload,
ROLLER RETAINING RING (Figures A-15 and vibration levels. Initial plastic deformation of the
A-53). surface and channeling of lubricant occurs during
this time.
ROLLER RETAINER WASHER (Figures A-24 and RUNNING TORQUE: The magnitude of the torque
A-43). required to maintain rotation of an already rotating
bearing.
ROLLER THRUST BEARING, CYLINDRICAL (Fig-
ure A-34). RUNOUT: Variation from perfect concentricity, paral-
lelism, or perpendicularity of one cylindrical or planar
ROLLER THRUST BEARING, TAPERED (Figures surface from another.
A-34 and A-60): Designed primarily for thrust loads.
RUNOUT OF ASSEMBLED BEARING: The dis-
ROLLING BEARING: A bearing that uses rolling placement of the surface of a bearing relative to
elements such as balls, rollers, or needles to reduce a fixed point when one raceway is rotated with
friction and to transmit loads through the bearing respect to the other raceway.
assembly.
RUNOUT, RADIAL: See Radial Runout.
ROOT THICKNESS: Distance through the ring from
inner ring bore to inner ring raceway, or from the RUNOUT, SIDE: See Side Runout, Inner Ring.
outer ring outside diameter to outer ring raceway.
RUST INHIBITOR: An additive composed of active
ROTATING INNER RING LOAD: A load which materials that are preferentially absorbed on the
rotates in relation to the inner ring. metal surfaces and which repel the corrosive attack
of water.
ROTATING OUTER RING LOAD: A load which
SAMPLE: A group of one or more bearings drawn
rotates in relation to the outer ring.
from a lot. Bearings are selected at random without
regard to their quality.
ROTOR BEARING: Bearings that are used to sup-
port rotating members of gyro rotors or spin motors. SAMPLING PLAN: A Quality Assurance sampling
Nearly always use a nonmetallic retainer and must plan indicates the number of bearings from each
have low vibration levels. lot which are to be inspected and the criteria for
determining the acceptability of the lot.
ROUGHNESS: The fine irregularities in the surface
texture usually including those developed by the SCRATCHES: Linear abrasions on the bearing sur-
manufacturing finishing operations. faces.
ROUGHNESS HEIGHT: The arithmetical average SCUFFS: A series of small superficial or shallow
deviation in the height of the roughness expressed scratches on the active bearing surfaces.
in microinches measured normal to the center line.
SEAL, CONTACT-TYPE (Figure A-16): A closure
ROUGHNESS WIDTH: Distance parallel to the nom- consisting of a circular part or parts, secured to
inal surface between successive peaks or ridges one bearing ring and in sliding contact with the other
which constitutes the predominant pattern of rough- bearing ring.
ness.
SEAL, DOUBLE: Seal on both sides of the bearing.
ROUGHNESS-WIDTH CUTOFF: The spacing of re-
petitive surface irregularities to be included in the SEAL GROOVE (Figure A-16): The channel or
measurement greater than roughness width to obtain notch into which the metal or rubber parts of the
total roughness height rating. seal are pressed, or in which the seal is retained.
A-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SEAL, LABYRINTH (Figure A-61): Closure ele- SEPARABLE: A bearing assembly that may be
ments consisting of a circular part or parts secured completely or partially separated into its component
to one bearing ring and displaced radially toward parts.
the other bearing ring, to run in close proximity and
shaped to form a labyrinth of appreciable length. SEPARABLE INNER RING (Figure A-41): The inner
ring of a roller bearing can be easily removed.
SEAL, SINGLE (Figure A-16). A seal on one side
of the bearing. SEPARABLE OUTER RING (Figures A-49 and
A-59): The outer ring of a roller bearing can be
SEAT BEARING (Figure A-29). The bearing mount- easily removed.
ing surface.
SEPARATE CONES (Figure A-19): The inner rings
SELF-ALIGNING: The bearing has internal capabili- (cones) of a tapered roller bearing can be easily
ty to compensate for shaft and housing deflections removed.
or misalignment.
SEPARATE CUPS (Figure A-23): The outer rings
SELF-ALIGNING BALL BEARING, RADIAL (Fig- of a tapered roller bearing can be easily removed.
ures A-11 and A-51): A ball bearing which because
of raceway or outer ring geometry, is capable of SEPARATE OUTER RING (Figure A-37).
being misaligned.
SEPARATOR: See Retainer.
SELF-ALIGNING, INTERNAL (Figures A-5, A-11,
and A-54). SHAFT (Figure A-29): The axle or rotor assembly
on which the rolling bearing is mounted.
SELF-ALIGNING RADIAL BEARING, EXTERNAL
(Figures A-2 and A-24). SHAFT BEARING SEAT (Figure A-29): The portion
of the shaft upon which the bearing is mounted.
SELF-ALIGNING RING (Figures A-2 and A-24): A
ring with a spherical inside surface used as an S H A F T B E A R I N G S E AT D I A M E T E R ( F i g u r e
accessory on the spherical outside surface of an A-29): The diameter across the shaft bearing seat.
outer ring.
SHAFT FILLET (Figure A-29): The corner at the
SELF-ALIGNING ROLLER BEARING (Figures A-5 juncture of the shaft bearing seat and the shoulder
and A-54). intersection. Must be less than the bearing corner
radius.
SELF-ALIGNING SEAT RADIUS, THRUST BEAR-
ING (Figures A-3 and A-62). SHAFT FIT: The amount of interference or clearance
between the bearing bore diameter and the shaft
SELF-ALIGNING SEAT RADIUS CENTER (Figures bearing seat diameter.
A-3 and A-62).
SHAFT KEYWAY (Figure A-29): Slot cut into shaft
SELF-ALIGNING SEAT WASHER (Figures A-3 and at threaded portion for lock washer key.
A-62).
SHAFT (HOUSING) SHOULDER (Figure A-29): The
SELF-ALIGNING SEAT WASHER BORE (Figures portion of a shaft (housing) whose diameter is
A-3 and A-42). greater than the bore of the bearing and against
which the face of the bearing rests for location or
SELF-ALIGNING SEAT WASHER OUTSIDE DI- support.
AMETER (Figures A-3 and A-62).
SHAFT SHOULDER DIAMETER (Figure A-29): The
SELF-ALIGNING THRUST BEARING (Figures A-3 diameter across the shaft shoulder.
and A-62).
SHAFT SHOULDER FILLET (Figure A-29): See
SELF-ALIGNING WASHER (Figures A-3 and A-62). Shaft Fillet.
SELF-CONTAINED: See Nonseparable Bearing. SHAFT THREAD (Figure A-29): The lock nut seat.
A-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SHALL (WILL): A term used to indicate a mandatory SINGLE ROW BEARING (Figure A-8): A ball or
requirement. roller bearing having only one row of rolling ele-
ments.
SHEAR STRENGTH: The stress required to pro-
duce a fracture in the plane of cross section of the SINGLE SEAL (Figure A-16). One seal mounted
material. on the bearing.
SHELL: See Band. SINGLE SHIELD (Figure A 33). One shield mounted
on the bearing.
SHIELD (Figure A-33): A circular part secured to
one bearing ring and projecting radially toward the SINTER: To heat a metal powder to a temperature
other ring to cover the interspace, but not to run without melting until it becomes a tightly adhering
in contact with the other ring. metallic mass.
SHIELD, DOUBLE: Shields are mounted on both SKEW: Slant, twist, nonsymmetrical, nonuniform
sides of the bearing. distribution.
SHIELD, GROOVE, OUTER RING (Figure A-33): SLAG: Nonmetallic impurity generated during smelt-
The groove in the outer ring and to hold the shield ing and refining operations.
in place.
SLEEVE LOCATING, ROLLER THRUST BEARING
SHIELD, SINGLE (Figure A-33): One shield mounted (Figure A-42).
on a bearing.
SLEEVE, TAPERED ADAPTER (Figure A-1).
SHOULD: A term use of to indicate a nonmandatory
desire or preferred method. SLOT (FILLING SLOT) (Figure A-7): See Filling
Slot.
SHOULDER, HOUSING (Figure A-29): The housing
SMALL BORE, THRUST BEARING (Figures A-28
surface against which the bearing face is located
and A-34).
and supported.
SMALL BORE CENTER WASHER (Figures A-39
SHOULDER, RACEWAY (Figure A-20): See Shaft and A-63).
Shoulder.
SMALL BORE CENTER (Figure A-28).
SIDE (Figure A-7): See Face.
SMALL BORE WASHER (Figures A-28 and A-34).
SIDE PARALLEL: See Parallelism of Sides.
SMEARING OR PICKUP: Removal of raceway or
SIDE RUNOUT, INNER RING: See Width Variation. rolling element material due to skidding action and
its redeposition at another point in the form of a
SIDE SQUARE WITH BORE, INNER RING: See smear.
Side Runout, Inner Ring.
SNAP RETAINER: A retainer with prongs that permit
SILICONE: Any of a group of synthetic resins, oils, the assembly of rolling elements into the retainer
or plastics in which the silicon atom replaces the by elastic deformation.
carbon atom in the primary chemical structure.
SNAP RING, BEARING-LOCATIONS (Figures A-20
SINGLE CONE: The inner ring of a tapered roller and A-32).
bearing, or the separable inner ring of an angular-
contact ball bearing having no shoulder on the SNAP RING, ROLLER RETAINING (Figure A-64).
nonthrust side.
SNAP RING GAP (Figure A-32).
SINGLE CUP (Figure A-14): The outer ring of a
tapered roller bearing, or the separable outer ring SNAP RING GROOVE (Figures A-22 and A-32):
of an angular-contact ball bearing. A groove to accommodate a snap ring.
A-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
SNAP RING GROOVE DIAMETER (Figure A-32). SPHERICAL ROLLER BEARING: A self-aligning
radial rolling bearing with convex rollers or concave
SNAP RING GROOVE INTERNAL (Figure A-35). rollers.
SNAP RING GROOVE LOCATION (Figure A-32). SPIN AXIS: The axis of a gyro rotor about which
angular momentum is developed.
SNAP RING OUTSIDE DIAMETER (Figure A-32).
SPIRAL ROLLER (WOUND): A roller made by
winding a strip in a helical form.
SNAP RING THICKNESS (Figure A-32).
SPLIT BALL BEARING: A ball bearing having either
SNAP RING WIDTH (Figure A-32). or both rings split across the raceway so as to
facilitate assembly. Split ring constructions allow
SOAP: Spectrometric Oil Analysis Program. more balls for greater load capacity.
SOLID OUTER RING: An outer ring made in one SPLIT INNER RING (Figure A-25): See Split Ball
piece, not split. Bearing.
SOLID ROLLER: A roller having no hole at its axis. SPLIT OUTER RING (Figure A-52): See Split Ball
Bearing.
SPACERS: Metal sleeves serving to space different
bearings on the same shaft or different rows of rolling SPRING-TYPE SEPARATOR (RETAINER): A sepa-
elements in a multiple row bearing. rator composed of loose individual coil springs acting
as spacers between balls.
SPALLING: Removal of surface material from race-
way or rolling element surfaces in the form of metal SQUARE ROLLER: A cylindrical roller with the
flakes or pieces, resulting in cavities. Fatigue related. length being equal to the diameter.
SPECIAL BEARING: Bearings not meeting the re- SQUARENESS OF OUTER DIAMETER/BORE
quirements of standard or established line of bear- WITH FACE: The squareness (90 degrees angle)
ings. of the face with the outside diameter/bore of the
ring.
SPECIFIC WEIGHT: The weight of a substance per
unit volume in absolute units (density times accelera- STAKING: A mechanical method of retaining a
tion of gravity). bearing by moving housing material over the chamfer
of the bearing.
SPECTROSCOPY: The production and investigation
of spectra (including wavelength, mass and energy). STAINS: Surface discolorations from a chemical
reaction.
SPHERICAL INNER RING RACEWAY (Figures A-5
and A-38). STANDARD: A physical or numerical limit which is
used as a reference. (Plug gage = physical, and
a surface roughness limit = numerical).
SPHERICAL OUTER RING RACEWAY (Figures
A-11 and A-37).
STANDARD BEARING: A rolling bearing conform-
ing to the ABMA general boundary plans of metric
SPHERICAL OUTER RING OUTSIDE DIAMETER or inch dimensions.
(Figure A-51).
S TA N D A R D D E P O T L E V E L M A I N T E N A N C E
SPHERICAL, PLAIN BEARING: Ball shaped inner (SDLM): Depot level aircraft maintenance accom-
ring. Sliding contact. plished upon attainment of a specified number of
calendar months and/or flight hours of operation.
SPHERICAL RACEWAY: A raceway having the form
of part of the surface of a sphere. STANDOUT TAPERED ROLLER BEARING (Figure
A-14): The distance the backface of the tapered
SPHERICAL ROLLER (BARREL) (Figure A-37). roller bearing cone extends from the cup.
A-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
STARTING TORQUE: The magnitude of force at required of the receiver, low torque bearings are
a given distance required to overcome friction forces used to allow free rotation.
in a stationary bearing. Usually expressed in gram-
centimeters, but sometimes expressed in milligram- SYNTHESIS: To combine chemicals or simple com-
millimeters, dyne-centimeters, ounce-inches, and pounds by chemical means to form a more complex
other combinations of units for force and distance. compound.
STATIC AD: A load acting on a nonrotating bearing. TANDEM DUPLEX MOUNTING (Figure A-27): As-
sembly of two or more ball bearings mounted so
STATISTICAL: The collection and analytical inter- as to distribute the thrust load between the bearings.
pretation of numerical data.
TANGENT: The location a straight line makes with
STICK-IN: The distance the face surface of one ring a curve of line or surface without actually crossing
is inset or intrudes with respect to the other ring it. Called point of tangency.
face surface when a thrust load is applied.
TAPER: A condition where the outer diameter or
STICK-OUT: The distance one ring is offset with bore is larger at one end of the ring than at the
respect to the other ring when a thrust load is other end.
applied. In duplexed sets, the ring stickout is ground
off to make the faces flush when a specified thrust TAPERED ADAPTER SLEEVE (Figure A-1).
is applied.
TAPERED BORE (Figure A-12).
STRAIGHT ROLLER BEARING: A radial roller bear-
ing having cylindrical rollers. TAPERED ROLLER (Figure A-14): A rolling element
where one end of the roller is smaller than the other
end. The general shape of truncated cone.
SUPERFICIAL: Minor surface flaws effecting only
the surface of the bearing.
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING (Figures A-14 and
A-15): A bearing that has been designed so that
SURFACE TEXTURE: Repetitive or random devi- all of the primary load carrying surfaces are tapered.
ations from the nominal (theoretical) surface which Planes extending from these surfaces meet at a
form the pattern of the surface. Includes roughness, common vertex/point.
waviness, lay and flaws.
TARNISH: A chemical stain on the bearing surface.
SUS OR SSU: Abbreviation for Saybolt Universal
Seconds and refers to the time in seconds for 60 TEMPER: A metallurgical process to soften hard-
cc of fluid to flow through a capillary tube in a Saybolt ened steel by reheating at a temperature well below
Universal Viscosimeter, at a given temperature. the hardening temperature.
SUSPENSION: A system consisting of solid particles TENSILE FORCE: A stretching force/stress in a

dispersed in a liquid. bearing surface caused by improper heat treatment
or grinding operation.
SWAGING: A mechanical method of retaining a
bearing by rolling either the bearing over the housing TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene, a fluorocarbon compound
or the housing over the bearing. used as a low friction, self-lubricating material.
SYMMETRICAL: Parts having the same shape and TENSILE STRENGTH: The ratio of maximum load
relative position of parts on opposite sides of a to original cross-sectional area. The greatest longitu-
dividing line or about an axis. dinal stress a material can withstand without tearing
apart.
SYNCHRO: A method of achieving remote indicating
or control by transmitting motion electrically, from THERMAL: Relating to the level of heat in materials.
one place to another. The transmitter acts as a
generator and the receiver acts as a motor, which THERMOPLASTIC: A polymer material having the
when coupled with the transmitter, duplicates its property of softening or melting when heated, and
rotation precisely. Due to the precise duplication hardening and becoming rigid again when cooled.
A-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
THREADS, SHAFT (Figure A-29). product of the force times the perpendicular distance
from the point of application to the axis of rotation.
THREE-POINT CONTACT BEARING: A single row
radial ball bearing where, under a pure radial load, TORQUE TESTER: Equipment used to test starting
each loaded ball makes contact with one of the or running torque of bearings. The force at a given
raceways at two points and with the other raceway distance, required to overcome the resistance of
at one point. Under pure axial load each ball makes a bearing to start or continue running.
contact with each raceway at only one point.
TOUGHNESS: A metallurgical term describing the
THRUST BEARING: A ball or roller bearing with ability of a metal to absorb energy and deform
space between rings oriented perpendicular to the plastically before fracturing.
axis of rotation. Thrust bearings are primarily in-
tended to carry thrust loads. TOXICITY: Relative degree of being poisonous and
harmful to the human body.
THRUST BALL BEARING WITH ALIGNING WASH-
ER (Figure A-3). TRACK ROLLER: A radial roller bearing with a
heavy sectioned outer ring. Used as a roller to roll
THRUST BALL BEARING, BANDED (Figure A-52). on a track.
THRUST BALL BEARING, DOUBLE DIRECTION, TRANSDUCER: A device actuated by power from
LARGE OUTSIDE DIAMETER CENTER WASHER one system and supplying power in the same or
(Figure A-40). any other form to a second system (example,
electrical to acoustic, electrical to mechanical).
THRUST BALL BEARING, DOUBLE DIRECTION,
SMALL BORE CENTER WASHER (Figure A-3). TRANSVERSE: Across usually in a direction per-
pendicular to the reference direction (example,
THRUST BALL BEARING, SINGLE DIRECTION, scratch across the raceway).
FLAT RACEWAY (Figure A-31).
UHF (ULTRA-HIGH FREQUENCY): The frequen-
THRUST BALL BEARING, SINGLE DIRECTION, cies between 300,000,000 to 3,000,000,000 cycles
GROOVED RACEWAY (Figure A-28). per second.
THRUST BALL BEARING, UNGROUND: A rolling ULTRASONIC FREQUENCY (ELECTRONIC HEAT-

bearing with unground raceways. ING): 15,000 to 1,500,000 cycles per second.
THRUST FACE (Figures A-4 and A-36). The face ULTRA-VIOLET: That part of the radiation spectrum
of a bearing intended to support axial loads. where the wavelengths are shorter than visible light
and larger than X-rays.
THRUST LOAD: See Axial Load.
UNDERCUT: A relief cut on the flanged outer rings
THRUST TAPERED ROLLER BEARING (Figure to provide clearance for subsequent grinding and
A-60). finishing operations.
TIGHT WASHER THRUST BEARINGS (Figures UNGROUND BALL OR ROLLER BEARING: A

A-47 and A-48). rolling bearing with unground raceways.
T.I.R.: Total Indicator Reading. Total runout as indi- USED BEARING: A bearing that has been installed
cated by a dial gage or other measuring instrument. and subjected to operating loads.
TOLERANCE: The amount or range a dimension VERTEX: A point that comprises the intersection
may vary from a given value (nominal) and still be of two or more lines or curves.
acceptable.
VIM-VAR: A metallurgical process for vacuum
TORQUE: A moment which produces or tends to melted bearing steel. Vacuum induction melt -
produce rotation or twisting and is measured by the Vacuum arc remelt.
A-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
VISCOSITY: A measure of the internal friction of WAVINESS HEIGHT: Peak to valley distance of the
a liquid or its resistance to flaw. waviness.
VISCOUS FRICTION: Friction due to the viscosity WAVINESS WIDTH: Spacing of successive wave
of fluids or the consistency of greases. peaks or successive wave valleys of the waviness
VOC: Volatile Organic Compound.
WEIBULL CURVE: A straight line graph of rolling
bearing fatigue obtained by plotting as abscissa
VOLATILE: A property of a material to readily
(horizontal) the logarithm of the life and, as ordinate
vaporize at a relatively low temperature.
(vertical), log 1 divided by 1-F where F represents
the “median rank” of the item under consideration.
WASHER, END, NEEDLE BEARING (Figure A-24).
WASHER, FLAT, THRUST BEARING (Figure A-31). WETTABILITY: The degree to which the bearing
surfaces can be wetted by the lubricating oil.
WASHER, FLAT RACEWAY, THRUST BEARING
(Figure A-31). WHITE ROOM: See Clean Room.
WASHER, GROOVED RACEWAY, THRUST BEAR- WIDE INNER RING: An inner ring of a single row
ING (Figure A-28). bearing is made considerably wider than standard.
WASHER, LARGE BORE, THRUST BEARING (Fig-
ure A-28). WIDTH (Figures A-5, A-14, and A-23): The distance
from one face of the inner ring to opposite face
WASHER, LARGE OUTSIDE DIAMETER CENTER, of the outer ring.
THRUST BEARING (Figure A-40).
WIDTH, INNER RING: Dimension across the inner
WASHER, LOCATING, NEEDLE ROLLER BEAR- ring.
ING (Figure A-43).
WIDTH, OUTER RING: Dimension across the outer
WASHER, LOCK (Figure A-1). ring.
WASHER, LOOSE (Figure A-47 and A-48).

WIDTH, RIB, OUTER RING (Figure A-55).
WASHER, RETAINING, NEEDLE ROLLER BEAR-
ING (Figure A-43). WIDTH VARIATION: The variation in the distance
between the faces of the inner or outer ring.
WASHER, SELF-ALIGNING, THRUST BEARING Difference between the largest and smallest widths.
(Figure A-3).
WOUND ROLLER: See Spiral Roller.
WASHER, SELF-ALIGNING SEAT, THRUST BEAR-
ING (Figure A-3).
WRING: To place, position, or insert by a twisting
movement. Used to describe the process of “wring-
WASHER, SMALL BORE, THRUST BEARING (Fig- ing” together gage blocks.
ure A-63).
WASHER, TIGHT, THRUST BEARING (Figures A-47 YIELD RATE: The amount of bearing deflection at
and A-48). a given load. May be given as either radial or axial
or both. The yield rate for a given bearing at a given
WAVEOMETER: A device for indicating relative load may be found by drawing a straight line tangent
waviness of bearing raceways. to the deflection curve at the proper load point.
WAVINESS: Widely space of components of surface YIELD STRENGTH: The stress at which the bearing
texture resulting from such factors as machine or material that is under strain (load) is deformed some
work deflection, vibration, chatter, heat treatment, definite amount and does not return to its original
or warping strains. shape.
A-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a001 00a003
Figure A-1. Rolling Bearing with Figure A-3. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction,
Tapered Adapter Sleeve with Self-Aligning Seat and Self-Aligning Washers
00a002 00a004
Figure A-2. Rolling Bearing, External Figure A-4. Ball Bearing, Single-Row,
Self-Aligning with Aligning Ring Angular-Contact
A-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a005
Figure A-5. Self-Aligning Roller Bearing,
Single-Row, Internal Self-Aligning, Inner 00a007
Ring Raceway Spherical, Angular-Contact Figure A-7. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Filling Slot
00a008
00a006 Figure A-8. Ball Bearing, Single-Row,

Figure A-6. Ball Bearing, Duplex, Back-to-Back Nonfilling Slot (Conrad)
A-29
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a009 00a011
Figure A-9. Ball Bearing, Double-Row with Figure A-11. Ball Bearing, Double-Row, Internal
Vertex of Contact Angle Inside of Bearing Self-Aligning Raceway of Outer Ring Spherical
00a010
Figure A-10. Ball Bearing, Double-Row with 00a012
Vertex of Contact Angle Outside of Bearing Figure A-12. Tapered Bore, Inner Ring
A-30
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a015
00a013 Figure A-15. Tapered Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
Figure A-13. Cam Follower Needle Roller Double Raceway Cup, Separate Cones,
Bearing Outer Ring and Roller Assembly Adjustable by Cone Spacer, Cageless
00a016
00a014 Figure A-16. Ball Bearing, Single Row,

Figure A-14. Tapered Roller Bearing Single-Row Seal Contact Type
A-31
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a017 00a019
Figure A-17. Rolling Bearing Corner Details Figure A-19. Tapered Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
Double Raceway Cup Separate Cones,
Adjustable, with Cage
00a018 00a020
Figure A-18. Tapered Roller Bearing, Single-Row, Figure A-20. Cylindrical Roller Bearing
Locating Flange on Outer Ring Unit Assembly with Outer Ring
Outside Diameter, with Cage Locating Snap Ring
A-32
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a021 00a023
Figure A-21. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Figure A-23. Tapered Roller Bearing,
Raceway Details Double-Row, Double Raceway Cone,
Separate Cups, Adjustable, with Cage
00a022 00a024
Figure A-22. Cylindrical Roller Bearing Figure A-24. Needle Roller Bearing, Double-Row,
Unit Assembly with Outer Ring External Self-Aligning Outer Ring Outside
Locating Snap Ring Groove Diameter Spherical, with Aligning Ring
A-33
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a025
Figure A-25. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, 00a027
Double Shield, Split Inner Ring Figure A-27. Ball Bearing, Duplex, Tandem
00a028
00a026 Figure A-28. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction,
Figure A-26. Ball Bearing, Duplex, Face-to-Face Washers with Groove of Raceway
A-34
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a032
Figure A-32. Ball Bearing, Single-Row,
with Locating Snap Ring
00a029
Figure A-29. Shaft and Housing
00a033
Shield Single
00a030
Figure A-30. Rolling Bearing with
Flange of Outer Ring
00a031 00a034
Figure A-31. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction, Figure A-34. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical
Washers with Flat Raceways Rollers, Single Direction, Flat Seats
A-35
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a035 00a037
Figure A-35. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Figure A-37. Self-Aligning Roller Bearing, Double-
Outer Ring with Internal Roller Row, Internal Self-Aligning, Inner Ring Raceway
Retaining Snap Ring Grooves Spherical, Separate Outer Rings
00a038
00a036 Figure A-38. Self-Aligning, Roller Bearing,
Figure A-36. Clutch Release Bearing, Double-Row, Internal Self-Aligning,
Angular Contact Inner Ring Raceway Spherical
A-36
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a039
Figure A-39. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical
Rollers, Double Direction, Two Self-Aligning
Seats and Washers, One Piece Center 00a041
Plate Flat Seat, One Inside Locating Figure A-41. Cylindrical Roller Bearing,
Collar, Two Roller Cage Assemblies Single-Row, Separable Inner Ring
00a042
00a040 Rollers, Double Direction, Flat Seats,
Figure A-40. Thrust Ball Bearing, Double Direction One Roller Cage Assembly, Inner
Large Outside Diameter Center Washer and Outer Locating Sleeves
A-37
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a043
00a046
Figure A-43. Needle Roller Bearing, Single-Row,
Figure A-46. Cylindrical Roller Bearing,
with Roller Retaining and Locating Washers
Inner Ring with Loose Rib
00a047
00a044
Figure A-47. Thrust Ball Bearing, Single Direction,
Figure A-44. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Separable Washers with Groove of Raceway and Band
Outer Ring with Loose Outer Ring Rib
00a048
00a045 Figure A-48. Roller Thrust Bearing, Cylindrical
Figure A-45. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Separable Rollers, Single Direction Flat Seats,
Inner Ring with Loose Inner Ring Rib Outside Weather Shed
A-38
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a049
Separable (Magneto Type)
00a052
Split Outer Ring
00a050
Figure A-50. Needle Roller Bearing, Single-Row,
Outer Ring and Roller Assembly 00a053
Figure A-53. Tapered Roller Bearing,
Single-Row, Cageless
00a051 00a054
Figure A-51. Ball Bearing, Single-Row, Figure A-54. Self-Aligning Roller Bearing,
External Self-Aligning Outer Ring, Double-Row, Internal Self-Aligning,
Outside Diameter Spherical Outer Ring Raceway Spherical
A-39
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a057
Figure A-57. Ball Bearing, Rod End, Male
00a055
Figure A-55. Cylindrical Roller Bearing, Single-
Row, Outer Ring and Roller Assembly
00a058
Figure A-58. Cylindrical Roller Bearing,
Inner Ring and Roller Assembly
00a059
00a056 Figure A-59. Cylindrical Roller Bearing,
Figure A-56. Ball Bearing, Rod End, Female Separable Outer Ring
A-40
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00a060
Figure A-60. Tapered Roller Thrust
Bearing with Cage
00a063
Figure A-63. Thrust Ball Bearing,
Double Direction, with Small
Bore Center Washer
00a061
Seal, Labyrinth Type
00a064
Figure A-64. Cylindrical Roller Bearing Unit
Assembly with Roller Retaining Snap
Ring in Outer Ring
00a062
Rollers, Single Direction, One Flat, One
Self-Aligning Seat with Aligning Washer
A-41/(A-42 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
APPENDIX B
ENGINEERING DATA
B-1. GENERAL. n. Paragraph B-239: Conversion Tables and

Figures
B-2. Appendix B includes specific engineering
data that applies to the processing and inspection o. Paragraph B-241: Selecting Bearings for
of plain and rolling element bearings. The data is Instrument Applications
provided in the technical manual to help cognizant
systems and bearing engineering personnel provide B-4. MATERIALS USED IN MAKING BEARINGS.
the level of support needed to process bearings at
the various tri-Service bearing facilities. B-5. GENERAL. Materials used in making rolling
and plain bearings have been greatly improved over
the years and continuing research and development
B-3. Information covered in this appendix includes work promises many more advances for the future.
the following topics: The materials suitable for bearing rings and rolling
elements must have the following basic mechanical
a. Paragraph B-4: Materials Used in Making properties:
Bearings
a. Hardness - Resist indenting or brinelling.
b. Paragraph B-35: Manufacturing Methods
for Bearings b. Toughness - Able to absorb considerable
energy before fracturing.
c. Paragraph B-38: Load Capacity and Bear-
c. Heat Resistance - Minimum loss of hard-
ing Life
ness at high temperatures.
d. Paragraph B-54: Forces and Motions in d. Dimensional Stability - Minimum dimension-

Bearings al growth rates with higher temperatures.
e. Paragraph B-76: Application Design e. Wear Resistance - Resist surface wear

from sliding and rolling contact.
f. Paragraph B-84: Lubrication Theory
B-6. COMPOSITION. Steel is the most common
material used in the manufacture of rolling and plain
g. Paragraph B-122: Shaft and Housing Fits bearing. By varying the chemical composition of the
steel, different mechanical properties can be ob-
h. Paragraph B-150: Bearing Tolerances tained. The most important element in steel is
carbon. Carbon imparts to steel its hardness and
improved wear resistance. The addition of other
i. Paragraph B-156: Needle Roller Bearing alloying elements such as chromium, vanadium,
Gaging Practices molybdenum, tungsten and cobalt, contribute to wear
resistance, and in the presence of carbon, provides
j. Paragraph B-166: Selection of Shaft and improved heat resistance and red hardness (higher
Housing Fits hardness levels at elevated temperatures). Corrosion
resistance is obtained by the addition of larger
k. Paragraph B-191: Mounting Methods for percentages of chromium (11.5% minimum). Table
Instrument and Miniature Ball Bearings B-1 gives the chemical composition of through
hardened bearing steels. Refer to figure B-1 for
microstructures of common bearing steels.
l. Paragraph B-205: Balancing and Critical
Speeds B-7. HARDNESS REQUIREMENTS. Materials
used for the rolling elements and rings of normally
m. Paragraph B-208: Clean Room Design and loaded bearings should have a minimum hardness
Construction of Rockwell C 58. This will enable bearings to resist
B-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
brinelling (permanent deformation) with the highest uniformly matched for 1 to 2 points Rockwell C
possible fatigue strength. Heavily loaded bearings hardness higher than the inner ring.
need hardness levels of over Rockwell C 60.
B-9. STANDARD BEARING STEEL. AISI 52100
steel is the most common steel used in aeronautical
B-8. In general, an increase in bearing material bearing applications. Significant improvements have
hardness will result in an increase in dynamic been made in the production and heat treatment
capacity and fatigue life. It has been found that the of this type steel resulting in high quality and
contact surface receiving the greatest number of dependable bearing material. Balls are usually
stress cycles per unit time should be 1 to 2 points manufactured from AISI 51100 which has a slightly
Rockwell C softer than the mating surface. An inner lower chromium content. Table B-2 contains AMS
ring rotating bearing should have balls that are to AISI conversion.
00b001
Figure B-1. Microstructures of Common Bearing Steels
B-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-1. Through-Hardened Rolling Bearing Steels (Nominal Percent By Weight)
Max.
Oper.
Steel Temp. C Cr Mo V W Co Si Mn
_F
AISI 51100 350 1.00 1.05 - - Ć - 0.25 0.35
AISI 52100 350 1.00 1.45 - - Ć - 0.25 0.35
AISI 440C 350 1.00 17.0 0.75 - - - 1.00 1.00
MHT 500 1.00 1.45 - - - - 0.40 0.35
Halmo 600 0.65 4.60 5.2 0.55 - - 1.20 0.27
M-50 600 0.80 4.00 4.25 1.00 - - 0.30 0.30
M-50 NIL* 600 0.13 4.00 4.25 1.25 - - 0.25 0.25
M10 800 0.85 4.00 9.00 2.00 - - 0.25 0.25
T1 800 0.70 4.00 - 1.10 18.00 - 0.30 0.30
M1 900 0.80 4.00 8.50 1.10 1.50 - 0.30 0.30
M2 900 0.84 4.00 5.00 1.90 6.00 - 0.30 0.30
WB-49 1000 1.07 4.40 3.90 2.00 6.00 5.2 0.02 0.30
* Contains 3.5 percent Nickel
Table B-2. Conversion of AMS to AISI Designations for Common Bearing Steels
AMS Specification AISI Code Description
6440 52100 Steel Bars and Forging, Bearing Quality

6441 52100 Steel Tubing, Bearing Quality
6442 50100 Steel Bars and Forging, Bearing Quality
6443 51100 Steel Bars and Forging, Premium Bearing Quality, Con-
sumable Electrode Vacuum Melted
6444 52100 Steel Bars, Forging and Tubing, Premium Bearing Quali-
ty, Consumable Electrode Melted
6445 51100 (Mod) Steel Bars, Forging and Tubing, Premium Quality, Con-
sumable Electrode Vacuum Melted
6446 51000 Steel Bars and Forging, Premium Quality
6447 52100 Steel Bars, Forgings and Tubing, Premium Quality
6490 M-50 Steel Bars, Forgings and Tubing, Premium Bearing
Quality, Consumable Electrode Vacuum Melted
6491 M-50 Steel Bars, Forgings and Tubing, Premium Aircraft-
Quality for Bearing Applications, Double Vacuum Melted
B-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-10. AISI 52100 steel should not be used in poured into an ingot mold and allowed to solidify.
temperature environments above 250_F due to loss The steel ingots are then reheated, hot rolled, and
of hardness that may cause early fatigue failure. In shaped into bars, wire, tubing or forging billets for
addition, its dimensional stability is not adequate at use in the manufacture of rings and rolling elements.
elevated temperatures. Refer to paragraph B-22 for
additional heat treatment data. AISI 52100 steel can B-14. With the advent of modern gas turbines and
be specially heat treated for temperatures up to 350_F rocket engines, and other high power systems, the
with some reduction in hardness. Most bearing need for cleaner steels with reduced quantities of
companies use steel that has been vacuum pro- oxidation products (slag, and nonmetallic inclusions)
cessed or degassed. This should not be confused was evident. The vacuum melting process was
with the vacuum melt process described in paragraph developed in the early 1950s to correct for the
B-12. Improvements have been made in bearing steel inherent deficiencies in air melting processes. The
in recent years, with respect to reduced inclusions two vacuum processes that are currently used for
and gas pockets, resulting in increased bearing life steel production are (1) induction method and (2)
and load capacity. Because of these changes, care consumable electrode method.
should be taken when using bearings that were
manufactured 10 or more years ago, since they may B-15. Induction Melt Process. The induction meth-
not be interchangeable with currently manufactured od utilizes a metal charge that is melted in a
bearing in heavily loaded or life limited applications. refractory (ceramic) lined crucible and then poured
into a refractory lined ingot mold. The whole process
B-11. CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL. Corrosion is conducted in a vacuum atmosphere.
resistant (stainless) steels are used where greater
B-16. Consumable Electrode Process. The con-
resistance to corrosion attack is required. The high
sumable electrode method utilizes an ingot made
chromium steels are more resistant to certain kinds
by the air melt process which is then used as the
of corrosive attack than the standard AISI 52100
electrode. The electrode is progressively melted
bearing steel. Corrosion resistance is a function of
under a vacuum by the heat of the electric arc and
the chromium distribution in the alloy and the amount
the ingot is built up continuously in the water cooled
of carbon-chromium formed carbides. Table B-3
copper mold (figure B-2). This process does not
compares the corrosion resistant steels used as
add nonmetallic impurities to the final product like
bearing materials. AISI 440C is the standard corro-
induction method. A double vacuum melt process
sion resistant steel used to manufacture rolling
called VIM-VAR utilizes the induction melt and the
elements and rings. When specially heat treated the
consumable electrode methods to produce very
hardness levels and load capacity of AISI 440C
clean steel for critical applications. VIM-VAR stands
equals AISI 52100 steel.
for “Vacuum induction melt - Vacuum arc remelt”.
Due to the high cost of the vacuum melt processes,
B-12. VACUUM MELTED STEELS. Processes de- the steel produced by this method is expensive and
veloped by the steel industry for steels used by the is used where the higher costs can be justified
bearing industry have been constantly improved against performance and life requirements. Refer
through the years. This has resulted in significant to table B-4 for specification steels that utilize the
improvements in the quality of basic raw materials vacuum melt process.
used in the manufacture of rolling bearings. By far
the most important improvement has been the B-17. In order to obtain some of the obvious benefits
vacuum melt process which gives cleaner more of vacuum melting at a lower cost, most of the present
inclusion free steels. As background data the stan- day bearings are manufactured from vacuum de-
dard air melt process used in steel production will gassed steel. Although not as effective as vacuum
be described prior to explaining the more expensive melting, the vacuum degassed steel has fewer
vacuum melting process. impurities than standard air melt steel. There are
several different techniques used by the steel produc-
B-13. AISI 52100 steel is normally processed in ers but they all provide similar results. The steel is
an electric furnace in the presence of atmospheric melted in a conventional air melt electric arc furnace.
air. The electric arc passes from the electrodes The molten steel is then poured into a special ladle
through the molten steel, maintaining the proper and placed in a degassing (vacuum) chamber. The
temperature. Steel composition is obtained by select- process is more rapid than vacuum melting, utilizes
ing the proper ratio of steel scrap, pig iron, alloys only one set of equipment, and requires no additional
and slag. When the composition is correct, with the cooling or rolling between initial melting and cast
proper percentages of carbon, chromium, manga- ingots. Load capacity and bearing life is increased
nese, silicone, phosphorous and sulfur, the melt is by this vacuum processing method.
B-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
at temperatures of up to 800_F. This material has

the added advantage of having corrosion resistant
properties.
B-21. A modified form of AISI M-50 tool steel is

referred to as M-50 NIL. It has been developed for
use in aircraft gas turbine engines. The standard
AISI M-50 tool steel has been modified by the
addition of 3.5 percent nickel and a lowering of the
carbon content to 0.13 percent. Slight adjustments
have also been made in the amounts of vanadium
and molybdenum (table B-1). M-50 NIL has excellent
resistance to softening at high temperatures and
has superior fracture toughness characteristics.
B-22. Temperatures above 800_F require the use

of one of the nickel or cobalt based superalloys.
Many of these alloys are of high carbon content
and cannot be forged or machined. These materials
are cast close to the finish dimension. Superalloy
materials are used where temperatures up to 1100_F
00b002 are encountered. Above 1100_F, sintered carbides
Figure B-2. Consumable Electrode or cermets (combination of ceramic and metal) are
Vacuum Melt Process used for the rings and rolling elements. They are
very fragile and subject to physical and thermal
shock damage.
B-18. HIGH TEMPERATURE STEELS. Bearing
steels have been subjected to steadily increasing
temperature environments and higher operating B-23. CASE-HARDENED STEELS. Low carbon,
loads. Figure B-3 shows a temperature range compar- case hardened steels are widely used in the
ison of four different classes of bearing materials. manufacture of rolling bearings. These steels contain
.10% to .25% carbon and varying proportions of
B-19. Since fatigue life is directly related to material nickel, chromium, and molybdenum (table B-5). The
hardness, the effects of temperature and time on steel is case hardened (carburized) after machining
hardness must be considered. The most widely used by heating the part in a controlled inert atmosphere.
high temperature material is AISI M-50 tool steel. Carburizing gas is introduced until the proper carbon
AISI M-50 steel meets the minimum hardness content and case depth is obtained. Quenching is
requirement of Rockwell C 58 at temperatures up accomplished to prevent the formation of an embrit-
to 600_F for up to 1,000 hours of operation. These tling carbide network. The parts are annealed
values compare to standard bearing steel AISI 52100 (temperature is lower than carburizing temperature),
(heat treated) which has a limitation of 350_F for then reheated to obtain a fine grain structure. The
1,000 hours of operation. The hardness of a material parts are quenched in oil and then tempered at a
at elevated temperature is called hot or red hardness relatively low temperature (330_ to 360_F). Final
(figure B-4). The hot hardness of corrosion resistant case hardness is Rockwell C 58-63 with a core
steel AISI 440C is not much better than 52100 steel. hardness of Rockwell C 25-40.
B-20. Most gas turbine engine main shaft bearings B-24. Case hardened steels are used to manufac-
are manufactured from AISI M-50 tool steel. AISI ture most tapered roller bearing rings and rollers.
M-50 is referred to as an intermediate high tempera- These steels have a tough steel core which is very
ture material. The percentage of expensive alloying fracture resistant, and a fatigue resistant hard case
elements is lower than for M-1, M-2, M-10 molybde- (usually 0.050 inch thick) on which is ground the
num-based tool steels which are usable up to 800_F. load carrying raceways. Recent advances in steel
Tungsten tool steel T-1 has been successfully used making techniques have produced superclean steels
in temperature environments up to 1000_F. However, with very low inclusion contents. The use of cleaner
the use of tungsten, an element in critical national case hardened steels will reduce the incidence of
supply, restricts its application. Modified AISI 440C inclusion-initiated bearing fatigue and a correspond-
with 4 percent molybdenum, has adequate hardness ing increase in bearing life.
B-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-3. Stainless Steel and Their Uses
Austenitic Ferritic Martensitic

Chemical Analysis & % 302 304 316 430 410 416 440C
Carbon .15 0.8 .08 .12 .15 .15 1.1

Chromium 18 19 17 16 12.5 13 17
Nickel 9 9 12 - - - -
Molybdenum - - 2.5 - - - .75
Properties
Hardness - Brinell 150 150 150 155
Rockwell B80 B80 B80 B80 - 86 C20-30 C20-30 C56-60
Corrosion Resistance Excellent Very Good Good
Magnetic No Yes Yes
Scale Resistance Excellent Very Good Good
High Temperature Excellent Very Good Good
Strength
Uses Strip Retainers, 2-piece Crown Parts re- Balls
Shields, snap rings, Ribbon Re- retainers quiring hole rings
pivot caps in small tainers drilling or
bearing shafts, and machining
housings after heat
treatment
B-25. S P E C I A L M AT E R I A L S F O R R O L L I N G steel. Snap or crown retainers are manufactured

BEARINGS. Various other materials have had limited from hardened 410 martensitic stainless steel. Most
use in the manufacture of bearings. The outer rings gas turbine engine bearings have retainers that are
of some spherical uniball bearings are made of manufactured of low carbon steel conforming to
aluminum bronze material. The addition of aluminum AMS-6414. The retainers are silver plated to reduce
to copper increases the tensile strength and ductility. friction levels and to act as a solid lubricant during
Aluminum bronze is stronger than brass or tin bronze engine start-up.
and has approximately the same strength of medium
carbon steel with superior corrosion resistance.
Bearings made of beryllium copper and monel are
used in applications requiring a metal having non-
magnetic properties, and resistance to salt water
corrosion. These materials are not as hardenable
as bearing steels, yet offer distinct advantages for
these special applications.
B-26. RETAINER MATERIALS. Materials used to

manufacture bearing retainers must be carefully
selected. Parameters such as torque, speed, temper-
ature and lubrication will determine what material
will be best suited for a particular application. A
few of the more common bearing retainer materials
are as follows:
a. Steel. Strip or ribbon retainers are manufac- 00b003

tured of low carbon steels such as AISI 1008, 1010, Figure B-3. Operating Temperature Ranges
or 1015. All stainless steel bearings have retainers of Common Bearing Materials
made of either 302/304 or 430 corrosion resistant
B-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-4. Consumable Electrode Vacuum and nickel oxide treated. The coefficient of friction
Melted Bearing Steels remains essentially constant from room temperature
to elevated temperature levels. It has the necessary
high temperature strength and the nickel oxide
Aerospace Material Society of Automotive serves to eliminate galling during run-in.
Specifications Engineers Designations
AMS 6443 SAE 51100 e. Nonmetallic. Various nonmetallic materials
are used in retainers for small bearings because
AMS 6443 SAE 52100
of low density, excellent wear resistance, and quiet
AMS 6445 SAE Modified 52100 operation. Phenolic materials have been used exten-
AMS 6490 M-50 sively in gyro rotor bearings. The structural strength
of phenolic, a woven cotton fabric impregnated with
AMS 6491 M-50 VIM-VAR a plastic resin, is adversely affected by high tempera-
tures. Phenolic should not be used at temperatures
above 250_F. Shrinkage and embrittlement of the
b. Brass and Bronze. Various types of brasses phenolic will result, and retainer failure will occur.
and bronzes are used as retainer material such as Porous polyimide is now replacing phenolic as the
AMS 4614 and ASTM B147-7A. The retainers of preferred instrument bearing retainer material. Cylin-
standard bearings are formed by blanking or cold drical slugs made of TFE have replaced the coil
forming operations (presses) and precision bearing springs for very low starting torque applications.
retainers are generally machined from tubing, cast- Sintered (porous) nylon is restricted to low tempera-
ing, or forging material. ture service.
c. Iron-Silicon Bronze. AMS 4615 iron silicon
bronze is widely used as a retainer material in gas B-27. HEAT TREATMENT OF BEARING STEELS.
turbine engine bearings. The material can be forged All heat-treating processes are based on time-tem-
and easily machined to the desired configuration. perature cycles. These cycles include three basic
It has high strength and anti-galling characteristics steps: (1) heating to a specified temperature, (2)
at temperatures up to 400_F. Higher temperatures soaking at the required temperature to ensure
up to 600_F are possible if the decrease in strength uniform temperature throughout the part, and (3)
is acceptable. The machined retainer is generally cooling at a prescribed rate. The total heat treating
electroplated with silver to a thickness of 0.0005 process is extremely important in maintaining the
to 0.0015 inches. Silver plating reduces the tendency manufactured dimensions of the bearing.
of the bearing to seize or gall, especially during
brief periods of insufficient lubrication, as at initial B-28. The standard bearing steels, AISI 52100 and
engine turnover. AISI 440C, are hardened by heating to the proper
temperature which assures the complete formation
d. S-Monel. Monel is an alloy consisting pri- of an austenitic crystalline structure. The alloy is
marily of nickel and copper with small percentages then cooled (quenched) to room temperature and
of iron, manganese, silicon and carbon and is used below, transforming it to a martensitic crystalline
for retainers encountering temperatures exceeding structure, a hard, strong and wear resistant crystal-
400_F. and up to 1000_F. The retainer is machined line form of steel.
Table B-5. Low Carbon, Case Hardened Bearing Steels
Alloying Elements (percent by weight)

AISI Steel
Designation C Si Mn Ni Cr Mo
3310 .08/.13 .20/.35 .45/.60 3.25/3.75 1.40/1.75 .06 max

4320 .17/.22 .20/.35 .45/.65 1.65/2.00 .40/.60 .20/.30
4620 .17/.22 .20/.35 .45/.65 1.65/2.00 .20/max .20/.30
4720 .17/.22 .20/.35 .50/.70 .90/1.20 .35/.55 .15/.25
9310 .08/.13 .20/.35 .45/.60 3.25/3.75 1.40/1.75 .06 max
8620 .18/.23 .20/.35 .70/.90 .40/.70 .40/.60 .15/.25
B-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b004
Figure B-4. Hardness of Bearing Steels at Different Temperature Levels
NOTE ate the transformation. Since the martensite form

of the steel occupies a larger volume than the
Austenite and martensite are different austenite form, the part will actually grow dimension-
crystalline forms or phases of steel. The ally. Dimensional growth can have serious effects
two phases occupy different volumes in on dimensional tolerances, and bearing performance
space. Austenite is a face centered crys- and life. Interference fits will be lost as rings grow
talline structure. The body centered form to larger diameters, and bearing preloading can
(Martensite) has a larger molecular struc- occur when internal clearances are lost by excessive
ture. growth of the rings and rolling elements.
B-29. Not all the austenite is transformed to marten- B-30. To achieve a high degree of dimensional
site and a small percentage remains which is often stability with minimum dimensional growth it is
referred to as retained austenite. The residual or necessary to convert the residual austenite to
retained austenite is metallurgically unstable and will martensite before the parts are finished to final
gradually transform over time to the martensitic dimensions. The parts are processed through a
phase. High temperature environments will acceler- multiple numbers of low temperature (deep freeze
B-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
at -100 to -125_F) and tempering (heating) cycles. mounting fits. As an illustration of the effect of
This will provide dimensional stability of the bearing different thermal expansion rates, housings are
components over the anticipated operating tempera- sometimes cooled by environmental conditions while
ture range. Tempering does decrease the Rockwell the shaft is subject to a constant rate of heat transfer.
hardness and tensile strength properties of the steel. The net effect is a reduction in bearing clearances
However important increases in toughness and and possible bearing seizure.
reduction of residual stresses are obtained.
B-35. MANUFACTURING METHODS.
B-31. The Antifriction Bearing Manufacturers
B-36. BEARING RINGS. Bearing rings are either
Association has established the following definitions
forged to approximate size for subsequent machining
and grouping for dimensional stability:
or are machined directly from tubing or bar stock.
The machined rings are then hardened and tem-
a. Group A - Stabilized rings and rolling
pered to the proper degree of hardness and finished
elements whose dimensional change is less than to final dimensions by grinding. The grinding opera-
0.0001 inch per inch diameter after exposure to a tion on the faces of the rings is accomplished with
temperature of 300_F for 2500 hours. surface grinders. The outside diameters are ground
on centerless grinders. Raceway groove curvatures
b. Group B - Stabilized rings and rolling are developed by form, plunge, or oscillating grind-
elements whose dimensional change is less than ing. In addition, the load carrying surfaces are
0.00015 inch per inch after exposure to a tempera- generally further refined by lapping, polishing, or
ture of 450_F for 1500 hours. honing with fine abrasives. After the final finishing
operation, the rings are matched to a set of graded
c. Group C - Stabilized rings and rolling balls to give a finished bearing the specified radial,
elements whose dimensional change is less than axial clearance and/or contact angle.
0.00015 inch per inch alter exposure to a tempera-
ture of 600_F for 1500 hours. B-37. BEARING BALLS. Raw material for making
balls is either coiled wire for cold pressing balls
d. Group D - Stabilized rings and rolling up to 1 inch in diameter or bar stock for hot pressing
elements whose dimensional change is less than balls more than 1 inch in diameter. The manufacture
0.00015 inch per inch after exposure to a tempera- of balls can be separated into 10 specific steps.
ture of 800_F for 1500 hours. The general technique is illustrated in figure B-5.
B-32. A review of these stabilization requirements a. Pressing. Automatic forging machines

will show that stabilized AISI 52100, the standard called “headers” snip off short lengths of wire or
bearing steel, can only meet the requirements of slugs and press them between cup-like depressions
the first group. Unstabilized AISI 52100 should not in the dies at the rate of 400 a minute or more.
be used at temperatures above 250_F.
b. Flashing. Excess material, which has been
left on the ball after the die impingement, is then
B-33. THERMAL EXPANSION OF BEARING MA-
removed. Balls are fed between two file cut disks.
TERIALS. Thermal expansion coefficients for materi-
The upper disk is kept stationary and the lower disk
als commonly used in bearings, shafts and housings
is allowed to rotate. The balls roll between the plates
are given in table B-6. Dimensional variations
by centrifugal force, removing the flash and nibs
according to temperature changes are also provided.
left by the forming die.
Thermal expansion rates of bearing materials is very
important in many bearing applications. Whenever c. Rough Grinding. The balls are approximate-
bearings are operated at high temperatures, or ly 0.035 inch oversize prior to rough grinding. They
through a wide temperature range, mounting fits are fed into the grinding machine through a slot
should be established that account for the varying between a lower grinding wheel, which rotates
thermal expansion rates of the housing shaft and clockwise at 900 rpm, and an upper driving ring
bearing materials. moving counterclockwise at 60 rpm.
B-34. Light-alloy housings should not be used when d. Multiple Groove Grinding. The balls are
the expected temperature range is greater than 175 subjected to successive grinding machines, each
degrees unless steel liners are utilized. When machine with a finer grinding capacity. The balls
bearings are expected to operate under variable enter the grinder varying about 0.002 inch in size
temperatures, consideration should be given to the and sphericity and leave with sphericity and uniformi-
internal clearances of the bearings as well as ty accurate to within 0.001 of an inch.
B-9
B-10
Table B-6. Coefficients of Thermal Expansion (Dl=cDT)

(reference temperature = 70_F)
Steel Alloys Stainless Steel Alloys Bronze Alloys Aluminum Alloy

Tita- Aluminum Manga- Magne-
Material nium 52100 1020 440C 17-4 PH 304 Silicon nese 2024 7075 sium
Expansion Coeff, c ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I= ∆I=
x 10-6 in/in - _F 4.8 6 6.5 5.6 6 9.6 10 11.8 12.6 13 14.6
Measuring C
Temperature, _F O
N
T
R
50 .000096 .000120 .000130 .000112 .000120 .000192 .000200 .000236 .000252 .000260 .000292 A
55 .000072 .000090 .000098 .000084 .000090 .000144 .000150 .000177 .000189 .000195 .000219 C
60 .000048 .000060 .000065 .000056 .000060 .000096 .000100 .000118 .000126 .000130 .000146 T
65 .000024 .000030 .000033 .000028 .000030 .000048 .000050 .000059 .000073 .000065 .000073 I
68 .000010 .000012 .000013 .000011 .000012 .000019 .000020 .000024 .000025 .000026 .000029 O
69 .000005 .000006 .000007 .000006 .000006 .000010 .000010 .000012 .000013 .000013 .000015 N
T= 70 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000 .000000
71 .000005 .000006 .000007 .000006 .000006 .000010 .000010 .000012 .000013 .000013 .000015 E
72 .000010 .000012 .000013 .000011 .000012 .000019 .000020 .000024 .000025 .000026 .000029 X
73 .000014 .000018 .000020 .000017 .000018 .000029 .000030 .000035 .000038 .000039 .000044 P
74 .000019 .000024 .000026 .000022 .000024 .000038 .000040 .000047 .000050 .000052 .000058 A
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
75 .000024 .000030 .000033 .000028 .000030 .000048 .000050 .000059 .000063 .000065 .000073 N
80 .000048 .000060 .000065 .000056 .000060 .000096 .000100 .000118 .000126 .000130 .000146 S
85 .000072 .000090 .000098 .000084 .000090 .000144 .000150 .000177 .000189 .000195 .000219 I
90 .000096 .000120 .000130 .000112 .000120 .000192 .000200 .000236 .000252 .000260 .000292 O
95 .000120 .000150 .000163 .000140 .000150 .000240 .000250 .000295 .000315 .000325 .000365 N
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
100 .000144 .000180 .000195 .000168 .000180 .000288 .000300 .000354 .000378 .000390 .000438
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b005
Figure B-5. Manufacturing Steps for Bearing Balls
e. Tumbling. After grinding, the balls are cardboard on the balls makes the surface defects
retumbled in abrasive grit and water removing any instantly discernible.
excess material and rough spots.
j. Gaging. Electronic and air gaging sorts the
f. Heat Treatment. The balls are heat treated balls into multiple groups, graded to size in accor-
so they are evenly hardened from the center to the dance with Specification MIL-B-1083 (Balls, Bearing,
surface. They are tempered to give toughness. They Ferrous and Non Ferrous).
are placed in a shaker hearth as they are fed into
the furnace. The balls, being in constant motion, B-38. LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY AND LIFE OF
start at room temperature and move slowly into ROLLING BEARINGS.
progressively hotter areas up to about 1500_F after B-39. BEARING LIFE. The life of a bearing that
which they are quenched, followed by processing is properly lubricated, correctly installed, of adequate
through tempering furnaces. design and properly handled, will be a function of
fatigue of the material. The fatigue life of an
g. Precision Grinding. The balls roll hour after individual bearing is defined as the number of
hour against the hardest kind of grinding wheel. They revolutions, cycles, or hours at a given speed, which
follow a path determined by guide plates. In about the bearing can be expected to operate before the
12 hours they are true in size and sphericity to within first evidence of fatigue develops in the material
0.001 inch. of either ring raceway or any of the rolling elements.
Fatigue of the bearing material is primarily a function
h. Lapping. Final lapping is accomplished by of both the load and the speed of rotation. Fatigue
passing the balls between one smooth plate and life of a bearing is also influenced by the lubricant
one grooved plate while bathed in special lapping (and its properties), operating temperature, contami-
compound. Variation between balls is then within nation and the surface finish of the contacting
0.000025 inch and to even closer tolerances on surfaces.
bearings manufactured for bearings of ABEC-5
precision or higher. B-40. Explanation of Material Fatigue. In rotation-
al or oscillating bearings, the rolling elements and
i. Inspection. Inspection is performed by plac- raceway surfaces are subjected to cyclic loads. This
ing the balls on a smooth surface under a bright cyclic stressing and unstressing induced by the
light with a sheet of white cardboard under the balls loading pattern causes flexing of the bearing sur-
to turn them easily. The reflection of another faces and ultimately results in metal fatigue.
B-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-41. In technical terms, fatigue failure can be

summarized as follows: Bearing rotation under a
load condition causes high triaxial-compressive
stresses in the raceway under each rolling element.
Associated with these compressive-stress fields are
shearing stresses distributed as shown in figure B-6,
with the maximum stress (1.0) occurring below the
ring raceway surface. Repeated loading causes
progressive plastic flow and work hardening below
the surface. The location of the cold worked region
has been associated with the depth of the fatigue
spalled material.
B-42. RATING LIFE. Actual bearing life will vary

between identical bearings. But when life dispersion
is considered for a large group of identical bearings
run under the same conditions of load and speed,
a typical life dispersion will have the approximate
form of figure B-7. The rating life (B10 or L10) is
defined as the number of revolutions at a constant 00b006
speed that 90 percent of the bearings will complete Figure B-6. Distribution of Subsurface
or exceed before the first evidence of fatigue Shear Stresses in Rolling Bearings
develops. The rating life is also referred as the
minimum life, since designers prefer a safety factor Roller bearings:
to minimize the chance of early bearing failure.
3.33
L = |C|
B-43. AVERAGE LIFE. Average life is the sum of |P|
all bearing lives divided by the number of bearings.
Where: C = Basic dynamic load rating lb.
B-44. MEDIAN LIFE. Median life is the life that (Catalog value)
50 percent of the bearings will complete or exceed. P = Bearing load lb.
L = Rating life in millions of revolutions
NOTE B-46. A review of these equations show that, by

halving the load, the life of a ball bearing is increased
by approximately eight times and the life of a roller
Average and median lives are used only bearing approximately ten times. The formula for
when safety and maintenance economy bearing life in hours of operation is:
are not important.
3 or 3.33
B-45. BEARING LIFE FORMULAS. Ultimately, fa- L = 16670 |C|
tigue spalling is unavoidable. However, life as a H n |P|
function of the load can be adjusted and is normally
greater than the life of the component that contains Where: n = speed of rotation, rpm
the bearing. Experimental data has shown that
bearing life varies inversely to the applied load raised B-47. Reducing speed by 50 percent, while keeping
to an exponential power. In general the following the load constant, will double the theoretical bearing
equations apply: life. Bearing life can be approximated by using the
nomogram illustrated in figure B-8.
Ball bearings: B-48. BEARING LOADS. Bearings are designed

to carry either a thrust load, a radial load, or a
3 combination of thrust and radial load termed, thrust-
L = |C| radial or angular load (figure B-9). The definitions
|P|
of these load terms are as follows:
B-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
(1) Weight of Parts. Includes the weight of

shafts, gears, pulleys and other component parts
supported by the bearings.
(2) Tension. Includes belts and chains that

are used to transmit power.
(3) Tangential and Torque Forces. The

twisting effect of gears and/or friction wheels on the
supporting bearings.
(4) Centrifugal Forces. This includes con-

centric rotation of the rolling elements about the
bearing axis, and eccentric rotation due to imbalance
and/or eccentric rotation about another axis as in
a planetary gear assembly.
(5) Inertia Forces. Forces that are devel-

oped during rapid acceleration and deceleration of
the component/assembly.
b. Thrust Loads.
(1) Weight of Parts. Includes gears, shaft,

and other parts mounted in a vertical position and
supported by the bearings.
00b007
Figure B-7. Typical Life Dispersion Curve (2) Applied Thrust Forces. Includes all
for Rolling Bearings forces applied during operation such as drilling, jet
engine thrust reaction, etc.
(3) Thrust components of certain gear teeth

a. Radial Load. Radial load is the load that reaction forces such as in helical and bevel gear
is applied at right angles (90 degrees) to the assemblies.
rotational axis of the bearing (figure B-9a).
(4) Centrifugal Forces. Includes thrust com-
b. Thrust (Axial) Load. Thrust load is the load ponents of load, such as loading of wheel bearings
that is applied in the same direction as the bearings’ while turning corners.
axis of rotation (figure B-9b).
(5) Propeller Thrust Loads.
c. Angular Load. Angular (Combined) load is
the resultant single load produced by the individual (6) Unbalanced hydraulic forces in centrifu-
components of radial and thrust loads (figure B-9c). gal pumps and hydraulic torque converters.
Use the following formula:
c. Axial thrust loads that are applied off-center
to the bearing rotational axis will induce a thrust
C = ǨR2 + T2 moment which is resisted by radial reactions at the
supporting bearing.
Where: C = Combined Load
R = Radial Load B-50. STATIC LOAD CAPACITY. Bearings that do
T = Thrust Load not rotate or oscillate are not subject to fatigue
spalling. However, there is a limit to the static load
that can be supported by a nonrotating bearing. This
B-49. SOURCES OF BEARING LOADS. The most static load capacity is determined by the extent of
common sources of bearing loads are as follows: permanent deformation that will occur in the load
carrying surfaces of the bearing, or the fracture limit
a. Radial loads: of any part of the bearing.
B-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b008
Figure B-8. Calculation of Bearing Life
B-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
original bright manufacture surface finish. This does

not affect the quality or usefulness oil the bearing.
B-52. DYNAMIC LOAD CAPACITY. The term dy-

namic load carrying capacity is used to explain the
load capacity of a rotating bearing. The load can
be either steady state, variable, or shock loads.
a. Basic Load Rating C (Radial Capacity). The

load capacity of a radial bearing (ball and roller)
is; “that constant stationary radial load which a group
of apparently identical bearings with stationary outer
rings can endure for a rating life of one million
revolutions of the inner ring”.
b. Load Ratings for Specific Speeds. Load

ratings, if given for specific speeds, are based on
rating life of 500 hours.
B-53. FACTORS AFFECTING DYNAMIC LOAD

CAPACITY. The load carrying capacity of rolling
bearings is directly affected by the following factors
and are included in the basic load rating formulas:
00b009
Ball Bearings
Figure B-9. Types of Loads Encountered
in Rolling Bearings (Balls under 1” Dia) C = fc (i cos a).7 z2/3 d1.8
a. Permanent Deformation. External loads (Balls over 1” Dia.) C = f (i cos a).7 z2/3 dc1.4
may generate a level of stress in the contact area
that will exceed the elastic limit of the material. This Roller Bearings C = fc (i l cos a)7/9 z3/4 d29/27
will cause permanent deformation of the loaded
surfaces of the bearing. Studies have shown that Where: C = Basic load rating (radial load).
a total permanent deformation (compression) of d = Ball/Roller diameter.
0.0001 times the diameter of the rolling element i = Number of rows of rolling elements.
can be tolerated in most bearing applications without I = Effective length of contact between
detrimental effects. one roller and that ring where the
contact is the shortest.
b. Basic Static Load Rating. Basic static load (Overall roller length minus
rating is defined as; “that static radial load which grinding undercuts).
corresponds to a total permanent deformation of z = Number of rolling elements per row.
ball/roller and ring raceway, at the most heavily i = Number of rows of rolling elements.
stressed contact, of 0.0001 of the ball/roller diameter”. a = The contact angle.
c = Geometry of the bearing
B-51. Permanent deformations greater than 0.0001 components, the accuracy to which
of the ball/roller diameter can be tolerated if subse- the various parts are made, and
quent bearing rotation is relatively slow, and smooth- the material.
ness and friction torque requirements are not impor- f = Material and hardness factor
tant. However, even 0.0001 of the ball/roller diameter 7450 for ball bearings (when pound
is too much for applications requiring extreme and inch units are used) 49500 for
smoothness and low torque levels. In practice, the roller bearings.
active surfaces of the rings and rolling elements Rc = Material Hardness in Rockwell “C”
are not perfectly smooth, and a certain amount of units.
flattening or deformation of the high points will occur
under normal loads. This can be observed on a a. Size of Rolling Elements. The bearing
used bearing surface where the dull symmetrical capacity increases as the ball or roller diameter
pattern of the rolling element path has replaced the increases. For balls to 1” diameter, the increase
B-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
in load capacity is almost proportional to the square

of the ball diameter.
C is proportional to d1.8
Roller bearing capacity is proportional to the roller

diameter (mean diameter for tapered rollers) times
the effective length of contact.
C is proportional to d x 1
b. Number of Rolling Elements. Bearing capac- 00b010

ity increases with greater number of balls or rollers Figure B-10. Load Capacity as a
(figure B-10). Increase in load capacity is not directly Function of Ball Complement
proportional since the total number of bearing revolu-
tions in the life equation is also affected. Therefore, f. Material and Hardness. The factor fc in-
the capacity is less than proportional. cludes parameters of material type and hardness.
It is based on current tests of rolling bearings of
C (ball bearing) is proportional to Z2/3 good quality and clean steels hardened to Rockwell
C 58-66. When material hardness is reduced due
C (roller bearing) is proportional to Z3/4 to improper heat treatment or excessive operational
temperatures, the dynamic load capacity decreases
rapidly. See table 9-2 for hardness vs tensile
c. Number of Rows of Rolling Elements. strength. The following formula has been used to
Radial load capacity is directly proportional to the approximate the reduction in load capacity for drop
number of rows of balls/rollers (figure B-11). This in material hardness.
is based on the assumption that there is an equal
distribution of the load between the rows of rolling fc = Rc 3.6
elements. Due to manufacturing tolerances, a correc- 58
tion factor is usually required, making the ratio of
capacity-to-number of rows less than 1 to 1. g. Internal Clearance. The internal clearance
within a bearing affects the load distribution over
C (ball bearings) i.7 individual rolling elements and consequently affects
the basic radial load capacity. An increase in internal
C (roller bearings) i7/9 clearance will decrease load capacity by decreasing
the number of rolling elements over which the load
is distributed.
d. Contact Angle. Load capacity of a radial
bearing is proportional to the cosine of the angle B-54. FORCES AND MOTIONS IN BEARINGS.
the load makes with the vertical plane (figure B-12).
Radial load capacity decreases with increasing B-55. FRICTION. There are several different types
contact angles, whereas, thrust load capacity in- of frictional forces that are generated within a rolling
creases with increasing contact angles. bearing that resists its motion. They are as follows:
C (ball bearings) (cos a) .7 B-56. Rolling Friction. When an external load is

applied to a bearing, the load is balanced by the
7/9
area of contact between the rolling elements and
C (roller bearings) (cos a) the raceways. When the bearing is rotated, the
pressure in front of the rolling elements (in the
e. Type of Contact. Load capacity is also direction of the rolling motion) is slightly greater than
affected by the type of contact the balls or rollers behind them, due to elastic hysteresis (definite time
makes with the raceway. In general, the greater the lapse before deformed surface regains its original
contact area, the higher the load capacity. For this shape) (figure B-13). This difference in pressure
reason, a roller bearing can support much higher depends on the material, shape of contacting sur-
radial loads than a ball bearing with equivalent rolling faces and the amplitude of the load. The tangential
element diameters. See paragraph 2-150 for addi- force T is necessary to displace both rig raceways
tional information on contact areas. under the influence of the load (figure B-14).
B-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-57. Sliding Friction.
a. Sliding occurs in rolling bearings, especially

where the rolling elements slide against the retainer
pocket surfaces.
b. Ring-guided retainers are a source of

sliding friction. The ring and retainer surfaces rotate
at different speeds with respect to each other.
c. The roller ends slide against the guiding

flange and are a source of friction in roller bearings.
d. There is one source of sliding friction that

00b011 is usually forgotten in rolling bearings. Since there
Figure B-11. Load Capacity as a Function is, under load conditions, an area instead of point
of Rows of Rolling Elements or line contact, there are sliding friction components
in rolling motion. Pure rolling only occurs under
conditions of zero load.
B-58. Lubricant Friction. The magnitude of friction

generated by the lubricant is dependent upon
lubricant viscosity, quantity of lubricant and rotational
speed. Lubricant friction is developed in two places:
(1) by the fluid film compressed between the rolling
elements and the raceways and (2) by the bearing
parts displacing the lubricant as they pass through
it. This is the reason why overlubricated bearings
become hot and overheated.
B-59. Coefficient of Friction. The friction coeffi-

cient is needed when determining the friction torque
developed within rolling bearings. The following
00b012 formula and the friction coefficients in table B-7 can
Figure B-12. Load Capacity as a be used for normal operating conditions and favor-
Function of Contact Angle able lubrication. The formula does not account for
viscous friction.
M = mfFd inch-pounds
Where: M = Torque in inch-pounds
mf = Coefficient of friction
F = Bearing Load in pounds
d = Bearing bore in inches
B-60. STRESSES AND DEFORMATIONS. When

two solid metal bodies are pressed against each
other, an area of contact develops as a result of
00b013
the elastic properties of the metals. The form of
Figure B-13. Actual Shape of Active Surfaces the contact area is a function of the geometry of
of Ball Bearing Under Load the bodies and the magnitude of the applied force.
B-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-7. Coefficient of Friction of Rolling Bearings
Bearing Types Friction Coefficient, mf

Single-Row Ball .0015
Self-aligning Ball .0010
Thrust Ball .1103
Cylindrical Roller with Flange .0010
Guided Rollers
Spherical Roller .0018
Tapered Roller .0018
Needle Roller .0045
B-61. Ball Bearings. The contact area for ball than two rolling elements carry the load in order
bearings under no-load conditions is called “point to reduce excessive loading and bearing damage.
contact”. When a load is applied to the bearing,
an elliptically shaped area results. This is the result B-65. The load capacity and life of a bearing is
of two curved surfaces under compression (figure directly affected by the amount of the raceway over
B-15). which the load is distributed. This factor is important
since it determines the number of stress cycles to
B-62. Roller Bearings. The contact area for cylin- which any part of the bearing is subjected. The inner
drical rollers under no-load is called “line contact”. ring raceway diameter is smaller than the outer ring
When load is applied, the line shaped contact raceway diameter and, therefore, has a smaller
becomes rectangular. However, the length of the contact area and a higher stress level (figure B-18).
rollers and the width of the raceway are not usually This is the primary reason the inner ring of a bearing
equal, and the pressure and resulting contact area usually fails first in fatigue.
is increased at the ends of the rollers (figure B-16).
In order to reduce this stress concentration, the B-66. Inner ring rotation is used to compute the
rollers, raceways, or both are modified. Examples basic radial load capacity of rolling bearings. When
of the modified line contact area are given in figure outer ring rotation is utilized, a correction factor has
B-17. to be used to compensate for a reduction in load
supporting area on the inner ring raceway. This can
be seen in figure B-19. With outer ring rotation, the
B-63. DEFORMATION. Elastic deformation takes rolling elements and retainer assembly rotate at a
place in a properly designed and loaded bearing. higher rotational speed, imposing a greater number
That is, the raceway and rolling elements deform of stress cycles on the inner or outer ring raceways.
under load and then return to their original geometric
shape when the load is removed (figure B-13). B-67. The load distribution patterns in specific types
Permanent deformation occurs when the stress level of rolling bearings are as follows:
in an area of contact between the raceway and the
rolling elements exceed the elastic limit for the
material. The greatest deformation takes place in B-68. Single-Row Radial Bearings. A radial bear-
the raceway where the curvature is least conforming ing with zero contact angle, and no radial clearance,
to the rolling element. Approximately one-third of will deflect only radially and half of the rolling
the deformation occurs in the rolling element and elements will be loaded (figure B-20a). However,
two-thirds in the raceway of the ring. for most applications there is some bearing clear-
ance and out-of-round deflection of the bearing.
Under these conditions, the load is carried by less
B-64. LOAD DISTRIBUTION. Bearings are de- than one-half of the rolling elements. The most highly
signed to carry either a thrust load, a radial load, stressed rolling element may carry as much as 20
or a combination of the two, termed thrust-radial percent of the load (figure B-20b). The maximum
or angular load (figure B-9). These externally applied rolling element load can generally be determined
forces are transmitted through the rolling elements for both ball and roller bearings by the following
from one ring raceway to the other. Usually more equation:
B-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
5 Fr
Max Load =
Z
Where: Z = Number of rolling elements

Fr = Radial Load
B-69. Single-Row, Angular-Contact Bearings.

Load distribution in angular-contact bearings has to
be analyzed in terms of the radial and thrust
components (figure B-21). It is seen in figure B-22
that the number of balls supporting the load in an
angular contact bearing will vary according to the
direction of the resultant force. As the magnitude
of the radial and thrust loads changes, new positions
of the resultant force will act on the bearing.
B-70. When the load angle equals the contact angle

the load is supported by only one ball (figure B-22a).
Deflection is purely radial when Fa = Fr tan B, and
one-half the balls support the load, (figure B-22b).
All of the balls begin to share the load when tan
a = 1.8 x tan B (figure B-22c). Finally for B = 90
degrees, the load is equally supported by all the
balls (figure B-22d). Note, when the load angle is
less than the contact angle, the inner and outer
00b014 rings will separate. The maximum rolling element
Figure B-14. Load Distribution in a load can be determined from the following equation:
Ball Bearing Under Load
5Fr
Max Load =
Z cos a

Fr = Radial Load
a = Contact angle
B-71. Double-Row Bearings. Double-row bearings

with a contact angle of zero will have essentially
the same load distribution as for single-row radial
bearings. When the contact angle is greater than
zero an internal thrust component is developed even
with pure radial loads. Half of the rolling elements
will be loaded and the load will be the same in
both rows.
5Fr
Max Load =
2 Z cos a

Fr = Radial load
a = Contact angle
B-72. When a thrust load is applied, the load zone

and the maximum rolling element load increases
00b015 in one row and decreases in the other row. When
Figure B-15. Contact Area for Ball the thrust load equals 1.8 Fr tan a, all the rolling
Bearings Under Load elements are loaded in one row and the other row
supports no load.
B-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-75. Formulas for General Use.
a. Contact Angle.
Inner Ring Rotation
Cos a =
PD 1 Ć 2 Nr
d Ni
Outer Ring Rotation
PD Nr Ć1
Cos a = 2
d No
Where:
a = Contact angle
PD = pitch diameter in inches
d = ball diameter in inches
Nr = number of cage rotations
Ni = number of inner ring rotations
No = number of outer ring rotations
Use 10 revolutions for Ni and substitute values for

“a” to solve for Nr. Pick values on both sides of
required “a”. Multiply decimal part of Nr by 360 to
00b016 get number of degrees of partial rotation.
Figure B-16. Contact Area for Roller
Bearings Under Load b. Retainer and Rolling Element Orbital
Speed.
B-73. Thrust Bearings. When a pure thrust load Inner Ring Rotation:
is applied through the bearing axis the displacement
is purely axial and the load is uniformly supported
by all the rolling elements (figure B-23). The maxi- V = Ni 1Ć
d
cos a
2 PD
mum rolling element load is equal to:
Fa Where:
Max Load = Ni = inner ring speed, rpm
Z sin a d = ball diameter, inches
PD = pitch diameter, inches
Where: Fa = thrust load a = contact angle
Z = number of rolling elements V = velocity in rpm
a = contact angle
c. Rolling Element Rotational Speed
B-74. For a thrust bearing with a contact angle of
90 degrees, the load is supported equally by all
2
rolling elements and the maximum rolling element
load is:
V= PD Ni 1Ć
2d {PD
d
} cos a2
Fa B-76. APPLICATION DESIGN.

Max Load =
Z
B-77. GENERAL. Additional information concerning
Where: Fa = thrust load mounting and adjusting rolling bearings is located
Z = number of rolling elements in Section XII.
B-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b017
Figure B-17. Modified Line Contact for Roller Bearings Under Load
B-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b018 00b020
Figure B-18. Effects of Raceway Figure B-20. Effects of Internal Clearance
Curvature on Load Area of Load Distribution
B-78. PRELOADING. When a rolling bearing is

subjected to an external load, a certain amount of
deflection takes place within the bearing assembly.
Movement of the bearing allows the supported parts
to move. This deflection or movement of related
gears, shafts, etc., can be very detrimental to close
tolerance, precision balanced assemblies.
B-79. It is seen from figure B-24 that the initial

axial deflection “d” caused by a load “L” is much
greater than the additional deflection “d1,” that is
obtained by the application of additional load “L1,”
where L = L1. Therefore, if the initial deflection is
absorbed by preloading or the application of a
sufficient axial load prior to imposing the operating
load, much closer control on deflection can be
obtained. When an external thrust load is applied,
the additional deflection causes a partial relief of
the original preload. The bearing then carries the
operating load plus the remaining preload.
B-80. Axial preloading is used principally to mini-

mize the deflection of the bearing under load and
to prevent skidding in bearings that are subjected
to light and/or variable loads. It is accomplished by
the use of preadjusted bearings, by axial adjustment
during mounting, or by means of thrust washers
or springs.
B-81. Axial Adjustment During Mounting. Axial

preload is obtained by tightening a locknut or cap
screw arrangement on the shaft or housing, and
axially displacing one of the bearing rings (figure
B-25a). The arrangement is used where the distance
00b019
Figure B-19. Effects of Ring Rotation between bearings is small. Correct mounting de-
on Bearing Loads pends on the skill and experience of the installing
personnel. Spacers are used to lightly preload
B-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
single-row radial ball bearings (figure B-25d). The

length of the outer spacers is longer than the inner
spacer and automatically provides the proper adjust-
ment. Shims are also used to provide light-to-
medium preloads (figure B-25c). The thickness of
the shim is carefully chosen to give the proper axial
adjustment.
B-82. Spring Method of Preloading. Springs are

used in applications requiring a constant preload
regardless of changing shaft and housing tempera-
tures. This method of preloading is sometimes used
on high-speed spindles and to maintain a minimum
thrust load on thrust bearings. Small bearings are
often preloaded with wave or finger loading springs
(figure B-25b).
B-83. Preadjusted Bearings. Single-row, angular-

contact bearing are ground by the bearing manufac-
turer so that the ring face surfaces are flush under
a specified thrust load. This is done by placing a
predetermined thrust load on the bearings, measur-
ing the offset, and then grinding off the measured
amount (figure B-26a). When the bearings are 00b021
mounted, the correct preload is automatically ob- Figure B-21. Applied Loads Acting
tained when the rings are drawn together either on Angular-Contact Bearings
directly or with equal length spacers (figure B-26b).
Preloaded duplex bearings can be mounted in the
following variations: (4) Axial and radial rigidity must be consid-
ered to reduce shaft misalignment and deflection
a. Duplex DB. A matched pair of bearings is (5) Allowance for thermal expansion of shaft
mounted back-to-back (DB) with the wide shoulders in the axial direction
in contact. Clamping the inner rings together places
a predetermined preload on the bearings. The outer b. Duplex DF. A matched pair of bearings is
rings may float in the housing to allow for thermal mounted face-to-face (DF) with the narrow shoulders
expansion. The contact angles of the two bearings in contact. Clamping the inner and outer rings
diverge as they approach the bearing bore axis, together places a predetermined preload on the
resulting in an effective spread between each row bearings. The contact angles of the two bearings
of rolling elements that is greater than the axial converge as they approach the bearing bore axis
distance between the rolling elements (figure B-27). resulting in an effective spread between each row
This provides greater resistance to overturning of rolling elements that is less than the axial distance
moments and angular deflection. This type of mount- between the rolling elements (figure B-27). This
ing is used in applications involving the following provides less resistance to overturning moments and
requirements: angular deflection, but allows for slight shaft binding
and/or housing misalignment. This type of mounting
is used in applications involving the following:
(1) Heavy radial load capacity requirements
(1) Heavy radial load capacity requirements
(2) Equal thrust load capacity in both direc- (2) Equal thrust capacity in both directions
tions
(3) Axial and radial rigidity
(3) Resistance to overturning moments (an- (4) Installations where slight housing mis-
gular rigidity) alignment and shaft bending is unavoidable
B-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b022
Figure B-22. Effect of Applied Forces on Load Distribution in Angular-Contact Bearings
c. Duplex DT. A matched pair of hearings is design preload is automatically obtained when the
mounted tandem (DT) with the large shoulder of specially ground faces of the rings are clamped
one bearing in contact with the narrow shoulder of together during assembly.
the other bearing. Clamping the rings together
provides a mounting arrangement that can carry B-84. LUBRICATION.
heavy thrust loads in one direction.
B-85. GENERAL. Proper lubrication is essential to
d. Combinations of DB, DF, and DT. Any
the successful operation of bearing application. The
combination of the basic mounting arrangements of
type of lubricant selected and used is dependent
DB, DF and DT can be utilized in special applica-
on the specific application, the individual bearing
tions. Helicopter stack bearings, for example, are
design, and the unique operating conditions that will
arrangements of DT bearings mounted in DB rela-
be encountered.
tionship to a single or multiple bearing set. Increases
in thrust loads can be carried by increasing the
number of bearings in the stack (figure 2-15). B-86. FUNCTION OF A LUBRICANT. Functions of
a lubricant in a rolling bearing are as follows:
e. Double-row tapered roller bearings can be
obtained with a factory designed preload. The a. To reduce sliding friction by maintaining an
bearings have one double ring (cone or cup) and oil film between the rolling elements, the retainer
two single rings (cups or cones) (figure 2-37). The and the ring lands.
B-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. To reduce rolling friction by maintaining an

oil film between the rolling elements and the race-
ways.
c. To dissipate the excess heat that is gener-

ated within the bearing assembly.
d. To prevent corrosion pitting attack by acting

as a rust preventive.
e. To act as sealant to prevent contamination

from external sources.
f. To remove microscopic wear particles from

the active bearing surfaces.
B-87. One of the more important functions of a

lubricant is to provide a protective film at the areas
of sliding and/or rolling contact. There are several
areas even in a rolling bearing assembly where
sliding motion takes place and, if adequate lubrica-
tion is not provided, early failure can be expected.
Sliding motion occurs in the following locations in
a rolling element-type bearing:
a. Between the balls/rollers of full complement

(retainerless) bearings.
b. Between the balls/rollers and the retainer

pocket contacting surfaces.
00b023
c. Between the retainer and the ring land
Figure B-23. Contact Angles in Thrust Bearings guiding surfaces.
d. Between the balls/rollers and the raceways.
B-88. PRINCIPLES OF LUBRICATION. Lubrication

basically involves the support of a load on a friction
reducing film. Friction and wear is reduced by
introducing a lubricating film in between rubbing
surfaces (figure B-28). There are several different
modes of lubrication and they are briefly described
as follows:
B-89. Hydrodynamic Lubrication. Hydrodynamic

lubrication occurs when two bodies are moved with
respect to each other in the presence of a lubricant.
The velocity of the lubricant between the two
surfaces increases and a “pumping” action is devel-
oped. Adhesion to the moving surface draws oil into
the high pressure area between the surfaces, and
the viscosity of the lubricant retards the tendency
to squeeze the film out. When the wedging effect
of the lubricant is great enough to completely
00b024 separate the two surfaces, full-fluid film, hydrody-
Figure B-24. Load-Deflection Curve namic lubrication has been achieved. Some of the
for Rolling Bearings properties of lubricants that affect the fluid-film are
illustrated in figure B-29.
B-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b025
Figure B-25. Methods of Preloading Ball Bearings
B-90. Squeeze-Film Lubrication. Squeeze-film, and have a high affinity (attraction) for metal
fluid-film lubrication utilizes the principle that when surfaces. More severe cases of boundary lubrication
two surfaces move toward each other with sufficient are taken care of by adding extreme pressure (EP)
speed, fluid pressure will be developed that can additives. When high localized temperatures are
support a load for short periods of time. Because generated during metal-to-metal contact the EP
of the viscosity of the lubricant, the fluid cannot additive combines chemically with the metal surfaces
immediately flow away from the area of contact. to form a strong surface film. The film reduces friction
The surfaces are separated by the lubricant film. and prevents welding of aspirates (local high spots)
and subsequent scoring that is so destructive to
B-91. Boundary Lubrication. Boundary lubrication sliding surfaces. Active compounds of sulfur, chlo-
is used when the operating conditions preclude the rine, and phosphorous are used as EP additives.
establishment of full-fluid film hydrodynamic lubrica-
tion. Boundary lubrication occurs in applications
involving slow speeds, high contact pressures, B-93. Hydrostatic Lubrication. Pressures capable
stop-and-start or reversals, and where a fluid film of supporting an applied load are either generated
is either collapsed or cannot be generated. Chemical within the fluid film (hydrodynamic) or supplied to
additives are compounded into the lubricant to the film from an outside source so that the bearing
prevent excessive friction and wear. Film strengths surfaces are forced apart. The externally pressurized
can be developed that are greater than can be fluid-film is called hydrostatic lubrication. The pres-
obtained from the base oil. sure is usually supplied by an external pump or
accumulator. Primary advantages are very low fric-
B-92. Mild conditions of boundary lubrication are tion and high rigidity. A hydrostatic fluid-film bearing
overcome by adding oiliness agents or fatty oils to can be designed to have a rigidity equal to the metal
the lubricant. These additives are polar, oil soluble structure that contains the film.
B-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
be applied as dry powders, mixtures with greases

or oils, or mixtures with binders which form dry films
when applied and cured. Materials selected as solid
lubricants must resist penetration by surface irregula-
rities under extreme loads, and be able to shear
easier than the base bearing materials (figure B-30).
Due to these properties, relative motion between
the sliding surfaces occurs in the solid lubricant layer.
Solid films lubricants have a wide temperature range
and work well in vacuum, are good electrical
conductors and have excellent thermal conductivity.
B-95. Gas Lubrication (Figure B-31). Gas lubri-

cated bearings are similar to hydrodynamic and
hydrostatic fluid-film bearings except gas is used
instead of a liquid to separate the bearing surfaces.
Hydrodynamic gas lubricated bearings are used in
applications involving small shaft diameters, high
speeds, high or low temperatures and light loads
(figure B-32). Hydrostatic gas lubricated bearings
are used in similar applications but do not require
high speeds to generate load capacity and they can
carry higher loads.
B-96. SELECTION OF LUBRICANT. The type of

lubricant selected will depend on the conditions
00b026 encountered in the application. The two most com-
Figure B-26. Method of Manufacturing mon types of lubricant used in bearings are oil and
Preload Bearings grease. Dry film lubricants are in limited use and
others are being evaluated.
B-97. Advantages of Using Greases as a Lubri-

cant.
a. Provides superior protection against exter-

nal contamination getting into the bearing; keeps
dirt out.
b. Can be easily retained in a housing or

bearing through the use of shields and seals.
c. Does not require elaborate sealing arrange-

ments.
d. Requires less maintenance.
e. Provides long bearing and system life.
B-98. Advantages of Oils. Oils have the following

00b027
Figure B-27. Resistance to Overturning advantages as a bearing lubricant:
Moments of Duplex Bearings
a. Can be used in high speed applications.
B-94. Solid Film Lubrication. Some applications b. Can be used in high temperature applica-
that involve temperatures and load pressures beyond tions.
the capacity of fluid film lubricants will utilize solid
and dry-film lubricants. The solid film lubricant can c. Oil is easily changed.
B-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
d. Oils conduct heat away from the bearing

surfaces.
e. Readily feeds into the area of rolling and

sliding contact.
f. Carries contamination and wear products

away from the bearing.
B-99. Changing Lubricant Specification. In gen-

eral, the specified lubricant has been selected and
tested by the manufacturer, and it will be the
responsibility of the bearing shop to use only the
specified lubricant. Changes in lubrication require-
ments will be the responsibility of the Materials
Engineering Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory
with coordination with cognizant Service Command.
When it is necessary to substitute another lubricant
for one recommended by the manufacturer the
following factors must be considered.
a. Temperature (low and high) of the applica-

tion.
b. DN Factor (bore in millimeters x rpm) of

the application.
c. Load (radial and/or thrust, light or heavy)

00b028 conditions.
Figure B-28. Fundamentals of Lubrication
d. Housing design (will determine oil or grease
selection).
e. Maintenance requirements (lubrication fit-

tings).
f. Torque (starting and/or running).
g. Contamination levels in the application.
h. Lubrication requirements of associated

parts/components.
B-100. MILITARY SPECIFICATION LUBRICANTS.

Lubrication requirements for most aeronautical bear-
ing applications can almost always be met by one
of the standard military specification lubricants.
Nonspecification lubricants are used in special ap-
plications involving a high degree of reliability and
performance where no specification lubricant will
meet specialized requirements. Figure B-33 gives
the temperature ranges of the common military
specification greases. Refer to tables B-8 through
B-10 for lists of military specification greases, oils
and dry film lubricants. Tables B-11 and B-12 contain
lists of the physical and chemical properties of
specification lubricants. Tables B-13 through B-15
00b029
contain lists of inspection methods used to test
Figure B-29. Properties of Lubricants military specification lubricants.
B-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
thrown free by centrifugal force. As this slow

bleeding process continues, the oil content of the
grease will be depleted and the lubricant will no
longer give adequate service. Grease that has lost
50-60 percent of its original oil content is generally
considered unsatisfactory.
B-104. Properties of Bearing Greases. The follow-

ing properties should be considered when selecting
a grease for an application:
a. Oil Type. The grease can containing a wide

variety of mineral or synthetic oils.
b. Consistency. The viscosity or degree of

firmness of a grease controls the degree of channel-
ing.
c. Mechanical Stability. Ability of a grease to

maintain original properties during operation.
d. Bleeding Rate. Rate of loss of oil by

bleeding or separating from the structure of the
thickener.
e. Evaporation Rate. Rate of loss of oil by

00b030 evaporation under varying environmental conditions.
Figure B-30. Properties of Solid Film Lubricants
f. Oxidation Stability. Deterioration of a
grease by reaction with oxygen in the air.
B-101. GREASE LUBRICATION.
g. Corrosion Protection. Amount of protection
afforded the metal surfaces by a grease film.
B-102. Formulation of Greases. Greases that are
used to lubricate bearings consist of an intimate h. Dropping Point. The temperature at which
dispersion of a thickening agent (such as a metallic a grease passes from a semi-solid to a liquid state.
soap or a nonmetallic thickener) in a lubricating oil.
The oil can be mineral (petroleum derivatives) or
synthetic (chemical synthesis), depending on the i. Operating Temperature Range. The effec-
expected system operating temperatures. The thick- tive temperature range through which a bearing can
ener keeps the oil in suspension and acts as a be satisfactory lubricated.
reservoir. Lubricating greases are formulated in
various consistencies depending on their end use. j. Storage Stability. The ability of a grease
Table B-16 gives the NLGI (National Lubricating to resist deterioration during extended storage peri-
Grease Institute) grades and their corresponding ods.
worked Penetration values.
k. Water Resistance. The ability of a grease
B-103. Mechanism of Lubrication. As the moving to resist being washed or removed from a bearing
parts of the bearing come in contact with the grease, by water contamination.
a small quantity of oil adheres to the bearing
surfaces. Bleeding of oil from the grease should l. Low Temperature Torque. The ability to
take place gradually so that a small quantity of oil lubricate at low temperatures with minimum viscous
sufficient for satisfactory operation is continuously or fluid friction.
supplied. The oil that is picked up by the moving
parts of the bearing gradually deteriorates from the m. Dirt Count. The amount of permissible dirt
effects of oxidation, is lost by evaporation, or is or other foreign particle contamination in a grease.
B-29
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ties. The oil molecules slide over each other at a

rate that is directly proportional to the force tending
to make them slide.
B-107. Synthetic Oils. Petroleum oils are tempera-

ture limited and cannot be used when an extreme
operating temperature range will be encountered.
Synthetic oils, with special, or build-in properties,
have been developed for wide temperature ranges.
Military specifications such as MIL-PRF-6085 and
MIL-PRF-23699 are typical of synthetic oils that were
developed for special uses. Both oils are formulated
by reacting a dibasic acid with alcohol and are
commonly referred to as diester oils. However, their
end use is quite different. Specification MIL-
PRF-6085 oil has been the primary lubricant for
instrument bearings for many years. Oils formulated
to the requirements of Specification MIL-PRF-23699
have been primarily used to lubricate bearings in
gas turbine engines.
B-108. A new method of formulating mineral oils by

chemical synthesis has been developed. The syn-
thetic hydrocarbon oil has the combined good
properties of petroleum and synthetic oils while
minimizing their deficiencies. The synthesized hydro-
carbon (petroleum) oil is used in the formulation
of grease under Specification MIL-PRF-81322.
B-109. Silicone Fluids. Silicone fluids such as

methyl silicones, dimethyl silicones, silicone esters
and chlorinated silicones are sometimes used as
lubricants because of their unique physical-chemical
properties:
a. Their viscosities change less with changes

in temperature than for mineral and synthetic oils.
b. Good oxidation resistance.
00b031 c. Good thermal stability.

Figure B-31. Gas Lubricated Hydrodynamic
and Hydrostatic Bearings d. Wide range of viscosities are available.
B-110. The primary disadvantage of most silicone

B-105. OIL LUBRICATION. fluids is they are marginal lubricants for steel-to-steel
rolling and sliding contact. The fluid film developed
B-106. Petroleum Oils. Petroleum or mineral oils by the oil does not have good boundary lubricating
are the most common materials used for bearing properties. Therefore, higher friction levels and
lubrication. Vegetable and animal oils are not chemi- greater bearing wear will often be encountered.
cally stable and should not be used. They tend to Halogen containing silicone oils, with chlorine or
form undesirable gum residues. A suitable oil must fluorine added to the silicone molecule, partially
have the ability to adhere to, and cover (or wet), correct this deficiency. However, even these im-
the surfaces of the bearing. Petroleum oils, being proved silicone oils are not as good as petroleum
Newtonian fluids, have the natural ability to lubricate or synthetic oils for normal operating temperature
because of inherent physical and chemical proper- environment under high load and sliding contact.
B-30
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
of the tendency of the oil to vaporize at high

temperatures.
c. Pour Point. The lowest temperature at

which an oil will flow. This property is extremely
important in cold weather start-up or operation.
d. Cloud Point. The temperature at which

waxy particles crystalize or separate from a paraffinic
oil.
e. Volatility. The property of an oil to evapo-

rate, or to change Into a vapor, when subjected
to increases in temperature. Volatility is described
by vapor pressure and can be measured by the
evaporation rate. This property is important for high
temperature applications and especially for instru-
ment bearings that are lubricated with small quanti-
ties of oil.
f. Oxidation Stability. The resistance of an

oil to react with oxygen to form sludge and acids.
The reaction is usually slow but the rate will increase
with increasing temperature. Sludge increases
torque levels in instrument bearings and acids will
corrode bearing surfaces and build up varnish
deposits in larger bearings.
g. Neutralization Number. A measure of the

acidity or alkalinity of an oil. A rapid increase in
acid content usually precedes the formation of
sludges. The neutralization number provides a guide
to the oil’s sludge forming tendencies.
h. Rust Inhibitors. Chemical additives are

formulated into the base oil to protect lubricated
surfaces against rusting and corrosion. The oil is
00b032
usually tested by means of either a humidity cabinet
Figure B-32. Properties of Gas as a Lubricant
with 100 percent relative humidity at 120_F., or a
salt spray booth.
B-111. Properties of Lubricating Oils. The follow- B-112. LUBRICANT ADDITIVES. Many different
ing properties must be considered when selecting types of chemicals are added in small quantities
a lubricating oil for a particular application: to the base stock of oil to improve certain physical-
chemical properties. The additives must be compat-
a. Viscosity. A measure of a fluids resistance ible with the base oil and not be easily separated.
to flow. The higher the value, the more viscous is The following additives are commonly used to
the fluid. The viscosity of all liquids varies with improve specific properties of lubricating oils and
temperature. Higher temperatures result in a lower greases:
viscosity, and lower temperatures increase the vis-
cosity of the fluid. a. Anti-foam Agents. An additive used to
reduce the foaming tendency of the oil while it is
b. Flash Point. The temperature to which an being subjected to pressure and spattering.
oil must be heated in order to give off a sufficient
vapor to form a combustible mixture with air. This b. Anti-wear Agents. An additive used to
is the absolute temperature limit at which the oil reduce scoring and wear of metal surfaces under
can be operated. It also provides a rough estimate mild boundary lubricating conditions.
B-31
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-8. Military Specifications for Lubrication Greases
Specification Title
1. VV-G-632B Grease, Industrial, General Purpose

2. VV-G-671F Grease, Graphite
3. MIL-G-4343C Grease, Pneumatic
4. MIL-G-10924F Grease, Automotive and Artillery
5. MIL-G-15719A Grease, High Temperature, Electric Motor, Ball and Roller Bearing
6. MIL-G-21164D Grease, Molybdenum Disulfate
7. MIL-G-23549C Grease, General Purpose
8. MIL-G-23827B Grease, Aircraft and Instrument, Gear and Actuator
9. MIL-G-24139A Grease, Multipurpose, Quiet Service
10. MIL-G-25013E Grease, Aircraft, Ball and Roller Bearing
11. MIL-G-25237C Grease, Aircraft, Helicopter Oscillatory Bearing
12. MIL-G-27617E Grease, Aircraft, Fuel and Oil Resistant
13. MIL-G-81322E Grease, Aircraft, General Purpose, Wide Temperature Range
14. MIL-G-81827A Grease, Aircraft, High Load Capacity, Wide Temperature Range
15. MIL-G-81937A Grease, Instrument, Ultra Clean
16. MIL-G-82361 Grease, Aircraft, Extreme Pressure, Antiwear
17. MIL-G-83363 Grease, Transmission, Helicopter
18. MIL-G-83414 Grease, Gunmount, Aircraft
19. DOD-G-24508 Grease, Ball and Roller Bearing
Table B-9. Military Specifications for Solid Film Lubricants
Specification Title
1. MIL-L-8937D Lubricant, Solid, Film, Heat Cured, (Superseded by MIL-L-46010B)

2. MIL-L-23398D Lubricant, Solid, Film, Air Drying
3. MIL-L-46010B Lubricant, Solid, Film, Heat Cured, Corrosion Inhibiting
4. MIL-L-46147B Lubricant, Solid, Film, Air Cured, Corrosion Inhibiting
5. MIL-L-81329C Lubricant, Solid, Film, Extreme Environment
Table B-10. Military Specifications for Lubricating Oils
Specification Title
1. VV-L-800C Lubricating Oil, General Purpose (Water-displacing, Low Temp.)

2. VV-L-820C Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by VV-L-800C)
3. VV-L-1071 Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by MIL-L-53047)
4. MIL-L-2104F Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Diesel
5. MIL-L-2105E Lubricating Oil, Gear, Multipurpose
B-32
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-10. Military Specifications for Lubricating Oils (Continued)
Specification Title
6. MIL-L-3150B Lubricating Oil, Preservative, Medium

7. MIL-L-3572A Lubricating Oil, Colloidal Graphite in Oil
8. MIL-L-3918A Lubricating Oil, Instrument, Jewel Bearing, Non-spreading
9. MIL-L-6081C Lubricating Oil, Jet Engine
10. MIL-L-6082E Lubricating Oil, Aircraft, Reciprocating
11. MIL-L-6085C Lubricating Oil, Instrument, Aircraft, Low Volatility
12. MIL-L-6086D Lubricating Oil, Gear, Petroleum Base
13. MIL-L-7808K Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine
14. MIL-L-7870B Lubricating Oil, General Purpose, Low Temperature
15. MIL-L-9000H Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Diesel
16. MIL-L-10295B Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by MIL-L-46167)
17. MIL-L-10324A Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by MIL-L-2105)
18. MIL-L-14107C Lubricating Oil, Low Temperature, Weapons
19. MIL-L-17331H Lubricating Oil, Steam Turbine (Non-corrosive)
20. MIL-L-17672D Hydraulic Fluid, Petroleum, Inhibited, (Superseded by MIL-L-3150)
21. MIL-L-19701B Lubricating Oil, All Weather, Semi-fluid
22. MIL-L-21260D Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Preservative
23. MIL-L-22851D Lubricating Oil, Aircraft, Piston Engine
24. MIL-L-23699E Lubricating Oil, Aircraft, Turbine Engine
25. MIL-L-24131B Lubricating Oil, Colloidal Graphite in Isopropanol
26. MIL-L-24467 Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by MIL-L-17331)
27. MIL-L-24484 Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by MIL-L-17331)
28. MIL-L-25681D Lubricating Oil, Molybdenum Disulfide, Silicone Base, High Temp.
29. MIL-L-26087B Lubricating Oil, Reciprocating Compressor, Ground Support
30. MIL-L-27502 Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Ester Base
31. MIL-L-27649 Lubricating Oil, Instrument, -65_F to +400_F
32. MIL-L-46000C Lubricating Oil, Semi-fluid, Automatic Weapons
33. MIL-L-46002B Lubricating Oil, Contact and Volatile Corrosion Inhibited
34. MIL-L-46014 Lubricating Oil, Lubricating Oil, Spindle
35. MIL-L-46017 Lubricating Oil, Machine Tool Side-ways
36. MIL-L-46152E Lubricating Oil, (Superseded by A-A-52039)
37. MIL-L-46167B Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Arctic
38. MIL-L-60326 Lubricating Oil, Fluorocarbon, Telomere Dispersion
39. MIL-L-81846B Lubricating Oil, Instrument Ball Bearing, High Flash Point, (Superseded by
MIL-C-16173)
40. MIL-L-83176 Lubricating Oil, Instrument Bearing, Petroleum Base
41. MIL-L-83767B Lubricating Oil, Vacuum Pump
B-33
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-11. Physical and Chemical Properties of Specification Lubricating Greases
Penetration (cSt)
Temperature Unworked Worked
Specification Range Oil Type Thickener (min.) (min.)
VV-G-632B Grade 2 0_ to 130_F Mineral Calcium Soap – 265-295
VV-G-671F Grade 2 -10_ to 130_F Mineral Calcium Soap – 265-295
MIL-G-4343C -65_ to 200_F Silicone – – 260-300
MIL-G-10924F -65_ to 250_F Mineral/Synthetic – 265-295 265-290
MIL-G-15719A 0_ to 300_F Silicone Lithium – 260-330
MIL-G-21164D 0_ to 250_F Synthetic 5% MoS2/Lithium 200 260-310

Soap
MIL-G-23549C 0_ to 400_F Mineral 5% MoS2 – 270-315
MIL-G-23827B -100_ to 250_F Synthetic Lithium Soap 200 270-310
MIL-G-24139A -20_ to 250_F Mineral – – 265-320
MIL-G-25013E -100_ to 450_F Silicone Non-Soap 260-320
MIL-G-25537C -100_ to 160_F Mineral Calcium Soap 200 265-305
MIL-G-27617E Type I -65_ to 300_F Fluoro-carbon or – 300 310-340

Fluoro-silicone
Type II -40_ to 400_F 200 265-310
Type III -30_ to 400_F 200 265-310
Type IV -100_ to 400_F 225 235-310
Type V -100_ to 450_F 260-310 270-300
MIL-G-81322E -65_ to 350_F Synthesized Non-Soap – 265-300

Mineral
MIL-G-81937A -65_ to 250_F Synthetic Lithium Soap 200 265-300
c. Demulsifiers. A demulsifier additive used lubrication. They have a high attraction for metal
to promote the separation of oil and water. surfaces and reduce friction levels.
d. Detergents/Dispersants. An additive used g. Oxidation Inhibitors. An oxidation inhibiting

to improve the ability of the oil to keep and maintain additive used to increase the oil’s resistance to
minute particles in suspension. This keeps the oxidation (reaction with oxygen) and lengthens
lubricated parts clean and free of sludge buildup. bearing service life.
h. Pour Point Depressants. An additive used

e. Extreme Pressure (EP) Additives. An addi- to lower the pour point, or the lowest temperature
tive used in extreme boundary lubrication and reacts at which the oil will still flow.
chemically with the metal to form a surface film.
i. Rust/Corrosion Inhibitors. A rust inhibiting

f. Oiliness Agents. A polar additive used to additive used to protect lubricated surfaces against
improve the ability of an oil to provide boundary rust and corrosion.
B-34
Table B-12. Physical and Chemical Properties of Specification Lubricating Oils
Trace
Flash Pour Point Viscosity Evaporation Sediment Neutralization
Specification Oil Type Point (_F) (_F) (cSt @ _F) (% @ _F) (Grams) Number
VV-L-800C Mineral 285 -70 12@100 25 @ 210 0.05 –
7,000 @ -40
60,000 @ -65
MIL-L-2104F Grade 10 Mineral 400 -22 5.44 -7.29 @ 210 – – –
2614 @ 0
Grade 30 Mineral 425 -20 9.65-12.98 @ 210 – – –
1,300-2,600 @ 0
Grade 40 Mineral 435 0 12.5-16.3 @ 210 – – –
43,570 @ 0
Grade 15-40 Mineral 420 15 12.5-16.3 @ 210 – – –
MIL-L-2105D Grade 75 Min./Syn. 300 – 4.1 min @ 216 – – –
Grade 80/90 Min./Syn. 330 – 13.5-24.0 @ 215 – – –
65,200 @ 0
Grade 85/140 Min./Syn. 355 – 24.0-41.0 @ 215 – – –
MIL-L-3150C Mineral – 20 95-125 @ 104 – – –
MIL-L-3572A Grade A (Lt) Mineral 285 -50 90-110 @ 105 – – 0.1
Grade B (Md) Mineral 320 15 110-135 @ 210 – – –
Grade C (Hvy) Mineral 320 15 275 @ 210 – – –
MIL-L-3918A Synthetic – – 9.5-10.5 @ 100 2 @ 210/22 hrs – 0.6
MIL-L-6081C Grade 1005 Mineral 225 – 5 @ 100 – 0.005/200mL 0.1
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
2,600 @ -65
Grade 1010 Mineral 270 -70 10 @ 100 – 0.005/200mL 0.1
3000 @ -40
MIL-L-6082E Grade 1065 Mineral 420 0 62-68 @ 210 – – –
Grade 1100 Mineral 470 10 8 @ 130 – – –
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
MIL-L-6085C Synthetic 365 -70 12,000 @ -65 1.8 @ 248 0 –
MIL-L-6086D Grade L Mineral 280 -40 23-34 @ 100 – 0.1 1
Grade M Mineral 310 -29 60-82 @ 100 – 0.1 1
B-35
B-36
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-12. Physical and Chemical Properties of Specification Lubricating Oils (Continued)
Trace
Flash Pour Point Viscosity Evaporation Sediment Neutralization
Specification Oil Type Point (_F) (_F) (cSt @ _F) (% @ _F) (Grams) Number
MIL-L-7808K Grade 3 Synthetic 410 -75 3 @ 210 0 @ 400 – 0.3
11 @ 100
Grade 4 Synthetic 410 -75 1.1 @ 400 15 @ 400 – 0.3
4.0 @ 210
17.0 @ 100
MIL-L-7870B Mineral 265 -70 10 @ 100 22 @ 210 0 –
4000 @ -40
MIL-L-9000H 9500 Mineral 390 10 12.5-16.5 @ 210 – – –
MIL-L-14107C Silicate 325 -75 5.8 @ 100
900 @ -65
MIL-L-17672D Sym Mineral 315 -20 28.8-35.2 @ 104 – – 0.2
2075
Mineral 325 -10 41.4-50.6 @ 104 – – 0.2
2110
Mineral 340 0 61.2-74.8 @ 104 – – 0.2
2135
MIL-L-21206D Type I Mineral 400 -22 5.6-7.4 @ 212 – – –
Grade 10
Grade 30 Mineral 428 0 9.3-12.5 @ 212 – – –
Grade 40 Mineral 437 5 12.5-16.3 @ 212 – – –
Grade 15-40 Mineral 419 -10 12.5-16.3 @ 212 – – –
MIL-L-23699E Synthetic 475 -65 5-5.5 @ 210 10 @ 400 0.01 0.5
MIL-L-25681C MoS2 Silicone 525 – 16-22 @ 210 – – –
65-85 @ 100
MIL-L-26087B Grade I Mineral 370 -5 8-11 min @ 210 – 0.5 0.3
Grade II Mineral 430 15 16 min @ 210 – – –
MIL-L-46000C Synthetic – – 11 @ 100 – – –
MIL-L-46002B Grade I Mineral/VCI 240 -50 11 @ 100 25 0.05 –
Grade II Mineral/VCI 250 -10 8.25-16.6 @ 210
83.45-111.2 @ 100
MIL-L-83176 Mineral 500 25 14.76-15.78 @ 210 – 0.025 –
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-13. Inspection Methods for Testing Dry Film Lubricants
FED-STD-791 Method Number ASTM Method Number
Adhesion of Dry Film Lubricant 3810.2 D2510-83

Thermal Shock Sensitivity of Dry 3805.2 D2511-82
Solid Film Lubricant
Table B-14. Inspection Methods for Testing Grease Lubricants
FED-STD-791
Method ASTM Method
Tests Number Number
1. Dirt Content of Grease 3005.4 -
2. Penetration 311.8 D217-88
3. Penetration (1/4 Scale) - D1403-86
4. Dropping Point 1421.2 D566-87
5. Oil Separation (Static) 321.3 -
6. Oil Separation during Storage 322.3 D1742-83
7. Evaporation 351.2 D972-86
8. Water Resistance 3252.3 D1264-87
9. Rust Preventive Properties 4012.1 D1743-73
10. Oxidation Stability 3453.2 D942-78
11. Corrosiveness (Copper Strip) 5309.5 -
12. High Temperature Performance 331.3 D3336
13. Gear Wear 335.3 -
14. Penetration of Lubricating Greases after Mechanical Working 313.3 -
15. Load Carrying Capacity 6503.2 D2783
16. Low Temperature Torque 334.2 D1478-80
17. Apparent Viscosity 306.4 D1092-87
18. Steel on Steel Wear (4-Ball Method) 6514.2 D2266-86
19. Rubber Swell 3603.5 -
20. General Analysis of Lubricating Grease 5412.6 D128-83 Rev. A
21. Estimation of Deleterious Particles - D1404-83
22. Dropping Point of Wide Temperature Range Grease - D2265-78 Rev. A
23. Roll Stability - D1831-83
24. Measurement of Extreme Pressure Properties of Lubricating 6503.2 D2509-86
Greases
25. Measurement of Extreme Pressure Properties of Lubricating - D2596-87
Grease (Four-Ball Method)
B-37
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-15. Inspection Methods for Testing Oil Lubricants
FED-STD-791
Method ASTM Method
Tests Number Number
1. Corrosion and Oxidation Stability 5308.7 -
2. Cloud Point - D2500-6
3. Pour Point 201.9 D97-87
4. Flash Point (Closed Tester) 1102.11 D93-85
5. Flash Point (Open Cup Method) 1103.7 D92-85
6. Neutralization Number Potentiometric Titration 5106.4 D664-87
7. Neutralization Number (Color) 5105.5 D974-87
8. Precipitation Number of Lubricating Oils 3101.5 D91-87
9. Viscosity (Saybolt) 304.8 D88-81
10. Viscosity (Kinematic) 305.6 D445-86
11. Color (Saybolt) 101.7 D156-87
12. Color ASTM 102.7 D1500-87
13. Evaporation Loss 351.2 D972-86
14. Copper Strip Corrosion 5325.4 D130-83
15. Trace Sediment 3004.6 D2273-86
16. Viscosity and Viscosity Stability 307.2 D2531-87
17. Lead Corrosion 5321.2 -
18. Foaming Test 3211.3 D892-74
19. Swelling of Synthetic Rubber 3604.2 -
20. Thermal Stability 2508.1 -
21. Gear Test 6508.2 -
22. Bearing Test 3410.1 -
23. Demulsibility Characteristics of Lubricating Oils - D2711-86
24. Calculating Viscosity Index (from Kinematic Viscosity) 9111.3 D2270-86
25. Carbon Residue of Petroleum Products 5001.11 D189-88
5002.7 D524-88
26. Specific Gravity - D1298-85
27. Chlorine in New and Used Lubricants 5651.4 D808-87
28. Emulsion Characteristics, Steam and Turbine Oils - D1401-84
29. Emulsion Stability of Soluble Cutting Oils - D1479-64
30. Insolubles in Used Oils 3121.5 D893-85
31. Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water - D971-82
32. Load-Carrying Capacity of Steam Turbine Oils 6512.3 D1947-83
33. Chemical Analysis for Metals in New and Used Oils 5601.1 K811-82
34. Oxidation Characteristic of Inhibited Steam-Turbine Oils - D943-81
B-38
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-15. Inspection Methods for Testing Oil Lubricants (Continued)
FED-STD-791
Method ASTM Method
Tests Number Number
35. Phosphorus in Lubricating Oil and Additives 5661.1 D1091-87
36. Precipitation Number 3101.5 D91-87
37. Sodium in Lubricating Oils and Additives - D1026-82
38. Sulfated Ash from Lubricating Oils Additives 5422.3 D874-82
39. Sulfur in Petroleum Oil (Bomb Method) 5202.12 D129-84
40. Conversion of Kinematic Viscosity to Saybolt Universal 9101.4 D2161-87
Viscosity
41. Standard Viscosity-Temperature Charts 9121.1 D341-87
42. Load-Carrying Capacity of Fluid Gear Lubricants 6512.3 D1947-83
43. Measuring Wear Properties of Fluid Lubricants (Fulex Method) - D2670-86
Table B-16. Comparison of NLGI Grades to Worked Penetration Values
NLGI Grade Numbers Worked Penetration * mm/10
000 445-475
00 400-430
0 355-385
1 310-340
2 265-295
3 220-250
4 175-205
5 130-160
6 85-115
*Refer to Federal Standard 79 Lb. Test Method No. 311.8
j. Tackiness Agents. An additive used to even greater number of smaller peaks and valleys
increase the adhesive property of the oil, improve are created. The function of a lubricant, including
retention, and prevent dripping and spattering. a dry film lubricant, is to separate the two metal
surfaces by interposing a material of low shear
strength (figure B-30).
k. Viscosity Index (V.I.) Improvers. An additive
used to make the oil’s natural viscosity less sensitive
to changes in operating temperature. B-114. Dry film lubricants are composed of materials
with low coefficients of friction held together with
a binder. They are bonded to the metal bearing
B-113. DRY FILM LUBRICATION. Friction is due surface to provide a friction reducing film between
in part to the interlocking of microscopic peaks and the metal surfaces. Numerous dry film lubricants
valleys on the active bearing surfaces as they move are being used or under evaluation for dry bearing
with respect to each other. Improvement of the applications. The following materials are currently
surface finish alone will not eliminate friction, as used as dry film materials:
B-39
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
MILĆGĆ3278 SUPERSEDED BY MILĆGĆ23827B

MILĆGĆ3545C SUPERSEDED BY MILĆGĆ81322E
MILĆLĆ7711 CANCELLED
MILĆGĆ10924F AUTOMOTIVE GREASE
MILĆLĆ15719A
MILĆGĆ15793 SUPERSEDED BY MILĆGĆ81322

MILĆGĆ18709 CANCELLED
MILĆGĆ21164D
MILĆGĆ23549C
MILĆGĆ23827B
MILĆGĆ24139A
MILĆGĆ25013E
MILĆGĆ25537C
MILĆGĆ25760A SUPERSEDED BY MILĆGĆ81322
MILĆGĆ27617E
MILĆGĆ38220 SUPERSEDED BY MILĆGĆ27617E
MILĆGĆ81322E
MILĆGĆ81827A
MILĆGĆ81937A
MILĆGĆ83261A
Ć100 Ć50 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
00b033
Figure B-33. Temperature Selection Chart for Military Specification Greases
B-40
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-115. Molybdenum disulfide (MoS2) and/or graphite f. Pretreatment of surfaces to be coated.

in a resin binder: The material is sprayed on the
metal surfaces and heat cured between room g. Friction and wear limits.
temperature and 350_F. Film thicknesses can be
controlled between 0.0001 to 0.0003 inch. These B-120. L I S T S O F M I L I TA RY S P E C I F I C AT I O N
dry film lubricants are usable at temperatures from LUBRICANTS AND THEIR PROPERTIES.
100_ to 450_F. Some of the resins compounds may
be affected by radiation. B-121. Tables B-8, B-9 and B-10 contain lists of
military specification greases, oils and dry film
B-116. Molybdenum disulfide (MoS2) and/or graphite lubricants. Tables B-11 and B-12 contain lists of
in silicate or ceramic binder: The powders are physical and chemical properties of specification
combined with a binder and sprayed on the metal lubricants. Tables B-13, B-14 and B-15 contain lists
surfaces. The applied film is heat cured between of inspection methods.
room temperature and 400_F. Film thickness can
be controlled between 0.0002 to 0.001 inch. These B-122. SHAFT AND HOUSING FITS.
dry film lubricants are usable over a temperature
range of 250_ to 700_F. in an air atmosphere. They B-123. GENERAL. Tolerances for bearing, shaft, and
can also be used at temperatures up to 1,500_F. housing dimensions are predetermined and are
In vacuum or an oxidizing atmosphere. The binder controlled by rigid manufacturing standards (figure
is not affected by radiation. B-34). These standards have been established by
the ABMA (American Bearing Manufacturers Associ-
B-117. High temperature oxides. Certain oxide ation) based on good engineering principles and
films are fused to the metal surfaces for high production experience.
temperature dry bearing use. A mixture of lead oxide
(PbO) and silicon dioxide (SiO2) has been success- B-124. Standard tables for shaft and housing sizes,
fully used at temperatures of 950_F to 1250_F. A bearing bore and outer diameter dimensions, and
fusion of calcium fluoride (CaF2) on a metal surface interference fit requirements for steel, aluminum, or
has been used from room temperature to 1,500_F. magnesium mountings are included in tables B-46
in air, vacuum, and other environments. These films through B-60 and shall be referred to as necessary.
are not affected by radiation.
B-125. STANDARD FITS. Bearing rings are usually
B-118. Special Environments Requiring Dry Film installed with a firm press or interference fit on, or
Lubrication. It should be emphasized that when in, the rotating member. The interference fit is only
ever possible an oil or grease shall be used. Dry of such magnitude as to prevent the bearing from
films do not retain contamination within the bearing slipping on, or turning in, the mounting during
like a conventional lubricant but, as a rule, give operation.
inferior corrosion protection. However, there are
specific applications where dry film lubricants are B-126. Mounting Fits on Rotating Member. An
superior to oils and greases. Temperatures exceed- interference fit from 0.0001 to 0.0003 inch tight is
ing 700_F., high vacuum, nuclear radiation, and low usually specified for the bearing ring on the rotating
temperature applications are examples of special member. Larger bearings will require increased
environments that may require a dry film lubricant. interference fits to prevent undesirable ring rotation.
B-127. Small precision bearings should be installed

B-119. Factors Affecting the Selection of Dry Film with a line-to-line to 0.0001 inch loose fit. Refer
Lubricants: to Section XIV for detailed information on the
installation of instrument and miniature precision
a. Temperature, load and speed. bearings.
b. Bearing design. B-128. Mounting Fits On Stationary Member. The

bearing ring installed in, or on, a stationary member
c. Material. will normally be mounted with a push fit. A slight
looseness will allow the ring to creep or adjust very
slowly avoiding prolonged stressing of any one part
d. Environment. of the ring raceway. The resulting wear from this
relatively light force is negligible. Refer to paragraph
e. Film thickness. B-130 for additional information on bearing creep.
B-41
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
occurs. Increased loose fits, loads, or rotational

speed will cause even greater wear. Creep, however,
represents a very light force and the resulting wear
is usually insignificant.
B-131. MACHINING PRACTICES THAT AFFECT
BEARING MOUNTING FITS. A close examination
of many bearing applications indicates an overlap
of the tolerances for the shaft/housing and bearing
bore sizes. Many loose fits might be expected during
bearing installation. However, such a condition is
not usually encountered because of the standard
practice followed in machining internal and external
surfaces, called “most metal tendency.”
00b034
B-132. In the manufacturing of precision parts, ma-
Figure B-34. Effects of Tolerances on Mounting Fits chine operators reason that a bearing bore too small
is a lesser evil than one which has to be scrapped
B-129. SPECIAL FITS. Special operating conditions as being oversize. In a similar manner, shaft sizes
will require the use of mounting fits that are different are held close to the upper dimensional limits in
than the standard fits called out by the bearing actual production operation. As a result, the full
manufacturer. Some of these special conditions are range of working tolerances is seldom used, and
as follows: the majority of internal diameters will be nearer the
low dimension limit, while at least 75 percent of
a. Applications involving shock or vibrating all machined external diameters will be closer to
loads will require bearing ring-to-mounting surface the high tolerance limit. Figure B-36 illustrates the
fits that are tighter than standard. skewed distribution to be expected in production
work and clearly shows this principle.
b. Bearing rings mounted in soft metal hous- B-133. As a result, the required standard interference
ings, such as aluminum and magnesium, will be fit will be obtained without sizing in at least 90 percent
installed with much tighter fits due to greater thermal of all combinations of bearings and shafts if all
expansion of the housing with subsequent loss of components have been worked to standard dimen-
bearing retention. sions. A similar condition is found in fitting outside
diameters of bearings into standard housings. Aver-
c. Angular-contact bearings that are pre- age shaft-mounted fits that can normally be expected
loaded will have a fitup that is initially loose to permit with a typical bearing are given in table B-17.
assembly without forcing. The final fit is made tighter
by the expansion of the bearing as the specified B-134. EFFECT OF INTERFERENCE FIT ON IN-
preload is applied by tightening the adjustment nut. TERNAL CLEARANCE. The bearing manufacturer
builds predetermined clearances into each bearing.
d. High operating temperatures, coupled with If the bearing is installed with the recommended
heavy loads, will require tighter than standard fits. mounting fits the resulting internal fit-up will be
correct. The internal bearing clearance, measured
e. Applications involving large rotational in terms of movement perpendicular to the bearing
torque levels will require greater than normal bearing bore, is called internal radial clearance (figure B-37),
mounting fits. and movement parallel to the bearing bore is called
internal axial clearance or end play (figure B-38).
B-130. BEARING CREEP. The very slow rotational B-135. Mounting fits will have the following effects
creep of a bearing ring that is mounted with a close on the internal clearance of rolling bearings:
push fit in a stationary member should not be
confused with the comparatively rapid turning of a a. Bearings With Standard Unmounted Inter-
ring that is improperly mounted in, or on, the rotating nal Radial Clearances. Bearings mounted with aver-
member. The latter condition is the result of a strong age interference fits and standard internal radial
rotational force and may be compared to an internal clearance, will have operating internal radial clear-
gear drive. This principle is illustrated in figure B-35, ances that will compensate for thermal expansion,
where a rotating shaft is driving a bearing ring. The slight misalignment, and heavier than normal interfer-
real damage is caused by the sliding motion that ence fit without preloading.
B-42
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Bearings That Have Less Than Standard

Internal Radial Clearances. Bearings mounted with
average interference fits and tight internal radial
clearances will have a moderate radial preload. This
provides precise axial and radial location for sup-
ported parts. Greater than normal interference fits
should not be used since an excessively tight internal
fit-up will decrease the fatigue life of the bearing.
B-136. DIMENSIONAL CHANGES DUE TO INTER-

FERENCE FITS. When a bearing inner ring is
mounted with an interference fit, the ring elastically
expands and will reduce the internal clearances of
the bearing. In a radial bearing, this reduction is
from 50 to 80 percent of the original unmounted
radial clearance, depending on the size of bearing
and ring thickness.
00b035
Figure B-35. Exaggerated Illustration B-137. Wh e n a n o u t e r r i n g i s m o u n t e d w i t h a
of Bearing Creep standard interference fit in a housing, the overall
internal clearance is reduced by a corresponding
amount.
B-138. REPAIR OF UNDERSIZE AND OVERSIZE

BEARING MOUNTING SURFACES.
B-139. GENERAL. Bearing mounting surfaces that

are “out of tolerance” can be brought back to
tolerance by approved repairs methods that can be
performed at a depot level maintenance activity. The
following repairs are authorized under the technical
control of the cognizant bearing engineer and the
cognizant systems engineer.
B-140. REPAIR OF UNDERSIZE SHAFTS. Under-

size shafts surfaces can be brought back to drawing
dimensions by metal spray, precision brush plating,
or conventional tank plating. Type of plating shall
be as specified in local engineering instruction or
the applicable Service Command.
B-141. Metal Spray. In general, maximum buildup

of material shall be limited to 0.015 inch. Properly
applied metal spray will provide an acceptable
mounting surface for the bearing inner diameter
surface. The procedure is as follows:
00b036
Figure B-36. Diagram Showing Overlap of NOTE
Mounting Seat and Bearing Tolerances
Do not use knurling, pin marking or
scratching to secure bearing rings to worn
b. Bearings With Loose Internal Radial Clear- or undersize shaft seats.
ances. Bearings mounted with average interference
fits and loose internal radial clearances will retain a. Protect all oil holes, shaft centers, and
a sufficient radial clearance compensate for thermal areas not to be metallized from contamination or
expansion, slight misalignment, and heavier than metal buildup. This can be accomplished by using
normal interference fit without preloading. plugs and/or suitable masking material.
B-43
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
100-mesh garnet blast to obtain the proper surface

roughness.
d. Clean blasted area thoroughly to ensure

complete removal of all blast residues. Do not handle
the cleaned area with bare hands as fingerprint
residues will adversely affect the metal bond adhe-
sion.
e. Apply a minimum thickness of 0.002 to

0.003 inch of metal spray to ensure continuous,
uniform coverage.
f. Grind the metal spray buildup to the speci-

fied diameter. Make sure that the metal spray buildup
in the shaft fillet radius will not interfere with proper
seating of the bearing against the shaft shoulder.
g. The local Materials Engineering Laboratory/

Physical Science Laboratory shall be responsible
for controlling the metal spray process.
00b037
Figure B-37. Radial Clearance in Rolling Bearings B-142. Precision Brush Plating. Brush or stylus
plating is the same as tank electroplating except
that the plating solution is contained in a saturated
padded electrode which contacts the area to be
plated, instead of the tank solution. Brush plating
shall conform to Standard MIL-STD-865 and applica-
ble process specifications that are issued by the
local Materials Engineering Laboratory/Physical Sci-
ence Laboratory. All plating processes shall conform
to one of following applicable Federal Specifications:
a. Chromium Plating: Federal Specification

QQ-C-320
b. Nickel Plating: Federal Specification

QQ-N-290
c. Cadmium Plating: Federal Specification

QQ-C-416
d. S i l v e r P l a t i n g : F e d e r a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n
QQ-S-365
00b038
B-143. Brush plated steel parts that are heat treated
Figure B-38. Axial Clearance in Rolling Bearings to 180,000 psi and above shall be stress relieved
at 375_F $ 25_F for 4 hours.
b. Grind the shaft surface to allow for a final
metal spray thickness of 0.001 inch after finish grind B-144. Brush plating is usually limited to applications
and to remove out-of-roundness that exceeds draw- that require a minimum metal buildup, and the part
ing tolerances. does not require grinding for out-of-roundness and/or
taper. Plating to a finished dimension without a final
c. Garnet blast the surfaces to be metal grind can be accomplished if the part is not
sprayed to remove oxide films that would interfere out-of-round or tapered and the process is carefully
with proper adhesion of the metal spray. Use controlled.
B-44
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-17. Standard Shaft Mounting Fit (ABEC-1 Tolerance)
Diameter Limits Average

Production
Dimension Maximum Minimum Results
Inch Inch Inch
Bore size: 4mm Ć 0.1575 inch 0.1575 0.1572 0.1573

Rotating shaft size 4mm Ć 0.1576 inch 0.1576 0.1573 0.1575
B-145. Tank Plating. Tank plate bearing parts that B-148. Precision Brush Plating. Brush plating can
require significant metal build-up due to wear and/or be used to bring the bearing liners back to drawing
grinding to remove out-of-roundness and taper. dimensions. Refer to paragraph B-142 for additional
Plating procedures shall conform to the applicable information concerning brush plating of worn or
Federal Specification and local Materials Engineering out-of-tolerance parts.
Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory process
control. NOTE
Care must be exercised when grinding
B-146. REPAIR OF OVERSIZE HOUSING LiNERS. the metal spray to final dimension to
Oversize bearing housing liners can be brought back properly center the housing to preclude
to drawing dimensions by a metal spray, precision cutting through the plate or grinding the
brush plating process, or conventional tank plating. plate too thin.
Type of plating shall be as specified in local depot
engineering instructions or Service Command direc- B-149. Tank Plating. Conventional tank plating can
tives. be used to return bearing liners to drawing dimen-
sions. Plating shall conform to the applicable Federal
B-147. Metal Spray. Specification and local Materials Engineering Labo-
ratory/Physical Science Laboratory process control.
a. Mask all areas of the part that are not to
B-150. ESTABLISHED BEARING AND BEARING
be metallized.
COMPONENT TOLERANCES.
b. Locate center of bearing liner in accordance B-151. GENERAL. The American National Stan-
with applicable drawing or overhaul instruction. dards Institute (ANSI) has established five standards
of precision for ball bearings, two for cylindrical roller
c. Grind the inside diameter of the bearing bearings, and one for spherical roller bearings.
liner 0.010 inch over maximum drawing dimension. These standards are designated as ABEC-1,
ABEC-3, ABEC-5, ABEC-7, ABEC-9, RBEC-1, and
d. Vapor degrease the part. RBEC-5. The ABEC-9 precision is the most refined
standard for ball bearings, and the RBEC-5 precision
e. Mask the part as necessary and garnet is the most refined for roller bearings. All seven
blast the area to be metal sprayed. Use 100-mesh standards of precision include tolerances for bore,
garnet to obtain the proper surface roughness. outer diameter, width, and radial runout (eccentricity)
of inner and outer rings. Tolerance limits for width
f. Apply a uniform coating of metal spray to variation (parallelism of sides), side runout (axial
runout), and groove runout with reference sides
the inner diameter of the liner. Thickness of applied
(groove parallelism with sides) are part of ABEC-5,
coating shall be sufficient to permit finish grinding
to the required dimension. ABEC-7, ABEC-9, and RBEC-5 precision standards.
B-152. Tolerances apply only if measured as speci-
g. Finish grind the metal spray buildup to fied in the ANSI/ABMA Standard “Tolerance Defini-
applicable drawing dimension. Make sure the liner tions and Gaging Practices for Ball and Roller
fillet radius will not interfere with the proper seating Bearings”, Std 4-1984. Applicable portions of this
of the bearing against the liner shoulder. standard are included in paragraph B-156 of this
appendix. Conversions from inch to metric measure-
h. Treat surfaces in accordance with local ments shall be made using the conversion factor
engineering process instructions. of 1 inch equals 25.4 millimeters.
B-45
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-153. T h e A m e r i c a n B e a r i n g M a n u f a c t u r e r s defined in Glossary of Terms contained in Appendix

Association (ABMA) has established standards of A.
precision for instrument precision bearings. These
standards are designated as ABEC-5P, ABEC-7P, B-155. TABLES OF TOLERANCES FOR BALL AND
ABEC-9P, ABEC-5T, and ABEC-7T. An additional ROLLER BEARINGS. Tables on tolerance limits for
standard is for semi-precision instrument bearings. ball and roller bearings are as follows:
Tables B-23 through B-28 include the tolerances for
instrument precision bearings. Refer to Section XIV a. Tables B-18 through B-22. Radial ball and
for definitions and detailed information concerning cylindrical roller bearings, ABEC-1, 3, 5, 7, and 9.
b. Tables B-23 through B-28. Instrument ball
bearings.
B-154. It should be noted that in most tolerance
tables average or mean limits, as well as minimum c. Tables B-29 through B-33. Airframe and
and maximum limits, are listed. Under the present aircraft control bearings.
methods of manufacture of bearings with precision
equipment, experience has demonstrated that over d. Tables B-34 through B-38. Loose balls and
90 percent of all bearings of a particular standard rollers.
of precision will fall within the mean tolerance with
a very small percentage approaching the maximum e. Tables B-39 through B-40. Internal clear-
or minimum limits. Terms used in this appendix are ances of ball and roller bearings.
Table B-18. ABEC-1, RBEC-1 Tolerances for Radial Ball, Cylindrical and Spherical Roller Bearings, Except
Magneto Bearings
(Tolerances in 0.0001 in.)
Inner Ring
Bore Diameter d Bore Tolerance Limits
Millimeters Inches dm
Radial
Over Including Over Including Low High dmin1 dmax1 Runout
0 10 0 0.3937 -3 +0 -4 +1 3
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -3 +0 -4 +1 4
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -4 +0 -5 +2 5
30 50 1.1881 1.9685 -5 +0 -7 +2 6
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 -6 +0 -8 +2 8
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 -8 +0 -11 +3 10
120 80 4.7244 7.0866 -10 +0 -13 +3 12
180 250 4.0866 9.8425 -12 +0 -16 +4 16
250 315 9.7425 12.4015 -14 +0 -18 +4 20
315 400 12.4015 15.7480 -16 +0 -20 +4 24
400 500 15.4780 19.6850 -18 +0 -23 +5 26
500 630 19.6850 24.8031 -20 +0 -26 +6 28
630 800 24.8031 31.4961 -30 +0 -38 +8 32
800 1000 31.4961 39.3701 -40 +0 -50 +10 35
B-46
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-18. ABEC-1, RBEC-1 Tolerances for Radial Ball, Cylindrical and Spherical Roller Bearings, Except
Magneto Bearings (Continued)
Outer Ring
Outside Diameter Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits
Shield/Seal
Millimeters Inches Dm Open Bearings Bearings
Radial
Over Including Over Including High Low Dmax2 Dmin2 Dmax2 Dmin2 Runout
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -3 +1 -4 +2 -5 6
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -4 +1 -5 +2 -6 6
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -5 +2 -7 +4 -9 8
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -5 +2 -7 +4 -9 10
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 -6 +3 -9 +6 -12 14
120 150 4.7244 5.9055 +0 -8 +3 -11 +6 -14 16
150 180 5.9055 7.0866 +0 -10 +3 -13 +6 -16 18
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 +0 -12 +4 -16 +8 -20 20
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 +0 -14 +4 -18 +8 -22 24
315 400 12.4015 15.7480 +0 -16 +4 -20 +9 -25 28
400 500 15.7480 19.6850 +0 -18 +5 -23 +10 -28 32
500 630 19.6850 24.8031 +0 -20 +6 -26 +12 -32 40
630 800 24.8031 31.4961 +0 -30 +8 -38 ---- ---- 47
800 1000 31.4961 39.3701 +0 -49 +10 -50 ---- ---- 55
1000 1600 39.3701 49.2126 +0 -50 +12 -62 ---- ---- 64
1250 1600 49.2126 62.9921 +0 -65 +16 -81 ---- ---- 76
1600 2000 62.9921 78.7402 +0 -80 +20 -100 ---- ---- 90
Width Tolerance Limits
Bearings Other Than Duplex, Width of
Individual Inner or Outer Ring Modified Bearings 3 width of Inner or Outer Ring
Nominal Inner Ring Nominal Inner Ring
Bore/Outer Ring O.D. Bore/Outer Ring O.D.
Millimeters Millimeters
Over Including Width Tolerance Limits Over Including Width Tolerance Limits
0 50 +0 -50 0 50 +0 -100
50 80 +0 -60 50 120 +0 -150
80 120 +0 -80 120 315 +0 -200
120 180 +0 -100 315 400 +0 -250
180 250 +0 -120
250 315 +0 -140
B-47
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-18. ABEC-1, RBEC-1 Tolerances for Radial Ball, Cylindrical and Spherical
Roller Bearings, Except Magneto Bearings
(Tolerances in 0.0001 in.) (Continued)
Width Tolerance Limits (Continued)

Bearings Other Than Duplex, Width of
Individual Inner or Outer Ring Modified Bearings 3 width of Inner or Outer Ring
Nominal Inner Ring Nominal Inner Ring
Bore/Outer Ring O.D. Bore/Outer Ring O.D.
315 400 +0 -160
400 500 +0 -180
500 630 +0 -200
630 800 +0 -300
800 1000 +0 -400
1 dmin and dmax apply to diameter series 0 up to and including 40-mm bore, in diameter, series 2 up to and
including 180-mm bore, and diameter series 3 and 4 only; dmin and dmax are not restricted in larger sizes.
2 Dmin and Dmax apply to diameter series 0 up to and including 80-mm outside diameter, in diameter series
2 up to and including 315-mm outside diameter, and diameter series 3 and 4 only, and before insertion of
internal snap rings for cylindrical roller bearings, if any. Dmin and Dmax are not restricted in the larger sizes.
3 This refers to a ball bearing on which one or both sides are modified so that two or more bearings can be
mounted side by side as a unit.
Table B-19. ABEC-3 Tolerances for Radial Ball Bearings, Magneto Bearings
(Inch and Metric Series -Tolerance in 0.0001 in.)
Inner Ring1
Bore d Bore Tolerance Limits Radial

Runout
Millimeters2 Inches dm (Total
Indicator
Over Including Over Including High Low dmin dmax Reading)
0 10 0 0.3937 -2 +0 -3 +1 2
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -2 +0 -3 +1 3
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -2 +0 -3 +1 3
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 -3 +0 -5 +2 4
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 -4 +0 -6 +2 4
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 -5 +0 -8 +3 5
120 180 4.7244 7.0866 -6 +0 -9 +3 6
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 -7 +0 -11 +4 8
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 -8 +0 -12 +4 10
B-48
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-19. ABEC-3 Tolerances for Radial Ball Bearings, Magneto Bearings
(Inch and Metric Series -Tolerance in 0.0001 in.) (Continued)
Outer Ring 3
Outside Diameter D Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits Radial

Runout
Millimeters2 Inches dm (Total
Indicator
Over Including Over Including High Low Dmin Dmax Reading)
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -3 +1 -4 4
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -3 +1 -4 4
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -3 +2 -5 4
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -4 +2 -6 5
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 -4 +3 -7 7
120 150 4.7244 5.9055 +0 -5 +3 -8 8
150 180 5.9055 7.0866 +0 -6 +3 -9 9
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 +0 -7 +4 -11 10
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 +0 -8 +4 -12 12
315 400 12.4015 15.7480 +0 -9 +4 -13 14
400 500 15.7480 19.6850 +0 -10 +5 -15 16
Bearings Other Than Duplex, Width of Duplex Bearings4 Total Width of

Individual Inner or Outer Ring Inner or Outer Rings
Width Tolerance Width Tolerance
Nominal Bore Limits Nominal Bore Limits
Millimeters2 Millimeters2
Inch Inch
Over Including Type Plus Minus Over Including Type Plus Minus
0 180 0 50 0 80 0 200
180 315 0 100 80 180 0 200
315 400 All Sizes 0 160 180 315 All Sizes 0 400
400 500 0 180 315 400 0 500
500 630 0 220
1 Bore tolerance limits dmin and dmax apply only to diameter series 0 (up to and including d=40 mm),
diameter series 2 (up to and including d=180 mm), and diameter series 3 and 4, as described in
American Standard Boundary Dimensions for Ball and Roller Bearings, B3.6-1961.
2 Metric dimensions are reference values only.
3 Outside diameter tolerance limits Dmin and Dmax apply only to diameter series - (up to and including
D=80 mm), diameter series 2 (up to and including D=315 mm), and diameter series 3 and 4, before
insertion of shields and seals, if any, as described in American Standard Boundary Dimensions for
Ball and Roller Bearings, B3.6-1961.
4 If more than a pair of bearings is involved, the tolerance is in proportion to the number of bearings.
B-49
B-50
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-20. ABEC-5, RBEC-5 Tolerances for Radial Ball and Cylindrical Roller Bearings,
Except Magneto Bearings (Tolerances in 0.0001 in.)
Inner Ring
Bore Tolerance
Bore Diameter Limits
Millimeters Inches Groove Runout
Radial Reference Side with Reference
Over Including Over Including dmin dmax Runout Width Variation Runout with Bore Side 1
0 10 0 0.3937 -2 +0 1.5 2 3 3
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -2 +0 1.5 2 3 3
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -2 +0 1.5 2 3 3
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 -2 +0 2 2 3 3
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 -3 +0 2 2 3 3
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 -3 +0 2.5 3 3 4
120 180 4.7244 7.0866 -4 +0 3 3 4 4
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 -5 +0 4 4 4 5
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 -5 +0 5 5 5 6
Outer Ring
Outside Diameter Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits

Outside
Open Cylindrical Groove
Millimeters Inches Bearings Shielded/Sealed Bearings Surface Runout
Dm Runout with
Radial Width Reference Reference
Over Including Over Including Dmax Dmin High Low Dmax2 Dmin2 Runout Variation Side Side 1
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -2 +0 -2 +1 -3 2 2 3 3
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -2 +0 -2 +1 -3 2 2 3 3
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -2 +0 -2 +2 -4 2 2 3 3
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -3 +0 -3 +2 -5 2 2 3 4
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 -3 +0 -3 +3 -6 3 3 3 5
120 150 4.7244 5.9055 +0 -4 +0 -4 +3 -7 3 3 4 5
150 180 5.9055 7.0866 +0 -5 +0 -5 +3 -8 3 3 4 6
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 +0 -5 +0 -5 +4 -9 4 4 4 6
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 +0 -5 +0 -5 ---- ---- 5 5 5 7
315 400 12.4015 15.7480 +0 -6 +0 -6 ---- ---- 5 5 5 8
400 500 15.7480 19.6550 +0 -7 +0 -7 ---- ---- 6 6 6 9
Table B-20. BEC-5, RBEC-5 Tolerances for Radial Ball and Cylindrical Roller Bearings, Except Magneto Bearings
(Continued)

Bearings other than Duplex, Width of Duplex Bearings, Total Width of Inner
Individual Inner or Outer Ring or Outer Rings3
Nominal Inner Ring Bore Nominal Inner Ring Bore
0 180 +0 -50 0 80 +0 -200
180 315 +0 -100 80 180 +0 -300
315 400 +0 -160 180 315 +0 -400
400 500 +0 -180 315 400 +0 -500
500 630 +0 -220
1 Applies to groove type ball bearings only.
2 The mean of Dmax for sealed or shielded bearings must be within Dm limits.
3 If other than a pair of bearings is involved, the tolerance is in proportion to the number of bearings.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-51
B-52
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-21. ABEC-7 Tolerances for Radial Ball Bearings, Except Magneto Bearings (Tolerances in 0.0001 in.)
Inner Ring
Bore Diameter Bore Tolerance Limits Reference Groove
Millimeters Inches Side Runout with
Radial Width Runout with Reference
Over Including Over Including dmin dmax Runout Variation Bore Side 1
0 10 0 0.3937 -1.5 +0 1 1 1 1
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -1.5 +0 1 1 1 1
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -1.5 +0 1.5 1 1.5 1.5
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 -2 +0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 -2 +0 1.5 1.5 2 1.5
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 -2.5 +0 2 1.5 2 2
120 180 4.7244 7.0866 -3 +0 3 2 3 3
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 -4 +0 3 2 3 3
Outer Ring
Outside Diameter Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits Outside
Cylindrical Groove
Millimeters Inches Open Bearings Shielded/Sealed Bearings Surface Runout
Dm Runout with
Over Including Over Including Dmax Dmin High Low Dmax2 Dmin2 Runout Variation Side Side 1
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -2 +0 -2 +1 -3 2 1 1.5 2
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -2 +0 -2 +1 -3 2 1 1.5 2
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -2 +0 -2 +2 -4 2 1 1.5 2
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -2 +0 -2 +2 -4 2 1 1.5 2
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 -3 +0 -3 +3 -6 2 2 2 2
120 150 4.7244 5.9055 +0 -4 +0 -4 +3 -7 3 2 2 3
150 180 5.9055 7.0866 +0 -4 +0 -4 +3 -7 3 2 2 3
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 +0 -4 +0 -4 +4 -8 4 3 3 4
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 4 3 3 4
315 400 12.4015 15.7480 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- 5 3 4 5
Table B-21. ABEC-7 Tolerances for Radial Ball, Except Magneto Bearings
(Continued)

Bearings other than Duplex, Width of Duplex Bearings, Total Width of Inner
Individual Inner or Outer Ring or Outer Rings3
Nominal Inner
Ring Bore Nominal Inner Ring Bore
0 180 +0 Ć50 0 80 +0 Ć200
180 315 +0 Ć100 80 180 +0 Ć300
315 400 +0 Ć160 180 315 +0 Ć400
400 500 +0 Ć180 315 400 +0 Ć500
500 630 +0 Ć220
2 The mean of Dmax for sealed or shielded bearings must be within Dm limits.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-53
Table B-22. ABECĆ9 Tolerances for Radial Ball Bearings, Except Magneto Bearings (Tolerances in 0.0001 in.)
B-54
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Inner Ring
Bore Diameter Bore Tolerance Limits Reference Groove
Millimeters Inches Side Runout with
Radial Width Runout with Reference
Over Including Over Including dmin dmax Runout Variation Bore Side 1
0 10 0 0.3937 -1 +0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -1 +0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -1 +0 1 0.5 0.5 1
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 -1 +0 1 0.5 0.5 1
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 -1.5 +0 1 0.5 0.5 1
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 -2 +0 1 1 1 1
120 150 4.7244 5.9055 -2.5 +0 1 1 1 1
150 180 5.9055 7.0866 -2.5 +0 2 1.5 1.5 2
Outer Ring
Outside Diameter2 Outside

Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits Cylindrical
Surface Groove
Millimeters Inches Runout Runout with
Over Including Over Including Dmax Dmin Runout Variation Side Side 1
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -1.5 1 1 0.5 1
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -1.5 1 0.5 0.5 1
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -1.5 1.5 0.5 0.5 1.5
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 -2 2 1 1 2
120 150 4.7244 5.9055 +0 -2 2 1 1 2
150 180 5.9055 7.0866 +0 -2.5 2 1 1 2
180 250 7.0866 9.8425 +0 -3 2.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
250 315 9.8425 12.4015 +0 -3 2.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
Table B-22. ABECĆ9 Tolerances for Radial Ball Bearings, Except Magneto Bearings (Tolerances in 0.0001 in.) (Continued)

Bearings Other Than Duplex. Duplex Bearings, Total Width
Width of individual or Outer Ring of Inner or Outer Rings3
Nominal Inner Ring Bore Nominal Inner Ring Bore
0 10 +0 -10 0 80 +0 -200
10 180 +0 -50 80 180 +0 -300
2 Outer ring tolerances apply before seals or shields are inserted.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-55
Table B-23. Tolerances for Instrument Precision Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series ABECĆ5P
B-56
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
ABECĆ5P
(Tolerances in 0.0001 Inch)
Inner Ring
Bore Diameter d Bore Bore Runout Raceway
Bore Tolerance 2-Point Bore Radial Width with Reference Runout with
mm Inch Limits Out-of-Round Taper Runout Variation Side Reference Side
Over Incl. Over Incl. dmin dmax Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
0 10 0 0.3937 -2 +0 1 1 1.5 2 3 3
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -2 +0 1 1 1.5 2 3 3
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -2 +0 1 1 1.5 2 3 3
Outer Ring
Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits
Open Type Bearings Shielded Sealed Bearings
Outside Outside
Outside Diameter D Diam. Diam.
2-Point Outside 2-Point Outside
Out-of- Diam. Out-of- Diam. Radial
mm Inch Dm Limits Round Taper Limits 1 Round Taper Runout
Over Incl. Over Incl. High Low Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Max.
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -2 +0 -2 1 1 +0.4 -2.4 2 2 2

18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -2 +0 -2 1 1 +0.4 -2.4 2 2 2
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -2 +0 -2 1 1 +0.4 -2.4 2 2 2
Table 23. Tolerances for Instrument Precision Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series (Continued)
ABEC-5P
Outside Diameter D Outside Cylinder Raceway4

Width3 Surface Runout Runout with Flange Width Flange Diam.
mm Inch Variation with Refer. Side Refer. Side Toler. Limits Toler. Limits
Over Incl. Over Incl. Max. Max. Max. High Low High Low
Ą0 18 0 0.7087 2 3 3 +0 -20 +0 -10

18 30 0.7087 1.1811 2 3 3 +0 -20 +0 -10
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 2 3 3 +0 -20 +0 -10

Basic Inner Ring Bore Bearings other than Duplex Duplex Bearings 2
Width of Individual Total Width of a Pair
mm Inch Inner or Outer Ring Inner or Outer Rings
Over Incl. Over Incl. High Low High Low
0 30 0 1.1811 0 -10 +10 -150
1 Dmax + Dmin must be with Dm.

2
2 If other than a pair of bearings is involved. The tolerance is in proportion to the number of bearings.
3 For flanged bearings “reference side” is inside face of flange.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
4 For flanged bearings “reference side” is inside face of flange.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-57
B-58
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-24. Tolerances for Instrument Precision Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series
ABEC-7P
Outer Ring
Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits
Outside Diameter D Open Type Bearings Shielded Sealed Bearings
Outside Outside
Diam. Diam.
2-Point Outside 2-Point Outside
Out-of- Diam. Out-of- Diam. Radial
mm Inch Dm Limits Round Taper Limits 1 Round Taper Runout
Over Incl. Over Incl. High Low Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Max.
0 18 0 0.7087 +0 -2 +0 -2 1 1 +0.4 -2.4 2 2 1.5

18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -2 +0 -2 1 1 +0.4 -2.4 2 2 1.5
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -2 +0 -2 1 1 +0.4 -2.4 2 2 2
Outside Raceway 4 Runout

Cylinder with Reference Side
Surface
Outside Diameter D Runout
Width 3 with Refer. Non- Flange Width Flange Diam.
mm Inch Variation Side Flanged Flanged Toler. Limits Toler. Limits
Over Incl. Over Incl. Max. Max. Max. Max. Low High Low High
0 18 0 0.7087 1 1.5 2 3 +0 -20 +0 -10

18 30 0.7087 1.1811 1 1.5 2 3 +0 -20 +0 -10
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 1 1.5 2 3 +0 -20 +0 -10
Table B-24. Tolerances for Instrument Precision Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series (Continued)
ABEC-7P
Inner Ring
Raceway
Bore Diameter d Bore Bore Runout Runout with
2-Point Bore Radial Width with Reference Reference
mm Inch Bore Tolerance Limits Out-of-Round Taper Runout Variation Side Side
0 10 0 0.3937 -2 +0 1 1 1.0 1 1.0 1.0

10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -2 +0 1 1 1.0 1 1.0 1.0
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -2 +0 1 1 1.5 1 1.5 1.5

0 30 0 1.1811 +0 -10 +0 -150
1 Dmax + Dmin must be with Dm.

2
2 If other than a pair of bearings is involved the tolerance is in proportion to the number of bearings.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
3 For flanged bearings, Width Variation also applies to Flange Width.
4 For flanged bearings, “reference side” is inside face of flange.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-59
B-60
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-25. Tolerances for Instrument Precision Ball Bearings, Except Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series
ABEC-9P
Inner Ring
Bore Diameter d Bore Runout Raceway

Bore Tolerance Bore 2-Point Bore Radial Width with Reference Runout with
mm Inch Limits Out-of-Round Taper Runout Variation Side Reference Side
0 10 0 0.3937 -1 +0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -1 +0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -1 +0 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0
Outer Ring
Outside
Outside Diameter D Cylindrical
Outside Outside Surface Runout Raceway
Outside Diameter Diam. 2-Point Diam. Radial Width With Reference Runout with
mm Inch Tolerance Limits Out-of-Round Taper Runout Variation Side Reference Side
Over Incl. Over Incl. Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
0 18 0.7089 0 +0 -1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

18 30 0.7087 1.1811 +0 -1.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0
30 50 1.1811 1.9685 +0 -1.5 0.8 0.8 1.0 0.5 0.5 1.0

0 30 0 1.1811 +0 -10 +0 -150
Table B-26. Tolerances for Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series Instrument Precision Ball Bearings
ABEC-5T
(Tolerances in 0.0001 Inch Units)
Inner Ring
Bore Raceway
Basic Bore Diameter d Bore Tolerance Limits 2 Runout Runout
with with
Torque Tube Extra Thin Radial Width Reference Reference
mm Inch dmin Type Section Runout Variation Side Side
Over Incl. Over Incl. Low High dmin dmax dmin dmax Max. Max. Max. Max.
13 20 .5118 .7087 -2 +0 -3 +1 -3 +1 2 2 3 3
20 30 .7087 1.1811 -2 +0 -3 +1 -4 +2 2 2 3 3
30 45 1.1811 1.7717 -3 +0 -4 +1 -6 +3 3 2 3 3
45 65 1.7717 2.5591 -4 +0 -5 +1 -8 +4 4 3 3 4
65 80 2.5591 3.1496 -4 +0 -6 +2 -10 +6 4 3 3 4
Outer Ring 1
Outside
Cylindrical
Basic Outside Diameter D Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits 3 Surface Raceway
Runout Runout
with with
Torque Extra Thin Torque Extra Thin Radial Width Reference Reference
mm Inch Dm Tube Type Section Tube Type Section Runout Variation Side Side
Over Incl. Over Incl. Low High Dmax Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Max. Max.
18 28 .7087 1.1024 +0 -2 +1 -3 +1 -3 +2 -4 +2 -4 2 2 3 3
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
28 50 1.1024 1.9685 +0 -4 +1 -5 +3 -7 +2 -6 +4 -8 3 2 3 3
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -4 +1 -5 +4 -8 +2 -6 +5 -9 3 2 3 4
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 -5 +2 -7 +6 -11 +3 -8 +7 -12 4 3 3 5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-61
Table BĆ26. Tolerances for Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series Instrument Precision Ball Bearings (Continued)
B-62
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
ABECĆ5T

Bore Inner Ring Bore Bearings other than Duplex Duplex Bearings 4
Width of Individual Total Width of a Pair of
0 30 0 1.1811 +0 -10 +0 -150

30 80 1.1811 3.1496 +0 -50 +0 -200
1 For bearings made with fractured outer ring, Dmin, Dmax values may be exceeded.
2 dmax + dmin must be within dm.

2
3 Dmax + Dmin must be within Dm.

2
Table B-27. Tolerances for Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series Instrument Precision Ball Bearings
ABEC-7T
Inner Ring
Bore Raceway
Basic Bore Diameter d Bore Tolerance Limits 2 Runout Runout
with with
Torque Tube Extra Thin Radial Width Reference Reference
mm Inch dmin Type Section Runout Variation Side Side
Over Incl. Over Incl. Low High dmin dmax dmin dmax Max. Max. Max. Max.
13 20 .5118 .7087 -2 +0 -2 +0 -2 +0 1 1 1 1
20 30 .7087 1.1811 -2 +0 -2.5 +0.5 -3 +1 1.5 1 1.5 1.5
30 45 1.1811 1.7717 -2 +0 -3 +1 -4 +2 1.5 1 1.5 1.5
45 65 1.7717 2.5591 -3 +0 -4 +1 -6 +3 2 1.5 2 2
65 80 2.5591 3.1496 -3 +0 -4.5 +1.5 -7.5 +4.5 2 1.5 2 2
Outer Ring 1
Basic Bore Diameter D Outside Diameter Tolerance Limits 3 Outside

Cylindrical
Shielded or Sealed Surface Raceway
Open Type Bearings Bearings Runout Runout
with with
Torque Extra Thin Torque Extra Thin Radial Width Reference Reference
mm Inch Dm Tube Type Section Tube Type Section Runout Variation Side Side
Over Incl. Over Incl. Low High Dmax Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax Dmin Max. Max. Max. Max.
18 28 .7087 1.1024 +0 -2 +0 -2 +0 -2 +1 -3 +1 -3 1.5 1 1.5 2
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
28 50 1.1024 1.9685 +0 -2 +1 -3 +2 -4 +2 -4 +3 -5 2 1 1.5 2
50 80 1.9685 3.1496 +0 -3 +1 -4 +3 -6 +2 -5 +4 -7 2 1.5 1.5 3
80 120 3.1496 4.7244 +0 4 +1 -5 +4 -8 +2 -6 +5 -9 3 2 2 3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-63
B-64
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-27 Tolerance for Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series Instrument Precision Ball Bearings (Continued)
ABEC-7T

Bore Inner Ring Bore Bearings other than Duplex Duplex Bearings 4
Width of Individual Total Width of a Pair of
0 80 0 3.1496 +0 -10 +0 -150
1 For bearings made with fractured outer ring, Dmin, Dmax values may be exceeded.

2
3 Dmax + Dmin must be within Dm.

2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-28. Tolerances for Instrument Semi-Precision Ball Bearings

Except Torque Tube Type and Extra Thin Series
ABEC-3
Inner Ring
Bore Diameter Bore Tolerance Limits 1
Millimeters Inches dm
Radial
Over Including Over Including Low High dmin dmax Runout
0 10 0 0.3937 -2 +0 -3 +1 2
10 18 0.3937 0.7087 -2 +0 -3 +1 3
18 30 0.7087 1.1811 -2 +0 -3 +1 3

2
B-65
B-66
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-29. Tolerances for Airframe Bearings
Types Bore Diameter Outside Diameter Width
Chamfer Both
dm Dm Outer Ring Inner Ring Rings
Maxi- Mini- Maxi- Mini- Maxi- Mini-
Shielded Sealed High Low dmax dmin High Low Dmax Dmin mum mum mum mum mum mum
KP– +0 -5 +2 -7 +0 -7 +5 -10 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
KP–A +0 -5 +2 -7 +0 -7 +5 -10 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
KP–B +0 -10 +3 -13 +0 -10 +10 -20 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
KS–
— +0 -5 +2 -7 +0 -7 +5 -10 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
DP– +0 -5 +2 -7 +0 -7 +5 -10 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
DSP– +0 -5 +2 -7 +0 -7 +5 -10 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
Open Type
Stainless Ball
Steel Bearing
Steel
A538 B538 +7 -7 +10 -10 +0 -10 +5 -15 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0

through through
A543 B543
A544 B544 +10 -10 +16 -16 +0 -15 +8 -23 +0 -50 +0 -50 +150 -0
through through
A546 B546
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-30. Tolerances for Airframe Needle Bearings

Bore d Outsided Diameter D

Dimension in Inches Dimension in Inches
Over Including Tolerance Over Including Tolerance
0 3.1250 +0 0.0000 1.9375 +0
-7 -5
3.1250 4.6250 +0 1.9375 3.1250 +0
-8 -6
4.6250 7.0000 +0 3.1250 4.6250 +0
-10 -8
7.0000 10.5000 +0 4.6250 7.0000 +0
-12 -10
10.5000 13.5000 +0 7.0000 10.5000 +0
-16 -12
10.5000 14.5000 +0
-16
14.5000 15.2500 +0
-24
B-67
B-68
Table B-31. Axial Play for New Airframe Bearings (MIL-B-7949)
(Axial Play in 0.001 Inch)
AN Part No. Axial Play (Maximum) AN Part No. Axial Play (Maximum)
Heavy Duty Ball Extra Light Duty Ball
AN200K3L 5.0 AN202KP21B 7.0

AN200KP3 6.0 AN202KP23B 7.0
AN200KP4 6.0 AN202KP25B 7.0
AN200KP5 6.0 AN202KP29B 7.0
AN200KP6 6.0 AN202KP33B 7.0
AN200KP8 7.0 AN202KP37B 7.0
AN200KP10 7.0 AN202KP47B 7.0
AN202KP49B 7.0
Heavy Duty Ball (Self-Aligning) Heavy Duty Double Row Ball (Self-Aligning)
AN200KS3L 23.0 AN206DSP3 5.0

AN200KS3 23.0 AN206DSP4 6.0
AN200KS4 25.0 AN206DSP5 6.0
AN200KS5 28.0 AN206DSP6 6.0
AN200KS6 30.0 AN206DSP8 7.0
AN200KS8 32.0 AN206DSP10 7.0
AN200KS10 34.0
Intermediate Duty Ball Heavy Duty Double Row Ball
AN201KP3A 5.0 AN207DP3 5.0

AN201KP4A 6.0 AN207DP4 6.0
AN201KP5A 6.0 AN207DP5 6.0
AN201KP6A 6.0 AN207DP6 6.0
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
AN201KP8A 7.0 AN207DP8 7.0
AN201KP10A 7.0 AN207DP10 7.0
AN201KP12A 7.0
AN201KP16A 7.0
AN201KP20A 7.0
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Note: Radial play in all airframe bearings shall not exceed 0.001 inch. Use
a 5-1/2 pound radial load alternately applied in opposite directions.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-32. Axial Play for New Airframe Rod End Ball Bearings (MIL-B-6039)
(Axis Plan in 0.001 Inch)
AN Dash No. Bore Bolt Size (Inch) Axial Plan (Maximum)
-3 No. 10 (0.190) 3.0

-4 1/4 3.0
-5 5/16 3.0
-6 3/8 3.0
-8 1/2 3.0
-10 5/8 3.0
Table B-33. Eccentricity and Wobble Clearances for New Aircraft Control Pulleys (MIL-P-7034)
Pulley Part No. Eccentricity1 (Maximum) Wobble Clearance2 (Minimum)
MS20219-1 6.0 5.0

MS20219-2 6.0 5.0
MS20919-3 6.0 5.0
MS20919-4 7.0 5.0
MS20219-5 7.0 5.0
MS20220-1 7.0 5.0
MS20220-2 7.0 5.0
MS20220-3 10.0 5.0
MS20220-4 10.0 5.0
MS20221-1 7.0 5.0
MS20221-2 7.0 5.0
MS20221-3 10.0 5.0
1 Radial runout of the periphery of the pulley groove and groove flanges with respect to the longitudinal axis of
the bearing. It is measured in such a manner that the internal bearing clearance is not included in the reading.
(See fig. B-39).
2 Clearance between the pulley and a plane perpendicular to the bearing axis, when the pulley is deflected under
the limit load specified applied at an angle of 2 degrees from normal. (See fig. B-40).
00b039 00b040
Figure B–39. Checking for Eccentricity Figure B–40. Checking for Wobble Clearance
in Pulley Bearings in Pulley Bearings
B-69
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table BĆ34. Tolerances for Balls and Rollers in Assembled ABECĆ1 Class Bearings
Maximum permissible variation of diameter between largest and smallest

ball in any assembled ABEC-1 ball bearing shall be:
For ball diameters up to 3/8 inch inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5
For ball diameters from 3/8 to 1 inch inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0
For ball diameters from 1 to 2 inch inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Maximum permissible variation of diameter between the smallest

roller in any assembled RBEC-1 cylindrical or spherical roller
bearing shall be:
For roller diameters up to 3/8 inch inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0
For roller diameters 3/8 to 1 inch inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
For roller diameters from 1 to 2 inch inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0
For roller diameters above 2 inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Hardness of bearing rings, balls, and rollers taken on Rockwell C-scale

shall be 58-66, depending on bearing size and material. This statement
does not apply to corrosion resistant materials.
B-156. GAGING PRACTICES FOR BALL AND B-158. N E E D L E R O L L E R B E A R I N G G A G I N G

ROLLER BEARINGS. PRACTICES. The following gaging procedures for
needle roller bearings are taken from Section 4 of
B-157. Explanation of Symbols Used in the Arith- ABMA Standard of February 1984.
metic Formulas.
B-159. Type NAA (Single Row, Rollers Retained
d - bearing bore nominal diameter. by Outer Ring, No Inner Ring) (Figure B-41).
D- bearing outside diameter. a. Bore. Use appropriate “Go” and “No Go”
plug gages.
dmin - the minimum diameter readings obtained by
b. Outside Diameter. Use gaging apparatus
two-point measurements of a bearing bore having
arranged for measuring between a flat surface and
out-of-roundness and taper.
an indicator stylus. If out-of-roundness and/or taper
exist, a minimum diameter of min, and a maximum
dmax - the maximum diameter reading obtained by
diameter, of m, of the bearing is defined as the
two-point measurements of a bearing bore having
arithmetical average of two readings, of min and
out-of-roundness and taper.
of max.
Dmin - the minimum diameter reading obtained by c. Width. Width is checked by supporting the
two-point measurements of a bearing outside surface bearing on one side by three buttons and applying
having out-of-roundness and taper. an indicator stylus against the other side directly
over one button. Take reading while rotating the ring.
Dmax - the maximum diameter reading obtained by
two-point measurements of a bearing outside surface d. Width Variation. The width variation of
having out-of-roundness and taper. individual rings is the difference between the largest
and smallest widths. Use the same method used
dm = dmax + dmin for a particular bearing. to measure ring width.
2
e. Radial Runout. Push the bearing onto an
Dm = Dmax + Dmin for a particular bearing. arbor having a very slight taper (0.0001 to 0.0002
2 in. on diameter per inch of length) until bearing binds
slightly. Apply indicator stylus on outside diameter.
B - width of bearing. Radial runout is the difference between maximum
and minimum readings when rotating the arbor and
H - bearing height, thrust ball bearings. bearing one revolution together.
B-70
Table B-35. Tolerances for Loose Chrome Alloy Steel Balls
Maximum
“V” Block Plus or Minus Surface
Available Diameter Out-of-Round Diameter Basic Roughness
Size Range, Tolerance Per in 120 Tolerance per Diameter Marking Microinch
Grade Inches Ball Degrees Angle Unit Container Tolerance Increments “AA”1
3 1/32 to 1 3.0 3.0 5.0 30.0 3.0 0.52

5 1/32 to 1 1/2 5.0 5.0 10.0 50.0 5.0 0.72
10 1/32 to 1 1/2 10.0 10.0 20.0 100.0 10.0 1.02
15 17/32 to 1 1/2 15.0 15.0 30.0 100.0 15.0 1.22
25 1/32 to 1 1/2 25.0 25.0 50.0 100.0 25.0 1.52
50 1/32 to 2 7/8 50.0 50.0 100.0 200.0 50.0 (3 )
100 3 to 4 1/2 100.0 100.0 200.0 500.0 100.0 (3 )
200 1/32 to 2 7/8 200.0 200.0 400.0 1,000.0 200.0 (3 )
300 3 to 4 1/2 300.0 300.0 600.0 1,500.0 300.0 (3 )
500 1 11/32 to 4 1/2 500.0 500.0 1,000.0 2,000.0 500.0 (3 )
1,000 1/32 to 4 1/2 1,000.0 1,000.0 2,000.0 5,000.0 — (3 )
1 “AA” - Arithmetical average.
2 These Grades may carry waviness requirements.
3 Not applicable.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-71
B-72
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-36. Tolerances for Loose Corrosion Resistant Steel Balls
Maximum
“V” Block Plus or Minus Surface
Available Diameter Out-of-Round Diameter Basic Roughness
Size Range, Tolerance Per in 120 Tolerance per Diameter Marking Microinch
Grade Inches Ball Degrees Angle Unit Container Tolerance Increments “AA”1
5 1/32 to 3/4 5.0 5.0 10.0 50.0 5.0 0.72

10 1/32 to 3/4 10.0 10.0 20.0 100.0 10.0 1.02
15 1/32 to 3/4 15.0 15.0 30.0 100.0 15.0 1.22
25 1/32 to 1 25.0 25.0 50.0 100.0 25.0 1.52
50 1/32 to 2 50.0 50.0 100.0 200.0 50.0 (3 )
100 1/32 to 4 1/2 100.0 100.0 200.0 500.0 100.0 (3 )
200 1/32 to 4 1/2 200.0 200.0 400.0 1,000.0 200.0 (3 )
1 “AA” - Arithmetical average.
2 These balls may carry waviness requirements.
3 Not applicable.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-37. Hardness Ranges for Loose Balls
Material Method1 Rockwell Value
Chrome alloy steel Measured on parallel flats.2 60-67 “C” scale.

Corrosion resisting hardened steel Measured on parallel flats.2 55-64 “C” scale.
Corrosion resisting unhardened steel Measured on parallel flats.2 25-39 “C” scale.
Carbon steel Measured on the ball surface. 60 minimum “C” scale.
Brass Measured on parallel flats. 75-87 “B” scale.
Bronze Measured on parallel flats. 75-95 “B” scale.
Aluminum bronze Measured on parallel flats. 15-20 “C” scale.
Monel metal Measured on parallel flats. 85-95 “B” scale.
K-monel metal Measured on parallel flats. 27 minimum “C” scale.
Aluminum Measured on parallel flats. 54-72 “B” scale.
1 Rockwell hardness tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Standard E-18. Other hardness
measuring methods may be used if properly converted.
2 A table for conversion from Rockwell “C” values obtained on the curved surface to Rockwell “C”
on parallel flats is given in table B-29.
Table B-38. Hardness Corrections for Ball Curvature1
Ball Diameters
Rc
Readings2 1/4 in. 5/16 in. 3/8 in. 1/2 in. 5/8 in. 3/4 in. 1 in.
15 13.3 10.2 8.5 6.8 5.5 4.5 3.4

20 12.1 9.3 7.7 6.1 4.9 4.1 3.1
25 11.0 8.4 7.0 5.5 4.4 3.7 2.7
30 9.8 7.5 6.2 4.9 3.9 3.2 2.4
35 8.6 6.6 5.5 4.3 3.4 2.8 2.1
40 7.5 5.7 4.7 3.6 2.9 2.4 1.7
45 6.3 4.9 4.0 3.0 2.4 1.9 1.4
50 5.2 4.0 3.2 2.4 1.9 1.5 1.1
55 4.1 3.1 2.5 1.8 1.4 1.1 0.8
60 2.9 2.2 1.8 1.2 0.9 0.7 0.4
65 1.8 1.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.1
1 This table is for chrome alloy steel and corrosion resisting hardened and unhardened steel balls.
2 Hardness readings of balls taken on spherical surfaces are affected by the curvature and hardness
level of the ball. Because of these factors, corrections are necessarily added to the as-read hardness.
For ball sizes and hardness values other than shown, interpolate between values above.
B-73
B-74
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-39. Tolerance Values for Radial Internal Clearance of Single-Row Radial Ball Bearing
(Values in 0.0001 Inch)
2 0 3 4
(Less than (Greater than

Standard Clearance) (Standard Clearance) Standard Clearance) (Greater than 3 Clearance)
Bore in Millimeters Acceptance Limits Acceptance Limits Acceptance Limits Acceptance Limits
Mfg. Limits Mfg. Limits Mfg. Limits Mfg. Limits
Over Including Low Low High High Low Low High High Low Low High High Low Low High High
2.5 10 – – 2.5 3 1 1.5 4.5 5 3 4 8 9 – – – –
10 18 – – 3 3.5 1 2 6 7 4 5 9 10 7 8 12 13
18 24 – – 3.5 4 2 3 7 8 5 6 10 11 8 9 13 14
24 30 – – 4 4.5 2 3 7 8 5 6 10 11 9 10 15 16
30 40 – – 4 4.5 2 3 7 8 6 7 12 13 11 12 17 18
40 50 – – 4 4.5 2 3 8 9 7 8 13 14 12 13 19 20
50 65 – 1 5 6 3 4 10 11 9 10 16 17 15 16 23 24
65 80 – 1 5 6 4 5 11 12 10 11 19 20 18 19 27 28
80 100 – 1 6 7 5 6 13 14 12 13 22 23 21 22 32 33
100 120 – 1 7 8 6 7 15 16 14 15 25 26 24 25 37 38
120 140 – 1 8 9 7 8 18 19 16 18 30 32 28 30 43 45
140 160 – 1 8 9 7 8 20 21 18 20 34 36 32 34 49 51
160 180 – 1 9 10 8 9 23 24 21 23 38 40 36 38 55 58
180 200 – 1 11 12 10 11 27 28 25 27 44 46 42 44 62 64
NOTE: Because it is difficult to obtain exact reproducibility in the measurement of radial clearance, it is necessary to allow somewhat wider
acceptance limits than those used in manufacturing. Consequently, in the table above, both manufacturing (mfg) and acceptance limits are
given. Bearings are made to the manufacturing limits shown in the table, and 70 percent of a lot of bearings is expected to fall within this
range.
Table B-40. Tolerance Values for Radial Internal Clearance of Cylindrical Roller Bearings
Tolerance Limits for Radial Internal Clearance of Cylindrical Roller Bearings under no load. This table applies to
bearings of Bore, O.D., and Width Dimensions conforming to ABMA Standard Section 2, Table 1 and Chamfer
Dimensions conforming to Tables 5.1 and 5.2 of this Standard Section
(Tolerance Limits in 0.0001 Inch)
Basic Bore
Diameter (Tight) (Normal) (Loose) (Extra Loose)
Interchangeable1 Interchangeable1 Interchangeable1 Interchangeable1
Millimeter Matched2 Matched2 Matched2 Matched2
Over Incl. Low Low High High Low Low High High Low Low High High Low Low High High
–– 10 0 4 8 12 4 8 12 16 10 14 18 22 14 18 22 26
10 18 0 4 8 12 4 8 12 16 10 14 18 22 14 18 22 26
18 24 0 4 8 12 4 8 12 16 10 14 18 22 14 18 22 26
24 30 0 4 10 12 4 10 14 18 12 16 20 26 16 20 24 28
30 40 0 5 10 14 6 10 16 20 14 18 22 28 18 22 28 32
40 50 2 6 12 16 8 12 18 22 16 20 26 30 22 26 32 35
50 65 2 6 14 18 8 14 20 26 18 22 30 35 26 30 35 41
65 80 2 8 16 22 10 16 24 30 22 28 35 41 30 35 43 49
80 100 4 10 18 24 12 18 28 32 26 32 41 45 35 41 49 55
100 120 4 10 20 26 14 20 32 35 32 37 47 53 41 47 57 63
120 140 4 12 24 30 16 24 35 41 35 41 53 61 45 53 63 71
140 160 6 14 26 32 20 26 39 45 39 45 59 65 51 59 71 77
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
160 180 8 14 30 34 24 30 43 49 43 49 65 69 59 65 79 85
180 200 10 16 32 37 26 32 47 53 49 55 71 77 65 71 87 92
200 225 12 18 35 41 30 – – 59 55 – – 85 71 – – 100
225 250 16 20 39 45 35 – – 65 61 – – 90 81 – – 110
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
250 280 18 22 43 49 39 – – 71 69 – – 100 90 – – 122
280 315 20 24 47 52 43 – – 77 77 – – 110 100 – – 134
B-75
B-76
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Table B-40. Tolerance Values for Radial Internal Clearance of Cylindrical Roller Bearings (Continued)
Tolerance Limits for Radial Internal Clearance of Cylindrical Roller Bearings under no load. This table applies to
bearings of Bore, O.D., and Width Dimensions conforming to ABMA Standard Section 2, Table 1 and Chamfer
Dimensions conforming to Tables 5.1 and 5.2 of this Standard Section
(Tolerance Limits in 0.0001 Inch)
Basic Bore
Diameter (Tight) (Normal) (Loose) (Extra Loose)
Interchangeable1 Interchangeable1 Interchangeable1 Interchangeable1
Millimeter Matched2 Matched2 Matched2 Matched2
Over Incl. Low Low High High Low Low High High Low Low High High Low Low High High
315 355 22 26 53 57 49 – – 85 85 – – 120 110 – – 146

355 400 26 30 59 63 55 – – 93 96 – – 134 126 – – 163
400 450 28 – – 75 61 – – 108 106 – – 153 140 – – 179
450 500 33 – – 81 71 – – 118 118 – – 165 155 – – 202
1 The term “Interchangeable” refers to such assembly of rings and rollers that the separable ring can be replaced
by other ring of the same design and manufacture.
2 The term “Matched” refers to such assembly of rings and rollers that the separable ring can not be replaced by any
other ring.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b041
Figure B–41. Gaging Practices for Type NAA Needle Roller Bearings
B-160. Type NAB (Single Row, Rollers Retained by diameter reading, d max , may be obtained. Bore
Outer Ring, Separable Inner Ring) (Figure B-42). diameter, dm, is the arithmetical average of the two
The outer ring should be removed, and the needle readings, dmin and dmax.
bearing inspected as previously described for NAA-
type bearings. The inner ring is measured as follows: b. Inner Ring Width. Tolerances for width apply
only to the width of the inner ring and not the width
a. Inner Ring Bore. Use gaging apparatus of the bearing with which it is used. The ring is
arranged for two-point measuring. If out-of- supported on one side by three buttons. Apply gaging
roundness and taper exist in a particular ring, a stylus against the other side directly over one button
minimum diameter reading, dmin, and a maximum and take reading while rotating the inner ring.
B-77
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Width Variation. Width variation of individual and minimum readings when the part is rotated one
inner rings is the difference between the largest and revolution.
smallest widths. For measuring, use the same method
as applied to measurement of inner ring width. f. NBK and NBE bearings are checked in the
same manner except that the self-aligning housing
d. Radial Runout. Check in same manner as is first removed, and the indicator is placed on the
NAA bearing (figure B-41). self-aligning outer surface of the outer ring. Also,
the outer ring should be pushed up against an
e. Squareness Measurement. Place one end adjacent washer when readings are taken.
of inner ring on a flat plate held against a stop
located close to the lower corner of the outside g. Axial Play. Hold one ring rigidly and apply
diameter. Place the gaging stylus directly above the a 5-pound axial load alternately in opposite direc-
stop close to the upper corner of the outside tions. Use a dial indicator to measure the movement.
diameter. The deviation from outside diameter
squareness with side is the difference between the B-162. Type NCA (Single Row, Rollers Retained
minimum and the maximum reading of the indicator by Outer Ring, No Inner Ring) (Figure B-44). The
when rotating the ring one revolution. By placing outer ring of the thin shell needle bearing is an
the stop and the indicator on the inside diameter, accurately drawn steel cup. In the heat treating
the deviation from inside diameter with side can be operation, the shell may go out of round. When the
measured in a like manner. needle bearing is pressed into a true round housing
bore of proper size and thickness, it also becomes
f. Outside Diameter. Use gaging apparatus round and is properly sized for satisfactory bearing
arranged for measuring between a flat surface and performance. For this reason, it is impossible to
an indicator stylus. If out-of-roundness and taper inspect a thin shell needle bearing in the free state
exist in a particular ring raceway, a minimum by measuring the outside diameter. The correct
diameter reading, of min, and a maximum diameter, method for inspecting the bearing size is to press
of max, may be obtained. The outside diameter, the bearing into a steel ring gage of proper size
of m, of the raceway in question is the arithmetical an then plug the bearing with the appropriate “Go”
average of the two readings, of min and of max. and “No Go” gages.
B-161. Types NBC, NBE, NBF, NBK, NBL (Single a. Bore. Press the bearing into a steel ring
Row, Nonseparable Parts; Single Row, Nonsepar- gage of proper size and plug the bearing with
able Parts With Self-Aligning Outer Ring and appropriate “Go” and “No Go” gages. The ring gage
Adapter: Single Row, Nonseparable Parts With should be of sufficient cross-section so that the press
Heavy Section Outer Ring and Adapter; Double fit of the bearing will not expand the ring gage.
Row, Nonseparable Parts, Heavy Section Outer
Ring) (Figure B-43).
b. Width. Check the width by supporting the
bearing on one side by three buttons and applying
a. Bore. Check bore in same manner as for a gaging stylus against the other side directly over
the NAB bearing (figure B-42). one button. Take reading while rotating the ring.
b. Bearing Width. Check the width at widest B-163. Type NCD (Single Row, Roller Retained
point near the junction of washer and inner ring. by Outer Ring, Separate Inner Ring). Remove the
inner ring and inspect the drawn cup needle bearing
c. Outer Ring Width. Check the outer ring as previously described for the NCA type bearings
width with an indicator on a two-point gage. (figure B-44). Measure the inner ring in the same
manner as for the NAB-type inner ring (figure B-42).
d. Outside Diameter. Check in same manner
as NAA outside diameter (figure B-41). B-164. Type NCE, NCF, and NCC (Single Row,
Nonseparable Inner Ring Single Row, Nonsepar-
e. Radial Runout. Insert tapered arbor into able Inner Ring With Washers).
the bore of inner ring. Apply a gaging stylus on
outside diameter. Hold outer ring and rotate inner a. Press the bearing in the proper size ring
ring to check for inner ring runout. Hold inner ring gage and rotate the inner ring to ensure it does
and rotate outer ring; to check for outer ring runout. not bind. This is the only inspection that can be
Radial runout is the difference between the maximum performed on the outer ring and roller complement.
B-78
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b042 00b043
Figure B–42. Gaging Practices for Type Figure B–43. Gaging Practices for Type NBC, NBE,
NAB Needle Roller Bearings NBF, NBK, NBL Needle Roller Bearings
00b044
Figure B–44. Gaging Practices for Type NCA Needle Roller Bearings
B-79
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
b. Measure the inner ring as described in figure B-170. Rotating Inner Ring Load. The shaft rotates
B-42 since the inner ring cannot be disassembled. in relation to the direction of the load. All points
on the inner ring raceway are loaded during one
B-165. LOOSE NEEDLE ROLLERS. revolution.
a. Measure the diameter of loose needle B-171. Stationary Inner Ring Load. The shaft is
rollers using gaging apparatus arranged for measur- stationary in relation to the direction of the load so
ing between a flat surface and stylus. If out-of- that the load is always directed towards the same
roundness and taper exist in a particular roller, section of the inner ring.
minimum diameter readings, Dmin, and maximum
diameter readings, D max , may be obtained. The B-172. Rotating Outer Ring Load. The bearing
diameter, D m , of the roller in question is the housing rotates in relationship to the direction of
arithmetical average of the readings, Dmin and Dmax. the load. All points on the outer ring raceway are
loaded during one revolution.
b. Measure roller lengths using any flat-edged
two-point measuring instrument. Rockwell hardness B-173. Stationary Outer Ring Load. The bearing
tests should be made on flats approximately housing is stationary in relation to the direction of
one-third the roller diameter (up to 0.050 in. maxi- the load, so that the load is always directed towards
mum flat width) wide located diametrically opposite. the same section of the outer ring.
B-166. SELECTION OF SHAFT AND HOUSING B-174. Indeterminate Load Direction. This term is
FITS. used when the load is known to oscillate or rotate
relative to both rings or where the direction of the
B-167. GENERAL. In order for rolling bearings to load is difficult to determine.
satisfactorily operate, both the inner ring-to-shaft
bearing seat fit and the outer ring-to-housing bearing B-175. NORMAL MOUNTING FITS. In the majority
seat fit must be correct for the particular application. of bearing applications, the shaft rotates and the
The selection of the proper mounting fit is dependent housing assembly is stationary. The rotating ring
on the following factors: of the bearing is mounted with an interference fit
and the stationary ring is installed with a sliding
or close push fit.
a. Direction and type of load.
B-176. Inner rings are usually installed with a tight
b. Speed of rotation. fit on a rotating shaft or a sliding fit in housings
that are stationary.
c. Bearing design and dimension.
B-177. Tight fits in stationary mountings generally
d. Thermal environment. should be avoided in order to permit the bearing
to self-adjust because of the effects of thermal
e. Type of materials used. expansion.
f. Requirements on running accuracy. B-178. Bearings exposed to heavy oscillating loads

will sometimes be allowed to creep in the stationary
B-168. In general, a bearing can be mounted and mounting. This continually redistributes the load over
removed more easily if the mounting fits are loose. new bearing areas.
However, interference fits must be used when
required by the operating conditions. Although the B-179. Effects of Interference Fit on Bearing
bearings can be obtained with nonstandard dimen- Dimensions. When bearings are mounted with
sions or with classified bore and outer diameter interference fits, the inner ring expands or the outer
dimensions, the desired mounting fit is generally ring is reduced in diameter. In either case, the
obtained by selecting the proper tolerance range internal clearance is reduced by 70 to 80 percent
for the shaft diameter and housing bore. of the interference fit. Most bearings are manufac-
tured with sufficient internal looseness so that
B-169. DIRECTION OF THE LOAD. When determin- standard press fits, will give correct bearing opera-
ing the proper mounting fit for the bearing rings, tion. Heavier press fits will preload the bearings
the direction of the load in relation to each ring is resulting in overheating and early bearing failure.
of prime importance. Basic load conditions can be Too loose a fit causes noisy operation, excessive
defined as follows: creep, and detrimental shaft and/or housing wear.
B-80
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-180. NORMAL AND THEORETICAL FITS. Most B-189. Self-aligning roller thrust bearings, angular-
bearing installation tables indicate both normal and contact ball bearings, or tapered roller bearings that
theoretical fit-up ranges. The theoretical fit is the carry only thrust loads, can be mounted with a loose
maximum and minimum range possible and is fit in the housing. This permits the housing washer
obtainable only in those rare situations where the to center itself properly, especially in applications
bearing and the shaft or housing dimensions are where a radial bearing is mounted close to the thrust
at the full limit of their respective tolerance. bearing.
B-181. Experience demonstrates that in approxi- B-190. RECOMMENDED SHAFT AND HOUSING
mately 98 percent of all applications, the mounting FITS FOR STANDARD INCH DIMENSION TA-
fit obtained is in the normal or “expected” range. PERED ROLLER BEARINGS. Consult engineering
Where only theoretical fits are indicated, it may be tables for appropriate shaft and housing fits for
assumed that actual fits will fall within narrower limits standard inch-dimension tapered roller bearings.
than those given in the data tables.
B-191. MOUNTING METHODS FOR INSTRUMENT
AND MINIATURE BALL BEARINGS. Careful con-
B-182. A M E R I C A N N AT I O N A L S TA N D A R D sideration should be given to the best method of
INSTITUTE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MOUNTING mounting instrument precision bearings to prevent
BALL AND ROLLER BEARINGS (B3.17-1973). damage during assembly. Distortion of the bearing
rings, excessive reduction of internal clearances and
B-183. GENERAL. The recommended shaft and brinelling of the balls and raceway surfaces can be
housing fits for radial ball and roller bearings have caused by improper methods of mounting bearings.
been standardized by the American National The smallness of the rings, balls, and clearances
Standards Institute and the American Bearing of miniature ball bearings increases the possibility
Manufacturers Association. Consult applicable docu- of damage.
ments for correct mounting fits.
B-192. There are six basic methods of mounting
B-184. Tolerances for shaft bearing seats and hous- instrument and miniature ball bearings.
ing bearing seats are designated by a letter and
a number. For shafts, a lower-case letter is used B-193. Interference Fits. Interference fits are pro-
and for housings a capital letter, both indicating the duced by intentional overlapping the tolerances
location of the tolerance range in relation to the between either the outer diameter of the shaft and
nominal diameter, as illustrated in figure B-45. The the bore of the bearing inner ring. The same is true
numbers indicate the grade of accuracy. for the housing inner diameter and the outer diameter
of the bearing outer ring.
B-185. RECOMMENDED HOUSING AND SHAFT
B-194. High interference fits are not recommended
FITS FOR GROUP B AIRFRAME BALL BEARING
where the roundness of either the shaft or housing
APPLICATIONS.
cannot be closely controlled. A relatively heavy-sec-
tioned shaft or housing can easily distort the thin
B-186. Theoretically a maximum press fit of 0.001 inner or outer ring of a small bearing and adversely
inch for steel and 0.0012 inch for aluminum is affect its operation. The distortion is particularly
possible, but in practice the average assembly severe where the walls of the rings have been
results in press fits of from 0.0002 to 0.0007 inch intentionally reduced to provide a larger bore for
for steel and from 0.0005 to 0.0010 inch for a given outside diameter (superlight miniature bear-
aluminum. ings). The effects of interference fits can be con-
trolled to a certain extent by use of sizing tools on
B-187. Heavier than recommended press fits or shafts and bores and also by selective assembly.
excessive staking will preload the bearing, reducing
its load capacity and shortening fatigue life. General- B-195. Seldom will interference fits be specified for
ly, any evidence of drag in the rotation of an both the inner and outer rings of an instrument
assembly is indicative of excessive internal fitup and bearing. The rotating ring (either inner or outer) is
should be corrected by bearing replacement. usually mounted with an interference fit. The station-
ary ring needs only a clearance fit sufficient to
B-188. RECOMMENDED HOUSING AND SHAFT prevent rotation due to the inherent friction torque
FITS FOR THRUST BEARINGS. Thrust bearings within the stationary ring. This will reduce the
that carry radial loads in addition to thrust load are possibility of fretting corrosion and rotational wear
mounted with fits selected according to the same occurring between the bearing rings and mounting
principles as for radial bearings. surfaces.
B-81
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b045
Figure B-45. Tolerance Ranges for Shaft and Housing Bearing Seats
B-196. Interference fits on both rings will reduce the ring against the shoulder. In figure B-47, a locknut
internal radial clearance in the bearing and will not is shown clamping the inner ring against a shoulder
allow for axial movement of the shaft due to on the shaft.
temperature changes. With a clearance fit on the
stationary ring, the ring is free to slide on the shaft
or in the housing should axial movement exceed B-199. Snap Rings (Figure B-48). Snap rings are
the internal axial clearance of the bearing. This frequently specified for the clearance-fit ring of a
reduces the possibility of damage due to jamming miniature ball bearing to prevent excessive axial
or abnormal thrust loads. displacement. Snap rings are not as effective as
side clamping because of the comparatively large
tolerances on the snap rings and corresponding
B-197. Side Clamping (Figure B-46). An instrument
grooves.
or miniature bearing is usually held in place by
clamping the sides. Axial pressure is applied against
the side of either ring and not by radial pressure B-200. The snap ring is inserted into a tapered
as in interference fits. There is no danger of ring groove in the housing. This will place pressure
distortion with side clamping since both bearing rings against the outer ring of the bearing (figure B-49).
can be installed with clearance fits. The tendency of the snap ring to expand radially
in the tapered groove provides enough axial dis-
B-198. In figure B-46, the outer ring of an instrument placement of the bearing ring to compensate for
ball bearing has been inserted into the housing with variations in the shoulder-to-groove spacing and in
a slight finger pressure and a damping washer has the bearing width. The tolerance for bearing width
been threaded into the housing to press the outer is wide (0.005 inch typical).
B-82
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-202. The surface of the housing is machined with

a narrow ridge on the edge of the bearing cavity.
The bearing is installed in the housing and the ridge
is rolled over against the outer ring (figure B-50).
In a simpler method, the housing is machined deeper
than the width of the bearing so that the edge of
the housing can be rolled down against the bearing
outer ring (figure B-51). When the inner ring of the
bearing is sealed against a shaft shoulder, the edge
of a groove on the shaft may be rolled against the
inner ring (figure B-52).
B-203. Staking (Figures B-53 and B-54). Economy

is the only advantage of staking as a method of
bearing retention. Metal is staked over the corner
radius of the outer ring at three or four equidistant
points near the edge of the housing bore (figure
B-53). The inner ring has been similarly staked on
the shaft in figure B-54. While staking is economical
00b046
in assembly, and does not require additional compo-
Figure B-46. Side Clamp Mounting the nents like washers or ring, the possibility of distorting
Outer Ring of an Instrument Bearing the bearing rings by localized stresses is great. In
addition, the staking tool may slip and damage the
bearing. The bearing is easily contaminated during
the process.
B-204. Cementing (Figure B-55). Cementing is an

inexpensive method for securing instrument and
miniature ball bearings in plastic housings. The outer
ring is cemented in-place with an adhesive which
bonds well to both plastic and metal. Clamping rings
and other special devices are avoided and the
bearing is permanently seated in-place.
B-205. IMBALANCE AND CRITICAL SPEEDS.
B-206. GENERAL. Rotor imbalance and operation

at critical speeds develops rotating radial loads that
absorbs part of the bearing load carrying capacity.
If imbalance is excessive, it can lead to bearing
failure. Balancing is essential and out-of-balance
limits should be such that the unbalanced load on
the bearings is not more than 1/10 of the bearing
00b047 capacity at operating speeds. Inner ring rotation is
Figure B-47. Side Clamp Mounting the essential for very high speed applications. The
Inner Ring of an Instrument Bearing maximum speed of a bearing with outer ring rotation
is roughly one half that of one with inner ring rotation.
This is because ball velocity is much higher with
B-201. Rolling or Spinning of Housing Material outer ring rotation, and the maximum speed is an
(Figure B-50). Rolling or spinning housing material inverse function of the centrifugal load on the balls.
over the bearing is an effective method of holding
instrument ball bearings permanently in-place. How- B-207. Above the critical speed, the shaft assembly
ever, this method of retention can distort the bearing rotates smoothly. Additional critical speeds or har-
when improperly used. A thin ridge of metal on the monics higher than the first are also possible but
housing is completely rolled around the side of the are decreasingly lower in amplitude. It should be
bearing, making it very difficult to remove. This type remembered that an assembly which is dynamically
of bearing retention should not be used where the balanced in one speed range is not necessarily
bearing will be frequently replaced. dynamically balanced in another speed ranges.
B-83
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-210. Conventional Flow. In a conventional clean

room, the prefiltered air is brought in through
diffusers located in or near the ceiling. The air is
then removed from the conventional room through
exhaust ducts located at floor level.
B-211. H o r i z o n t a l L a m i n a r - F l o w. H o r i z o n t a l
laminar-flow clean rooms are constructed with a
complete wall of HEPA filters through which the air
is uniformly introduced into the room. The air flows
through the HEPA filters at low velocities, staying
in streamlines while traversing the length of the
room. The air is removed through exhaust grilles
located in the opposite wall.
B-212. Vertical Laminar-Flow. Vertical laminar-flow

clean rooms are constructed with a complete ceiling
of HEPA filters through which the air is uniformly
00b048 introduced into the room. The air flows through the
Figure B-48. Double Snap Ring Retention filters in streamlines in a downward pattern. The
of Bearing in a Housing air is removed through exhaust grilles located in
the floor.
B-213. Federal Standard, FED-STD-209. This fed-

eral standard shall be mandatory in the design of
all clean room areas, for the processing of rolling
bearings.
B-214. LIGHTING. Light panels shall be translucent,

flush-mounted, sealed, shadowless and glare-free.
Fluorescent lighting shall be provided that will
provide shadowless illumination with a minimum of
100-foot candles (1076 lux) at bench level. Higher
intensity illumination is required for more difficult
inspection operations of bearing processing. Lighting
fixtures should be serviced from above to reduce
room contamination. Lighting for laminar flow clean
work stations shall be shadowless illumination with
a minimum intensity of 100 foot candles (1076 lux).
B-215. AIR CONDITIONING. Air conditioning equip-

ment shall be capable of maintaining the specified
00b049
temperature and humidity level at design capacity
Figure B-49. Single Snap Ring Retention for the maximum ambient levels. Refrigeration or
of Bearing in a Housing other moisture extracting facilities shall be multiple
units unless it is possible to stop all clean room
operations in the event of equipment failure.
B-208. C L E A N ROOM DESIGN AND
B-216. The multiple-unit design shall allow for maxi-
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.
mum required performance in the event one unit
is out of service (viz: 40 tons required use five 10-ton
B-209. GENERAL. Clean rooms can be designed units or three 20-ton units). Refrigeration capacity
with either conventional or laminar-flow air control shall be sufficient to remove moisture down to a
(figure B-56). The basic difference is the method dewpoint such that, after reheat to the comfort level,
of introducing and exhausting the contaminant-con- the air entering room will be within the humidity limits
trolled air. specified in paragraph 16-33.
B-84
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-218. VACUUM CLEANING SYSTEM. Vacuum

cleaning equipment shall be provided for custodial
service. The vacuum equipment shall be remotely
located to prevent the transfer of noise and vibrations
to the clean room. Plug-in connections shall be
provided. Vinyl covered portable hoses shall be
used.
B-219. WORK BENCHES AND CHAIRS. All work

tables shall be constructed of preformed formica
or equivalent surface material with self-enclosed
edges. Use either tubular or modern round edge
supports.
00b050
Figure B-50. Spun-in Housing Retention of Bearing B-220. Whenever wood is used for table base
material, cover all exposed wood surfaces, both
above and below the table with vinyl plastic or equal.
Pastel colored table tops are preferred over black
to reduce eye strain that occurs when a mechanic
looks up from a black table across an area of high
illumination.
B-221. Work tables should be of the continuous type,

28 to 30 inches high from the floor and minimum
of 24 inches deep. Tables that are 28 inches high
will eliminate the need for foot rests. Chairs shall
be metal, swivel typist-type with both adjustable back
and height. They shall be constructed with a
minimum of dust collecting cracks or corners.
00b051
B-222. SERVICES. Adequate services should be
Figure B-51. Spun-in Housing Retention of Bearing initially provided for all special equipment such as
air, electricity, oxygen, nitrogen, helium, or other
special requirements. It is very costly to modify or
add these facilities and services after the clean room
is completed. Dry air that has been prefiltered and
heated, and vacuum guns, shall be provided at each
work station. The air shall be variable in pressure
from zero to 30 psi. Conditioned air is needed since
not all materials can be removed by vacuum.
B-223. LAYOUT AND EQUIPMENT.
B-224. The layout illustrated in figure B-57 shows

a typical bearing clean room facility that has been
designed to accommodate both the general and
instrument bearing shops. Features of the various
00b052
areas are discussed in the following paragraphs with
Figure B-52. Spun-in Shaft Retention of Bearing general recommendations.
B-225. Large windows should be installed in the

B-217. Humidification apparatus shall be provided exterior walls to allow for observation of the proces-
when required by local weather conditions to keep sing rooms. Windows should be adjacent to the aisle
the relative humidity from dropping below 35 percent. for ease of access by visitors. Observation windows
Low humidity conditions generate potentially damag- should have two-way intercoms beside the windows
ing static electricity. for conversation with employees within the rooms.
B-85
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b053
Figure B-53. Staked-in Housing
Retention of Bearing
00b055
Figure B-55. Cemented-in Retention of Bearing
B-228. The tank layout arrangement will depend on

the type and volume of workload but should always
be placed to allow maximum work flow through the
cleaning process. The maximum tank height should
be 36 inches from the floor. Tank controls should
be built into panels for ease of operation. All pipes
and control valves should be placed below the
control panels with adequate access doors for ease
of maintenance.
B-229. Separate cleaning lines shall be provided
when processing both new and used bearings.
00b054
B-230. INTERMEDIATE INSPECTION ROOM. The
Figure B-54. Staked-on Shaft Retention of Bearing
room is used to perform the following bearing
inspection functions:
B-226. CLEANING AREA. The cleaning line utilizes
roller conveyors to facilitate the movement of the a. Visual inspection of all bearing prior to
bearings being processed. The tanks are of the routing to the Class 100 or 10,000 clean room for
vertical-lift, agitated-type with two sets of built-in cleanliness and defects visible under low power
rollers to allow work flow when the tank covers are magnification.
up or down.
b. Preliminary screening and inspection of
B-227. The demagnetizer can be conveyorized to
speed the flow of parts through the system. All parts c. Sample inspection of new bearings.
of the demagnetizer conveyor installation shall be
of nonmagnetic material to preclude the possibility B-231. The room should be constructed and oper-
of remagnetizing the bearings. A distance of 3 feet ated to Class 100,000 requirements of Federal
around the demagnetizer shall be designated as a Standard FED-STD-209. Relative humidity shall
zone of influence. meet the requirements of paragraph 16-33.
B-86
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b056
Figure B-56. Standard Clean Room Designs with Associated Airflow Patterns
Removed through Exhaust Grilles Located in the Opposite Wall
B-87
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b057
Figure B-57. General Layout of a Depot Level Bearing Processing Facility
B-88
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-232. Environmental controls are needed due to during inter-room transfer or between phases of
the important functions performed in this room. operation. When overnight storage is necessary,
Questionable or marginal bearings that require heated and ventilated ovens or dry storage cabinets
additional processing or disposal must be screened shall be provided for storing clean dry bearings.
out before they enter the final inspection and gaging Flush interior wall built-in ovens that will allow the
area. Also, since the bearings are in an unprotected, generated heat to be exhausted exterior to the
unpreserved state, these inspections must be con- controlled room are desirable (figure B-59). The
ducted in a clean, humidity controlled environment. temperature of the ovens shall be maintained at
110_ $ 5_F.
B-233. FINAL CLEANING ROOM. The room is used
to final clean bearings to a level compatible with B-236. HEPA-filtered laminar-flow pressurized work
a Class 100, Class 10,000 or Class 100,000 clean spaces are recessed into the wall. Work spaces are
room. of open construction to give an unobstructed work
area the entire length of the work space. Torque
B-234. A vapor rinse machine shall be installed next measurements and critical gaging operations for
to the pass-through window to the gaging room. small precision bearings should be confined to these
All bearings, including small precision bearings, shall clean work spaces. Stainless steel or chrome plated
be final cleaned in the vapor rinse unit prior to tubular carts shall be provided to move parts in the
entering the gaging room. Wall storage pass- clean room.
throughs can be incorporated between rooms to
provide valuable storage space. B-237. Air columns and pneumatically operated
equipment shall be placed on the outside walls.
B-235. INSPECTION AND GAGING ROOM. This is Electrical and electronic gaging equipment shall be
the most strictly controlled room in the clean room placed on tables in the center of the room. Precision
complex meeting the Class 100 or 10,000 require- gaging equipment that requires vibration-free mount-
ments of Federal Standard FED-STD-209 (figure ing shall be placed on an isolation block or table
B-58). Trays of bearings shall be stored in glass- to prevent any vibratory interference with critical
doored pass through cabinets, or storage cabinets, measurements.
00b058
Figure B-58. Inspection and Gaging Room
B-89
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
B-238. P R E S E RVAT I O N , L U B R I C AT I O N A N D
PACKAGING ROOM. All lubrication preserving and
packaging operations shall be accomplished in a
room that is separated from the gaging area but
held to the same environmental control. A stainless
steel constructed greasing table shall be installed
next to an exterior wall knockout panel for connection
with the externally supplied, closed grease system.
B-239. MISCELLANEOUS TABLES AND FIGURES.
B-240. Tables B-41 through B-43 are fraction-to-deci-

mal, millimeter-to-inches and temperature conver-
sion charts for general information and use. Figures
B-58 and B-59 are conversion nomograms for
general use.
B-241. S E L E C T I N G B E A R I N G S F O R I N-
STRUMENT APPLICATIONS. Tables B-44 and B-45
are provided to assist in selecting the right type
of bearing for specific instrument applications.
00b059
Figure B-59. Temperature Controlled Ovens
for Temporary Bearing Storage
00b060
Figure B-60. Conversion of Inches to Millimeters
B-90
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00b061
Figure B-61. Conversion of Pounds to Grams and Ounces to Grams
B-91
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-41. Conversion of Fractions to Decimals
Fraction Decimal Fraction Decimal

1/64 0.015625 33/64 0.515625
1/32 0.03125 17/32 0.53125
3/64 0.046875 35/64 0.546875
1/16 0.0625 9/16 0.5625
5/64 0.078125 37/65 0.578125
3/32 0.09375 19/32 0.59375
7/64 0.109375 39/64 0.609375
1/8 0.125 5/8 0.625
9/64 0.140625 41/64 0.640625
5/32 0.15625 21/32 0.65625
11/64 0.171875 43/64 0.671875
3/16 0.1875 11/16 0.6875
13/64 0.203125 45/64 0.703125
7/32 0.21875 23/32 0.71875
15/64 0.234375 47/64 0.734375
1/4 0.25 3/4 0.75
17/64 0.265625 49/64 0.765625
9/32 0.28125 25/32 0.78125
19/64 0.296875 51/64 0.796875
5/16 0.3125 13/16 0.8125
21/64 0.328125 53/64 0.828125
11/32 0.34375 27/32 0.84375
23/64 0.359375 55/64 0.859375
3/8 0.375 7/8 0.875
25/64 0.390625 57/64 0.890625
13/32 0.40625 29/32 0.90625
27/64 0.421875 59/64 0.921875
7/16 0.4375 15/16 0.9375
29/64 0.453125 61/64 0.953125
15/32 0.46875 31/32 0.968757
31/64 0.484375 63/64 0.984375
1/2 0.5 1 1.0
B-92
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-42. Millimeters to Inches

(Basis: 1 inch = 25.4 millimeters)
Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches
1 0.039370 35 1.377953 69 2.716535

2 0.078740 36 1.417323 70 2.755906
3 0.118110 37 1.456693 71 2.795276
4 0.157480 38 1.496063 72 2.834646
5 0.196850 39 1.535433 73 2.874016
6 0.236220 40 1.574803 74 2.913386
7 0.275591 41 1.614173 75 2.952756
8 0.314961 42 1.653543 76 2.992126
9 0.354331 43 1.692913 77 3.031496
10 0.393701 44 1.732283 78 3.070866
11 0.433071 45 1.771654 79 3.110236
12 0.472771 46 1.811024 80 3.149606
13 0.511811 47 1.850394 81 3.188976
14 0.551181 48 1.889764 82 3.228346
15 0.590551 49 1.929134 83 3.267717
16 0.629921 50 1.968504 84 3.307087
17 0.669291 51 2.007874 85 3.346457
18 0.708661 52 2.047244 86 3.385827
19 0.748031 53 2.086614 87 3.425197
20 0.787402 54 2.125984 88 3.464567
21 0.826772 55 2.165354 89 3.503937
22 0.866142 56 2.204724 90 3.543307
23 0.905512 57 2.244094 91 3.582677
24 0.944882 58 2.283465 92 3.622047
25 0.984252 59 2.322835 93 3.661417
26 1.023622 60 2.362205 94 3.700787
27 1.062992 61 2.401575 95 3.740157
28 1.102362 62 2.440945 96 3.779528
29 1.141732 63 2.480315 97 3.818898
30 1.181102 64 2.519685 98 3.858268
31 1.220472 65 2.559055 99 3.897638
32 1.259843 66 2.598425 100 3.937008
33 1.299213 67 2.637795
34 1.338583 68 2.677165
NOTE: The above table is approximate: 1/25.4 = 0.039370078740+.
B-93
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-43. Temperature Conversion Table – Centigrade to Fahrenheit
_C _F _C _F _C _F _C _F _C _F
-100 -148 33 91.4 76 168.8 280 536 720 1328
-90 -130 34 93.2 77 170.6 290 554 730 1346
-80 -112 35 95.0 78 172.4 300 572 740 1364
-70 -94 36 96.8 79 174.2 310 590 750 1382
-60 -76 37 98.6 80 176.0 320 608 760 1400
-50 -58 38 100.4 81 177.8 330 626 770 1418
-40 -40 39 102.2 82 179.6 340 664 780 1436
-30 -22 40 104.0 83 181.4 350 662 790 1454
-20 -4 41 105.8 84 183.2 360 680 800 1472
-10 14 42 107.6 85 185.0 370 698 810 1490
0 32.0 43 109.4 86 186.8 380 716 820 1508
1 33.8 44 111.2 87 188.6 390 734 830 1526
2 35.6 45 113.0 88 190.4 400 752 840 1544
3 37.4 46 114.8 89 192.2 410 770 850 1562
4 39.2 47 116.6 90 194.0 420 788 860 1580
5 41.0 48 118.4 91 195.8 430 806 870 1598
6 42.8 49 120.2 92 197.6 440 824
7 44.6 50 122.0 93 199.4 450 842
8 46.4 51 123.8 94 201.2 460 860
9 48.2 52 125.6 95 203.0 470 878
10 50.0 53 127.4 96 204.8 480 896
11 51.8 54 129.2 97 206.6 490 914 Interpolation
12 53.6 55 131.0 98 208.4 500 932 Factors
13 55.4 56 132.8 99 210.2 510 950
14 57.2 57 134.6 100 212.0 520 968 _C _F
15 59.0 58 136.4 110 230 530 986 1 1.8
16 60.8 59 138.2 120 248 540 1004 2 3.6
17 62.6 60 140.0 130 266 550 1022 3 5.4
18 64.4 61 141.8 140 284 560 1040 4 7.2
19 66.2 62 143.6 150 302 570 1058 5 9.0
20 68.0 63 145.4 160 320 580 1076 6 10.8
21 69.8 64 147.2 170 338 590 1094 7 12.6
22 71.6 65 149.0 180 356 600 1112 8 14.4
23 73.4 66 150.8 190 374 610 1130 9 16.2
24 75.2 67 152.6 200 392 620 1148 10 18.0
25 77.0 68 154.4 210 410 630 1166
26 78.8 69 156.2 212 414 640 1184
27 80.6 70 158.0 220 428 650 1202
28 82.4 71 159.8 230 446 660 1220
29 84.2 72 161.6 240 464 670 1238
30 86.0 73 163.4 250 482 680 1256
31 87.8 74 165.2 260 500 690 1274
32 89.6 75 167.0 270 518 700 1292
B-94
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-44. Selecting Instrument Bearings
Bearing Type Name Load Conditions
Radial High radial loads, moderate speeds, moderate thrust loads.

Super Light Radial Same as radial - for larger shafts with small OD of bearing.
Radial Retainer Moderate or medium speeds, moderate radial and thrust loads,
low starting torque.
Spring, Loose Clinched Ribbon Low starting torque, oscillating motion, low speeds (up to 1000
Separator rpm).
Flanged Radial Convenience in mounting eliminates need for seat in housing or
special retaining devices. Aids squareness in mounting. Saves
axial space in gear trains.
Flanged Radial Retainer Combines advantages of flanged design with radial retainer
bearing.
High Speed Well adapted to very high speeds,. combined radial and thrust
loads. Mounted in opposition adjustment of internal bearing
clearances.
Flanged High Speed Combines advantages of flanged and high speed types.
Angular-Contact Pivot Receives combined loads on conical 60 degrees pivot point;
self-contained.
Pivot (spherical seat or race types) Designed for high loads, severe shock. Used with 60 degrees
pivot points. Shaft misalignment: 4 degrees for spherical
types, 2 degrees for race types.
Thrust Heavy thrust loads, medium speed, minimum space.
Shielded Protects bearing against foreign matter - retains lubricant -
no increase in width.
Shielded Retainer Same as shielded bearing plus advantages of radial retainer -
minimum width.
B-95
B-96
Table B-45. Common Instrument Bearing Applications
Bearing Material
Application Type (Rings & Balls) Useful Features Radial Play Comments
Synchro Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.0001 to 0.0003 in. Thin-width series can be
retainer (no shimming). useful. Loosely clinched
0.0005 to 0.0008 in. ribbon retainer preferred.
(preferred if shimming Starting torque and radial
is possible). runout are important.
Servo Motor Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.0005 to 0.0008 in. Thin-width series can be
retainer (preferred). useful. Hardened crown
0.0002 to 0.0004 in. retainer is preferred.
(no shimming). Low radial runout and
consistent running torque
is important.
Gear trains Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.0001 to 0.0003 in. Radial runout is critical.
retainer Extended (low speed). Bearing easily
inner rings contaminated by gear
Flanges 0.0004 to 0.0006 in. wear. Radial full-race type
(high speed). may be required for heavy
thrust loads at moderate
speed.
Cam followers Radial AISI 440C Extended 0.0002 to 0.0005 in. Heavy radial-load capacity
retainer inner rings required. Heavy-section
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
outer rings are preferred.
Torque is not critical.
Precision Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.002 to 0.0005 in. Consistent torque is
potentiometers retainer Flanges important.
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
Gyro spin axis Angular- SAE 52100 Flanges Angular-contact of 20 to 35 Control on contact angle,
contact degrees permits variable preload, and lubricant
radial play. quantity are important.
Internal assemblies can
be useful.
Table B-45. Common Instrument Bearing Applications (Continued)
Bearing Material
Application Type (Rings & Balls) Useful Features Radial Play Comments
Gyro gimbals Radial AISI 440C Flanges 0.0005 to 0.0008 in. Starting torque very
retainer important. Loosely
clinched ribbon retainer
is preferred. End play
is removed by adjustment.
Blowers motors Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.0003 to 0.0006 in.

retainer
Pinch rollers Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.0005 to 0.0008 in. Torque is not critical.
retainer Seals Contamination is common.
Flanges Heavy loads at high
Extended speeds.
inner rings
Tape guides Radial AISI 440C Shields 0.0005 to 0.0008 in. Consistent torque is
retainer Flanges important. High speeds,
Extended light loads. Contamination
inner rings is common.
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
B-97
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-46. Shaft Tolerance Designations for Radial Ball and Roller Bearings
(Except inch dimensions tapered roller bearings of ABEC-1, ABEC-3, AND RBEC-1 Tolerances)
Nominal Shaft Diameter
Cylindrical Roller Spherical Roller
Ball Bearings Bearings Bearings
Tolerance
Operating Conditions Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Millimeters Inches Symbol1
Inner ring stationary in relation
to the direction of the load.
All loads:
Inner ring has to be easily
displaceable (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) g6.
Inner ring does not have
to be easily displaceable (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) h6.
Direction of load indeterminate
or the inner ring rotating in
relation to the direction of
the load.
Radial Load:
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x18 x0.71 -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------- h5.
u18 u0.71 x40 x1.57 x40 x1.57 j6.2
(40)-140 (1.57)-5.52 (40)-100 (1.57)-3.94 k6.3
(140)-320 (5.52)-12.6 (100)-200 (3.94)-7.88 m6.3
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x18 x0.71 -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------- j5.
u18 u0.71 x40 x1.57 x40 x1.57 k5.
(40)-100 (1.57)-3.94 (40)-65 (1.57)-2.56 m5.
(100-140 (3.94)-5.52 (65)-100 (2.56)-3.94 m6.
(140)-320 (5.52)-12.6 (100)-140 (3.94)-5.52 n6.
(140)-280 (5.52)-11.10 p6.
(280)-500 (11.10)-19.7 r6.
u500 u19.7 r7.
Heavy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (18)-100 (0.71)-3.94 -------------- -------------- -------------- ---------------- k5.
u100 u3.94 x40 x1.57 x40 x1.57 m5.
(40)-65 (1.57)-2.56 (40)-65 (1.57)-2.56 m6.3
(65)-140 (2.56)-5.52 (65)-100 (2.56)-3.94 n6.3
(140)-320 (5.52-12.6 (100)-140 (3.94)-5.52 p6.3
(140)-200 (5.52)-7.88 r6.3
u200 >7.88 r7.3
Pure thrust load (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) j6
1 For solid steel shafts. Numerical values are given in tables 37, 38, 39, and 40.
2 All diameters.
3 When greater accuracy is required, use j5, k5, and m5 instead of j6, k6, and m6, respectively.
4 When roller bearings are used, greater internal clearance than Code 0 may be required.
B-98
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-47. Housing Tolerance Designations for Radial Ball and Roller Bearings
(Except inch dimension tapered roller bearings of ABEC-1, ABEC-3, OR RBEC-1 Tolerances)
Housing Tolerance
Construction Operating Conditions Symbol1 Remarks
Housing not split Housing rotating in Heavy loads on bearing P62 The outer ring is
radially. relation to the in thin-walled housing. not axially
direction of the Normal and heavy loads N62 displaceable.
load. Light loads M62
Heavy shock loads M62 The outer ring is
not axially
displaceable.
Heavy and normal loads K62 The outer ring, as a

where the outer ring rule, is not axially
The direction of the does not have to be displaceable.
load indeterminate. axially displaceable.
Normal and light loads J62 The outer ring, as

where displaceability a rule, is axially
of the outer ring is displaceable.
desirable.
Housing split or Shock loads, temporary J62 The outer ring, as
not split Housing stationary complete unloading. a rule, is axially
radially. in relation to the All loads: displaceable.
direction of the Housing not split radially H62
load. Housing split radially H7 The outer ring is
easily displace-
Heat supplied through G7Ą able axially.
the shaft.
1 For cast iron or steel housing. For housings of light metal, tolerances are generally selected that give
slightly tighter fits than those shown. Numerical values are given in tables 37, 38, 39, and 40.
2 Where wider tolerances are permissible, P7, N7, M7, and H7 may be used instead of P6, N6, M6, K6,
J6, and H6, respectively.
Table B-48. Effect of Operating Loads

on Shaft and/or Housing Fits
Ball Roller
Bearings Bearings
Light Load t0.07C t0.08C
Normal Load u0.07C u0.08C
v0.15C v0.18C
Heavy Load u0.15C u0.18C
C = basic dynamic load rating.

t = less than.
u = greater than.
v = less than or equal to.
B-99
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-49. Shaft Bearing Seat Diameters for Metric Radial Ball and Roller Bearings
(ABEC-1 or RBEC Tolerances)
Bearing Bore Diameter g6 h6

Inches Shaft Diameter Inches Shaft Diameter Inches
Millimeter Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Mean Fit Maximum Minimum Mean Fit
4 0.1575 0.1572 0.1573 0.1570 0.0002L 0.1575 0.1572 0.0000
5 .1969 .1966 .1967 .1964 .1969 .1966
6 .2362 .2359 .2360 .2357 .2362 .2359
7 .2756 .2753 .2754 .2750 .0003L .2756 .2752 .0001L

8 .3150 .3147 .3148 .3144 .3150 .3146
9 .3543 .3540 .3541 .3537 .3543 .3539
10 .3937 .3934 .3935 .3931 .3937 .3933
12 .4724 .4721 .4721 .4717 .0004L .4724 .4720 .0001L

15 .5906 .5903 .5903 .5899 .5906 .5902
17 .6693 .6690 .6690 .6686 .6693 .6689
20 .7874 .7870 .7871 .7866 .0004L .7874 .7869 .0001L

25 .9843 .9839 .9840 .9835 .9843 .9838
30 1.1811 1.1807 1.1808 1.1803 1.1811 1.1806
35 1.3780 1.3775 1.3776 1.3770 .0005L 1.3780 1.3774 .0001L

40 1.5748 1.5743 1.5744 1.5738 1.5748 1.5742
45 1.7717 1.7712 1.7713 1.7707 1.7717 1.7711
50 1.9685 1.9680 1.9681 1.9675 1.9685 1.9679
55 2.1654 2.1648 2.1650 2.1643 .0005L 2.1654 2.1647 .0001L

60 2.3622 2.3616 2.3618 2.3611 2.3622 2.3615
65 2.5591 2.5585 2.5587 2.5580 2.5591 2.5584
70 2.7559 2.7553 2.7555 2.7548 2.7559 2.7552
75 2.9528 2.9522 2.9524 2.9517 2.9528 2.9521
80 3.1496 3.1490 3.1492 3.1485 3.1496 3.1489
85 3.3465 3.3457 3.3460 3.3451 .0006L 3.3465 3.3456 .0001L

90 3.5433 3.5425 3.5428 3.5419 3.5433 3.5424
95 3.7402 3.7394 3.7397 3.7388 3.7402 3.7393
100 3.9370 3.9362 3.9365 3.9356 3.9370 3.9361
105 4.1339 4.1331 4.1334 4.1325 4.1339 4.1330
110 4.3307 4.3299 4.3302 4.3293 4.3307 4.3298
115 4.5276 4.5268 4.5271 4.5262 4.5276 4.5267
120 4.7244 4.7236 4.7239 4.7230 4.7244 4.7235
125 4.9213 4.9203 4.9207 4.9197 .0006L 4.9213 4.9203 .0000

130 5.1181 5.1171 5.1175 5.1165 5.1181 5.1171
140 5.5118 5.5108 5.5112 5.5102 5.5118 5.5108
150 5.9055 5.9045 5.9049 5.9039 5.9055 5.9045
160 6.2992 6.2982 6.2986 6.2976 6.2992 6.2982
170 6.6929 6.6919 6.2923 6.6913 6.6929 6.6919
180 7.0866 7.0856 7.0860 7.0850 7.0866 7.0856
190 7.4803 7.4791 7.4797 7.4785 .0006L 7.4803 7.4791 .0000

200 7.8740 7.8728 7.8734 7.8722 7.8740 7.8728
220 8.6614 8.6602 8.6608 8.6596 8.6614 8.6602
240 9.4488 9.4476 9.4482 9.4470 9.4488 9.4476
B-100
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-49. Shaft Bearing Seat Diameters for Metric Radial Ball and Roller Bearings (Continued)
h5 j5 j6
Shaft Diameter Inches Shaft Diameter Inches Shaft Diameter Inches
Milli- Mean Mean Mean
meters Maximum Minimum Fit Maximum Minimum Fit Maximum Minimum Fit
4 0.1575 0.1573 0.0000 0.1576 .01574 0.0002T
5 .1969 .1967 .1970 .1968
6 .2362 .2360 .2363 .2361
7 .2756 .2753 .0000 .2758 .2755 .0002T

8 .3150 .3147 .3152 .3149
9 .3543 .3540 .3545 .3542
10 .3937 .3934 .3939 .3936
12 .4724 .4721 .0000 .4726 .4723 .0002T 0.4727 0.4723 0.0003T

15 .5906 .5903 .5908 .5905 .5909 .5905
17 .6693 .6690 .6695 .6692 .6696 .6692
20 .7874 .7870 .0000 .7876 .7872 .0002T .7877 .7872 .0003T

25 .9843 .9839 .9845 .9841 .9846 .9841
30 1.1811 1.1807 1.1813 1.1809 1.1814 1.1809
35 1.3780 1.3776 .0000 1.3782 1.3778 .0003T 1.3784 1.3778 .0004T

40 1.5748 1.5744 1.5750 1.5746 1.5752 1.5746
45 1.7717 1.7713 1.7719 1.7715 1.7721 1.7715
50 1.9685 1.9681 1.9687 1.9683 1.9689 1.9683
55 2.1654 2.1649 .0000 2.1656 2.1651 .0003T 2.1658 2.1651 .0004T

60 2.3622 2.3617 2.3624 2.3619 2.3626 2.3619
65 2.5591 2.5586 2.5593 2.5588 2.5595 2.5588
70 2.7559 2.7554 2.7561 2.7556 2.7563 2.7556
75 2.9528 2.9523 2.9530 2.9525 2.9532 2.9525
80 3.1496 3.1491 3.1498 3.1493 3.1500 3.1493
85 3.3465 3.3459 .0001T 3.3467 3.3461 .0003T 3.3470 3.3461 .0005T

90 3.5433 3.5427 3.5435 3.5429 3.5438 3.5429
95 3.7402 3.7396 3.7404 3.7398 3.7407 3.7398
100 3.9370 3.9364 3.9372 3.9366 3.9375 3.9366
105 4.1339 4.1333 4.1341 4.1335 4.1344 4.1335
110 4.3307 4.3301 4.3309 4.3303 4.3312 4.3303
115 4.5276 4.5270 4.5278 4.5272 4.5281 4.5272
120 4.7244 4.7238 4.7246 4.7240 4.7249 4.7240
125 4.9216 4.9209 .0005T 4.9219 4.9209 .0006T

130 5.1184 5.1177 5.1187 5.1177
140 5.5121 5.5114 5.5124 5.5114
150 5.9058 5.9051 5.9061 5.9051
160 6.2995 6.2988 6.2998 6.2988
170 6.6932 6.6925 6.6935 6.6925
180 7.0869 7.0862 7.0872 7.0862
190 7.4810 7.4798 .0007T

200 7.8747 7.8735
220 8.6621 8.6609
240 9.4495 9.4483
B-101
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
k5 k6 m5
Shaft Diameter Shaft Diameter Shaft Diameter
Inches Inches Inches
Milli- Mean Mean Mean
meters Maximum Minimum Fit Maximum Minimum Fit Maximum Minimum Fit
12 0.4728 0.4725 0.0004T 0.4730 0.4727 0.0006T

15 .5910 .5907 .5912 .5909
17 .6697 .6694 .6699 .6696
20 .7879 .7875 .0005T 0.7880 0.7875 0.0006T .7881 .7877 .0007T
25 .9848 .9844 .9849 .9844 .9850 .9846
30 1.1816 1.1812 1.1817 1.1812 1.1818 1.1814
35 1.3785 1.3781 .0006T 1.3787 1.3781 .0007T 1.3788 1.3784 .0009T
40 1.5753 1.5749 1.5755 1.5749 1.5756 1.5752
45 1.7722 1.7718 1.7724 1.7718 1.7725 1.7721
50 1.9690 1.9686 1.9692 1.9686 1.9693 1.9689
55 2.1660 2.1655 .0007T 2.1662 2.1655 .0008T 2.1664 2.1659 .0011T
60 2.3628 2.3623 3.3630 2.3623 2.3632 2.3627
65 2.5597 2.5592 2.5599 2.5592 2.5601 2.5596
70 2.7565 2.7560 2.7567 2.7560 2.7569 2.7564
75 2.9534 2.9529 2.9536 2.9529 2.9538 2.9533
80 3.1502 3.1497 3.1504 3.1497 3.1506 3.1501
85 3.3472 3.3466 .0008T 3.3475 3.3466 .0010T 3.3476 3.3470 .0012T
90 3.5440 3.5434 3.5443 3.5434 3.5444 3.5438
95 3.7409 3.7403 3.7412 3.7403 3.7413 3.7407
100 3.9377 3.9371 3.9380 3.9371 3.9381 3.9375
105 4.1346 4.1340 4.1349 4.1340 4.1350 4.1344
110 4.3314 4.3308 4.3317 4.3308 4.3318 4.3312
115 4.5283 4.5277 4.5286 4.5277 4.5287 4.5281
120 4.7251 4.7245 4.7254 4.7245 4.7255 4.7249
125 4.9221 4.9214 .0010T 4.9224 4.9214 .0011T 4.9226 4.9219 .0015T
130 5.1189 5.1182 5.1192 5.1182 5.1194 5.1187
140 5.5126 5.5119 5.5129 5.5119 5.5131 5.5124
150 5.9063 5.9056 5.9066 5.9056 5.9068 5.9061
160 6.3000 5.2993 6.3003 6.2993 6.3005 6.2998
170 6.6937 6.6930 6.6940 6.6930 6.6942 6.6935
180 7.0874 7.0867 7.0877 7.0867 7.0879 7.0872
190 7.4813 7.4805 .0012T 7.4817 7.4805 .0014T 7.4817 7.4809 .0016T
200 7.8750 7.8742 7.8754 7.8742 7.8754 7.8746
220 8.6624 8.6616 8.6628 8.6616 8.6628 8.6620
240 9.4498 9.4490 9.4502 9.4490 9.4502 9.4494
B-102
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
m6 n6 p6
Shaft Diameter Shaft Diameter Shaft Diameter
Milli-
meters Maximum Minimum Mean Fit Maximum Minimum Mean Fit Maximum Minimum Mean Fit
35 1.3790 1.3784 0.0010T 1.3793 1.3787 0.0013T

40 1.5758 1.5752 1.5761 1.5755
45 1.7727 1.7721 1.7730 1.7724
50 1.9695 1.9689 1.9698 1.9692
55 2.1666 2.1659 .0012T 2.1669 2.1662 .0015T 2.1675 2.1668 0.0021T
60 2.3634 2.3627 2.3637 2.3630 2.3643 2.3636
65 2.5603 2.5596 2.5606 2.5599 2.5612 2.5605
70 2.7571 2.7564 2.7574 2.7567 2.7580 2.7573
75 2.9540 2.9533 2.9543 2.9536 2.9549 2.9542
80 3.1508 3.1501 3.1511 3.1504 3.1517 3.1510
85 3.3479 3.3470 .0014T 3.3484 3.3475 .0019T 3.3490 3.3481 .0025T
90 3.5447 3.5438 3.5452 3.5443 3.5458 3.5449
95 3.7416 3.7407 3.7421 3.7412 3.7427 3.7418
100 3.9384 3.9375 3.9389 3.9380 3.9395 3.9386
105 4.1353 4.1344 4.1358 4.1349 4.1364 4.1355
110 4.3321 4.3312 4.3326 4.3317 4.3332 4.3323
115 4.5290 4.5281 4.5295 4.5286 4.5301 4.5292
120 4.7258 4.7249 4.7263 4.7254 4.7269 4.7260
125 2.9229 4.9219 .0016T 4.9235 4.9225 .0022T 4.9241 4.9231 .0028T
130 5.1197 5.1187 5.1203 5.1193 5.1209 5.1199
140 5.5134 5.5124 5.5140 5.5130 5.5146 5.5136
150 5.9071 5.9061 5.9077 5.9067 5.9083 5.9073
160 6.3008 6.2998 6.3014 6.3004 6.3020 6.3010
170 6.6945 6.6935 6.6951 6.6941 6.6957 6.6947
180 7.0882 7.0872 7.0888 7.0878 7.0894 7.0884
190 7.4821 7.4809 .0018T 7.4829 7.4817 .0026T 7.4835 7.4823 .0032T
200 7.8758 7.8746 7.8766 7.8754 7.8772 7.8760
220 8.6632 8.6620 8.6640 8.6628 8.6646 8.6634
240 9.4506 9.4494 9.4514 9.4502 9.4520 9.4508
B-103
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-49. Shaft Bearing Seat Diameters for Metric Radial Ball and Roller
Bearings (Continued) (ABEC-1 or RBEC-1 Tolerances)
r6 r7
Shaft Diameter Shaft Diameter
Inches Inches
Milli-
meters Maximum Minimum Mean Fit Maximum Minimum Mean Fit
85 3.3494 3.3485 0.0029T

90 3.5462 3.5453
95 3.7431 3.7422
100 3.9399 3.9390
105 4.1368 4.1359
110 4.3336 4.3327
115 4.5305 4.5296
120 4.7273 4.7264
125 4.9248 4.9238 .0035T
130 5.1216 5.1206
140 5.5153 5.5143
150 5.9080 5.9080
160 6.3027 6.3017
170 6.6964 6.6954
180 7.0901 7.0891
190 7.4845 7.4833 .0042T 7.4851 7.4833 0.0045T
200 7.8782 7.8770 7.8788 7.8770
220 8.6656 8.6644 8.6662 8.6644
240 9.4530 9.4518 9.4536 9.4518
B-104
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table BĆ50. Housing Bearing Seat Diameters for Metric Radial Ball and Roller
Bearings of ABEC-1 or RBEC-1 Tolerances
G7 H7 p6
Housing Bore, Housing Bore, Housing Bore,
Inches Inches Inches Inches
Milli-
meters Max. Min. Max. Min. Mean Fit Max. Min. Mean Fit Max. Min. Mean Fit
16 0.6299 0.6295 0.6203 0.6309 0.0009L 0.6299 0.6306 0.0006L 0.6299 0.6303 0.0004L
19 .7480 .7476 .7483 .7491 .0009L .7480 .7488 .0006L .7480 .7485 .0005L
21 .8268 .8264 .8271 .8279 .8268 .8276 .8268 .8273
22 .8661 .8657 .8664 .8672 .8661 .8669 .8661 .8666
24 .9449 .9445 .9452 .9460 .9449 .9457 .9449 .9454
26 1.0236 1.0232 1.0239 1.0247 1.0236 1.0244 1.0236 1.0241
28 1.1024 1.1020 1.1027 1.1035 1.1024 1.1032 1.1024 1.1029
30 1.1811 1.1807 1.1814 1.1822 1.1811 1.1819 1.1811 1.1816
32 1.2598 1.2593 1.2602 1.2612 .0012L 1.2598 1.2608 0.0008L 1.2598 1.2604 .0006L
35 1.3780 1.3775 1.3784 1.3794 1.3780 1.3790 1.3780 1.3786
37 1.4567 1.4562 1.4571 1.4581 1.4567 1.4577 1.4567 1.4573
40 1.5748 1.5743 1.5752 1.5762 1.5748 1.5758 1.5748 1.5754
42 1.6535 1.6530 1.6539 1.6549 1.6535 1.6545 1.6535 1.6541
47 1.8504 1.8499 1.8508 1.8518 1.8504 1.8514 1.8504 1.8510
52 2.0472 2.0467 2.0476 2.0488 .0013L 2.0472 2.0484 .0009L 2.0472 2.0479 .0006L
55 2.1654 2.1649 2.1658 2.1670 2.1654 2.1666 2.1654 2.1661
58 2.2835 2.2830 2.2839 2.2851 2.2835 2.2847 2.2835 2.2842
62 2.4409 2.4404 2.4413 2.4425 2.4409 2.4421 2.4409 2.4416
65 2.5591 2.5586 2.5595 2.5607 2.5591 2.5603 2.5591 2.5598
68 2.6672 2.6767 2.6776 2.6788 2.6772 2.6784 2.6772 2.6779
72 2.8346 2.8341 2.8350 2.8362 2.8346 2.8358 2.8346 2.8353
75 2.9528 2.9523 2.9532 2.9544 2.9528 2.9540 2.9528 2.9535
78 3.0709 3.0704 3.0713 3.0725 3.0709 3.0721 3.0709 3.0716
80 3.1496 3.1491 3.1500 3.1512 3.1496 3.1508 3.1496 3.1503
85 3.3465 3.3459 3.3470 3.3484 .0015L 3.3465 3.3479 .0010L 3.3465 3.3474 .0008L
90 3.5433 3.5427 3.5438 3.5452 3.5433 3.5447 3.5433 3.5442
95 3.7402 3.7396 3.7407 3.7421 3.7402 3.7416 3.7402 3.7411
100 3.9370 3.9364 3.9375 3.9389 3.9370 3.9384 3.9370 3.9379
105 4.1339 4.1333 4.1344 4.1358 4.1339 4.1353 4.1339 4.1348
110 4.3307 4.3301 4.3312 4.3326 4.3307 4.3321 4.3307 4.3316
115 4.5276 4.5270 4.5281 4.5295 4.5276 4.5290 4.5276 4.5285
120 4.7244 4.7238 4.7249 4.7263 4.7244 4.7258 4.7244 4.7253
125 4.9213 4.9205 4.9219 4.9235 .0018L 4.9213 4.9229 .0012L 4.9213 4.9223 .0009L
130 5.1181 5.1173 5.1187 5.1203 5.1181 5.1197 5.1181 5.1191
140 5.5118 5.5110 5.5124 5.5140 5.5118 5.5134 5.5118 5.5128
145 5.7087 5.7079 5.7093 5.7109 5.7087 5.7103 5.7087 5.7097
150 5.9055 5.9047 5.9061 5.9077 5.9055 5.9071 5.9055 5.9065
160 6.2992 6.2982 6.2998 6.3014 .0019L 6.2992 6.3008 .0013L 6.2992 6.3002 .0010L
165 6.4961 6.4951 6.4967 6.4983 6.4961 6.4977 6.4961 6.4971
170 6.6929 6.6919 6.6935 6.6951 6.6929 6.6945 6.6929 6.6939
175 6.8898 6.8888 6.8904 6.8920 6.8898 6.8914 6.8898 6.8908
180 7.0866 7.0856 7.0872 7.0088 7.0866 7.0882 7.0866 7.0876
190 7.4803 7.4791 7.4809 7.4827 0.0021L 7.4803 7.4821 0.0015L 7.4803 7.4815 0.0012L
200 7.8740 7.8728 7.8746 7.8764 7.8740 7.8758 7.8740 7.8752
210 8.2677 8.2665 8.2683 8.2701 8.2677 8.2695 8.2677 8.2689
215 8.4646 8.4634 8.4652 8.4670 8.4646 8.4664 8.4646 8.4658
220 8.6614 8.6602 8.6620 8.6638 8.6614 8.6632 8.6614 8.6626
225 8.8583 8.8571 8.8589 8.8607 8.8583 8.8601 8.8583 8.8595
230 9.0551 9.0539 9.0557 9.0575 9.0551 9.0569 9.0551 9.0563
240 9.4488 9.4476 9.4494 9.4512 9.4488 9.4506 9.4488 9.4500
250 9.8425 9.8413 9.8431 9.8449 9.8425 9.8443 9.8425 9.8437
260 10.2362 10.2348 10.2369 10.2389 .0024L 10.2362 10.2382 .0017L 10.2362 10.2374 .0013L
270 10.6299 10.6285 10.6306 10.6326 10.6299 10.6319 10.6299 10.6311
280 11.0236 11.0222 11.0243 11.0263 11.0236 11.0256 11.0236 11.0248
290 11.4173 11.4159 11.4180 11.4200 11.4173 11.4193 11.4173 11.4185
300 11.8110 11.8096 11.8117 11.8137 11.8110 11.8130 11.8110 11.8122
310 12.2047 12.2033 12.2054 12.2074 12.2047 12.2067 12.2047 12.2059
320 12.5984 12.5968 12.5991 12.6013 .0026L 12.5984 12.6006 .0019L 12.5984 12.5998 .0015L
340 13.3858 13.3842 13.3865 13.3887 13.3858 13.3880 13.3858 13.3872
350 13.7795 13.7779 13.7802 13.7824 13.7795 13.7817 13.7795 13.7809
360 14.1732 14.1716 14.1739 14.1761 14.1732 14.1754 14.1732 14.1746
370 14.5669 14.5653 14.5676 14.5698 14.5669 14.5691 14.5669 14.5683
380 14.9606 14.9590 14.9613 14.9635 14.9609 14.9628 14.9606 14.9620
400 15.7480 15.7464 15.7487 15.7509 15.7480 15.7502 15.7480 15.7494
B-105
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-50. Housing Bearings Seat Diameters for Metric Radial Ball and Roller
Bearings of ABEC-1 or RBEC-1 Tolerances (Continued)
J7 J6 K6
Housing Bore, Mean Fit Housing Bore, Mean Fit Housing Bore, Mean Fit
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
0.6296 0.6303 0.0003L 0.6297 0.6301 0.0002L 0.6295 0.6299 0.0000L
.7477 .7485 .0003L .7487 .7483 .0003L .7475 .7480 .0000L
.8265 .8273 .8266 .8271 .8263 .8268
.8658 .8666 .8659 .8664 .8656 .8661
.9446 .9454 .9447 .9452 .9444 .9449
1.0233 1.0241 1.0234 1.0239 .10231 1.0236
1.1021 1.1029 1.1022 1.1027 1.1019 1.1024
1.1808 1.1816 1.1809 1.1814 1.1806 1.1811
1.2594 1.2604 .0004L 1.2596 1.2602 .0004L 1.2593 1.2599 .0000L
1.3776 1.3786 1.3778 1.3784 1.3775 1.3781
1.4563 1.4573 1.4565 1.4571 1.4562 1.4568
1.5744 1.5754 1.5746 1.5752 1.5743 1.5749
1.6531 1.6541 1.6533 1.6539 1.6530 1.6536
1.8500 1.8510 1.8502 1.8508 1.8499 1.8505
2.0468 2.0480 .0005L 2.0470 2.0477 .0004L 2.0466 2.0473 .0000L
2.1650 2.1662 2.1652 2.1659 2.1648 2.1655
2.2831 2.2843 2.2833 2.2840 2.2829 2.2836
2.4405 2.4417 2.4407 2.4414 2.4403 2.4410
2.5587 2.5599 2.5589 2.5596 2.5585 2.5592
2.6768 2.6780 2.6770 2.6777 2.6766 2.6773
2.8342 2.8354 2.8344 2.8351 2.8340 2.8347
2.9524 2.9536 2.9526 2.9533 2.9522 2.9529
3.0705 3.0717 3.0707 3.0714 3.0703 3.0710
3.1492 3.1504 3.1494 3.1501 3.1490 3.1497
3.3460 3.3474 .0005L 3.3463 3.3472 .0005L 3.3458 3.3467 .0001L
3.5428 3.5442 3.5431 3.5440 3.5426 3.5435
3.7397 3.7411 3.7400 3.7409 3.7395 3.7404
3.9365 3.9379 3.9368 3.9377 3.9363 3.9372
4.1334 4.1348 4.1337 4.1346 4.1332 4.1341
4.3302 4.3316 4.3305 4.3314 4.3300 4.3309
4.5271 4.5285 4.5274 4.5283 4.5269 4.5278
4.7239 4.7253 4.7242 4.7251 4.7237 4.7246
4.9207 4.9223 .0006 4.9210 4.9220 .0006L 4.9205 4.9215 .0001L
5.1175 5.1191 5.1178 5.1188 5.1173 5.1183
5.5112 5.5128 5.5115 5.5125 5.5110 5.5120
5.7081 5.7097 5.7084 5.7094 5.7079 5.7089
5.9049 5.9065 5.9052 5.9062 5.9047 5.9057
6.2986 6.3002 .0007L 6.2989 6.2999 .0007L 6.2984 6.2994 .0002L
6.4955 6.4971 6.4958 6.4968 6.4953 6.4963
6.6923 6.6939 6.6926 6.6936 6.6921 6.6931
6.8892 6.8908 6.8895 6.8905 6.8890 6.8900
7.0860 7.0876 7.0863 7.0873 7.0858 7.0868
7.4796 7.4814 0.0008L 7.4800 7.4812 0.0009L 7.4793 7.4805 0.0002L
7.8733 7.8751 7.8737 7.8749 7.8730 7.8742
8.2670 8.2688 8.2674 8.2686 8.2667 8.2679
8.4639 8.4657 8.4643 8.4655 8.4636 8.4648
8.6607 8.6625 8.6611 8.6623 8.6604 8.6616
8.8576 8.8594 8.8580 8.8592 8.8573 8.8585
9.0544 9.0562 9.0548 9.0560 9.0541 9.0553
9.4481 9.4499 9.4485 9.4497 9.4478 9.4490
9.8418 9.8436 9.8422 9.8434 9.8415 9.8427
10.2355 10.2375 0010L 10.2359 10.2371 .0010L 10.2352 10.2364 .0003L
10.6292 10.6312 10.6296 10.6308 10.6289 10.6301
11.0229 11.0249 11.0233 11.0245 11.0226 11.0238
11.4166 11.4186 11.4170 11.4182 11.4163 11.4175
11.8103 11.8123 11.8107 11.8119 11.8100 11.8112
12.2040 12.2060 12.2044 12.2056 12.2037 12.2049
12.5977 12.5999 .0012L 12.5981 12.5995 .0012L 12.5972 12.5986 .0003L
13.3851 13.3873 13.3855 13.3869 13.3846 13.3860
13.7788 13.7810 13.7792 13.7806 13.7783 13.7797
14.1725 14.1747 14.1729 14.1743 14.1702 14.1734
14.5662 14.5684 14.5666 14.5680 14.5657 14.5671
14.9599 14.9621 14.9603 14.9617 14.9594 14.9608
15.7473 15.7495 15.7477 15.7491 15.7468 15.7482
B-106
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-51. Shaft Bearing Seat Diameters for Inch Dimension Radial Ball Bearings
of ABEC-1 Tolerances
Bearing Bore Diameter h5 j6

Inches Shaft Diameter Inch Shaft Diameter Inch
Fraction Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Mean Fit Maximum Minimum Mean Fit
1/8 0.1250 0.1247 0.1250 0.1248 0.0001T 0.0003T
3/16 .1872 .1875 .1875 .1875
1/4 .2500 .2497 .2500 .2497 .0000
3/8 .3750 .3747 .3750 .3747
1/2 .5000 .4997 .5000 .4997 0.5003 0.4999
5/8 .6250 .6247 .6250 .6247 .6253 .6249
3/4 .7500 .7496 .7500 .7496 .7503 .7498
7/8 .8750 .8746 .8750 .8746 .8753 .8748
1 1.0000 .9996 1.0000 .9996 1.0003 .9998
1 1/8 1.1250 1.1246 1.1250 1.1246 1.1253 1.1248
1 1/4 1.2500 1.2495 1.2500 1.2496 .0001T 1.2504 1.2498 .0004T
1 3/8 1.3750 1.3745 1.3750 1.3746 1.3745 1.3748
1 1/2 1.5000 1.4995 1.5000 1.4996 1.5004 1.4998
j5 k5
1/8 .1250 .1247 .1251 .1249 .0002T .0004T
3/16 .1875 .1872 .1876 .1874
1/4 .2500 .2497 .2502 .2499
3/8 .3750 .3747 .3752 .3749
1/2 .5000 .4997 .5002 .4999 .5004 .5001
5/8 .6250 .6247 .6252 .6249 .6254 .6251
3/4 .7500 .7496 7502 .7498 .7505 .7501 .0005T
7/8 .8750 .8746 .8752 .8748 .8755 .8751
1 1.0000 .9996 1.0002 .9998 1.0005 1.0001
1 1/8 1.1250 1.1246 1.1252 1.1248 1.1255 1.1251
1 1/4 1.2500 1.2495 1.2502 1.2498 .0003T 1.2505 1.2501 .0006T
1 3/8 1.3750 1.3745 1.3752 1.3748 1.3755 1.3751
1 1/2 1.5000 1.4995 1.5002 1.4998 1.5005 1.5001
g6
1/8 .1250 .1247 .1248 .1245 .0002L
3/16 .1875 .1872 .1873 .1870
1/4 .2500 .2497 .2498 .2494 .0003L
3/8 .3750 .3747 .3748 .3744
1/2 .5000 .4997 .4997 .4993 .0004L
5/8 .6250 .6247 .6247 .6243
3/4 .7500 .7496 .7497 .7492
7/8 .8750 .8746 .8747 .8742
1 1.0000 .9996 .9997 .9992
1 1/8 1.1250 1.1246 1.1247 1.1242
1 1/4 1.2500 1.2495 1.2496 1.2490 .0005L
1 3/8 1.3750 1.3745 1.3746 1.3740
1 1/2 1.5000 1.4995 1.4996 1.4990
B-107
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-52. Housing Bearing Seat Diameters for Inch Dimension Radial Ball Bearings
of ABEC-1 Tolerances
Bearing O. D. H6 H7
Housing Bore, Housing Bore,
Inches
Fraction Inches Mean Fit Inches Mean Fit
Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
3/8 0.3750 0.3746 0.3750 0.3754 0.0004T 0.3750 0.3757 0.0006L
1/2 .5000 .4996 .5000 .5004 .5000 .5007
5/8 .6250 .6246 .6250 .6254 .6250 .6257
3/4 .7500 .7496 .7500 .7505 .0005L .7500 .7508
7/8 .8750 .8746 .8750 .8755 .8750 .8758
1 1/8 1.1250 1.1246 1.1250 1.1255 1.1250 1.1258
1 3/8 1.3750 1.3745 1.3750 1.3756 .0006L 1.3750 1.3760 .0004L
1 5/8 1.6250 1.6245 1.6250 1.6256 1.6250 1.6260
1 7/8 1.8750 1.8745 1.8750 1.8756 1.8750 1.8760
2 2.0000 1.9995 2.0000 2.0007 2.0000 2.0012 .0009L
2 1/8 2.1250 2.1245 2.1250 2.1257 2.1250 2.1262
2 1/4 2.2500 2.2495 2.2500 2.2507 2.2500 2.2512
2 1/2 2.5000 2.4995 2.5000 2.5007 2.5000 2.5012
2 5/8 2.6250 2.6245 2.6250 2.6257 2.6250 2.6262
M6 J6
3/8 .3750 .3746 .3744 .3748 .0002T .3748 .3752 .0002L
1/2 .5000 .4996 .4994 .4998 .4998 .5002
5/8 .6250 .6246 .6244 .6248 .6248 .6252
3/4 .7500 .7496 .7493 .7498 .0003T .7498 .7503 .0003L
7/8 .8750 .8746 .8743 .8748 .8748 .8753
1 1/8 1.1250 1.1246 1.1243 1.1248 1.1248 1.1253
1 3/8 1.3750 1.3745 1.3742 1.3748 1.3748 1.3754 .0004T
1 5/8 1.6250 1.6245 1.6242 1.6248 1.6248 1.6254
1 7/8 1.8750 1.8745 1.8742 1.8748 1.8748 1.8754
2 2.0000 1.9995 1.9990 1.9997 .0004T 1.9998 2.0003
2 1/8 2.1250 2.1245 2.1240 2.1247 2.1248 2.1255
2 1/4 2.2500 2.2495 2.2490 2.2497 2.2498 2.2505
2 1/2 2.5000 2.4995 2.4990 2.4997 2.4998 2.5005
2 5/8 2.6250 2.6245 2.6240 2.6247 2.6248 2.6255
K6
3/8 .3750 .3746 .3746 .3750 .0000
1/2 .5000 .4996 .4996 .5000
5/8 .6250 .6246 .6246 .6250
3/4 .7500 .7496 .7495 .7500
7/8 .8750 .8746 .8745 .8750
1 1/8 1.1250 1.1246 1.1245 1.1250
1 3/8 1.3750 1.3745 1.3745 1.3751
1 5/8 1.6250 1.6245 1.6245 1.6251
1 7/8 1.8750 1.8745 1.8745 1.8751
2 2.0000 1.9995 1.9994 2.0001
2 1/8 2.1250 2.1245 2.1244 2.1251
2 1/4 2.2500 2.2495 2.2494 2.2501
2 1/2 2.5000 2.4995 2.4994 2.5001
2 5/8 2.6250 2.6245 2.6244 2.6251
B-108
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-53. Housing Fits for General Airframe Ball Bearings
Housing fits AW-AK, KP, KS, DPP, DSP, DSRP, KP-A, DW, P (also K3L and KS3L) series
Aluminum Aluminum
or or
Steel Mean Magnesium Mean Steel Mean Magnesium Mean
Bearing Housing Fit Housing Fit Bearing Housing Fit Housing Fit
O. D. Bore Tight Bore Tight O. D. Bore Tight Bore Tight
0.6250 0.6245 0.0005 0.6243 0.0007 1.2500 1.2495 0.0005 1.2493 0.0007
.6245 .6240 .6238 1.2495 1.2490 1.2488
.7500 .7495 .0005 .7493 .0007 1.3750 1.3745 .0005 1.3743 .0007
.7495 .7490 .7488 1.3745 1.3740 1.3738
.7774 .7769 .0005 .7767 .0007 1.4375 1.4370 .0005 1.4368 .0007
.7769 .7764 .7762 1.4370 1.4365 1.4363
.8125 .8120 .0005 .8118 .0007 1.6250 1.6245 .0005 1.6243 .0007
.8120 .8115 .8113 1.6245 1.6240 1.6238
.8750 .8745 .0005 .8743 .0007 1.6875 1.6870 .0005 1.6868 .0007
.8745 .8740 .8738 1.6870 1.6865 1.6863
.9014 .9009 .0005 .9007 .0007 1.9375 1.9370 .0005 1.9368 .0007
.9009 .9004 .9002 1.9370 1.9365 1.9363
1.0625 1.0620 .0005 1.0618 .0007 2.0000 1.9995 .0005 1.9993 .0007
1.0620 1.0615 1.0613 1.9995 1.9990 1.9988
1.1250 1.1245 .0005 1.1243 .0007 2.2500 2.2495 .0005 2.2493 .0007
1.1245 1.1240 1.1238 2.2495 2.2490 2.2488
1.1875 1.1870 .0005 1.1868 .0007
1.1870 1.1865 1.1863
B-109
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-54. Shaft and Housing Fits for KP-B and KP-BS Series Airframe Bearings
Shaft Fits Housing Fits

Steel, Mean Fit
Aluminum Steel, Aluminum or Loose
or Mean Bearing O. D. Magnesium Housing KP-B
Bearing Magnesium Fit and
Bearing No. Bore Shaft Loose KP-B KP-BS KP-B KP-BS KP-BS
KP16B, KP16BS 1.0000 0.9995 0.0005 1.7500 1.9375 1.7510 1.9385 0.0010
.9995 .9990 1.7490 1.9365 1.7500 1.9375
KP21B, KP21BS 1.3130 1.3120 .0010 2.0625 2.2500 2.0635 2.2510 .0010
1.3120 1.3110 2.0615 2.2490 2.0625 2.2500
KP23B, KP23BS 1.4380 1.4370 .0010 2.1875 2.3750 2.1885 2.3760 .0010
1.4370 1.4360 2.1865 2.3740 2.1875 2.3750
KP25B, KP25BS 1.5630 1.5620 .0010 2.3125 2.5000 2.3135 2.5010 .0010
1.5620 1.5610 2.3115 2.4990 2.3125 2.5000
KP29B, KP29BS 1.8130 1.8120 .0010 2.5625 2.7500 2.5635 2.7510 .0010
1.8120 1.8110 2.5615 2.7490 2.5625 2.7500
KP33B, KP33BS 2.0630 2.0620 .0010 2.8125 3.0000 2.8135 3.0010 .0010
2.0620 2.0610 2.8115 2.9990 2.8125 3.0000
KP37B, KP37BS 2.3130 2.3120 .0010 3.0625 3.2500 3.0635 3.2510 .0010
2.3120 2.3110 3.0615 3.2490 3.0625 3.2500
KP47B, KP47BS 2.9380 2.9370 .0010 3.8750 4.1250 3.8760 4.1260 .0010
2.9370 2.9360 3.8740 4.1240 3.8750 4.1250
KP49B, KP49BS 3.0630 3.0620 .0010 4.0000 4.2500 4.0010 4.2510 .0010
3.0620 3.0610 3.9990 4.2490 4.0000 4.2500
Y-PWI and 555 SERIES
Shaft Diameter = Same Dimensions as Bearing Bore

Minimum Housing Bore = Maximum Bearing O.D.
Maximum Housing Bore = Maximum Bearing O.D. plus the O.D. Tolerance.
The ideal fit for these series is “line-to-line”. Therefore, wherever possible, selective assembly should be used.
Shaft Fits For oscillating service where bearings are not mounted on standard aircraft bolts, and are not
clamped axially on shafts, it is recommended that shaft diameters of -.0005 to -.0010 from the nominal bearing
bore size be used.
B-110
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-55. Shaft and Housing Fits for B500 Series Bearings
Steel, Steel,
Aluminum, or Aluminum or
Magnesium Mean Fit Magnesium Mean Fit
Bearing No. Bearing Bore Shaft Loose Bearing O.D. Housing Loose
B538 0.6257 0.6243 0.0012 1.0625 1.0635 0.0010
.6243 .6233 1.0615 1.0625
B539 .7507 .7493 .0012 1.1875 1.1885 .0010
.7493 .7483 1.1865 1.1875
B540 .8757 .8743 .0012 1.3125 1.3135 .0010
.8743 .8733 1.3115 1.3125
B541 1.0632 1.0618 .0012 1.5000 1.5010 .0010
1.0618 1.0608 1.4990 1.5000
B542 1.3132 1.3118 .0012 1.7500 1.7510 .0010
1.3118 1.3108 1.7490 1.7500
B543 1.5632 1.5618 .0012 2.0000 2.0010 .0010
1.5618 1.5608 1.9990 2.0000
B544 1.8135 1.8115 .0015 2.2500 2.2510 .0012
1.8115 1.8105 2.2485 2.2500
B545 2.0635 2.0615 .0015 2.6250 2.6260 .0012
2.0615 2.0605 2.6235 2.6250
B546 2.3135 2.3115 .0015 2.8750 2.8760 .0012
2.3115 2.3105 2.8735 2.8750
Table B-56. Shaft Tolerance Designations for Thrust Bearings
Shaft Diamter
Conditions in mm Tolerance Symbol1
Thrust load only All diameters j6.
Composite radial and
thrust load on self-
aligning roller thrust
bearings:
Stationary load on All diameters j6.
shaft washer.
Rotating load on v200 k6.
shaft washer, or (200). . . . 400 m6.
direction of load- u400 n6.
ing indeterminate
1 Solid steel shaft. For numerical value see table BĆ37.
B-111
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-57. Housing Tolerance Designations for Thrust Bearings
Tolerance
Bearing Type Conditions Symbol1 Remarks
Ball thrust bearings Thrust load only. H6 In less accurate

applications the
housing washer is
mounted with radial
play.
Thrust load only. Companion bearing to The housing washer
carry radial load mounted with radial
play.
SelfĆaligning roller Light radial load Springs under housing G7
thrust bearings combined with washer; axial
variable thrust displacement
load. desirable
Stationary outer ring J7
load.
Combined radial and Rotating outer ring load K7 In general.
thrust load. or indeterminate load
direction.
M7 In case of comparatively
heavy radial loads.
1 For numerical value see table BĆ38.
Table B-58. Tapered Roller Bearing Fitting Practice

Rotating Inner Ring Stationary Inner Ring
Load and Stationary Load and Rotating
Outer Ring Load, Outer Ring Load,
Bearing Part Conditions Respectively1 Respectively
Cone, adjustable All loads Light force fit Close running fit.
g to normal loads
Light Standard force fit Slide fit.
H ll
Hollow shafts
h f
Cone, nonadjustable Very heavy loads Heavy force fit Light force fit
Shock loads
Cup, adjustable Light to normal loads Slide fit
Heavy loads Light force fit
Cup, nonadjustable Light to normal loads Heavy drive fit Heavy drive fit.
Heavy loads Standard force fit. Standard force fit.
1 Assembly conditions may dictate lighter fits than recommended.
B-112
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table B-59. Shaft Tolerances for Tapered Roller Bearings

Heavy Standard Light Slide Close
Cone Bore, Inch Force Fit Force Fit Force Fit Fit Running Fit
Shaft Shaft Shaft Shaft Shaft
IncluĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ
Over ding ance Fit ance Fit ance Fit ance Fit ance Fit
Ą0 Ą2 1/2 +25 25T +15 15T +5 Ą5T +0 Ą0T ĄĆ2 Ą2L
+15 10T +10 Ą5T Ć0 Ą5L Ć5 10T ĄĆ7 12L
Ą2 1/2 Ą5 +35 35T +25 25T +10 10T +0 Ą0T ĄĆ2 Ą2L
+25 15T +15 Ą5T Ć0 10L Ć10 20L Ć12 22L
Ą5 12 +25 25T +10 10T +0 Ą0T ĄĆ2 Ą2L
+15 Ą5T Ć0 10L Ć10 20L Ć12 22L
12 25 +50 50T +20 20T +0 Ą0T
+30 10T Ć0 20L Ć20 40L
Note ć The shaft diameter limits are given with reference to the bearing nominal cone bore.
T indicates tight fit; L indicates loose fit.
Table B-60. Housing Tolerances for Tapered Roller Bearings

Cup O.D., Standard Heavy Light Slide
Inch Force Fit Drive Fit Force Fit Fit
Housing Housing Housing Housing
IncludĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ TolerĆ
Over ing ance Fit ance Fit ance Fit ance Fit
Ą0 Ą3 ĄĆ5 25T +0 20T +10 10T +20 Ą0T
Ą Ć15 Ą5T Ć10 Ą0L Ć0 10L +10 20L
Ą3 Ą5 Ć10 30T +0 20T +10 10T +20 Ą0T
Ą Ć20 10T Ć10 Ą0L Ć0 10L +10 20L
Ą5 12 Ć10 40T +0 30T +20 10T +30 10L
Ć30 10T Ć20 Ą0L Ć0 20L +20 30L
12 24 Ć10 50T +0 40T +30 10T +60 20L
Ć30 10T Ć20 Ą0L +10 30L +40 60L
Note ć The housing diameter limits are given with reference to the bearing nominal cup O.D.
T indicates tight fit; L indicates loose fit.
B-113/(B-114 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
APPENDIX C
BEARING FAILURE ANALYSIS
C-1. GENERAL. C-5. BALL AND ROLLER PATH ANALYSIS.
C-2. Modern bearings are reliable and, with prop- C-6. BALL PATH ANALYSIS. Examine the inner
er handling, mounting, lubrication, cleanliness, and ring raceway first since cyclic stressing is normally
maintenance, can be expected to give long, trouble- greater on the rotating inner ring than on the
free service. However, all mechanical devices are stationary outer ring. Also, the inner ring has a smaller
subject to failure and time spent in determining the raceway diameter and consequently is stressed more
initiating cause of the bearing failure can be valuable. cycles per revolution (inner ring rotation), and the
The ability to examine a bearing and correctly circumferential curvature of the raceway is opposed
diagnose the cause of malfunction or failure is an to the curvature of the ball (figure B-18).
extremely effective tool. The evaluation of a com-
pletely failed bearing becomes difficult since the a. The ball path can generally be located by
original cause of the failure may either be disguised its dull matte finish.
or destroyed. Therefore, detection of the defect or
damage in its earliest stages is important. It is b. A reddish discoloration may indicate over-
important that more than one bearing be evaluated loads and should be noted.
if an intelligent diagnosis of the real problem is to
be determined. There are many causes of bearing c. Normal ball paths under load conditions
failure, yet with experience, they can be properly are illustrated in figure 7-8.
recognized and appropriate corrective action can
be initiated. d. Abnormal ball paths are described in the
following paragraphs.
C-3. PROCEDURE FOR DAMAGE ANALYSIS.
C-7. Oscillating Ball Path.
C-4. The following outline will help when perform-
ing a comprehensive damage or failure analysis: a. An oscillating ball path indicates the bearing
had been operating with a misalignment (figure C-1).
a. Obtain complete information about the ap-
b. The ball path on the inner ring raceway
plication that affected the operating environment of
will have an oscillating pattern with shaft rotation
the bearing.
and outer ring misalignment.
b. Obtain examples of the earliest stages of
the same type of damage that can be found.
c. Make a thorough visual examination with

the aid of a low power microscope (3-70 X mag)
and a high power scanning electron microscope
(100-500 X mag). Classify the type of damage.
d. Photograph the bearing. Select the most

promising areas that are associated with the damage
for the metallographic studies.
e. Perform necessary metallographic analyses

to verify the visual classification of the damage.
f. Review available data on load, speed,

00c001
lubrication, temperature, and other environmental
factors, and compare observed and expected bear- Figure C-1. Oscillating Ball Paths Indicating
ing life under these operating conditions. Misaligned Rings
C-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
c. Inner ring misalignment will cause an oscil-

lating pattern on the inner ring raceway and a wide
path on the outer ring raceway (figure C-2).
d. Misaligned rotating housings will generate

ball paths that are the opposite of shaft rotation
with misalignment.
C-8. Localized Widening of the Ball Path. A

single wide section in the ball load path may indicate
a dynamic imbalance of the rotating member (figure
C-3).
C-9. Displaced Ball Path. A ball path that is

uniformly displaced on the raceway indicates the
bearing was operating under a preload. This may
be normal for the application.
00c002
a. A ball path that is displaced too high up Figure C-2. Fatigue Spalled Raceway Caused by
on the shoulder of the ring raceway may initiate Misaligned Inner Ring
retainer failure and fatigue spalling on the raceway.
b. A ball path that is displaced too far in the

direction of the low shoulder of an angular-contact
bearing raceway may cause damage to the balls
and initiate fatigue failure on the edge of the
raceway.
C-10. Unevenly Wide Ball Path. Two or more wide

sections in the ball load path is usually caused by
an out-of-round mounting surface. The bearing ring
that is mounted on, or in, the out-of-round bearing
mounting will indicate the uneven path (figures C-4
and C-5).
00c003
Figure C-3. Dynamic Imbalance Indications on
C-11. Wide Ball Path. A uniformly wide ball path Ball Bearing Raceway
may be normal for the application or may indicate
an excessive shaft or housing mounting fits (figures
C-6 and C-7).
C-12. ROLLER PATH ANALYSIS. Examine the

inner ring raceway first since cyclic stressing on
the inner ring is greater than on the outer ring. This
is because the inner ring, being of a smaller
diameter, is stressed more cycles per revolution.
Also, the curvatures of the cylindrical surfaces in
contact are opposed. Normal roller raceway paths
are discussed in paragraph 7-20. Abnormal roller
raceway paths are described as follows:
C-13. Nonuniform Roller Path. A roller path that

is not uniform across the width of the raceway
indicates misalignment of the bearing rings and/or
00c004
nonuniform application of the load. This will cause
roller end loading with loads being concentrated on Figure C-4. Ball Path Indicating Out-of-Round
the edges of the raceway (figures C-8 and C-9). Shaft Bearing Seat
C-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c005
Figure C-5. Ball Path Indicating Out-of-Round 00c008
Housing Bearing Seat Figure C-8. Fatigue Spalled Rollers Caused by
Misaligned Rings
00c006
Figure C-6. Ball Path Indicating Excessive Shaft
Mounting Fit 00c009
Figure C-9. Fatigue Spalled Roller Bearing
Raceway Caused by Misaligned Rings
C-14. Circumferential Variations in the Roller

Path. A roller path that is not uniformly circumferen-
tial around the bearing ring, and varying in width,
indicates there was misalignment of either the shaft
or housing. The misaligning forces cause the load
to be concentrated first on one side of the raceway
and then on the other side.
C-15. RETAINER WEAR PATTERN ANALYSIS. In-

spect the retainer surfaces that are in contact with
the rolling elements for nonuniform wear patterns.
Rollerbearing retainer separating webs should be
00c007
inspectedfor irregular wear patterns that have a
Figure C-7. Ball Path Indicating Excessive “dog-bone” shape (figure C-10). This wear pattern
Housing Mounting Fit indicates the rollers have been skewing back-and-forth
while rolling circumferentially around the raceway.
C-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c010
Figure C-10. “Dog Bone” Wear from Roller

Skewing (10X MAG.)
C-16. Inspect the corners of the roller bearing

retainer pockets for cracks. Use 20 to 30 power
magnification. Cracks may develop from excessive
roller skewing. The corner cracks that are initiated
will propagate and eventually cause a fracture of the
roller separating webs of the retainer (figure C-11).
C-17. B E A R I N G F A I L U R E S C A U S E D B Y
INSTALLATION PROBLEMS.
00c011
Figure C-11. Cracks in Retainer Roller
C-18. DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION. Brinel- Pocket from Roller Skewing
ling of the raceways during installation is a common
cause of damage of ball bearings. The damage
occurs when an axial load is applied to the shaft
when installing the bearing into the housing. When
housing fits are too tight, or if the bearing is cocked
on the shaft, the load will force the bearing into
the housing. The balls will be pushed high up on
the raceway, creating a triangularly shaped dent or
brinell impression on the edge of the ball groove
(figure 7-13). A corresponding crease or indent will
be found on the ball surface. The improper use of
installation tools, or the application of pressure to
the wrong bearing ring, can cause brinell damage.
C-19. Roller bearings can be damaged by improper

installation methods. When the inner ring, retainer
and roller assembly of a cylindrical roller bearing is
axially forced into the outer ring, or cocked when
mounted axial smearing/scoring of the raceway and
rollers will result (figure C-12). The inner ring of a
separable roller bearing is sometimes mounted on
a shaft ahead of the outer ring assembly. Damage
can occur to the inner ring raceway and/or rollers
when the outer ring and roller assembly are improper- 00c012
ly installed on the shaft. These defects are focal Figure C-12. Axial Scoring and Galling of Roller
points for fatigue spalling and ultimate bearing failure. Bearing from Improper Assembly Techniques
C-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
tearing of the raceway and roller surfaces. Figure

C-13 shows a failed elliptical roller bearing that was
damaged during installation in an engine.
C-22. TIGHT SHAFT AND HOUSING MOUNTING

FITS. Bearing rings are normally installed with an
interference fit on the rotating member of the
assembly. Interference fits should be sufficient to
prevent the rings from slipping under normal operat-
ing conditions. If the interference fit is excessive,
all of the internal radial clearance may be taken
out of the bearing. This will cause a line-to-line
internal fit with all of the balls or rollers contacting
both ring raceways before the external load is
applied. With high interference fits, all of the balls
and rollers will be under a preload prior to the
application of the external load (figures C-6 and C-7).
This greatly reduces bearing life.
C-23. An excessively tight mounting fit may cause

the inner ring to crack during installation. Excessive
fits on either the inner or outer rings that does not
cause immediate bearing failure during assembly
will reduce the internal radial clearance of the
bearing causing the following sequence of events:
a. Excessive internal preloads will be gener-

ated in the bearing.
b. High tensile stresses will be developed in

the ring that may cause axial cracks in the rolling
surfaces.
00c013 c. Fatigue initiated cracks will progress to

Figure C-13. Improperly Installed Elliptical flaking, spalling and complete fracture (figure C-14).
Roller Bearing
NOTE
Excessive interference fits can be de-

C-20. Elliptically designed bearing rings are very tected in an installation by noting a high
susceptible to installation damage. Most elliptical initial operating torque accompanied by
bearings are designed and manufactured with the higher than normal operating tempera-
outer ring elliptical in the unmounted condition. tures. The bearing may also emit a high
Forcible assembly of the bearing prior to installation frequency pitch sound during operation.
can cause severe scoring of the raceway and rollers. Check the bore and outer diameter sur-
faces of the rings for indications of deep
C-21. Scoring damage can also occur during scoring or galling (figure C-15).
engine/component buildup when the inner ring and
roller/retainer assembly is installed into the outer C-24. LOOSE SHAFT AND HOUSING FITS. When
ring. The inner diameter of the outer ring is squeezed the interference fit between the rotating component
during mounting, resulting in a final geometric and the bearing ring is insufficient, the ring will slip
configuration that is slightly out-of-round, with zero on the rotating member surface, resulting in wear,
internal clearance at the minor axis (small diameter). scoring and galling. This condition is easily identified
When the inner ring and rollers are installed, the by circumferential scoring/abrasion of the bore or
rollers must enter these zero clearance areas. the outer diameter mounting surfaces (figure C-16).
Unless the bearing is carefully rotated (rolled in) The small, loose particles of metal that are produced
during installation, the rollers will slide across the can enter the bearing, causing internal wear and
inner ring raceway, under load, causing galling and early failure.
C-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
is equivalent to 1/16-inch-per-foot shaft misalign-

ment, without cramping or binding. A shaft, 1-foot
long or less, is rarely out-of-line by more than
1/16-inch-per-foot. However, long drive shafts can
be out-of-line and can cause bearing misalignment.
C-28. Off-Square Ball Bearing Rings. It is com-

mon to find bearing housings and housing shoulders
tilted or off-square. It is also common to have a
defective shaft shoulder tilt the inner ring. On a
1-inch diameter shaft a 0.005-inch off-square corre-
sponds to 1/4-degree angular misalignment. A rela-
tively small angular tilt of a ring will detrimentally
00c014
affect bearing operation. In the case of a misaligned
Figure C-14. Cracked Inner Ring of Ball Bearing or tilted inner ring, the ball path on the outer ring
Installed with Excessive Interference Fit raceway will be broadened. While on the inner ring
raceway it will oscillate from one side of the raceway
to the other side.
C-29. When the outer ring is tilted, the reverse

is true, with the broadened band appearing on the
inner ring raceway and the oscillating path on the
outer ring raceway (figure C-1). The misaligning load
will be most severe when the ball path approaches
high up on the edge of the raceway, often causing
fatigue spalling (figure C-2). The retainer in a bearing
operating under severe misalignment, is subject to
high stress levels. The balls roll at different speeds
as they accelerate and decelerate on different pitch
diameters. This can cause cracking of the retainer
and ultimate fracture (figure C-18).
00c015
Figure C-15. Axially Scored Bore of Ball Bearing
Ring Installed with Excessive Interference Fit
C-25. Excessive rotation of the outer ring in/on

its mounting seat may initiate what is called “cold
working”. Axial rubbing cracks will develop, which
can cause a fracture of the bearing ring. Check for
easier than normal removal of the bearing from its
mounting and indications of scoring on the bearing
surfaces.
C-26. MISALIGNMENT OF SHAFT OR HOUSING

ASSEMBLIES. Bearing misalignment can be the
result of four different types of assembly conditions
(figure C-17).
C-27. Out-of-Line Shafts. A shaft of normal length

00c016
will seldom be sufficiently out-of-line to damage a
ball bearing. Most single-row ball bearings can Figure C-16. Worn Shaft Seat from Loose
withstand up to 1/4-degree angular movement, which Shaft-to-Bearing Bore Fit
C-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
and overstressing, fatigue spalling will be initiated

at the outer edges of the roller path or on the ends
of the individual rollers (figure C-8). Inspect the
bearing for any indications of early stages of spalling.
C-32. Shaft Deflections. Misalignment due to

shaft deflection can be a problem with very long
shafts. It can become a critical factor in rotor shafts
of jet engines and helicopter main rotor drive shafts.
Smaller shafts will usually fracture before the angu-
larity of the bearing reaches 1/4-degree misalign-
ment. The shaft deflection will develop a whipping
motion that will be transmitted to the bearings as
unbalanced vibratory forces. Inspect the bearing for
indications of fretting on the mounting surfaces and
abnormal retainer wear.
C-33. DEFECTIVE MOUNTING SURFACES.
C-34. When bearings are mounted on a housing

or shaft mounting seat that has a coarse surface
finish, the ridges will soon break down under
operating stress and vibration. This results in loose
mounting fits as previously described (figure C-16).
Inspect the bearing mounting surfaces for parallel
flaking of the rough circumferential ridges.
00c017
Figure C-17. Types of Bearing Misalignment
C-30. The additional stresses imposed on the

bearing during misalignment may initiate high tem-
peratures at the point of contact of the rolling
elements and the rings. Inspect the bearing for heat
discoloration of theball paths and balls, and degrada-
tion products from the lubricant.
00c018
C-31. Off-Square Roller Bearing Rings. Misalign-
Figure C-18. Bearing Failure Caused by
ment of roller bearings will initiate excessive end
Misaligned Housing
loads on the rollers. Because of concentrated loads
C-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
C-35. Bearings installed with impression stakes to common type of removal damage is brinelling of
prevent axial movement (without an interference fit) the raceways and rolling elements by the application
will often become loose under operating loads. When of the removing force to the wrong ring (figures C-19
looseness does occur, rotation and additional wear and C-20).
will occur. Inspect bearings for wear spots at regular
intervals corresponding to the location of the stake NOTE
mark positions.
Figure C-21 is an example of a bearing
C-36. Out-of-Round Shaft Housing Assemblies. damaged during removal by careless use
An out-of-round shaft or housing will force the of a bearing puller.
bearing ring out-of-round, with a resulting loss of C-42. When examining gall or smear marks on
internal radial clearance. Localized areas of stress a ring, the direction or lay of the displaced metal
may cause early fatigue cracking and fracture of will provide clues as to whether the damage occurred
the ring. during assembly or disassembly. Check for evidence
NOTE of ball/roller wear that crosses over the score marks.
This indicates the damage occurred during bearing
Because of the elastic properties of steel, assembly (figure C-22).
the bearing rings will closely conform to
C-43. Flattened out sections of the smear marks
the shape of the mounting surfaces that
indicates the damage occurred during bearing as-
they are pressed in to, or on (figures C-4
sembly. The smear marks were peened over by the
and C-5). The degree of conformity varies
rolling action of the rolling elements, (figure C-23).
with the bearing material and the thick-
ness of the ring section. An average of C-44. Score or smear marks that pass through the
70-80 percent expansion or reduction can normal wear or operating marks of the bearing
be expected. indicates the damage occurred during bearing re-
moval.
C-37. Tapered Mounting Surfaces. A mounting
surface that has a tapered geometric shape will C-45. BEARING FAILURES DUE TO WEAR.
cause nonuniform distribution of the operating loads.
This can initiate early fatigue cracking of the area C-46. GENERAL. All solid surfaces that are in
of the ring that is in contact with the mounting moving contact will wear unless they are 100 percent
surface. Insufficient surface contact of the bearing separated by a clean lubricant film. Normally, rolling
with the mounting surface may initiate severe fretting bearing contact wear is so small that it requires
corrosion. In extreme cases, cracks may be initiated the use of sensitive radio tracer analysis to detect.
in the fretted areas that penetrate into the load zone This microscopic wear does not lead to bearing
and cause fatigue spalling to be initiated on the failure. However, there are two types of bearing
raceway. failures that are caused by excessive wear of the
active bearing surfaces.
C-38. Improperly Designed Housing Assem-
blies. A housing design that does not allow for C-47. METAL REMOVAL. Significant amounts of
proper axial positioning of the bearings will generate metal can be removed by wear of the load carrying
excessive thrust loads. Inspect for fatigue spalling surfaces when there is abrasive particles present,
that is located high up on the ball groove. This is inadequate lubrication and/or a significant rate of
particularly true in rotating electrical bearings where sliding contact. This type of failure is characterized
shims are used to compensate for the effects of by gross quantities of wear particles in the lubricant
thermal expansion. and severe abrasive wear of the contact surfaces
of the bearing. The spectrometric oil analysis pro-
C-39. Defects on Mounting Surfaces. Inspect the gram (SOAP) was developed to detect and monitor
bearing mounting surfaces for minor defects such this type of mechanical wear.
as burrs, sharp nicks, raised areas. These mounting
defects may have generated areas of localized stress C-48. Detection of this type of bearing failure can
that could cause premature bearing failure. be determined by measuring specific bearing geome-
tries for dimensional changes and by visually observ-
C-40. BEARING DAMAGE DUE TO IMPROPER ing the wear debris near the contact areas. Surface
REMOVAL PRACTICES. metal can also be removed by corrosive lubricants
and by erosive effects of electrical arcing. These
C-41. Many bearings are damaged by poor remov- failure modes can be visually detected by microscop-
al methods, procedures and tooling. The most ic examination of the effected surfaces.
C-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c021
Figure C-21. Bearing Damaged when Puller
Tool Slipped During Removal
00c019
Figure C-19. Bearing Damaged by Applying
Removal Force through the Bearing
00c022
Figure C-22. Smear Marks Over Lay
of Roller Raceway
C-49. METAL TRANSFER. When galling or smear-

ing occurs in a rolling bearing that is subjected to
light loads and sliding contact, metal is transferred
from one contacting surface to the other surface
(figure C-24). Areas here cold welding of the rolling
surfaces takes place will gradually increase in
dimension. Depressions will be formed in the surface
from which the metal is removed. Smearing is self
propagating and will lead to thermal failure of the
bearing. The bearing will be overheated and lose
material hardness and the lubricant will deteriorate.
The transferred metal appears as a bright, fracture-
00c020
like area on the effected surface. Subsequent plastic
Figure C-20. Brinelled Ball Bearing from smoothing and wearing away of the transferred
Improper Removal Technique material may occur.
C-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
a. Contamination left in the bearing by the

bearing manufacturer or government activity (figure
C-25).
b. Improper and/or dirty working areas during

installation.
c. A dirty operating environment that the

bearing is placed in (figure C-26).
d. The use of contaminated lubricants.
C-52. SOLID PARTICLE CONTAMINATION. Abra-

sive contamination introduced into the bearing will
be crushed between the raceways and rolling
elements, creating a very fine abrasive lapping
material (figure C-27). The finely sized abrasive
particles will act as a lapping compound and will
increase the internal clearances of the bearing
through wear to the rolling element and raceway
surfaces. The lapping action rapidly increases as
the fine steel particles abraded off the bearing
surfaces act as added lapping material. The effected
surfaces surfaces will appear dull when compared
to the shiny bearing surfaces not under load.
00c023
Figure CĆ23. Assembly Smear Marks Flattened
C-53. Coarse, hard particles will produce small
by Rollers During Rotation
depressions that can be easily distinguished from
fatigue failure or corrosion pitting. The edges of the
small depressions will be rounded and will vary in
size according to the size of the contaminating
particles.
C-54. Figure C-28 shows a deep-groove ball bear-

ing that was contaminated with abrasive particles.
Due to wear from abrasive particles, the balls could
not support the “ball centered” retainer, allowing the
retainer to simultaneously drag and wear on the
lands of both rings. Figure C-29 shows the same
condition for a machined metal retainer worn by
abrasive contamination.
C-55. Hard particles that enter a bearing assembly

may actually jam the rolling elements and the
raceways causing the ring to turn on the rotating
member.
00c024
Figure C-24. Metal Transfer from C-56. Indentations caused by abrasive contamina-
Retainer to Ball Surface tion may develop into early stages of fatigue spalling
as follows:
CONTAMINATION. a. The continued passage of the rolling ele-
ments over the indentation generates abnormal
C-51. GENERAL. A common cause of bearing stress loads.
damage is from external contamination. Contamina-
tion may enter the bearing assembly by any one b. A microcrack will initiate just outside the
or more of the following causes: indentation.
C-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
particles is high, and the particles are aluminum

oxide or silicon oxide (quartz), the retainer guiding
lands will be abrasively worn. Microscopic examina-
tion is required to detect the abrasive particles
embedded In the silver plate. Bearings that are
suspected of abrasive particle contamination should
not be cleaned prior to examination because of
possible loss of evidence. Figure C-32 shows
abrasive contamination that was removed from some
gearbox bearings.
C-59. FLUID CONTAMINATION. Fluid contamina-

tion will interfere with the lubricant, reducing its
effectiveness, and possibly causing premature bear-
ing failure. Fluid contamination may be detected by
noting streaks of lubricant that have been slung out
of the bearing by centrifugal force. Perform a
chemical analysis of the lubricant to determine if
00c025 any contamination is present. Water contamination
Figure C-25. Metal Contamination in New Bearing will cause corrosion pitting (refer to paragraph C-60)
The grease or oil residues should be tested for
presence of chlorides which indicates salt water
contamination.
CORROSION.
C-61. GENERAL. Corrosion damage is high on

the list of factors that adversely affect the serviceabil-
ity and life of bearings. The highly finished bearing
surfaces manufactured of bearing steel are suscepti-
ble to corrosive attack of water, acids, or other such
chemical agents. Many bearings are damaged by
corrosion while in storage because of inadequate
cleaning or handling procedures prior to packaging
(figure C-33). Other bearings are attacked by acids
created from deteriorating lubricants or preservative
coatings. New bearings are just as susceptible to
00c026 corrosive attack as processed bearings. The cor-
Figure C-26. Metal Contamination in roded bearing surfaces will be etched or pitted and
Helicopter Transmission Bearing generally coated with a reddish-brown deposit.
Corrosion pits will usually be round in shape and
have sharp bottoms and edges.
c. The microcrack will widen and develop into
a fatigue spall (figure C-30). C-62. Bearings that have operated in a corroded
condition will have a dull gray rolling element path
C-57. Even soft solid particles such as brass, that will be relatively free of active corrosion due
aluminum, wood, and paper can indent the surface to the lapping/wearing action of the abrasive iron
of a rolling bearing made of hardened steel. This oxide particles (figure C-34).
is possible due to localized overstressing of an
extremely small area of the bearing surface. The C-63. WATER IN THE LUBRICANT. Lubricants or
unit pressure due to this localized loading exceeds preservatives that contain small amounts of dis-
the plastic deformation limit of the bearing steel solved water will corrosively attack bearing surfaces
resulting in permanent deformation. in the form of rust spots or light etching (figure C-35).
When moisture contaminated bearings are rotated,
C-58. Hard particles will become embedded in the they may exhibit corrosion streaks created by the
soft silver used to plate many bearing retainers squeezing action of the rolling elements. More
(figure C-31). When the quantity of embedded significant water contamination will cause deeper
C-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
corrosion pitting. When the bearing remains static/

stationary for any period of time, the corrosion will
be concentrated around the rolling element contacts
on the raceways (figure C-36). Perform a chemical
analysis to check for the presence of chlorides
indicating salt water contamination.
C-64. CORROSION PITTING. Corrosion pitting of

the rolling elements and raceways will not always
initiate fatigue cracking and spalling. Shallow pitting
in lightly loaded bearings has little effect in initiating
early fatigue. However, in heavily loaded bearings,
corrosion pits can be the focal point or stress riser
that can initiate fatigue spalling. This is particularly
true when they are located in the load zone of the
raceways, and especially on the highly stressed
inner ring raceway (figures C-37 and C-38). The
presence of corrosion on a bearing usually indicates
the presence of water in the lubricant, a factor which
can significantly lower the fatigue life of the bearing.
C-65. Corrosion pitting of AISI M-50 tool steels

has the visual appearance of cracking associated
with fatigue spalling. However, the cracks seem to
be associated with a corrosion mechanism initiating
at carbide concentrations in the grain boundaries
of the steel. Figures C-39 and C-40 shows two views
of corrosion found in gas turbine engine bearings
made of AISI M-50 tool steel.
C-66. BEARING FAILURES DUE TO VIBRATION.
C-67. GENERAL. False brinelling or fretting corro-

sion damage is particularly evident in helicopters,
airframe, and wheel bearing applications. Damage
00c027
is easily identified and can be readily differentiated
from true brinelling (permanent deformation). With Figure C-27. Abrasive Contamination Crushed
true brinelling, the grind or finish marks are not Between Raceways and Rolling Elements
obliterated during the plastic flow of the metal and
can be readily seen in the indentation under micro-
scopic examination. False brinelling, or fretting C-69. The basic mechanism of false brinelling is
corrosion, as it is commonly referred to, does not as follows:
involve plastic flow, but a definite removal of the
surface metal that can be visually seen through a a. Surface damage occurs on the raceway
good microscope. The surface finish of the rolling at the contact area with the rolling elements.
elements and the raceway have been roughened
and the original finish lines or patterns are removed. b. The loaded bearing is subjected to angular
oscillation and/or vibration.
C-68. FALSE BRINELLING. False brinelling is a
specialized form of fretting corrosion and is usually c. The lubricant is forced out of the contact
associated with the internal surfaces of rolling bear- area and is not readily replaced when the angular
ings. The depressions appear to be the result of displacement (rotation) is small.
plastic deformation until a closer inspection shows
the characteristic removal of the raceway surface d. Metal-to-metal contact results, and the slid-
finish. Reflected light and a good microscope is the ing motion causes submicroscopic particles to be
best means of identifying false brinelling (figure C-41). sheared from the high spots of the active surfaces.
C-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
f. The oxides act as lapping compound and

accelerates the removal of additional metal.
NOTE
Only a few millionths of an inch of sliding

motion of one surface relative to another
is required to initiate this action.
g. Deep depressions at each rolling element

contact point are developed in the raceways after
an extended period of time. The rolling elements
are reduced in size.
C-70. Vibration Causes False Brinelling. The

type of vibration that causes false brinelling in a
bearing can be determined by noting the shape of
the depressions in the raceway (figure C-42).
a. Axial vibration or movement will appear as

elliptically shaped depressions running axially across
the raceways of ball bearings (figure 7-17), and as
00c028
narrow rectangles on the raceways of roller bearings.
Figure C-28. Eccentric Wear of Retainer
from Abrasive Contamination b. Oscillating vibration will cause depressions
that are wide in the circumferential direction of the
raceway.
C-71. FRETTING. Fretting or fretting corrosion is

usually associated with the nonactive surfaces of
bearings where relative motion can occur between
individual bearing and mounting seat surfaces.
C-72. Fretting Between Bearing Components.

Fretting can occur on the mating face surfaces of
split inner rings of ball bearings due to insufficient
torque and/or loose mounting (figure C-43).
C-73. Fretting on Mounting Surfaces. Fretting

corrosion can occur on the mounting surface of a
nonrotating bearing ring. For an example; the inner
ring of a duplex bearing rotating at 10,000 rpm, with
an inherent system vibration, will develop an oscillat-
ing motion between the housing bore and the outer
diameter surface of the outer ring, resulting in fretting
00c029 corrosion (figure 7-16). Fretting corrosion on the
Figure C-29. Retainer and Balls Worn bearing bore and the shaft bearing seat is often
from Abrasive Contamination caused by a loose mounting fit (figure C-44).
C-74. EFFECT OF LUBRICANT ON FALSE BRIN-

e. The displaced particles are small and are ELLING. False brinelling is more common with high
readily oxidized. viscosity lubricants where the ability to return to an
area after displacement is poor. Oil or light greases
NOTE are generally less subject to this type of damage
since more fluid lubricants readily return after being
This accounts for the red rust generally forced out of the contact area. In cases of continued
associated with false brinelling or fretting severe false brinelling, spalling and ring fracture will
corrosion. result (figure C-45).
C-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
The load determines the amount of stress acting

on the bearing, and the speed determines how often
the applied load will flex (stress) the active surfaces
of the raceway and rolling elements. Since the
diameter of the inner ring is smaller than the
diameter of the outer ring, the raceway of the inner
ring is subjected to more flexures (stress cycles)
per revolution and usually is the first to show signs
of fatigue damage. Refer to paragraphs B-40 and
B-41 for additional information.
C-78. Identification of Fatigue. Fatigue spalls can
be identified by crater-like depressions in the active
surfaces. The walls and bottom of the crater are
formed by fracture surfaces that are sharp edged.
The walls are steep and the bottom is relatively
flat with numerous horizontally directed shiny fracture
planes (figure C-47). The depth of the spall is
associated with the location of the maximum shear
stress. Figure C-48 shows a metallograph of a
00c030 fatigue spall.
Figure C-30. Fatigue Spalling at an Indentation
C-79. Normal Fatigue Failure. All bearings will
on a Roller Bearing Raceway
eventually fail due to fatigue of the active surfaces
after having lived out their normal life span. However,
the great majority of bearings are scrapped for
various reasons before reaching the end of their
projected operating life. For this reason, bearings
exhibiting fatigue failure should be carefully ex-
amined to uncover the possible causes of failure.
Possible causes are:
00c031
Figure C-31. Abrasive Particles Imbedded in
the Silver Plating of a Bearing Retainer
C-75. BEARING FAILURES DUE TO LOADING.
C-76. GENERAL. Failures due to loading can be

classified in many different ways. For the purposes
of this technical manual, bearing failures due to
loading will be divided into two separate categories:
(1) fatigue and, (2) plastic flow. Fatigue is further
classified as to origin and propagation.
C-77. FATIGUE. Fatigue is identified by a charac-

teristic flaking/spalling and cracking of the active 00c032
surfaces of the bearings (figure C-46). Spalling is Figure C-32. Abrasive Contamination
the result of the combined effects of load and speed. Washed out of Gearbox Bearings
C-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ings, where stress concentrations exist at the ends

of contact of two cylinders. Fatigue spalling is
initiated by locally increased stresses at the ends
of either the rollers or on the edge of the raceways
(figures C-8, C-9 and C-50). Misalignment intensifies
the stress concentration due to geometry and
reduces the fatigue life of the bearing.
00c033
Figure C-33. Corrosion on New Bearing
after 6-Month Storage
00c034
Figure C-34. Roller Bearing Inner Ring that
Operated after Corrosion Had Started
a. Surface and subsurface defects.
b. Abnormal mounting practices.
c. Excessive operating loads. 00c035

Figure C-35. Etched Outer Ring Raceway from
d. Material nonconformity and/or poor quality. Moisture in the Lubricant
e. Material nonconformity and/or poor quality.
C-80. Classification of Fatigue. Contact fatigue

is classified by how it begins (origin) and how it
progresses (mode of propagation). In order to
properly analyze bearing failures it will be necessary
to understand these factors and be able to recognize
their characteristics.
a. Nonmetallic Inclusion. The nonmetallic in-

clusion mode of fatigue is characterized by round-
shaped spalls in ball bearings and elliptically-shaped
spalls in roller bearings. The origin is at a specific
depth beneath the contact surface in the region of
maximum shear stress (figure C-49).
00c036
b. Geometric Stress Concentration. Geometric Figure C-36. Corrosion of Wheel Bearing Cup
stress concentration is associated with roller bear- from Gross Water Contamination
C-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c037
Figure C-37. Fatigue Spalling from Static Corrosion
00c039
Figure C-39. Corrosion Pitting of M50 Tool Steel
00c040
Figure C-40. Corrosion Pit in M50 Tool Steel
c. Point Surface Origin. Fatigue spalling that

originates at a surface defect, which acts as a
localized stress concentration, is referred to as point
surface origin fatigue (figure C-30, figures C-51 and
C-52). The main characteristic of this type of fatigue
is the arrowhead shaped spall. The mode of propa-
gation is due to the effects of hydraulic pressure.
The arrowhead shaped spall points in the direction
of rolling. Causes of this type of failure are:
(1) too thin a lubricant film compared to
the roughness height of the contact surface and
00c038
(2) low lubricant viscosity at operating the
Figure C-38. Corrosion Initiated Fatigue Spalling temperatures. Metal-to-metal contact occurs at the
surface defect.
C-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
the bearing mounting surface can initiate transverse

cracks in the bearing ring.
C-81. PLASTIC FLOW. Materials with elastic prop-

erties are able to deform and return to their original
shape when the load is removed. Steel is elastic
within certain load-temperature limits, and will return
to its original form when the applied stress is
removed. However, when higher loads are applied,
the elastic limit of the steel is exceeded, and
permanent deformation takes place. The original
bearing geometry is lost.
00c041
C-82. Plastic Flow Due to Loading. The hardened
Figure C-41 False Brinelling of a
steels used to manufacture rolling bearings will
Tapered Roller Bearing
plastically deform when subjected to overloads. The
plastic flow will destroy the original geometry of the
raceways and rolling elements (figure C-55). Brinells
will form in the raceway if the load is stationary.
Distortion of the ball/roller path will result when there
is rotation. Usually plastic flow can be identified by
pushed up or raised material that surrounds the
plastic distortion. Plastic flow can be determined by
measuring the contact geometry. The primary effects
of plastic flow are geometric distortion and increased
internal looseness of the bearing.
00c042
Figure C-42. Types of Vibration that Cause
False Brinelling
d. Peeling. This type of fatigue is character-

ized by shallow spalls that are less than 0.001 inch
in depth. Peeling usually occurs around indentations,
grooves, ends of roller contact or with excessive
surface roughness. The lubricant film separating the
active bearing surfaces is lost by leakage allowing
metal-to-metal contact (figure 7-30 and C-53).
e. Subcase. Subcase fatigue occurs with case

hardened or carburized steel bearings. Deep crack-
ing (compared to the depth associated with maxi-
mum shear stress) and rapid propagation of the
cracks occur when the cracking reaches the surface.
f. Transverse Cracking. This type of fatigue

00c043
is initiated by another failure mode which then
propagates a crack through the cross section of the Figure C-43. Fretting Corrosion on Bearing
bearing ring (figure C-54). Severe fretting action on Split Ring Face Surface
C-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
fatigue failure of the active surfaces (figure C-57).

A radially applied shock load will initiate indentations
called true brinelling in the center of the raceway
corresponding to the spacing of the rolling elements.
Ring fracture may occur with severe radial shock
loads (figure C-58).
C-85. Rolling bearings operating at high speeds

and very light radial loads will be damaged by severe
skidding. These operating conditions can lead to
fatigue spalling and early bearing failure (figure
C-59). Figure C-60 shows a metallographic section
of a roller bearing raceway with skid damage.
C-86. THRUST LOADS. The incorrect and/or ex-

cessive application of thrust/axial loads can cause
premature failure of bearings. The following types
of bearings are susceptible to failure due to thrust
loads.
C-87. Radial Ball Bearings. Thrust-loaded radial

ball bearings, will exhibit a ball path high up on
one side of the raceway groove. When the loads
are excessive, the raceway area next to the shoulder
will plastically deform and fatigue spall (figure C-61).
C-88. Angular-Contact Bearings. Angular-contact

and counterbore bearings, that are thrust loaded
in the wrong direction, will show a breakdown of
the low shoulder of the ball groove because of
insufficient contact area for ball support (figure C-62).
The inner ring may even be fractured in this area.
The balls will be banded from riding against the
edge of the low shoulder of the ball groove. In some
00c044 cases the bearing will even disassemble during
Figure C-44. Fretting Corrosion on Bore of service. Overloaded angular-contact bearings will fail
Ball Bearing and the Shaft Mounting in fatigue with the component with the lowest fatigue
life failing first (figure C-63).
C-83. Plastic Flow Due to Temperature. A more
destructive mode of plastic flow is due to thermal C-89. Maximum Capacity Bearings. Bearings
imbalance. More heat is generated within the bearing with filling slots are not recommended for applica-
than can be removed. As the temperature increases, tions that involve thrust loads. If displaced by thrust
the lubricant is destroyed, frictional forces increase, loading, the balls will pass over the loading notches
and the hardness of the bearing steel is reduced. in the raceways and become nicked or dented (figure
Plastic flow results in distortion and eventual total C-44). Spalling can occur on the raceways, particu-
destruction of the bearing. The gross destruction larly in the area of the loading notch.
is always easy to recognize because it appears
predominantly plastic, as in hot forming, and is C-90. Self-Aligning Bearings. Internal self-align-
different from complete disintegration by fracture ing bearings, by design, will not carry heavy thrust
mode of cracking failure. Bearings subjected to high loads. The large inner diameter of the outer ring
temperatures during mounting to heat expand the raceway gives a very small contact area between
rings during mounting will show the same character- the raceways and ball elements. This develops high
istics (figure C-56). contact stresses. Only one of the rows of balls will
carry the thrust load. They will generally indicate
C-84. RADIAL LOADS. Radially applied loads fatigue flaking, with corresponding flaking on the
exceeding the load limit of a bearing will cause early outer ring raceway (figure C-65).
C-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c047
Figure C-47. Fatigue Spalling Showing
Characteristics of Texture and Geometry
00c045
Figure C-45. Severe False Brinelling and
Cracking of Roller Bearing Outer Ring
00c048
00c046
Figure C-46. Fatigue Spalling and Figure C-48. Metallographic Section of a
Cracking of Active Load Surfaces Fatigue Spall (100 X Mag.)
C-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
the lubricating film between the flange and rollers

or between the rollers and the side of the retainer
pockets. This will cause smearing (figure C-66).
C-92. COMBINED RADIAL AND THRUST LOADS.

Bearings subjected to combined radial and thrust
loads may fail from the effects of excessive applica-
tion of either or both types of loads. All bearings
have specific radial and thrust load carrying capacities
under specific operating conditions. Figure C-67 is
an example of an angular-contact bearing used in
a matched stack arrangement that failed because
of unequal distribution of the loads in the stack.
C-93. Unbalanced rotating shafts can develop cy-

clic loads that will cause a retainer to fail by initiating
cracks in the corners of the retainer roller pockets
(figure C-68).
ELECTRICAL ARCING.
C-95. GENERAL. Electrical currents that, passing

through a bearing assembly, may be caused by a
buildup of static electricity, electrical leakage, or as
the result of a short circuit. The magnitude of the
current will determine this type and extent of bearing
00c049
Figure C-49. Fatigue Spall Originating at a damage. Arcing occurs between the raceways and
Subsurface Inclusion rolling elements when the current flow is interrupted.
C-96. Electrical arcing produces high temperatures

at localized areas and pitting of the surface material
(figure 7-23). Hard abrasive particles will be formed
when the current density is high. Both alternating
and direct current can cause damage and the
amperage rather than the voltage determines the
extent of damage. Tempering or softening of the
affected area will cause a resulting removal of the
surface metal under operating loads. The following
paragraphs describe the terms used to describe arc
damage in bearings.
C-97. FLUTING. Fluting occurs when there is a

prolonged passage of current of low amperage
through the bearing in the presence of vibration or
shock loads. Many small pits are formed in rhythmic
patterns of transverse grooves as the current flow
is broken at the same contact point on the raceways
and rolling elements. Once fluting has started, the
raceway surface, as modified by arc damage, will
tend to perpetuate the fluting (figures 7-15 and C-69).
00c050
Figure C-50. Scanning Electron Microphotograph C-98. GRANULATING. A granulating type of sur-
of a Fatigue Spall on a Roller End face damage occurs when current of medium amper-
age passes through the bearing assembly. Active
bearing surfaces at the contact points take on a
C-91. Flanged Roller Bearings. Excessive thrust granular or frosty appearance. This occurs when
loading of flanged roller bearings may breakdown there is a partial short circuit.
C-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c053
Figure C-53. Peeling Fatigue around Circumferential
Scratch (SEM Photograph)
C-99. PITTING. Pitting occurs when heavy jolts

of current of high amperage pass through the bearing
assembly, welding the bearing metal. Pits or craters
will form in one surface and nipples or raised areas
on the other surface depending on the direction of
current flow. Fatigue cracking and spalling can
initiate at these pits (figure C-52).
00c051 MANUFACTURING DEFECTS.
Figure C-51. Fatigue Fracture Originating at
a Corrosion Pit on the Bore of a Roller C-101. GENERAL. Although there are many pos-
Bearing Inner Ring sible defects that could be found in a bearing which
are attributable to material and manufacturing de-
fects, few are actually encountered. Major defects
that are found are due to material porosity, inclusions
in the metal, grinding burns and poor heat treatment.
There will be a small percentage of defective
bearings that have fabrication defects like; improper-
ly formed retainers, retainer rivets not properly
seated, out-of-tolerance surface finish, missing rol-
ling elements and wrong material.
C-102. A good bearing processing facility will be

able to detect these discrepancies and preclude their
use in critical aircraft applications. Figure C-70
shows a loose retainer rivet condition and figure
C-71 shows what can happen when a defective
bearing is used.
C-103. POROSITY. Steel that has been subjected

to excessive forging temperatures, or to inferior steel
00c052
mill processing, may exhibit a porous condition. If
Figure C-52. Fatigue Cracking at an Electrical Arc the affected area is at, or near, the active bearing
Damaged Area on a Ball Bearing Raceway surfaces, early fatigue failure will be the result.
C-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
C-105. GRINDING BURNS. One of the most difficult

defects to detect is a grinding burn on an active
surface of a bearing. The bum is not usually visible
to the eye. They can be detected only by properly
etching the bearing surface or by an eddy current
nondestructive inspection. The nital etch is per-
formed using a 10 percent nitric acid etch. Severe
grind burn damage will be accompanied by grinding
cracks that will cause early bearing failure (figure
C-75). Even when grinding cracks are not present,
the hardness of the affected metal may have been
reduced, and a sharp increase in the internal tensile
stresses. Figure C-76 shows an inner ring chamfer
surface with grinding cracks and a cross section
of the fracture surface.
NOTE
Eddy current inspection is being used by

00c054 many bearing companies to detect grind
Figure C-54. Fatigue Fracture of an Inner Ring burn damage. The Materials Engineering
of a Ball Bearing Due to Plastic Deformation Laboratory/Physical Science Laboratory is
of the Raceway responsible for developing local tech-
niques for bearing evaluation.
C-106. IMPROPER HEAT TREATMENT. The hard-

ness level of bearing steel is an extremely important
property that will directly affect the operational life
of the bearing and the assembly in which it is used.
When bearing components are improperly heat
treated, early fatigue failure will result with extensive
cracking and spalling of the active surface. Balls
may retain unrelieved internal stresses that will result
in fracture when subjected to the high stresses that
are developed under heavy loads.
C-107. LUBRICANT ANALYSIS.
C-108. GENERAL. A careful analysis of the grease

or oil residues remaining in a bearing will prove
00c055
valuable in determining the cause of bearing mal-
Figure C-55. Plastic Deformation and Fatigue
function or failure. In addition, it is important to
Cracking of Inner Ring Raceway of Ball Bearing
examine the bearing for any foreign matter that might
have entered it. The first step in the analysis is
C-104. INCLUSIONS. Foreign metallic and nonme- to identify the lubricant and compare it to specifica-
tallic contaminants (inclusions), when present in the tion requirements for the particular application. The
load carrying area of the bearing, will have stress second step is to check the physical and chemical
raising effects that can cause premature fatigue properties of the lubricant for deterioration.
failure. Metallurgical examination will be needed to
detect this type of failure. Figure C-72 is a highly C-109. LUBRICANT IDENTIFICATION. Quick deter-
magnified microphotograph of an inclusion found in mination of the identity of the lubricant is usually
bearing steel. Figures C-73 and C-74 are examples quite important. Until infrared spectroscopy was
of new bearings with internal inclusions in the developed, the only means of distinguishing between
bearing material that was detected when a visible different materials was by complex chemical analysis
crack was seen on the surface. or by obvious physical properties.
C-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
C-110. Infrared Analysis of Lubricants. All com-

pounds will absorb a unique amount of invisible rays
of longer wave length than the real parts of the
visible spectrum. These rays are commonly referred
to as the infrared spectrum. The amount of infrared
absorption depends on the molecular structure of
the compound.
C-111. One device used for infrared analysis is the

spectrophotometer shown in figure C-77. The grease,
oil, or preservative specimen is smeared on a sodium
chloride (NaCI) window, which is placed in a beam
of infrared radiation. The trace is obtained as shown
in figure C-78. The trace compares a sample of
Specification MIL-G-3278 (superseded by Specifica-
tion 23827A) grease (heavy line) with a sample of
Specification MIL-G-25760A (superseded by Specifi-
cation MIL-PRF-81322A) grease (light line).
C-112. An analysis of the significant peaks is used

to differentiate between two greases. Since the
00c056 absorption is being measured and the numbers on
Figure C-56. Plastic Deformation and Fatigue the right of the graph indicate percent of infrared
Spalling of Ball Bearing Raceway from Excessive transmission, peaks in absorption are actually dips
Temperatures Encountered during Thermal Mounting in the curve. Vertical placement on the chart and
intensity of peaks are not particularly important.
C-113. Infrared analysis is useful for detecting

contamination of the lubricant with another lubricant,
preservative or other material. This is accomplished
by comparing the used lubricant with new material
under the same specification. Identification of the
specification under which a material was produced
can also be accomplished. Identification of the
specific manufacturer of the material can sometimes
be done. The usefulness of the infrared spectro-
photometer is limited to the detection of contami-
nants of less than 10 percent since the distinguishing
00c057
Figure C-57. Fatigue Spalling of Ball Bearing Inner points on the trace may be only slight. In addition,
Ring Raceway Caused By Excessive Radial Loads some mineral base oils are so much alike in
composition that no difference in the respective
traces will be detected. However, even with these
limitations, the infrared spectrophotometer is a very
useful laboratory tool identifying lubricants and
preservatives.
C-114. Flame Test. Another means of grease identi-

fication is by subjecting a small sample of grease,
applied to a platinum wire, to a flame test. Certain
materials will burn with a particular color flame (table
C-1).
C-115. LUBRICANT CONDITION ANALYSIS. To

properly analyze the condition of the lubricant, it
00c058 is essential to know what type of oil or grease was
Figure C-58. Fractured Inner Ring Caused by originally used to lubricate the bearing. A basic guide
Shock Type Radial Load to lubricant condition analysis is as follows:
C-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table C-1. Flame Testing Lubricants
Soap or Thickener Color
Lithium Bright carmine red.

Sodium Yellow.
Calcium Orange red.
Strontium Red.
Barium Green.
C-116. Oil Lubricated Bearings: presence of ozone, at extremely high temperatures,

under heavy loads, or under sliding contact (figure
a. A scum or varnish coating on a bearing C-79).
surface indicates the bearing was operated at a
temperature at least 20_F higher than the upper C-118. For either grease or oil lubricated bearings:
limit of the operating oil.
b. Bearing surfaces that are free from oil or

decomposition residues indicate the bearing was
operated at or near the upper temperature limit of
the operating oil.
c. A dry bearing with little evidence of residue

or with a hazy surface appearance indicates too
little lubricant was initially used or, that most of the
oil had evaporated or had migrated away.
C-117. Grease Lubricated Bearings:
a. Grease that is darkened, but contains

appreciable amounts of oil, indicates excessive
operating loads for the grease selected, or outside
contamination.
b. Grease that appears white or spongy indi-

cates excessive aeration and churning from possible
over lubrication.
c. Grease that is uniformly dark and dry

indicates an advanced progression of the degrada-
tion described in paragraph C-117a, or the loss of
the oil constituent through the migration or evapora-
tion. Residues will have a burnt oil odor.
d. Grease residues with a hard surface film

but a soft interior indicates exposure to high external
temperatures not generated by the bearing.
e. Grease residues that are uniformly hard

all the way through indicate high temperatures were
generated within the bearing. Lithium based greases
will leave residues which appear like a glossy, brittle,
varnish which will shatter when probed with a sharp 00c059
instrument. Figure C-59. Severe Skidding and Fatigue Spall
Damage Caused by Insufficient Loads to Maintain
f. Silicone grease that has turned dark and Roller-to-Raceway Rolling Contact
sandy indicates either the bearing operated in
C-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
areas, bearing malfunction or failure may result. The

first indication of lubricant failure will be a rapid
temperature rise and then a noticeable whistling
noise will be generated within the bearing. Some
of the main causes of bearing failures due to
lubricant failure are as follows:
C-120. Insufficient Lubricant. An insufficient

amount of lubricant will usually cause a rise in
bearing temperature. A high pitched sound may also
be generated. The first visible indication of trouble
is usually a fine roughening or waviness on the
surface of the raceway or rolling elements, progress-
ing to fine cracks and superficial spalling and finally
to massive fatigue spalling (figure C-80). Tempera-
ture increases will cause discoloration of the sur-
faces under load and softening of the hardened
bearing steel.
00c060
Figure C-60. Metallographic Section of Roller
Bearing Raceway with Skid Damage C-121. Inadequate amounts of grease shows up
frequently in failure of the retainer. The lack of an
adequate lubricating film between the rolling ele-
ments and raceways will cause excessive tensile
forces to be developed in the retainer. This is shown
in figures C-81 and C-82 where a machined metal
retainer has fractured at the side of the ball pocket
(figure C-81), or at the joining area between the
balls (figure C-82).
C-122. In high speed bearing applications, where

ring land riding retainers are used, a condition of
inadequate lubrication will result in wear of the land
riding surface of the retainer and/or seizure. A
phenolic retainer will absorb far more lubricant than
a steel retainer and therefore can operate during
00c061
Figure C-61. Fatigue Spalling of Ball Bearing longer periods of sparse lubrication. However, when
Raceway from Excessive Thrust Loads lubrication remains inadequate, the phenolic material
becomes brittle and dry, and will easily fracture under
stress and heat. Loss of adequate lubrication can
a. A reddish deposit at rolling element contact be a problem with low speed and oscillating applica-
points indicates fretting corrosion possibly resulting tions due to the lack of lubricant in the active areas
from vibration or imbalance. of the bearing.
b. Metallic wear particles detected in the C-123. Deterioration of Lubricant. Deterioration of

lubricant may indicate contamination from an outside the lubricant during operation is a frequent cause
source or that an insufficient quantity of lubricant of bearing malfunction. As the lubricant deteriorates
was originally used. below the minimum required for effective lubrication,
momentary seizure of the rolling elements in the
C-119. BEARING CONDITION DUE TO THE EF- retainer pockets and on the raceways will result in
FECTS OF LUBRICATION. Bearing lubricants are smearing and transfer of metal. Since the lubricant
used to reduce friction, conduct heat away from is used as a means of heat transfer, inadequate
bearing components, prevent rust or corrosion and lubrication will cause excessive temperatures in the
to protect against contamination. When the effective- bearing and heat discoloration of the raceways and
ness of the lubricant is reduced in any one of these rolling elements will be evident.
C-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
wear and galling of the raceways surfaces. There

will not be adequate lubricating film to reduce friction
or to dissipate away the heat that has been
generated (figure C-83).
C-125. Excessive Lubricant. Excessive lubrication

can be as much of a problem as inadequate
lubrication. Packing the bearing cavity full of grease
causes the rolling elements to have to churn through
the grease and, because of viscous friction, higher
than normal temperatures will develop. This contin-
ued working of the grease will adversely affect
bearing lubrication with results similar to inadequate
lubrication. Excess quantities of grease in a high
speed bearing will rapidly deteriorate due to over-
heating and liquefaction.
C-126. Unauthorized Mixing of Lubricants. The

unauthorized mixing of certain lubricants may result
in a mixture that is inadequate as a lubricant or
that may undergo decomposition or physical change.
00c062 Mixing certain synthetic and petroleum lubricants
Figure C-62. Incorrect Application of Thrust has been identified as a primary cause of certain
Load to Angular-Contact Bearing bearing failures. The lubricant tends to thicken, and
the resulting gelled consistency does not have the
necessary lubricating qualities, causing bearing fail-
ure.
CAUTION
Never use silicone fluids where contact

with lead is possible. Lead acts as a
catalyst for gelling silicone fluids.
C-127. NOISE AND VIBRATION ANALYSIS.
C-128. GENERAL. The analysis of noise and vibra-

tion in rotating equipment is very important and
requires a knowledge of possible noise and vibration
sources and the frequencies that are generated by
these sources. Not all noise and vibration is gener-
ated by the bearings. Due to transmission and
amplification by surrounding components, the real
source of noise may be far removed from the
bearings.
00c063 C-129. SOURCES OF NOISE AND VIBRATION.

Figure C-63. Fatigue Spalling of Angular-Contact The only noise sources that will be covered in this
Bearing from Excessive Thrust Loads technical manual will be, rotary imbalance and rolling
bearing noise and vibration with primary emphasis
C-124. Improper Lubricant Selection. The use of on the latter. However, other possible sources that
improper or poor quality lubricants will reduce the must be considered are as follows:
expected service life of a bearing. Grease quality
is often defined in terms of film strength or load a. Reciprocating imbalance.
carrying capacity. The use of the wrong lubricant
in heavily loaded applications will cause excessive b. Friction: Sliding contact.
C-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c064 00c066
Figure C-64. Incorrect Application of Thrust Figure C-66. Smearing on Ends of Rollers
Load to Filling Slot-Type Ball Bearing and Sides of Retainer Roller Pockets
from Excessive Thrust Load
00c067
00c065 Figure C-67. Fatigue Spalled and Fractured Ring
Figure C-65. Incorrect Application of Thrust of an Angular-Contact Bearing Due to
Load to Self-Aligning Ball Bearing Excessive Radial and Axial Loads
C-27
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c068
Figure C-68. Cracked Retainer from Cyclic Loads
Developed by Unbalanced Rotating Shafts
00c071
Figure C-71. Loose Retainer Rivet Lodged in
Scavenge Pump Assembly
c. Gear: Tooth-meshing frequency.

00c069
Figure C-69. Micro Photograph of Electrical d. Magnetic: Periodic forces which exist in the
Arc Damaged Ball Bearing Raceway air gap between starter and motor of motors and
generators.
e. Slot: Changes in air gap or interruption of

air flow from radial ducts in the rotors of electrical
components.
f. Blade: Air impulse as blade passes a given

point.
g. Air Turbulence: Acceleration and/or turbu-

lence of the air by the presence of obstructions in
close proximity to the rotating part.
h. Vortex: Improper blade design that causes

a fluctuating pressure patter or eddy current.
00c070 i. Impact: A direct interference in the path

Figure C-70. Loose Retainer Rivet in of a moving part and/or a rapid change in the direct
a Gearbox Bearing magnitude of the load.
C-28
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c072
Figure C-72. Nonmetallic Inclusion Found
in Bearing Steel
00c074
Figure C-74. Lap Defect with Slag Inclusions
in a Roller of a Tapered Roller Bearing
00c075
00c073
Figure C-75. Cracks in Rollers Caused by
Figure C-73. Slag Inclusion in Inner Ring Grinding Stresses Introduced During
of a Tapered Roller Bearing Manufacture (Surfaces were etched)
C-29
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
standardized against bearings of known quality and

successful end use. Experienced personnel will be
able to identify the bearing noises and be able to
prescribe appropriate corrective action.
C-132. Noises Caused by Bearing Defects. Noises

due to bearing defects may be divided into two
distinct types: (a) noises that are caused by interfer-
ence in the rolling element path, and (b) noises that
are caused by vibration of bearing elements outside
the load area. Noises resulting from interference
in the rolling element path generally can be isolated
by a “screwdriver” test or a multiscope, which will
amplify vibration as it is transmitted to the ear.
Noises due to vibration within the bearing but outside
the loading area are not amplified by direct transmis-
sion and generally can be detected and analyzed
without the aid of direct contact.
a. Defects on the Active Surfaces. The aver-

age internal radial clearance of a bearing can be
as little as a few ten-thousandths of an inch to
several thousandths of an inch. As a comparison,
the diameter of a human hair or average dust particle
is a several thousandths of an inch diameter. It is
evident that whenever the rolling elements pass over
a small foreign object, a reduction or loss of internal
clearance will result. This intermittent change in
internal clearance and overloading of the rolling
00c076
elements forms the basis of interference noises. The
Figure C-76. Grinding Cracks in Inner Ring noises are characteristically sharp and intermittent
Bore Chamfer Surface of a Roller Bearing and may be caused by one or more of the defects
described in Section VII.
C-130. ROTARY IMBALANCE. Where rotary imbal- b. Component Vibration Noise. Vibration is the
ance exists, the frequency produced is the speed second main cause of noise within the bearing
of rotation and possible higher harmonics. The basic assembly and it originates outside the rolling element
or fundamental frequency, due to an unbalanced contact area. They can be classified as follows:
rotor or shaft, can be obtained by the following
equation:
(1) Excessive Looseness. Excessive loose-
ness generally will cause the rolling elements and
Frequency = rpm (cycles per second)
retainer to chatter or rattle when passing through
60
the unloaded area of the bearing.
Additional information on rotor/shaft balancing can

be found in paragraph B-205 in Appendix B. (2) Retainer Vibration. Vibration of this type
generally results from a loose, misaligned or dam-
aged retainer, poor or improperly selected lubricant,
C-131. ROLLING BEARING NOISE AND VIBRA- or a combination of the two.
TION. There are many different types of equipment
used to detect and differentiate between the sounds
and vibrations emitted from installed bearings. Vibra- (3) Grease. Grease is a common source
tion and frequency analyzers, equipped with various of noise in bearings. Intermittent movement of
types of pickups, are used to determine the quality grease, oxidized soap residues, fluid friction at high
of installed and uninstalled bearings. It should be speeds, and thickeners used in grease can all be
noted that this type of equipment must be first sources of a muffled, intermittent noise.
C-30
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
rpm = revolutions per minute of shaft
Dz = diameter of rolling element
dm = bearing pitch diameter (ball center-to-ball

center diameter across ring)
a = contact angle
Cosine = trigonometric function
Cosine: when contact angle = 0 degrees then

Cosine = 1
00c077
Figure C-77. Typical Infrared Spectrophotometer
for Identification of Lubricants and Preservatives Cosine: when contact angle = 10 degrees then
Cosine = .9848
C-133. Frequency of Bearing Defects. The fre- Cosine: when contact angle = 15 degrees then
quency of occurrence of a detected defect on a Cosine = .9659
bearing depends on its location on the various
components within the bearing. Different frequencies Cosine: when contact angle = 30 degrees then
can be expected from defects located on balls, inner Cosine = .866
ring, outer ring, and/or retainer. This is due to
differences in rotational speeds of the components. Cosine: when contact angle = 45 degrees then
The following equations can be used to determine Cosine = .707
approximate frequency of occurrence of a defect
when located on different bearing components: Cosine: when contact angle = 90 degrees then
Cosine = 0
f = 0.5 Z (rpm) (1-Dz Cos a) cycles/second
60 dm NOTE
or
See paragraphs B-53 and B-69 in Appen-
dix B for description and definition of
f = 0.5 Z (rpm) (1+Dz Cos a) cycles/second contact angle.
60 dm
or C-134. Noises Caused by Application. Improper
mounting practices is a primary cause of noise in
fball = (rpm) dm (1-Dz2 Cos2 a) cycles/second basically quiet bearings. Most noises of this type
60 dm are caused by distortion of the bearing rings with
corresponding changes in the ring and raceway
geometry. Some of the noises produced by ring
Where: distortion are as follows:
f = frequency of defect outer ring a. Medium-to-high pitched sound: The bearing

has one or more of the following problems:
or
(1) The rings are angularly displaced by a
f = frequency of defect on inner ring tilted or off-square housing or shaft mounting seat.
or (2) Poor shoulders on either the housing

or shaft.
fball = frequency of defect on balls
(3) Poor clamping arrangements or align-
Z = number of rolling elements ment.
C-31
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c078
Figure C-78. Infrared Spectrogram Showing Traces of Two Different Specification Greases
(4) The presence of foreign material on the f. Low rumbling noise: Bearing corner radius
faces of locating shoulders. may interfere with shaft and/or housing fillets. When
an interference is encountered, it will be reflected
NOTE in the raceway as a high spot, creating a low
rumbling noise in the bearing.
Defects of this type cause rolling elements g. Improperly sized or out-of-round housings
to be intermittently loaded on alternate will provide bearing mounting fits that will cause
sides of the raceway. bearings to generate noises. If the housing fit is
undersized, the added interference between rolling
b. High pitched whine: A bearing mounted with elements and raceways will overload the bearing,
an excessive interference fit will emit a high-pitched producing a high-pitched whine. An out-of-round
whine. This type of sound is particularly characteris- condition will generally produce a low rumbling noise
tic of an overloaded bearing. due to intermittent heavy loading of the rolling
elements.
c. Rattle: Bearings mounted with insufficient
shaft interference fits will often creep and vibrate h. External Noises. Bearings are an ideal
to such a degree that an internal bearing rattle is medium for the reflection of noise. This reflection
detected. can be from such sources as gears, magnetic
impulses, housing vibrations, fans, imbalance, etc.
Bearing noises from these sources will depend on
d. High frequency noise: An assembly with the original source of the noise.
improper spacing between opposing bearing shoul-
ders can cause bearing overload. This overload is C-135. Identification of Noises. The source of
amplified if the shafts are heat expanded. Being noise can be obtained by an analysis of the type
an overload condition, it would also create noise of noise encountered. A simple analysis is outlined
in the high frequency range. as follows:
e. Poor surface finish on shaft or housing a. Frequency. Frequency is important in the

bearing seats, particularly waviness, can be reflected analysis of noise. Low frequency noise generally
through the raceway if there is a heavy press fit, results from such items as waviness, out-of-round
or if the bearing sections are relatively thin. The and misalignment. High frequency noise generally
type of noise would depend on the frequency of is caused by poor surface finish or an overloaded
the waviness or similar reflected condition. bearing.
C-32
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
00c081
Figure C-81. Cracks in Side of Ball Bearing Retainer
00c079
from Operation with Inadequate Lubrication
Figure C-79. Silicone Lubricant Deteriorated to
Dryness by Operation in High Temperatures
00c082
Figure C-82. Cracks Between Ball Pockets
00c080 of Ball Retainer from Operation with
Figure C-80. Fatigue Spalling and Fracture of Inadequate Lubrication
Ball Bearing Ring from Loss of Lubrication
c. Rattle. Rattle-like noises are generally
caused by one or more loose bearing components.
b. Persistence. Persistence of the noise Looseness could be caused by free rolling elements
should be noted. Intermittent noise is generally a in an unloaded area of the bearing or loose fitting
result of dirt, nicked balls, grease, that will pass retainers. Occasionally the movement of grease is
in and out of the rolling element path. Sustained reflected in a rattle-like noise.
noise generally results from a permanent condition
within the bearing. The condition may be waviness d. Metallic Sound. A metallic rub generally
of the raceways, finish on the rolling elements and results from rubbing action of the retainer on the
raceways, excessive internal looseness or misalign- closure, contact of the closure with a rotating bearing
ment of the bearing. ring and occasionally a shield riding against a
C-33
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
rotating shaft. Certain greases, operating at high C-137. SEQUENTIAL STEPS IN NOISE ANALYSIS.
speeds, tend to create a noise that sounds similar
to a metallic rub. a. Carefully analyze the noise by listening at
a slight distance from the bearing or application.
(2) Muffled noises usually result from the
b. Evaluate the noise by means of direct
grease, retainer vibration, slight conditions of mis-
contact with the bearing. For example, listen through
alignment or reflection of vibration from external
a stethoscope with a pickup probe or a vibration
sources.
analyzer.
C-136. If the source of noise is in the rolling element c. Analyze the type of noise that is detected.
path, it will be amplified by the direct transmission
test. If the source of the noise is in supplemental (1) Sharp noises usually result from poor
members like the retainer or grease, the relative raceway finish, defects on the surfaces of rolling
magnitude of the noise will be decreased. elements or raceways, dirt in the bearing.
00c083
Figure C-83. Progressive Failure of Silicone Grease Due to Improper Selection as a Lubricant
C-34
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
APPENDIX D
BEARING REFURBISHMENT CANDIDATES
D-1. REFURBISHMENT HISTORY. detailed technical data and fabricating some special
fixturing.
D-2. Bearing refurbishment has been going on since
the late ’70s. In 1984, an interservice effort to establish D-4. TABLES. The following tables contain lists
DOD bearing repair capability officially began with the of bearings that, (a) have a repair process in place
formation of the Joint Bearing Repair Group. The and are coded repairable, (b) have a repair process
technical and logistical requirements for organic repair in place and are coded consumable, or (c) are good
were defined and the location of the repair centers repair candidates if demand justifies research into
for each service were identified. NADEP NORIS was repairability.
chosen as the Navy’s repair source, Oklahoma City
ALC for the Air Force, and Corpus Christi Army Depot D-5. Each table is peculiar to an engine (T58,
became the Army’s source. F404) or a helicopter (H46, H53). Most of the
bearings are identified by position, part number, and
D-3. NADEP NORIS REFURBISHMENT. Refurbish- National Stock Number. Columns four and five
ment at NADEP NORIS has focused on Propulsion contain repair code and capability (Y/N) respectively.
bearings (i.e., mainshaft, gearbox, etc.). However,
helicopter rotorhead, airframe, and avionics bearings D-6. POC’s. Questions regarding repair capability
have also been refurbished. In most cases, estab- for the Navy should be directed to NADEP NORIS
lishing refurbishment capability on a previously Bearing Engineering at AV735-7690/9661 or COM
consumable bearing is just a matter of obtaining the 619-545-7690/9661.
Table D-1. F404 Propulsion Bearings
Position Part Number NSN COG CAP

#1 6042T94P01 3110-01-172-3338 1R Y
#2 6027T71P01 3110-01-124-0846 1R N
#2 6027T95P01 3110-01-158-1700 1R N
#3 6025T32P01 3110-01-139-6816 1R Y
#5 6027T60P01 3110-01-131-8502 1R N
#5 6045T08P01 3110-01-158-1701 1R N
AGB 4033T49P01 3110-01-123-2166 1R N
AGB 4033T49P02 3110-01-123-2166 1R N
AGB 4054T13P03 3110-01-123-2168 1R N
AGB 4054T17P01 3110-01-130-2562 1R N
AGB 5030T72P03 3110-01-131-8500 1R N
AGB 5030T73P02 3110-01-131-8501 1R N
AGB 4054T30P01 3110-01-143-1799 1R N
AGB 4054T30P02 3110-01-143-1799 1R N
AGB 4050T12P03 3110-01-151-0766 1R N
AGB 4054T13P001 3110-01-158-1702 1R N
AGB 4050T12P01 3110-01-158-1703 1R N
AGB 5030T72P01 3110-01-158-1704 1R N
AGB 5030T73P01 3110-01-158-1705 1R N
PTO 5028T18P02 3110-01-151-0767 1R N
PTO 5013T15P01 3110-01-123-2167 1R Y
D-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table D-2. J52 Propulsion Bearings

#1 435286 3110-00-561-0987 7R Y
#1 542153 3110-00-561-0987 7R Y
#1 395431 3110-00-740-1112 7R Y
#1 740717 3110-00-740-1112 7R Y
#1 740718 3110-00-740-1112 7R Y
#1 740436 3110-01-059-2672 7R Y
#1 740735 3110-01-072-7433 7R Y
#2 378418 3110-00-740-1113 1R Y
#2 456313 3110-00-901-0777 7R Y
#2 481828 3110-00-901-0777 7R Y
#3 707717 3110-00-068-7855 7R Y
#3 578676 3110-00-068-7857 1R Y
#3 457875 3110-00-961-0969 9Z Y
#3 464982 3110-01-113-8288 9Z Y
#4 533071 3110-00-058-1477 7R Y
#4 432898 3110-00-738-1701 7R Y
#4 481831 3110-00-762-7422 7R Y
#4 441736 3110-00-915-7921 7R Y
#4 544446 3110-00-915-7921 7R Y
#4 1/2 493783 3110-00-913-6112 7R Y
#4 1/2 735014 3110-00-913-6112 7R Y
#4 1/2 771317 3110-00-913-6112 7R Y
#4 1/2 339843 3110-00-935-5652 9Z Y
#4 1/2 751166 3110-01-047-1089 7R Y
#5 624613 3110-00-125-5374 9Z Y
#5 624615 3110-00-125-5374 9Z Y
#5 462282 3110-00-948-6117 9Z Y
#6 361596 3110-00-740-1117 1R Y
#6 462608 3110-00-740-1117 1R Y
#6 740734 3110-00-740-1117 1R Y
#6 462666 3110-00-913-6114 7R Y
#6 462668 3110-00-913-6114 7R Y
#6 462667 3110-00-913-6115 7R Y
#6 740730 3110-01-062-3756 7R Y
#6 740729 3110-01-065-8377 7R Y
#6 740732 3110-01-072-7913 9Z Y
D-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table D-2. J52 Propulsion Bearings (Continued)

FAD 2178041 3110-01-078-6732 9 Y
FAD 739479 3110-01-078-6732 9Z
FAD 739480 3110-01-078-6732 9Z
MGB 519387 3110-00-842-7400 9Z Y
MGB 548235 3110-00-867-2484 9Z N
MGB 548256 3110-00-869-0649 9Z N
MGB 548231 3110-00-869-0650 9Z Y
MGB 548236 3110-00-871-7623 9Z Y
MGB 548259 3110-00-871-7623 9Z
MGB 2180300 3110-00-913-6111 9Z Y
MGB 518385 3110-00-913-6111 9Z Y
MGB 519386 3110-00-913-6111 9Z Y
MGB 519398 3110-00-914-3270 9Z N
MGB 740720 9110-01-058-5440 9Z N
MGB 740719 3110-01-060-4878 9Z N
Table D-3. T56 Propulsion Bearings

7925778 3110-00-068-5680 9Z N
Accessory Drive 23030561 3110-01-066-9221 9Z N
Aft Idler 544992 3110-00-269-4704 9Z N
Aft Idler 6825699 3110-00-269-4704 9Z N
Alt Shaft 6890541 3110-00-732-2819 9V N
Carrier, Front 462959 3110-00-182-8682 9Z N
Carrier, Front 6871650 3110-00-182-8682 9Z N
Carrier, Front 6873732 3110-00-182-8682 9Z N
Carrier, Rear 462960 3110-00-182-8689 9V N
Carrier, Rear 462996 3110-01-144-4937 9V Y
Carrier, Rear 6890542 3110-01-144-4937 9V Y
Carrier, Rear 6890543 3110-01-145-2147 9Z N
Case, Rear 6850345 3110-00-433-3459 9Z N
Case, Rear 6878485 3110-01-022-5982 9Z N
Compressor, Front 6873220 3110-00-399-0117 9V N
D-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table D-3. T56 Propulsion Bearings (Continued)

Compressor, Rear 6871643 3110-00-185-4085 9Z N
Fwd Idler 6825802 3110-00-078-5670 9Z N
Fwd Idler 6825830 3110-00-068-5670 9Z N
Fwd Turb 462808 3110-00-065-8164 9V N
Fwd Turb 6854949 3110-00-065-8164 9V Y
Fwd Turb 6849475 3110-00-065-8223 9V N
Hyd Pump 6844090 3110-00-717-6988 9Z Y
Hyd Pump 453861 3110-00-982-9022 9Z Y
Oil Pump 455990 3110-00-729-6500 9Z N
Oil Pump 6829374 3110-00-729-6500 9Z N
Oil Pump 6841476 3110-00-729-6500 9Z N
Pinion, Front 463072 3110-00-182-7992 1R N
Pinion, Front 6874529 3110-00-182-7992 1R N
Pinion, Front 463745 3110-00-184-9436 9V N
Pinion, Front 6876006 3110-00-184-9436 9V N
Pinion, Rear 6876007 3110-00-178-0183 1R Y
Pinion, Rear 463071 3110-00-182-7991 1R N
Pinion, Rear 6874528 3110-00-182-7991 1R N
Prop Brake 6890540 3110-01-117-8204 9Z Y
Prop Level 6821459 3110-00-803-5443 9Z N
Prop Shaft 458777 3110-00-078-5676 9Z Y
Prop Shaft 6829354 3110-00-078-5676 9Z Y
Prop Shaft 6845296 3110-00-078-5676 9Z Y
Prop Shaft 6849406 3110-00-182-8698 9V N
Prop Shaft 6717145 3110-00-198-2864 9Z N
Side Gear 6859078 3110-00-222-1191 9Z N
Side Gear 6859094 3110-00-494-8477 9V N
Torque Meter 6871201 3110-01-082-9577 9V N
Turbine, Rear 6850348 3110-00-193-1974 9V N
Turbine, Rear 6846266 3110-00-922-8758 9V N
Turbine, Rear 6850506 3110-00-938-1974 9V N
D-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

#1 37D400484P101 3110-00-732-0507 9Z N
#1 5040T01P01 3110-01-068-8266 9Z N
#2 37D400349P103 3110-00-593-2288 9Z Y
#2 5013T36P01 3110-00-593-2288 1R Y
#2 5103T36P101 3110-00-593-2288 1R Y
#2 637D400349P103 3110-00-593-2288 9Z Y
#2 737D400349P103 3110-00-593-2288 9Z Y
#2 37D400349P103 3110-00-904-6168 9Z Y
#2 5013T36P02 3110-01-255-7459 1R Y
#2 5040T92P01 3110-01-255-7459 1R Y
#3 5017T60P01 3110-00-107-1881 9Z Y
#3 5017T60P02 3110-00-107-1969 9Z Y
#3 5017T24P01 3110-00-536-5025 9Z Y
#4 5017T81P01/2 3110-00-356-5714 9Z Y
#4 5017T25P01 3110-00-526-0317 9Z Y
#4 5016T55P02 3110-00-571-9414 9Z Y
#4 5016T55P01 3110-00-571-9415 9Z Y
#5 5013T34P01 3110-00-345-5980 9Z Y
#5 5039T68P01 3110-01-034-1491 7R Y
#5 6051T68P02 3110-01-034-1491 7R Y
#5 5039T68P01 3110-01-250-6549 7R Y
#5 5039T68P02 3110-01-250-6549 7R Y

#0 37C302188P102 3110-00-870-5266 9Z Y
#1 5009T93P01 3110-00-935-5631 7R Y
#1 5040T31P01 3110-01-083-2373 7R Y
#2 37C302032P103 3110-00-269-2152 1R Y
#2 37C302032P105 3110-00-425-1837 1R Y
#2 37C302032P101 3110-00-914-6118 9Z Y
#3 5009T30P01 3110-00-870-5259 9Z Y
#3 4001T24P01 3110-00-914-3822 9Z N
#3 5009T30P02 3110-01-020-2048 1R Y
#4 37C302279P101 3110-00-914-6119 1R Y
#4 37C302279P103 3110-01-013-5647 1R Y
D-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table D-5. T64 Propulsion Bearings (Continued)

AGB 37B202168P103 3110-00-158-2313 1R Y
AGB 37B201507P103 3110-00-158-2324 1R N
AGB 37B202181P102 3110-00-870-5271 1R N
AGB 37B202180P102 3110-00-870-5277 1R N
AGB 37B202179P102 3110-00-870-5292 1R N
AGB 37B202177P102 3110-00-870-5332 1R N
AGB 37B202168P102 3110-00-870-5345 1R N
AGB 37B201507P102 3110-00-870-5352 1R N
AGB 37B202179P101 3110-00-914-3795 1R N
AGB 37B202180P101 3110-00-870-5277 1R N
AGB 37B202177P101 3110-00-921-0938 1R N
Fwd Diff 5009T15P01 3110-00-827-2432 1R Y
Fwd Diff 5009T15P03 3110-01-029-8624 1R Y
Rear Diff 5013T08P01 3110-00-234-8840 1R Y
Rear Diff 5013T08P02 3110-01-095-2607 1R Y
Table D-6. H-46 Rotorhead and Driveline Bearings

Drive Shaft A02DS272-1 3110-00-919-9963 1R Y
Planetary Gear 107D2254-11 3110-00-658-3233 1R Y
Planetary Gear 107D2254-5 3110-00-758-3233 1R Y
Rotor A02RS251-1 3110-00-829-9846 1R Y
Rotor A02RS253-2 3110-00-829-9847 1R Y
Rotor A02RS253-1 3110-00-829-9848 1R Y
Rotor A02RS252-1 3110-00-845-6745 1R Y
Rotor A02RS263-2 3110-00-915-1971 1R N
Rotor A02RS290-1 3110-01-201-9462 9Z Y
Swashplate 107R3514-1 3110-00-013-1738 7R Y
Trans A15DS261-1 3110-00-468-0665 9Z N
Trans 107R2581-1 3110-00-725-1530 1R N
Trans 107D2272-1 3110-00-764-2973 9Z N
Trans A02DS285-1 3110-00-916-8070 9Z N
Trans A02D1283-5 3110-00-916-8072 9Z N
Trans A02DS273-5 3110-00-916-8072 9Z N
Trans A02DS271-1 3110-00-916-9215 1R N
D-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
Table D-6. H-46 Rotorhead and Driveline Bearings (Continued)

Trans A02DS270-1 3110-00-919-5040 7R N
Trans A02DS290-1 3110-00-926-4595 9Z N
Trans A02DS234-2 3110-01-196-9601 9Z N
Trans A02DS282-1 3110-00-916-8069 1R N
Table D-7. H-53 Rotorhead and Driveline Bearings

65952-11552-105 3110-00-082-8234 9Z N
65952-11413-102 3110-00-426-7933 9Z N
65952-11409-102 3110-00-426-7936 9Z N
65952-11414-102 3110-00-426-7942 9Z N
65952-11414-101 3110-00-460-5247 9Z N
65952-11413-101 3110-00-492-8696 9Z N
65952-11552-102 3110-00-923-7291 9Z N
65951-11359-102 3110-00-939-0395 9Z N
65952-11409-101 3110-00-939-8799 9Z N
65952-11522-102 3110-00-943-5165 9Z Y
65951-11559-101 3110-00-945-0468 9Z N
65952-07526-102 3110-01-135-1244 1R N
65952-07525-104 3110-01-135-1245 7R N
SB2157-106 3110-01-135-8692 1R N
SB2159-103 3110-01-142-8695 9Z N
65951-11526-102 3110-01-146-8173 1R Y
SB2157-105 3110-01-154-8417 1R N
MGB 65952-11417-042 3110-01-125-6882 1R N
D-7/(D-8 blank)
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Paragraph, Paragraph,
Figure, Table Figure, Table
Subject Number Subject Number
A A (Cont)
ABEL Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 Arc Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26t(2), C-94, Fig. 7-23,
Accumulation Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Fig. C-52, Fig. C-69
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27b, A-4 Assembled Bearing Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-5
Active Surfaces: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26, Fig. 7-7, Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67, 8-68, Fig. 8-17
Tbl 7-2 thru Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Tbl 7-3 Austenite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28, B-29
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Average Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
Retainers, Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Axial Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-1 Axial Load (Thrust) . . . . . . . B-48b, B-49b, Fig. B-9c
Adhesive Bonded Bearings Axial Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78 thru B-81
(See Bonded Bearings)
AFBMA and ANSI Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 2-1 B
AFBMA Method for Radial Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Air Column Instrument Maintenance . . . . . . . 14-137 Bags, Metal Foil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-215 Heat Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Air Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35, 15-38 Manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Air Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45, 8-45 Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205
Aircraft Control Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, B-155, Balancing Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22, 14-216
Tbl B-29 thru Tbl B-33 Ball Bearings (See Particular . . . . . 2-8 though 2-32,
Aircraft-Type Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Type of Ball Bearing) Fig. 2-1 thru
Airframe and Aircraft Control Bearings . . . . . B-155, Fig. 2-21, Fig. A-3, Fig. A-4,
Tbl B-29 Fig. A-6 thru Fig. A-11,
thru Tbl B-33 Fig. A-16, Fig. A-21, Fig. A-25
Airframe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91, 2-94, B-155, thru Fig. A-28, Fig. A-31
Tbl B-29 thru thru Fig. A-33, Fig. A-40,
Tbl B-33 Fig. A-47, Fig. A-49, Fig. A-51,
AISI 440C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11 Fig. A-52, Fig. A-56, Fig. A-57,
AISI 50 Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-21, B-28 Fig. A-61, Fig. A-63, Tbl 2-1
AISI 52100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-10, B-13 Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-8
Aligning Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-2 Gaging of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97, 14-130
Aligning Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-3 Gaging Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156
Angular-Contact Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-26, Internal Clearances of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-155,
2-31, 14-27, B-69, Tbl B-39, Tbl B-40
C-88, Fig. 2-11, Manufacturing Methods for . . . 2-81, 2-82, B-35
Fig. 2-14, Fig. 2-20, Master Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fig. A-4, Fig. A-36, Recommended Shaft and Housing Fits . . B-185
Fig. C-62, Fig. C-63 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73, 8-74, Fig. 8-20 Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-3
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-225 Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
Angular Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48c, B-49c, Fig. B-9c Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-137, B-37, B-155,
Annular Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Tbl B-34 thru
(See Deep Grove Bearings) Tbl B-38
Antifriction Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31 Visual Examination of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Application Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93, B-76 Ball Path Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, 7-21, C-1, C-8,
Arbor Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10, 14-59, Fig. 3-1 C-9, C-10, C-11, Fig. 7-8,
thru Fig. 3-3 Fig. C-2 thru Fig. C-7
Installation, Used for . . . . . . . 12-46, Fig. 12-15 Ball Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
Removal, Used for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8-29
Index-1
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (Cont)

B (Cont) B (Cont)
Banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, Fig. 7-10 Bearing, Visual Inspection of (Cont)
Barrier Film Coating . . . . . . . . . . 14-199 thru 14-204, Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Fig. 14-29, Fig.14-30 Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, Fig. 7-3
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47 Oversize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138
Baskets, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, Fig. 5-1 Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, Fig. 7-6
Bearing, Authorized Rework Centers . . . . . . . . 6-55 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10, Fig. 7-2
Bearing Condition Due to the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-119 Radius Scribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Effects of Lubrication Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Bearing Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-130 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9, Fig. 7-3 thru Fig. 7-11
Bearing Damage Due to . . . Fig. C-19 thru Fig.C-23 Undersize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138
Improper Removal Practices Blistering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26b, Fig. 7-11
Bearing Failures Analysis . . . . . . . . . C-1 thru C-137, Blocks, Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Fig. C-1 thru Fig. C-83, Bonded Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 3-29, 6-56, 12-94 thru
Tbl C-1 12-103, Fig. 12-40, Tbl 12-5
Bearing Failures Caused . . . . . . . . . . . . C-50, C-52, Adhesive Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99
by Contamination Fig. C-25, Bearing Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-94
Fig. C-26 Cleaning Surfaces for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98
Bearing Failures Caused . . . . . . . . C-61, Fig. C-33, Grinding of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
by Corrosion Fig. C-34 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-101
Bearing Failures Caused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-94, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99
by Electrical Arcing Fig. 7-23 Limitations on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-113
Bearing Failures Caused . . . . . . . . . C-18, Fig. 7-13, Preparation for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
by Installation Problems Fig. C-12, Proof Test of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102
Fig. C-13 Removal of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Bearing Failures Caused . . . . . . . . C-100, Fig. C-70 Retention by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-94, Fig. 12-40
by Manufacturing Defects Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Bearing Failures Due to Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-75 Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Bearing Failures Due to Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . C-66 Boundary Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-91
Bearing Failures Due to Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45 Brass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Bearing Life, Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38 Bright Dipping Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Bearing Life, Formulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45 Brinelling, False . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25c(1), Fig. 7-12
Bearing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37, B-48 Brinelling, True . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25c(2), Fig. 7-13
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48c, B-49c, Fig. B-9c Bronze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Axial (Thrust) . . . . . . . . B-48b, B-49b, Fig. B-9b Buffing Bearing Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50 Airframe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48a, B-49a, Fig. B-9a Balls/Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49 Closures (Seals and Shields) . . . . . . . 6-51, 6-52
Bearing Puller (See Tooling) Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Bearing, Visual Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Facilities for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Ball or Roller Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 thru 7-24, Helicopter Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Fig. 7-7 thru Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Fig. 7-10 Powerplant Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Certification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Definitions, Surface Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Speed Selection . . . . . . . . 6-23, Tbl 6-1, Tbl 6-2
Descriptions, Surface Defects . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, Surface Stains . . . . . . . . . 7-25ac, 7-34, Fig. 6-4
Fig. 7-12 thru Tapered Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Fig. 7-38
Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Index-2
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

B (Cont) C (Cont)
Buffing Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Clean Room (Cont)
Removal of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 Garment Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
Burnishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25d Horizontal Laminar Flow (Air) . . . . . . . . . . . B-211
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-217
C Humidity Control . . . . . . 7-5b, 11-6, 11-8, 15-33
Intermediate Inspection Room . . . . . . . . . B-230,
Cadmium Plating . . . . . . . . . 6-34, 6-38, 7-34, B-142 Fig. B-57
Calibration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13, 8-14 Inspection and Gaging Room . . . . . . . . . . B-235,
Cam Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36d, Fig. 2-30 Fig. B-58
Capacity (See Load Capacity) Inspection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, B-235,
Carbon Removers . . . . . . . . 5-26d, 5-39, 5-44, 5-53 Fig. B-58
Case-Hardened Steel . . . . . . . . B-23, B-24, Tbl B-5 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-71
Cementing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-204, Fig. B-53 Janitorial Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-60
Ceramic Coated Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Laundry Procedures for Clothing . . . . . . . . 15-57
Certification of Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Layout and Equipment . . . . . . B-223, Fig. B-55,
Buffing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Fig. B-56
Dimensional Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-214
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Lubrication Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-238
Chatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25e Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
Chromium Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47, 15-62
Circumferential Variations in the Roller Path . . C-14 Packaging Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-238
Classification of Bearings: Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
AQL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 4-2 Preservation, Lubrication and . . . . . . . . . . B-238
By Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Packaging Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-238
By Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50, 6-26 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-222
Instrument Type Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14 Solvents, Lubricants and Preservatives . . 10-4,
Classification of Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . C-80, Fig. C-8, 15-47
Fig. C-9, Fig. 30, Specifications for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Fig. C-49, Fig. C-50, Tank Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-228
Fig. C-52 Fig. C-53, Fig. C-54 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5b, 15-32
Clean Packaging Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Vacuum Cleaning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-218
Cleanliness Levels . . . . . . . . . Tbl 11-2, Tbl 11-3 Vapor Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-234
LOX Compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23 Visual Particle Count Procedure . . . . . . . . 15-40
Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 10-5, 11-4, 14-9, 15-1 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-225
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-215 Work Areas in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Air Filtration . . . 11-6, 15-4, 15-35, 15-38, 15-71 Work Benches and Chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-219
Air Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34 Cleaning and Protection of Removed Bearings 3-40
Airborne Particle Counter . . 15-40, 15-43, 18-5 Held for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Cleaning Area . . . . . . . 5-5, 15-67, 15-69, B-226 Scheduled for Immediate Processing . . . . . 3-42
Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21, 15-54 Scheduled for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-208 Water-Crash/Fire-Damaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Conventional Flow (Air) . . . . . . . . . . B-54, B-210 Components
Demagnitizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-227 Cleaning Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-226
Design and Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-208 Cleaning Around Installed Bearings . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Dust Control in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6, 15-68 Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49, 5-50, 5-51,
Environment Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30, B-232 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, Tbl 5-1
Equipment . . . . . . . . B-223, Fig. B-55, Fig. B-56 Cleaning of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-24, 14-87
FED-STD-209 . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22, 15-31, 15-35 After Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Final Cleaning Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-233 After Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Index-3
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

C (Cont) C (Cont)
Cleaning of Bearings (Cont) Clearances, Internal-Bearing (Cont)
Aqueons Based . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 5-7, Fig. 5-9 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55, 8-57, 8-61
Control of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47, 5-49, 5-50, 5-51, Fig. 8-14, Fig. 8-15
5-52, 5-53, 5-54, Tbl 5-1 Measurement of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64, 14-137
Deviations From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Significance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Equipment . . . . . . . 5-11, 5-13, 5-14, 14-79, 18-1 Closures (See Seals and Shields)
Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Clothing, Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-53
Hazardous Waste Reduction Program . . . . . 5-8 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47, 14-75, 18-1, Tbl 5-1 Laundry of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54
Prior to Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Rental of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
Prior to Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Coating, Plastic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Procedures for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22, 5-24 Coding of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Processes . . . . . . . 5-33, 13-45, 14-87, Fig. 5-10 Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Safety and Good Housekeeping . . . . . 5-6, 5-58 Process Coding (Activity) . . . . . . . . . 6-59, 6-62,
Soak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25, 5-54 6-65, 6-66,
Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 5-49 6-67, 6-68
Fig. 5-6, Fig. 5-8 Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Vapor Degreasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Coefficient of Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59
Cleaning of Installed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45 Combined Radial and Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . C-92,
Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24, 5-36 Fig. C-67,
Barrier Film Coated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Fig. C-68
Buffing Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 Component Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-150
Carbon . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39, 5-44, 5-53, Fig. 5-10 Composite Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63, Fig. 2-62
Ceramic Coated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44 Concave Rollers . . . . . . . . 2-47, Fig. 2-42, Fig. 2-44
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 thru 5-55, Tbl 5-1 Concentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Fiber-lined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 Conrad Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, Fig. 2-3
Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Construction Requirements, Clean Room . . . B-208
Fingerprint Neutralizing, Deplating . . . Fig. 5-11 Consumable Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 17-3
Heavy Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Consumable Electrode Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Hot Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 thru 2-32, B-53,
Light Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Fig. 2-11 thru Fig. 2-19
Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Formula for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Oil-impregnated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Contact Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Oxygen System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Containers:
Preservative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Accumulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Intermediate Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Soak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Special Materials Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 3-44, 11-37, 11-38
Vapor Degreasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28, Fig. 5-4 Unit Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Vibro-Tumbling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 thru 5-32 Contamination:
Cleaning Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14, B-228 Failure, Because of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-30
Clearances, Internal-Bearing . . . . . 8-54, 8-61, 8-65, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-58
14-137 Personnel, Because of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 15-1
Axial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56, 8-57, 8-67, 8-68, Sizes of Particulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 15-1
Fig. 8-14, Fig. 8-17 Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-52, Fig. C-25, Fig. C-27
Index-4
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

C (Cont) D
Contamination Levels for Clean Rooms . . . Tbl 15-2 Deep Groove Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 2-24
Control Bearings; Aircraft: Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Description of . . . . . . . 2-50, Figs. 2-51 thru 2-55 Arcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t(2), Fig 7-23
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26, 7-34, 13-26 Axial Smearing (Scoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25aa
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Banding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25a, Fig. 7-10
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18, 6-19 Blistering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25b, Fig. 7-11
Controls: Burnishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25d
Air in Clean Rooms . . . . 7-5, 11-6, 15-30, 15-38 Chatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25e
Chemicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 Circumferential Bands . . . . . . . . 7-25a, Fig. 7-10
Cleaning Process . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-47 thru 5-54 Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t(1)
Cleaning Solutions . . . . . . . 1-42, 5-47 thru 5-54 Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25f, 7-28
Cleaning Workload . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 thru 5-61 False Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25c(1)
Clean Room Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ab, Fig. 7-30
Clean Room Maintenance Work . . . . . . . . 15-49 Finishing Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25h, Fig. 7-14
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37 Flaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25g
Dust Particle Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38 Fluting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25i, Fig. 7-15
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60, 15-30, 15-63 Fracture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25j
Humidity in Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33 Fretting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25k, Fig. 7-16
Lubricants and Preservatives . . . . 10-82, 15-45 Fretting Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25k
Packaging Materials . . . . . . . . Tbl 11-2, Tbl 11-3 Frosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25l, Fig. 7-17
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 15-52, 16-1 Galling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25m, Fig. 7-18
Preservation and Packaging Room . . . . . . . 11-4 Healing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25n, Fig. 7-19
Rework Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Heat Discoloration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25o, Tbl 7-1
Solvents, Lubricants, and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45 Inclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25p, Fig. 7-20
Preservatives in Clean Rooms Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25q, Fig. 7-21
Temperature in Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32 Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25r, Fig. 7-22
Conventional Flow (Clean Room Air) . . . . . . . B-210, Peeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25s, 9-80d, Fig. 7-11
Fig. B-54 Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t, Fig. 7-23
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-239, Tbl B-49, Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Tbl B-50, Tbl B-51 Scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25v
Convex Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25u, Fig. 7-24
Corner Radius, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119 Scuffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25w
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t(1), C-60 Seams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25x, Fig. 7-25
Evaluation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t(1), C-61 Seizure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25y, Fig. 7-26
Failure Due to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-61 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25z, Fig. 7-27
Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-64, Fig. C-37, Fig. C-38, Smearing . . . . . . . . . 7-25aa, Fig. 7-28, Fig. 7-29
Fig. C-39, Fig. C-40 Spalling . . . . . . . 7-25ab, Fig. 7-30 thru Fig. 7-33
Protection Against . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11, 13-17 Staining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ac
Removal of . . . . . . . 6-22, 6-28, 6-34, 6-35, 6-36 True Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25c(2), Fig. 7-13
Corrosion Galvanic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 5-10 Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ad, Fig. 7-45, Fig. 7-35
Cosine Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Defects, Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36, 14-105
Counterbore Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36a
Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25f, Fig. 7-20 Major . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36b
Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205 Minor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36c
Cup, Bearing (Outer Ring) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 3-30, Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
12-92, Fig. 2-24 Deflecting Mounting Surfaces . . . . . C-34, Fig. C-16
Index-5
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

D (Cont) D (Cont)
Deformation of Active Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25q Dimensional Inspection (Cont)
Deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60, B-63 Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . 8-15 thru 8-21, Fig. 8-1,
Demagnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19, 6-10, Tbl 8-1, Tbl 8-2
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 5-19, 18-1, Gaging Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35, Tbl 8-5
B-227, Tbl 18-2 Gaging Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29, 8-32
Depot Level Maintenance Activities . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Gaging Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Depreservation of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Gaging Techniques, Limitations of . . . . . . . 8-28
Deterioration of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-123 Gas Turbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45 thru 8-47
Dimensional Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-136 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Dimensional Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Handling, Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Air and Oil Films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Inner Diameter (Bore) Procedures . 8-40, 8-41,
Air Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45, Fig. 8-12, Tbl 8-6 8-44, 8-114 thru 8-118
Assembled Bearing . . . . . . . . . 8-104 thru 8-112, Fig. 8-11a, Fig. 8-11e,
Fig. 8-11 c, Fig. 8-11 d, Fig. 8-13e, Fig. 8-40
Fig. 8-14c, Fig. 8-14d, Laser Inferometric Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
Fig. 8-42, Fig. 8-43, Fig. 8-44 Linear Profile . . . . . . . . 8-82 thru 8-84, Fig. 8-26
Axial Clearance . . . . 8-56, 8-67, 8-68, Fig. 8-17 Matched Ball Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4
Ball Groove Runout . . . . . . . . 8-108 thru 8-113, Matched Roller Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4
Fig. 8-11d, Fig. 8-13d, Master Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fig. 8-39 Measurement Error . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 thru 8-28,
Bench Center Measurement . . . 8-28c, Fig. 8-5c Fig. 8-3 thru 8-10
Bore (Inner Diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40, 8-114 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . 8-32, 14-148
Procedures thru 8-118, Fig. 8-11a, Outer Diameter Procedures . . . . . . . 8-48, 8-50,
Fig. 8-40, Fig. 8-41 Fig. 8-13a
Build-up Instructions, Gage Block . . . . . . . . 8-16 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Calibration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 thru 8-9
Circular (Polar) Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78 Radial Clearance . . . . 8-61 thru 8-66, Fig. 8-15,
Classifying Procedures . . . . . . . . . 8-97, Tbl 8-5 Fig. 8-16, Tbl B-30
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 thru 8-68 thru Tbl 40
Comparators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8-34 Radial Runout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104 thru 8-107,
Concentricity (See Roundness) Fig. 8-11c, Fig. 8-13c,
Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . 8-73, B-89, Fig. 8-20 Fig. 8-37, Fig. 8-38
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Rotating Overhead Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77b
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27, 8-86, 8-87 Rotating Tbl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87a, Fig. 8-25
Deformation . . . . . . . . . 8-28f, Fig. 8-9, Fig. 8-10 Roundness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74 thru 8-80,
Displacement Transducer . . . . . . . . . 8-92, 8-93, Fig. 8-25 thru Fig. 8-31
Fig. 8-31, Fig. 8-28, Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5, B-30
Fig. 8-32 Stylus Size/Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28d, Fig. 8-7
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28e, Fig. 8-8 Surface Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85 thru 8-96,
Eccentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76, Fig. 8-22 Fig. 8-27 thru Fig. 8-32
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4, 8-36 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Equipment . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-23, 8-43, 8-50, 8-52, Temperature . . . . . . 8-24, 8-36, Fig. 8-3, Tbl B-6
8-99, 8-113, Fig. 8-4, Fig. 8-12, Testing . . 8-122 thru 8-130, Fig. 8-44, Fig. 8-45
Fig. 8-33, Fig. 8-34, Tbl 8-3 Torque . . 8-125 thru 8-129, Fig. 8-44, Fig. 8-45
Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 6-3, 7-3, 8-4, 9-3, Two Point Measurement . . . . . . 8-28a, Fig. 8-5a
10-5, 11-4, 12-10, 14-9 Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Flatness . . . . . 8-120, 8-121, Fig. 8-42, Fig. 8-43 V-block Measurement . . . . . . . 8-28b, Fig. 8-5b,
Flushness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69 thru 8-72, 8-83 Fig. 8-6
Fig. 8-18, Fig. 8-19 Velocity Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
Index-6
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

D (Cont) E (Cont)
Dimensional Inspection (Cont) Engineering Data (Cont)
Vibration and Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130 Angular-Contact Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51, 8-52, 8-100, 8-101 Angular Load . . . . . . . . . B-48c, B-49c, Fig. B-9c
Fig. 8-11b, Fig. 8-13b, Fig. 8-25, Antifriction Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Fig. 8-35, Fig. 8-36 Application Design . . . . . . . . . . . B-76, Fig. B-24
Wringing, Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . 8-18, Fig. 8-2 thru Fig. B-27
Dimensional Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5, B-30 Austenite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28, B-29
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83, Fig. 2-72 Average Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
Discoloration of Races . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ac Axial Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Displaced Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Axial Load (Thrust) . . . B-48b, B-49b, Fig. B-9b
Disposition of: Axial Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Questionable Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-109 Balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205
Removed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 Ball Bearing Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61
Surveyed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 Ball Bearing Tolerances . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18
Distillation of Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 thru Tbl B-22
Distribution of Bearings (See Procurement) Bearing Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37, Fig. B-5
Double Row Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 2-26, 2-28 Bearing Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-130
Drag (see Torque) Bearing Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38 thru B-47,
Driveline Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl D-6, Tbl D-7 Fig. B-6 thru Fig. B-8
Dry Film Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62, B-113 Bearing Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37, B-48
Application of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Bearing Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Protection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Bearing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-11, B-12,
Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . 2-24, Fig. 2-13, Fig. 2-14 B-18, B-23, Fig. B-1
Gaging of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73 thru Fig. B-3 Tbl B-2
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 thru Tbl B-4
Installation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 12-41, 12-58 Boundary Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-91
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24 Brass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Preload Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58f Bronze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Rematching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57 Cadmium Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142
Spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58a, Fig. 12-22 Case-Hardened Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23, B-24,
Torque Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127, 8-128 B-25, Tbl B-5
Dynamic Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8, B-52 Cementing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-204, Fig. B-55
Chromium Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142
E Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-214 thru B-238,
Fig. B-59, Fig. B-60
Eccentricity of Rings . . . . . . . 8-76, 12-82, Fig. 8-22 Clean Room Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-208
Effect of Lubricant on False . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-74, Clean Room Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-208
Brinelling Fig. C-44 Cleaning Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-226
Electrical Arcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t(2), Fig. 7-23 Coefficient of Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59
Elliptical Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39, 7-23 Component Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-150
Emergency Rework Procedures . . . . . 6-51, 14-100 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6, Fig. B-1,
Engine Bearings (Powerplant) . . . . 6-27, 7-26, 7-33 Tbl B-1
Engineering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Consumable Electrode Process . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-215 Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
Airframe and Aircraft Control Bearings . B-155, Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-232
Tbl B-29 thru Convention Flow (Clean Room Air) . . . . . B-210,
Tbl B-33 Fig. B-56
AISI 50 Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-21, B-28 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-239
AISI 52100 Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Corrosion Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . B-11, Tbl B-3
Index-7
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

E (Cont) E (Cont)
Engineering Data (Cont) Engineering Data (Cont)
Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205 Induction Melt Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Cylindrical Roller Bearing Tolerances . . . B-155, Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37i
Tbl B-18 thru Inspection and Gaging Room . B-235, Fig. B-60
Tbl B-22 Instrument Ball Bearing Tolerances . . . . B-155,
Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60, B-63 Tbl B-23 thru
Demagnetizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-227 Tbl B-28
Dimensional Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-136 Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191, B-241
Dimensional Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5, B-30 Interference Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-134, B-136
Dry Film Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113 Intermediate Inspection Room . . . . . . . . . B-230,
Dynamic Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8, B-52 Fig. B-59
Environment Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-232 Intermediate Load Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . B-174
Established Bearing Tolerances . . . . . . . . B-150 Internal Clearance . . . . . . . . B-53, B-134, B-135
Fatigue Life of Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 Internal Clearances of Ball . . . B-155, Tbl B-39
Federal Standard FED-STD-209 . . . . . . . . B-213 and Roller Bearings thru Tbl B-40
(Clean Room Areas) Internal Radial Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-135
Final Cleaning Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-233 Iron-Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37b Lapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37h
Forces and Motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54 Layout and Equipment . . . . . . B-223, Fig. B-57,
Formulation of Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102 Fig. B-58
Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55, B-56, B-57, B-58, Light Alloy Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Fig. B-13, Fig. B-14, Tbl B-7 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-214
Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37j Load Carrying Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . B-38, B-48
Gaging Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156 thru B-53, Fig. B-6,
Gaging Practices for Ball Bearings . . . . . . B-156 Fig. B-9 thru Fig. B-14,
Gaging Practices for Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156 Load Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-169
Roller Bearings Load Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-64
Gaging Practices for Roller Bearings . . . . B-156 Load Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50a, B-50b
Gas Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95 Load Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49
Grease, Advantanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97 Loose Needle Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-165
Grease Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101 Lubricant Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-112
Group A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31 Lubricant Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58
Group B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31 Lubricant, Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
Group B, Recommended Housing . . . . . . . B-185 Lubricant, Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88
and Shaft Fits (Airframe) for Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-84 thru B-121,
Ball Bearing Applications B-238, Fig. B-28 thru
Group C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31 Fig. B-33, Tbl B-8
Group D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31 thru Tbl B-16
Hardness . . . . . . . . . . B-5, B-7, Fig. B-4, Tbl B-5 Machining Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-131
Heat Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Manufacturing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
Heat Treatment of Bearing Steel . . . B-27, B-37f Martensite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28, B-29
High Temperature Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18 Material and Hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
Housing and Shaft Fits, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-188 Material Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40
Recommended, for Thrust Bearings Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-25, B-26
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-217 Mechanism of Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
Hydrodynamic Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89 Median Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
Hydrostatic Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93 Metal Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-141, B-146
Imbalance and Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . B-205
Index-8
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

E (Cont) E (Cont)
Engineering Data (Cont) Engineering Data (Cont)
Military Specifications, Lubricants . . . . . . B-100, Roller Bearing Tolerances . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18
B-120, Tbl B-10 thru Tbl B-22
thru Tbl B-13 Roller or Spinning of Housing Material . . B-201,
Miniature Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191 Fig. B-48
Mount Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-126, 8128, B-131 Rolling Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191 Rolling Friction . . . . . . B-56, Fig. B-13, Fig. B-14
Mounting Methods for Instrument . . . . . . . B-191 Rotating Inner Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-170
and Miniature Ball Bearings Rotating Outer Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-172
Multiple Groove Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37d Rough Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37c
National American Standard Institute . . . . B-182 S-Monel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Specifications for Mounting Ball Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96
and Roller Bearings Selecting Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-241
Needle Roller Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156 Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-222
Nickel Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Shaft and Housing Fits . . . . . . B-122 thru B-241,
Normal and Theoretical Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . B-180 Fig. B-34 thru Fig. B-60,
Normal Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-175 Tbl B-18 thru Tbl B-60
Oil Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105 Shaft and Housing Fits, Selection . . . . . . . B-166
Oils, Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98 Side Clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-197, Fig. B-44
Oversize Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138 Silicone Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
Oversize Housing Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-146 Silver Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-238 Sliding Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-57
Permanent Deformation . . . . . . . . . B-50a, B-51 Snap Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-199, Fig. B-46
Petroleum Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106 Solid Film Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
Phenolic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26 Special Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-129
Preadjusted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83 Special Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Precision Brush Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Specification, Changing Lubricant . . . . . . . . B-99
Precision Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37g Squeeze-Film Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
Preloaded Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83 Staking . . . . . . . . . . . B-203, Fig. B-53, Fig. B-54
Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78 Standard Bearing Steels . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-20,
Preloading, Spring Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-82 B-21, B-28
Preservation, Lubrication and . . . . . . . . . . B-238 Standard Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-125
Packaging Room Static Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50
Pressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37a Stationary Inner Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171
Properties of Bearing Grease . . . . . . . . . . . B-104 Stationary Outer Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . B-173
Properties of Lubricating Oils . . . . . . . . . . . B-111 Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-60, Fig. B-15
Radial Ball Bearing Tolerances . . . . . . . . B-155, thru B-17
Tbl B-18 thru Superalloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
Tbl B-22 Synthetic Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107
Radial Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-68 Tank Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-228
Radial Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52 Tank Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-149
Radial Loads . . . . . . . . B-48a, B-49a, Fig. B-9a Thermal Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33, Tbl B-6
Rating Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42 Tolerance of Loose Balls . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-34
Recommended Shaft and Housing . . . . . . B-190 and Rollers thru Tbl B-38
Fits for Standard Inch Dimension Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-150
Tapered Roller Bearings Tool Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-28, B-21
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138, B-140, B-146 Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Retainer Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25 Tumbling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37e
Roller Bearing Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62 Undersize Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138
Index-9
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

E (Cont) E (Cont)
Engineering Data (Cont) Equipment, Description of (Cont)
Undersize Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-140 Surface Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90, Fig. 8-30
Wear Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 Surface Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-225 Taper, Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93, Fig. 8-28
Work Benches and Chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-219 Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52, Fig. 8-41
Vacuum Cleaning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-218 Error, Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28, Fig. 8-5
Vacuum Melted Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Established Bearing Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . B-150
Vapor Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-234 Expansion Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59, Tbl B-7
Engineering Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 External Pressurized Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Bearing Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 External Self-Aligning Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Materials Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Environmental Controls . . . . . . . 5-60, 15-30, B-232 F
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1, Tbl 18-1 thru Tbl 17-4
Air Column Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-137 Fabric-Lined Bearings . . . 2-60, Fig. 2-60, Fig. 2-61
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
Bearing Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58 Precaution Concerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Calibration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Facilities:
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 14-73 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Demagnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16, 14-69 Approved Materials . . . . . 15-17, 15-62, Tbl 18-4
Description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5, 15-16, 15-17,
Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 14-149, 18-1 16-49, Fig. 15-3
Induction and Prescreening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4, 15-66
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69 thru 12-73 Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21 thru 15-31,
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13, 10-48, 10-53, 15-53 thru 15-59 Fig. 15-1
13-65, Fig. 10-8 thru Fig. 15-11
Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Marking (packaging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41 Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3, 15-35, 15-37,
Preservation . . . . . . 10-68, Fig. 10-13, Fig. 11-1 Fig. 15-1, Fig. 15-2,
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Tbl 15-1, Tbl 15-2
Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32 thru 15-59
Torque Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-138 Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
Vacuum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17 Gaging, Tooling and Materials . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
Equipment, Description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
Air Gages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25, 8-45, Fig. 8-12 Hygiene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Axial Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68, Fig. 8-17 Inspection and Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 8-4
Ball Groove Runout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113 Instrument Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Ball/Roller Classifying . . . . . . . . . 8-99, Fig. 8-33 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Concentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80, Fig. 8-21a Janitorial Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-60
Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80, Fig. 8-20 Lubrication and Preservation . . . . . 10-4, 15-45,
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121, Fig. 8-43 15-47, Fig. 15-5
Flushness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72, Fig. 8-19 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50, 15-52
Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15, Fig. 8-1 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3, 15-41
Inner Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8-18 Particle Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40, 15-43
Linear Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85, Fig. 8-26 Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Noise/Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Optical Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121, Fig. 8-43 Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-55
Outer Diameter . . . . . . . . 8-50, 8-118, Fig. 8-13 Solvents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
Radial/Axial Play Spherical Bearing . . . . . . 8-12 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
Radial Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65, Fig. 8-14
Index-10
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

F (Cont) F (Cont)
Failure Analysis: Failure Analysis: (Cont)
Angular-Contact Bearings . . . . C-88, Fig. C-62, Flanged Roller Bearings . . . . . . C-91, Fig. C-66
Fig. C-63 Fluid Contamination . . . . . . . . . . C-59. Fig. C-60
Ball/Roller Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5, C-6, C-12, Fluting . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-97, Fig. 7-22, Fig. C-69
Fig. B-18 Frequency of Bearing Defects . . . . . . . . . . C-133
Bearing Condition Due to the . . . . . . . . . . . C-119 Fretting . . . . . . . . . . . C-71, Fig. C-43, Fig. C-44
Effects of Lubrication Fretting Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25k, Fig. 7-16
Bearing Damage Due to Improper . . . . . . . C-40, Geometric Stress . . . . . . . . . . . C-80b, Fig. C-8,
Removal Practices Fig. C-19, Fig. C-20, Concentration Fig. C-47, Fig. C-48
Fig. C-21, Fig. C-22, Granulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-98
Fig. C-23 Grinding Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-105, Fig. C-75
Bearing Failure Caused . . . . . . . . . . C-50, C-52, Identification of Fatigue . . . . . . C-78, Fig. C-47,
by Contamination Fig. C-25, Fig. C-26 Fig. C-48
Bearing Failure Caused . . . . . . . . . C-61, Fig. 31 Identification of Noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-135
by Corrosion Fig. C-32 Improper Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-106
Bearing Failure Caused . . . . . . . C-94, Fig. 7-23 Improper Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . C-124
by Electrical Arcing Improper Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Bearing Failure Caused . . . . . . . C-18, Fig. 7-13, Improperly Designed Housing . . . . . . . . . . . C-38
by Installation Problems Fig. C-12, Fig. C-13 Assemblies
Bearing Failure Caused . . . . . . C-100, Fig. C-70 Inclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-104, Fig. C-72,
by Manufacturing Defects Fig. C-73, Fig. C-74
Bearing Failure Due to Loading . . . . . . . . . . C-75 Infrared Analysis of Lubricants . . . . . . . . . C-110,
Bearing Failure Due to Vibration . . . . . . . . . C-66 Fig. C-77,
Bearing Failure Due to Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . C-45 Fig. C-78,
Circumferential Variations in . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14 Tbl C-1
the Roller Path Insufficient Lubricant . . . . . . . C-120, Fig. C-80,
Classification of Fatigue . . . . . . . C-80, Fig. C-8, Fig. C-81. Fig. C-82
Fig. C-9, Fig. C-30, Fig. 31, Localized Widening of the Ball Path . . . . . . C-8,
Fig. C-49, Fig. C-50, Fig. C-52, Fig. C-3
Fig. C-53, Fig. C-54 Loose Shaft and Housing Fits . . . . . . . . . . C-24,
Combined Radial and Thrust Loads . . . . . C-92, Fig. C-16
Fig. C-67, Fig. C-68 Lubricant Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-107, C-115
Contamination . . . . . . . . . C-50, C-52, Fig. C-25, Lubricant Condition Analysis of . . C-117, C-118
Fig. C-26 Grease Lubricated Bearings
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . C-60, Fig. C-25, Fig. C-26 Lubricant Condition Analysis of . . . . . . . . C-116,
Corrosion Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . C-64, Fig. C-37, Oil Lubricated Bearings C-118
Fig. C-38, Fig. C-39, Lubricant Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-109
Fig. C-40 Maximum Capacity Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-89
Deflecting Mounting Surfaces . C-34, Fig. C-16 Metal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
Defects on Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . C-39 Metal Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49, Fig. C-24
Deterioration of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-123 Misalignment of Shaft or Housing . . . . . . . C-26,
Displaced Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Assemblies Fig. C-17
Effect of Lubricant on False Brinelling . . . C-74, Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36d, Fig. 7-16
Fig. C-45 Noise and Vibration Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . C-127
Electric Arcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-94 Noises Caused by Bearing Defects . . . . . . C-132
Excessive Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-125 Noises Caused by the Applications . . . . . . C-134
False Brinelling . . . . . 7-25c(1), C-68, Fig. 7-12, Nonmetallic Inclusion . . . . . . . . C-80a, Fig. C-49
Fig. C-41, Fig. C-42 Nonuniform Roller Path C-13, Fig. C-8, Fig. C-9
Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . B-40, B-41, C-77, Fig. C-46 Normal Fatigue Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-79
Index-11
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

F (Cont) F (Cont)
Failure Analysis: (Cont) Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40, B-41, C-77, Fig. C-46
Off-Square Ball Bearing Rings . . C-28, Fig. C-1, Fatigue of Bearing Materials:
Fig. C-2, Description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ab
Fig. C-18 Fatigue Life of Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
Off-Square Roller Bearing Rings . . . . . . . . C-31, Fatigue, Type of:
Fig. C-8 Peeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25s, Fig. 7-11
Oscillating Ball Path . . . . C-7, Fig. C-1, Fig. C-2 Federal Standard, FED-STD-209 . . . . . . . . . . . B-213
Out of Line Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27 Feel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
Out-of-Round Shaft/Housing . . . C-36, Fig. C-4, Fiber-lined Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Assemblies Fig. C-5 Fillet:
Peeling . . . . . . . . . . . . C-80d, Fig. 7-29, Fig. C-53 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35d
Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-99, Fig. C-52 Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Plastic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-81 Filling Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11, Fig. 2-4
Plastic Flow Due to Loading . . . C-82, Fig. C-55 Filter Change Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Plastic Flow Due to Temperature . . . . . . . . C-83, Filtration:
Fig. C-56 Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
Point Surface Origin . . . . . . . . C-80c, Fig. C-50, Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Fig. C-51, Fig. C-52 Hot Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-103 Lubricating Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Procedure for Damage Analysis . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3, Fig. 15-2
Radial Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-87 Solvent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49, 5-50, 5-52, 15-46
Radial Load . . . . . . . . C-84, Fig. C-57, Fig. C-58, Final Cleaning Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-233
Fig. C-59, Fig. C-60 Fingerprint Neutralizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Retainer Wear Pattern Analysis . . . . . . . . . C-15, Finish (see Surface Finish)
Fig. C-10, Fig. C-11 Finishing Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25h, Fig. 7-14
Rolling Bearing Noise and Vibration . . . . . C-131 Fits:
Rotary Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205, C-130 Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-185
Self-Aligning Bearings . . . . . . . . C-90, Fig. C-65 Group B, Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-185
Sequential Steps in Noise Analysis . . . . . . C-137 Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-215, 14-217,
Shaft Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32 B-134, B-136
Solid Particle Contamination . C-52, Fig. C-27, Loose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-135
Fig. C-28, Fig. C-29, Mounting . . . . . . . . 12-25b, B-126, 8-128, B-131
Fig. C-30, Fig. C-31 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-185, B-188
Sources of Noise and Vibration . . . . . . . . . C-129 Shaft and Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-123, B-185
Subcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-80e Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-129
Tapered Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-125
Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-86 Thrust Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-188
Tight Shaft and Housing . . . . . . . C-22, Fig. C-6, Flaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25g
Mounting Fits Fig. C-7, Fig. C-14, Flanged Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . C-91, Fig. C-66
Fig. C-15 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Transverse Cracking . . . . . . . . C-80f, Fig. C-54 Fluid Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-59, Fig. C-60
Unauthorized Mixing of Lubricants . . . . . . C-126 Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Unevenly Wide Ball Path . . . . . . . C-10, Fig. C-4, Flushness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Fig. C-5 Fluting (Electrical Arcing) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25i, C-97,
Water in the Lubricant . . . . . . . C-63, Fig. C-35, Fig. 7-15, Fig. C-69
Fig. C-36 Forces and Motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
Wide Ball Path . . . . . . . C-11, Fig. C-6, Fig. C-7 Formulation of Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
False Brinelling (Fretting Corrosion) . . . . . 7-25c(1), Fractured Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, Fig. 2-5
C-68, Fig. 7-12,
Fig. C-41, Fig. C-42
Index-12
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

F (Cont) G (Cont)
Fractures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25j Gaging: (Cont)
Frequency of Bearing Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-133 Reference Side Runout With O. D . . . . . . . 8-114
Freezing, Bearing Removal by . . . . . . . . . . 3-30b(3) Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Fretting Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25k, C-71, Surface Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
Fig. 7-16, Fig. C-52 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Friction: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-55 Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Coefficient of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-59 Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58 Width Measuring . . . . . . . 8-51, 8-52, Fig. 8-11b,
Rolling . . . . . . . . 2-4, B-56, Fig. B-13, Fig. B-14 Fig. 3-13b, Fig. 8-36
Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, B-57 Width Variation, Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Frosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25l, Fig. 7-17 Gaging Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35, Tbl 8-5
Functional Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26, Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-5
(see Active Surfaces) 7-31 Gaging Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7, 8-34
Description of Defects on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 Axial Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67, Fig. 8-17
Location of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Bali Bearings, for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156
Function of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86 Flushness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69, Fig. 8-18
Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40, 8-44, Fig. 8-11
G Linear Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82, Fig. 8-32
Loose Needle Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-165
Gage Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15, Tbl 8-1, Tbl 8-2 Needle Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-158
Gaging: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37j Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48, Fig. 8-13a
Airframe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Radial Clearance . . . . 8-61, Fig. 8-24, Fig. B-42
Axial Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56, 8-67, Fig. 8-16, Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156
Fig B-38 Roundness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74, Fig. 8-21a
Bearing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38 Surface Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85, Fig. 8-27
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Gaging Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29, 8-32
Concentricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80 Gaging Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Contact Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73 Gaging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 14-149, 18-1 Galling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25m, Fig. 7-18
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23, Tbl 8-3 Gas Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95
Flushness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72 Gaussmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14f, 14-71
Groove Runout with Reference . . . . . . . . . 8-118 Geometric Stress Concentration . . . . . . . . . . C-80b,
Side Ring Fig. C-8,
Inner Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 thru 8-43, Fig. C-47,
Fig. 8-11 a, Fig. 8-12, Fig. C-48
Tbl 8-6 Gimbal Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1
Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-150 Gloves, hand . . . 5-59, 6-9, 7-9, 10-20, 11-11, 15-29
Internal Radial Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 Granulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-98
Loads for Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Grease: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Optical Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121 Advantages of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97
Outer Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50, Fig. 8-13a Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
Parallelism of Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13, 13-58
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82 Formulation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-102
Ring, Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52 Guns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
Radial Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61, Fig. 8-16 Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-101
Radial Runout, Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104 Properties of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104
Reference Side Runout With Bore, Ring . 8-118
Index-13
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

G (Cont) G (Cont)
Grinding: Group D Bearings (Rotating Electrical) (Cont)
Bearing Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 Visual Inspection Criteria for . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 7-4
Burns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-105, Fig. C-75 Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36f
Outer Diameters for Adhesive Bonding . . . 6-56 Group E Bearings (Helicopter) . . . . . . . . 6-41, 7-37,
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37g Tbl 7-2
Rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37c Airframe and Control Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Group A Bearings (Powerplant) . . . . 6-27 thru 6-32, Drive Shaft Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
7-33, B-31, Tbl 7-2 Gearbox Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Defective Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34b Main and Tail Rotor Stack Bearings . . . . . 7-39,
Frosted Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33a Fig. 7-46
Full Thrust, Split Roller Blade Bearings . 6-32a, Matched Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Fig. 6-2, Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Fig. 6-3 Nonseparable Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Inner and Outer Bearing Rings . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Oscillating Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38, Fig. 7-42
Nonseparabe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Separable Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Preload Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32b Visual Inspection Criteria for . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 7-3
Propeller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32, 7-33d Grouping of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93, 6-26
Propeller Stack Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 6-32, 7-33d Gyro Rotor Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Rolling Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 H
Separable Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33c
Visual Inspection Criteria for . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 7-2 Hand Cream, Antiperspirant . . . . . . 4-5b, 6-9, 11-12
Group B Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 thru 6-38, Hand Feel Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
(Airframe and Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34, B-31 Handling, Bearing:
Cadmium Plated Surfaces, Rework of . . . 6-34, Expired or Suspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Fig. 6-4, Preservation/Lubrication RFI
Fig 6-5 Kit Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26, 4-44
Control Pulleys, Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38 Rejected New Non-RFI Supply Custody . . 4-42
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34b, 7-34c(2) RFI (New) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Cracks . . . . . . . . . . 7-34c(1), Fig. 7-66, Fig. 7-67 Surveyed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
External Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34c(3) Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
General Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . 7-34a Handling Bearings, Physical . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57, 6-8,
Internal Bearing Surfaces, Rework of . . . . . 6-36 10-8, 11-12
Internal Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34c(4) Hardness of Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 9-2
Needle Bearings . . . 7-34b, Fig. 7-44, Fig. 7-45 Hardness Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32, Tbl 9-2
Spherical Bearings (Metal-to-Metal) . . . . . 7-34c Hardness Values vs. Tensile Strength . . . . . . Tbl 9-2
Spherical Bearings (Self-Lubricating) . . . . 7-34d Hazardous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Tapered Roller Bearings, Rework of . . . . . . 6-37 Healing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, Fig. 7-19
Unplated External Surfaces, Rework of . . 6-35, Heat:
Fig. 6-11, Fig. 6-7 Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62d
Visual Inspection Criteria for . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 7-3 Expansion Mounting . . . . . . . . 12-67, Fig. 12-24
Group C Bearings (See Instrument Bearings) Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Group D Bearings (Rotating Electrical) . . . . . . 6-40, Sealing Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27, 11-31
7-36, B-31 Heat Discoloration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25o
Fretting Corrosion . . 7-36d, Fig. 7-16, Fig. 7-42 Heat Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Heat Discoloration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36e, Tbl 7-1 Helicopter Bearings Gaging of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36b Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36g Installation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36c
Retainer Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36a
Index-14
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

H (Cont) I (Cont)
Helicopter Bearings Gaging of (Cont) Induction and Prescreening (Cont)
Lubrication of Oscillating Bearings . . . . . 10-49, Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
13-68 Refurbished Bearings . . . 4-21, 4-24, 4-26, 4-32
Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Quality Assurance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
HEPA Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4, 15-38, 15-39 Questionable New RFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
High Temperature Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18 Sampling Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41, Tbl 4-1
Horizontal Laminar Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-211 Sources of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
(Clean Room Air) Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Housing: Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 4-30
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-185 Induction Melt Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Bearing Retention in . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74, 12-79, Inner Ring:
12-80, 12-85, 12-94 Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-170, B-171
Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-123, B-166, B-185, B-188 Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-170
Inspection of Bearing Seats in . . . . . . . . . 12-103 Stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171
Installation of Bearing in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36 In-Place Bearing Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Material, Rolling/Spinning of . . B-201, Fig. B-48 Inspect-Repair As Necessary (IRAN) . . . . . . . . 1-74
Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 Inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Oversize Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-146 Active Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Preparation of Bearing Seats in . . 12-20, 12-34 After Bearing Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-104
Removal of Housing Mounted Bearings . . . 3-22 Clean Room Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54
Selection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-166 Group A Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34, Tbl 7-2
Thrust Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-188 Group B Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35, Tbl 7-3
Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . 7-5b, 11-6, 15-33, B-217 Group C Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36, 14-40
Hydrodynamic Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89 Group D Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37, Tbl 7-4
Hydrostatic Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93 Group E Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38, Tbl 7-5
In-Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
I Magnification Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Identification: New Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Bearing (See Coding) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-9, 6-58 Nonactive Surfaces . . . . . 7-29, Tbl 7-2, Tbl 7-3
Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . C-78, Fig. C-47, Fig. C-48 Nondestructive (see Nondestructive) . . . . . 9-12
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-135 Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41 Retainers . . . 7-27, 7-28, Fig. 7-50 thru Fig. 7-57
Tags for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Seals and Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30, Fig. 7-43
Imbalance and Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205 Special . . . . . . 1-67, 7-31, 7-32, Tbl 7-2, Tbl 7-3
Improper Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-106 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . 7-13, 13-31, 14-102,
Improper Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-124 Tbl 7-2, Tbl 7-3
Improperly Designed Housing Assemblies . . . . C-38 Inspection and Gaging Room . . . . B-235, Fig. B-60
Inclusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25p, C-104, Fig. 7-20 Inspection. Dimensional (See Gaging) . . . . . . . . 8-1
Fig. C-72, Fig. C-73, Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Fig. C-74 Installation of Bearings:
Indentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25q, 9-32, Fig. 7-21 Adhesive Bonding . . . . . . . . . 12-94 thru 12-102,
Indeterminate Load Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-174 Fig. 12-40, Tbl 12-5
Induction and Prescreening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Airframe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
Computerized Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Bolted Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79, Fig. 12-28
Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Depreservation Prior to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Forms and Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Disposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-109
Functions of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Do’s and Don’ts of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-113
Inspection Requirements . . . . . 4-38, 4-39, 4-40 Duplex Bearings . 12-58, Fig. 12-22, Fig. 12-23
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42, 4-44, 4-46 Elliptical Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59, C-20
Index-15
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

I (Cont) I (Cont)
Installation of Bearings: (Cont) Installed Bearings: (Cont)
Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 Proof Tests of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 12-2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 thru 12-5 Protection in Uncompleted Assemblies . 12-111
Handling Procedures at Time of . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Instrument Bearings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Heating the Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-64 Alignment of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-213
Heating the Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-66 Angular-Contact . . . . 14-27, 14-52, Fig. 14-10,
Heating Methods . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67 thru 12-73, Fig. 14-12
Fig. 12-24 thru Fig. 12-26 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Housing Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34, 12-50, Arbor Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-59
Fig. 3-7, Fig. 3-8, Fig. 12-17 Classification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
thru Fig. 12-21, Fig. 12-23 Cleaning Equipment for . . . . . . . . . 14-79, 14-82,
Housing Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 14-83, Fig. 14-18,
Instrument Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-205 Fig. 14-19
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16, 12-18 Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-76
Lubrication Prior to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76 Cleaning Methods for . . . . 14-73, 14-87, 14-91,
Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54 Fig. 14-18
Outer Ring Groove (V-Groove) . . . . . . . . 12-91, Corner Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-210
Fig. 12-34 thru Deep-Groove Bearings . . . . . . . . . 14-51, 14-56,
Fig. 12-39, Fig. 14-10, Fig. 14-15
Tbl 12-2 thru Demagnetization of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-69
Tbl 12-4 Dimensional Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-116
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36, Fig. 12-12 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9, B-208
thru 12-15 Finishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-211, Tbl 14-10 thru
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-111 Tbl 14-12, Tbl B-26
Replacement Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 thru Tbl B-30
Roller-Swaged Housing . . . . . 12-85, Fig. 12-32 Gaging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-128
Roller-Swaged Sleeve . . . . . . 12-89, Fig. 12-33 Gaging of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-130, 14-151
Self-Aligning Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 Gaging Methods . . . . . . . . . 14-131 thru 14-137,
Shaft Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22, 12-43, 12-61 Tbl 14-5
Fig. 12-1 thru Fig. 12-16, Gaussmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-72
Fig. B-35 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 thru 14-6
Shaft Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 Geometry and Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-212
Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74, 12-80, Fig. 12-29 Requirements for
thru Fig. 12-32, Tbl 12-1 Gimbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26, Fig. 14-4
Surface Preparation . . . . . . . . 12-20 thru 12-35, Grease Lubrication . . . . . . . . 14-175 thru 14-184
Fig. 12-1 thru Fig. 12-11 Gyro Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-224, Fig. 14-33
Tapered Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 Gyro Spin Axis . . . . . 14-30, Fig. 14-5, Fig. 14-6
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61 Housing-Mounted . . . . . . . . . . 14-55, Fig. 14-14
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-77, 12-103, Fig. 12-27, Bearings
Fig. 12-41, Fig. 12-42 Tbl 12-1, Induction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
Tbl 12-4, Tbl 12-5 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-116
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-82, 12-83 Installation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-116
Thrust Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 Internal Radial Clearance . . . . . 14-124, 14-137,
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 B-134, B-135, Fig. 14-2,
Installed Bearings: Tbl 14-2 thru Tbl 14-4
Cleaning of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45 Lubricant, Certification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-185
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Lubrication of . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-158 thru 14-185,
Lubrication of . . . . . . . . 13-55, 13-62 thru 13-66 Fig. 14-27, Fig. 14-28
Maintenance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Magneto Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-35, Fig. 2-9
Index-16
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

I (Cont) I (Cont)
Instrument Bearings: (Cont) Instrument Bearings: (Cont)
Miniature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36, B-191, Fig. 14-7 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-126, 14-127, 14-138
Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214 thru 14-221, thru 14-158, Fig. 14-22
Fig. 14-31, Fig. 14-32, thru Fig. 14-26, Tbl 14-6
Tbl 14-10 thru Tbl 14-12 thru Tbl 14-8
Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191, B-241 Types of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22, 14-105,
Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-209 Fig. 14-1 thru Fig. 14-3
New Bearing Inspection . . . . . . 14-39, Fig. 14-9, Ultrasonic Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-83
Tbl 14-1, Tbl 14-2 Vacuum Impregnation Retainer . . . . . . . . 14-172
Oil Lubrication of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-163, 14-174 Vapor Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-86
Operating Characteristics . . . . . 14-110, 14-113 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-102
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-67, 14-192, 14-195 Instruments:
Packing of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-67 Disassembly of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-44
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Induction of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
Pivot Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 14-34, 14-58, 14-99, Insufficient Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . C-120, Fig. C-80,
14-225, Fig. 14-3, Fig. C-81, Fig. C-82
Fig. 14-17, Fig. 14-34 Interchangability, Bearing (Policies) . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16, 14-18 Interference Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-134, B-136
Preliminary Examination of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-62 Intermediate Inspection Room . . . B-230, Fig. B-59
Preservation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-186, 14-188, Internal Bearing Surfaces:
14-190, 14-191 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36, 14-100, 14-222
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-65 Internal Clearance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53, B-134
Radial Play Measurement of . . . . . . . . . . . 14-186 Ball Bearings . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-39, Tbl B-40
Radial Retainter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24, Fig. 14-1 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-135
Removal Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-50 Roller Bearings . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-39, Tbl B-40
Removal of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-47, 14-67 Intimate Wrapping of Bearings . . . . . . . 11-16, 11-27
Removal Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-49 IRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Removal Tools for . . . . . . . . . . 14-51 thru 14-59, Iron-Silicone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Fig. 14-10 thru Fig. 14-17
Rework Procedures for . . . . . . . 14-100, 14-222 J
Rotor Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45, 14-95
Rotor Shaft Cones (Inner Ring) . . . . . . . . 14-57, Janitorial Service in Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . 16-60
Fig. 14-16
Screening and Segregation of . . . . . . . . . . 14-60
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37, 14-123, Fig. 14-8,
L
Tbl B-44, Tbl B-45
Land Riding Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Selection of Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-184
Lap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25r, Fig. 7-22
Semi-precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21, Tbl B-28
Lapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37h
Small Bore Radial Bearings . 14-54, Fig. 14-13
Layout and Equipment B-223, Fig. B-57, Fig. B-58
Solvent Prefiltration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-78
Level II Rework Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Special Requirement for . . . . . . . 14-91, 14-121
Levels of Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Special Rework of . . . . . . . . . 14-222 thru 14-229
Depot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 13-29, 13-49, 15-6
Spin Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30
Intermediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-49
Surface Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-122
Organizational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-53
Tolerance Requirements . . . . . . 14-120, 14-121,
Light Alloy Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34
Tbl B-26, Tbl B-27,
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-214
Tbl B-28
Index-17
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

L (Cont) L (Cont)
Life, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42, B-43, B-44 Lubricant: (Cont)
Limited Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104, B-111
Linear Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82 Selection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61, B-96
Load: Silicone Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-169, B-174 Solid Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-64 Specification, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-99
Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50a, B-50 Squeeze-Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
Rotating Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-170 Synthetic Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107
Rotating Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-172 Lubrication:
Stationary Inner Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171 Accessory Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Stationary Outer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-173 Airframe/Aircraft Control . . . . 10-38 thru 10-41,
Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-49 13-62, Fig. 10-10
Localized Widening of the Ball Path . . C-8, Fig. C-3 Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B 91
Loose Balls and Rollers . . . . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-34 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83 thru 10-85
thru Tbl B-38 Dry film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Loose Shaft and Housing Fits . . . . . C-24, Fig. C-16 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13, 10-66, 18-1,
LOX, Compatible: Fig. 10-3 thru 10-8
Cleaning Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Excessive . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17, 10-29, Fig. 10-7
Packaging Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Lubricant: Final Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-112 Fingerprint Neutralizing . . . . . . . 10-11, Fig. 10-1
Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97, B-98 Function of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-107 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 thru 10-4, B-84
Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B 91 Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 thru 10-32, 10-83,
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-99 13-65, B-101,
Condition Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . C-115, C-116, B-102, Fig. 10-9
C-117, C-118, Grease Guns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58, 13-72
Contaminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20, 13-72c
Controls on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6, 10-83 Handling . . . . . 10-8, 10-12, Fig. 10-1, Fig. 10-2
Dry Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-113 Helicopter Bearings . . 10-48 thru 10-52, 13-63
Excessive . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17, 10-29, Fig. 10-7 Hydrodynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89
Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-58 Hydrostatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-86 Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42, 14-158
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-95 Mechanism of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-97, B-101, B-102 Methods of . . . . . . . . 10-16, Fig. 10-7, Fig. 10-8
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8, 10-12 Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68
Hydrodynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-89 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21, 10-33, 10-64, 11-61,
Hydrostatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-93 14-163, B-105, B-106, B-107,
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-109 Oil-impregnated Bearings . . . 2-59, 5-41, 10-53
Infrared Analysis of . . . . . . . . . C-110, Fig. C-77, thru 10-61,
Fig. C-78, Tbl C-1 Fig. 2-59,
Insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Fig. 10-11
Methods of Dispensing . . . 10-14, 10-15, 10-17 Permanently Installed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Military Specifications . . . . . . . . . B-100, B-120, Postinstallation . . . . . . . . . . 13-13, 13-15, 13-55
Tbl B-10, Tbl B-11, Powerpiant Bearings . . . . . . . . 10-33 thru 10-37
Tbl B-12, Tbl B-13 Preinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98 Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 thru 10-81,
Petroleum Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106 11-24, Fig. 10-11
Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88 thru 10-13
Index-18
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

L (Cont) M (Cont)
Lubrication: (Cont) Maintenance of Installed Bearings: (Cont)
Principles of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88, Fig. B-28 Spherical Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Temporary Protection Procedures . . . . . . . . 13-6
Rod End Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39, 13-69 Major Overhaul Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Rotating Electrical Bearings . . 10-44 thru 10-47 Manual Changes Proposed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Shielded/Sealed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 Marking and Coding of Used Bearings . . 6-58, 6-59
Solid Film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94 Marking of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Storage Life Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67, 11-56 Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Uninstalled Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Processing Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Rework Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
M Martensite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28, B-29
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
M-50 (See Tool Steels) Clean Packaging Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Machining Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-131 Clean Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17, 15-49
Magnetic Particle Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-75, 17-1, Tbl 5-1
Magnetism, Checking for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Control of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48, Tbl 5-2
Magnetism, Removing . . . . . . 5-19 thru 5-22, 14-87 Janitorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-62
Magneto Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Lubricating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21, 10-25
Magnification, use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15, Tbl 11-1
Maintenance of Clean Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50 Preserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82, 17-1
Maintenance of Installed Bearings: Material and Hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Material Engineering Responsibilities:
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22, 13-45, Fig. 13-3 Cleaning Solvents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19, 13-20 Material Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40
Control Cable System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33 Maximum Capacity Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-89
Defective Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35, 13-36 Measurement (see Gaging):
Depot Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29, 13-47 Methods of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 14-131
Enclosed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Sources of Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Engine Control Linkages, Inspection . . . . 13-34 Mechanical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
Exposed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Hand Feel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
Fabric-Lined Bearings . 13-11, 13-42, Fig. 13-5 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 thru 13-3 Vibration and Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130
Grease Guns and Adapters . . . 13-58, Fig. 13-4 Mechanism of Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-103
thru Fig. 13-8 Median Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26, 13-32, 13-34 Metal Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-103
Intermediate Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-49 Metal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-47
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55, 13-58, 13-61, Metal Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-141, B-146
13-65, Fig. 13-8 Metal Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-49, Fig. C-24
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17, 13-24 Microscopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 18-1
Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Microstructure, Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 2-70
Organizational Level . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30, 13-53 Military Specifications:
Precautions to Follow During . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . B-100, B-120, Tbl B-10,
Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Tbl B-11, Tbl B-12, Tbl B-13
Procedures, Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31 Miniature Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36, B-191
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 thru 13-21, Minimum Dimensional Inspection . . . . 8-32, Tbl 8-4
Fig. 13-1, Fig. 13-2 Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4
Pulley Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38 Dimensionally Reworked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4
Removal and Disposition . . . . . . . . . . 1-61, 13-73 Gas Turbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4
Rod End Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37 Helicopter Dynamic Component . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4
Index-19
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

M (Cont) M (Cont)
Minimum Dimensional Inspection (Cont) Mounting Surfaces (Cont)
Matched Ball Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4 Preparation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Matched Roller Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4 Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Rotating Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4 Shaft Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Spherical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 8-4 Multiple Groove Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37d
Misalignment: Multistacked Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Cause of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48, 12-58e
Housing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . C-26, Fig. C-17 N
Oscillating Ball Path . . . . C-7, Fig. C-1, Fig. C-2
Raceway Indications of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Shaft Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . C-26, Fig. C-17 NADEP NORIS Refurbishment . . . . . . . D-3, D-4, D-6,
Mounting: (See Installation) Tbls D-1 thru D-7
Airframe Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53 National American Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-182
Axial Adjustment During . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81 Institute Specifications for
Balanced Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42 Mounting Ball and Roller Bearings
Ball Thrust Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57, B-182 National Stock Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49, 2-76
Depreservation Prior to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-58, B-83 Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Elliptical Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59 Gaging Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156, B-165
Fitts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-126, B-128, B-131, Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34b, Tbl 7-3
B-175, B-180 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Housing-Mounted . . . . . . . 12-50, 14-217, B-122 Needle Roller Gaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-156
Housing-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50 New Bearings, Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-205 Nickel Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142
Mounting, Bearing, Preparation of . . . . . . 12-20 Noise Analysis of Rotating Bearings . . . . . . . . 8-130
Needle Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54 Noise and Vibration Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-127
Preparation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 Noises Caused by the Application . . . . . . . . . . C-134
Rod End Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56 Noises Caused by Bearing Defects . . . . . . . . . C-132
Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-182 Nonactive Surfaces, Inspection of . . . 7-29, Tbl 7-2
Sealed/Shielded Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39 Nondestructive Testing:
Self-Aligning Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52 Certification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Shaft-Mounted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43 Electromagnetic (Eddy Current) 9-28 thru 9-31,
Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22, 14-216, Fig. 9-6
Specifications for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-182 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Stack/Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . 12-41, 12-87 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tapered Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40 Fluorescent Penetrant . . . . . . . . . 9-23 thru 9-27,
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55 Fig. 9-5
Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Angular-Contact Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 Hardness . . . . . 9-32 thru 9-38, Fig. 9-7, Tbl 9-2
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-214 Inspection by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 thru 9-38,
Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-215, 14-217b Fig. 9-1 thru 9-7, Tbl 9-1
Miniature Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36 Magnetic Particle . . . . . . . . 5-19, 9-15 thru 9-22,
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-175, B-180 Fig. 9-2 thru 9-4, Tbl 9-1
Precision Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18 Nonmetallic Inclusion . . . . . . . . . . . C-80a, Fig. C-49
Theoretical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-180 Non-RFI Bearings (New):
Mounting Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191 Handling of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191, B-241 Questionable Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Miniature Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-191 Nonseparable Bearings, Rework of . . . 6-31, 6-32b,
Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 6-44, 6-54
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
Index-20
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

N (Cont) P
Nonuniform Roller Path . . . . C-13, Fig. C-8, Fig. C-9 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Normal and Theoretical Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-180 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Normal Fatigue Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-79 Local Packaging . . . . . . . 11-32, 11-45, Fig. 11-3
Normal Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-175 Local Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
Marking and Identification . . . . 11-41 thru 11-50,
O Fig. 11-4
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 thru 11-23
Off-Square Ball Bearing Rings C-28, Fig. C-1, Fig. Methods of Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
C-2, Fig. C-18 Oxygen Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Off-Square Roller Bearing Rings . . . C-31, Fig. C-8 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-192, 14-195
Oils: Supply Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-98 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35, 11-40
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-105 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79, 2-82
Petroleum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106 Particle Counters (Air Borne) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
Properties of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111 Peeling . . . . . . . . 7-25s, C-80d, Fig. 7-11, Fig. C-53
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107 Permanent Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50a, B-51
Oil-Impregnated Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Permanently Installed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Cleaning of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41, 10-56 Personnel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Relubrication of . . . . . . . . . . 10-53, 10-54, 10-59 Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Testing of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Oil Lubrication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Hygiene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Filtration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Induction and Prescreening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Storage Limitation on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6, 8-6
Operating Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64, 6-65, 6-66, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Organization Level Maintenance . . . . . . 1-10, 13-49 Instrument Bearing processing . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Oscillating Ball Path (see Misalignment) . . . . . . C-7, Preservation and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Fig. C-1, Qualification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Fig. C-2 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Oscillating Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Outer Ring: Technical Requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-172, B-173 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-172 Petroleum Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-106
Stationary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-173 Phenolic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Out-of-Line Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-27 Pitting . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25t, C-99, Fig. 7-23, Fig. C-52
Out-of-Round Shaft/Housing Assemblies . . . . C-36, Pivot Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34, 14-58
Fig. C-4, Plain Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52, 13-39, Fig. 2-56
Fig. C-5 Plastic:
Ovens: Air Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Temporary Protection of Bearings . . . . . . . 7-10, Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Fig. 7-2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Overage Ready-for-Issue (RFI) Material . . . . . 1-75 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 11-1 thru Tbl 11-3
Overhaul Policies: Packaging film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72 Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Major . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69 Plastic Flow . . . . . . . . . C-81, C-82, C-83, Fig. C-55,
Oversize Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138 Fig. C-56
Oversize Housing Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-146 Plating:
Oxygen System Bearings, Cleaning of . . . . . . 5-40, Brush, Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142
5-46
Index-21
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

P (Cont) P (Cont)
Plating: (Cont) Preadjusted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
Cadmium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Precision Brush Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142
Chromium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Precision, Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26a
Defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25b, 7-28, Fig. 7-11 Precision Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37g
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57 Precision Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21, B-1
Inspection of . . . . . . . . 7-25g, 7-25s(1), Fig. 7-11 Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-78, B-81, B-82, B-83
Nickel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
Precision Brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Spring Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-82
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Prescreening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Silver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-142 Preservation (See Lubrication)
Staining of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34a Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-149 In-house . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11, 11-27, 11-45
Point Surface Origin . . . . . . . . Fig. C-30, Fig. C-51, Method 1A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11-1
Fig. C-52 Method 1A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11-1
Policies, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40 Method 1A-8 . . . . . . . . . . 11-26, 11-27, Fig. 11-1,
Bearing Processing Responsibility . . . . . . . 1-43 Fig. 11-2
Bearing Procurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Method 1A-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11-1
Bearing Refurbishment Responsibility . . . . 1-47 Method 1A-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11-1
Bearing Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68 Method 1A-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11-1
Certification of Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45 Method II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Clean Room Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Methods of . . . . . . . . 11-24 thru 11-34, Fig. 11-1
Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Removal of Coating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Disposition of Surveyed/Defective Bearings 1-61 Preservation, Lubrication and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-238
Engineering Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 Packaging Room
Group/Classification of Bearings . . . . . . . . 14-14 Pressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Limited Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72 Pressure-fed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Major Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69 Preventive Maintenance (see Maintenance)
Overage RFI Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 Principles of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-88
Processing Requirement for . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Procedure for Damage Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Depot Level Activities Processing:
Receiving Inspection of New Bearings . . . . 1-64 Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58, 1-59
Rework of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2, 6-20, 6-53 Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Rolling and Plain Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Processing of Bearings
Rules for Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Shelf Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Used . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58, 1-59, 1-60, 6-15, 6-16,
Polishing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 6-17, 6-58, 6-59
Facilities for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Procurement of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48, 11-65
Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-121 Profile Measurement
Nonactive Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 thru 6-49 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Powerplant Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
Removal of Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34, 7-34a(3) Proof Tests on Installed Bearings . . . . . . . . . Tbl 12-2
Tapered Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Propeller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32, 7-33d
Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-103 Properties of Bearing Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-104
Powerplant Bearings: Properties of Lubricating Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-111
Classification of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94a Propulsion Bearings . . . . . . . . . . Tbl D-1 thru Tbl D-5
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 Protection:
Installation of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36 During Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Installed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6, 13-17
Index-22
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

P (Cont) R (Cont)
Protection: (Cont) Refurbished Bearings (Cont)
Temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 10 Level III; Regrind of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Puller, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-13, 3-14 Refurbishment History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1, D-2
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12, 3-13, Fig 3-4, Refurbishment Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Fig 3-6 thru Fig. 3-9, Rejected Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Fig. 3-11 thru 3-16 Disposal of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 3-21, 3-19 Rematching Duplex and Stack Bearings . . . . . . 6-57
Pulley Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Removal, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68, 3-3, 3-22
Bonded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Q Cleaning and Protection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Cleaning Prior to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Qualification of Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Disposition After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Quality Assurance Program (QAP) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Do’s and Don’t of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Ball Bearing Inspection Requirements . . . . 4-38 Handling of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Roller Bearing Inspection Requiremnets . . 4-39 Housing Type . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26, 3-28, Fig. 3-22,
Quality Characteristics List (QCL) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Fig. 3-24
Policies Concerning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Precautions and Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-61
R Preparation for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Procedure, Selection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Races, Bearing (see Rings)
Segregation and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Radial Bearings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, B-68 Fig. 2-2
Shaft Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24, 3-26, 3-28,
Angular-Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-69
Fig. 3-18, Fig. 3-20
Axial Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Axial Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-81
Staked-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8, Fig. 2-2
Tooling for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-21, 18-1
Ball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-87
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30, Fig. 3-23
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-52
Removal, Heavy Grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Clearances, Measurement of . . . . . . . 8-64, 8-71
Removal, Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138, B-140
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-48a, B-49a, Fig. B-9a
Requirements:
Preadjusted Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-83
Acidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Preloading . . . . . . . . . . . B-78, B-82, B-83, B-180
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Dexterity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Tolerances . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18 thru Tbl B-22
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Radial Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-84, Fig. C-57,
Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Fig. C-58, Fig. C-59,
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Fig. C-60
Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Radius Scribes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Rating Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42
Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
RBEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Receiving Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13, 16-20
Recommended Housing and Shaft Fits . . . . . B-185,
Technical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
B-188,
Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8, 16-9
B-190
Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68, 7-27, Fig. 2-63
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Cracks . . . . . . . . . . 7-28, Fig. 7-36 thru Fig. 7-38
Refurbished Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72d
Engineering Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27, Fig. 7-35 thru
Level I; Processing Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fig. 7-41, Tbl 7-3
Level II; Refurbishment of Bearings . . . . . . . 6-5
Index-23
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

R (Cont) R (Cont)
Retainers (Cont) RFI Bearings (New):
Machined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72c, 7-28c, 7-28d, Handling of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Fig. 7-37 thru Fig. 7-38 Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25 Rings, Bearing
Nonmetallic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28b, Fig. 7-36 Polishing of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28a
Plated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28f, Fig. 7-41 Rockwell Hardness (see Hardness Tests)
Pressed Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72b Rod End Bearings (see Airframe Bearings)
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, Fig. A-1, Fig. A-2,
Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72a, 7-28a (Also See Particular Fig. A-5, Fig. A-13
Riveted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28e, Fig. 7-40 Type of Bearing) thru Fig. A-15,
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72e Fig. A-17 thru Fig. A-20,
Visual Inspection Criteria for . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 7-3 Fig. A-22 thru Fig. A-24,
Wear Pattern Analysis . . . . . . . C-15, Fig. C-10, Fig. A-30, Fig. A-34, Fig. A-35,
Fig. C-11 Fig. A-37 thru Fig. A-39,
Returning Used Bearing to Supply . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 Fig. A-41 thru Fig.A-46,
Technical Control Over Rework Procedures 6-8 Fig. A-48, Fig. A-13 Fig. A-50,
Rework, Authorized Centers for . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55 Fig. A-53 thru Fig. A-55,
Rework, Bearing: Fig. A-58 thru Fig. A-60,
Buffing . . . . . . . . 6-20 thru 6-25, Tbl 6-1, Tbl 6-2 Fig. A-62, A-64
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Cylindrical . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18 thru Tbl B-22
Closures (Seals/Shields) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-190
Demagnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56, Fig. B-13, Fig. B-14
Facilities (Area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Gaging of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
Group A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 6-27 Gaging Practices . . . . . . . . B-156, B-158, B-165
Group B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 6-33 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-190
Group C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26, 6-39 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36, Tbl 7-2
Group D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 6-40 Internal Clearances . B-155, Tbl B-39, Tbl B-40
Group E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6, 6-41 Lubrication of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Handling of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8, 6-9 Noise and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-131
Level I, Processing . . . . . . 6-14, 6-19 thru 6-59, Path Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20, C-13, C-14,
Fig. 6-1 thru Fig. 6-8, Fig. C-8, Fig. C-9
Tbl 6-1, Tbl 6-2 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40, 6-50
Level II, Refurbishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-190
Level III, Regrind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Standard Inch Dimension, Tapered . . . . . . B-190
Level IV, Remanufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62
Minor, in Shop Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Tolerances for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18,
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5, 6-6 Tbl B-20, Tbl B-30,
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 thru 6-25, Tbl B-34 thru Tbl B-38
Fig. 6-1, Tbl 6-1, Visual Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Tbl 6-2 Rolling or Spinning of Housing Material . . . . B-201,
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18, 6-53 Fig. B-50
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Rotary Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-205, C-130
Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Rotating Inner Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-170
Rolling element (Balls and Rollers) . . 6-29, 6-50 Rotating Outer Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-172
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Rotorhead Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl D-6, Tbl D-7
Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Rough Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37c
Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Index-24
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

R (Cont) S (Cont)
Roundness Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81 Shields, Bearing: . . . . . . . 2-79, Fig. 2-68, Fig. 2-70
Routing of Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35, 3-38 Description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Runout: Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Ball Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108 Removal of . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 thru 5-18, Fig. 5-5
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Rust (see Corrosion) Side Clamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-197, Fig. B-46
Silicone Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-109
S Silicone Lubricated Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-97
Silver Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33b(2), B-142
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6, 5-58 Single Row Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-15, 2-21
Salt Water Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25z, Fig. 7-27
Sampling Procedures (see Inspection) . . . . . . 4-27, Sliding Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
4-35, Sliding Friction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-57
Tbl 4-1 Slotted Entry Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55, Fig. 2-57
Scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25v Smearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25aa, Fig. 7-28
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25u, Fig. 7-24 S-Monel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Scuffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25w Snap Rings . . . . . 2-74, B-199, Fig. 2-71, Fig. B-48
Seals, Bearing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 2-69, Fig. 2-70 Solid Film Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-94
Description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Solid Particle Contamination . . . . . C-52, Fig. C-27,
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29, 13-43 Fig. C-28, Fig. C-29,
Removal of . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 thru 5-17, Fig. 5-5 Fig. C-31, Fig. C-30
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 Solvent Distillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Seals, Nonremovable Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Solvent Storage Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Seams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25x, Fig. 7-25 Solvent Spray Booth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14c
Seizure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25y, Fig. 7-26 Solvents (see Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Selecting Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-241 Sources of Noise and Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-129
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-96 Spalling . . 7-25s(2), 7-25ab, Fig. 7-30 thru Fig. 7-33
Selection of Shaft and Housing Fits . . . . . . . . . B-166 Special Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-129
Self-Aligning Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . C-90, Fig. C-65 Special Handling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39, 6-8
Self-Aligning Ball Bearings: . . . . . Fig. 2-6, Fig. 2-7, Special Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Fig. 2-18 Special Rework Procedures . . . . . . . . . 6-53. 14-121
Description of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 2-26 Special Segregation of Critical Bearings . . . . . . 3-37
Failure Analysis of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-90 Specifications . . . 17-1, B-99, Tbl 17-1 thru Tbl 17-4
Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Spherical Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46,
Maintenance of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38 Figs. 2-41 thru 2-46
Self-Lubricated Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60, 2-63 Spherical Uniball Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34c
Separator (see Retainer) Spinning of Housing Material . . . . . B-201, Fig. B-50
Sequential Steps in Noise Analysis . . . . . . . . . C-137 Split Ring Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Services, Clean Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-222 Spray Booths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14c
Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-29 Squeeze-Film Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-90
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48 Stack Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 6-57, Fig. 2-15
Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32 Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33, 7-37
Deflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-32 Packaging of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30 Rematching of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Fits . 12-25, B-123, B-166, B-185, B-188, B-190 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32c
Removal of Shaft-Mounted Bearings . . . . . 3-24 Staining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ac
Selection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-166 Stains, Removal of . . . . . . . . . 6-22c, 6-29b, 7-34a(3)
Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27 Staking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-203, Fig. B-53, Fig. B-54
Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33 Standard Bearing Steels . . . . B-9, B-20, B-21, B-28
Index-25
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

S (Cont) T (Cont)
Standard Depot Level Maintenance (SDLM) . . 1-73 Terminology, Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, A-1, Fig. 2-1
Standard Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-125 Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Standards (ABMA and ANSI) . . . . . . . 2-86, Tbl 2-1 Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Static Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-50 Testing:
Stationary Inner Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-171 Feel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
Stationary Outer Ring Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-172 Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
Steel: Threaded Retainer Ring . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58, Fig. 2-58
AISI 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-21, B-28 Thrust Bearings:
AISI 52100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Ball . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31, 2-49, Fig. 2-20, Fig. 2-21
Case-Hardened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23, B-24 Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-188
Fatigue Life of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19 Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-188
High Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18 Load Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Standard Bearing . . . . . . B-9, B-20, B-21, B-28 Roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49, Fig. 2-47 thru Fig. 2-50
Superalloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22 Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-188
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-21, B-28 Thrust Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-86
Vacuum Melted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Tight Shaft and Housing . . C-22, Fig. C-6, Fig. C-7,
Stick-Out of Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72 Mounting Fits . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. C-14, Fig. C-15
Storage, Bearing: Time Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65, Fig. 6-9
Depot Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54 Tolerances:
Shelf Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56 Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18 thru B-22
Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51 Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83, B-150
Stress: Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-150
Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-61 Cylindrical Roller Bearing . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18
Roller Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-62 thru Tbl B-22
Subcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-80e Established Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-150
Substitution of Bearings, Rules for . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 Instrument Ball Bearing . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-23
Superalloys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22 thru Tbl B-28
Surface Finish (Roughness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89 Loose Balls and Rollers . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-34
Adhesive Bonding, Preparation for . . . . . . . 6-56 thru B-38
Surface Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85 Radial Ball Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87 thru Tbl B-22
Measuring Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90 Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-155, Tbl B-18
Surveyed Bearings, Disposition of . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61 thru Tbl B-22
Synthetic Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-107 Tool Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20, B-21, B-28
Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
T Bearing Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127
Tank Layout (Clean Room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-228 Testing of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
Tank Plating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-149 Torque Tube Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig- 2-52
Tapered Mounting Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-37 Toughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Tapered Roller Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42, Fig. 2-36 Training, Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
thru Fig. 2-40 Buffing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22f
Inner Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. A-12 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Mounting fits for . . . . Tbls B-46, B-47, and B-48 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Instrument Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15, 14-17
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Rework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5b Transverse Cracking . . . . . . . . . . . . C-80f, Fig. C-54
Temporary Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 True Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25c(2), Fig. 7-13
Tumbling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37e
Index-26
NAVAIR 01-1A-503
TM55-1500-322-24/T.O. 44B-1-122

T (Cont) V (Cont)
Turret Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 3-10 Vibration/Noise Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130
Visual Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 thru 7-42
U Vocabulary Peculiar to Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Ultrasonic Cleaning Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14d W

Unauthorized Mixing of Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . C-126
Unbalance (See Imbalance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-138 Water-crash/Fire-damage Bearings . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Undersize Bearings Water in the Lubricant . . C-63, Fig. C-35, Fig. C-36
Undersize Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-140 Waviness, Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
Unevenly Wide Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . C-10, Fig. C-4, Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ad, Fig. 7-34, Fig. 7-35
Fig. C-5 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25ad
Uniball Bearing (See Spherical Uniball) Raceways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 7-18
Used Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60, 6-59, Fig. 6-8 Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Dimensional Inspection for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 Wear Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Process Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Wheel Bearings (See Tapered Roller Bearings)
False Brinelling . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25c(1), Fig. 7-12
V Inspection of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Lubrication of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Vacuum Cleaning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-218 Removal of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Vacuum Melted Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12 Rework of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Vapor Degreasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Wick-oiled Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14, Fig. 5-3, Fig 5-4 Wide Ball Path . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11, Fig. C-6, Fig. C-7
Vapor Rinse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-234 Width Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
V-Block Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28b Windows (Clean Room) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-225
Proof Test of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 12-3, Tbl 12-4 Work Benches and Chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-219
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tbl 12-2
Index-27/(Index-28 blank)

Na 01-1a-503 Antifriction Bearings

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Na 01-1a-503 Antifriction Bearings

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NAVAIR 01-1A-503

ORGANIZATIONAL, INTERMEDIATE AND DEPOT

THIS REVISION INCLUDES IRAC 2.

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C. Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and

Published by Direction of Commander, Naval Air Systems Command

NATEC ELECTRONIC MANUAL

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:

Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . 15 February 2002

Total number of pages in this manual is 580, consisting of the following:

Page # Change Page # Change Page # Change

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 8-1 – 8-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 17-1 – 17-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

# Zero in this column indicates an original page.

Place this notice behind the title page after incorporation.

Section Page Section Page

I INTRODUCTION 1-57. Qualifying Bearings to a Stock

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

2-20. Angular-Contact Ball 2-68. Retainers (Figure 2-63) . . . . . . . 2-20

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

5-18. Nonremovable Types . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5-58. Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

6-44. Nonseparable Bearings . . . . . . . . 6-9 7-22. Cylindrical Roller Bearings . . . . . 7-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

8-20. Handling and Care of 8-63. ABMA Simplified Method for

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

8-99. Ball and Roller Classifying IX NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING/INSPECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

10-10. Final Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10-51. Control Rod, Link and

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

XI PACKAGING, STORING AND DISTRIBUTION 11-52. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

12-41. Stack, Duplex Bearings . . . . . . . 12-5 12-81. Types of Impression

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

13-7. Enclosed Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13-51. Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

14-22. Types of Instrument 14-74. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

14-117. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22 14-173. Cleaning of Porous

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

14-222. Special Rework of 15-45. Control of Solvents, Lubricants

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

16-14. Equipment and Materials . . . . . 16-2 B-35. Manufacturing Methods . . . . . . . B-9

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

B-90. Squeeze-Film Lubrication . . . . B-26 B-134. Effect of Interference Fit

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Page Section Page

B-162. Type NCA (Single Row, B-201. Rolling or Spinning of Housing